I EC
■EC 62368-1
Edition 3.0
2018-10
INTERNATIONAL
STANDARD
NORME
INTERNATIONALE
Audio/video, information and communication technology equipmentPart 1: Safety requirements
白quipements
des technologies de I’audio/video, de ^information et de la
communication Partie 1: Exigences de securite
)ov 5
( ue
co
H-89 s o
CNI
<o
l
liJ
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
colour
inside
A
THIS PUBLICATION IS COPYRIGHT PROTECTED
Copyright ® 2018 IEC, Geneva, Switzerland
All rights reserved. Unless otherwise specified, no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from
either IEC or lEC’s member National Committee in the country of the requester. If you have any questions about IEC
copyright or have an enquiry about obtaining additional rights to this publication, please contact the address below or
your local IEC member National Committee for further information.
Droits de reproduction r6serv6s. Sauf indication contraire, aucune partie de cette publication ne peut §tre reproduite
ni utilisee sous quelque forme que ce soit et par aucun procede, electronique ou mecanique, y compris la photocopie
et les microfilms, sans raccord ecrit de NEC ou du Comite national de NEC du pays du demandeur. Si vous avez des
questions sur le copyright de NEC ou si vous desirez obtenir des droits suppl^mentaires sur cette publication, utilisez
les coordonnees ci-apres ou contactez le Comite national de NEC de votre pays de residence.
IEC Central Office
3, rue de Varembe
CH-1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Tel.: +41 22 919 02 11
info@iec.ch
www.iec.ch
About the IEC
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is the leading global organization that prepares and publishes
International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies.
About IEC publications
The technical content of IEC publications is kept under constant review by the IEC. Please make sure that you have the
latest edition, a corrigenda or an amendment might have been published.
IEC Catalogue - webstore.iec.ch/catalogue
The stand-alone application for consulting the entire
bibliographical information on IEC International Standards,
Technical Specifications， Technical Reports and other
documents. Available for PC, Mac OS, Android Tablets and
iPad.
Electropedia-www.electropedia.org
The world's leading online dictionary of electronic and
electrical terms containing 21 000 terms and definitions in
English and French, with equivalent terms in 16 additional
languages. Also known as the International Electrotechnical
Vocabulary (IEV) online.
IEC publications search - webstore.iec.ch/advsearchform
The advanced search enables to find IEC publications by a
variety of criteria (reference number, text, technical
committee,...). It also gives information on projects, replaced
and withdrawn publications.
IEC Glossary - std.iec.ch/glossary
67 000 electrotechnical terminology entries in English and
French extracted from the Terms and Definitions clause of
IEC publications issued since 2002. Some entries have been
collected from earlier publications of IEC TC 37, 77, 86 and
CISPR.
IEC Just Published - webstore.iec.ch/justpublished
Stay up to date on all new IEC publications. Just Published
details all new publications released. Available online and
also once a month by email.
IEC Customer Service Centre - webstore.iec.ch/csc
If you wish to give us your feedback on this publication or
need further assistance, please contact the Customer Service
Centre: sales@iec.ch.
A propos de I1EC
La Commission Electrotechnique Internationale (IEC) est la premiere organisation mondiale qui elabore et publie des
Normes internationales pour tout ce qui a trait a Telectricite, a Telectronique et aux technologies apparentees.
A propos des publications IEC
Le contenu technique des publications IEC est constamment revu. Veuillez vous assurer que vous possedez Tedition la
plus recente, un corrigendum ou amendement peut avoir ete publie.
Catalogue IEC - webstore.iec.ch/catalogue
Application autonome pour consulter tous les renseignements
bibliographiques
sur
les
Normes
internationales,
Specifications techniques, Rapports techniques et autres
documents de I'lEC. Disponible pour PC, Mac OS, tablettes
Android et iPad.
Recherche de publications IEC webstore.iec.ch/advsearchform
Electropedia-www.electropedia.org
Le premier dictionnaire en ligne de termes electroniques et
^lectriques. II contient 21 000 termes et definitions en anglais
et en frangais, ainsi que les termes equivalents dans 16
langues additionnelles. Egalement appel^ Vocabulaire
Electrotechnique International (IEV) en ligne.
La recherche avanc^e permet de trouver des publications IEC
en utilisant differents criteres (numero de reference, texte,
comite d^tudes,...). Elle donne aussi des informations sur les
projets et les publications remplacees ou retirees.
Glossaire IEC - std.iec.ch/glossary
67 000 entrees terminologiques electrotechniques, en anglais
et en frangais, extraites des articles Termes et Definitions des
publications IEC parues depuis 2002. Plus certaines entrees
anterieures extraites des publications des CE 37, 77f 86 et
CISPR de NEC.
IEC Just Published - webstore.iec.ch/justpublished
Service Clients - webstore.iec.ch/csc
Restez informe sur les nouvelles publications IEC. Just
Published detaille les nouvelles publications parues.
Disponible en ligne et aussi une fois par mois par email.
Si vous desirez nous donner des commentaires sur cette
publication ou si vous avez des questions contactez-nous:
sales@iec.ch.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
I EC
旧C 62368-1
Edition 3.0
2018-10
INTERNATIONAL
STANDARD
NORME
INTERNATIONALE
colour
inside
Audio/video, information and communication technology equipmentPart 1: Safety requirements
白quipements
des technologies de Taudio/video, d e 「 information et de la
communication Partie 1: Exigences de securite
INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSION
COMMISSION
ELECTROTECHNIQUE
INTERNATIONALE
ICS 33.160.01; 35.020
ISBN 978-2-8322-5977-1
Warning! Make sure that you obtained this publication from an authorized distributor.
Attention! Veuillez vous assurer que vous avez obtenu cette publication via un distributeur agree.
® Registered trademark of the International Electrotechnical Commission
Copyright International EteciroiGRUa邮 gc^pgf 的e de la Commission Electrotechnique Internationale
- 2-
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
CONTENTS
FOREWORD................................................................................................................................. 20
INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................23
0
Principles of this product safety standard............................................................................23
0.1
Objective...................................................................................................................... 23
0.2
Persons.........................................................................................................................23
0.2.1
General..................................................................................................................23
0.2.2
Ordinary person.................................................................................................... 23
0.2.3
Instructed person.................................................................................................. 23
0.2.4
Skilled person........................................................................................................23
0.3
Model for pain and injury............................................................................................. 24
0.4
Energy sources.............................................................................................................24
0.5
Safeguards................................................................................................................... 25
0.5.1
General..................................................................................................................25
0.5.2
Equipment safeguard............................................................................................26
0.5.3
Installation safeguard............................................................................................26
0.5.4
Personal safeguard............................................................................................... 26
0.5.5
Behavioural safeguards........................................................................................ 27
0.5.6
Safeguards during ordinary or instructed personservice conditions...................28
0.5.7
Equipment safeguards during skilled person service conditions........................28
0.5.8
Examples of safeguard characteristics................................................................ 28
0.6
Electrically-caused pain or injury(electric shock)....................................................... 29
0.6.1
Models for electrically-caused pain or injury........................................................29
0.6.2
Models for protection against electrically-causedpain or injury..........................30
0.7
Electrically-caused fire .................................................................................................31
0.7.1
Models for electrically-caused fir e ....................................................................... 31
0.7.2
Models for protection against electrically-caused fire ........................................ 31
0.8
Injury caused by hazardous substances..................................................................... 32
0.9
Mechanically-caused injury.......................................................................................... 32
0.10 Thermally-caused injury (skinbum )............................................................................. 33
0.10.1
Models for thermally-caused injury...................................................................... 33
0.10.2
Models for protection against thermally-causedpain or injury.............................34
0.11 Radiation-caused injury................................................................................................35
1
Scope..................................................................................................................................... 36
2
Normative references............................................................................................................ 37
3
Terms, definitions andabbreviated term s.............................................................................44
3.1
Energy source abbreviations...................................................................................... 44
3.2
Other abbreviations..................................................................................................... 45
3.3
Terms and definitions.................................................................................................. 46
3.3.1
Circuit term s.........................................................................................................49
3.3.2
Enclosure terms................................................................................................... 49
3.3.3
Equipment terms.................................................................................................. 50
3.3.4
Flammability terms............................................................................................... 51
3.3.5
Electrical insulation..............................................................................................53
3.3.6
Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................53
3.3.7
Operating and fault conditions............................................................................ 55
3.3.8
Persons.................................................................................................................56
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-3 -
4
3.3.9
Potential ignition sources.................................................................................... 57
3.3.10
Ratings..................................................................................................................57
3.3.11
Safeguards............................................................................................................ 58
3.3.12
Spacings............................................................................................................... 60
3.3.13
Temperature controls...........................................................................................60
3.3.14
Voltages and currents..........................................................................................60
3.3.15
Classes of equipment with respect to protection from electric shock............... 61
3.3.16
Chemical terms.................................................................................................... 62
3.3.17
Batteries............................................................................................................... 62
3.3.18
FIW terms............................................................................................................. 63
3.3.19
Sound exposure................................................................................................... 63
General requirements.......................................................................................................... 64
4.1
General......................................................................................................................... 64
4.1.1
Application of requirements and acceptance of materials, components
and subassemblies..............................................................................................64
4.1.2
Use of components..............................................................................................65
4.1.3
Equipment design and construction....................................................................65
4.1.4
Equipment installation..........................................................................................65
4.1.5
Constructions and components not specifically covered...................................66
4.1.6
Orientation during transport and use.................................................................. 66
4.1.7
Choice of criteria.................................................................................................. 66
4.1.8
Liquids and liquid filled components (LFC).........................................................66
4.1.9
Electrical measuring instruments........................................................................ 67
4.1.10
Temperature measurements................................................................................67
4.1.11
Steady state conditions....................................................................................... 67
4.1.12
Hierarchy of safeguards...................................................................................... 67
4.1.13
Examples mentioned in this document............................................................... 67
4.1.14
Tests on parts or samples separate from the end-product............................... 67
4.1.15
Markings and instructions.................................................................................... 67
4.2
Energy sourceclassifications...................................................................................... 68
4.2.1
Class 1 energy source..........................................................................................68
4.2.2
Class 2 energy source..........................................................................................68
4.2.3
Class 3 energy source..........................................................................................68
4.2.4
Energy source classification by declaration....................................................... 68
4.3
Protection againstenergy sources...............................................................................68
4.3.1
General.................................................................................................................68
4.3.2
Safeguards for protection of an ordinary person................................................68
4.3.3
Safeguards for protection of an instructed person.............................................70
4.3.4
Safeguards for protection of a skilled person.................................................... 71
4.3.5
Safeguards in a restricted access area.............................................................. 72
4.4
Safeguards...................................................................................................................72
4.4.1
Equivalent materials or components.................................................................. 72
4.4.2
Composition of a safeguard.................................................................................72
4.4.3
Safeguard robustness..........................................................................................72
4.4.4
Displacement of a safeguard by an insulating liquid......................................... 74
4.4.5
Safety interlocks.................................................................................................. 75
4.5
Explosion...................................................................................................................... 75
4.5.1
General.................................................................................................................75
4.5.2
Requirements.......................................................................................................75
Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission
-4 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
4.6
Fixing of conductors.................................................................................................... 76
4.6.1
Requirements.......................................................................................................76
4.6.2
Compliance criteria..............................................................................................76
4.7
Equipment for direct insertion into mains socket-outlets.......................................... 76
4.7.1
General.................................................................................................................76
4.7.2
Requirements.......................................................................................................76
4.7.3
Compliance criteria..............................................................................................76
4.8
Equipment containing coin / button cell batteries...................................................... 77
4.8.1
General.................................................................................................................77
4.8.2
Instructional safeguard........................................................................................ 77
4.8.3
Construction.........................................................................................................77
4.8.4
Tests..................................................................................................................... 77
4.8.5
Compliance criteria..............................................................................................78
4.9
Likelihood of fire or shock due to entry of conductive objects..................................79
4.10 Components requirements...........................................................................................79
4.10.1
Disconnect device................................................................................................79
4.10.2
Switches and relays.............................................................................................79
5
Electrically-caused injury.....................................................................................................79
5.1
General......................................................................................................................... 79
5.2
Classification and limits of electrical energy sources................................................80
5.2.1
Electrical energy source classifications.............................................................. 80
5.2.2
Electrical energy source ES1 and ES2 limits..................................................... 80
5.3
Protection against electrical energy sources............................................................. 86
5.3.1
General.................................................................................................................86
5.3.2
Accessibility to electrical energy sources andsafeguards................................. 86
5.4
Insulation materials and requirements........................................................................ 89
5.4.1
General.................................................................................................................89
5.4.2
Clearances........................................................................................................... 94
5.4.3
Creepage distances........................................................................................... 104
5.4.4
Solid insulation...................................................................................................108
5.4.5
Antenna terminal insulation...............................................................................117
5.4.6
Insulation of internal wire asa part of a supplementary safeguard..................117
5.4.7
Tests for semiconductor components and forcemented joints........................ 118
5.4.8
Humidity conditioning.........................................................................................118
5.4.9
Electric strength te s t..........................................................................................119
5.4.10
Safeguards against transientvoltages from external circuits.......................... 122
5.4.11
Separation between externalcircuits and earth................................................. 124
5.4.12
Insulating liquid...................................................................................................125
5.5
Components as safeguards.......................................................................................126
5.5.1
General...............................................................................................................126
5.5.2
Capacitors and RC units.................................................................................... 126
5.5.3
Transformers...................................................................................................... 127
5.5.4
Optocouplers...................................................................................................... 127
5.5.5
Relays.................................................................................................................127
5.5.6
Resistors............................................................................................................ 128
5.5.7
SPDs................................................................................................................... 128
5.5.8
Insulation between the mainsand an external circuit consisting of a
coaxial cable....................................................................................................... 129
5.5.9
Safeguards for socket-outletsin outdoor equipment.........................................129
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-5 -
5.6
Protective conductor................................................................................................. 130
5.6.1
General...............................................................................................................130
5.6.2
Requirements for protective conductors........................................................... 130
5.6.3
Requirements for protective earthing conductors............................................131
5.6.4
Requirements for protective bonding conductors.............................................131
5.6.5
Terminals for protective conductors..................................................................134
5.6.6
Resistance of the protective bonding system .................................................. 135
5.6.7
Reliable connection of a protective earthing conductor................................... 137
5.6.8
Functional earthing............................................................................................ 137
5.7
Prospective touch voltage, touch current and protective conductor current..........137
5.7.1
General...............................................................................................................137
5.7.2
Measuring devices and networks...................................................................... 138
5.7.3
Equipment set-up, supply connections and earth connections.......................138
5.7.4
Unearthed accessible parts............................................................................... 138
5.7.5
Earthed accessible conductive parts.................................................................139
5.7.6
Requirements when touch current exceeds ES2 limits.................................... 139
5.7.7
Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with external
circuits.................................................................................................................139
5.7.8
Summation of touch currents from external circuits.........................................141
5.8
Backfeed safeguard in battery backed up supplies................................................. 143
6
Electrically-caused fire........................................................................................................ 143
6.1
General....................................................................................................................... 143
6.2
Classification of power sources (PS) and potential ignition sources (PIS)............ 143
6.2.1
General...............................................................................................................143
6.2.2
Power source circuit classifications..................................................................144
6.2.3
Classification of potential ignition sources.......................................................147
6.3
Safeguards against fire under normal operating conditions and abnormal
operating conditions..................................................................................................148
6.3.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................148
6.3.2
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 149
6.4
Safeguards against fire under single fault conditions.............................................. 149
6.4.1
General...............................................................................................................149
6.4.2
Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in
PS1 circuits........................................................................................................ 149
6.4.3
Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in
PS2 circuits and PS3circuits.............................................................................. 149
6.4.4
Control of fire spread in PS1 circuits.................................................................151
6.4.5
Control of fire spread in PS2 circuits.................................................................151
6.4.6
Control of fire spread in a PS3 circuit.............................................................. 152
6.4.7
Separation of combustible materials from a PIS.............................................. 152
6.4.8
Fire enclosures and fire barriers....................................................................... 155
6.4.9
Flammability of an insulating liquid...................................................................160
6.5
Internal and externalw iring........................................................................................ 161
6.5.1
General requirements.........................................................................................161
6.5.2
Requirements for interconnection to building wiring........................................ 161
6.5.3
Internal wiring for socket-outlets....................................................................... 161
6.6
Safeguards against fire due to the connection of additional equipment................ 162
7
Injury caused by hazardous substances...........................................................................162
；
：
7.1
7.2
General...................................................................................................................... 162
Reduction of exposure to hazardous substances..................................................... 162
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 6-
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
7.3
Ozone exposure......................................................................................................... 162
7.4
Use of personal safeguards or personal protective equipment (PPE)....................162
7.5
Use of instructional safeguards and instructions......................................................163
7.6
Batteries and their protection circuits....................................................................... 163
8
Mechanically-caused injury............................................................................................... 163
8.1
General....................................................................................................................... 163
8.2
Mechanical energy source classifications.................................................................163
8.2.1
General classification.........................................................................................163
8.2.2
MS1..................................................................................................................... 165
8.2.3
MS2..................................................................................................................... 166
8.2.4
MS3..................................................................................................................... 166
8.3
Safeguards against mechanical energy sources......................................................166
8.4
Safeguards against parts with sharp edges and corners.........................................166
8.4.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................166
8.4.2
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 166
8.5
Safeguards against moving parts..............................................................................167
8.5.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................167
8.5.2
Instructional safeguard requirements............................................................... 168
8.5.3
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 168
8.5.4
Special categories of equipment containing moving parts...............................168
8.5.5
High pressure lamps..........................................................................................173
8.6
Stability of equipment................................................................................................ 174
8.6.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................174
8.6.2
Static stability.....................................................................................................176
8.6.3
Relocation stability............................................................................................. 177
8.6.4
Glass slide te st...................................................................................................178
8.6.5
Horizontal force test and compliance criteria................................................... 178
8.7
Equipment mounted to a wall, ceiling or other structure......................................... 178
8.7.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................178
8.7.2
Test methods...................................................................................................... 178
8.7.3
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 180
8.8
Handle strength.......................................................................................................... 180
8.8.1
General...............................................................................................................180
8.8.2
Test method........................................................................................................ 180
8.9
Wheels or casters attachment requirements............................................................ 181
8.9.1
General...............................................................................................................181
8.9.2
Test method........................................................................................................ 181
8.10 Carts, stands, and similar carriers............................................................................181
8.10.1
General...............................................................................................................181
8.10.2
Marking and instructions................................................................................... 181
8.10.3
Cart, stand or carrier loadingtest and compliance criteria...............................182
8.10.4
Cart, stand or carrier impact te s t.......................................................................183
8.10.5
Mechanical stability............................................................................................ 183
8.10.6
Thermoplastic temperaturestability................................................................... 183
8.11 Mounting means for slide-rail mounted equipment (SRME)..................................... 183
8.11.1
General...............................................................................................................183
8.11.2
Requirements.....................................................................................................184
8.11.3
Mechanical strength te s t.................................................................................... 184
8.11.4
Compliance criteria.............................................................................................185
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
8.12 Telescoping or rod antennas......................................................................................185
9
Thermal bum injury............................................................................................................ 185
9.1
General....................................................................................................................... 185
9.2
Thermal energy source classifications..................................................................... 186
9.2.1
TS1 ..................................................................................................................... 186
9.2.2
T S 2 ..................................................................................................................... 186
9.2.3
T S 3 ..................................................................................................................... 186
9.3
Touch temperature lim its........................................................................................... 186
9.3.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................186
9.3.2
Test method and compliancecriteria................................................................. 186
9.4
Safeguards against thermal energy sources............................................................ 187
9.5
Requirements for safeguards.................................................................................... 188
9.5.1
Equipment safeguard.........................................................................................188
9.5.2
Instructional safeguard...................................................................................... 188
9.6
Requirements for wireless power transmitters......................................................... 188
9.6.1
General...............................................................................................................188
9.6.2
Specification of the foreign objects...................................................................189
9.6.3
Test method and compliancecriteria................................................................. 191
10 Radiation............................................................................................................................. 192
10.1
General....................................................................................................................... 192
10.2 Radiation energy source classifications...................................................................192
10.2.1
General classification.........................................................................................192
10.2.2
RS1..................................................................................................................... 193
10.2.3
RS2..................................................................................................................... 194
10.2.4
RS3..................................................................................................................... 194
10.3 Safeguards against laser radiation............................................................................194
10.4 Safeguards against optical radiation from lamps and lamp systems
(including LED types)................................................................................................ 194
10.4.1
General requirements.........................................................................................194
10.4.2
Requirements for enclosures.............................................................................196
10.4.3
Instructional safeguard...................................................................................... 196
10.4.4
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 198
10.5 Safeguards against X-radiation................................................................................. 198
10.5.1
Requirements.....................................................................................................198
10.5.2
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 198
10.5.3
Test method........................................................................................................ 198
10.6 Safeguards against acoustic energy sources.......................................................... 199
10.6.1
General...............................................................................................................199
10.6.2
Classification......................................................................................................200
10.6.3
Requirements for dose-based systems............................................................ 201
10.6.4
Measurement methods...................................................................................... 201
10.6.5
Protection of persons........................................................................................ 202
10.6.6
Requirements for listening devices (headphones, earphones, etc.)...............202
Annex A (informative) Examples of equipment within the scope of this document.............. 204
Annex B (normative) Normal operating condition tests, abnormal operating condition
tests and single fault condition tests.......................................................................................... 205
:
:
B.1
General.........................................................................................................................205
B.1.1
Test applicability................................................................................................205
B.1.2
Type of test.........................................................................................................205
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 8-
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
B.1.3
Test samples.......................................................................................................205
B.1.4
Compliance by inspection of relevant data........................................................205
B.1.5
Temperature measurement conditions.............................................................. 205
B.2
Normal operating conditions...................................................................................... 206
B.2.1
General............................................................................................................... 206
B.2.2
Supply frequency................................................................................................ 206
B.2.3
Supply voltage.....................................................................................................206
B.2.4
Normal operating voltages.................................................................................. 206
B.2.5
Input te s t..............................................................................................................207
B.2.6
Operating temperature measurement conditions..............................................208
B.2.7
Battery charging and discharging under normal operating conditions.............208
B.3
Simulated abnormal operating conditions................................................................. 208
B.3.1
General............................................................................................................... 208
B.3.2
Covering of ventilation openings........................................................................ 209
B.3.3
DC mains polarity test.........................................................................................210
B.3.4
Setting of voltage selector.................................................................................. 210
B.3.5
Maximum load at output terminals.....................................................................210
B.3.6
Reverse battery polarity..................................................................................... 210
B.3.7
Audio amplifier abnormal operating conditions................................................. 210
B.3.8
Compliance criteria during and after abnormal operating conditions..............210
B. 4 Simulated single fault conditions............................................................................... 210
B.4.1
General............................................................................................................... 210
B.4.2
Temperature controlling device.......................................................................... 211
B.4.3
Motor tests........................................................................................................... 211
B.4.4
Functional insulation...........................................................................................211
B.4.5
Short-circuit and interruption of electrodes in tubesand semiconductors.......212
B.4.6
Short-circuit or disconnection of passive components..................................... 212
B.4.7
Continuous operation of components................................................................ 212
B.4.8
Compliance criteria during and after single fault conditions............................ 213
B. 4.9
Battery charging and discharging under single faultconditions........................ 213
Annex C (normative) UV radiation........................................................................................... 214
C. 1 Protection of materials in equipment from UVradiation........................................... 214
C. 1.1
General............................................................................................................... 214
C.1.2
Requirements......................................................................................................214
C.1.3
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 214
C. 2 UV light conditioning test........................................................................................... 215
C.2.1
Test apparatus.................................................................................................... 215
C.2.2
Mounting of test samples.................................................................................... 215
C.2.3
Carbon-arc light-exposure te s t.......................................................................... 215
C.2.4
Xenon-arc light-exposure test............................................................................ 215
Annex D (normative) Test generators......................................................................................216
D. 1
D.2
D. 3
Annex E
Impulse test generators..............................................................................................216
Antenna interface test generator............................................................................... 216
Electronic pulse generator......................................................................................... 217
(normative) Test conditions for equipment containing audio amplifiers................. 218
E. 1 Electrical energy source classification for audio signals......................................... 218
E.2
Audio amplifier normal operating conditions.............................................................218
E.3
Audio amplifier abnormal operating conditions........................................................ 219
Annex F (normative) Equipment markings, instructions, and instructional safeguards........220
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
—9 —
F. 1 General.........................................................................................................................220
F_2
Letter symbols and graphical symbols...................................................................... 220
F.2.1
Letter symbols.................................................................................................... 220
F.2.2
Graphical symbols..............................................................................................220
F.2.3
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 220
F_3
Equipment markings....................................................................................................220
F.3.1
Equipment marking locations............................................................................. 220
F.3.2
Equipment identification markings.................................................................... 221
F.3.3
Equipment rating markings.................................................................................221
F.3.4
Voltage setting device........................................................................................ 223
F.3.5
Markings on terminals and operating devices...................................................223
F.3.6
Equipment markings related to equipment classification................................. 225
F.3.7
Equipment IP rating marking............................................................................. 225
F.3.8
External power supply output marking..............................................................226
F.3.9
Durability, legibility and permanence ofmarkings..............................................226
F. 3.10 Test for the permanence of markings................................................................226
F_4
Instructions.................................................................................................................. 226
F_5
Instructional safeguards............................................................................................. 227
Annex G (normative) Components........................................................................................... 230
G. 1 Switches...................................................................................................................... 230
G. 1.1
General............................................................................................................... 230
G.1.2
Requirements..................................................................................................... 230
G.1.3
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 231
G.2 Relays..........................................................................................................................231
G.2.1
Requirements..................................................................................................... 231
G.2.2
Overload te st...................................................................................................... 232
G.2.3
Relay controlling connectors supplyingpower to other equipment...................232
G.2.4
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 232
G.3 Protective devices....................................................................................................... 232
G.3.1
Thermal cut-offs..................................................................................................232
G.3.2
Thermal links...................................................................................................... 233
G.3.3
PTC thermistors.................................................................................................. 234
G.3.4
Overcurrent protective devices.......................................................................... 235
G.3.5
Safeguard components not mentioned in G.3.1 to G.3.4 ................................. 235
G.4 Connectors.................................................................................................................. 235
G.4.1
Clearance and creepage distance requirements.............................................. 235
G.4.2
Mains connectors................................................................................................235
G.4.3
Connectors other than mains connectors......................................................... 236
G.5 Wound components.....................................................................................................236
G.5.1
Wire insulation in wound components...............................................................236
G.5.2
Endurance test.................................................................................................... 236
G.5.3
Transformers...................................................................................................... 238
G.5.4
Motors................................................................................................................. 246
G.6 Wire insulation............................................................................................................ 250
G.6.1
General............................................................................................................... 250
G.6.2
Enamelled winding wire insulation.................................................................... 251
G.7 Mains supply cords.....................................................................................................251
G.7.1
General............................................................................................................... 251
G.7.2
Cross sectional area.......................................................................................... 252
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 10 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
G.7.3
Cord anchorages and strain relief for non-detachable power supply
cords...................................................................................................................254
G.7.4
Cord entry............................................................................................................ 255
G.7.5
Non-detachable cord bend protection............................................................... 255
G.7.6
Supply wiring space............................................................................................256
G.8
Varistors..................................................................................................................... 257
G.8.1
General............................................................................................................... 257
G.8.2
Safeguards against fire ...................................................................................... 258
G.9
Integrated circuit (IC) current limiters........................................................................260
G.9.1
Requirements..................................................................................................... 260
G.9.2
Test program...................................................................................................... 260
G.9.3
Compliance criteria.............................................................................................261
G.10 Resistors.................................................................................................................... 261
G.10.1
General............................................................................................................... 261
G.10.2 Conditioning........................................................................................................261
G.10.3 Resistor te s t........................................................................................................262
G.10.4 Voltage surge test...............................................................................................262
G.10.5 Impulse test.........................................................................................................262
G.10.6 Overload te st.......................................................................................................262
G.11 Capacitors and RC units............................................................................................ 262
G.11.1
General............................................................................................................... 262
G.11.2 Conditioning of capacitors andRC units............................................................ 262
G.11.3 Rules for selecting capacitors............................................................................ 263
G.12 Optocouplers..............................................................................................................263
G.13 Printed boards............................................................................................................264
G.13.1
General............................................................................................................... 264
G.13.2 Uncoated printed boards.................................................................................... 264
G.13.3 Coated printed boards........................................................................................ 264
G.13.4 Insulation between conductorson the same inner surface................................265
G.13.5 Insulation between conductorson different surfaces........................................ 266
G.13.6 Tests on coated printed boards.........................................................................266
G.14 Coatings on component terminals............................................................................. 268
G.14.1
Requirements..................................................................................................... 268
G.14.2 Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 268
G.15 Pressurized liquid filled components.........................................................................269
G.15.1
Requirements..................................................................................................... 269
G.15.2 Test methods and compliance criteria.............................................................. 269
G.15.3 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................270
G. 16 IC that includes a capacitor discharge function (IC X )............................................. 270
G.16.1
Requirements..................................................................................................... 270
G.16.2 Tests....................................................................................................................270
G. 16.3 Compliance criteria.............................................................................................271
Annex H (normative) Criteria for telephone ringing signals....................................................272
H. 1 General........................................................................................................................272
H.2
Method A .................................................................................................................... 272
H.3
Method B .................................................................................................................... 275
H. 3.1
Ringing signal..................................................................................................... 275
H.3.2
Tripping device and monitoring voltage..............................................................275
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 11 -
Annex I (informative) Overvoltage categories (see IEC 60364-4-44).................................... 277
Annex J (normative) Insulated winding wires for use without interleaved insulation............ 278
J.1
General........................................................................................................................ 278
J.2
Type tests................................................................................................................... 278
J.2.1
General............................................................................................................... 278
J.2.2
Electric strength.................................................................................................. 278
J.2.3
Flexibility and adherence.................................................................................... 279
J.2.4
Heat shock........................................................................................................... 279
J.2.5
Retention of electric strength after bending.......................................................280
J. 3 Testing during manufacturing....................................................................................280
J.3.1
General............................................................................................................... 280
J.3.2
Spark test............................................................................................................ 280
J. 3.3
Sampling test.......................................................................................................280
Annex K (normative) Safety interlocks.................................................................................... 281
K. 1 General........................................................................................................................ 281
K. 1.1
General requirements..........................................................................................281
K.1.2
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 281
K.2
Components of the safety interlocksafeguard mechanism....................................... 281
K.3
Inadvertent change of operating mode......................................................................282
K.4
Interlock safeguard override...................................................................................... 282
K.5
Fail-safe......................................................................................................................282
K.5.1
Requirement........................................................................................................ 282
K.5.2
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 282
K.6
Mechanically operated safety interlocks................................................................... 283
K.6.1
Endurance requirement...................................................................................... 283
K.6.2
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 283
K. 7 Interlock circuit isolation.............................................................................................283
K.7.1
Separation distances for contact gaps and interlock circuit elements.............283
K.7.2
Overload te st.......................................................................................................284
K.7.3
Endurance test.....................................................................................................284
K.7.4
Electric strength te s t...........................................................................................284
Annex L (normative) Disconnect devices................................................................................ 285
L. 1 General requirements................................................................................................. 285
L.2
Permanently connected equipment........................................................................... 285
L.3
Parts that remain energized....................................................................................... 285
L.4
Single-phase equipment.............................................................................................285
L.5
Three-phase equipment............................................................................................. 286
L.6
Switches as disconnect devices.................................................................................286
L.7
Plugs as disconnect devices...................................................................................... 286
L.8
Multiple power sources...............................................................................................286
L. 9 Compliance criteria.................................................................................................... 287
Annex M (normative) Equipment containing batteries and their protection circuits............. 288
M. 1 General requirements.................................................................................................288
M.2
Safety of batteries and their cells.............................................................................. 288
M.2.1
Requirements......................................................................................................288
M.2.2
Compliance criteria.............................................................................................288
M.3
Protection circuits for batteries provided within the equipment............................... 288
M.3.1
Requirements......................................................................................................288
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 12 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
M.3.2
Test method......................................................................................................... 289
M.3.3
Compliance criteria............................................................................................. 290
M.4
Additional safeguards for equipment containing a portable secondary lithium
battery........................................................................................................................ 290
M.4.1
General................................................................................................................290
M.4.2
Charging safeguards........................................................................................... 290
M.4.3
Fire enclosure...................................................................................................... 291
M.4.4
Drop test of equipment containing a secondary lithium battery....................... 291
M.5 Risk of burn due to short-circuit during carrying...................................................... 292
M.5.1
Requirements...................................................................................................... 292
M.5.2
Test method and compliance criteria.................................................................293
M.6 Safeguards against short-circuits.............................................................................. 293
M.6.1
Requirements...................................................................................................... 293
M.6.2
Compliance criteria............................................................................................. 293
M.7
Risk of explosion from lead acid and NiCdbatteries................................................ 293
M.7.1
Ventilation preventing an explosive gas concentration..................................... 293
M.7.2
Test method and compliance criteria.................................................................294
M.7.3
Ventilation tests...................................................................................................297
M.7.4
Marking requirement........................................................................................... 298
M.8
Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources of batteries
with aqueous electrolyte............................................................................................298
M.8.1
General................................................................................................................298
M.8.2
Test method......................................................................................................... 298
M.9 Preventing electrolyte spillage...................................................................................301
M.9.1
Protection from electrolyte spillage.................................................................... 301
M.9.2
Tray for preventing electrolyte spillage............................................................. 301
M.10 Instructions to prevent reasonably foreseeable misuse........................................... 301
Annex N (normative) Electrochemical potentials (V).............................................................. 303
Annex
normative) Measurement of creepage distances and clearances......................... 304
〇 （
Annex P (normative) Safeguards against conductive objects................................................ 311
P.1
General........................................................................................................................ 311
P.2
Safeguards against entry or consequences of entry of a foreign object................. 311
P.2.1
General...............................................................................................................311
P.2.2
Safeguards against entry of a foreign object....................................................311
P.2.3
Safeguards against the consequences of entry of a foreign object.................312
P.3
Safeguards against spillage of internal liquids..........................................................314
P.3.1
General...............................................................................................................314
P.3.2
Determination of spillage consequences.......................................................... 314
P.3.3
Spillage safeguards........................................................................................... 314
P.3.4
Compliance criteria............................................................................................ 315
P. 4 Metallized coatings and adhesives securing parts................................................... 315
P.4.1
General...............................................................................................................315
P. 4.2
Tests................................................................................................................... 315
Annex Q (normative) Circuits intended for interconnection with building wiring...................317
Q. 1 Limited power source................................................................................................. 317
Q. 1.1
Requirements..................................................................................................... 317
Q.1.2
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................317
Q.2
Test for external circuits - paired conductor cable...................................................318
Annex R (normative) Limited short-circuit test........................................................................ 319
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
R.1
R.2
R.3
R. 4
Annex S
-13-
General........................................................................................................................319
Test setup................................................................................................................... 319
Test method................................................................................................................ 319
Compliance criteria.................................................................................................... 320
(normative) Tests for resistance to heat and fire .....................................................321
S.1
Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier materials of equipment
where the steady state power does not exceed 4 000 W ...................................... 321
5.2
Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier integrity.................................. 322
5.3
Flammability tests for the bottom of a fire enclosure.............................................. 323
5.3.1
Mounting of samples..........................................................................................323
5.3.2
Test method and compliance criteria................................................................ 323
5.4
Flammability classification of materials....................................................................324
5.5
Flammability test for fire enclosure materials of equipment with a steady
state power exceeding 4 000 W ............................................................................... 325
Annex T (normative) Mechanical strength tests...................................................................... 327
T.1
General........................................................................................................................327
T.2
Steady force test, 10 N...............................................................................................327
T.3
Steady force test, 30 N...............................................................................................327
T.4
Steady force test, 100 N ............................................................................................ 327
T.5
Steady force test, 250 N ............................................................................................ 327
T.6
Enclosure impact test.................................................................................................327
T.7
Drop test......................................................................................................................328
T.8
Stress relief test..........................................................................................................328
T.9
Glass impact te s t....................................................................................................... 329
T.10 Glass fragmentation test............................................................................................ 329
T. 11 Test for telescoping or rod antennas.........................................................................330
Annex U (normative) Mechanical strength of CRTs and protection against the effects
of implosion................................................................................................................................ 331
U. 1
U.2
U. 3
Annex V
General........................................................................................................................331
Test method and compliance criteria for non-intrinsically protected CRTs............ 332
Protective screen....................................................................................................... 332
(normative) Determination of accessible parts......................................................... 333
V. 1 Accessible parts of equipment.................................................................................. 333
V.1.1
General................................................................................................................333
V.1.2
Test method 1 - Surfaces and openings tested with jointed test probes........ 333
V.1.3
Test method 2 - Openings tested with straight unjointed test probes............ 333
V.1.4
Test method 3 - Plugs, jacks, connectors........................................................ 336
V.1.5
Test method 4 - Slot openings..........................................................................336
V.1.6
Test method 5 - Terminals intended to be used by an ordinary person......... 337
V. 2 Accessible part criterion............................................................................................ 338
Annex W (informative) Comparison of terms introduced in this document........................... 339
W. 1 General........................................................................................................................339
W.2 Comparison of terms..................................................................................................339
Annex X (normative) Alternative method for determining clearances for insulation in
circuits connected to an AC mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)......................... 356
Annex Y (normative) Construction requirements for outdoor enclosures..............................358
Y.1
Y.2
Y.3
General........................................................................................................................358
Resistance to UV radiation........................................................................................ 358
Resistance to corrosion..............................................................................................358
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Y.3.1
General................................................................................................................358
Y.3.2
Test apparatus.....................................................................................................359
Y.3.3
Water - saturated sulphurdioxide atmosphere................................................. 359
Y.3.4
Test procedure.....................................................................................................359
Y.3.5
Compliance criteria............................................................................................. 360
Y.4
Gaskets...................................................................................................................... 360
Y.4.1
General................................................................................................................360
Y.4.2
Gasket tests......................................................................................................... 360
Y.4.3
Tensile strength and elongation te sts............................................................... 360
Y.4.4
Compression test................................................................................................ 361
Y.4.5
Oil resistance....................................................................................................... 362
Y.4.6
Securing means...................................................................................................362
Y.5
Protection of equipment within an outdoor enclosure..............................................363
Y.5.1
General................................................................................................................363
Y.5.2
Protection from moisture.................................................................................... 363
Y.5.3
Water spray test.................................................................................................. 364
Y.5.4
Protection from plants andvermin.......................................................................366
Y.5.5
Protection from excessive dust......................................................................... 367
Y.6
Mechanical strength of enclosures........................................................................... 367
Y.6.1
General................................................................................................................367
Y.6.2
Impact test........................................................................................................... 368
Bibliography................................................................................................................................ 369
Figure 1 - Three block model for pain and injury.......................................................................24
Figure 2 - Three block model for safety...................................................................................... 25
Figure 3 - Schematic and model for electrically-caused pain or injury................................... 30
Figure 4 - Model for protection against electrically-caused painor injury.................................30
Figure 5 - Model for electrically-caused fir e ...............................................................................31
Figure 6 - Models for protection against fire ...............................................................................32
Figure 7 - Schematic and model for thermally-caused injury.................................................... 34
Figure 8 - Model for protection against thermally-caused injury...............................................34
Figure 9 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against aclass 1 energy source......... 69
Figure 10 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 69
Figure 11 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2 energy
source during ordinary person servicing conditions....................................................................69
Figure 12 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 3 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 70
Figure 13 - Model for protection of an instructed person against a class 1 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 70
Figure 14 - Model for protection of an instructed person against a class 2 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 70
Figure 15 - Model for protection of an instructed person against a class 3 energy
source............................................................................................................................................ 71
Figure 16 - Model for
protectionof a skilled person against a class 1 energy source............. 71
Figure 17 - Model for
protectionof a skilled person against a class 2 energy source............. 71
Figure 18 - Model for
protectionof a skilled person against a class 3 energy source............. 71
Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-15-
Figure 19 - Model for protection of a skilled person against class 3 energy sources
during equipment servicing conditions........................................................................................ 72
Figure 20 - Test hook..................................................................................................................79
Figure 21 - Illustration showing ES limits for voltage and current............................................81
Figure 22 - Maximum values for combined AC current and DC current...................................83
Figure 23 - Maximum values for combined AC voltage and DC voltage..................................83
Figure 24 - Contact requirements to bare internal conductive parts....................................... 87
Figure 25 - Mandrel................................................................................................................... 112
Figure 26 - Initial position of mandrel.......................................................................................113
Figure 27 - Final position of mandrel........................................................................................113
Figure 28 - Position of metal foil on insulating material.......................................................... 113
Figure 29 - Example of electric strength test instrument for solid insulation........................ 121
Figure 30 - Application points of test voltage...........................................................................122
Figure 31 - Test for separation between an external circuit and earth.................................. 125
Figure 32 - Test circuit for touch current of single-phase equipment.................................... 141
Figure 33 - Test circuit for touch current of three-phase equipment..................................... 141
Figure 34 - Power measurement for worst-case fault............................................................. 145
Figure 35 - Power measurement for worst-case power source fa u lt..................................... 146
Figure 36 - Illustration of power source classification............................................................ 147
Figure 37 - Minimum separation requirements from a P IS ...................................................... 153
Figure 38 - Extended separation requirements from a PIS..................................................... 153
Figure 39 - Deflected separation requirements from a PIS when a fire barrier is used.......154
Figure 40 - Determination of top, bottom and side openings................................................. 156
Figure 41 - Top openings......................................................................................................... 157
Figure 42 - Bottom openings....................................................................................................158
Figure 43 - Baffle plate construction........................................................................................158
Figure 44 - PIS trajectory downwards......................................................................................159
Figure 45 - Limits for moving fan blades made of non-plasticmaterials................................. 165
Figure 46 - Limits for moving fan blades made of plastic materials.......................................165
Figure 47 - Steel disc................................................................................................................ 189
Figure 48 - Aluminium rin g .......................................................................................................190
Figure 49 - Aluminium foil......................................................................................................... 191
Figure 50 - Example of a warning label for a lamp with multiple hazard spectral
regions......................................................................................................................................... 198
Figure D.1 - 1,2/50 yis and 10/700 (.is voltage impulse generator......................................... 216
Figure D.2 - Antenna interface test generator circuit.............................................................217
Figure D.3 - Example of an electronic pulse generator..........................................................217
Figure E.1 - Band-pass filter for wide-band noise measurement.......................................... 219
Figure F.1 -
Example of an instructional safeguard................................................................ 228
Figure G.1 - Determination of arithmetic average temperature..............................................241
Figure G.2 - Test voltages........................................................................................................ 246
Figure G.3 - Thermal ageing tim e............................................................................................ 267
Figure G.4 - Abrasion resistance test for coating layers........................................................268
Figure H.1 - Definition of ringing period and cadence cycle.................................................. 273
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 16 Figure H.2 -
打 31
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
limit curve for cadenced ringing signal........................................................274
Figure H.3 - Peak and peak-to-peak currents.......................................................................... 274
Figure H.4 - Ringing voltage trip criteria................................................................................... 276
Figure M.1 - Distance J as a function of the rated capacity for various charge currents
/(m A/Ah)..................................................................................................................................... 301
Figure 0.1 - Narrow groove.......................................................................................................304
Figure 0.2 - Wide groove.......................................................................................................... 305
Figure 0.3 - V-shaped groove.................................................................................................. 305
Figure 0.4 - Intervening unconnected conductive part............................................................ 305
Figure 0.5 - R ib......................................................................................................................... 305
Figure 0.6 - Uncemented joint with narrow groove..................................................................306
Figure 0.7 - Uncemented joint with wide groove.....................................................................306
Figure 0.8 - Uncemented joint with narrow and wide grooves................................................ 306
Figure 0.9 - Narrow recess.......................................................................................................307
Figure 0.10 - Wide recess........................................................................................................ 307
Figure 0.11 - Coating around terminals................................................................................... 308
Figure 0.12 - Coating over printed wiring................................................................................ 308
Figure 0.13 - Example of measurements in an enclosure of insulating material..................309
Figure 0.14 - Cemented joints in multi-layer printed boards................................................. 309
Figure 0.15 - Device filled with insulating compound............................................................. 310
Figure 0.16 - Partitioned bobbin............................................................................................... 310
Figure P.1 - Examples of cross-sections of designs of top openings which prevent
vertical entry................................................................................................................................ 312
Figure P.2 - Examples of cross-sections of designs of side opening louvres which
prevent vertical entry..................................................................................................................312
Figure P.3 - Internal volume locus for foreign object entry..................................................... 313
Figure S.1 - Top openings / surface of fire enclosure or fire barrier...................................... 323
Figure T.1 - Impact test using sphere....................................................................................... 328
Figure V.1 - Jointed test probe for equipment likely to be accessible tochildren...................334
Figure V.2 - Jointed test probe for equipment not likely to be accessible tochildren............. 335
Figure V.3 - Blunt probe............................................................................................................ 336
Figure V.4 - Wedge probe........................................................................................................ 337
Figure V.5 - Terminal probe......................................................................................................338
Figure Y.1 - Gasket te s t........................................................................................................... 362
Figure Y.2 - Water-spray test spray-head piping.....................................................................365
Figure Y.3 - Water-spray test spray head.................................................................................366
Table 1 - Response to energy class..........................................................................................24
Table 2 - Examples of body response or property damage related to energy sources..........25
Table 3 - Examples of safeguard characteristics..................................................................... 29
Table 4 - Electrical energy source limits for steady state ES1 and ES2...................................82
Table 5 - Electrical energy source limits for a charged capacitor.............................................84
Table 6 - Voltage limits for single pulses.................................................................................. 85
Table 7 - Current limits for single pulses.................................................................................. 85
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- 17 -
Table 8 - Minimum air gap distance........................................................................................... 88
Table 9 - Temperature limits for materials, components and systems.................................... 90
Table 10 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies up to 30 kH z........................... 96
Table 11 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies above 30 kHz..........................97
Table 12 - Mains transient voltages............................................................................................98
Table 13 - External circuit transient voltages............................................................................100
Table 14 - Minimum clearances using required withstand voltage......................................... 102
Table 15 - Electric strength test voltages................................................................................. 103
Table 16 - Multiplication factors for clearances and test voltages......................................... 104
Table 17 - Minimum creepage distances for basic insulation and supplementary
insulation in m m ..........................................................................................................................107
Table 18 - Minimum values of creepage distances (in mm) for frequencies higher than
30 kHz and up to 400 kHz......................................................................................................... 108
Table 19 - Tests for insulation in non-separable layers........................................................... 111
Table 20 - Electric field strength Ep for some commonly used materials...............................115
Table 21 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric field strength Ep at
higher frequencies...................................................................................................................... 116
Table 22 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric field strength Ep at
higher frequencies for thin materials..........................................................................................116
Table 23 - Values for insulation resistance...............................................................................117
Table 24 - Distance through insulation of internal wiring.........................................................118
Table 25 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on transient voltages.................. 120
Table 26 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak of the working
voltages and recurring peak voltages........................................................................................120
Table 27 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on temporary overvoltages..........120
Table 28 - Test values for electric strength tests..................................................................... 123
Table 29 - Overview of tests for resistor applications............................................................. 128
Table 30 - Protective earthing conductor sizes for reinforced safeguards for
permanently connected equipment............................................................................................ 131
Table 31 - Minimum protective bonding conductor size of copper conductors....................... 133
Table 32 - Sizes of terminals for protective conductors.......................................................... 135
Table 33 - Test duration, mains connected equipment............................................................ 136
Table 34 - List of applicable IEC standards regarding insulating liquids................................160
Table 35 - Classification for various categories of mechanical energy sources.....................164
Table 36 - Overview of requirements and tests....................................................................... 175
Table 37 - Torque to be applied to screws...............................................................................180
Table 38 - Touch temperature limits for accessible parts........................................................ 187
Table 39 - Radiation energy source classifications..................................................................192
Table 40 - Allowable radiation level according to IEC 62471 (all parts) for each hazard
type ............................................................................................................................................. 195
Table 41 - Hazard-related risk group marking of equipment................................................... 197
Table 42 - Explanation of marking information and guidance on control measures.............. 197
Table C.1 - Minimum property retention limits after UV exposure.......................................... 214
Table D.1 - Component values for Figure D.1 and Figure D.2................................................217
Table E.1 - Audio signal electrical energy source classes and safeguards........................... 218
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 18 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table F.1 - Instructional safeguard element description and examples..................................228
Table F.2 - Examples of markings, instructions, and instructional safeguards..................... 229
Table G.1 - Peak surge current................................................................................................. 231
Table G.2 - Test temperature and testing time (days) per cycle.............................................237
Table G.3 - Temperature limits for transformer windings and for motor windings
(except for the motor running overload te s t)............................................................................240
Table G.4 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak of the working
voltages........................................................................................................................................242
Table G.5 - Values of FIW wires with maximum overall diameter and minimum test
voltages according to the enamel increase...............................................................................245
Table G.6 - Temperature limits for running overload te sts..................................................... 247
Table G.7 - Sizes of conductors................................................................................................ 253
Table G.8 - Strain relief test force.............................................................................................254
Table G.9 - Range of conductor sizes to be accepted by terminals....................................... 256
Table G.10 - Varistor overload and temporary overvoltage test..............................................259
Table G.11 - Performance test program for integrated circuit (IC) current limiters............... 261
Table G.12 - Capacitor ratings according to IEC 60384-14.................................................... 263
Table G.13 - Minimum separation distances for coated printed boards.................................265
Table G.14 - Insulation in printed boards.................................................................................266
Table 1.1 - Overvoltage categories............................................................................................277
Table J.1 - Mandrel diameter.................................................................................................... 279
Table J.2 - Oven temperature................................................................................................... 280
Table M.1 - Values for current /f|oat and /boost，factors/g a n d /s, and voltages U^\oa{
and L b〇〇s t.................................................................................................................................. 296
Table 0.1 - Value of^T................................................................................................................304
Table Q.1 - Limits for inherently limited power sources..........................................................317
Table Q.2 - Limits for power sources not inherently limited (overcurrent protective
device required)...........................................................................................................................318
Table S.1 - Foamed materials................................................................................................... 324
Table S.2 - Rigid materials........................................................................................................324
Table S.3 - Very thin materials................................................................................................. 324
Table T.1 - Impact force............................................................................................................ 329
Table T.2 - Torque values for end-piece test........................................................................... 330
Table W.1 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60664-1:2007 and
IEC 62368-1 ................................................................................................................................ 340
Table W.2 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 61140:2016 and IEC 62368-1 ....... 342
Table W.3 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60950-1:2005 and
IEC 62368-1 ................................................................................................................................ 345
Table W.4 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60728-11:2016 and
IEC 62368-1 ................................................................................................................................ 349
Table W.5 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 62151:2000 and IEC 62368-1 ....... 351
Table W.6 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60065:2014 and IEC 62368-1 ....... 353
Table X.1 - Alternative minimum clearances for insulation in circuits connected to ac
.mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)....................................................................... 356
Table X.2 - Additional clearances for insulation in circuits connected to ac mains not
exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)..........................................................................................357
Copyright International Eieclrotechnical Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- 19 -
Table Y.1 - Examples of the provision of pollution degree environments
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
363
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
AUDIO/VIDEO, INFORMATION AND
COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT Part 1: Safety requirements
FOREWORD
1) The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is a worldwide organization for standardization comprising
all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National Committees). The object of IEC is to promote
international co-operation on all questions concerning standardization in the electrical and electronic fields. To
this end and in addition to other activities, IEC publishes International Standards, Technical Specifications,
Technical Reports, Publicly Available Specifications (PAS) and Guides (hereafter referred to as MIEC
Publication(s),,). Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees; any IEC National Committee interested
in the subject dealt with may participate in this preparatory work. International, governmental and non­
governmental organizations liaising with the IEC also participate in this preparation. IEC collaborates closely
with the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) in accordance with conditions determined by
agreement between the two organizations.
2) The formal decisions or agreements of IEC on technical matters express, as nearly as possible, an international
consensus of opinion on the relevant subjects since each technical committee has representation from all
interested IEC National Committees.
3) IEC Publications have the form of recommendations for international use and are accepted by IEC National
Committees in that sense. While all reasonable efforts are made to ensure that the technical content of IEC
Publications is accurate, IEC cannot be held responsible for the way in which they are used or for any
misinterpretation by any end user.
4) In order to promote international uniformity, IEC National Committees undertake to apply IEC Publications
transparently to the maximum extent possible in their national and regional publications. Any divergence
between any IEC Publication and the corresponding national or regional publication shall be clearly indicated in
the latter.
5) IEC itself does not provide any attestation of conformity. Independent certification bodies provide conformity
assessment services and, in some areas, access to IEC marks of conformity. IEC is not responsible for any
services carried out by independent certification bodies.
6) All users should ensure that they have the latest edition of this publication.
7) No liability shall attach to IEC or its directors, employees, servants or agents including individual experts and
members of its technical committees and IEC National Committees for any personal injury, property damage or
other damage of any nature whatsoever, whether direct or indirect, or for costs (including legal fees) and
expenses arising out of the publication, use of, or reliance upon, this IEC Publication or any other IEC
Publications.
8) Attention is drawn to the Normative references cited in this publication. Use of the referenced publications is
indispensable for the correct application of this publication.
9) Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this IEC Publication may be the subject of
patent rights. IEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights.
International Standard IEC 62368-1 has been prepared by TC 108: Safety of electronic
equipment within the field of audio/video, information technology and communication
technology.
This third edition cancels and replaces the second edition published in 2014. This edition
constitutes a technical revision.
This edition includes the following significant technical changes with respect to the previous
edition:
-
addition of requirements for outdoor equipment;
-
new requirements for optical radiation;
-
addition of requirements for insulating liquids;
-
addition of requirements for work cells;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
addition of requirements for wireless power transmitters;
-
addition of requirements for fully insulated winding wire (FIW);
-
alternative method for determination of top, bottom and side openings for fire enclosures;
-
alternative requirements for sound pressure.
The text of this document is based on the following documents:
FDIS
Report on voting
108/701/FDIS
108/707/RVD
Full information on the voting for the approval of this International Standard can be found in
the report on voting indicated in the above table.
This document has been drafted in accordance with the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 2.
A list of all parts in the IEC 62368 series, published under the general title Audio/video,
information and communication technology equipment, can be found on the IEC website.
The “in some countries” notes regarding differing national practices are contained in the
following clauses, subclauses and tables:
0.2.1, Clause 1, 3.3.8.1, 3.3.8.3, 4.1.15, 4.7.3, 5.2.2.2, 5.4.2.3.2.4, 5.4.2.5, 5.4.5.1,
5.4.10.2.1, 5.4.10.2.2, 5.4.10.2.3, 5.5.2.1, 5.5.6, 5.6.4.2.1, 5.6.8, 5.7.6, 5.7.7.1, 8.5.4.2.3,
10.5.3, 10.6.1, F.3.3.6, Y.4.1, Y.4.5, Table 12, Table 13 and Table 39.
In this document, the following print types or formats are used:
-
requirements proper and normative annexes: in roman type;
-
compliance statements and test specifications: in italic type]
-
notes/explanatory matter:
-
normative conditions within tables：in
-
terms that are defined in 3.3: bold.
in smaller roman type;
smaller roman type;
In figures and tables, if colour is available:
-
green colour denotes a class 1 energy source;
-
yellow colour denotes a class 2 energy source;
-
red colour denotes a class 3 energy source.
A comparison of terms introduced in this document that are different from other existing IEC
documents is given in Annex W.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
The committee has decided that the contents of this document will remain unchanged until the
stability date indicated on the IEC website under Mhttp://webstore.iec.chu in the data related to
the specific document. At this date, the document will be
•
reconfirmed,
•
withdrawn,
•
replaced by a revised edition, or
•
amended.
NOTE Explanatory information related to IEC 62368-1 is contained in IEC TR 62368-2. It provides rationale
together with explanatory information related to this document.
IMPORTANT - The fcolour inside* logo on the cover page of this publication indicates
that it contains colours which are considered to be useful for the correct
understanding of its contents. Users should therefore print this document using a
colour printer.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
INTRODUCTION
0
Principles of this product safety standard
0.1
Objective
This part of IEC 62368 is a product safety standard that classifies energy sources, prescribes
safeguards against those energy sources, and provides guidance on the application of, and
requirements for, those safeguards.
The prescribed safeguards are intended to reduce the likelihood of pain, injury and, in the
case of fire, property damage.
The objective of the INTRODUCTION is to help designers to understand the underlying
principles of safety in order to design safe equipment. These principles are informative and
not an alternative to the detailed requirements of this document.
0.2
0.2.1
Persons
General
This document describes safeguards for the protection of three kinds of persons: the
ordinary person, the instructed person, and the skilled person. Unless otherwise
specified, the requirements for an ordinary person apply. This document assumes that a
person will not intentionally create conditions or situations that could cause pain or injury.
NOTE 1 In Australia, the work conducted by an instructed person or skilled person may require formal licensing
from regulatory authorities.
NOTE 2 In Germany, a person may only be regarded as an instructed person or a skilled person if certain legal
requirements are fulfilled.
0.2.2
Ordinary person
Ordinary person is the term applied to all persons other than instructed persons and
skilled persons. Ordinary persons include not only users of the equipment, but also all
persons who may have access to the equipment or who may be in the vicinity of the
equipment. Under normal operating conditions or abnormal operating conditions,
ordinary persons should not be exposed to parts comprising energy sources capable of
causing pain or injury. Under a single fault condition, ordinary persons should not be
exposed to parts comprising energy sources capable of causing injury.
0.2.3
Instructed person
Instructed person is a term applied to persons who have been instructed and trained by a
skilled person, or who are supervised by a skilled person, to identify energy sources that
may cause pain (see Table 1) and to take precautions to avoid unintentional contact with or
exposure to those energy sources. Under normal operating conditions, abnormal
operating conditions or single fault conditions, instructed persons should not be exposed
to parts comprising energy sources capable of causing injury.
0.2.4
Skilled person
Skilled person is a term applied to persons who have training or experience in the equipment
technology, particularly in knowing the various energies and energy magnitudes used in the
equipment. Skilled persons are expected to use their training and experience to recognize
energy sources capable of causing pain or injury and to take action for protection from injury
from those energies. Skilled persons should also be protected against unintentional contact
or exposure to energy sources capable of causing injury.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
0.3
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Model for pain and injury
An energy source that causes pain or injury does so through the transfer of some form of
energy to or from a body part.
This concept is represented by a three-block model (see Figure 1).
Energy source
capable of
causing pain or
injury
Energy
transfer
Body part
Figure 1 - Three block model for pain and injury
This safety standard specifies three classes of energy sources defined by magnitudes and
durations of source parameters relative to the body responses to those electrical and thermal
energy sources (see Table 1). Source parameters relative to responses to combustible
material, mechanical energy sources and radiation energy sources are specified based on
experience and basic safety standards.
Table 1 - Response to energy class
Energy source
Effect on the body
Effect on combustible materials
Class 1
Not painful, but may be detectable
Ignition not likely
Class 2
Painful, but not an injury
Ignition possible, but limited growth
and spread of fire
Ignition likely, rapid growth and
spread of fire
The energy threshold for pain or injury is not constant throughout the population. For
example, for some energy sources, the threshold is a function of body mass; the lower the
mass, the lower the threshold, and vice-versa. Other body variables include age, state of
health, state of emotions, effect of drugs, skin characteristics, etc. Furthermore, even where
outward appearances otherwise appear equal, individuals differ in their thresholds of
susceptibility to the same energy source.
The effect of duration of energy transfer is a function of the specific energy form. For
example, pain or injury from thermal energy can be very short (1 s) for high skin temperature,
or very long (several hours) for low skin temperature.
Furthermore, the pain or injury may occur some considerable time after the transfer of energy
to a body part. For example, pain or injury from some chemical or physiological reaction may
not be manifested for days, weeks, months, or years.
0.4
Energy sources
Energy sources are addressed by this document, together with the pain or injury that results
from a transfer of that energy to the body, and the likelihood of property damage that results
from fire escaping the equipment.
An electrical product is connected to an electrical energy source (for example, the mains), an
external power supply, or a battery. An electrical product uses the electrical energy to
perform its intended functions.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
In the process of using electrical energy, the product transforms the electrical energy into
other forms of energy (for example, thermal energy, kinetic energy, optical energy, audio
energy, electromagnetic energy, etc.). Some energy transformations may be a deliberate part
of the product function (for example, moving parts of a printer, images on a visual display unit,
sound from a speaker, etc.). Some energy transformations may be a by-product of the product
function (for example, heat dissipated by functional circuits, X-radiation from a cathode-ray
tube, etc.).
Some products may use energy sources that are non-electrical energy sources such as
moving parts or chemicals. The energy in these other sources may be transferred to or from a
body part, or may be transformed into other energy forms (for example, chemical energy may
be converted to electrical energy through a battery, or a moving body part transfers its kinetic
energy to a sharp edge).
Examples of the types of energy forms and the associated injuries and property damage
addressed in this document are in Table 2.
Table 2 - Examples of body response or property damage related to energy sources
Forms of energy
Electrical energy
(for example, energized conductive parts)
Examples of body response or property
damage
Pain, fibrillation, cardiac arrest, respiratory
arrest, skin burn, or internal organ burn
Thermal energy
Clause
5
6
(for example, electrical ignition and spread of
fire)
Electrically-caused fire leading to bum-related
pain or injury, or property damage
Chemical reaction
7
Skin damage, organ damage, or poisoning
(for example, electrolyte, poison)
Kinetic energy
(for example, moving parts of equipment, or a
moving body part against an equipment part)
Laceration, puncture ， abrasion, contusion,
crush, amputation, or loss of a limb, eye, ear,
etc.
Thermal energy
8
9
Skin burn
(for example, hot accessible parts)
Radiated energy
10
(for example, electromagnetic energy, optical
energy, acoustic energy)
0.5
0.5.1
Loss of sight, skin burn, or loss of hearing
Safeguards
General
Many products necessarily use energy capable of causing pain or injury. Product design
cannot eliminate such energy use. Consequently, such products should use a scheme that
reduces the likelihood of such energy being transferred to a body part. The scheme that
reduces the likelihood of energy transfer to a body part is a safeguard (see Figure 2).
Energy source
capable of causing
pain or injury
Safeguard
巳
ody part
IEC
Figure 2 - Three block model for safety
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
A safeguard is a device or scheme or system that:
-
is interposed between an energy source capable of causing pain or injury and a body part,
and
-
reduces the likelihood of transfer of energy capable of causing pain or injury to a body
part.
NOTE
Safeguard mechanisms against transfer of energy capable of causing pain or injury include:
一
attenuating the energy (reduces the value of the energy); or
-
impeding the energy (slows the rate of energy transfer); or
-
diverting the energy (changes the energy direction); or
-
disconnecting, interrupting, or disabling the energy source; or
-
enveloping the energy source (reduces the likelihood of the energy from escaping); or
-
interposing a barrier between a body part and the energy source.
A safeguard can be applied to the equipment, to the local installation, to a person or can be a
learned or directed behaviour (for example, resulting from an instructional safeguard)
intended to reduce the likelihood of transfer of energy capable of causing pain or injury. A
safeguard may be a single element or may be a set of elements.
Generally, this document uses an order of preference for providing safeguards based on the
requirements given in ISO/IEC Guide 51 as follows:
-
equipment safeguards are always useful, since they do not require any knowledge or
actions by persons coming into contact with the equipment;
-
installation safeguards are useful when a safety characteristic can only be provided after
installation (for example, the equipment has to be bolted to the floor to provide stability);
-
behavioural safeguards are useful when the equipment requires an energy source to be
accessible.
In practice, safeguard selection accounts for the nature of the energy source, the intended
user, the functional requirements of the equipment, and similar considerations.
0.5.2
Equipment safeguard
An equipment safeguard may be a basic safeguard, a supplementary safeguard, a
double safeguard, or a reinforced safeguard.
0.5.3
Installation safeguard
Installation safeguards are not controlled by the equipment manufacturer, although in some
cases, installation safeguards may be specified in the equipment installation instructions.
Generally, with respect to equipment, an installation safeguard is a supplementary
safeguard.
NOTE For example, the supplementary safeguard providing protective earthing is located partly in the
equipment and partly in the installation. The supplementary safeguard providing protective earthing is not
effective until the equipment is connected to the protective earthing of the installation.
Requirements for installation safeguards are not addressed in this document. However, this
document does assume some installation safeguards, such as protective earthing, are in
place and are effective.
0.5.4
Personal safeguard
A personal safeguard may be a basic safeguard， a supplementary safeguard， or a
reinforced safeguard.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Requirements for personal safeguards are not addressed in this document. However, this
document does assume that personal safeguards are available for use as specified by the
manufacturer.
0.5.5
0.5.5.1
Behavioural safeguards
Introduction to behavioural safeguards
In the absence of an equipment， installation, or personal safeguard, a person may use a
specific behaviour as a safeguard to avoid energy transfer and consequent injury. A
behavioural safeguard is a voluntary or instructed behaviour intended to reduce the likelihood
of transfer of energy to a body part.
Three kinds of behavioural safeguards are specified in this document. Each kind of
behavioural safeguard is associated with a specific kind of person. An instructional
safeguard is usually addressed to an ordinary person， but may also be addressed to an
instructed person or a skilled person. A precautionary safeguard is used by an
instructed person. A skill safeguard is used by a skilled person.
0.5.5.2
Instructional safeguard
An instructional safeguard is a means of providing information, describing the existence and
location of an energy source capable of causing pain or injury, and is intended to invoke a
specific behaviour on the part of a person to reduce the likelihood of transfer of energy to a
body part (see Annex F).
An instructional safeguard may be a visual indicator (symbols or words or both) or an
audible message, as applicable to the expected use of the product.
When accessing locations where the equipment needs to be energized to perform a service
activity, an instructional safeguard may be considered acceptable protection to bypass an
equipment safeguard such that the person is made aware of how to avoid contact with a
class 2 or class 3 energy source.
If equipment safeguards would interfere with or prohibit the equipment function, an
instructional safeguard may replace an equipment safeguard.
If exposure to an energy source capable of causing pain or injury is essential to the correct
functioning of equipment, an instructional safeguard may be used to ensure protection of
persons instead of another safeguard. Consideration should be given as to whether the
instructional safeguard should require the use of a personal safeguard.
Provision of an instructional safeguard does not result in an ordinary person becoming an
instructed person (see 0.5.5.3).
0.5.5.3
Precautionary safeguard (used by an instructed person)
A precautionary safeguard is the training and experience or supervision of an instructed
person by a skilled person to use precautions to protect the instructed person against
class 2 energy sources. Precautionary safeguards are not specifically prescribed in this
document but are assumed to be effective when the term instructed person is used.
During equipment servicing, an instructed person may need to remove or defeat an
equipment safeguard. In this case, an instructed person is expected to then apply
precaution as a safeguard to avoid exposure to class 2 energy sources.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
0.5.5.4
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Skill safeguard (used by a skilled person)
A skill safeguard is the education, training, knowledge and experience of the skilled person
that is used to protect the skilled person against class 2 or class 3 energy sources. Skill
safeguards are not specifically prescribed in this document but are assumed to be effective
when the term skilled person is used.
During equipment servicing, a skilled person may need to remove or defeat an equipment
safeguard. In this case, a skilled person is expected to then apply skill as a safeguard to
avoid injury.
0.5.6
Safeguards during ordinary or instructed person service conditions
During ordinary person or instructed person service conditions, safeguards for such
persons may be necessary. Such safeguards can be equipment safeguards, personal
safeguards, or instructional safeguards.
0.5.7
Equipment safeguards during skilled person service conditions
During skilled person service conditions, equipment safeguards should be provided to
protect against the effects of a bodyfs involuntary reaction (for example, startle) that might
cause unintentional contact with a class 3 energy source located outside the view of the
skilled person.
NOTE This safeguard typically applies in large equipment, where the skilled person needs to partially or wholly
enter between two or more class 3 energy source locations while servicing.
0.5.8
Examples of safeguard characteristics
Table 3 lists some examples of safeguard characteristics.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 3 - Examples of safeguard characteristics
Safeguard
Equipment safeguard:
a physical part of an
equipment
Installation safeguard:
a physical part of a man­
made installation
Personal safeguard:
a physical device worn on
the body
Instructional safeguard:
a voluntary or instructed
behaviour intended to
reduce the likelihood of
transfer of energy to a
body part
0.6
Basic
safeguard
Supplementary
safeguard
Reinforced
safeguard
Effective under normal
operating conditions
Effective in the event of
failure of the basic
safeguard
Effective under normal
operating conditions
and in the event of a
single fault condition
elsewhere in the
equipment
Example: basic
insulation
Example: supplementary
insulation
Example: reinforced
insulation
Example: normal
temperatures below
ignition temperatures
Example: fire enclosure
Not applicable
Effective under normal
operating conditions
Effective in the event of
failure of an equipment
basic safeguard
Effective under normal
operating conditions
and in the event of a
single fault condition
elsewhere in the
equipment
Example: wire size
Example: overcurrent
protective device
Example: socket outlet
In the absence of any
equipment safeguard,
effective under normal
operating conditions
Effective in the event of
failure of an equipment
basic safeguard
In the absence of any
equipment safeguard ，
effective under normal
operating conditions
and in the event of a
single fault condition
elsewhere in the
equipment
Example: gloves
Example: insulating floor
mat
Example: electricallyinsulated glove for
handling live conductors
In the absence of any
equipment safeguard,
effective under normal
operating conditions
Effective in the event of
failure of an equipment
basic safeguard
Only effective on an
exceptional basis, when
providing all appropriate
safeguards would
prevent the intended
functioning of the
equipment
Example: instructional
safeguard to disconnect
telecommunication cable
before opening the cover
Example: after opening a
door, an instructional
safeguard against hot
parts
Example: instructional
safeguard of hot parts in
an office photocopier, or
a continuous roll paper
cutter o 门 a commercial
printer
Electrically-caused pain or injury (electric shock)
0.6.1
Models for electrically-caused pain or injury
Electrically-caused pain or injury may occur when electrical energy capable of causing pain or
injury is transferred to a body part (see Figure 3).
Electrical energy transfer occurs when there are two or more electrical contacts to the body:
-
the first electrical contact is between a body part and a conductive part of the equipment;
-
the second electrical contact is between another body part and
•
earth, or
•
another conductive part of the equipment.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Figure 3 - Schematic and model for electrically-caused pain or injury
Depending on the magnitude， duration, wave shape， and frequency of the current, the effect
on the human body varies from undetectable to detectable to painful to injurious.
0.6.2
Models for protection against electrically-caused pain or injury
One or more safeguards are interposed between an electrical energy source capable of
causing pain or injury and a body part to protect against electrically-caused pain or injury (see
Figure 4).
IEC
Figure 4 - Model for protection against electrically-caused pain or injury
Protection against electrically-caused pain is provided under normal operating conditions
and abnormal operating conditions. For such protection, under normal operating
conditions and abnormal operating conditions, a basic safeguard is interposed between
an electrical energy source capable of causing pain and an ordinary person.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
basic safeguard
The
m ost com m on
p a in
is e l e c t r i c a l i n s u l a t i o n
a g a in s t a n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le
(a ls o k n o w n a s
basic insulation)
in te rp o s e d
o f c a u s in g
b e tw e e n th e e n e rg y
s o u r c e a n d a b o d y p a rt.
normal operating conditions,
abnormal operating conditions, a n d single fault conditions. F o r s u c h p r o t e c t i o n , u n d e r
normal operating conditions a n d abnormal operating conditions, b o t h a basic safeguard
a n d a supplementary safeguard a r e i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n a n e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b l e
o f c a u s i n g i n j u r y a n d a n ordinary person ( s e e 4 . 3 . 2 . 4 ) , o r a n instructed person ( s e e
4 . 3 . 3 . 3 ) . In t h e e v e n t o f a f a i l u r e o f e i t h e r safeguard, t h e o t h e r safeguard b e c o m e s e f f e c t i v e .
T h e supplementary safeguard a g a i n s t a n e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g i n j u r y
i s p l a c e d b e t w e e n t h e basic safeguard a n d a b o d y p a r t . A supplementary safeguard m a y
b e a d d i t i o n a l e l e c t r i c a l i n s u l a t i o n (supplementary insulation) o r a p r o t e c t i v e l y e a r t h e d
P ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d
i n j u r y is p r o v i d e d
under
c o n d u c tiv e b a rrie r o r o th e r c o n s tru c tio n th a t p e rfo rm s th e s a m e fu n c tio n .
A n o th e r
safeguard
in s u la tio n
(a ls o
a g a in s t a n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g
known
as
double insulation
or
reinforced insulation)
i n j u r y is e le c t r ic a l
p la c e d
b e tw e e n
th e
e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a b o d y p a rt.
L ik e w is e ,
a
reinforced safeguard
m ay
be
p la c e d
b e tw e e n
an
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
so u rce
c a p a b le o f c a u s in g in ju ry a n d a b o d y p a rt.
0.7
Electrically-caused fire
0.7.1
Models for electrically-caused fire
E le c tric a lly -c a u s e d
fire
is
due
to
c o n v e rs io n
of
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
to
th e rm a l
e n e rg y
(se e
F ig u re 5), w h e r e th e th e rm a l e n e r g y h e a ts a fu e l m a te ria l fo llo w e d b y ig n itio n a n d c o m b u s tio n .
Figure 5 - Model for electrically-caused fire
E le c tric a l
e n e rg y
tra n s fe rre d
to
a
is c o n v e r t e d
fu e l
m a te ria l
to
th e rm a l
e n e rg y
by
c o n d u c tio n ,
e ith e r
in
c o n v e c tio n ,
a
re s is ta n c e
or
ra d ia tio n .
o r in
As
th e
an
a rc
fu e l
and
is
m a te ria l
h e a t s , it c h e m i c a l l y d e c o m p o s e s i n t o g a s e s , l i q u i d s a n d s o l i d s . W h e n t h e g a s is a t its i g n i t i o n
t e m p e r a t u r e , t h e g a s c a n b e ig n i t e d b y a n ig n it io n s o u r c e . W h e n t h e g a s is a t its s p o n t a n e o u s
i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e , t h e g a s i g n i t e s b y i t s e l f . B o t h r e s u l t in f i r e .
0.7.2
Models for protection against electrically-caused fire
basic safeguard a g a i n s t e l e c t r i c a l l y - c a u s e d
m a t e r i a l ，u n d e r normal operating conditions
The
f i r e ( s e e F i g u r e 6 ) is t h a t t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f
a
and
abnormal operating conditions,
does
n o t c a u s e th e m a te ria l to ig n ite .
The
supplementary safeguard
a g a in s t
e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d
fire
re d u c e s
i g n i t i o n o r , in t h e c a s e o f i g n i t i o n , r e d u c e s t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f s p r e a d o f f i r e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
lik e lih o o d
of
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
IEC
Figure 6 - Models for protection against fire
0.8
Injury caused by hazardous substances
In ju ry c a u s e d
e x te n t
of
by
in ju ry
hazardous substances
is d u e t o a c h e m i c a l r e a c t i o n w i t h a b o d y p a r t . T h e
by
depends
a
g iv e n
s u b s ta n c e
on
b o th
th e
m a g n itu d e
and
d u ra tio n
of
e x p o s u r e a n d o n th e b o d y p a rt s u s c e p tib ility to th a t s u b s ta n c e .
basic safeguard
The
a g a in s t in ju ry c a u s e d
by
hazardous substances
is c o n t a i n m e n t o f t h e
m a te ria l.
Supplementary safeguards
a g a in s t in ju ry c a u s e d b y
hazardous substances
-
a s e c o n d c o n ta in e r o r a s p ill-re s is ta n t c o n ta in e r;
-
c o n t a i n m e n t tra y s ;
-
t a m p e r - p r o o f s c r e w s to p r e v e n t u n a u th o r iz e d a c c e s s ;
-
instructional safeguards.
N a tio n a l a n d
used
hazardous substances
c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f hazardous
r e g io n a l r e g u la tio n s g o v e r n th e u s e o f a n d e x p o s u r e to
in e q u i p m e n t . T h e s e
substances
m a y in c lu d e :
in
th e
m anner
re g u la tio n s
in
w h ic h
do
n o t e n a b le
o th e r e n e rg y
a p ra c tic a l
so u rce s
a re
c la s s ifie d
in
th is
d o c u m e n t.
to k in e tic e n e r g y tr a n s f e r to a b o d y p a r t w h e n
a c o llis io n
T h e r e f o r e , e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s a r e n o t a p p l i e d in C l a u s e 7 .
0.9
Mechanically-caused injury
M e c h a n ic a lly -c a u s e d
o ccu rs
re la tiv e
i n j u r y is d u e
b e tw e e n
a body
m o tio n
b e tw e e n
p a rt a n d
a n e q u ip m e n t p a rt. T h e
a b o d y p a rt a n d
accessible
k in e tic e n e rg y
is a f u n c t i o n
p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t,
e je c te d fr o m th e e q u ip m e n t th a t c o llid e w ith a b o d y p a rt.
E x a m p le s o f k in e tic e n e rg y s o u rc e s a re :
-
b o d y m o tio n re la tiv e to s h a rp e d g e s a n d c o rn e rs ;
-
par t m o tio n d u e to r o ta tin g o r o th e r m o v in g p a rts , in c lu d in g p in c h p o in ts ;
-
par t m o tio n d u e to lo o s e n in g , e x p lo d in g , o r im p lo d in g p a rts ;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
in c lu d in g
o f th e
p a rts
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to in s ta b ility ;
-
e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to w a ll, c e ilin g , o r ra c k m o u n tin g m e a n s fa ilu re ;
-
e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to h a n d le fa ilu re ;
-
par t m o tio n d u e to a n e x p lo d in g
-
e q u i p m e n t m o tio n d u e to c a rt o r s ta n d in s ta b ility o r fa ilu re .
battery;
basic safeguard a g a i n s t m e c h a n i c a l l y - c a u s e d
s o u r c e . Basic safeguards m a y i n c l u d e :
The
-
ro u nd e d e d g e s and co rn e rs;
-
an
enclosure
to p r e v e n t a m o v in g p a rt fro m
-
an
enclosure
to p r e v e n t e x p e llin g a m o v in g p a rt;
-
a
-
m e a n s to s to p th e m o tio n o f a m o v in g p a rt;
-
m e a n s to s ta b iliz e th e e q u ip m e n t;
-
r o b u s t h a n d le s ;
-
r o b u s t m o u n tin g m e a n s ;
-
m e a n s to c o n ta in p a r ts e x p e lle d d u r in g
safety interlock
i n j u r y is a f u n c t i o n
b e in g
accessible;
to c o n tro l a c c e s s to a n o th e r w is e m o v in g p a rt;
explosion
o r im p lo s io n .
supplementary safeguard a g a i n s t m e c h a n i c a l l y - c a u s e d i n j u r y
s p e c i f i c e n e r g y s o u r c e . Supplementary safeguards m a y i n c l u d e :
The
-
instructional safeguards;
-
i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d tra in in g ;
-
additional
-
safety interlocks.
enclosures
is
a
fu n c tio n
of
th e
o r b a rrie rs ;
reinforced safeguard a g a i n s t m e c h a n i c a l l y - c a u s e d
e n e r g y s o u r c e . Reinforced safeguards m a y i n c l u d e :
The
-
ex t r a th ic k g la s s o n th e fro n t o f a C R T ;
-
r a c k s lid e -ra ils a n d m e a n s o f s u p p o rt;
-
safety interlock.
0.10
o f th e s p e c ific e n e rg y
in ju ry
is a f u n c t i o n
o f th e
s p e c ific
Thermally-caused injury (skin burn)
0.10.1
Models for thermally-caused injury
T h e rm a lly -c a u s e d
in ju ry
m ay
occur
when
th e rm a l
e n e rg y
c a p a b le
of
c a u s in g
in ju ry
is
tr a n s fe r r e d to a b o d y p a r t ( s e e F ig u r e 7).
T h e rm a l
e n e rg y
tra n s fe r o c c u rs
when
a
body
to u c h e s
a
h o t e q u ip m e n t
p a rt. T h e
e x te n t o f
in ju ry d e p e n d s o n th e te m p e r a tu r e d iffe re n c e , th e th e rm a l m a s s o f th e o b je c t, ra te o f th e rm a l
e n e r g y tr a n s fe r to th e s k in , a n d d u r a tio n o f c o n ta c t.
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s d o c u m e n t o n l y a d d r e s s
b y c o n d u c tio n . T h is d o c u m e n t d o e s n o t a d d re s s
b y c o n v e c tio n o r ra d ia tio n .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
safeguards
safeguards
a g a in s t th e rm a l e n e rg y tra n s fe r
a g a in s t th e rm a l e n e rg y tra n s fe r
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
IEC
Figure 7 - Schematic and model for thermally-caused injury
D e p e n d in g
on
th e
te m p e ra tu re ,
c o n ta c t
d u ra tio n ,
m a te ria l
p ro p e rtie s ,
and
m ass
of
th e
m a t e r i a l , t h e p e r c e p t i o n o f t h e h u m a n b o d y v a r i e s f r o m w a r m t h t o h e a t t h a t m a y r e s u l t in p a in
o r in ju ry (b u rn ).
0.10.2
Models for protection against thermally-caused pain or injury
O n e o r m o re
p a in o r in ju r y
safeguards a r e i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n a t h e r m a l
a n d a n ordinary person ( s e e F i g u r e 8 ) .
e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g
IEC
Figure 8 - Model for protection against thermally-caused injury
Under
normal operating conditions
a g a in s t th e rm a lly -c a u s e
a th e rm a l e n e rg y s o u rc e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
abnormal operating conditions, p r o t e c t i o n i s u s e d
p a i n . F o r s u c h p r o t e c t i o n , a basic safeguard i s i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n
c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g p a i n a n d a n ordinary person.
and
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault
conditions, p r o t e c t i o n i s u s e d a g a i n s t t h e r m a l l y - c a u s e d i n j u r y . F o r s u c h p r o t e c t i o n , a basic
safeguard a n d a supplementary safeguard a r e i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g i n j u r y a n d a n ordinary person.
Under
basic safeguard
The
a g a in s t a th e rm a l e n e rg y
so u rce
c a p a b le
o f c a u s in g
p a in
o r in ju ry
is
t h e r m a l i n s u l a t i o n p l a c e d b e t w e e n t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a b o d y p a r t . In s o m e c a s e s , a
basic
safeguard a g a i n s t a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b l e o f
instructional safeguard i d e n t i f y i n g t h e h o t p a r t s a n d h o w
s o m e c a s e s , a basic safeguard r e d u c e s t h e l i k e l i h o o d
be
s o u rc e fro m
control
p a in
or
in ju ry
m ay
an
t o r e d u c e t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y . In
of a
n o n -in ju rio u s
th e rm a l
e n e rg y
b e c o m in g a th e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r in ju ry .
E x a m p le s o f s u c h
-
c a u s in g
of
basic safeguards
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
a re :
b e in g
c o n v e rte d
to
th e rm a l
e n e rg y
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
a
thermostat);
-
h e a t s in k in g , e tc .
supplementary safeguard
The
th e rm a l
in s u la tio n
p la c e d
a g a in s t a th e rm a l e n e rg y s o u rc e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g
b e tw e e n
th e
e n e rg y
so u rce
and
supplementary safeguard a g a i n s t a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
m a y b e a n instructional safeguard i d e n t i f y i n g t h e h o t p a r t s
a
body
p a rt.
In
som e
i n j u r y is
cases,
a
c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r in ju r y
a n d h o w to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f in ju ry .
0.11
Radiation-caused injury
R a d ia tio n -c a u s e d
i n j u r y w i t h i n t h e s c o p e o f t h i s d o c u m e n t is g e n e r a l l y a t t r i b u t e d t o o n e o f t h e
fo llo w in g e n e rg y tra n s fe r m e c h a n is m s :
-
heating o f a b o d y o rg a n
caused
b y e x p o s u r e to n o n - io n is in g r a d ia tio n , s u c h a s th e h ig h ly
lo c a lis e d e n e r g y o f a la s e r im p in g in g o n th e re tin a ; o r
-
a u d i t o r y in ju r y c a u s e d b y o v e r s tim u la t io n o f th e e a r b y e x c e s s iv e p e a k s o r s u s ta in e d lo u d
s o u n d , le a d in g to p h y s ic a l o r n e rv e d a m a g e ; o r
-
X-radiation; or
-
U V ra d ia tio n .
R a d i a t e d e n e r g y is t r a n s f e r r e d b y i m p i n g e m e n t o f w a v e e m i s s i o n u p o n a b o d y p a r t .
basic safeguard a g a i n s t r a d i a t i o n - c a u s e d i n j u r y
enclosure t h a t i s o p a q u e t o t h e r a d i a t e d e n e r g y .
The
is c o n t a i n m e n t o f t h e e n e r g y w i t h i n
supplementary safeguards a g a i n s t r a d i a t i o n - c a u s e d
supplementary safeguards m a y i n c l u d e safety interlocks t o d i s c o n n e c t
T h e re
a re
se ve ra l
in ju ry .
power
to
an
The
th e
g e n e ra to r, ta m p e r - p r o o f s c re w s to p re v e n t u n a u th o riz e d a c c e s s , e tc .
The
basic safeguard
a g a i n s t a u d i t o r y i n j u r y is t o l i m i t t h e a c o u s t i c o u t p u t o f p e r s o n a l m u s i c
p la y e rs a n d th e ir a s s o c ia te d h e a d p h o n e s a n d e a rp h o n e s .
E x a m p le s o f
supplementary safeguards
a g a in s t a u d it o r y p a in a n d in ju r y a re th e p r o v is io n o f
w a r n in g s a n d in fo r m a tio n a d v is in g th e u s e r h o w to u s e th e e q u ip m e n t c o r r e c tly .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
AUDIO/VIDEO, INFORMATION AND
COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT Part 1: Safety requirements
1
Scope
T h i s p a r t o f I E C 6 2 3 6 8 is a p p l i c a b l e t o t h e s a f e t y o f e l e c t r i c a l a n d e l e c t r o n i c e q u i p m e n t w i t h i n
th e fie ld o f a u d io , v id e o , in fo r m a tio n
m a c h in e s
w ith
rated voltage
a
a n d c o m m u n ic a tio n te c h n o lo g y , a n d b u s in e s s a n d o ffic e
not
e x c e e d in g
600 V.
T h is
docum ent
does
not
in c lu d e
re q u ire m e n ts fo r p e rfo rm a n c e o r fu n c tio n a l c h a ra c te ris tic s o f e q u ip m e n t.
NOTE 1
Examples of equipment within the scope of this document are given in Annex A.
NOTE 2
A rated voltage of 600 V is considered to include equipment rated 400/690 V.
T h i s d o c u m e n t is a ls o a p p l i c a b l e to :
-
components
and
s u b a s s e m b lie s
in te n d e d
fo r
in c o rp o ra tio n
in
th is
e q u ip m e n t.
Such
c o m p o n e n ts a n d s u b a s s e m b lie s n e e d n o t c o m p ly w ith e v e r y r e q u ir e m e n t o f th is d o c u m e n t,
p ro v id e d
th a t
th e
c o m p le te
e q u ip m e n t,
in c o rp o ra tin g
such
c o m p o n e n ts
and
s u b a s s e m b lie s , d o e s c o m p ly ;
-
external
p o w e r s u p p ly
u n its
in te n d e d
to s u p p ly
o th e r e q u ip m e n t w ith in
th e s c o p e
o f th is
d o c u m e n t;
-
a c c e s s o r i e s in te n d e d to b e u s e d w ith e q u ip m e n t w ith in th e s c o p e o f th is d o c u m e n t;
-
l arge
e q u ip m e n t
in s ta lle d
restricted access areas.
in
For
e q u ip m e n t
h a v in g
la rg e
m a c h in e r y a s p e c ts , a d d itio n a l r e q u ir e m e n ts m a y a p p ly ; a n d
-
e q u i p m e n t t o b e u s e d in t r o p i c a l r e g i o n s .
T h is
docum ent
a ls o
in c lu d e s
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e in s ta lle d
outdoor equipment
a ls o
in s ta lla tio n
in t h e f i e l d
te c h n o lo g y
e q u ip m e n t
a p p ly ,
w h e re
a u d io /v id e o ,
in a n
re le v a n t,
a n d s u p p lie d fo r h o u s in g
to
be
in s ta lle d
in
an
to
in fo rm a tio n
and
c o m m u n ic a tio n
outdoor location. T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r
outdoor enclosures s u i t a b l e f o r d i r e c t
a u d io /v id e o , in fo rm a tio n
outdoor location.
See
a n d c o m m u n ic a tio n
Annex Y
fo r
s p e c ific
c o n s t r u c t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s n o t c o v e r e d e l s e w h e r e in t h i s d o c u m e n t .
E a c h in s ta lla tio n
m a y h a v e p a r t i c u l a r r e q u i r e m e n t s . In a d d i t i o n , r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p r o t e c t i o n o f
outdoor equipment
th e
a g a in s t th e e ffe c ts o f d ir e c t lig h tn in g s trik e s a re n o t c o v e r e d
b y th is
d o c u m e n t.
NOTE 3
T h is
For information on this subject, see IEC 62305-1,
docum ent assum es
a
m a x im u m
a ltitu d e
of 2 000 m
u n le s s
o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d
b y th e
m a n u f a c t u r ㊀r
A d d itio n a l
re q u ire m e n ts
c o m m o n ly
used
fo r
e q u ip m e n t
c o m m u n ic a tio n
h a v in g
c a b le s ,
such
th e
as
c a p a b ility
USB
or
to
s u p p ly
E th e rn e t
DC
(P o E ),
power
a re
over
g iv e n
in
IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 3 . IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 3 d o e s n o t a p p ly to :
-
e q u i p m e n t s u p p ly in g p o w e r u s in g p r o p r ie ta r y c o n n e c to r s ; o r
-
e q u i p m e n t u s in g a p r o p r ie ta r y p ro to c o l fo r p o w e r s e le c tio n .
T h is d o c u m e n t s p e c ifie s
persons.
A d d itio n a l
safeguards
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
m ay
ordinary persons， instructed persons,
a p p ly
fo r
e q u ip m e n t
in te n d e d fo r u s e b y c h ild re n o r s p e c ific a lly a ttra c tiv e to c h ild re n .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th a t
is
c le a rly
and
skilled
d e s ig n e d
or
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 4 In Australia, the work conducted by an instructed person or a skilled person may require formal
licensing from regulatory authorities.
NOTE 5 In Germany, in many cases a person may only be regarded as an instructed person or a skilled person
if certain legal requirements are fulfilled.
T h is d o c u m e n t d o e s n o t a p p l y to :
-
equipment
w ith
n o n -s e lf-c o n ta in e d
h a za rd o u s
m o v in g
p a rts ,
such
as
ro b o tic
e q u ip m e n t;
and
NOTE 6 For requirements related to robotic equipment in an industrial environment, see IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-11, ISO 10218-1 and ISO 10218-2.
-
personal
ca re
ro b o ts ,
in c lu d in g
m o b ile
se rva n t
ro b o ts ,
p h y s ic a l
a s s is ta n t
ro b o ts ,
and
p e rs o n c a rrie r ro b o ts ; a n d
NOTE 7
-
power
For requirements related to personal care robots, see ISO 13482.
s u p p ly
s y s te m s
g e n e ra to r s e ts ,
th a t
battery
a re
not
an
in te g ra l
p a rt
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
such
as
m o to r-
b a c k u p s y s te m s a n d d is trib u tio n tra n s fo rm e rs .
T h is d o c u m e n t d o e s n o t a d d re s s :
routine tests;
-
m a n u f a c t u r i n g p ro c e s s e s e x c e p t fo r
-
i n j u r i o u s e ffe c ts o f g a s e s re le a s e d b y th e rm a l d e c o m p o s itio n o r c o m b u s tio n ;
-
disposal p ro ce sse s;
-
e f f e c t s o f t r a n s p o r t ( o t h e r t h a n a s s p e c i f i e d in t h i s d o c u m e n t ) ;
-
e f f e c t s o f s t o r a g e o f m a t e r ia ls , c o m p o n e n t s , o r th e e q u ip m e n t its e lf;
-
t he lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry fro m
-
t h e lik e lih o o d o f th e r m a l in ju r y d u e to r a d ia te d o r c o n v e c te d th e r m a l e n e r g y ;
-
t he lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry d u e to fla m m a b le liq u id s ;
-
t h e u s e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t in o x y g e n - e n r i c h e d o r
-
e x p o s u r e t o c h e m i c a l s o t h e r t h a n a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 7 ;
-
e l e c t r o s t a t i c d is c h a rg e e v e n ts ;
-
e x p o s u r e to e le c t r o m a g n e t ic fie ld s ;
-
e n v i r o n m e n t a l a s p e c ts ; or
-
r e q u i r e m e n t s fo r fu n c tio n a l s a fe ty , e x c e p t fo r th o s e re la te d to
p a rtic u la te ra d ia tio n s u c h a s a lp h a p a rtic le s a n d b e ta p a rtic le s ;
explosive
a tm o s p h e re s ;
work cells.
NOTE 8 For specific functional and software safety requirements of electronic safety-related systems (for
example, protective electronic circuits), see IEC 61508-1.
2
The
Normative references
fo llo w in g
c o n te n t
d o c u m e n ts
c o n s titu te s
a re
re fe rre d
re q u ire m e n ts
of
to
th is
in t h e
t e x t in s u c h
d o c u m e n t.
For
a way
d a te d
th a t s o m e
re fe re n c e s ,
o r a ll o f t h e i r
o n ly
th e
e d itio n
c ite d a p p lie s . F o r u n d a te d r e fe re n c e s , th e la te s t e d itio n o f th e re fe r e n c e d d o c u m e n t (in c lu d in g
a n y a m e n d m e n ts ) a p p lie s .
IE C 6 0 0 2 7 -1 ,
IE C 6 0 0 6 5 ,
Letter symbols to be used in electrical technology - Part 1: General
Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus - Safety requirements
IE C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 6 ,
Environmental testing - Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal)
IE C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 1 1 ,
mist
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Basic environmental testing procedures - Part 2-11: Tests - Test Ka: Salt
旧C
IE C 6 0 0 6 8 -2 -7 8 ,
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Environmental testing - Part 2-78: Tests - Test Cab: Damp heatf steady
state
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification
- Coding principles for indicators and actuators
IE C 6 0 0 7 3 ,
Power transformers - Part 14: Liquid-immersed power transformers using
high-temperature insulation materials
IE C 6 0 0 7 6 - 1 4 ，
Plugs and socket-outlets for domestic and similar general use standardized in
member countries o f IEC
IE C T R 6 0 0 8 3 ,
IE C 6 0 0 8 5 ,
Electrical insulation - Thermal evaluation and designation
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -4 ,
Primary batteries - Part 4: Safety of lithium batteries
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -5 ,
Primary batteries - Part 5: Safety of batteries with aqueous electrolyte
IE C 6 0 1 0 7 - 1 :1 9 9 7 ,
transmissions frequencies
Methods of measurement on receivers for television broadcast
Part 1: General considerations - Measurements at radio and video
Method for the determination of the proof and the comparative tracking indices of
solid insulating materials
IE C 6 0 1 1 2 ,
IE C 6 0 1 2 7 (a ll p a r t s ) ,
Miniature fuses
Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V - Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 - 1 ，
Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V - Part 2: Test methods
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 - 2 :1 9 9 7 ,
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 - 2 :1 9 9 7 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 3
Rubber insulated cables - Rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 0 2 4 5 -1 ,
Fluids for electrotechnical applications transformers and switchgear
IE C 6 0 2 9 6 ,
Unused mineral insulating oils for
IE C 6 0 3 0 9 (a ll p a r ts ) ,
Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 (a ll p a r ts ) ,
Specifications for particular types of winding wires
Specifications for particular types of winding wires - Part 0-7: General
requirements - Fully insulated (FIW) zero-defect enamelled round copper wire
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 - 0 - 7 :2 0 1 7 ,
Specifications for particular types of winding wires polyimide tape wrapped round copper wire， class 240
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 -4 3 ,
Part 43: Aromatic
Specifications for particular types of winding wires - Part 56: Solderable fully
insulated (FIW) zero-defect polyurethane enamelled round copper wire, class 180
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 -5 6 ,
IE C 6 0 3 2 0 (a ll p a r ts ) ,
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes - Part 1:
General requirements
IE C 6 0 3 2 0 -1 ,
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Part 7 - 2 : Test
for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for 1 kW pre­
mixed flame
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 -1 -2 ,
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Part 1-3: Test
for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for
determination of flaming droplets/particles
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 -1 -3 ,
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Part 2 - 2 ; Test
for vertical flame propagation for a single small insulated wire or cable - Procedure for
diffusion flame
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 -2 -2 ,
Fixed capacitors for use in electronic equipment - Part 14: Sectional
specification: Fixed capacitors for electromagnetic interference suppression and connection to
the supply mains
IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 ，
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 ,
Graphical symbols for use on equipment,
a v a ila b le
fro m :
< h ttp ://w w w .g ra p h ic a l-
s y m b o ls .in fo /e q u ip m e n t>
IE C 6 0 5 2 9 ,
Degrees o f protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1:
Principles, requirements and tests
IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 ,
Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 3: Use
of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution
IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -3 ,
Thermal-links - Requirements and application guide
IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 ,
Fire hazard testing - Part 2-11: Glowing/hot-wire based test methods Glow-wire flammability test method for end-products (GWEPT)
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 ,
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 0 - 2 ,
Fire hazard testing - Part 10-2: Abnormal heat - Ball pressure test method
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 0 - 3 ,
Fire hazard testing -
Part 10-3: Abnormal heat -
Mould stress relief
distortion test
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-5: Test flames - Needle-flame test
method - Apparatus, confirmatory test arrangement and guidance
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 :2 0 1 6 ,
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-10: Test flames - 50 W horizontal and vertical
flame test methods
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0 ,
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 0 :2 0 1 5 ,
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-20: Test flames - 500 W flame test
methods
Fire hazard testing - Part 11-21: Test flames - 500 W vertical flame test
method for tubular polymeric materials
IE C T S 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 1 ,
Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive
services - Part 11: Safety
IE C 6 0 7 2 8 - 1 1 :2 0 1 6 ,
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 (a ll p a r t s ) ,
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use
旧C
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ,
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Automatic electrical controls - Part 1: General requirements
Thermistors - Directly heated positive temperature coefficient - Part 1:
Generic specification
IE C 6 0 7 3 8 -1 :2 0 0 6 ,
Semiconductor devices - Discrete devices - Part
devices - Photocouplers
IE C 6 0 7 4 7 -5 -5 :2 0 0 7 ,
5 -5 ;
Optoelectronic
IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 :2 0 0 7 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 5
IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 ,
Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and requirements
IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -2 ,
Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fibre communication systems
(OFCS)
Safety of laser products - Part 12: Safety of free space optical communication
systems used for transmission of information
IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 2 ,
IE C 6 0 8 3 6 ,
Specifications for unused silicone insulating liquids for electrotechnical purposes
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 3 :2 0 0 9 ,
Winding wires - Test methods - Part 3: Mechanical properties
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 3 :2 0 0 9 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 3
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 5 :2 0 0 8 ,
Winding wires - Test methods - Part 5: Electrical properties
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 5 :2 0 0 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 1
Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes - Part 1: General
IE C 6 0 8 8 4 -1 ,
requirements
Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 11: Vented types - General requirements
and methods of tests
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 1 1 ,
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 2 1 :2 0 0 4 ,
Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 21: Valve regulated types - Methods
of test
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -2 2 ,
Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 22: Valve regulated types - Requirements
IEC system of plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes Part 1: Plugs and socket-outlets 16 A 250 V AC
IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -1 ,
IEC system of plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes Part 2: Plugs and socket-outlets 15 A 125 V AC
IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -2 ,
IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -1 ,
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 5 - 5 : Control circuit devices
and switching elements - Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function
IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 ,
IE C 6 0 9 5 0 -1 ,
Information technology equipment - Safety - Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 ,
Methods of measurement of touch current and protective conductor current
Connecting devices for low-voltage circuits for household and similar purposes
- Part 1: General requirements
IE C 6 0 9 9 8 -1 ,
Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for
screw-type and screwless-type clamping units - Part 1: General requirements and particular
requirements for clamping units for conductors from 0,2 mm2 up to 35 mm2 (included)
IE C 6 0 9 9 9 -1 ,
Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for
screw-type and screwless-type clamping units - Part 2: Particular requirements for clamping
units for conductors above 35 mm2 up to 300 mm2 (included)
IE C 6 0 9 9 9 -2 ,
IE C 6 1 0 3 9 ,
Classification of insulating liquids
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 -1 ,
Varistors for use in electronic equipment - Part 1: Generic specification
Varistors for use in electronic equipment - Part 2: Sectional specification
for surge suppression varistors
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 -2 :1 9 9 1 ,
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9
General purpose lead-acid batteries (valve-regulated types) - Part 1: General
requirements, functional characteristics - Methods of test
IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -1 ,
General purpose lead-acid batteries
Dimensions, terminals and marking
IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -2 ,
IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1 :2 0 1 6 ,
IE C 6 1 0 9 9 ,
(valve-regulated
types) -
Part 2:
Switches for appliances - Part 1: General requirements
Insulating liquids - Specifications for unused synthetic organic esters for electrical
purposes
IE C 6 1 2 0 4 -7 ,
Low-voltage power supplies - Part 7: Safety requirements
Marking of electrical equipment with ratings related to electrical supply - Safety
requirements
IE C 6 1 2 9 3 ,
Secondary cells and batteries for renewable energy storage - General
requirements and methods of test
IE C 6 1 4 2 7 (a ll p a r t s ) ,
Secondary cells and batteries - Test methods for checking the performance of
devices designed for reducing explosion hazards - Lead-acid starter batteries
IE C T S 6 1 4 3 0 ,
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes Guide to designation of current in alkaline secondary cell and battery standards
IE C 6 1 4 3 4 ,
Safety of power transformers, power supplies， reactors and similar
products - Part 1: General requirements and tests
IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 7 ,
\EC 6A55&-2-A6, Safety of transformers, reactors， power supply units and similar products for
voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-16: Particular requirements and tests for switch mode power
supply units and transformers for switch mode power supply units
Low-voltage surge protective devices - Part 11: Surge protective devices
connected to low-voltage power systems - Requirements and test methods
IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -1 1 :2 0 1 1 ,
Components for low-voltage surge protective devices Performance requirements and test methods for metal oxide varistors (MOV)
IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 ,
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ,
requirements
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Electromechanical elementary relays -
Part 331:
Part 1: General and safety
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
\EC 61959， Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes Mechanical tests for sealed portable secondary cells and batteries
IE C 6 1 9 6 5 ,
Mechanical safety of cathode ray tubes
IE C 6 1 9 8 4 ,
Connectors - Safety requirements and tests
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid
electrolytes - Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary cells, and for batteries made
from them, for use in portable applications
IE C 6 2 1 3 3
(a ll
p a rts ),
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes
- Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary cells, and for batteries made from them,
for use in portable applications - Part 1: Nickel systems
IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -1 ,
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes
- Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary lithium cells, and for batteries made from
them， for use in portable applications - Part 2: Lithium systems
IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -2 ,
Safety of primary and secondary lithium cells and batteries during transport
IE C 6 2 2 8 1 ,
Electrical insulation systems (EIS) - Thermal evaluation of combined liquid
and solid components - Part 1: General requirements
IE C T S 6 2 3 3 2 -1 ,
IE C 6 2 4 4 0 :2 0 0 8 ,
Electric cables with a rated voltage not exceeding 450/750 V - Guide to use
IE C 6 2 4 7 1 :2 0 0 6 ,
Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems
IE C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 :2 0 1 5 ,
Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems - Part 5: Image
projectors
Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations - Part 2:
Stationary batteries
IE C 6 2 4 8 5 -2 ,
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes Safety requirements for secondary lithium cells and batteries, for use in industrial applications
IE C 6 2 6 1 9 ,
Rubber， vulcanized or thermoplastic properties
IS O 3 7 ，
IS O 1 7 8 ,
Determination o f tensile stress-strain
Plastics - Determination of flexural properties
IS O 1 7 9 -1 ,
Plastics - Determination o f Charpy impact properties - Part 1: Non-instrumented
impact test
IS O 1 8 0 ,
Plastics - Determination of Izod impact strength
IS O 3 0 6 ,
Plastics - Thermoplastic materials - Determination of Vicat softening temperature
(VST)
IS O 5 2 7 (a ll p a r ts ) ,
IS O 8 7 1 ,
Plastics - Determination o f tensile properties
Plastics - Determination of ignition temperature using a hot-air furnace
Flexible cellular polymeric materials elongation at break
IS O 1 7 9 8 ,
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Determination o f tensile strength and
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
IS O 1 8 1 7 :2 0 1 5 ,
Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic - Determination of the effect of liquids
Determination of flash point - Pensky-Martens closed cup method
IS O 2 7 1 9 ,
IS O 3 2 3 1 ,
Paints and varnishes containing sulfur dioxide
Determination of resistance to humid atmospheres
IS O 3 6 7 9 ,
Determination o f flash no-flash and flash point - Rapid equilibrium closed cup
method
IS O 3 8 6 4 (a ll p a r t s ) ,
Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs
Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Part 2: Design principles
for product safety labels
IS O 3 8 6 4 -2 ,
IS O 4 8 9 2 -1 ,
Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 1: General
guidance
IS O 4 8 9 2 -2 ,
Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 2: Xenon-arc
lamps
Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 4: Open-flame
carbon-arc lamps
IS O 4 8 9 2 -4 ,
Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Registered symbols,
IS O 7 0 0 0 ，
a v a ila b le
fro m :
< h ttp ://w w w .g ra p h ic a l-s y m b o ls .in fo /e q u ip m e n t>
Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Safety signs used in
workplaces and public areas
IS O 7 0 1 0 ,
IS O 8 2 5 6 ,
Plastics - Determination of tensile-impact strength
Cellular plastics - Determination o f horizontal burning characteristics of small
specimens subjected to a small flame
IS O 9 7 7 2 ,
Plastics - Determination o f burning behaviour of thin flexible vertical specimens in
contact with a small-flame ignition source
IS O 9 7 7 3 ,
Corrosion of metals and alloys - Accelerated testing involving cyclic exposure to
salt mist， “dry” and “wet” conditions
IS O 1 4 9 9 3 ,
Corrosion tests in artificial atmospheres - Accelerated corrosion tests involving
alternate exposure to corrosion-promoting gases, neutral salt-spray and drying
IS O 2 1 2 0 7 ,
ASTM
D412,
Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
Tension
ASTM
D 4 7 1 -9 8 ,
Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect o f Liquids
Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded, and
Molded Urethane Foams
ASTM
D3574,
Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with
portable audio equipment - Maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology and
limit considerations - Part 1: General method for “one package equipment”
E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 :2 0 1 3,
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with portable
audio equipment - Maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology and limit
considerations - Part 2: Matching of sets with headphones if either or both are offered
separately
EN 5 0 3 3 2 -2 ,
Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with personal
music players - maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology - Part 3:
Measurement method for sound dose management
EN 5 0 3 3 2 -3 ,
3
Terms, definitions and abbreviated terms
3.1
Energy source abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
ES
Electrical energy source
ES1
Electrical energy source class 1
ES2
Electrical energy source class 2
ES3
Electrical energy source class 3
MS
Mechanical energy source
MS1
Mechanical energy source class 1
MS2
Mechanical energy source class 2
MS3
Mechanical energy source class 3
PS
Power source
PS1
Power source class 1
PS2
Power source class 2
PS3
Power source class 3
RS
Radiation energy source
RS1
Radiation energy source class 1
RS2
Radiation energy source class 2
RS3
Radiation energy source class 3
TS
Thermal energy source
TS1
Thermal energy source class 1
TS2
Thermal energy source class 2
TS3
Thermal energy source class 3
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
see 5.2
see 8.2
see 6.2
see 10.2
see 9.2
旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 ©
3.2
IE C 2 0 1 8
Other abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
CD
compact disc
CD ROM
compact disc read-only memory
CRT
cathode ray tube
CSD
calculated sound dose
CTI
comparative tracking index
DVD
digital versatile disc
E
sound exposure
EIS
electrical insulation system
EUT
equipment under test
FIW
fully insulated winding wire
GDT
gas discharge tube
IC
integrated circuit
ICX
integrated circuit with X-capacitor function
IR
infrared
LED
light emitting diode
LEL
lower explosion limit
LFC
liquid filled component
LPS
limited power source
MEL
momentary exposure level
MOV
metal oxide varistor
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NiCd
nickel cadmium
PIS
potential ignition source
PMP
personal music player
PoE
power over Ethernet
PPE
personal protective equipment
PTC
positive temperature coefficient
PTI
proof tracking index
RC
resistor-capacitor
RG
risk group
Sb
antimony
SEL
sound exposure level
SPD
surge protective device
SRME
slide rail mounted equipment
TSS
thyristor surge suppressor
UPS
uninterruptible power supply
USB
universal serial bus
UV
ultraviolet
VDR
voltage dependent resistor
VRLA
valve regulated lead acid
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
3.3
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Terms and definitions
F o r th e p u r p o s e s o f th is d o c u m e n t th e fo llo w in g te r m s a n d d e fin itio n s a p p ly .
IS O a n d
IE C
m a in ta in
te rm in o lo g ic a l
d a ta b a s e s
fo r
use
in
s ta n d a rd iz a tio n
a t th e
fo llo w in g
a d d re s s e s :
•
IE C E le c tro p e d ia : a v a ila b le a t h ttp ://w w w .e le c tr o p e d ia .o r g /
•
IS O O n lin e b ro w s in g p la tfo rm : a v a ila b le a t h ttp ://w w w .is o .o r g /o b p
For
th e
c o n v e n ie n c e
o f th e
u se r,
th e
d e fin e d
te rm s
a re
lis te d
b e lo w
in
a lp h a b e tic a l
o rd e r
in d ic a tin g th e n u m b e r o f th e d e fin e d te rm .
W h e re th e w o rd s “ v o lta g e ” a n d “ c u r r e n t” o r th e ir a b b re v ia tio n s a re u s e d , th e y a re R M S v a lu e s
u n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d .
5 V A c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .1
5 V B c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .2
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
3 .3 .7 .1
a c c e s s ib le
3 .3 .6 .1
a rc in g P IS
3 .3 .9 .2
b a c k fe e d
3 .3 .6 .2
b a c k fe e d s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .1
b a s ic in s u la tio n
3 .3 .5 .1
b a s ic s a fe g u a r d
3 .3 .1 1 .2
b a tte ry
3 .3 .1 7 .1
c a lc u la te d s o u n d d o s e , C S D
3 .3 .1 9 .1
c e ll
3 .3 .1 7 .2
c h e e s e c lo th
3 .3 .6 .3
c la s s I e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .1 5 .1
c l a s s II c o n s t r u c t i o n
3 .3 .1 5 .2
c l a s s II e q u i p m e n t
3 .3 .1 5 .3
c l a s s III e q u i p m e n t
3 .3 .1 5 .4
c le a ra n c e
3 .3 .1 2 .1
c o in / b u tto n c e ll b a tte r y
3 .3 .1 7 .3
c o m b u s tib le m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .1
c o n s u m a b le m a te ria l
3 .3 .1 6 .1
c r e e p a g e d is ta n c e
3 .3 .1 2 .2
D C v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .1
d ig ita l s ig n a l le v e l r e la t iv e to fu ll s c a le , d B F S
3 .3 .1 9 .5
d ir e c t p lu g -in e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .1
d is c o n n e c t d e v ic e
3 .3 .6 .4
d o u b le in s u la tio n
3 .3 .5 .2
d o u b le s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .3
e le c tric a l e n c lo s u re
3 .3 .2 .1
e n c lo s u re
3 .3 .2 .2
e q u ip m e n t s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .4
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
e x p lo s io n
3 .3 .1 6 .2
e x p lo s iv e
3 .3 .1 6 .3
e x te rn a l c irc u it
3 .3 .1 .1
fire e n c lo s u r e
3 .3 .2 .3
fix e d e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .2
fu lly in s u la te d w in d in g w ire , F IW
3 .3 .1 8 .1
fu n c tio n a l e a rth in g
3 .3 .6 .5
fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n
3 .3 .5 .3
g ra d e o f F IW
3 .3 .1 8 .2
h a n d -h e ld e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .3
h a z a rd o u s s u b s ta n c e
3 .3 .1 6 .4
H B 4 0 c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .3
H B 7 5 c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .4
H B F c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .5
H F -1 c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .6
H F -2 c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .7
h ig h e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g te m p e r a tu r e
3 .3 .1 7 .4
in s ta lla tio n s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .5
in s tru c te d p e rs o n
3 .3 .8 .1
in s tru c tio n a l s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .6
in s u la tin g liq u id
3 .3 .5 .4
in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n
3 .3 .7 .2
lo w e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g te m p e r a tu r e
3 .3 .1 7 .5
m a in s
3 .3 .1 .2
m a in s tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .2
m a te ria l fla m m a b ility c la s s
3 .3 .4 .2
m a x im u m
s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g c u rre n t
3 .3 .1 7 .6
m a x im u m
s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 7 .7
m e c h a n ic a l e n c lo s u re
3 .3 .2 .4
m o m e n t a r y e x p o s u r e le v e l, M E L
3 .3 .1 9 .2
m o v a b le e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .4
n o n -c lip p e d o u tp u t p o w e r
3 .3 .7 .3
n o n -d e ta c h a b le p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd
3 .3 .6 .6
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
3 .3 .7 .4
o rd in a ry p e rs o n
3 .3 .8 .2
o u td o o r e n c lo s u re
3 .3 .2 .5
o u td o o r e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .5
o u td o o r lo c a tio n
3 .3 .6 .7
p e a k re s p o n s e fre q u e n c y
3 .3 .7 .5
p e rm a n e n tly c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .6
p e rs o n a l s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .7
p lu g g a b le , ty p e A e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .7
p lu g g a b le , ty p e B e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .8
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
：
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
p o llu tio n d e g re e
3 .3 .6 .8
p o te n tia l ig n itio n s o u r c e , P IS
3 .3 .9 .1
p re c a u tio n a ry s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .8
p ro fe s s io n a l e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .9
p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .3
p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r
3 .3 .1 1 .9
p ro te c tiv e c o n d u c to r c u rre n t
3 .3 .1 4 .4
p ro te c tiv e c o n d u c to r
3 .3 .1 1 .1 0
p r o te c tiv e c u r r e n t ra tin g
3 .3 .1 0 .6
p r o te c tiv e e a rth in g
3 .3 .1 1 .1 1
p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r
3 .3 .1 1 .1 2
ra te d c u rre n t
3 .3 .1 0 .1
ra te d fre q u e n c y
3 .3 .1 0 .2
ra te d lo a d im p e d a n c e
3 .3 .7 .6
ra te d p o w e r
3 .3 .1 0 .3
ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e
3 .3 .1 0 .5
ra te d v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 0 .4
re a s o n a b ly fo re s e e a b le m is u s e
3 .3 .7 .7
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n
3 .3 .5 .5
re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .1 3
re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .5
r e s is tiv e P IS
3 .3 .9 .3
re s tric te d a c c e s s a re a
3 .3 .6 .9
R M S w o rk in g v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .6
ro u tin e te s t
3 .3 .6 .1 0
s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .1 4
s a fe ty in te rlo c k
3 .3 .1 1 .1 5
s a m p lin g te s t
3 .3 .6 .1 1
s e c o n d a r y lith iu m
b a tte ry
3 .3 .1 7 .8
s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n
3 .3 .7 .8
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n
3 .3 .7 .9
s k ill s a fe g u a r d
3 .3 .1 1 .1 6
s k ille d p e rs o n
3 .3 .8 .3
s o lid in s u la tio n
3 .3 .5 .6
so u n d e xp o su re , £
3 .3 .1 9 .3
s o u n d e x p o s u r e le v e l, S E L
3 .3 .1 9 .4
s ta tio n a ry e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .1 0
s to re d e n e rg y m o d e
3 .3 .6 .1 2
s u p p le m e n ta r y in s u la tio n
3 .3 .5 .7
s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd
3 .3 .1 1 .1 7
te m p e r a tu r e lim ite r
3 .3 .1 3 .1
te m p o ra ry o v e rv o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .7
th e rm a l c u t-o ff
3 .3 .1 3 .2
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
th e rm o s ta t
3 .3 .1 3 .3
to o l
3 .3 .6 .1 3
to u c h c u rre n t
3 .3 .6 .1 4
tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t
3 .3 .3 .1 1
ty p e te s t
3 .3 .6 .1 5
V -0 c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .8
V -1 c la s s m a te r ia l
3 .3 .4 .2 .9
V -2 c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .1 0
V T M - 0 c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .1 1
V T M -1
c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .1 2
V T M - 2 c la s s m a te ria l
3 .3 .4 .2 .1 3
w ire le s s p o w e r tra n s m itte r
3 .3 .3 .1 2
w o r k c e ll
3 .3 .6 .1 6
w o rk in g v o lta g e
3 .3 .1 4 .8
w ra p p in g tis s u e
3 .3 .6 .1 7
3.3.1
C irc u it te rm s
3.3.1.1
e x te rn a l c irc u it
e l e c t r i c a l c i r c u i t t h a t is e x t e r n a l t o t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t m a i n s
Note 1 to entry:
An external circuit is classified as ES1 ， ES2 or ES3, and PS1, PS2, or PS3.
3.3.1.2
m a in s
A C o r D C p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m
( e x te r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t ) th a t s u p p lie s o p e r a t in g p o w e r
t o t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d is P S 3
Note 1 to entry: Mains include public or private utilities and， unless otherwise specified in this document，
equivalent sources such as motor-driven generators and uninterruptible power supplies.
3.3.2
E n c lo s u re te rm s
3.3.2.1
e le c tric a l e n c lo s u re
e n c lo s u r e in te n d e d a s a s a f e g u a r d a g a in s t e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d in ju ry
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 6 -1 3 , m o d ifie d -
th e te rm s a fe g u a r d
has been used]
3.3.2.2
e n c lo s u re
h o u s in g a ffo rd in g th e ty p e a n d d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n s u ita b le fo r th e in te n d e d a p p lic a tio n
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 2 -3 5 ]
3.3.2.3
fire e n c lo s u re
e n c lo s u re
in te n d e d
as a s a fe g u a rd
o u ts id e th e e n c lo s u r e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a g a in s t th e
sp re a d
o f fire fro m
w ith in
th e e n c lo s u r e
to
旧C
3.3.2.4
mocha门 ical enclosure
enclosure i n t e n d e d a s a safeguard
3.3.2.5
outdoor enclosure
enclosure t h a t i s i n t e n d e d
location
to
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
a g a in s t m e c h a n ic a lly - c a u s e d p a in a n d in ju ry
p ro v id e
p ro te c tio n
fro m
s p e c ific
c o n d itio n s
in
outdoor
an
Note 1 to entry: An outdoor enclosure can also perform the functions of another enclosure, for example: a fire
enclosure; an electrical enclosure; a mechanical enclosure.
Note 2 to entry: A separate cabinet or housing into which the equipment is placed can provide the function of an
outdoor enclosure.
3.3.3
Equipment terms
3.3.3.1
direct plug-in equipment
e q u i p m e n t in w h i c h t h e mains
p lu g fo r m s a n in te g r a l p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t
enclosure
3.3.3.2
fixed equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is s p e c i f i e d
in t h e
in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s
to
o n ly
be
se cu re d
in
p la c e
by a
m e a n s d e fin e d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r
Note 1 to entry: Equipment that has a screw hole or other means to secure the equipment by an ordinary
person, such as for securement to a table or for earthquake protection, is not considered to be fixed equipment.
Note 2 to entry:
Typically, fixed equipment will be wall, ceiling or floor mounted.
3.3.3.3
hand-held equipment
movable equipment, o r
a p a rt o f a n y
k in d
o f e q u i p m e n t , t h a t is i n t e n d e d
to
b e h e ld
in t h e
h a n d d u rin g n o rm a l u s e
3.3.3.4
movable equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is e i t h e r :
- 1 8
-
k g o r l e s s in m a s s a n d i s n o t
provided
person
w ith
w h e e ls ,
c a s te rs ,
fixed equipment;
or
o th e r
m eans
or
to
fa c ilita te
m ovem ent
by
an
ordinary
a s r e q u ir e d to p e r f o r m its in t e n d e d u s e
3.3.3.5
outdoor equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n s t a l l e d o r e x p o s e d
in a n
outdoor location,
s p e c ifie d
b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r
t o c o m p l y w h o l l y o r in p a r t u n d e r s p e c i f i c c o n d i t i o n s
Note 1 to entry: Transportable equipment, for example, a laptop or notebook computer, or a telephone, is not
outdoor equipment unless specified by the manufacturer for continuous use in an outdoor location.
3.3.3.6
permanently connected equipment
e q u ip m e n t th a t c a n
use o f a
o n ly b e e le c tric a lly c o n n e c te d
to o r d is c o n n e c te d fr o m
th e
mains
b y th e
tool
3.3.3.7
pluggable equipment type A
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e
mains
o u tle t o r v ia a n o n - in d u s tr ia l a p p lia n c e c o u p le r , o r b o th
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
v ia a n o n - in d u s tr ia l p lu g a n d
s o c k e t-
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry:
IEC 60320-1.
Examples are plugs and socket-outlets covered by standards such as IEC TR 60083 and
3.3.3.8
pluggable equipment type B
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e
mains
v ia a n in d u s tria l p lu g a n d s o c k e t- o u tle t
o r v ia a n in d u s tr ia l a p p lia n c e c o u p le r , o r b o th
Note 1 to entry:
Examples are plugs and socket-outlets covered by standards such as IEC 60309-1.
3.3.3.9
professional equipment
e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in t r a d e s , p r o f e s s i o n s o r i n d u s t r i e s a n d w h i c h is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a l e t o t h e
g e n e ra l p u b lic
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 6 1 :1 9 9 0 , 1 6 1 -0 5 -0 5 ]
3.3.3.10
stationary equipment
-
fixed equipment,
-
permanently connected equipment,
-
e q u i p m e n t t h a t , d u e t o its p h y s i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , is n o r m a l l y n o t m o v e d
Note 1 to entry:
or
or
Stationary equipment is neither movable equipment nor transportable equipment.
3.3.3.11
transportable equipment
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d t o b e r o u t i n e l y c a r r i e d
Note 1 to entry: Examples include notebook computers, CD players and portable accessories, including their
external power supplies.
3.3.3.12
wireless power transmitter
e q u ip m e n t th a t u s e s
e le c t r o m a g n e t ic fie ld s to tr a n s f e r e le c tr ic a l
p o w e r fo r c h a rg in g
battery
o p e ra te d h a n d -h e ld d e v ic e s
3.3.4
Flammability terms
3.3.4.1
combustible material
m a t e r ia l t h a t is c a p a b l e o f b e in g ig n i t e d o r b u r n e d
Note 1 to entry: All thermoplastic materials are considered capable of being ignited or burned regardless of the
material flammability class.
3.3.4.2
material flammability class
r e c o g n i t i o n o f t h e b u r n in g b e h a v i o u r o f m a t e r ia ls a n d t h e i r a b ilit y to e x t i n g u i s h if ig n it e d
Note 1 to entry: Materials are classified when tested in accordance with IEC 60695-11-10, IEC 60695-11-20,
ISO 9772 or ISO 9773.
3.3.4.2.1
5VA class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
in
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
5VA
a c c o rd in g
to
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.4.2.2
5VB class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
5VB
a c c o rd in g
to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0
3.3.4.2.3
HB40 class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
th e
th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
HB40
a c c o rd in g
to
th in n e s t
used
and
c la s s ifie d
HB75
a c c o rd in g
to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0
3.3.4.2.4
HB75 class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
th e
s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0
3.3.4.2.5
HBF class foamed material
f o a m e d m a t e r i a l t e s t e d in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s u s e d a n d c l a s s i f i e d H B F a c c o r d i n g
to IS O 9 7 7 2
3.3.4.2.6
HF-1 class foamed material
fo a m e d
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
H F -1
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
H F -2
a c c o rd in g to IS O 9 7 7 2
3.3.4.2.7
HF-2 class foamed material
fo a m e d
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
a c c o rd in g to IS O 9 7 7 2
3.3.4.2.8
V-0 class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
V -0
a c c o rd in g
to
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
V -1
a c c o rd in g
to
th e
th in n e s t
s ig n ific a n t
th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
V -2
a c c o rd in g
to
旧 C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0
3.3.4.2.9
V-1 class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0
3.3.4.2.10
V-2 class material
m a te ria l
te s te d
in
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0
3.3.4.2.11
VTM-0 class material
m a te ria l te s te d
in t h e
th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
V T M -0
a c c o rd in g
to
in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
V T M -1
a c c o rd in g
to
IS O 9 7 7 3
3.3.4.2.12
VTM-1 class material
m a te ria l te s te d
IS O 9 7 7 3
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
3.3.4.2.13
VTM-2 class material
m a te ria l te s te d
in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s
used
and
c la s s ifie d
V T M -2
a c c o rd in g
to
IS O 9 7 7 3
3.3.5
Electrical insulation
3.3.5.1
basic insulation
in s u la tio n to p r o v id e a
Note 1 to entry:
basic safeguard
a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k
This concept does not apply to insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.
3.3.5.2
double insulation
in s u la tio n c o m p ris in g b o th
basic insulation
and
supplementary insulation
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 6 -0 8 ]
3.3.5.3
functional insulation
in s u la tio n
b e tw e e n c o n d u c tiv e p a rts w h ic h
is n e c e s s a r y o n l y f o r t h e p r o p e r f u n c t i o n i n g o f t h e
e q u ip m e n t
3.3.5.4
insulating liquid
in s u la tin g m a te r ia l c o n s is t in g e n tir e ly o f a liq u id
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 2 1 2 :2 0 1 0 , 2 1 2 -1 1 - 0 4 ]
3.3.5.5
reinforced insulation
s in g le in s u la tio n s y s te m th a t p ro v id e s a d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k e q u iv a le n t
to
double insulation
3.3.5.6
solid insulation
in s u la tio n c o n s is tin g e n tir e ly o f s o lid m a te ria l
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 2 1 2 :2 0 1 0 , 2 1 2 -1 1 -0 2 ]
3.3.5.7
supplementary insulation
in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n
safeguard
3.3.6
a p p lie d
in a d d i t i o n
to
basic insulation
to
p ro v id e
a
supplementary
fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k
Miscellaneous
3.3.6.1
accessible
to u c h a b le b y a b o d y p a rt
Note 1 to entry:
A body part is represented by one or more of the probes specified in Annex V, as applicable.
3.3.6.2
backfeed
c o n d i t i o n in w h i c h a v o l t a g e o r e n e r g y a v a i l a b l e w i t h i n a
battery
b a c k e d u p s u p p l y is f e d b a c k
t o a n y o f t h e i n p u t t e r m i n a l s , e i t h e r d i r e c t l y o r b y a l e a k a g e p a t h w h i l e o p e r a t i n g in t h e
energy mode
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a n d w ith
mains
p o w e r n o t a v a ila b le
stored
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.6.3
cheesecloth
b le a c h e d c o tto n c lo th o f a p p r o x im a te ly 4 0 g / m 2
Note 1 to entry:
Cheesecloth is a coarse, loosely woven cotton gauze, originally used for wrapping cheese.
3.3.6.4
disconnect device
m eans
to
e le c tric a lly
d is c o n n e c t
e q u ip m e n t
fro m
th e
mains
th a t,
in
th e
open
p o s itio n ,
c o m p lie s w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s s p e c ifie d fo r is o la tio n
3.3.6.5
functional earthing
e a r t h i n g a p o i n t o r p o i n t s in a s y s t e m
o r in a n i n s t a l l a t i o n o r i n e q u i p m e n t , f o r p u r p o s e s o t h e r
th a n e le c tric a l s a fe ty
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 1 , 1 9 5 -0 1 -1 3 ]
3.3.6.6
non-detachable power supply cord
fle x ib le
s u p p ly
co rd
a ffix e d
to
o r a s s e m b le d
fro m th e e q u ip m e n t w ith o u t th e u s e o f
to
th e
fro m
th e
e q u ip m e n t a n d
th a t c a n n o t
be
re m o ve d
tools
3.3.6.7
outdoor location
lo c a tio n
fo r
e q u ip m e n t
w h e re
p ro te c tio n
w e a th e r
and
o th e r
o u td o o r
in flu e n c e s
p r o v i d e d b y a b u i l d i n g o r o t h e r s t r u c t u r e is l i m i t e d o r n o n - e x i s t e n t
3.3.6.8
pollution degree
n u m e ra l c h a r a c te r iz in g th e e x p e c te d p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v ir o n m e n t
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 5 8 1 :2 0 0 8 , 5 8 1 -2 1 -0 7 ]
3.3.6.9
restricted access area
a r e a accessible o n l y
to
skilled persons
and
to
instructed persons
w ith
th e
p ro p e r
a u th o riz a tio n
3.3.6.10
routine test
te s t to
w h ic h
each
in d iv id u a l
d e v ic e
is
s u b je c te d
d u rin g
o r a fte r
m a n u fa c tu re
to
a s c e rta in
w h e t h e r it c o m p l i e s w i t h c e r t a i n c r i t e r i a
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .1 9 .2 ]
3.3.6.11
sampling test
te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m fro m a b a tc h
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .1 9 .3 ]
3.3.6.12
stored energy mode
s ta b le m o d e o f o p e ra tio n th a t a
Note 1 to entry:
一
battery
b a c k e d up s u p p ly a tta in s u n d e r s p e c ifie d c o n d itio n s
In accordance with IEC 62040-1:2017, the specified conditions are as follows:
AC input power, is disconnected or is out of required tolerance;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
operating and output power is supplied by the energy storage device;
一
the load is within the specified rating of the battery backed up supply.
3.3.6.13
tool
o b je c t th a t c a n b e u s e d to o p e r a te a s c r e w , la tc h o r s im ila r fix in g m e a n s
Note 1 to entry:
Examples of tools include coins, tableware, screwdrivers, pliers, etc.
3.3.6.14
touch current
e le c tric c u rre n t th ro u g h
or one
accessible
a hum an
body when
b o d y p a rts to u c h tw o o r m o re
accessible
p a rts
p a rt a n d e a rth
3.3.6.15
type test
te s t
on
a
re p re s e n ta tiv e
s a m p le
w ith
th e
o b je c tiv e
of
d e te rm in in g
if,
as
d e s ig n e d
and
m a n u f a c t u r e d , it c a n m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h is d o c u m e n t
3.3.6.16
work cell
s p a c e w ith in
th e e q u ip m e n t o f s u c h
s iz e th a t a p e rs o n
can
e n te r c o m p le te ly o r p a rtia lly (fo r
e x a m p le , e n tir e lim b o r h e a d ) fo r s e r v ic in g o r o p e r a tin g th e e q u ip m e n t a n d w h e r e m e c h a n ic a l
h a za rd s m a y be p re s e n t
Note 1 to entry: A work cell can contain more than one compartment. A compartment can be used for either
operational or service purposes.
Note 2 to entry:
The equipment containing the work cell is typically installed within a restricted access area.
3.3.6.17
wrapping tissue
tis s u e b e tw e e n 12 g /m 2 a n d 3 0 g /m 2
Note 1 to entry:
3.3.7
The wrapping tissue is soft, thin, usually translucent paper used for wrapping delicate articles.
Operating and fault conditions
3.3.7.1
abnormal operating condition
te m p o r a ry o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
fault condition
t h a t is n o t a
normal operating condition
and
is n o t a
o f th e e q u ip m e n t its e lf
Note 1 to entry:
Abnormal operating conditions are specified in Clause B.3.
Note 2 to entry:
An abnormal operating condition may be introduced by the equipment or by a person.
Note 3 to entry:
safeguard.
single
An abnormal operating condition may result in a failure of a component, a device or a
3.3.7.2
intermittent operation
o p e ra tio n
in a s e r i e s o f c y c l e s , e a c h c o m p o s e d o f a p e r i o d o f o p e r a t i o n f o l l o w e d
b y a p e rio d
w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s w it c h e d o ff o r r u n n in g id le
3.3.7.3
non-clipped output power
s i n e w a v e p o w e r d i s s i p a t e d in t h e
rated load impedance,
o f c lip p in g on e ith e r o n e o r b o th p e a k s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
m e a s u re d a t 1 0 0 0 H z a t th e o n s e t
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
3.3.7.4
normal operating condition
m ode
o f o p e ra tio n
th a t re p re s e n ts
a s c lo s e ly
as
p o s s ib le
th e
ra n g e
o f n o rm a l
use
th a t can
re a s o n a b ly be e x p e c te d
Note 1 to entry: Unless otherwise specified, the most severe conditions of normal use are the most unfavourable
default values as specified in Clause B.2.
Note 2 to entry: Reasonably foreseeable misuse is not covered by normal operating conditions. Instead, it is
covered by abnormal operating conditions.
3.3.7.5
peak response frequency
te s t
fre q u e n c y
th a t
p ro d u ce s
th e
m a x im u m
o u tp u t
power
m e a su re d
at
th e
rated load
impedance
Note 1 to entry:
The frequency applied should be within the amplifier/transducer's intended operating range.
3.3.7.6
rated load impedance
im p e d a n c e o r re s is ta n c e , a s d e c la re d
b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r, b y w h ic h a n o u tp u t c irc u it s h o u ld
b e te rm in a te d
3.3.7.7
reasonably foreseeable misuse
use
of a
p ro d u c t,
p ro ce ss
o r s e rv ic e
in
a way
n o t in te n d e d
by th e
s u p p lie r,
b u t w h ic h
can
re s u lt fro m re a d ily p re d ic ta b le h u m a n b e h a v io u r
Note 1 to entry:
Reasonably foreseeable misuse is considered to be a form of abnormal operating conditions.
[S O U R C E : IS O /IE C
G u i d e 5 1 : 2 0 1 4 , 3 . 7 ，m o d i f i e d — I n t h e d e f i n i t i o n , " p r o d u c t o r s y s t e m " h a s
b e e n r e p l a c e d b y " p r o d u c t ，p r o c e s s o r s e r v i c e " . T h e N o t e s t o e n t r y h a v e b e e n r e p l a c e d . ]
3.3.7.8
short-time operation
o p e r a t i o n u n d e r normal operating conditions
e q u ip m e n t
is c o l d , t h e
in te rv a ls
a fte r e a ch
fo r
p e rio d
a
s p e c ifie d
o f o p e ra tio n
p e rio d ,
b e in g
s ta rtin g
s u ffic ie n t to
when
th e
a llo w
th e
e q u ip m e n t to c o o l d o w n to r o o m te m p e r a tu r e
3.3.7.9
single fault condition
c o n d itio n o f e q u ip m e n t w ith a fa u lt u n d e r
(b u t not a
reinforced safeguard)
Note 1 to entry:
3.3.8
normal operating condition
o f a s in g le
safeguard
o r o f a s in g le c o m p o n e n t o r a d e v ic e
Single fault conditions are specified in Clause B.4.
Persons
3.3.8.1
instructed person
p e rso n
skilled person a s t o e n e r g y s o u r c e s a n d w h o c a n
equipment safeguards a n d precautionary safeguards w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h o s e
in s tru c te d
re s p o n s ib ly u s e
or
s u p e rv is e d
by
a
e n e rg y so u rce s
Note 1 to entry: Supervised, as used in the definition, means having the direction and oversight of the
performance of others.
Note 2 to entry: In Germany, in many cases, a person may only be regarded as an instructed person if certain
legal requirements are fulfilled.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
3.3.8.2
ordinary person
p e r s o n w h o is n e i t h e r a
skilled person
nor an
instructed person
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 2 6 :2 0 0 4 , 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 3 ]
3.3.8.3
skilled person
p e rs o n w ith r e le v a n t e d u c a tio n
o r e x p e rie n c e to e n a b le
h im
o r h e r to id e n t if y h a z a r d s a n d to
ta k e a p p r o p r ia te a c tio n s to r e d u c e th e r is k s o f in ju r y to t h e m s e lv e s a n d o th e r s
Note 1 to entry: In Germany, in many cases, a person may only be regarded as an skilled person if certain legal
requirements are fulfilled.
[S O U R C E :
IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 2 6 :2 0 0 4 ,
8 2 6 -1 8 -0 1 ,
m o d ifie d
-
The
d e fin itio n
has
been
m ade
a p p l i c a b l e to a ll t y p e s o f h a z a r d s . ]
3.3.9
Potential ignition sources
3.3.9.1
potential ignition source
PIS
lo c a tio n w h e r e e le c tr ic a l e n e r g y c a n c a u s e ig n itio n
3.3.9.2
arcing PIS
PIS w h e r e a n
a rc m a y o c c u r d u e to th e o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r o r a c o n ta c t
Note 1 to entry: An electronic protection circuit or additional constructional measures may be used to prevent a
location from becoming an arcing PIS.
Note 2 to entry: A faulty contact or interruption in an electric connection that may occur in conductive patterns on
printed boards is considered to be within the scope of this definition.
3.3.9.3
resistive PIS
PIS w h e r e a c o m p o n e n t
m a y ig n ite d u e to e x c e s s iv e p o w e r d is s ip a tio n
Note 1 to entry: An electronic protection circuit or additional constructional measures may be used to prevent a
location from becoming a resistive PIS.
3.3.10
Ratings
3.3.10.1
rated current
in p u t
cu rre n t
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
as
d e c la re d
by
th e
at
normal operating
at
normal operating
m a n u fa c tu re r,
conditions
3.3.10.2
rated frequency
s u p p ly fr e q u e n c y o r fr e q u e n c y ra n g e a s d e c la re d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r
3.3.10.3
rated power
in p u t
power
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
as
d e c la re d
by
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r,
conditions
3.3.10.4
rated voltage
v a lu e
o f v o lta g e
a s s ig n e d
by th e
m a n u f a c t u r e r to a c o m p o n e n t, d e v ic e
w h ic h o p e ra tio n a n d p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o r e q u ip m e n t a n d
to
旧C
Note 1 to entry:
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Equipment may have more than one rated voltage value or may have a rated voltage range.
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .9 ]
3.3.10.5
rated voltage range
s u p p ly
v o lta g e
ra n g e ,
as
d e c la re d
by
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r,
e xp re sse d
by
its
lo w e r a n d
upper
rated voltages
3.3.10.6
protective current rating
c u r r e n t r a t i n g o f a n o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e t h a t is in t h e
b u ild in g
in s ta lla tio n
o r in t h e
e q u ip m e n t to p r o te c t a c ir c u it
3.3.11
Safeguards
3.3.11.1
backfeed safeguard
c o n tr o l s c h e m e th a t r e d u c e s th e ris k o f e le c tr ic s h o c k d u e to b a c k fe e d
3.3.11.2
basic safeguard
safeguard t h a t p r o v i d e s p r o t e c t i o n
operating conditions w h e n e v e r
under
an
normal operating conditions
e n e rg y
so u rce
c a p a b le
of
and under
c a u s in g
p a in
or
abnormal
in ju ry
is
p r e s e n t in t h e e q u i p m e n t
3.3.11.3
double safeguard
safeguard c o m p r i s i n g
basic safeguard
b o th a
and a
supplementary safeguard
3.3.11.4
equipment safeguard
safeguard t h a t i s a p h y s i c a l
p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t
3.3.11.5
installation safeguard
safeguard t h a t i s a p h y s i c a l
p a rt o f a m a n -m a d e in s ta lla tio n
3.3.11.6
instructional safeguard
in s tru c tio n in v o k in g s p e c ifie d b e h a v io u r
3.3.11.7
personal safeguard
p e rso n a l
p ro te c tiv e
e q u ip m e n t
th a t
is
w o rn
on
th e
body
and
th a t
re d u c e s
e xp o su re
to
an
e n e rg y so u rce
Note 1 to entry:
Examples are shields, goggles, gloves, aprons, face masks or breathing apparatus.
3.3.11.8
precautionary safeguard
instructed person b e h a v i o u r
to
a v o id
c o n ta c t w ith
b a s e d o n s u p e rv is io n o r in s tru c tio n s g iv e n b y a
3.3.11.9
protective bonding conductor
protective conductor i n t h e e q u i p m e n t
to
a c la s s 2 e n e rg y
so u rce
skilled person
p r o v i d e d f o r p r o t e c t i v e e q u i p o t e n t i a 卜b o n d i n g o f p a r t s
re q u ire d to b e e a rth e d fo r s a fe ty p u rp o s e s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
or e xp o su re
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry:
A protective bonding conductor is internal in the equipment.
3.3.11.10
protective conductor
c o n d u c to r p ro v id e d fo r th e p u rp o s e s o f s a fe ty (fo r e x a m p le , p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k )
Note 1 to entry:
conductor.
A protective conductor is either a protective earthing conductor or a protective bonding
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 2 -0 9 ]
3.3.11.11
protective earthing
e a rth in g
a p o in t o r
p o in ts
in
a s y s te m
or
in a n
in s ta lla tio n
o r in e q u i p m e n t f o r p u r p o s e s
of
e le c tric a l s a fe ty
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 1 , 1 9 5 -0 1 -1 1 ]
3.3.11.12
protective earthing conductor
protective conductor c o n n e c t i n g
a m a in
e a r t h p o i n t in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n f o r
3.3.11.13
reinforced safeguard
s i n g l e safeguard t h a t i s
protective earthing
protective earthing
t e r m i n a l in t h e e q u i p m e n t t o a n
e ffe c tiv e u n d e r:
-
normal operating conditions;
-
abnormal operating conditions;
-
single fault conditions
and
3.3.11.14
safeguard
p h y s ic a l p a rt o r s y s te m
o r in s tru c tio n s p e c ific a lly p ro v id e d to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f p a in o r
in ju ry , o r, fo r fire , to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire
Note 1 to entry:
See 0.5 for further explanation of a safeguard.
3.3.11.15
safety interlock
m e a n s to a u to m a tic a lly c h a n g e a n e n e rg y s o u rc e to a lo w e r c la s s e n e rg y s o u rc e
p r io r to th e
p o te n tia l fo r tr a n s fe r o f th e h ig h e r e n e rg y to a b o d y p a rt
Note 1 to entry: A safety interlock encompasses the system of components and circuits that are directly involved
in the safeguard function, including electro-mechanical devices, conductors on printed boards, wiring and their
terminations, etc., as applicable.
3.3.11.16
skill safeguard
skilled person
b e h a v io u r to
a v o id
c o n ta c t w ith
or e xp o su re
to
a
c la s s 2 o r c la s s 3 e n e rg y
s o u rc e b a s e d o n e d u c a tio n a n d e x p e rie n c e
3.3.11.17
supplementary safeguard
safeguard a p p l i e d in a d d i t i o n t o t h e basic safeguard
e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e basic safeguard
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
t h a t is o r b e c o m e s
o p e r a t i o n a l in t h e
旧C
3.3.12
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Spacings
3.3.12.1
clearance
s h o r t e s t d i s t a n c e in a i r b e t w e e n t w o c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .2 ]
3.3.12.2
creepage distance
s h o r te s t d is ta n c e a lo n g th e s u r fa c e o f a n in s u la tin g m a te ria l b e tw e e n tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .3 , m o d ifie d -
3.3.13
I n t h e d e f i n i t i o n , us o l i d w h a s b e e n d e l e t e d . ]
Temperature controls
3.3.13.1
temperature limiter
d e v ic e fo r lim itin g th e te m p e r a tu r e o f a s y s te m , e ith e r b e lo w o r a b o v e
a p a rtic u la r v a lu e , b y
c o n tr o llin g , e ith e r d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m
Note 1 to entry:
A temperature limiter may be of the automatic reset or of the manual reset type.
3.3.13.2
thermal cut-off
d e v ic e fo r lim itin g th e te m p e r a tu r e o f a s y s te m , u n d e r
single fault conditions,
b y c o n tro llin g ,
e it h e r d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m
3.3.13.3
thermostat
d e v ic e
fo r
m a in ta in in g
th e
te m p e ra tu re
of
a
s y s te m
w ith in
a
ra n g e
by
c o n tro llin g ,
e ith e r
d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m
3.3.14
Voltages and currents
3.3.14.1
DC voltage
v o lta g e h a v in g a p e a k - to - p e a k rip p le n o t e x c e e d in g 10 % o f th e a v e r a g e v a lu e
Note 1 to entry: Where peak-to-peak ripple exceeds 10 % of the average value, the requirements related to peak
voltage are applicable.
3.3.14.2
mains transient voltage
h ig h e s t
peak
v o lta g e
e x p e c te d
a t th e
mains
in p u t to
th e
e q u ip m e n t
a ris in g
fro m
e x te rn a l
tra n s ie n ts
3.3.14.3
prospective touch voltage
v o lta g e
b e tw e e n
s im u lta n e o u s ly
accessible
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
or
b e tw e e n
one
accessible
c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d e a rth w h e n th o s e c o n d u c tiv e p a rts a re n o t b e in g to u c h e d
[S O U R C E :
IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 5 -0 9 ,
m o d ifie d
-
accessible
c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d e a rth " h a s b e e n a d d e d .]
In
th e
d e fin itio n ,
"o r
b e tw e e n
one
3.3.14.4
protective conductor current
cu rre n t
flo w in g
conditions
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th ro u g h
th e
protective earthing conductor
under
normal operating
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Note 1 to entry:
Protective conductor current was previously included in the term “leakage current”.
3.3.14.5
required withstand voltage
p e a k v o l t a g e t h a t t h e i n s u l a t i o n u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d t o w i t h s t a n d
3.3.14.6
RMS working voltage
working voltage
tru e R M S v a lu e o f th e
Note 1 to entry:
True RMS value of the working voltage includes any DC component of the waveform.
Note 2 to entry: The resultant RMS value of a waveform having an AC RMS voltage /( and a DC component
voltage B is given by the following formula:
RMS value =
3.3.14.7
temporary overvoltage
o v e r v o l t a g e a t mains p o w e r
(A2
+
B 2 ) 1/2
fr e q u e n c y o f re la tiv e ly lo n g d u r a tio n
3.3.14.8
working voltage
v o lta g e
a cro ss
a n y p a rtic u la r in s u la tio n
a n y v o l t a g e in t h e
rated voltage range
w h i l e t h e e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d
External transients are disregarded.
Note 2 to entry:
Recurring peak voltages are disregarded.
or
Classes of equipment with respect to protection from electric shock
3.3.15.1
class I equipment
e q u i p m e n t w i t h basic insulation u s e d a s a basic safeguard,
protective earthing u s e d a s a supplementary safeguard
Note 1 to entry:
[S O U R C E :
th e
rated voltage
normal operating conditions
under
Note 1 to entry:
3.3.15
at
a n d w ith p r o te c tiv e b o n d in g a n d
Class I equipment may be provided with class II construction.
IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 5 1 :2 0 0 8 , 8 5 1 -1 5 - 1 0 ,
safeguard
m o d ifie d
— The
d e fin itio n
has
been
a d a p te d
to
p rin c ip le .]
3.3.15.2
class II construction
p a rt
of
an
insulation
e q u ip m e n t
or
fo r
w h ic h
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t
e le c tric
shock
re lie s
upon
double
reinforced insulation
3.3.15.3
class II equipment
e q u i p m e n t in w h i c h
b u t in w h i c h a
earthing
p r o te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k d o e s n o t re ly o n
supplementary safeguard
is p r o v i d e d , t h e r e b e i n g n o
basic insulation o n l y ,
p r o v i s i o n f o r protective
o r re lia n c e u p o n in s ta lla tio n c o n d itio n s
3.3.15.4
class III equipment
e q u ip m e n t
in
w h ic h
p ro te c tio n
w h i c h E S 3 is n o t g e n e r a t e d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a g a in s t
e le c tric
shock
re lie s
upon
s u p p ly
fro m
ES1
and
in
旧C
3.3.16
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Chemical terms
3.3.16.1
consumable material
m a t e r i a l t h a t i s u s e d b y t h e e q u i p m e n t in p e r f o r m i n g i t s i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n , a n d i n t e n d e d t o b e
p e rio d ic a lly
or
o c c a s io n a lly
re p la c e d
or
re p le n is h e d ,
in c lu d in g
any
m a te ria l
th a t
has
a
life
e x p e c ta n c y le s s th a n th a t o f th e e q u ip m e n t
Note 1 to entry:
Air filters are not considered to be consumable materials.
3.3.16.2
explosion
c h e m ic a l
re a c tio n
u n d e rg o e s
a
of
ve ry
any
ra p id
c h e m ic a l
com pound
c o m b u s tio n
or
or
m e c h a n ic a l
d e c o m p o s itio n ,
m ix tu re
re le a s in g
th a t,
la rg e
when
v o lu m e s
in itia te d ,
of
h ig h ly
h e a te d g a s e s th a t e x e rt p re s s u re o n th e s u r r o u n d in g m e d iu m
Note 1 to entry: Explosion can also be a mechanical reaction in which failure of the container causes sudden
release of pressure, and the contents, from within a pressure vessel. Depending on the rate of energy release, an
explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation or pressure rupture.
3.3.16.3
explosive
s u b s ta n c e o r m ix tu r e o f s u b s t a n c e s th a t c a n u n d e r g o a ra p id c h e m ic a l c h a n g e w ith o r w it h o u t
a n o u ts id e s o u r c e o f o x y g e n , g e n e r a tin g la rg e q u a n titie s o f e n e r g y g e n e r a lly a c c o m p a n ie d
by
hot gases
3.3.16.4
hazardous substance
s u b s ta n c e th a t h a s th e p o te n tia l fo r a d v e r s e ly im p a c tin g h u m a n h e a lth
Note 1 to entry: The criteria for determining whether a substance is classified as hazardous are usually defined
by law or regulation.
3.3.17
Batteries
3.3.17.1
battery
a s s e m b ly o f o n e o r m o re
cells
re a d y fo r u s e a s a s o u r c e o f e le c tric a l e n e r g y c h a r a c te r iz e d b y
its v o l t a g e , s i z e , t e r m i n a l a r r a n g e m e n t , c a p a c i t y a n d r a t e c a p a b i l i t y
Note 1 to entry:
The term battery pack is considered to be a battery,
3.3.17.2
cell
b a s ic
m a n u fa c tu re d
u n it
p ro v id in g
a
so u rce
of
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
by
d ire c t
c o n v e rs io n
of
c h e m ic a l e n e rg y , th a t c o n s is ts o f e le c tro d e s , s e p a ra to rs , e le c tro ly te , c o n ta in e r a n d te rm in a ls
3.3.17.3
coin / button cell battery
s m a l l , s i n g l e cell battery h a v i n g
a d i a m e t e r g r e a t e r t h a n its h e ig h t
3.3.17.4
highest specified charging temperature
h ig h e s t te m p e r a tu r e s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u f a c tu r e r a t a s ite o n e a c h in d iv id u a l
th e
battery
d u rin g c h a rg in g o f a s e c o n d a r y
cell
c o m p ris in g
battery
Note 1 to entry: It is usually assumed that the end-product manufacturer is responsible to specify the safetysensitive temperature, voltage or current of the battery, based on the specifications provided by battery supplier.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
3.3.17.5
lowest specified charging temperature
lo w e s t te m p e r a tu r e s p e c ifie d
th e
battery
b y th e m a n u f a c tu r e r a t a s ite o n e a c h in d iv id u a l
d u rin g c h a rg in g o f a s e c o n d a r y
cell
c o m p ris in g
battery
Note 1 to entry: It is usually assumed that the end-product manufacturer is responsible to specify the safety
sensitive temperature, voltage or current of the battery, based on the specifications provided by battery supplier.
3.3.17.6
maximum specified charging current
h ig h e s t
c h a rg in g
cu rre n t
s p e c ifie d
by
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r
d u rin g
c h a rg in g
of
a
se co n d a ry
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r
d u rin g
c h a rg in g
of
a
se co n d a ry
battery
3.3.17.7
maximum specified charging voltage
h ig h e s t
c h a rg in g
v o lta g e
s p e c ifie d
by
battery
3.3.17.8
secondary lithium battery
battery t h a t
cells,
-
i n c o r p o r a t e s o n e o r m o re s e c o n d a r y lith iu m
-
h a s a h o u s in g a n d a te rm in a l a rra n g e m e n t, a n d
-
m a y h a v e e le c tro n ic c o n tro l d e v ic e s , a n d
-
is r e a d y f o r u s e
and
Note 1 to entry: Examples of a secondary lithium battery include a rechargeable lithium-ion battery, a
rechargeable lithium-polymer battery and a rechargeable lithium manganese battery.
3.3.18
FIW terms
3.3.18.1
fully insulated winding wire
FIW
p o ly u r e th a n e e n a m e lle d ro u n d c o p p e r w ire , c la s s 1 8 0
Note 1 to entry: The insulating properties are in accordance with IEC 60317-0-7， IEC 60317-56 and
IEC 60851-5:2008. These standards also refer to this type of wire as “zero-defect wire” ， which they define as
“winding wire that exhibits no electrical discontinuities when tested under specific co n d itio n s'
Note 2 to entry:
The term “zero-defect wire” is commonly used to refer to FIW.
3.3.18.2
grade of FIW
ra n g e o f o v e ra ll d ia m e te r o f a w ire (F IW 3 to F IW 9 )
3.3.19
Sound exposure
3.3.19.1
calculated sound dose
CSD
one
week
ro llin g
e s tim a te
of
sound exposure
e xp re sse d
re g a rd e d a s s a fe
Note 1 to entry:
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
See B.4 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.
as
a p e rc e n ta g e
o f th e
m a x im u m
旧C
3.3.19.2
momentary exposure level
MEL
m e t r i c f o r e s t i m a t i n g 1 s sound exposure
le v e l fr o m
a s p e c ific
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
te s t s ig n a l
a p p lie d
to
b o th
c h a n n e ls , b a s e d o n E N 5 0 3 3 2 -1 :2 0 1 3 , 4 .2
Note 1 to entry:
MEL is measured in dB(A).
Note 2 to entry:
See B.3 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.
3.3.19.3
sound exposure
E
A -w e ig h te d s o u n d p re s s u re
(p)
s q u a re d a n d in te g ra te d o v e r a s ta te d p e rio d o f tim e ,
T
T
E = \p { t) 26t
0
Note 1 to entry:
The SI unit is Pa2 s.
3.3.19.4
sound exposure level
SEL
lo g a rith m ic m e a s u re o f
/
S E L = 1 0 l o g 10
sound exposure
re la tiv e to a re fe re n c e v a lu e ,
E0
\
^
VE
〇
J
Note 1 to entry:
SEL is measured in dB(A).
Note 2 to entry:
The reference value
Note 3 to entry:
See B.4 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.
E 〇is
typically the 1 kHz threshold of hearing in humans.
3.3.19.5
digital signal level relative to full scale
dBFS
le v e l o f a D C - fr e e 9 9 7
H z s in e w a v e w h o s e
u n d ith e re d
p o s itiv e
p e a k v a lu e
is p o s i t i v e d i g i t a l
fu ll s c a le , le a v in g th e c o d e c o r r e s p o n d in g to n e g a tiv e d ig ita l fu ll s c a le u n u s e d
Note 1 to entry:
Levels reported in dBFS are always RMS.
Note 2 to entry: It is invalid to use dBFS for non-RMS levels. Because the definition of full scale is based on a
sine wave, the level of signals with a crest factor lower than that of a sine wave may exceed 0 dBFS. In particular,
square-wave signals may reach +3,01 dBFS.
4
General requirements
4.1
4.1.1
General
Application of requirements and acceptance of materials, components and
subassemblies
R e q u i r e m e n t s a r e s p e c i f i e d i n t h e r e l e v a n t c l a u s e s a n d , w h e r e r e f e r e n c e d in t h o s e c l a u s e s , in
the relevant annexes.
W h e r e c o m p l i a n c e o f m a t e r i a l s , c o m p o n e n t s o r s u b a s s e m b l i e s is d e m o n s t r a t e d b y i n s p e c t i o n ,
s u c h c o m p lia n c e m a y b e b y r e v ie w o f p u b lis h e d d a ta o r p r e v io u s te s t re s u lts .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
In te rn a l
and
e x te rn a l
IE C 6 0 0 6 5
a re
e v a lu a tio n
o th e r
c o m p o n e n ts
a c c e p ta b le
th a n
to
as
and
p a rt
g iv e
s u b a s s e m b lie s
o f e q u ip m e n t
c o n s id e ra tio n
to
th a t
co ve re d
th e
c o m p ly
by
th is
a p p ro p ria te
w ith
IE C 6 0 9 5 0 -1
d o c u m e n t w ith o u t
use
of
th e
or
fu rth e r
com ponent
or
s u b a s s e m b l y in t h e e n d - p r o d u c t .
NOTE The paragraph above will be deleted in the next revision of this document, subject to a vote of National
Committees at the time. It is added here to provide a smooth transition from the latest editions of IEC 60950-1 and
IEC 60065 to this document.
4.1.2
Use of components
W h e re
th e
c o m p o n e n t,
safeguard，
s p e c ifie d
or
c o m p o n e n ts
in a
a
c h a ra c te ris tic
s h a ll
re q u ire m e n ts
c o m p ly
of a
w ith
c la u s e , w ith
c o m p o n e n t,
th e
th e
is
re q u ire m e n ts
s a fe ty
a s p e c ts
safeguard
a
of
th is
o f th e
or a
docum ent
re le v a n t
IE C
p a rt
o r,
of a
w h e re
com ponent
s ta n d a rd s .
NOTE 1 An IEC component standard is considered relevant only if the component in question clearly falls within
its scope.
NOTE 2
The applicable test for compliance with a component standard is, in general, conducted separately.
W h e re
use
of
an
IE C
com ponent
s ta n d a rd
is
p e rm itte d
above,
e v a lu a tio n
and
te s tin g
of
c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll b e c o n d u c te d a s fo llo w s :
一
a
com ponent
s h a ll
be
checked
fo r
co rre ct
a p p lic a tio n
and
use
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
its
ra tin g ;
-
a c o m p o n e n t th a t h a s b e e n d e m o n s tr a te d to c o m p ly w ith a s ta n d a r d
re le v a n t
IE C
com ponent
s ta n d a rd
s h a ll
be
s u b je c te d
to
th e
h a r m o n iz e d w ith th e
a p p lic a b le
te s ts
of
th is
d o c u m e n t, a s p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t, w ith th e e x c e p tio n o f th o s e te s ts th a t a re p a rt o f th e
re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd ;
-
a c o m p o n e n t th a t h a s n o t b e e n d e m o n s t r a t e d to c o m p ly w ith a r e le v a n t s ta n d a r d a s a b o v e
s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e a p p lic a b le te s ts o f th is d o c u m e n t, a s p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d
to th e
a p p lic a b le
te s ts o f th e
c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd ,
u n d e r th e
c o n d itio n s
o c c u rrin g
in t h e
e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
w h e r e c o m p o n e n ts
a r e u s e d in c i r c u i t s n o t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e i r s p e c i f i e d
c o m p o n e n t s s h a ll b e te s te d
of
s a m p le s
re q u ire d
fo r
u n d e r th e c o n d itio n s o c c u rrin g
te s t
is ,
in
g e n e ra l,
th e
sam e
ra tin g s , th e
in t h e e q u i p m e n t . T h e n u m b e r
as
re q u ire d
by
an
e q u iv a le n t
s ta n d a rd .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the relevant data or tests.
4.1.3
Equipment design and construction
normal operating conditions a s
s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.2, abnormal operating conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.3, a n d
single fault conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.4, safeguards a r e p r o v i d e d t o r e d u c e t h e
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s o d e s ig n e d a n d c o n s tr u c te d th a t, u n d e r
l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y o r , in t h e c a s e o f f i r e , p r o p e r t y d a m a g e .
P a rts
o f e q u ip m e n t th a t c o u ld
cause
in ju ry
s h a ll
not
be
accessible,
and
accessible
p a rts
s h a ll n o t c a u s e a n in ju ry .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the relevant tests.
4.1.4
Equipment installation
E xcept as
account
g iv e n
in 4 . 1 . 6 ,
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s
o p e ra tio n , a s a p p lic a b le .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
e q u ip m e n t
in s tru c tio n s
e v a lu a tio n
w ith
re g a rd
a c c o rd in g
to
to
th is
in s ta lla tio n ,
docum ent
re lo c a tio n ,
s h a ll
ta k e
s e rv ic in g
in to
and
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Outdoor enclosures p r o v i d i n g a safeguard f u n c t i o n s h a l l c o m p l y
equipment a n d outdoor enclosures s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r u s e a t a n y
s p e c ifie d
by th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
If n o t s p e c i f i e d
w ith
Outdoor
A n n e x Y.
t e m p e r a t u r e in t h e r a n g e
b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r , th e r a n g e s h a ll b e ta k e n
as:
-
m i n i m u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re : - 3 3
°C ;
-
m a x i m u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re : + 4 0 °C .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by evaluation of the data provided by the
manufacturer.
NOTE 1 The temperature values are based on IEC 60721-3-4, Class 4K2. These temperatures do not take into
account severe environments (for example, extremely cold or extremely warm), nor do they include provision for
heating by radiation from the sun (solar loading).
NOTE 2
Attention is drawn to IEC 61587-1 for additional information on performance levels C1, C2 and C3,
4.1.5
Constructions and components not specifically covered
W h e re
th e
e q u ip m e n t
c o n s tru c tio n
safeguards
not
in v o lv e s
s p e c ific a lly
te c h n o lo g ie s ,
co ve re d
in
c o m p o n e n ts
and
m a te ria ls
d o c u m e n t,
th e
e q u ip m e n t
th is
or
m e th o d s
s h a ll
of
p ro v id e
n o t le s s th a n th a t g e n e r a lly a ffo r d e d b y th is d o c u m e n t a n d th e p rin c ip le s o f s a fe ty
c o n ta in e d h e re in .
T h e n e e d fo r a d d itio n a l d e ta ile d
r e q u ir e m e n t s to c o p e w ith a n e w s itu a tio n s h o u ld
be b ro u g h t
p r o m p t ly to th e a tte n tio n o f th e a p p r o p r ia te c o m m it te e .
4.1.6
W h e re
Orientation during transport and use
it is c l e a r t h a t t h e o r i e n t a t i o n o f u s e o f e q u i p m e n t is l i k e l y t o h a v e a s i g n i f i c a n t e f f e c t
o n t h e a p p lic a t io n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o r th e r e s u lt s o f t e s t s , a ll o r ie n t a t io n s o f u s e s p e c if ie d
in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n o r u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e t a k e n
m e a n s fo r fix in g
in p l a c e
d ire c t a tta c h m e n t to
p ro v id e d
w ith
th e
a
ordinary person,
by an
m o u n tin g
e q u ip m e n t
or
s u rfa c e
in t o a c c o u n t . H o w e v e r , if e q u i p m e n t h a s
such
o r th ro u g h
re a d ily
a s th e
th e
a v a ila b le
in
use
th e
p ro v is io n
of
b ra c k e ts
m a rk e t,
a ll
o f scre w
o r th e
lik e ly
h o le s fo r
lik e ,
e ith e r
p o s itio n s
of
o r ie n ta t io n o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t, in c lu d in g th e p o s s ib ility o f m o u n tin g
to a n o n - v e r tic a l s u r fa c e r e g a r d le s s o f th e in s ta lla tio n o r u s e r in s tr u c tio n s th a t a re p r o v id e d b y
th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
In
a d d itio n ,
fo r
transportable equipment,
a ll
o rie n ta tio n s
o f tra n s p o rt
s h a ll
be
ta k e n
in to
a c c o u n t.
4.1.7
Choice of criteria
W h e r e th is d o c u m e n t in d ic a te s a c h o ic e b e tw e e n d iffe r e n t c rite ria fo r c o m p lia n c e , o r b e tw e e n
d i f f e r e n t m e t h o d s o r c o n d i t i o n s o f t e s t , t h e c h o i c e is s p e c i f i e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r .
4.1.8
U n le s s
Liquids and liquid filled components (LFC)
s p e c ifie d
as
an
insulating liquid,
liq u id s
s h a ll
be tre a te d
as
e le c tric a lly
c o n d u c tiv e
m a te ria ls .
C o n s tru c tio n s
and
te s t re q u ire m e n ts fo r p re s s u riz e d
LFCs
used
in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t w h e re
a n i n j u r y c a n o c c u r w i t h i n t h e m e a n i n g o f t h i s d o c u m e n t d u e t o l e a k s o f t h e l i q u i d in t h e L F C
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .1 5 . H o w e v e r , C la u s e G .1 5 d o e s n o t a p p ly to th e fo llo w in g :
-
a n L F C t h a t i s s e a l e d b u t o p e n t o t h e a t m o s p h e r e in t h e e q u i p m e n t ; o r
-
components
c o n ta in in g
s m a ll
a m o u n ts
of
liq u id s
not
lik e ly
to
cause
any
in ju ry
(fo r
e x a m p le , liq u id c r y s ta l d is p la y s , e le c t r o ly tic c a p a c it o r s , liq u id c o o lin g h e a t p ip e s , e tc .); o r
-
wet
cell batteries
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
(fo r w e t
cell batteries,
s e e A n n e x M ); o r
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
a n L F C a n d its a s s o c ia t e d p a r t s t h a t c o m p ly w it h P .3 .3 ; o r
-
e q u i p m e n t w ith m o r e th a n 1 I o f liq u id .
4.1.9
Electrical measuring instruments
E le c tr ic a l m e a s u r in g in s tr u m e n ts s h a ll h a v e s u ffic ie n t b a n d w id th to p r o v id e a c c u r a te r e a d in g s ,
ta k in g
in to
account
a ll
c o m p o n e n ts
mains
(D C ,
fre q u e n c y ,
h ig h
fre q u e n c y
and
h a rm o n ic
c o n te n t) o f th e p a r a m e te r b e in g m e a s u re d .
If a n R M S v a l u e is m e a s u r e d , c a r e s h a ll b e t a k e n t h a t t h e m e a s u r i n g i n s t r u m e n t g iv e s a t r u e
R M S re a d in g o f n o n -s in u s o id a l w a v e fo r m s a s w e ll a s s in u s o id a l w a v e fo rm s .
M e a s u r e m e n ts s h a ll b e m a d e w ith a m e te r w h o s e in p u t im p e d a n c e h a s a n e g lig ib le in flu e n c e
on th e m e a s u re m e n t.
4.1.10
U n le s s
Temperature measurements
o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d , w h e re
th e
r e s u l t o f a t e s t is l i k e l y t o
depend
upon
th e
a m b ie n t
t e m p e r a t u r e ，t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s s p e c i f i e d a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e r a n g e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t ( T m a )
s h a ll
be
ta k e n
in to
a c c o u n t.
t e m p e r a t u r e ( T a m b ) ，e x t r a p o l a t i o n
W hen
(a b o v e
p e rfo rm in g
and
th e
b e lo w ) th e
te s t
re s u lts
at
a
o f th e
s p e c ific
te s t m a y
a m b ie n t
be
used
to
c o n s i d e r t h e i m p a c t o f r ma o n t h e r e s u l t . C o m p o n e n t s a n d s u b a s s e m b l i e s m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d
s e p a ra te ly
w h o le
be
fro m
th e
e q u ip m e n t
e q u ip m e n t b e in g
e x a m in e d
in
if th e
so te s te d .
o r d e r to
te s t re s u lts
and
e x tra p o la tio n
R e le v a n t te s t d a ta a n d
d e te rm in e
th e
is
re p re s e n ta tiv e
o f th e
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s s p e c if ic a t io n s
e ffe c t o f te m p e ra tu re
v a ria b ility
on
m ay
a com ponent or
s u b a s s e m b ly (s e e B .1 .5 ).
4.1.11
Steady state conditions
S t e a d y s t a t e c o n d i t i o n s a r e c o n d i t i o n s w h e n t e m p e r a t u r e s t a b i l i t y is c o n s i d e r e d t o e x i s t ( s e e
B .1 .5 ).
4.1.12
Hierarchy of safeguards
Safeguards t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d f o r ordinary persons a r e a c c e p t a b l e , b u t m a y n o t b e r e q u i r e d ,
f o r instructed persons a n d skilled persons. L i k e w i s e , safeguards t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d f o r
instructed persons a r e a c c e p t a b l e , b u t m a y n o t b e r e q u i r e d , f o r skilled persons.
A reinforced safeguard m a y b e u s e d i n p l a c e o f a basic safeguard
safeguard o r a double safeguard. A double safeguard m a y b e
reinforced safeguard.
Safeguards， o t h e r
4.1.13
th a n
equipment safeguards,
or a
used
supplementary
in
p la c e
of
a
a r e s p e c i f i e d in s p e c i f i c c l a u s e s .
Examples mentioned in this document
W h e r e e x a m p l e s a r e g i v e n in t h i s d o c u m e n t ，o t h e r e x a m p l e s ， s i t u a t i o n s ，a n d s o l u t i o n s a r e n o t
e x c lu d e d .
4.1.14
Tests on parts or samples separate from the end-product
If a t e s t is c o n d u c t e d
on
a p a rt o r s a m p le
s e p a ra te
fro m
c o n d u c t e d a s i f t h e p a r t o r s a m p l e w a s in t h e e n d - p r o d u c t .
4.1.15
Markings and instructions
E q u i p m e n t t h a t is r e q u i r e d b y t h i s d o c u m e n t t o :
-
b e a r m a rk in g s ; o r
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
e n d - p r o d u c t, th e te s t s h a ll
be
旧C
-
b e p r o v id e d w ith in s tr u c tio n s ; o r
-
b e p r o v id e d w ith
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
instructional safeguards
s h a ll m e e t t h e r e le v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s o f A n n e x F.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
NOTE In Finland, Norway and Sweden, class I pluggable equipment type A intended for connection to other
equipment or a network shall, if safety relies on connection to reliable earthing or if surge suppressors are
connected between the network terminals and accessible parts, have a marking stating that the equipment must
be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.
4.2
Energy source classifications
4.2.1
Class 1 energy source
U n le s s o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d , a c la s s 1 s o u rc e
is a n e n e r g y
so u rce
w ith
le v e ls
n o t e x c e e d in g
c la s s 1 lim its u n d e r:
-
normal operating conditions;
-
abnormal operating conditions
-
single fault conditions
A
protective conductor
4.2.2
and
th a t d o n o t le a d to a
single fault condition;
and
t h a t d o n o t r e s u l t in c l a s s 2 l im i t s b e in g e x c e e d e d .
is a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e .
Class 2 energy source
U n le s s
o th e rw is e
c la s s 1
lim its
s p e c ifie d ,
and
not
a
c la s s 2
e x c e e d in g
so u rce
c la s s 2
is
an
lim its
e n e rg y
under
so u rce
w ith
le v e ls
e x c e e d in g
normal operating conditions,
abnormal operating conditions, or single fault conditions.
4.2.3
A
Class 3 energy source
c la s s 3
so u rce
is
an
e n e rg y
so u rce
w ith
le v e ls
e x c e e d in g
operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions,
or
c la s s 2
lim its
under
single fault conditions,
normal
or any
e n e r g y s o u r c e d e c l a r e d t o b e a c l a s s 3 s o u r c e , a s g i v e n in 4 . 2 . 4 .
A n e u t r a l c o n d u c t o r is a c l a s s 3 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e .
4.2.4
Energy source classification by declaration
T h e m a n u fa c tu r e r m a y d e c la re :
-
a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e to b e e ith e r a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e ;
-
a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e to b e a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e .
4.3
Protection against energy sources
4.3.1
General
T h e t e r m s “ p e r s o n s ” ，“ b o d y ” ，a n d “ b o d y p a r t s ” a r e r e p r e s e n t e d b y t h e p r o b e s o f A n n e x V .
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
No
Safeguards for protection of an ordinary person
Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and an ordinary person
safeguards
a re re q u ire d
b e tw e e n
F ig u re 9). C o n s e q u e n tly , a c la s s 1 e n e r g y s o u rc e m a y b e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
ordinary person ( s e e
accessible t o a n ordinary person.
a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e a n d a n
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Ordinary
person
IEC
Figure 9 - Model for protection of an ordinary
person against a class 1 energy source
4.3.2.2
Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an ordinary person
basic safeguard
A t le a s t o n e
person
is r e q u i r e d
b e tw e e n
a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e a n d an
ordinary
(s e e F ig u re 10 ).
Class 2
energy
source
o
Ordinary
person
Basic
safeguard
Figure 10 - Model for protection of an ordinary
person against a class 2 energy source
4.3.2.3
Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an ordinary person during
ordinary person servicing conditions
ordinary person s e r v i c i n g c o n d i t i o n s r e q u i r e a basic safeguard t o b e r e m o v e d o r
d e f e a t e d , a n instructional safeguard a s d e s c r i b e d i n C l a u s e F . 5 s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d a n d
l o c a t e d in s u c h a w a y t h a t a n ordinary person w i l l s e e t h e i n s t r u c t i o n p r i o r t o r e m o v i n g o r
d e f e a t i n g t h e basic safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 1 1 ) .
If
The
instructional safeguard
(s e e C la u s e
F.5)
s h a ll in c lu d e a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :
-
i dent i f y p a rts a n d lo c a tio n s o f th e c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e ;
-
s p e c i f y a c tio n s th a t w ill p r o te c t p e r s o n s fr o m th a t e n e r g y s o u r c e ; a n d
-
s p e c i f y a c tio n s to r e in s ta te o r r e s to r e th e
If
ordinary person
d e fe a te d ,
and
safeguard
w h e re
th e
c o n d itio n s
e q u ip m e n t
is
re q u ire
in te n d e d
F.5), d i r e c t e d t o w a r d s
basic safeguard b y c h i l d r e n .
(se e
d e fe a tin g th e
s e rv ic in g
basic safeguard.
C la u s e
Class 2
energy
source
[
Removed or
defeated
basic
safeguard
O
a
fo r
basic safeguard
use
a d u lts ,
Instructional
safeguard
in
s h a ll
〇
th e
to
hom e,
w a rn
be
re m o ve d
or
instructional
an
a g a in s t
re m o v in g
or
Ordinary
person
V
IEC
Figure 11 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2
energy source during ordinary person servicing conditions
4.3.2.4
Safeguards between a class 3 energy source and an ordinary person
U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d ,
-
equipment basic safeguard
f o r m i n g a double safeguard); o r
an
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
and an
equipment supplementary safeguard
(to g e th e r
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
a reinforced safeguard
is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n
o
ordinary person
Supplementary
(s e e F ig u re 12).
Ordinary
person
safeguard
IEC
Figure 12 - Model for protection of an ordinary
person against a class 3 energy source
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
Safeguards for protection of an instructed person
Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and an instructed person
safeguards
F i g u r e 13).
No
a re re q u ire d b e tw e e n a c la s s
1
energy
source
C la s s
1 e n e rg y
so u rce and an
instructed person
(se e
Instructed
person
__________________
IEC
Figure 13 - Model for protection of an instructed person
against a class 1 energy source
4.3.3.2
Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an instructed person
instructed person u s e s a precautionary safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 14). N o a d d i t i o n a l
safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n instructed person.
C o n s e q u e n t l y , a c l a s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e m a y b e accessible t o a n instructed person.
An
)
f
厂
C lass 2
Precautionary
safeguard
Instructed
person
___________ /
<___________/y
e n e rg y
〇
s o u rc e
v
J
v.
IEC
Figure 14 - Model for protection of an instructed person
against a class 2 energy source
4.3.3.3
Safeguards between a class 3 energy source and an instructed person
U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d ,
-
equipment basic safeguard
f o r m i n g a double safeguard); o r
-
a reinforced safeguard
an
and an
equipment supplementary safeguard
is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
instructed person
(to g e th e r
(s e e F ig u re 15).
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure 15 - Model for protection of an instructed person
against a class 3 energy source
4.3.4
Safeguards for protection of a skilled person
4.3.4.1
No
Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and a skilled person
safeguard
C o n s e q u e n tly ,
(s e e F ig u re
is
re q u ire d
a
c la s s
1
b e tw e e n
e n e rg y
a
c la s s
so u rce
1
e n e rg y
m ay
be
so u rce
and
a
to
a
accessible
skilled person.
skilled person
16).
Class 1
energy
source
Skilled
person
IEC
Figure 16 - Model for protection of a skilled person against a class 1 energy source
4.3.4.2
A
Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and a skilled person
skilled person
re q u ire d
b e tw e e n
uses
a
a
c la s s
e n e rg y so u rce m a y be
skill safeguard
2
e n e rg y
accessible
厂
F ig u re 17 ).
and
>
〇
^
J
safeguards
C o n s e q u e n tly ,
a
a re
c la s s 2
a
r
O
Skill
safeguard
V
a d d itio n a l
a
f
Class 2
energy
source
No
skilled person.
skilled person.
so u rce
to a
(se e
Skilled
person
v____________ /
IEC
Figure 17 - Model for protection of a skilled person against a class 2 energy source
4.3.4.3
Safeguards between a class 3 energy source and a skilled person
A skilled person u s e s a skill safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 18). U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d ( f o r
e x a m p l e , s e e 8.5.4), n o a d d i t i o n a l safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e
a n d a skilled person. C o n s e q u e n t l y , a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e m a y b e accessible t o a skilled
person.
Class 3
energy
source
o
O
Skill
safeguard
L
N
f
f
J
Skilled
person
^____________ y
IEC
Figure 18 - Model for protection of a skilled person against a class 3 energy source
D u rin g e q u ip m e n t s e rv ic in g
c o n d itio n s
o n a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e , a
safeguard
r e d u c e t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y d u e t o a n i n v o l u n t a r y r e a c t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
in te n d e d
to
旧C
-
another
c la s s 3
e n e rg y
so u rce ,
not
u n d e rg o in g
s e rv ic e
and
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
in
th e
sam e
v ic in ity
as
th e
c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e b e in g s e r v ic e d ; a n d
-
a
skilled person
(s e e 0 .5 .7 a n d F ig u re 19).
f
Class 3
energy
source
O
Skilled
person
Skill
safeguard
O
Safeguard
V
j
、
C
J
Another
class 3
energy
source
J
l
j
IEC
Figure 19 - Model for protection of a skilled person against class 3 energy
sources during equipment servicing conditions
4.3.5
Safeguards in a restricted access area
C e rta in
e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll h a v e
fo r in s ta lla tio n
safeguards
a s re q u ire d
e x c lu s iv e ly
in 4 . 3 . 3 f o r
restricted access areas. S u c h
instructed persons a n d 4 . 3 . 4 f o r
in
skilled persons.
4.4
Safeguards
4.4.1
Equivalent materials or components
W h e re
th is
d o c u m e n t s p e c ifie s
in s u la tio n o r
NOTE
p a rtic u la r
material flammability class,
a
safeguard p a r a m e t e r , s u c h a s t h e r m a l c l a s s o f
safeguard w i t h a b e t t e r p a r a m e t e r m a y b e u s e d .
For a hierarchy of the m aterial fla m m a b ility classes see Table S.1, Table S.2 and Table S.3.
4.4.2
Composition of a safeguard
A safeguard
4.4.3
m a y b e c o m p ris e d o f o n e o r m o re e le m e n ts .
Safeguard robustness
4.4.3.1
W h e re
General
a
m e ta l,
safeguard ( f o r e x a m p l e , a n enclosure, b a r r i e r , solid insulation, e a r t h e d
e t c . ) i s accessible t o a n ordinary person o r t o a n instructed person, t h e
s o lid
g la s s ,
safeguard
For a
a
s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e l e v a n t r o b u s t n e s s t e s t s a s s p e c i f i e d in 4 . 4 . 3 . 2 t o 4 . 4 . 3 . 1 0 .
safeguard
t h a t is
accessible
a fte r o p e n in g an e x te rn a l
enclosure,
see
4.4.3 . 5.
R e q u ir e m e n ts fo r:
-
a d h e s i o n o f m e ta lliz e d c o a tin g s ; a n d
-
a d h e s i v e s s e c u rin g p a rts s e rv in g a s
-
parts th a t m a y d e fe a t a
safeguard
safeguards;
and
if a n a d h e s iv e fa ils
a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e P . 4 .
4.4.3.2
Steady force tests
An
enclosure
-
transportable equipment;
-
hand-held equipment;
-
direct plug-in equipment
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o r b a r r i e r t h a t is
and
accessible
and
a n d t h a t is u s e d a s a
safeguard
o f:
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo r c e te s t o f C la u s e T .4 .
A safeguard
t h a t is
accessible
a n d th a t o n ly a c ts a s a
fire enclosure
o r fire b a r r ie r s h a ll b e
s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo rc e te s t o f C la u s e T .3 .
A ll o th e r
enclosures
o r b a rrie rs th a t a re
accessible
and th a t a re u s e d as a
safeguard
s h a ll
be s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo rc e te s t o f C la u s e T .5 . T h e re a re n o re q u ire m e n ts fo r th e b o tto m
of
e q u ip m e n t
h a v in g
a
m ass
of
m o re
o r i e n t a t i o n in w h i c h t h e b o t t o m o f t h e
th a n
18
enclosure
kg
u n le s s
th e
user
in s tru c tio n s
p e rm it
an
b e c o m e s th e to p o r a s id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h i s s u b c l a u s e d o e s n o t a p p l y t o g l a s s . R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r g l a s s a r e g i v e n in 4 . 4 . 3 . 6 .
4.4.3.3
Drop tests
T h e fo llo w in g e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e d ro p te s t o f C la u s e T .7 :
-
hand-held equipment;
-
direct plug-in equipment;
-
transportable equipment;
-
movable equipment
re q u irin g
liftin g
or
h a n d lin g
by
an
ordinary person
as
p a rt o f
its
in te n d e d u s e , in c lu d in g ro u tin e re lo c a tio n ;
NOTE An example of such equipment is a paper shredder that rests on a waste container that requires
removal of the paper shredder to empty the container.
-
d e s k - t o p e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a m a s s o f 7 k g o r l e s s t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r u s e w i t h a n y o n e o f
th e fo llo w in g :
•
a c o rd -c o n n e c te d te le p h o n e h a n d s e t; o r
•
a n o th e r c o r d - c o n n e c te d h a n d - h e ld a c c e s s o r y w ith a n a c o u s tic fu n c tio n ; o r
•
a h e a d s e t.
4.4.3.4
Impact tests
A ll e q u ip m e n t,
o th e r th a n
th a t s p e c ifie d
in 4 . 4 . 3 . 3 ,
s h a ll
be
s u b je c te d
to
th e
im p a c t te s t o f
C la u s e T . 6.
T h e i m p a c t t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 6 is n o t a p p l i e d t o t h e f o l l o w i n g :
-
t he b o tto m
of an
th e b o tto m o f th e
-
u s e r in s tru c tio n s p e rm it a n o rie n ta tio n
in w h i c h
to p o r a s id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t;
glass;
NOTE
-
enclosure, e x c e p t i f t h e
enclosure b e c o m e s t h e
Impact tests for glass are in 4.4.3.6.
t he s u rfa c e o f th e
enclosure
of
stationary equipment,
in c lu d in g
e q u ip m e n t fo r b u ild in g -
i n , t h a t is
accessible;
•
not
•
p ro te c te d a fte r in s ta lla tio n .
4.4.3.5
or
Internal accessible safeguard tests
safeguard t h a t i s accessible t o a n ordinary person a f t e r o p e n i n g
e x t e r n a l enclosure a n d w h o s e f a i l u r e w o u l d a l l o w c l a s s 2 o r c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s t o
accessible s h a l l b e s u b j e c t e d t o t h e s t e a d y f o r c e t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 3 .
An
in te rn a l
4.4.3.6
s o lid
Glass impact tests
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e lo w a r e a p p l i c a b le to a ll p a r t s m a d e o f g la s s , w it h th e e x c e p t i o n o f:
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
an
be
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
p l a t e n g la s s u s e d o n c o p ie r s , s c a n n e r s a n d t h e lik e , w h e r e th e g la s s h a s b e e n s u b je c t e d
t o t h e s t e a d y f o r c e t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 3 a n d is p r o v i d e d w i t h a c o v e r o r d e v i c e t o p r o t e c t th e
p la te n g la s s ; a n d
-
C R T s : R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r C R T s a r e g i v e n in A n n e x U ; a n d
-
g l a s s t h a t is l a m i n a t e d o r h a s a c o n s t r u c t i o n s u c h t h a t g l a s s p a r t i c l e s d o n o t s e p a r a t e f r o m
e a c h o t h e r i f t h e g l a s s is b r o k e n .
NOTE
Laminated glass includes constructions such as plastic film affixed to a single side of a glass.
G l a s s t h a t is
accessible
ordinary person
to a n
instructed person:
o r to a n
-
h a v i n g a s u r f a c e a r e a e x c e e d i n g 0 ,1 m 2 ; o r
-
h a v i n g a m a jo r d im e n s io n e x c e e d in g 4 5 0 m m ; o r
-
t hat p r e v e n ts a c c e s s to c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s o th e r th a n P S 3
s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e g la s s im p a c t te s t o f C la u s e T .9 .
4.4.3.7
Glass fixation test
L a m in a te d
g la s s u s e d a s a
safeguard
th a t p re v e n ts a c c e s s to c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s
o th e r
th a n P S 3 s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e fo llo w in g fix a tio n te s ts :
-
a g l a s s i m p a c t t e s t a s g i v e n in C l a u s e T . 9 w i t h a n i m p a c t o f 1 J a p p l i e d t h r e e t i m e s ; a n d
-
a
p u s h /p u ll
te s t
w ith
10
N
a p p lie d
in
th e
c e n tre
of
th e
g la s s
in
th e
le a s t
fa v o u ra b le
d ire c tio n .
NOTE To perform the test, any suitable method can be used, such as using suction handles or gluing a
support to the glass.
4.4.3.8
Thermoplastic material tests
safeguard
If a
is o f m o u l d e d
o r fo rm e d
th e rm o p la s tic
m a te ria l,
th e
safeguard
s h a ll
be
so
c o n s tr u c te d t h a t a n y s h r in k a g e o r d is to r tio n o f th e m a te r ia l d u e to r e le a s e o f in te r n a l s tr e s s e s
s h a ll n o t d e f e a t its
safeguard
fu n c tio n . T h e th e rm o p la s tic
m a te r ia l s h a ll b e s u b je c te d
to th e
s tre s s re lie f te s t o f C la u s e T .8 .
4.4.3.9
W h e re
s h a ll
Air comprising a safeguard
a
safeguard
p re ve n t
is c o m p r i s e d
d is p la c e m e n t
o f th e
o f a ir (fo r e x a m p le ,
a ir
by
a
body
p a rt
a
or
clearance),
a
a b a rrie r o r
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt.
The
enclosure
b a rrie r
or
enclosure
s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e m e c h a n i c a l s t r e n g t h t e s t s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x T , a s a p p l i c a b l e .
4.4.3.10
Compliance criteria
During and after the tests:
-
except for PS3, class 3 energy sources shall not become a c c e s s ib le to an o rd in a ry
p e rs o n or to an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; and
-
glass shall:
-
•
not break or crack; or
•
not expel pieces of glass greater than 30 g in mass or greater than 50 mm in any
dimension; or
•
pass the fragmentation test of Clause T.10 on a separate test sample; and
all other s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective.
4.4.4
If a n
Displacement of a safeguard by an insulating liquid
insulating liquid
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
d is p la c e s a ir c o m p ris in g a
safeguard:
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
t he re q u ire m e n ts o f 5 .4 .1 2 a n d 6 .4 .9 a p p ly to th e
-
t he
re q u ire m e n ts
o f 5 .4 .2
insulating liquid
p re s e n t.
P a rtia l
or
condition
If t h e
to ta l
lo s s
5 .4 .3
a p p ly
insulating liquid
o f th e
to
th e
s h a ll
be
e q u ip m e n t
and
b o th
c o n s id e re d
w ith
and
w ith o u t
th e
abnormal operating
an
o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
p o w e r s u p p lie d
to p a r ts im m e r s e d
p a rtia l o r to ta l lo s s o f th e
th e
and
insulating liquid;
im m e rs e d
p a rts .
An
in
insulating liquid,
e x a m p le
of
such
insulating liquid
is d i s c o n n e c t e d
in t h e e v e n t o f
th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 6 .4 .2 to 6 .4 .8 d o n o t a p p ly fo r
a
d is c o n n e c t
s y s te m
is
a
flo a t
s w itc h
s y s te m
c o m p ly in g w ith A n n e x K.
NOTE The use of insulating liquids to replace a basic insulation, a supplementary insulation or a reinforced
insulation is not covered by the requirements of this document.
4.4.5
Safety interlocks
U n le s s
o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d ,
if
a
safety interlock
is
used
as
a
ordinary person;
or
safeguard
fo r
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t:
-
a c la s s 2 o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n
-
a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n
th e
safety interlock
4.5
Explosion
4.5.1
instructed person,
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x K.
General
Explosion
c a n be c a u s e d by:
-
c h e m i c a l re a c tio n ;
-
m e c h a n i c a l d e fo rm a tio n o f a s e a le d c o n ta in e r;
-
r api d c o m b u s tio n o r d e c o m p o s itio n , p ro d u c in g a la rg e v o lu m e o f h o t g a s ;
-
hi gh p re s s u re ; or
-
hi gh te m p e ra tu re .
NOTE 1
rupture.
Depending on the energy rate, explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation, or pressure
NOTE 2 An ultracapacitor (for example, a double layer capacitor) is a high energy source and can explode
following overcharging and high temperature.
F o r re q u ire m e n ts re g a rd in g
4.5.2
D u rin g
explosion
of
batteries,
see A nnex
M.
Requirements
normal operating conditions
and
abnormal operating conditions,
an
explosion
s h a ll n o t o c c u r.
If a n
explosion
o ccu rs
d u rin g
single fault conditions,
it
s h a ll
not
cause
in ju ry
and
th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t p a rts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection and tests as specified in Clause B.2, Clause B.3 and
Clause BA.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
4.6
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Fixing of conductors
4.6.1
Requirements
C o n d u c to rs
s h a ll
clearances
or
be
such
th a t d is p la c e m e n t c a n n o t d e fe a t
creepage distances
a
safeguard,
such
as
re d u c in g
b e l o w t h e v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 a n d 5 . 4 . 3 .
T h e f ix in g o f t h e c o n d u c t o r s s h a ll b e s u c h t h a t , if a c o n d u c t o r b e c o m e s lo o s e o r d e t a c h e d , th e
c o n d u c to r c a n n o t d e fe a t a
safeguard,
s u c h a s re d u c in g
clearances
or
creepage distances
b e l o w t h e v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 a n d 5 . 4 . 3 .
F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s , it i s a s s u m e d t h a t :
-
t w o in d e p e n d e n t f ix in g s w ill n o t b e c o m e lo o s e o r d e t a c h e d a t th e s a m e tim e ; a n d
-
p a r t s fix e d b y m e a n s o f s c r e w s o r n u ts p ro v id e d w ith s e lf- lo c k in g w a s h e r s o r o th e r m e a n s
o f lo c k in g a re n o t lia b le to b e c o m e lo o s e o r d e ta c h e d .
NOTE
4.6.2
Spring washers and the like can provide satisfactory locking.
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection， by measurement or， in case o f doubt， by the test of
Clause T.2 applied in the most unfavourable direction.
EXAMPLE
Constructions regarded as meeting the requirements include:
-
close-fitting tubing (for example, a heat shrink or rubber sleeve), applied over the wire and its termination;
-
conductors connected by soldering and held in place near to the termination, independently of the soldered
connection;
-
conductors connected by soldering and securely hooked in before soldering, provided that the hole through
which the conductor is passed is not unduly large;
一
conductors connected to screw terminals, with an additional fixing near to the terminal that clamps, in the case
of stranded conductors, the insulation and not only the conductors;
-
conductors connected to screw terminals and provided with terminators that are unlikely to become free (for
example, ring lugs crimped onto the conductors),however, the pivoting of such terminators is considered; or
-
short rigid conductors that remain in position when the terminal screw is loosened.
4.7
Equipment for direct insertion into mains socket-outlets
4.7.1
General
E q u ip m e n t in c o r p o r a tin g in te g r a l p in s fo r in s e r tio n
in to
mains
s o c k e t- o u tle ts s h a ll n o t im p o s e
u n d u e to r q u e o n th e s o c k e t- o u tle t. T h e m e a n s fo r re ta in in g th e p in s s h a ll w ith s ta n d th e fo r c e s
t o w h i c h t h e p i n s a r e l i k e l y t o b e s u b j e c t e d in n o r m a l u s e .
4.7.2
Requirements
The
mains
The
e q u i p m e n t i s i n s e r t e d , a s in n o r m a l u s e , i n t o a f i x e d
p lu g p a rt s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t s ta n d a r d fo r th e
mains
p lu g .
s o c k e t-o u tle t o f a c o n fig u ra tio n
as
i n t e n d e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h is p i v o t e d a b o u t a h o r i z o n t a l a x i s i n t e r s e c t i n g t h e c e n t r e
lin e s o f th e c o n ta c ts a t a d is ta n c e o f 8 m m
b e h in d th e e n g a g e m e n t fa c e o f th e s o c k e t o u tle t
p a ra lle l to th e e n g a g e m e n t fa c e .
4.7.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and, the additional torque that has to be applied to the
socket-outlet to maintain the engagement face in the vertical plane shall not exceed 0,25 Nm.
The torque to keep the socket-outlet itself in the vertical plane is not included in this value.
NOTE 1
In Australia and New Zealand, compliance is checked in accordance with AS/NZS 3112.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 2 In the United Kingdom, the torque test is performed using a socket-outlet complying with BS 1363， and
the plug part shall be assessed to the relevant clauses of BS 1363.
4.8
Equipment containing coin / button cell batteries
4.8.1
General
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g r e m o te c o n tr o ls , th a t:
-
a r e lik e ly to b e
-
include
accessible
to c h ild r e n ; a n d
coin / button cell batteries
w ith a d ia m e t e r o f 3 2 m m o r le s s .
T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
-
professional equipment;
-
e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s w h e r e i t i s u n l i k e l y t h a t c h i l d r e n w i l l b e p r e s e n t ; o r
-
e q u i p m e n t c o n ta in in g
4.8.2
coin
/
button cell batteries
t h a t a r e s o l d e r e d in p l a c e .
Instructional safeguard
E q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g
safeguard
one
o r m o re
coin
/
button cell batteries
s h a ll h a v e a n
instructional
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 .
instructional safeguard i s n o t
r e p l a c e d o r a r e o n l y accessible a f t e r
The
re q u ire d
w h e re
batteries
a re
n o t in te n d e d
to
be
d a m a g in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
instructional safeguard
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
th e s e
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ D o n o t in g e s t b a tte ry , C h e m ic a l B u m
-
e l e m e n t 3:
th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
H a z a rd ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
[T h e r e m o t e c o n t r o l s u p p lie d w it h ] T h is p r o d u c t c o n t a in s a c o in / b u t t o n c e ll
b a tte ry .
If t h e
c o in
/ b u tto n
c e ll
b a tte ry
is s w a l l o w e d ,
it c a n
cause
se ve re
i n t e r n a l b u r n s in j u s t 2 h o u r s a n d c a n l e a d t o d e a t h .
-
e l e m e n t 4:
th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
K e e p n e w a n d u s e d b a tte rie s a w a y fro m c h ild re n .
If t h e
b a tte ry c o m p a rtm e n t d o e s
n o t c lo s e s e c u re ly , s to p
u s in g th e
p ro d u ct
a n d k e e p it a w a y f r o m c h i l d r e n .
If y o u t h i n k b a t t e r i e s
m ig h t h a v e
b e e n s w a llo w e d
o r p la c e d
in s id e a n y p a rt
o f th e b o d y , s e e k im m e d ia te m e d ic a l a tte n tio n .
4.8.3
Construction
E q u ip m e n t
h a v in g
battery
a
c o m p a rtm e n t
p o s s ib ility o f c h ild re n re m o v in g th e
-
a
tool,
w h ic h
such
as
a
battery
t he
battery
to rq u e o f 0 ,5 N m
c o m p a rtm e n t
door
/
cover
is r e q u i r e d
and
s h a ll b e r e q u ir e d to o p e n th e c o m p a r t m e n t ;
-
/
s h a ll
be
d e s ig n e d
to
re d u c e
th e
b y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g m e th o d s :
s c r e w d r iv e r o r c o in ,
c a s e a m in im u m
door
cover
to
open
a m in im u m
th e
battery
c o m p a rtm e n t,
in
a n g le o f 9 0 d e g r e e s o f ro ta tio n
or
re q u ire s
th e
a p p lic a tio n
of
a
m in im u m
of
tw o
in d e p e n d e n t a n d s im u lta n e o u s m o v e m e n ts to o p e n b y h a n d .
4.8.4
4.8.4.1
Tests
Test sequence
One sample shall be subjected to the applicable tests of 4.8.4.2 to 4.8.4.6. If applicable, the
test in 4.8.4.2 shall be conducted first.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
4.8.4.2
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Stress relief test
If the b a tte ry compartment utilizes moulded or formed thermoplastic materials, the sample
consisting of the complete equipment， or of the complete e n c lo s u re together with any
supporting framework, is tested according to the stress relief test of Clause T.8.
During the test, the b a tte ry may be removed.
4.8.4.3
Battery replacement test
For equipment with a b a tte ry compartment door / cover, the b a tte ry compartment shall be
opened and closed and the b a tte ry removed and replaced ten times to simulate normal
replacement according to the manufacturer's instructions.
If the b a tte ry compartment door / cover is secured by one or more screws, the screws are
loosened and then tightened applying a continuous linear torque according to Table 37, using
a suitable screwdriver， spanner or key. The screws are to be completely removed and
reinserted each time.
4.8.4.4
Drop test
Portable equipment having a mass of 7 kg or less are subjected to three drops from a height
of 1 m onto a horizontal surface in positions likely to produce the maximum force on the
b a tte ry compartment in accordance with Clause T.7.
If the equipment is a remote control, it shall be subjected to ten drops.
4.8.4.5
Impact test
The b a tte ry compartment door / cover shall be subjected to three impacts in a direction
perpendicular to the b a tte ry compartment door / cover according to the test method of
Clause T.6 with a force of:
- 0 , 5 J (102 mm
television; or
- 2
土
10 mm height) for glasses for watching， for example， 3 dimensional
J (408 mm ± 1 0 mm height) for all other doors / covers.
4.8.4.6
Crush test
Hand held remote control devices are to be supported by a fixed rigid supporting surface in a
position likely to produce the most adverse results as long as the position can be selfsupported. A crushing force of 330 N ± 5 N is applied to the exposed top and back surfaces of
remote control devices placed in a stable condition by a flat surface measuring approximately
100 mm by 250 mm for a period o f 10 s.
4.8.5
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by applying a force of 30 N ± 1 N for 10 s to the b a tte ry compartment
door / cover by the straight unjointed version of the test probe of Figure V.1 at the most
unfavourable place and in the most unfavourable direction. The force shall be applied in one
direction at a time.
The b a tte ry compartment door / cover shall remain functional, and:
-
the b a tte ry shall not become a c c e s s ib le ; or
-
it shall not be possible remove the b a tte ry from the product with the test hook of Figure 20
using a force of approximately 20 N.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
1 ± 0,1
§
IEC
Material: steel
Figure 20 - Test hook
4.9
Likelihood of fire or shock due to entry of conductive objects
W h e r e th e e n try o f a c o n d u c tiv e o b je c t fro m o u ts id e th e e q u ip m e n t o r fro m a n o th e r p a rt o f th e
e q u i p m e n t c a n r e s u l t in :
-
b r i d g i n g w ith in P S 3 a n d E S 3
-
b r i d g i n g a n E S 3 c ir c u it to
c irc u its ; o r
accessible,
u n e a rth e d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ,
to p a n d s id e o p e n in g s a b o v e P S 3 a n d E S 3 c irc u its s h a ll:
-
b e lo c a te d m o r e th a n 1 ,8 m a b o v e th e flo o r; o r
-
c o m p l y w ith A n n e x P.
Compliance is checked by inspection or according to Annex P.
4.10
4.10.1
Components requirements
Disconnect device
E q u ip m e n t
c o n n e c te d
to
th e
mains
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
w ith
a
disconnect device
in
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A n n e x L.
4.10.2
Switches and relays
S w i t c h e s a n d r e l a y s l o c a t e d in a P S 3 c i r c u i t o r u s e d a s a
safeguard
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e
G .1 o r C la u s e G .2 r e s p e c t iv e ly .
5
5.1
Electrically-caused injury
General
T o re d u ce
th e
lik e lih o o d
o f p a in fu l e ffe c ts a n d
in ju r y d u e to e le c tr ic c u r r e n t p a s s in g th r o u g h
th e h u m a n b o d y , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
safeguards
s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 5.
旧C
5.2
Classification and limits of electrical energy sources
5.2.1
Electrical energy source classifications
5.2.1.1
ES1
-
-
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
ES1
is a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w it h c u r r e n t o r v o l t a g e le v e ls :
not e x c e e d in g ES1
lim its u n d e r
•
normal operating conditions,
•
abnormal operating conditions， a n d
•
single fault conditions
safeguard; a n d
of
a
and
c o m p o n e n t， d e v ic e
or
ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r single fault conditions
supplementary safeguard.
not
NOTE
e x c e e d in g
in s u la tio n
of a
not
s e rv in g
basic safeguard
as
a
or of a
For accessibility requirements， see 5.3.1 •
5.2.1.2
ES2
E S 2 is a c l a s s 2 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e :
-
b o t h th e v o lta g e a n d th e c u r r e n t e x c e e d th e lim its fo r E S 1 ; a n d
-
under
•
normal operating conditions,
•
abnormal operating conditions,
•
single fault conditions，
and
and
e ith e r th e v o lta g e o r th e c u r r e n t d o e s n o t e x c e e d th e lim it fo r E S 2 .
NOTE
For accessibility requirements, see 5.3.1.
5.2.1.3
ES3
E S 3 is a c l a s s 3 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e b o t h t h e v o l t a g e a n d c u r r e n t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t
fo r E S 2 .
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
Electrical energy source ES1 and ES2 limits
General
T h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 2 . 2 a r e w i t h r e s p e c t t o e a r t h o r w i t h r e s p e c t t o a n
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
accessible
p a rt.
IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
L
1
J
l i j
lo
s
cn
A
ioa s
I S
0)
f
蒼
6 e —
d
)
lco
I
L
I
J
E
•g
E
O
CO
LU
ES3 Current
ES2 Current
2
ES1 Current
ES1
ES2
ES3
Potential, volts
ie c
Figure 21 - Illustration showing ES limits for voltage and current
For
any
v o lta g e
up
to
th e
v o lta g e
lim it,
th e re
is
no
lim it fo r th e
c u rre n t.
L ik e w is e
fo r a n y
c u r r e n t u p t o t h e c u r r e n t l i m i t , t h e r e is n o l i m i t f o r t h e v o l t a g e , s e e F i g u r e 2 1 .
5.2.2.2
Steady state voltage and current limits
A n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e
c l a s s is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m
b o th th e v o lta g e a n d th e c u rre n t u n d e r
normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions,
and
single fault conditions
(s e e T a b le 4 ).
T h e v a lu e s a re th e m a x im u m
th a t c a n b e d e liv e re d
b y t h e s o u r c e . S t e a d y s t a t e is c o n s i d e r e d
e s ta b lis h e d w h e n th e v o lta g e o r c u r r e n t v a lu e s p e r s is t fo r 2 s o r lo n g e r, o th e r w is e th e lim its o f
5 .2 .2 .3 , 5 .2 .2 .4 o r 5 .2 .2 .5 a p p ly , a s a p p ro p ria te .
NOTE In Denmark, a warning (marking safeguard) for high touch current is required if the touch current
exceeds the limits of 3,5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table 4 - Electrical energy source limits for steady state ES1 and ES2
ES1 limits
Energy
source
ES2 limits
CCQ
COO
Voltage
Current a. c. d
Voltage
Current b* c- e
DC c
60 V
2 mA
120 V
25 mA
AC up to
1 kHz
30 V RMS
50 V RMS
42,4 V peak
70,7 V peak
AC
> 1 kHz up to
100 kHz
30 V RMS + 0 , 4 /
0,5 mA RMS
42,4 V peak. + 0,4 \ 2 /
0,707 mA peak
AC above
100 kHz
AC and DC
70,7 V peak + 0,9
70 V RMS
140 V RMS
99 V peak
198 V peak
^D c(V ) ( LrACRMs(V ) ^ 1
Combined
50 V RMS + 0 , 9 /
60
<2 f
6〇
7,07 mA peak
> ES2
/DC(mA) ^ /ACRMs(mA) ^ 1
2
0,5
'
^RMS limit
See Figure 23
^rDc(V )
5 mA RMS
(； ACpeak(V )
/DC(mA)
Gpeak limit
2
/ACpeak(mA)
T
0,707
See Figure 22
-2： 1
As an alternative to the requirements above, the values below can be used for purely sinusoidal waveforms
Energy
source
AC up to
1 kHz
ES1 limits
ES2 limits
Current c
Current c
RMS
RMS
0,5 mA
5 mA
0,5 mA x / d
5 mA + 0f9 5 / e
50 m A d
100 m A e
ES3
AC
> 1 kHz up to
100 kHz
AC above
100 kHz
> ES2
/ i s in kHz.
Peak values shall be used for non-sinusoidal voltage and current. RMS values may be used only for sinusoidal voltage and
current.
See 5.7 for measurement of prospective touch voltage and touch current.
a
Current is measured using the measuring network specified in Figure 4 of IEC 60990:2016.
b
Current is measured using the measuring network specified in Figure 5 of IEC 60990:2016.
c
For sinusoidal waveforms and DC, the current may be measured using a 2 000 Q resistor.
d
Above 22 kHz the accessible area is limited to 1 cm2.
e
Above 36 kHz the accessible area is limited to 1 cm2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure 22 - Maximum values for combined AC current and DC current
Figure 23 - Maximum values for combined AC voltage and DC voltage
5.2.2.3
W h e re
Capacitance limits
th e e le c tric a l e n e rg y
so u rce
is a c a p a c i t o r , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e
is c l a s s i f i e d
th e c h a rg e v o lta g e a n d th e c a p a c ita n c e .
T h e c a p a c i t a n c e is t h e r a t e d v a l u e o f t h e c a p a c i t o r p l u s t h e s p e c i f i e d t o l e r a n c e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
fro m
b o th
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
T h e E S 1 a n d E S 2 l i m i t s f o r v a r i o u s c a p a c i t a n c e v a l u e s a r e l i s t e d in T a b l e 5 .
NOTE 1 The capacitance values for ES2 are derived from Table A.2 of IEC TS 61201:2007.
NOTE 2
two (2).
The values for ES1 are calculated by dividing the values from Table A.2 of IEC TS 61201:2007, by
Table 5 - Electrical energy source limits for a charged capacitor
c
ES1
ES2
ES3
nF
^ peak
^peak
Cpeak
V
V
V
300 or greater
60
120
170
75
150
91
100
200
61
125
250
41
150
300
28
200
400
18
250
500
12
350
700
8,0
500
1 000
4,0
1 000
2 000
1,6
2 500
5 000
0,8
5 000
10 000
0,4
10 000
20 000
0,2
20 000
40 000
0,133 or less
30 000
60 000
> ES2
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points.
5.2.2.4
Single pulse limits
W h e r e t h e e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e is a s i n g l e p u l s e , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e is c l a s s i f i e d f r o m
th e v o lta g e
T a b le 6 a n d
lim it.
If t h e
and
th e
d u ra tio n
T a b le 7 . If t h e
cu rre n t
exceeds
o r fro m
v o lta g e
th e
b o th th e
exceeds
lim it,
th e
c u rre n t a n d th e
th e
lim it, th e n
v o lta g e
s h a ll
th e
not
d u ra tio n . V a lu e s
a re
g iv e n
c u r r e n t s h a ll n o t e x c e e d
exceed
th e
lim it.
b o th
C u rre n ts
in
th e
a re
m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 5 .7 . F o r r e p e titiv e p u ls e s , s e e 5 .2 .2 .5 .
F o r p u ls e d u r a tio n s u p to 10 m s , th e v o lta g e o r c u r r e n t lim it fo r 10 m s a p p lie s .
If m o r e t h a n o n e p u l s e is d e t e c t e d w i t h i n a p e r i o d o f 3 s , t h e n t h e e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
tre a te d a s a re p e titiv e p u ls e a n d th e lim its o f 5 .2 .2 .5 a p p ly .
NOTE 1 The pulse limits are calculated from Figure 22 and Table 10 of IEC TS 60479-1:2005.
NOTE 2
These single pulses do not include transients.
NOTE 3
Pulse duration is considered to be the time duration when the voltage or current exceeds ES1 limits.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
is
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 6 - Voltage limits for single pulses
Pulse duration
up to and including
ES1
ES2
ES3
^ peak
^ peak
U peaku
ms
V
V
V
10
196
20
178
50
150
60
> ES2
80
135
100
129
200 and longer
120
If the time duration lies between the values in any two rows， either the lower ES2 value of C/peak shall be used or
a linear interpolation may be used between any two adjacent rows with the calculated peak voltage value
rounded down to the nearest volt.
If the peak voltage for ES2 lies between the values in any two rows, either the shortest time duration may be
used or a linear interpolation may be used between any two adjacent rows with the calculated time duration
rounded down to the nearest millisecond.
Table 7 - Current limits for single pulses
5.2.2.5
Limits for repetitive pulses
E x c e p t fo r
p u ls e s
d e te rm in e d
fro m
th e
lim it,
th e n
co ve re d
e ith e r th e
th e
cu rre n t
in
A n n e x H,
a
re p e titiv e
p u ls e
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
so u rce
a v a ila b le v o lta g e
o r th e a v a ila b le
c u rre n t.
If th e v o lt a g e
s h a ll
th e
cu rre n t
exceeds
not
exceed
lim it.
If t h e
th e
c la s s
is
exceeds
lim it,
th e
v o lt a g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim it. C u r r e n ts a re m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 5 .7 .
F o r p u ls e o ff tim e s le s s th a n
3 s, th e p e a k v a lu e s o f 5 .2 .2 .2 a p p ly . F o r lo n g e r d u r a tio n s , th e
v a lu e s o f 5 .2 .2 .4 a p p ly .
5.2.2.6
W h e re
Ringing signals
th e
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
so u rce
is
an
a n a lo g u e
te le p h o n e
n e tw o rk
d e f i n e d in A n n e x H , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e E S 2 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
rin g in g
s ig n a l
as
旧C
5.2.2.7
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Audio signals
F o r e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e s t h a t a r e a u d i o s i g n a l s , t h e l i m i t s a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e E . 1 .
5.3
Protection against electrical energy sources
5.3.1
General
E x c e p t a s g iv e n
b e lo w ,
instructed persons,
ES2
ES3
or
s e p a ra te d
p ro te c tio n
skilled persons
and
c irc u its ,
fro m
ES3 mains
fro m
re q u ire m e n ts
to
ordinary persons,
a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .
accessible ES1
double safeguard
w h ic h
by a
accessible
fo r p a rts
or
or
ES2 c i r c u i t s a r e d e r i v e d ,
a reinforced safeguard. In
s h a ll
be
a d d itio n ,
th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s :
-
under
single fault conditions
in t h e c i r c u i t b e t w e e n
th e c u r r e n t o r v o lta g e le v e ls s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 1
-
under
single fault conditions
in t h e c i r c u i t b e t w e e n
E S 2 /E S 3
a n d th e
accessible
ES1,
lim its ; a n d
E S 2 /E S 3
and
accessible
E S 2 , th e
c u r r e n t o r v o lt a g e le v e ls s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2 lim its .
NOTE An example for this construction is a rectifier in the insulated (secondary) circuit in a switch mode power
supply in which multiple components are present.
B a re c o n d u c to rs
at ES3
s h a ll
be
lo c a te d
c o n d u c to rs d u rin g s e rv ic e o p e ra tio n s b y a
For a
battery
5.3.2
-
p a rts
at
ES2,
under
e x c e p t fo r th e
p in s
o f c o n n e c to rs .
normal operating conditions
b a r e p a rts a t E S 3 ; a n d
-
an ES3
in te n d e d
accessible:
th e fo llo w in g s h a ll n o t b e
-
b a re
is u n l i k e l y ( s e e F i g u r e 1 9 ) .
Requirements
accessible
For
skilled person
such
b a c k e d u p s u p p ly c a p a b le o f b a c k fe e d in g to th e in p u t A C te r m in a ls , s e e 5 .8 .
ordinary persons,
bare
s o th a t u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t w ith
Accessibility to electrical energy sources and safeguards
5.3.2.1
For
or g u a rd e d
H o w e ve r,
such
p in s
s h a ll
not be
b y th e b lu n t p ro b e o f F ig u re V .3 ; a n d
basic safeguard.
outdoor equipment t h a t a r e accessible t o a n ordinary person
outdoor location, t h e f o l l o w i n g s h a l l n o t b e accessible:
p a rts
of
in
th e ir
-
bare
p a rts
ES1 v o l t a g e l i m i t s u n d e r normal operating conditions
a n d abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault conditions o f a c o m p o n e n t , d e v i c e
o r i n s u l a t i o n n o t s e r v i n g a s a safeguard; a n d
-
bare
p a rts
safeguard
For
e x c e e d in g
e x c e e d in g
or of a
tim e s
ES1
v o lta g e
lim its
under
supplementary safeguard
instructed persons,
-
b a r e p a rts a t E S 3 ; a n d
-
an ES3
5.3.2.2
0 ,5
single fault conditions
of
a
basic
(s e e 5 .2 .1 .1 ).
th e fo llo w in g s h a ll n o t b e
accessible:
basic safeguard.
Contact requirements
F o r E S 3 v o lta g e s u p to 4 2 0 V p e a k , th e a p p r o p r ia te te s t p r o b e fr o m A n n e x V s h a ll n o t c o n ta c t
a b a re in te rn a l c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
For
ES3
c o n ta c t
v o lta g e s
a
b a re
above
420 V peak,
th e
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt
in te rn a l
a p p ro p ria te
and
s h a ll
te s t
have
p ro b e
an
fro m
a ir
Annex V
gap
fro m
s h a ll
th a t
not
p a rt
(s e e F ig u re 2 4 ).
T h e a ir g a p s h a ll e ith e r:
a)
p a s s a n e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 1
t h a t is e q u a l t o t h e t e s t v o l t a g e f o r
o f th e
b)
working voltage;
basic insulation
a t a te s t v o lta g e (D C o r p e a k A C )
in T a b l e 2 6 c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e p e a k
or
h a v e a m in im u m d is t a n c e a c c o r d in g to T a b le 8.
Bare internal conductive part
Figure 24 - Contact requirements to bare internal conductive parts
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table 8 - Minimum air gap distance
Voltage
Air gap distance
mm
V peak or DC up to and including
Pollution degree
2
> 420 and < 1 000
0,2
1 200
0,25
1 500
0,5
3
0,8
2 000
1,0
2 500
1,5
3 000
2,0
4 000
3,0
5 000
4,0
6 000
5,5
8 000
8,0
10 000
11
12 000
14
15 000
18
20 000
25
25 000
33
30 000
40
40 000
60
50 000
75
60 000
90
80 000
130
100 000
170
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum air gap distance being
rounded up to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or the value in the next row below whichever is lower.
For equipment intended to be used more than 2 000 m above sea level, the values in this table are multiplied by
the multiplication factor for the desired altitude according to Table 16.
5.3.2.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by the test of Clause T.3.
In addition, for bare ES3 parts at a voltage above 420 V peak, compliance is checked by
distance measurement or by an electric strength test.
Components and subassemblies that comply with their respective IEC standards do not have
to be tested when such components and subassemblies are used in the final product.
5.3.2.4
The
use
Terminals for connecting stripped wire
o f a s trip p e d
w ire
to
m ake
c o n n e c tio n
w ith
its
a s s o c ia te d
te rm in a l
in te n d e d
to
be
used:
-
by an
ordinary person
-
by an
instructed person
s h a l l n o t r e s u l t in c o n t a c t w i t h E S 2 o r E S 3 ; a n d
s h a l l n o t r e s u l t in c o n t a c t w i t h E S 3 .
E.1 f o r t h e v a l u e s o f ES2
safeguards i n T a b l e E.1 a r e
ES3.
F o r a u d io s ig n a l v o lta g e s , s e e T a b le
and
te r m in a ls p r o v id e d w ith o n e o f th e
n o t te s te d .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
P a rts o f a u d io s ig n a l
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Compliance is checked by the test o f V.1.6 for each wire term inal opening as well as any
other openings within 25 mm from the terminal. During the test，no portion o f the probe
inserted into the term inal or opening shall contact ES2 or ES3.
5.4
Insulation materials and requirements
5.4.1
General
5.4.1.1
Insulation
clearances, creepage distances a n d solid
insulation， a n d t h a t i s p r o v i d i n g a safeguard f u n c t i o n i s d e s i g n a t e d basic insulation，
supplementary insulation， double insulation， o r reinforced insulation.
In s u la tio n
5.4.1.2
The
c o n s is tin g
of
in s u la tin g
m a te ria ls ，
Properties of insulating material
c h o ic e
e le c tric a l
and
a p p lic a tio n
s tre n g th ,
of
m e c h a n ic a l
o th e r p ro p e rtie s fo r th e w o rk in g
in s u la tin g
s tre n g th ,
m a te ria l
d im e n s io n ,
s h a ll
ta k e
fre q u e n c y
e n v iro n m e n t (te m p e ra tu re ,
in to
account
o f th e
th e
needs
fo r
working voltage
and
p re s s u re , h u m id ity a n d
p o llu tio n )
a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 5 a n d A n n e x T .
In s u la tin g m a te ria l s h a ll n o t b e h y g r o s c o p ic a s d e te r m in e d b y 5 .4 .1 .3 .
5.4.1.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and，where necessary，by evaluation o f the data for the
material.
Where necessary，if the data does not confirm that the m aterial is non-hygroscopic，the
hygroscopic nature o f the m aterial is determ ined by subjecting the com ponent or subassem bly
using the insulation in question to the hum idity treatm ent o f 5.4.8. The insulation is then
subjected to the relevant electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1 while still in the hum idity chamber, or
in the room in which the samples were brought to the prescribed temperature.
5.4.1.4
Maximum operating temperatures for materials， components and systems
5.4.1.4.1
Under
Requirements
normal operating conditions,
te m p e ra tu re
lim it o f th e
E IS f in c lu d in g
in s u la tin g
in s u la tin g
m a te ria l te m p e r a tu r e s
m a te ria ls
s h a ll
o f c o m p o n e n ts ,
not exceed
o r th e
th e
m a x im u m
t e m p e r a t u r e l i m i t o f t h e i n s u l a t i o n s y s t e m a s g i v e n in T a b l e 9 .
For
m a x im u m
te m p e ra tu re s
b e lo w
or
equal
to
100 °C ,
no
d e c la re d
in s u la tio n
s y s te m
is
r e q u i r e d . A n u n d e c l a r e d E I S is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e C l a s s 1 0 5 ( A ) .
5.4.1.4.2
Test method
Insulating m aterial tem peratures are m easured in accordance with B.1.5.
The equipm ent or parts o f the equipm ent are operated under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s
(see Clause B.2) as follows:
一
for continuous operation，until steady state conditions are established; and
-
f or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n , until steady state conditions are established, using the rated
“O N” and “O FF” periods; and
-
f or s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n , for the operating time specified by the manufacturer.
Components and other parts may be tested independently o f the end product provided that
the test conditions applicable to the end product are applied to the com ponent or part.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Equipm ent intended for building-in or rack-m ounting，or for incorporation in larger equipment,
is tested under the m ost adverse actual or sim ulated conditions specified in the installation
instructions.
5.4.1.4.3
Compliance criteria
The tem perature o f the electrical insulation m aterial or EIS shall not exceed the lim its in
Table 9.
For a single insulating material, the declared relative temperature index inform ation from the
m aterial m anufacturer can be used if it is suitable for the applicable class o f insulation.
For an EIS, the available therm al class data o f the EIS as indicated by the m anufacturer can
be used if it is suitable for the applicable class o f insulation.
For therm al classifications above Class 105 (A), the EIS shall com ply with IEC 60085.
Table 9 - Temperature limits for materials， components and systems
Part
Maximum temperature r max
oc
Insulation, including winding insulation:
of Class 105 (A) material or EIS
100 a
of Class 120 (E) material or EIS
115 a
of Class 130 (B) material or EIS
120 a
of Class 155 (F) material or EIS
140 a
of Class 180 (H) material or EIS
165 a
of Class 200 (N) material or EIS
180 a
of Class 220 (R) material or EIS
200 a
of Class 250 material or EIS
225 a
Insulation of internal and external wiring, including power supply cords:
一
without temperature marking
-
with temperature marking
Other thermoplastic insulation
70
Temperature marked on the wire or spool,
or rating assigned by the manufacturer
See 5.4.1.10
See also Annex G and 4.1.2
Components
The classes are related to the temperature classes of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with
IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.
For each material, account shall be taken of the data for that material to determine the appropriate maximum
temperature.
a
If the temperature of a winding is determined by thermocouples, these values are reduced by 10 K, except in
the case of:
-
a motor, or
一
a winding with embedded thermocouples.
5.4.1.5
Pollution degrees
5.4.1.5.1
General
T h e d iffe re n t d e g re e s o f p o llu tio n o f th e o p e ra tin g o r m ic r o - e n v ir o n m e n t fo r p ro d u c ts c o v e re d
b y th is d o c u m e n t a re g iv e n b e lo w .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Pollution degree 1
N o p o llu tio n o r o n ly d ry , n o n - c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n o c c u rs . T h e p o llu tio n h a s n o in flu e n c e .
NOTE 1 Within the equipment, components or subassemblies that are sealed to exclude dust and moisture are
examples of pollution degree 1.
Pollution degree 2
O n ly
n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
p o llu tio n
o ccu rs
except
th a t
o c c a s io n a lly
a
te m p o ra ry
c o n d u c tiv ity
c a u s e d b y c o n d e n s a t i o n is to b e e x p e c t e d .
NOTE 2
Pollution degree 2 is generally appropriate for equipment covered by the scope of this document.
Pollution degree 3
C o n d u c tiv e
p o llu tio n
o c c u rs o r d ry n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
p o llu tio n
o c c u rs th a t b e c o m e s
c o n d u c tiv e
d u e t o c o n d e n s a t i o n , w h i c h is to b e e x p e c t e d .
5.4.1.5.2
Test for pollution degree 1 environment and for an insulating compound
A sample is subjected to the therm al cycling sequence o f 5.4.1.5.3.
It is allow ed to cool to room temperature and is then subjected to the hum idity conditioning o f
5.4.8.
If the test is conducted for verification o f the insulating com pound form ing s o lid in s u la tio n as
required by 5.4.4.3f the conditioning is im m ediately follow ed by the electric strength test o f
5.4.9.1.
For printed boards, compliance is checked by external visual inspection. There shall be no
delam ination which affects the creepage d is ta n c e s required to fulfil the requirem ents o f
p o llu tio n degree 1.
For other than printed boards，compliance is checked by inspection o f the cross-sectional
area，and there shall be no visible voids, gaps o r cracks in the insulating material.
5.4.1.5.3
Thermal cycling test procedure
A sample o f a com ponent o r subassem bly is subjected to the follow ing sequence o f tests. The
sample is subjected 10 times to the follow ing sequence o f therm al cycling:
68 h
at
1h
at
±
2h
at
(0 ± 2) °C;
> 1h
at
(2 5
(T^ ± 2) °C;
°C ;
f
= T2 + Tma - Tamb + 10 K, or 85 °C, whichever is higher. However，the 10 K margin is not
added if the tem perature is m easured by an embedded thermocouple o r by the resistance
method.
T2 is the temperature o f the parts m easured during the test o f 5.4.1.4.
The significance o f Tma and Tarr)b are as given in B .2 .6 .1.
The period o f time taken for the transition from one temperature to another is not specified,
but the transition may be gradual.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
5.4.1.6
If t h e
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Insulation in transformers with varying dimensions
in s u la tio n
of
a
tra n s fo rm e r
has
d iffe re n t
clearances, creepage distances
w in d in g , th e
working voltages
a lo n g
th e
le n g th
of
th e
a n d d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n m a y v a r y in a
c o rre s p o n d in g fa s h io n .
NOTE An example of such a construction is a 30 kV winding, consisting of multiple bobbins connected in series,
and earthed or connected to a common point at one end.
5.4.1.7
For
Insulation in circuits generating starting pulses
c irc u its
la m p ),
g e n e ra tin g
th e
insulation
NOTE 1
s ta rtin g
e x c e e d in g
ES1
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
to
ig n ite
basic insulation, supplementary insulation
creepage distances a n d d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n .
re q u ire m e n ts
a p p ly to
p u ls e s
fo r
a
d is c h a rg e
reinforced
and
For working voltages in the above cases, see 5.4.1.8.1 i).
NOTE 2 If the starting pulse is an AC waveform, the pulse width is determined by connecting the peak values of
the AC waveform.
clearances
The
a re d e te rm in e d b y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g m e th o d s :
-
d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m
-
conduct one
clearance
o f th e fo llo w in g
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
e le c tric
s tre n g th
5.4.2;
te s ts , w ith
or
th e
c o n n e c tio n
te rm in a ls
o f th e
s ta rtin g p u ls e c ir c u it (fo r e x a m p le , a la m p ) s h o rte d to g e th e r:
•
t h e t e s t g i v e n in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ; o r
•
a p p l y 3 0 p u l s e s h a v i n g a n a m p l i t u d e e q u a l t o t h e r e q u i r e d t e s t v o l t a g e g i v e n in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1
g e n e r a te d b y a n e x te r n a l p u ls e g e n e r a to r . T h e p u ls e w id th s h a ll b e e q u a l to o r g r e a te r
th a n th a t o f th e in te r n a lly g e n e r a te d s ta r tin g p u ls e .
Compliance is checked by inspection or test. During the test, the insulation shall show no
breakdown or flashover.
5.4.1.8
Determination of working voltage
5.4.1.8.1
General
In d e t e r m i n i n g
working voltages,
a)
u n e a rth e d
accessible
b)
if a
a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s a p p ly :
c o n d u c t iv e p a r ts a re a s s u m e d to b e e a r th e d ;
tra n s fo rm e r w in d in g
o r o th e r
p a rt
is
n o t c o n n e c te d
to
a
c irc u it th a t e s ta b lis h e s
its
p o te n tia l re la tiv e to e a rth , th e w in d in g o r o th e r p a rt a re a s s u m e d to b e e a r th e d a t a p o in t
b y w h ic h th e h ig h e s t
c)
except
as
s p e c ifie d
working voltage
in
5 .4 .1 .6 ,
fo r
is o b t a i n e d ;
in s u la tio n
b e tw e e n
tw o
tra n s fo rm e r
h i g h e s t v o l t a g e b e t w e e n a n y t w o p o i n t s in t h e t w o w i n d i n g s i s t h e
w in d in g s ,
working voltage,
th e
ta k in g
in to a c c o u n t th e v o lt a g e s to w h ic h th e in p u t w in d in g s w ill b e c o n n e c t e d ;
d)
e x c e p t a s s p e c ifie d
p a rt,
th e
h ig h e s t
in 5 . 4 . 1 . 6 , f o r i n s u l a t i o n
v o lta g e
b e tw e e n
any
p o in t
b e tw e e n
on
th e
a tra n s fo r m e r w in d in g
w in d in g
and
th e
and
o th e r
a n o th e r
p a rt
is
th e
working voltage;
e)
working voltage a c r o s s t h e basic insulation is
d e t e r m i n e d b y i m a g i n i n g a s h o r t - c i r c u i t a c r o s s t h e supplementary insulation, a n d v i c e
v e r s a . F o r double insulation b e t w e e n t r a n s f o r m e r w i n d i n g s , t h e s h o r t - c i r c u i t i s a s s u m e d
t o t a k e p l a c e a t t h e p o i n t b y w h i c h t h e h i g h e s t working voltage i s p r o d u c e d a c r o s s t h e
w h e re
double insulation
is u s e d , t h e
o th e r in s u la tio n ;
f)
when
th e
working voltage
th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e th e
is d e t e r m i n e d
by m e a s u re m e n t, th e
in p u t v o lta g e s u p p lie d
rated voltage
o r th e v o lta g e w ith in
th e
rated voltage range
t h a t r e s u l t s in t h e h i g h e s t m e a s u r e d v a l u e ;
g)
th e
working voltage
-
a n y p a r t c o n n e c t e d to e a r th ; a n d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
b e t w e e n a n y p o i n t in t h e c i r c u i t s u p p l i e d b y t h e
to
mains
and
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
a n y p o i n t in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m t h e
mains,
s h a ll b e ta k e n a s th e g r e a te r o f th e fo llo w in g :
h)
rated voltage
-
t he
-
t he m e a s u r e d v o lta g e ;
when
d e te rm in in g
o p e ra tin g
d u ra tio n
i)
s h a ll
working voltage
th e
s ig n a ls
working voltage
th e
v o lta g e s
be ta k e n
(su ch
as
fo r
g e n e ra tin g
s ta rtin g
p u ls e s
be
ta k e n
as
creepage distances
5.4.1.8.2
In
or ES2
If t h e
external circuit,
o p e ra tin g
rin g in g )
s h a ll
(fo r e x a m p le ,
not
v o lta g e s
le s s
th a n
30
be
d is c h a rg e
is t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e p u l s e s w i t h t h e
la m p ig n ite s . T h e fr e q u e n c y o f th e
s h a ll
ES1
a c c o u n t.
te le p h o n e
working voltage;
working voltage
in to
fo r an
and
a re
th e
n o rm a l
not known,
s h a ll b e ta k e n a s th e u p p e r lim its o f E S 1 o r E S 2 a s a p p lic a b le . S h o r t
d e te rm in in g
c irc u its
rated voltage range;
o r th e u p p e r v o lta g e o f th e
ta k e n
in to
account
fo r
la m p s ,
see
5 .4 .1 .7 ),
th e
la m p c o n n e c te d
working voltage t o d e t e r m i n e
k H z . T h e working voltage
b u t b e fo re th e
th e m in im u m
to
d e te rm in e
clearance
m in im u m
is t h e v o l t a g e m e a s u r e d a f t e r t h e ig n it io n o f t h e la m p .
RMS working voltage
d e te rm in in g
RMS working voltage, s h o r t - t e r m c o n d i t i o n s ( f o r e x a m p l e , c a d e n c e d
s i g n a l s i n external circuits) a n d n o n - r e p e t i t i v e t r a n s i e n t s ( f o r e x a m p l e , d u e
th e
te le p h o n e rin g in g
to a t m o s p h e r ic d is t u r b a n c e s ) a re n o t ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
NOTE
The creepage distances are determined from the RMS w o rkin g voltages.
5.4.1.9
Insulating surfaces
accessible i n s u l a t i n g
d e te rm in in g
clearances,
An
s u rfa c e
is
c o n s id e re d
creepage
to
distances
be
co ve re d
and
by
a
d is ta n c e
th in
m e ta llic
th ro u g h
fo il
fo r
in s u la tio n
(s e e F ig u re 0 . 1 3 ) .
5.4.1.10
Thermoplastic parts on which conductive metallic parts are directly mounted
5.4.1.10.1
Requirements
T h e rm o p la s tic
s u ffic ie n tly
p a rts
re s is ta n t
on
to
w h ic h
heat
if
c o n d u c tiv e
s o fte n in g
m e ta llic
of
th e
p a rts
p la s tic
a re
d ire c tly
c o u ld
re s u lt
m o u n te d
in
th e
s h a ll
fa ilu re
of
be
a
safeguard.
Compliance is checked by exam ination o f the Vicat test or ball pressure data from the
m aterial manufacturer. If the data is not available, compliance is checked by either the Vicat
test o f 5.4.1.10.2 o r by the ball pressure test o f 5.4.1.10.3.
5.4.1.10.2
Vicat test
The m easured tem perature during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , as specified in Clause B.2f
shall be at least 15 K less than the Vicat softening temperature as specified in Vicat test B50
o f ISO 306.
The m easured tem perature during a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s o f Clause B.3 shall be
less than the Vicat softening temperature.
The Vicat softening tem perature o f a non-m etallic part supporting parts in a circuit supplied
from the m a in s shall be not less than 125 °C.
5.4.1.10.3
Ball pressure test
Compliance is checked by subjecting the part to the ball pressure test according to
IEC 60695-10-2. The test is made in a heating cabinet at a temperature o f (T ^amb + Tma + 15 °C) 土 2 °C (see B.2.6.1 for the explanation o f T， Tma and Tamb). However, a
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
thermoplastic part supporting parts in a circuit supplied from the m a in s is tested at a
minimum of 125 °C.
After the test, dimension d (diameter o f the indentation) shall not exceed 2 mm.
The test is not made if it is clear from examination of the physical characteristics of the
material that it will meet the requirements of this test.
5.4.2
Clearances
5.4.2.1
General requirements
Clearances
s h a ll b e s o d im e n s io n e d t h a t th e lik e lih o o d o f b r e a k d o w n d u e to :
-
temporary overvoltages;
-
t r a n s i e n t v o lta g e s th a t m a y e n te r th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
recurring
peak
v o lta g e s
and
and
th e ir
re la te d
fre q u e n c ie s
th a t
a re
g e n e ra te d
w ith in
th e
e q u ip m e n t
is r e d u c e d .
A ll
clearances
re q u ire d
and
a ltitu d e s ,
th e
m u ltip lic a tio n
ro u n d in g
up,
and
T a b le
11,
T a b le
b e fo re
14
te s t v o lta g e s
fa c to rs
any
a n d T a b le
o th e r
of
a p p ly
5.4.2.5
to
a p p ly
m u ltip lic a tio n
an
a ltitu d e
up
2 000
to
m.
For
a fte r a n y lin e a r in te rp o la tio n ,
fa c to rs
a re
a p p lie d
as
s ta te d
h ig h e r
b u t b e fo re
in
T a b le
10,
15.
NOTE For air gaps between contacts of safety interlocks, see Annex K. For air gaps between contacts of
disconnect devices, see Annex L. For air gaps between contacts in components, see Annex G. For connectors,
see G.4.1.
U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d
clearances
b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r a n d s u p p lie d w ith m e a n s to a s s u r e
m in im u m
d u r in g a ll m o d e s o f n o r m a l o p e r a t io n , th e v o ic e c o il a n d a d j a c e n t c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s
o f a lo u d s p e a k e r a re c o n s id e r e d to b e c o n d u c t iv e ly c o n n e c t e d .
T o d e te rm in e th e
clearance,
th e h ig h e s t v a lu e o f th e fo llo w in g tw o p r o c e d u r e s s h a ll b e u s e d :
-
P r o c e d u r e 1: D e t e r m i n e
clearances
-
P r o c e d u r e 2: D e te rm in e
clearances
clearances
m ay
be
d e te rm in e d
a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .2 .
a c c o rd in g
u s in g
an
to
5 .2 .2 .3 .
e le c tric
A lte rn a tiv e ly ,
s tre n g th
te s t
th e
a c c o rd in g
adequacy
to
5 .2 .2 .4 ,
of
in
w h ic h c a s e th e v a lu e s a c c o r d in g to P r o c e d u r e 1 s h a ll b e m a in ta in e d .
F o r O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry
II, clearances
in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o a n A C
mains
n o t e x c e e d in g
4 2 0 V p e a k (3 0 0 V R M S ) m a y b e d e te rm in e d p e r A n n e x X a s a n a lte rn a tiv e .
5.4.2.2
To
Procedure 1 for determining clearance
d e te rm in e
th e
v o lta g e
to
be
used
in
T a b le 10
and
T a b le 11, th e
h ig h e s t v o lta g e
o f th e
f o l l o w i n g is u s e d a s a p p l i c a b l e :
working voltage
-
t he p e a k v a lu e o f th e
a c ro s s th e
-
t h e r e c u r r i n g p e a k v o lt a g e s , if a n y , a c r o s s t h e
-
f or c irc u its
clearance;
clearance;
AC mains: t h e temporary overvoltage, w h i c h i s t a k e n a s
2 000 V p e a k i f t h e n o m i n a l AC mains s y s t e m v o l t a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d 250 V a n d i s t a k e n
a s 2 500 V p e a k i f t h e n o m i n a l AC mains s y s t e m v o l t a g e e x c e e d s 250 V b u t d o e s n o t
e x c e e d 600 V.
c o n n e c te d
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e
to
th e
temporary overvoltage
m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3
o f I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 : 2 0 0 7 a t t h e d i s c r e t i o n o f t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , in w h i c h c a s e t h e r e f e r e n c e to
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
“ s o lid
旧C
2018
i n s u l a t i o n ” in 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3 o f I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 : 2 0 0 7
th e s h o r t te r m v a lu e e q u a l to
NOTE
Un
is r e p l a c e d
by “c le a ra n c e s ” . M o re o v e r，
+ 1 2 0 0 V is t a k e n a s t h e v o l t a g e f o r u s e in T a b l e 1 0 .
is the nominal line-to-neutral voltage of the neutral-earthed supply system.
T h is v o lt a g e s h a ll b e u s e d to d e te r m in e th e
-
clearance
-
clearance
clearance
a s fo llo w s :
v a lu e s o f T a b le 10 fo r c ir c u its w ith fu n d a m e n t a l f r e q u e n c ie s u p to 3 0 k H z ; o r
v a lu e s
of
T a b le
11
fo r
c irc u its
w ith
fu n d a m e n ta l
fre q u e n c ie s
h ig h e r
th a n
30 kH z; or
-
t he h ig h e s t
clearance
v a l u e s o f T a b l e 1 0 a n d T a b l e 11 f o r c i r c u i t s w h e r e b o t h f r e q u e n c i e s
lo w e r th a n 3 0 k H z a n d h ig h e r th a n 3 0 k H z a re p re s e n t.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Table 10 - Minimum clearances fo r voltages with frequencies up to 30 kHz
Voltage up to and
including
Basic insulation or supplementary
insulation
Reinforced insulation
mm
mm
Pollution degree
Pollution degree
peak
1a
!
(
；
2
3
1a
330
0,01
0,02
400
0,02
0,04
500
0,04
600
0,06
800
0,13
1 000
0,26
〇
,2
2
0,08
0,8
0,26
3
0,4
0,12
1,5
0,26
0,52
0,52
1 200
0,42
0,84
1 500
0,76
1,52
1,6
2 000
1,27
2,54
2 500
1,8
3,6
3 000
2,4
4,8
4 000
3,8
7,6
5 000
5,7
11,0
6 000
7,9
15,8
8 000
11,0
20
10 000
15,2
27
12 000
19
33
15 000
25
42
20 000
34
59
25 000
44
77
30 000
55
95
40 000
77
131
50 000
100
175
60 000
120
219
80 000
175
307
100 000
230
395
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances being
rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values:
-
not exceeding 0,5 mm， the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and
一
exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.
a
The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 11 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies above 30 kHz
Voltage up to and including
Basic insulation or
supplementary insulation
Reinforced insulation
peak
mm
mm
600
0,07
0,14
800
0,22
0,44
1 000
0,6
1,2
1 200
1,68
3,36
1 400
2,82
5,64
1 600
4,8
9,6
1 800
8,04
16,08
2 000
13,2
26,4
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances being
rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values:
一
not exceeding 0,5 mmf the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and
一
exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.
For pollution degree 1, use a multiplication factor of 0,8.
For pollution degree 3, use a multiplication factor of 1,4.
5.4.2.3
Procedure 2 for determining clearance
5.4.2.3.1
The
General
d im e n s io n
external circuit
Each
clearance
clearance
fo r a
th a t
is
is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m t h e
s u b je c t to
tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s
required withstand voltage
mains
clearance.
th e
fo r th a t
or an
s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d u s in g th e fo llo w in g s te p s :
-
d e t e r m i n e th e t r a n s ie n t v o lt a g e a c c o r d in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 ; a n d
-
d e t e r m i n e th e
-
d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m
required withstand voltage
clearance
Determining transient voltages
5.4.2.3.2.1
General
v o lta g e s
can
be
a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .3 ; a n d
a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .4 .
5.4.2.3.2
T ra n s ie n t
fro m
d e te rm in e d
based
on
th e ir
o rig in ,
or
can
be
m e a su re d
in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 .5 .
If d if f e r e n t t r a n s ie n t v o lt a g e s a f f e c t th e s a m e
clearance,
t h e l a r g e s t o f t h o s e v o l t a g e s is u s e d .
T h e v a lu e s a re n o t a d d e d to g e th e r.
Outdoor equipment c o n n e c t e d
transient voltage e x p e c t e d i n t h e
to
th e
mains
s h a ll
be
s u ita b le
fo r
th e
h ig h e s t
mains
in s ta lla tio n lo c a tio n .
C o n s id e r a tio n s h a ll b e g iv e n to th e fo llo w in g :
-
t h e p r o s p e c t iv e fa u lt c u r r e n t o f th e s u p p ly to
outdoor equipment
can
b e h ig h e r th a n fo r
in d o o r e q u ip m e n t, s e e IE C 6 0 3 6 4 -4 -4 3 ; a n d
-
t he
mains transient voltage
fo r
outdoor equipment
can
be
h ig h e r
th a n
fo r
in d o o r
e q u ip m e n t.
C o m p o n e n ts
w ith in
outdoor equipment
th a t
re d u ce
th e
mains transient voltage
p r o s p e c tiv e fa u lt c u r r e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - s e r ie s .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
or
th e
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
NOTE 1 The overvoltage category of outdoor equipment is normally considered to be one of the following:
一
if powered via the normal building installation wiring, Overvoltage Category II;
-
if powered directly from the mains distribution system, Overvoltage Category III;
-
if at, or in the proximity of, the origin of the electrical installation, Overvoltage Category IV.
NOTE 2
For further information regarding protection from overvoltages, see IEC 60364-5-53.
Compliance is checked by inspection of the equipment, the installation instructions and,
where necessary, by the applicable component tests specified in the IEC 61643-series.
5.4.2.3.2.2
Determining AC mains transient voltages
F o r e q u ip m e n t to be s u p p lie d fro m
mains,
th e A C
mains
d e p e n d s on th e o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o ry a n d th e A C
g e n e ra l,
clearances
in
e q u ip m e n t
in te n d e d
to
mains transient voltage
th e v a lu e o f th e
be
v o l t a g e a n d is g iv e n
c o n n e c te d
to
th e
AC
in T a b l e 1 2 . In
mains,
s h a ll
be
d e s i g n e d f o r O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r y II.
NOTE
See Annex I for further guidance on the determination of overvoltage categories.
E q u ip m e n t th a t
is
lik e ly ,
when
in s ta lle d ,
to
be
s u b je c te d
to
tra n s ie n t
v o lta g e s
th a t e x c e e d
t h o s e f o r its d e s ig n o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y r e q u ir e s a d d it io n a l t r a n s i e n t v o lt a g e p r o t e c t io n to b e
p ro v id e d
e x te r n a l to th e
e q u ip m e n t.
In t h i s
c a s e , th e
in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s
s h a ll s ta te
th e
n e e d fo r s u c h e x te rn a l p ro te c tio n .
Table 12 - Mains transient voltages
AC mains voltage a
up to and including
Mains transient voltage b
V peak
Overvoltage Category
V RMS
I
II
III
IV
50
330
500
800
1 500
100 c
500
800
1 500
2 500
150 d
800
1 500
2 500
4 000
300 e
1 500
2 500
4 000
6 000
600 f
2 500
4 000
6 000
8 000
For equipment designed to be connected to a three-phase 3-wire supply, where there is no neutral conductor,
the AC mains supply voltage is the line-to-line voltage. In all other cases, where there is a neutral conductor,
it is the line-to-neutral voltage.
b
The mains transient voltage is always one of the values in the table. Interpolation is not permitted.
In Japan, the value of the mains transient voltages for the nominal AC mains supply voltage of 100 V is
determined from columns applicable to the nominal AC mains supply voltage of 150 V.
d
Including 120/208 V and 120/240 V.
e
Including 230/400 V and 277/480 V.
f
Including 400/690 V.
5.4.2.3.2.3
If a n
e a rth e d
Determining DC mains transient voltages
DC
p o w e r d is trib u tio n
s y s te m
is e n t i r e l y w i t h i n
a s in g le
b u ild in g , th e tr a n s ie n t
v o l t a g e is s e l e c t e d a s f o l l o w s :
-
if t h e
DC
p o w e r d is trib u tio n
s y s te m
is e a r t h e d
a t a s in g le
p o in t,
th e
tra n s ie n t v o lta g e
is
ta k e n to b e 5 0 0 V p e a k ; o r
-
if t h e
DC
power
d is trib u tio n
s y s te m
is
e a rth e d
t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e is t a k e n t o b e 3 5 0 V p e a k ; o r
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
at
th e
so u rce
and
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE The connection to protective earth can be at the source of the DC power distribution system or at the
equipment location, or both (see ITU-T Recommendation K.27).
-
if t h e c a b lin g
a s s o c ia te d
w ith
th e
DC
p o w e r d is trib u tio n
s y s te m
i s s h o r t e r t h a n 4 m o r is
i n s t a l l e d e n t i r e l y in c o n t i n u o u s m e t a l l i c c o n d u i t , t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e is t a k e n t o b e 1 5 0 V
peak.
If a
DC
power
tra n s ie n t
voltage
If t h e
d is trib u tio n
v o lta g e
in t h e
DC
w ith
mains
s y s te m
r e s p e c t to
and
not
e a rth
e a rth e d
s h a ll
be
or
is
ta k e n
not
w ith in
be
equal
to
th e
to
sam e
b u ild in g ,
th e
mains transient
th e
f r o m w h i c h t h e D C p o w e r is d e r iv e d .
p o w e r d is trib u tio n
in s ta lla tio n
is
p ro te c tio n
s y s te m
is n o t w i t h i n
te c h n iq u e s
s im ila r
th e s a m e
to
th o s e
b u ild in g , a n d
of
is c o n s t r u c t e d
external circuits,
th e
u s in g
tra n s ie n t
v o lta g e s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d u s in g th e r e le v a n t c la s s ific a tio n fro m 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 .4 .
If e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d
mains
fro m
battery
th a t has
n o p ro v is io n
fo r c h a rg in g
fro m
a
s u p p ly w it h o u t r e m o v a l fro m th e e q u ip m e n t, th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e s h a ll b e d is r e g a r d e d .
W h e n d e te rm in in g th e D C
mains
s h a ll b e ta k e n
th e D C
mains
If t h e
a d e d ic a te d
DC
mains transient voltage,
in to a c c o u n t.
If t h e s e
p o w e r d is trib u tio n
s y s te m
mains transient voltage
d e c la re th e
5.4.2.3.2.4
mains transient voltage
a re n o t k n o w n , th e
outdoor equipment
s u p p ly fo r a n
th e in s ta lla tio n a n d th e s o u rc e o f th e D C
s h a ll b e ta k e n a s 1 ,5 kV .
is n o t w i t h i n
on th e D C
on
th e
sam e
mains
b u ild in g , th e
m a n u f a c tu r e r s h a ll
s u p p l y in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .
Determining external circuit transient voltages
T h e a p p lic a b le v a lu e o f th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e th a t m a y o c c u r o n a n
d e te rm in e d
u s in g
T a b le 13.
W h e re
m o re
th a n
one
lo c a tio n
or
h ig h e s t tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e a p p lie s . A rin g in g o r o th e r in te rru p te d
external circuit
c o n d itio n
is
s h a ll b e
a p p lic a b le ,
th e
s ig n a l s h a ll n o t b e ta k e n
in to
a c c o u n t if t h e v o l t a g e o f t h i s s i g n a l is l e s s t h a n t h a t o f t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e .
If t h e
tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e
te le p h o n e
rin g in g
is
le s s
s ig n a l), th e
th a n
th e
peak
v o lta g e
o f a s h o rt d u ra tio n
p e a k v o lta g e o f th e s h o rt d u ra tio n
s ig n a l
(su ch
s ig n a l s h a ll b e u s e d
as
a
a s th e
tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e .
If t h e
external circuit
tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s a re
known
to b e h ig h e r th a n
in d ic a te d
in T a b l e 1 3 ,
th e k n o w n v a lu e s h a ll b e u s e d .
NOTE 1 Australia has published its overvoltage limits in AS/ACIF G624:2005.
NOTE 2 It is assumed that adequate measures have been taken to reduce the likelihood that the transient
voltages presented to the equipment exceed the values specified in Table 13. In installations where transient
voltages presented to the equipment are expected to exceed the values specified in Table 13, additional measures
such as surge suppression can be necessary.
NOTE 3 In Europe, the requirement for interconnection with an external circuit is in addition given in
EN 50491-3:2009, G eneral requirem ents fo r Home and B uilding E lectronic System s (HBES) and B uilding
A utom ation and C ontrol System s (BACS)
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
-
P art 3: E le ctrica l safety requirem ents.
- 100
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 13 - External circuit transient voltages
ID
Cable type
Additional conditions
Transient voltages
Paired conductor a shielded or
unshielded
The building or structure may or may not
have equipotential bonding.
2
Any other conductors
The external circuit is not earthed at either
end, but there is an earth reference (for
example, from connection to mains).
Mains transient voltage or external
circuit transient voltage of the circuit
from which the circuit in question is
derived whichever is higher.
3
Coaxial cable in the
cable distribution
network
Equipment other than power-fed coaxial
repeaters. Cable shield is earthed at the
equipment.
4 000 V 10/700 Ms
Coaxial cable in the
cable distribution
network
Power fed coaxial repeaters (up to 4,4 mm
coaxial cable). Cable shield is earthed at
the equipment.
5 000 V 10/700 ns
Coaxial cable in the
cable distribution
network
Equipment other than power-fed coaxial
repeaters. Cable shield is not earthed at the
equipment. Cable shield is earthed at
building entrance.
4 000 V 10/700 ms
1
4
5
1 500 V 10/700 Ms
Only differential if one conductor is
earthed in the equipment
Centre conductor to shield
Centre conductor to shield
Centre conductor to shield
1 500 V 1,2/50 ps shield to earth
6
Coaxial cable
Cable connects to an outdoor antenna
no transient b
7
Paired conductor a
Cable connects to an outdoor antenna
no transient b
8
Coaxial cable within
the building
The connection of the cable coming from
outside the building is made via a transfer
point. The shield of the coaxial cable from
outside the building and the shield of the
coaxial cable of the cable within the building
are connected together and are connected
to earth.
Not applicable
In general, for external circuits installed wholly within the same building structure, transients are not taken into
account. However, a conductor is considered to leave the building if it terminates on equipment earthed to a
different earthing network.
The effects of unwanted steady state voltages generated outside the equipment (for example, earth potential
differences and voltages induced on telecommunication networks by electric train systems) are controlled by
installation practices. Such practices are application dependent and are not dealt with by this document.
For a shielded cable to affect a reduction in transients, the shield shall be continuous, earthed at both ends, and
have a maximum transfer impedance of 20 Q/km (fo r/le s s than 1 MHz).
NOTE 1
Home appliances like audio, video and multimedia products are addressed by ID 6, 7 and 8.
NOTE 2 In Norway and Sweden, the cable shield on coaxial cables is normally not earthed at the building
entrance (see the note in 5.7.7). For installation conditions, see IEC 60728-11.
a
A paired conductor includes a twisted pair.
These cables are not subject to any transients but they may be affected by a 10 kV electrostatic discharge
voltage (from a 1 nF capacitor). The effect of such electrostatic discharge voltages is not taken into account
when determining clearances. Compliance is checked by the test of G.10.4.
5.4.2.3.2.5
Determining transient voltage levels by measurement
T h e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e a c ro s s th e
D u rin g
circuit.
th e
m e a s u re m e n t,
th e
clearance
e q u ip m e n t
is m e a s u r e d u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g p r o c e d u r e .
is n o t c o n n e c t e d
to
th e
mains
o r to
O n l y s u r g e s u p p r e s s o r s i n t e r n a l t o t h e e q u i p m e n t in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o
a r e d i s c o n n e c t e d . If t h e e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e u s e d w i t h a s e p a r a t e
external
t h e mains
any
p o w e r s u p p l y , it is
c o n n e c te d to th e e q u ip m e n t d u rin g th e m e a s u re m e n t.
T o m e a s u re th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e a c ro s s a
of
Annex D
is
used
to
g e n e ra te
clearance,
im p u ls e s .
At
le a s t
th e a p p ro p ria te im p u ls e te s t g e n e ra to r
th re e
im p u ls e s
of
each
p o la rity ,
in te r v a ls o f a t le a s t 1 s b e tw e e n im p u ls e s , a re a p p lie d b e tw e e n e a c h r e le v a n t p o in t.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
w ith
旧C
a)
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a n A C
The
mains
AC mains transient voltages
is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e
1 , 2 / 5 0 (is i m p u l s e s
b e tw e e n th e fo llo w in g p o in ts :
-
line-to-line;
-
al l l i n e c o n d u c t o r s c o n d u c t i v e l y j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d n e u t r a l ;
-
al l l i n e c o n d u c t o r s c o n d u c t i v e l y j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h ; a n d
-
neut r al a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth .
mains
T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a D C
The
i m p u l s e t e s t g e n e r a t o r c i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1
DC mains transient voltages,
e q u a l to th e
c)
-
i m p u l s e t e s t g e n e r a t o r c i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1
e q u a l to th e
b)
- 101
is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e
a t th e fo llo w in g p o in ts :
-
t he p o s itiv e a n d n e g a tiv e s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n p o in ts ; a n d
-
al l s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n p o i n t s j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h .
T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a n
1 , 2 / 5 0 (is i m p u l s e s
external circuit
T h e a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t g e n e r a t o r o f A n n e x D is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e i m p u l s e s a s a p p l i c a b l e a n d
d e s c rib e d
in
T a b le 13
and
a re
a p p lie d
b e tw e e n
each
o f th e
fo llo w in g
external circuit
c o n n e c tio n p o in ts o f a s in g le in te rfa c e ty p e :
-
e a c h p a i r o f t e r m i n a l s ( f o r e x a m p l e , A a n d B o r t i p a n d r i n g ) in a n i n t e r f a c e ; a n d
-
al l t e r m i n a l s o f a s i n g l e i n t e r f a c e t y p e j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d e a r t h .
A v o l t a g e m e a s u r i n g d e v i c e is c o n n e c t e d a c r o s s t h e
clearance
in q u e s t i o n .
W h e r e t h e r e a r e s e v e r a l i d e n t i c a l c i r c u i t s , o n l y o n e is t e s t e d .
5.4.2.3.3
Determining required withstand voltage
required withstand voltage
The
is e q u a l t o t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e a s d e t e r m i n e d
in 5 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 ,
e x c e p t fo r th e fo llo w in g c a s e s :
-
mains i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e m a i n protective earthing t e r m i n a l
t h r o u g h a protective bonding conductor, t h e required withstand voltage m a y b e o n e
o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y l o w e r o r o n e AC mains v o l t a g e l o w e r in T a b l e 12. F o r a n AC mains
If a c ir c u it is o la te d f r o m
th e
u p to a n d in c lu d in g 5 0 V R M S , n o a d ju s t m e n ts a re m a d e .
-
In a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m
th e
mains
s u p p lie d
b y a D C s o u r c e w ith c a p a c itiv e filte rin g , a n d
required withstand voltage s h a l l b e
e q u a l t o t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e DC voltage o f t h e s o u r c e , o r t h e p e a k
voltage o f t h e c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m t h e mains, w h i c h e v e r i s h i g h e r .
c o n n e c te d
-
to
p ro te c tiv e
e a rth , th e
If e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d f r o m
th e
th e
mains s u p p l y w i t h o u t r e m o v a l
required withstand voltage i s
5.4.2.3.4
Each
a d e d ic a te d
th e
o f th e
to
be
working
th a t h a s n o p ro v is io n fo r c h a rg in g fro m
e q u ip m e n t, th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e
e q u a l to th e p e a k o f th e
working voltage.
Determining clearances using required withstand voltage
clearance
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
fro m
battery
assum ed
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t v a lu e o f T a b le 14.
is z e r o
and
- 102
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 14 - Minimum clearances using required withstand voltage
Required
withstand voltage
Basic insulation or supplementary
insulation
Reinforced insulation
mm
mm
Pollution degree
Pollution degree
V peak or DC
up to and including
1a
330
0,01
0,02
400
0,02
0,04
500
0,04
0,08
600
0,06
2
3
2
1a
0,2
〇
3
,4
0,12
0,8
1,5
800
0,10
〇
,2
1 000
0,15
〇
,3
1 200
0,25
0,5
1 500
0,5
1,0
2 000
1,0
2,0
2 500
1,5
3,0
3 000
2,0
3,8
4 000
3,0
5,5
5 000
4,0
8,0
6 000
5,5
8,0
8 000
8,0
14
10 000
11
19
12 000
14
24
15 000
18
31
20 000
25
44
25 000
33
60
30 000
40
72
40 000
60
98
50 000
75
130
60 000
90
162
80 000
130
226
100 000
170
290
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances shall be
rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values:
-
not exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and
一
exceeding 0 f5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.
a
The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.
5.4.2.4
Determining the adequacy of a clearance using an electric strength test
The cle a ra n ce s shall withstand an electric strength test. The test may be conducted using an
impulse voltage or an AC voltage or a DC voltage. The re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e is
determined as given in 5.4.2.3.
The impulse withstand voltage test is carried out with a voltage having an appropriate
waveform (see Annex D) with the values specified in Table 15. Five impulses of each polarity
are applied with an interval of at least 1 s between pulses.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-
103
-
The AC voltage test is conducted using a sinusoidal voltage with a peak value as specified in
Table 15 and is applied for 5 s.
The DC v o lta g e test is conducted using a DC v o lta g e specified in Table 15 and applied for
5 s in one polarity and then for 5 s in reverse polarity.
Table 15 - Electric strength test voltages
Required withstand voltage up to and including
Test voltage for electric strength for clearances for
basic insulation or supplementary insulation
kV peak
kV peak
(impulse or AC or DC)
0,33
0,36
0,5
0,54
0,8
0,93
1,5
1,75
2,5
2,92
4,0
4,92
6,0
7,39
8,0
9,85
12,0
14,77
1,23
U a
x U a
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum test voltage being
rounded up to the next higher 0,01 kV increment.
For reinforced insulation, the test voltage for electric strength is 160 % of the value for the basic insulation
after which this calculated test voltage is rounded up to the next higher 0,01 kV increment.
If the EUT fails the AC or DC test, the impulse test shall be used.
If the test is conducted at an altitude of 200 m or more above sea level, Table F.5 of IEC 60664-1:2007 may be
used, in which case linear interpolation between 200 m and 500 m altitudes and between the corresponding
impulse test voltages of Table F.5 of IEC 60664-1:2007 may be used.
a
V
is any required withstand voltage higher than 12,0 kV.
5.4.2.5
Multiplication factors for altitudes higher than 2 000 m above sea level
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
m in im u m
v o lta g e s
clearances
in
T a b le 15
and
in
a re
d e s ig n e d
T a b le 10,
m u ltip lie d
to
be
used
T a b l e 11
and
by
th e
m o re
th a n
T a b le 14
m u ltip lic a tio n
2 000 m
and
fa c to r
th e
fo r
above
e le c tric
th e
sea
le v e l,
s tre n g th
d e s ire d
te s t
a ltitu d e
a c c o rd in g to T a b le 16.
NOTE 1
Higher altitudes can be simulated in a vacuum chamber.
NOTE 2
In China, special requirements in choosing multiplication factors for altitudes above 2 000 m exist.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
- 104 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 16 - Multiplication factors for clearances and test voltages
Normal
barometric
pressure
Altitude
m
Multiplication factor for electric
strength test voltages
Multiplication
factor for
clearances
< 1 mm
> 1 mm to
< 1 0 mm
> 1 0 mm to
< 1 0 0 mm
kPa
2 000
80,0
1,00
1,00
1,00
1,00
3 000
70,0
1,14
1,05
1,07
1,1 〇
4 000
62,0
1,29
1,10
1,15
1,20
5 000
54,0
1,48
1,16
1,24
1,33
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum multiplication factor
being rounded up to the next higher 0,01 increment.
5.4.2.6
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by measurement and test taking into account the relevant clauses of
Annex 〇 and Annex T.
The following conditions apply:
-
movabl e parts are placed in their most unfavourable positions;
-
cl ear ances from an e n c lo s u re of insulating material through a slot or opening are
measured according to Figure 0.13f point X;
-
-
-
during the force tests, metal e n c lo s u re s shall not come into contact with bare conductive
parts of:
•
ES2 circuits， unless the product is in a re s tric te d a cce ss area, or
•
ES3 circuits;
after the tests of Annex T:
•
the dimensions for cle a ra n ce s are measured, and
•
the relevant electric strength test shall be applied， and
•
for the glass impact test of Clause T.9， damage to the finish, small dents that do not
reduce cle a ra n ce s below the specified values, surface cracks and the like are ignored.
If a through crack appears, cle a ra n ce s shall not be reduced. For cracks not visible to
the naked e y e , an electric strength test shall be conducted; and
components and parts, other than parts serving as an e n clo su re , are subjected to the test
of Clause T.2. After the application of the force, cle a ra n ce s shall not be reduced below
the required values.
For circuits connected to coaxial cable distribution or outdoor antennas, compliance is
checked by the tests o f 5.5.8.
5.4.3
Creepage distances
5.4.3.1
General
Creepage distances
pollution degree a n d
s h a ll
be
so
d im e n s io n e d
th a t,
fo r
a
g iv e n
m a te ria l g ro u p , n o fla s h o v e r o r b r e a k d o w n
RMS working voltage,
o f in s u la tio n
(fo r e x a m p le ,
d u e to tr a c k in g ) w ill o c c u r .
Creepage distances
to
30 kH z
s h a ll
fo r
c o m p ly
basic insulation
w ith
supplementary insulation
c o m p ly w ith T a b le 18.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
fo r
T a b le 17.
supplementary insulation f o r f r e q u e n c i e s u p
Creepage distances f o r basic insulation a n d
and
fre q u e n c ie s
g re a te r
th a n
30 kH z
and
up
to
400 kH z
s h a ll
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
creepage distance
The
105
-
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
-
fre q u e n c ie s
up
to
400 kHz
can
be
used
fo r
f r e q u e n c i e s o v e r 4 0 0 k H z u n t i l a d d i t i o n a l d a t a is a v a i l a b l e .
NOTE
Creepage distances for frequencies higher than 400 kHz are under consideration.
creepage distance
The
(in c lu d in g
w ith in
an
th e
o p e n in g
c o n n e c to r
in
(o r
b e tw e e n
th e
in
th e
o u te r
in s u la tin g
s u rfa c e
enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e
t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y
(se e
p a rts
5 .4 .3 .2 )
th a t
w ith
a re
th e
of a
c o n n e c to r
c o n n e c te d
to
ES2
basic
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
5.4.3.2 )
c o n n e c to r
insulation.
creepage distance
The
(in c lu d in g
an
o p e n in g
in
b e tw e e n
th e
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r in t h e
th e
o u te r
enclosure)
enclosure)
in s u la tin g
and
s u rfa c e
c o n d u c tiv e
(se e
p a rts
th a t
a re
of a
ES3
reinforced
c o n n e c te d
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r
to
insulation.
As
an
e x c e p tio n ,
insulation
th e
creepage distance
m ay
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
basic
i f t h e c o n n e c t o r is :
-
f i xed to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
l o c a t e d in te r n a lly to th e o u t e r
-
only
accessible
electrical enclosure
a fte r re m o v a l o f a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t
•
i s r e q u i r e d t o b e in p l a c e d u r i n g
•
is p r o v i d e d w i t h a n
F o r a ll o t h e r
o f th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
normal operating conditions,
instructional safeguard
creepage distances
and
to re p la c e th e re m o v e d s u b a s s e m b ly .
in c o n n e c t o r s , i n c l u d i n g c o n n e c t o r s t h a t a r e n o t f i x e d t o t h e
e q u i p m e n t , t h e m i n i m u m v a l u e s d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 3 a p p l y .
T h e a b o v e m in im u m
creepage distances
fo r c o n n e c t o r s d o n o t a p p ly to c o n n e c t o r s lis te d
in
C la u s e G .4.
If
th e
creepage distance d e r i v e d f r o m T a b l e 17 o r T a b l e 18 i s l e s s t h a n t h e
clearance, t h e n t h e m i n i m u m clearance s h a l l b e a p p l i e d a s t h e m i n i m u m creepage
m in im u m
m in im u m
distance.
For
g la s s ,
distance
m ic a ,
g la z e d
c e ra m ic
or
in o rg a n ic
reinforced insulation, t h e v a l u e s
insulation in T a b l e 17 o r T a b l e 18.
For
m a te ria ls ,
clearance,
creepage distance.
is g r e a t e r t h a n t h e a p p l i c a b l e m i n i m u m
m a y be a p p lie d a s th e m in im u m
5.4.3.2
s im ila r
fo r
if t h e
m in im u m
th e v a lu e o f m in im u m
creepage distances
creepage
clearance
a re tw ic e th e v a lu e s fo r
basic
Test method
The following conditions apply:
一
movable parts are placed in their most unfavourable positions;
-
for equipment incorporating ordinary n o n -d e ta ch a b le p o w e r s u p p ly cords, creepage
d is ta n c e measurements are made with supply conductors of the largest cross-sectional
area specified in Clause G.7f and also without conductors;
一
when measuring creepage d is ta n c e s from an a c c e s s ib le outer surface of an e n c lo s u re
of insulating material through a slot or opening in the e n c lo s u re or through an opening in
an a c c e s s ib le connector, the a c c e s s ib le outer surface of the e n c lo s u re shall be
considered to be conductive as if it were covered by a metal foil during the test of V.1.2,
applied without appreciable force (see Figure 0.73, point X);
一
the dimensions for creepage d is ta n c e s functioning as b a s ic in s u la tio n , s u p p le m e n ta ry
in s u la tio n and re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n are measured after the tests of Annex T according
to 4.4.3;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 106 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
-
for the glass impact test of Clause T.9f damage to the finish, small dents that do not
reduce creepage d is ta n c e s below the specified values, surface cracks and the like are
ignored. If a through crack appears, creepage d is ta n c e s shall not be reduced;
-
components and parts, other than parts serving as an e n clo su re , are subjected to the test
of Clause T.2. After the application of the force, creepage d is ta n c e s shall not be reduced
below the required values.
5.4.3.3
Material group and CTI
M a te ria l g r o u p s a re b a s e d o n th e C T I a n d a re c la s s ifie d a s fo llo w s :
M a te ria l G r o u p I
600 < CTI
M a t e r i a l G r o u p II
400 < CTI < 600
M a te ria l G r o u p Ilia
175 < CTI < 400
M a te ria l G r o u p lllb
100 < CTI < 175
The
m a te ria l
g ro u p
is c h e c k e d
b y e v a lu a tio n
o f th e
te s t d a ta
fo r th e
m a te ria l
a c c o rd in g
to
If a C T I o f 1 7 5 o r g r e a t e r is n e e d e d , a n d t h e d a t a is n o t a v a i l a b l e , t h e m a t e r i a l g r o u p c a n
be
IE C 6 0 1 1 2 u s in g 5 0 d r o p s o f s o lu tio n A .
If t h e m a t e r i a l g r o u p is n o t k n o w n , M a t e r i a l G r o u p l l l b s h a l l b e a s s u m e d .
e s t a b l i s h e d w i t h a t e s t f o r p r o o f t r a c k i n g i n d e x ( P T I ) a s d e t a i l e d in I E C 6 0 1 1 2 . A m a t e r i a l m a y
be
in c lu d e d
in a g r o u p
if its P T I e s t a b l is h e d
by th e s e te s ts
is e q u a l t o , o r g r e a t e r t h a n , t h e
lo w e r v a lu e o f th e c o m p a r a tiv e tra c k in g in d e x (C T I) s p e c ifie d fo r th e g ro u p .
5.4.3.4
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by measurement taking into account Annex 0 7 Annex T and Annex V.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
- 107 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 17 - Minimum creepage distances for basic insulation
and supplementary insulation in mm
RMS working
voltage
up to and
including
Pollution degree
1a
V
I, II ， Ilia, m b
I
II
Ilia, lllb
I
II
Ilia, lllb b
10
0,08
0,4
0,4
0,4
1,0
1,0
1,0
12,5
0,09
0,42
0,42
0,42
1,05
1,05
1,05
16
0,1
0,45
0,45
0,45
1,1
1,1
1,1
20
0,11
0,48
0,48
0,48
1,2
1,2
1,2
25
0,125
0,5
0,5
0,5
1,25
1,25
1,25
32
0,14
0,53
0,53
0,53
1,3
1,3
1,3
40
0,16
0,56
0,8
1,1
1,4
1,6
1,8
50
0,18
0,6
0,85
1,2
1,5
63
0,2
0,63
0,9
1,25
1,6
1,8
2,0
80
0,22
0,67
0,95
1,3
1,7
1,9
2,1
100
0,25
0,71
1,0
1,4
1,8
2,0
2,2
125
0,28
0,75
1,05
1,5
1,9
2,1
2,4
160
0,32
0,8
1,1
1,6
2,0
2,2
2,5
200
0,42
1,0
1,4
2,0
2,5
2,8
3,2
250
0.56
1,25
1,8
2,5
3,2
3,6
4,0
320
0,75
1,6
2,2
3,2
4,0
4,5
5,0
400
1,0
2,0
2,8
4,0
5,0
5,6
6,3
500
1,3
2,5
3,6
5,0
6,3
7,1
8,0
630
1,8
3,2
4,5
6,3
8,0
9.0
10
800
2,4
4,0
5,6
8,0
10
11
12,5
1 000
3,2
5,0
7,1
10
12,5
14
16
1 250
4,2
6,3
9,0
12,5
16
18
20
1 600
5,6
8,0
11
16
20
22
25
2 000
7,5
10
14
20
25
28
32
2 500
10
12,5
18
25
32
36
40
3 200
12,5
16
22
32
40
45
50
4 000
16
20
28
40
50
56
63
5 000
20
25
36
50
63
71
80
6 300
25
32
45
63
80
90
100
8 000
32
40
56
80
100
110
125
10 000
40
50
71
100
125
140
160
12 500
50
63
90
125
16 000
63
80
110
160
20 000
80
100
140
200
25 000
100
125
180
250
32 000
125
160
220
320
40 000
160
200
280
400
50 000
200
250
360
500
63 000
250
320
450
600
2
3
Material group
1,9
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum creepage distance
being rounded to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or the value in the next row below whichever is lower.
For reinforced insulation, the rounding to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or to double the value in the next
row is done after doubling the calculated value for basic insulation.
a
The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.
b
Material Group lllb is not recommended for applications in pollution degree 3 with an RMS working voltage
above 630 V.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 108 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 18 - Minimum values of creepage distances (in mm) for frequencies higher
than 30 kHz and up to 400 kHz
Voltage
30 kHz < / < 100 kHz
100 kHz < f < , 200 kHz
200 kHz
< f< ,
400 kHz
kV
〇
,1
0,016 7
0,02
0,025
〇
,2
0,042
0,043
0,05
〇
,3
0,083
0,09
0,1
0,4
0,125
0,13
0,15
,5
0,183
0,23
0,25
0,6
0,267
0,38
0,4
0,7
0,358
0,55
0,68
0,8
0,45
0,8
1,1
0,9
0,525
1,0
1,9
1,15
3
〇
1
〇
,6
The values for the creepage distances in the table apply for pollution degree 1. For pollution degree 2 a
multiplication factor of 1,2 and for pollution degree 3, a multiplication factor of 1,4 shall be used.
Linear interpolation may be applied, the result being rounded up to the next significant digit.
The data given in this Table 18 (from Table 2 of IEC 60664-4:2005) does not take into account the influence of
tracking phenomena. For that purpose, Table 17 has to be taken into account. Therefore, if values in Table 18
are smaller than those in Table 17, the values of Table 17 apply.
5.4.4
Solid insulation
5.4.4.1
The
General requirements
re q u ire m e n ts
o f th is s u b c la u s e
a p p ly to
solid insulation， i n c l u d i n g
com pounds
and gel
m a te ria ls u s e d a s in s u la tio n .
Solid insulation
-
s h a ll n o t b re a k d o w n :
d u e to o v e rv o lta g e s , in c lu d in g tra n s ie n ts , th a t e n te r th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d p e a k v o lta g e s th a t
m a y be g e n e r a te d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
d u e t o p i n h o l e s in t h i n l a y e r s o f i n s u l a t i o n .
E n a m e lle d
c o a tin g s
s h a ll
reinforced insulation
not
be
used
fo r
basic insulation, supplementary insulation
e x c e p t a s g i v e n in G . 6 . 2 .
E x c e p t fo r p rin te d b o a rd s ,
solid insulation
s h a ll e ith e r:
-
c o m p l y w i t h m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 4 . 2 ; o r
-
m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d p a s s t h e t e s t s in 5 . 4 . 4 . 3 t o 5 . 4 . 4 . 7 , a s a p p l i c a b l e .
G la s s u s e d a s
T.9.
Dam age
solid insulation
to
th e
fin is h ,
s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e g l a s s i m p a c t t e s t a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e
s m a ll
d e n ts
th a t do
v a lu e s , s u r fa c e c r a c k s a n d th e lik e a re ig n o r e d .
creepage distances
F o r p rin te d
not
re d u ce
If a t h r o u g h
clearances
b e lo w
cra ck a p p e a rs,
th e
s p e c ifie d
clearances
and
s h a ll n o t b e r e d u c e d b e lo w th e s p e c ifie d v a lu e s .
b o a rd s , s e e C la u s e G .1 3 . F o r a n te n n a te rm in a ls , s e e 5 .4 .5 . F o r
o n in te rn a l w irin g , s e e 5 .4 .6 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
or
solid insulation
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
5.4.4.2
—109 —
Minimum distance through insulation
E xce p t w h e re
d im e n s io n e d
a n o th e r s u b c la u s e
a c c o rd in g
to
th e
o f C la u s e
a p p lic a tio n
5 a p p lie s ,
o f th e
d is ta n c e s
in s u la tio n
and
th ro u g h
in s u la tio n
a s fo llo w s
(se e
s h a ll
be
F ig u re 0 . 1 5
a n d F ig u re 0 .1 6 ) :
-
working voltage
if th e
does
not exceed
ES2
v o lta g e
lim its , th e r e
is n o
re q u ire m e n t fo r
d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n ;
-
working voltage
if th e
e x c e e d s E S 2 v o lta g e lim its , th e fo llo w in g ru le s a p p ly :
•
fo r
basic insulation,
•
fo r
supplementary insulation
n o m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n is s p e c i f i e d ;
or
reinforced insulation
c o m p ris e d
o f a s in g le
la y e r,
th e m in im u m d is ta n c e th r o u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll b e 0 ,4 m m ;
•
supplementary insulation
fo r
or
reinforced insulation
c o m p ris e d
o f m u ltip le
la y e rs ,
th e m in im u m d is ta n c e th r o u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .6 .
5.4.4.3
Insulating compound forming solid insulation
T h e r e is n o m i n i m u m
-
t he
in s u la tin g
in te rn a l
clearance
com pound
creepage distance
or
c o m p le te ly
fills
th e
c a s in g
of
r e q u i r e d if:
a
com ponent
or
s u b a s s e m b ly ,
in c lu d in g a s e m ic o n d u c to r d e v ic e (fo r e x a m p le , a n o p to c o u p le r); a n d
-
t he
com ponent
or
s u b a s s e m b ly
m e e ts
th e
m in im u m
d is ta n c e s
th ro u g h
in s u la tio n
o f 5 .4 .4 .2 ; an d
-
a s in g le s a m p le p a s s e s th e te s ts o f 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 .
NOTE Some examples
impregnation.
of such
treatment are variously
known
as
potting,
encapsulation
and
vacuum
S u c h c o n s tr u c tio n s c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .
Alternative requirements for semiconductor devices are given in 5.4.4.4.
F o r p rin te d b o a rd s , s e e C la u s e G .1 3 a n d fo r w o u n d c o m p o n e n ts , s e e 5 .4 .4 .7 .
Compliance is checked by sectioning the sample. There shall be no visible voids in the
insulating material.
5.4.4.4
T h e re
Solid insulation in semiconductor devices
is
th ro u g h
no
m in im u m
in s u la tio n
in s u la tin g
fo r
com pound
clearance o r creepage distance, a n d n o m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e
supplementary insulation o r reinforced insulation c o n s i s t i n g o f a n
in te rn a l
c o m p le te ly
fillin g
th e
c a s in g
of
a
s e m ic o n d u c to r
com ponent
(fo r
routine tests
fo r
e x a m p le , a n o p to c o u p le r ) p ro v id e d th a t th e c o m p o n e n t:
-
passes
th e
type tests
and
in s p e c tio n
c rite ria
of
5 .4 .7 ;
and
passes
e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h d u r i n g m a n u f a c t u r i n g , u s i n g t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t in 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 ; o r
-
c o m p l i e s w ith C la u s e G .1 2 .
S u c h c o n s tr u c tio n s c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .
A lte rn a tiv e ly , a s e m ic o n d u c to r m a y b e e v a lu a te d a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .4 .3 .
5.4.4.5
Insulating compound forming cemented joints
T h e re q u ire m e n ts s p e c ifie d b e lo w a p p ly w h e n an in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d fo rm s a c e m e n te d jo in t
b e tw e e n
tw o
n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts o r b e tw e e n
a n o th e r n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt and
r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to o p to c o u p le r s th a t c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
its e lf. T h e s e
- 110
W h e re
th e
p a th
b e tw e e n
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
旧C
-
is
fille d
w ith
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
in s u la tin g
com pound,
and
th e
in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d fo rm s a c e m e n te d jo in t b e tw e e n tw o n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o r b e tw e e n a
n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt a n d
its e lf (s e e
F ig u re 0 . 1 4 ,
F ig u re 0 . 1 5
and
F ig u re 0 . 1 6 ) ,
one
o f th e
fo llo w in g a ), b ) o r c) a p p lie s .
a)
T h e d is ta n c e a lo n g
th e p a th
clearances
m in im u m
and
b e tw e e n
th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e
creepage distances
p a rts s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th e
pollution degree
fo r
2. T h e re q u ire m e n ts
fo r d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n o f 5 .4 .4 .2 d o n o t a p p ly a lo n g th e jo in t.
b)
The
d is ta n c e a lo n g th e
clearances
m in im u m
p a th
and
b e tw e e n th e tw o
c o n d u c tiv e
creepage distances
fo r
p a rts s h a ll n o t b e le s s th a n th e
pollution degree 1.
A d d itio n a lly , o n e
s a m p l e s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t o f 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 2 . T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n in
5 .4 .4 .2 d o n o t a p p ly a lo n g th e jo in t.
c)
The
re q u ire m e n ts fo r d is ta n c e th ro u g h
in s u la tio n
o f 5 .4 .4 .2
a p p ly b e tw e e n th e c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts a lo n g th e jo in t. A d d itio n a lly , th r e e s a m p le s s h a ll p a s s th e te s t o f 5 .4 .7 .
For a) and
b) a b o v e ,
if t h e
in s u la tin g
m a te ria ls
in v o lv e d
have
d iffe r e n t m a te ria l g ro u p s , th e
w o r s t c a s e is u s e d . If a m a t e r i a l g r o u p is n o t k n o w n , M a t e r i a l G r o u p l l l b s h a l l b e u s e d .
F o r b) a n d c) a b o v e , th e te s ts o f 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 a n d 5 .4 .7
p rin te d
b o a rd
m ade
u s in g
p re -p re g
a re n o t a p p lie d
if t h e t e m p e r a t u r e
o f th e
p rin te d
to th e in n e r la y e rs o f a
b o a rd
m e a su re d
d u rin g
th e h e a tin g te s t o f 5 .4 .1 .4 d o e s n o t e x c e e d 9 0 °C .
NOTE
Some examples of cemented joints are as follows:
-
two non-conductive parts cemented together (for example, two layers of a multilayer board,
see Figure 0 .1 4 ) or the split bobbin of a transformer where the centre limb is secured by adhesive
(see Figure 0.16);
spirally wrapped insulation on a winding wire, sealed by adhesive insulating compound, is an example of
PD1; or
-
the joint between a non-conductive part (the casing) and the insulating compound itself in an optocoupler
(see Figure 0.15).
5.4.4.6
Thin sheet material
5.4.4.6.1
T h e re
is
used as
General requirements
no
d im e n s io n a l
o r c o n s tru c tio n a l
re q u ire m e n t
fo r
in s u la tio n
in
th in
sheet
m a te ria l
basic insulation.
NOTE An instrument to carry out the electric strength test on thin sheets of insulating material is described in
Figure 29.
I n s u l a t i o n in t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s m a y b e u s e d f o r
insulation,
supplementary insulation
t wo o r m o re la y e rs a re u s e d ; a n d
-
t h e i n s u l a t i o n is w i t h i n t h e e q u i p m e n t
-
t h e i n s u l a t i o n is n o t s u b j e c t to h a n d l i n g o r a b r a s i o n d u r i n g
-
t he
reinforced
irre s p e c tiv e o f th e d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n , p ro v id e d th a t:
-
person
and
enclosure;
and
ordinary person
or
instructed
s e rv ic in g ; a n d
re q u ire m e n ts
and
te s ts
of
5 .4 .4 .6 .2
(fo r
s e p a ra b le
la y e rs )
or
5 .4 .4 .6 .3
(fo r
non-
s e p a r a b le la y e r s ) a re m e t.
T h e tw o o r m o r e la y e r s a re n o t r e q u ir e d to b e fix e d to th e s a m e c o n d u c t iv e
m o re la y e rs c a n be:
-
f i xed to o n e o f th e c o n d u c tiv e p a rts re q u irin g s e p a ra tio n ; o r
-
s h a r e d b e tw e e n th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; o r
-
not fix e d to e ith e r c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.
F o r i n s u l a t i o n in t h r e e o r m o r e l a y e r s o f n o n - s e p a r a b l e t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
p a rt. T h e tw o o r
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 111
-
-
m i n i m u m d is ta n c e s th ro u g h in s u la tio n a re n o t re q u ire d ; a n d
-
e a c h la y e r o f in s u la tio n d o e s n o t h a v e to b e o f th e s a m e m a te r ia l.
5.4.4.6.2
Separable thin sheet material
In a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 1 , f o r :
-
supplementary insulation c o n s i s t i n g o f t w o l a y e r s
e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t f o r supplementary insulation;
-
supplementary insulation
c o n s is tin g
o f th re e
la y e r s s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r
-
c o n s is tin g
e le c tric s tre n g th te s t fo r
reinforced insulation;
reinforced insulation
tw o
la y e r s h a ll p a s s th e
or
la y e rs o f m a te ria l, a n y c o m b in a tio n
supplementary insulation;
reinforced insulation
of
o f m a te ria l, e a c h
la y e rs
of
m a te ria l,
each
o f tw o
or
la y e r
s h a ll
pass
th e
or
c o n s is tin g o f th re e la y e rs o f m a te ria l, a n y c o m b in a tio n o f tw o la y e rs
s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r
reinforced insulation.
If m o r e th a n t h r e e la y e r s a r e u s e d , la y e r s m a y b e d iv id e d
in to tw o o r th r e e g r o u p s o f la y e rs .
E a c h g r o u p o f la y e rs s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r th e a p p r o p r ia te in s u la tio n .
A t e s t o n a l a y e r o r g r o u p o f l a y e r s is n o t r e p e a t e d o n a n i d e n t i c a l l a y e r o r g r o u p .
T h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a ll l a y e r s o f i n s u l a t i o n t o b e o f t h e s a m e m a t e r i a l a n d t h i c k n e s s .
5.4.4.6.3
Non-separable thin sheet material
F o r i n s u l a t i o n c o n s i s t i n g o f n o n - s e p a r a b l e t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s , in a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 1 , t h e t e s t p r o c e d u r e s in T a b l e 1 9 a r e a p p l i e d . T h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a ll l a y e r s
o f in s u la tio n to b e o f th e s a m e m a te ria l a n d th ic k n e s s .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the tests specified in Table 19.
Table 19 - Tests for insulation in non-separable layers
Number of layers
Test procedure
Supplementary insulation
Two or more layers:
The test procedure of 5.4.4.6.4 is applied
Reinforced insulation
Two layers:
The test procedure of 5.4.4.6.4 is applied
Three or more layers:
The test procedures of 5.4.4.6.4 and 5.4.4.6.5 a are applied
NOTE The purpose of the tests in 5.4.4.6.5 is to ensure that the material has adequate strength to resist
damage when hidden in inner layers of insulation. Therefore, the tests are not applied to insulation in two layers.
The tests in 5.4.4.6.5 are not applied to supplementary insulation.
a
Where the insulation is integral to winding wire, the test does not apply.
5.4.4.6.4
Standard test procedure for non-separable thin sheet material
For non-separable layers， electric strength tests are applied in accordance with 5.4.9.1 to all
layers together. The test voltage is:
- 2 0 0 % of Utes{ if two layers are used; or
- 1 5 0 % o f Utest if three or more layers are used ，
where Utes{ is the test voltage specified in 5.4.9.1 for s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as appropriate.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 112
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE Unless all the layers are of the same material and have the same thickness, there is a possibility that the
test voltage will be divided unequally between layers， causing breakdown of a layer that would have passed if
tested separately.
5.4.4.6.5
Mandrel test
The test requirements for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n made of three or more thin insulating sheets
of material that are inseparable are specified below.
NOTE
This test is based on IEC 61558-1 and will give the same results.
Three test samples, each individual sample consisting of three or more layers of nonseparable thin sheet material forming re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n , are used. One sample is fixed to
the mandrel of the test fixture given in Figure 25. The fixing shall be performed as shown in
Figure 26.
D im ensions in m illim etres
Side view
Material: corrosion-resistant metal
60。 ± 5〇
Detail A - Tip
Figure 25 - Mandrel
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
- 113 D im ensions in m illim etres
Fixing system
Insulating material
▼1 5 0 N ± 1 0 N
IEC
IEC
The final position of the mandrel is rotated
230° 土 5° from the initial position.
Figure 26 - Initial position of mandrel
Figure 27 - Final position of mandrel
A pull is applied to the free end of the sample, using an appropriate clamping device. The
mandrel is rotated:
-
f rom the initial position (Figure 26) to the final position (Figure 27) and back;
-
a second time from the initial position to the final position.
If a sample breaks during rotation where it is fixed to the mandrel or to the clamping device,
this does not constitute a failure. If a sample breaks at any other place, the test has failed.
After the above test， a sheet of metal foil, 0,035 mm ± 0,005 mm thick, at least 200 mm long,
is placed along the surface of the sample, hanging down on each side of the mandrel
(see Figure 27). The surface of the foil in contact with the sample shall be conductive， not
oxidized or otherwise insulated. The foil is positioned so that its edges are not less than
18 mm from the edges of the sample (see Figure 28). The foil is then tightened by two equal
weights, one at each end, using appropriate clamping devices.
D im ensions in m illim etres
Insulating material
Metal foil
IEC
Figure 28 - Position of metal foil on insulating material
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 114 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
While the mandrel is in its final position, and within the 60 s following the final positioning, an
electric strength test is applied between the mandrel and the metal foil in accordance with
5.4.9.1. The test voltage is 150 % of U[esV but not less than 5 kV RMSf C/te s t is the test
voltage specified in 5.4.9.1 for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as appropriate.
The test is repeated on the other two samples.
5.4.4.7
Solid insulation in wound components
Basic insulation， supplementary insulation
reinforced
or
insulation
in
a
wound
c o m p o n e n t m a y b e p ro v id e d by:
一
-
t he in s u la tio n on w o u n d c o m p o n e n ts (s e e C la u s e G .5 ); o r
th e in s u la tio n on o th e r w ire (s e e C la u s e G .6 ); o r
a c o m b in a tio n o f th e tw o .
W o u n d c o m p o n e n ts c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .
P la n a r t r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 3 .
5.4.4.8
Compliance criteria
Compliance with the requirements of 5.4.4.2 to 5.4.4.7 for the adequacy o f solid insulation is
checked by inspection and measurement， taking into account Annex O , by the electric
strength tests o f 5.4.9.1 and the additional tests required in 5.4.4.2 to 5A .4.7f as applicable.
5.4.4.9
Solid insulation requirements at frequencies higher than 30 kHz
T h e s u ita b ility o f th e
-
solid insulation
D e t e r m i n e th e v a lu e
mains
power
o f th e
fre q u e n c y
s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d a s fo llo w s :
b re a kd o w n
EP
e le c tr ic fie ld
in k V / m m
(R M S )
fo r
s tre n g th
th e
fo llo w in g m e th o d s s h a ll b e u s e d to d e te r m in e th e v a lu e
o f th e
in s u la tin g
in s u la tio n
m a te ria l.
m a te ria l at
One
of
th e
of Ep:
•
th e v a lu e d e c la r e d b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r b a s e d o n m a te r ia l m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d a ta ; o r
•
th e v a lu e fro m T a b le 2 0 ; o r
•
t h e v a l u e b a s e d o n t h e t e s t s p e c i f i e d in I E C 6 0 2 4 3 - 1 .
T h e m a n u f a c t u r e r is r e s p o n s i b l e f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e v a l u e .
-
Determine
th e
re d u c tio n
fa c to r
A：
R
fo r
th e
b re a kd o w n
e le c tric
fie ld
s tre n g th
of
th e
i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l a t t h e a p p l i c a b l e f r e q u e n c y f r o m T a b l e 2 1 o r T a b l e 2 2 . I f t h e m a t e r i a l is
n o t o n e l i s t e d in T a b l e 21
o r T a b l e 2 2 , u s e t h e a v e r a g e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r in t h e l a s t r o w o f
T a b l e 21 o r T a b l e 2 2 a s a p p li c a b le .
-
D e t e r m i n e th e v a lu e o f th e b r e a k d o w n e le c tr ic fie ld s tr e n g th a t th e a p p lic a b le fr e q u e n c y
b y m u ltip ly in g th e v a lu e
w ith th e re d u c tio n fa c to r
Ep
-
Determine
v a lu e
Ef
th e
a c tu a l
EF
e le c tric
s tre n g th
w ith th e to ta l th ic k n e s s
(d
—
Ep
Fw
x ATp
o f th e
in s u la tin g
m a te ria l
by
m u ltip ly in g
th e
in m m ) o f t h e i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l .
V]N = EF x d
-
For
basic insulation
fre q u e n c y p e a k o f th e
supplementary insulation,
working voltage F p w b y 2 0 % .
or
I’ w >
-
For
th e
reinforced insulation， Kw
working voltage F p w b y 2 0
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
1，
2 x ^ pw
s h a ll e x c e e d
%.
,
Fw
s h a ll e x c e e d
th e
m e a su re d
h ig h
1，
41
tw ic e
th e
m e a su re d
h ig h fr e q u e n c y
peak of
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- 115 厂w
〉 1 , 2 x 2 x
Vp\j\j
/ 1 ,4 1
A s a n a lte rn a tiv e to th e a b o v e , th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .9 .1
e x c e p t th a t th e
mains
m a y b e a p p lie d
fr e q u e n c y te s t v o lta g e s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
f or
basic insulation:
1 , 2 x J/pW /
-
f or
reinforced insulation:
1 , 2 x 2 x Kpw /
T h e r e s h a ll b e n o b r e a k d o w n .
Table 20 - Electric field strength E p for some commonly used materials
Breakdow n e le c tric fie ld strength
E p
kV/mm
M aterial
T hickness o f the m aterial
mm
0,75
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,03
Porcelain a
9,2
-
•
_
-
Silicon-glass a
14
■
_
_
■
Phenolic a
17
■
■
-
■
Ceramic a
19
■
m
m
_
■
Teflon® a 1
27
■
■
■
■
Melamine-glass a
27
■
_
_
■
Mica a
29
■
■
■
■
Paper phenolic a
38
■
•
_
-
Polyethylene b
49
■
_
52
■
Polystyrene c
55
65
■
-
■
Glass a
60
■
m
m
_
■
Kapton® 3 2
303
■
■
-
■
FR530L3
33
_
m
m
_
■
Mica-filled phenolic a
28
■
■
■
■
Glass-silico 门 e lam inate3
18
■
雜
_
雜
Cellulose-acetobutyrate d
■
■
120
_
210
Polycarbonate d
-
■
160
-
270
Cellulose-triacetate d
■
■
120
_
210
NOTE
Missing values in the above and the values for other materials not in the list are under investigation.
a
For the breakdown electric field strength of the specified materials, the EP value of 0,75 mm thickness may
be used for all thicknesses.
b
The EP value of 0,05 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,05 mm. The EP value
of 0,75 mm thickness is used otherwise.
c
The EP value of 0,08 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,08 mm. The EP value
of 0,75 mm thickness is used otherwise.
d
The EP value of 0,03 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,03 mm. The EP value
of 0,06 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,06 mm and greater than 0,03 mm.
1
Teflon® is the trademark of a product supplied by DuPont. This information is given for the convenience of
users of this document and does not constitute an endorsement by IEC of the product named. Equivalent
products may be used if they can be shown to lead to the same results.
2
Kapton® is the trademark of a product supplied by DuPont. This information is given for the convenience of
users of this document and does not constitute an endorsement by IEC of the product named. Equivalent
products may be used if they can be shown to lead to the same results.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 116 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 21 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown
electric field strength E p at higher frequencies
Frequency
kHz
Material a
30
100
200
300
400
500
1 000
Reduction factor
2 000
3 000
5 000
10 000
KR
Porcelain
0,52
0,42
0,40
0,39
0,38
0,37
0,36
0,35
0,35
0,34
0,30
Silicon-glass
0,79
0,65
0,57
0,53
0,49
0,46
0,39
0,33
0,31
0,29
0,26
Phenolic
0,82
0,71
0,53
0,42
0,36
0,34
0,24
0,16
0,14
0,13
0,12
Ceramic
0,78
0,64
0,62
0,56
0,54
0,51
0,46
0,42
0,37
0,35
0,29
Teflon®
0,57
0,54
0,52
0,51
0,48
0,46
0,45
0,44
0,41
0,37
0,22
Melamine-glass
0,48
0,41
0,31
0,27
0,24
0,22
0,16
0,12
0,10
0,09
0,06
Mica
0,69
0,55
0,48
0,45
0,41
0,38
0,34
0,28
0,26
0,24
0,20
Paper phenolic
0,58
0,47
0,40
0,32
0,26
0,23
0,16
0,11
0,08
0,06
0,05
Polyethylene
0,36
0,28
0,22
0,21
0,20
0,19
0,16
0,13
0,12
0,12
0,11
Polystyrene
0,35
0,22
0,15
0,13
0,13
0,11
0,08
0,06
0,06
0,06
0,06
Glass
0,37
0,21
0,15
0,13
0,11
0,10
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,05
0,04
Other materials
0,43
0,35
0,30
0,27
0,25
0,24
0,20
0,17
0,16
0,14
0,12
If the frequency lies between the values in any two columns, the reduction factor value in the next column shall
be used or a logarithmic interpolation may be used between any two adjacent columns with the calculated value
rounded down to the nearest 0,01 value.
This data is for materials that are 0,75 mm thick.
Table 22 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric
field strength E p at higher frequencies for thin materials
Frequency
kHz
Thin material
30
100
200
300
400
500
1 000
Reduction factor
2 000
3 000
5 000
10 000
K R
Cellulose-acetobutyrate
(0,03 mm)
0,67
0,43
0,32
0,27
0,24
0,20
0,15
0,11
0,09
0,07
0,06
Cellulose-acetobutyrate
(0,06 mm)
0,69
0,49
0,36
0,30
0,26
0,23
0,17
0,13
0,11
0,08
0,06
Polycarbonate (0,03 mm)
0,61
0,39
0,31
0,25
0,23
0,20
0,14
0,10
0,08
0,06
0,05
Polycarbonate (0,06 mm)
0J0
0,49
0,39
0,33
0,28
0,25
0,19
0,13
0,11
0,08
0,06
Cellulose-triacetate
(0,03 mm)
0,67
0,43
0,31
0,26
0,23
0,20
0,14
0,10
0,09
0,07
0,06
Cellulose-triacetate
(0,06 mm)
0,72
0,50
0,36
0,31
0,27
0,23
0,17
0,13
0,10
0,10
0,06
Other thin foil materials
0,68
0,46
0,34
0,29
0,25
0,22
0,16
0,12
0,10
0,08
0,06
If the frequency lies between the values in any two columns, the reduction factor value in the next column shall
be used or a logarithmic interpolation may be used between any two adjacent columns with the calculated value
rounded down to the nearest 0,01 value.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
5.4.5
- 117 -
Antenna terminal insulation
5.4.5.1
General
T h e in s u la tio n
-
between
mains
-
between
m a in s
a n d a n te n n a te rm in a ls ; a n d
external circuits
and
p ro v id in g
n o n -m a in s
s u p p ly
v o lta g e s
to
o th e r
e q u ip m e n t h a v in g a n te n n a te r m in a ls
s h a ll w ith s ta n d e le c tr o s ta tic d is c h a r g e s a t th e a n te n n a te rm in a ls .
T h is
te s t
does
not
a p p ly
to
e q u ip m e n t
w h e re
one
a n te n n a
te rm in a l
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t
is
c o n n e c t e d t o e a r t h in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 6 . 7 .
NOTE
In China, connection of the CATV to the main protective earthing terminal of equipment is not permitted.
5.4.5.2
Test method
The sample is subjected to 50 discharges from the antenna interface test generator (circuit 3)
of Clause D.2f at not more than 12 discharges per minute， with Uc equal to 10 kV. The
equipment shall be placed on an insulating surface. The antenna interface test generator
output shall be connected to the antenna terminals connected together and to the mains
terminals connected together. If the equipment has external circuits providing non-mains
supply voltages to other equipment having antenna terminals, the test is repeated with the
generator connected to the mains terminals connected together and the e x te rn a l c ir c u it
terminals connected together. The equipment is not energized during these tests.
NOTE
Test personnel are cautioned not to touch the equipment during this test.
5.4.5.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by measuring the insulation resistance with 500 V DC.
The equipment complies with the requirement if the insulation resistance measured after
1 min is not less than the values given in Table 23.
Table 23 - Values for insulation resistance
Insulation requirements between parts
Insulation resistance
MQ
Between parts separated by basic insulation or by supplementary insulation
2
Between parts separated by double insulation or reinforced insulation
4
As an alternative to the above, compliance may be checked by an electric strength test in
accordance with 5 .4 .9 . 1 for b a s ic in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as applicable. The test
voltage shall be the highest of the test voltages determined by methods 1, 2 and 3. There
shall be no insulation breakdown.
5.4.6
The
Insulation of internal wire as a part of a supplementary safeguard
re q u ire m e n ts
m e e ts
th e
o f th is
re q u ire m e n ts
s u b c la u s e
fo r
a p p ly
w h e re
basic insulation,
th e
but
in s u la tio n
does
not
of
an
m eet
in te rn a l
th e
w ire ,
a lo n e ,
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
supplementary insulation.
W h e re
w ire
i n s u l a t i o n is
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
in s u la tio n
is u s e d
accessible
to a n
supplementary insulation
ordinary person:
as
p a rt o f a
s y s te m
and
th e w ire
- 118 -
旧C
-
t h e w ir e in s u la tio n d o e s n o t n e e d to b e h a n d le d b y th e
-
t h e w i r e is p l a c e d s u c h t h a t t h e
ordinary person
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
ordinary person;
and
i s u n l i k e l y t o p u l l o n it, o r t h e w i r e s h a l l
b e s o fix e d th a t th e c o n n e c tin g p o in ts a re re lie v e d fro m s tra in ; a n d
-
t h e w i r e is r o u t e d a n d f i x e d s u c h a s n o t t o t o u c h
u n e a rth e d
accessible
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ;
and
-
t he
w ire
in s u la tio n
insulation;
-
passes
th e
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t
of
5 .4 .9 .1 fo r
supplementary
and
t h e d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h t h e w i r e i n s u l a t i o n s h a l l b e a t l e a s t a s g i v e n in T a b l e 2 4 .
Table 24 - Distance through insulation of internal wiring
Working voltage in case of failure of basic insulation
Minimum distance through insulation
V peak or DC
V RMS (sinusoidal)
mm
> 71 < 350
> 50 < 250
0,17
> 350
> 250
0,31
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement, and by the test of 5.4.9.1.
5.4.7
Tests for semiconductor components and for cemented joints
Three samples are subjected to the thermal cycling sequence of 5.4.1.5.3. Before testing a
cemented jo in t， any winding of enamelled wire used in the component is replaced by metal foil
or by a few turns o f bare wire, placed close to the cemented joint.
The three samples are then tested as follows:
-
one of the samples is subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, immediately after
the last period at (T1 土 2) °C during thermal cycling， except that the test voltage is
multiplied by 1,6; and
-
the other samples are subjected to the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 after the
humidity conditioning o f 5.4.8, except that the test voltage is multiplied by 1,6.
Compliance is checked by test and the following inspections:
Except for cemented joints on the same inner surface of a printed board, compliance is
checked by inspection o f the cross-sectional area, and there shall be no visible voids， gaps or
cracks in the insulating material.
In the case of insulation between conductors on the same inner surface of printed boards and
the insulation between conductors on different surfaces of multilayer boards, compliance is
checked by external visual inspection. There shall be no delamination.
5.4.8
Humidity conditioning
Humidity conditioning is carried out for 48 h in a cabinet or room containing air with a relative
humidity of (93 ± 3) %• The temperature of the air, at all places where samples can be
located， is maintained within ± 2 °C of any value T between 20 °C and 3d °C so that
condensation does not occur. During this conditioning, the component or subassembly is not
energized.
For tropical conditions the time duration shall be 120 h at a temperature of (40 ± 2) °C and a
relative humidity of (93 ± 3) %.
Before the humidity conditioning, the sample is brought to a temperature between the
specified temperature T and (T + 4) °C.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
5.4.9
5.4.9.1
- 119 -
Electric strength test
Test procedure for type testing of solid insulation
Unless otherwise specified, compliance is checked either:
-
immedi atel y following the temperature test in 5.4.1.4; or
-
if a component or subassembly is tested separately outside the equipment, it is brought to
the temperature attained by that part during the temperature test in 5.4.1.4 (for example,
by placing it in an oven) prior to performing the electric strength test.
Alternatively, thin sheet material for s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n may
be tested at room temperature.
Unless otherwise specified, the test voltage for the electric strength of b a s ic in s u la tio n ,
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n is the highest value o f the following
three methods:
-
Method 1: Determine the test voltage according to Table 25 using the re q u ire d w ith s ta n d
v o lta g e (based on transient voltages from the AC m a in s or DC m a in s or from e x te rn a l
c irc u its ).
-
Method 2: Determine the test voltage according to Table 26 using the peak of the w o rk in g
v o lta g e or the recurring peak voltages, whichever is higher.
-
Method 3: Determine the test voltage according to Table 21 using the nominal AC m ains
voltage (to cover te m p o ra ry o ve rvo lta g e s).
The insulation is subjected to the highest test voltage as follows:
-
by applying an AC voltage of substantially sine-wave form having a frequency of 50 Hz or
60 Hz; or
-
by applying a DC v o lta g e for the time specified below.
The voltage applied to the insulation under test is gradually raised from zero to the prescribed
voltage and maintained at that value for 60 s (for ro u tin e te s ts see 5.4.9.2).
Where necessary, the insulation is tested with a metal foil in contact with the insulating
surface. This procedure is limited to places where the insulation is likely to be weak (for
example, where there are sharp metal edges under the insulation). If practicable, insulating
linings are tested separately. Care is taken that the metal foil is so placed that no flashover
occurs at the edges of the insulation. Where adhesive metal foil is used, the adhesive shall be
conductive.
To avoid damage to components or insulations that are not involved in the test, ICs or the
like, may be disconnected and equipotential bonding may be used. A varistor complying with
Clause G.8 may be removed during the test.
For equipment incorporating b a s ic in s u la tio n and s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n in parallel with
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n , care is taken that the voltage applied to the re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n
does not overstress b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
Where capacitors are in parallel with the insulation under test (for example ， radio-frequency
filter capacitors) and the capacitors can affect the test results, DC test voltages shall be used.
Components providing a DC path in parallel with the insulation to be tested， such as
discharge resistors for filter capacitors and voltage limiting devices, may be disconnected.
Where insulation of a transformer winding varies along the length of the winding in
accordance with 5.4.1.6, an electric strength test method is used that stresses the insulation
accordingly.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 120
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
EXAMPLE Such a test method may be an induced voltage test that is applied at a frequency sufficiently high to
avoid saturation of the transformer. The input voltage is raised to a value that would induce an output voltage equal
to the required test voltage.
Table 25 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on transient voltages
Required withstand voltage
up to and including
Test voltage for basic insulation
or supplementary insulation
kV peak
Test voltage for
reinforced insulation
kV peak or DC
0,33
0,33
0,5
0,5
0,8
,8
0,8
1,5
1,5
1,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
8
12
12
12
18
〇
〇
1,5
^R a
,5
x UR a
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points.
3
UR
is any required withstand voltage higher than 12 kV.
Table 26 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak
of the working voltages and recurring peak voltages
Voltage
up to and including
Test voltage for basic insulation
or supplementary insulation
kV peak
Test voltage for
reinforced insulation
kV peak or DC
0,33
0,43
0,53
〇
,5
0,65
〇
,8
1,04
1,28
1,5
1,95
2,4
2,5
3,25
4
4
5,2
6,4
6
7,8
9,6
8
10,4
12,8
12
15,6
19,2
〇
1,3 x t/p a
,8
1,6 x
Up a
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points.
a
Up
is any voltage higher than 12 kV.
Table 27 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on temporary overvoltages
Nominal mains system voltage
Test voltage for basic insulation
or supplementary insulation
V RMS
Test voltage for
reinforced insulation
kV peak or DC
Up to and including 250
2
4
Over 250 up to and including 600
2,5
5
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 121
-
D im ensions in m illim etres
Terminals for test voltage
base
ie c
Figure 29 - Example of electric strength test instrument for solid insulation
NOTE Thin sheet insulation can be tested using the instrument of Figure 29. When applying the test fixture ，
ensure that the specimen sample diameter is of sufficient size to prevent breakdown around the edges.
There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test. Insulation breakdown is considered to
have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application o f the test voltage,
rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner, that is, the insulation does not restrict the flow of
the current. Corona discharge or a single momentary flashover is not regarded as insulation
breakdown.
5.4.9.2
Test procedure for routine tests
Where required ， ro u tin e te s ts are performed according to 5 .4 .9 .1, except for the following:
-
the test may be performed at room temperature; and
一
the duration of the electric strength test shall be between 1 s to 4 s; and
-
the test voltage may be reduced by 10 %.
NOTE
Routine testing for equipment is specified in IEC 62911.
There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test. Insulation breakdown is considered to
have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application o f the test voltage,
rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner， that is, the insulation does not restrict the flow of
the current. Corona discharge or a single momentary flashover is not regarded as insulation
breakdown.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 122
5.4.10
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Safeguards against transient voltages from external circuits
5.4.10.1
Requirements
A d e q u a te
e le c tric a l
c o n n e c t e d to
a)
旧C
-
external circuits
n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
h e ld
s e p a ra tio n
p a rts
o r o th e rw is e
and
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
b e tw e e n
th e
c irc u itry
in te n d e d
to
be
to
be
a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , ID n u m b e r 1, F i g u r e 3 0 a n d :
u n e a rth e d
m a in ta in e d
c o n d u c tiv e
in c o n t i n u o u s
p a rts
o f th e
c o n ta c t w ith th e
e q u ip m e n t e x p e c te d
b o d y d u rin g
n o rm a l u s e (fo r
e x a m p le , a t e le p h o n e h a n d s e t o r h e a d s e t o r th e p a lm r e s t s u r fa c e o f a la p to p o r n o te b o o k
c o m p u te r);
b)
accessible p a r t s a n d c i r c u i t r y , e x c e p t f o r t h e p i n s o f c o n n e c t o r s . H o w e v e r , s u c h p i n s s h a l l
n o t b e accessible u n d e r normal operating conditions b y t h e b l u n t p r o b e o f F i g u r e V . 3 ;
c)
ES1 o r ES2
external circuit. T h e
p a r t i s accessible.
a n o th e r
p a rt
s e p a ra te d
fro m
th e
c irc u itry
re q u ire m e n t fo r s e p a ra tio n
in te n d e d
to
be
c o n n e c te d
a p p lie s w h e th e r o r n o t th e
ES1
T h e s e re q u ire m e n ts d o n o t a p p ly w h e re c irc u it a n a ly s is a n d e q u ip m e n t in v e s tig a tio n
th a t a d e q u a te
p ro te c tio n
is a s s u r e d
to
or
an
ES2
in d ic a te
b y o th e r m e a n s (fo r e x a m p le , b e tw e e n tw o c irc u its e a c h
o f w h ic h h a s a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c t io n to p r o te c tiv e e a r th ) .
Connection for AC
mains supply
Figure 30 - Application points of test voltage
5.4.10.2
Test methods
5.4.10.2.1
General
The separation is checked by the test of either 5.4.10.2.2 or 5.4.10.2.3.
NOTE
In Australia, the tests of both 5.4.10.2.2 and 5.4.10.2.3 apply.
During the test:
-
all conductors intended to be connected to the e x te rn a l c ir c u it are connected together,
including any conductors that may be connected to earth in the e x te rn a l c irc u it; and
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 123 -
all conductors intended to be connected to other e x te rn a l c irc u its are also connected
together.
Table 28 - Test values for electric strength tests
Impulse test (see Annex D)
Parts
Steady state test
Test generator
Parts indicated in 5.4.10.1 a) a
2,5 kV
circuit 1
1,5 kV
Parts indicated in 5.4.10.1 b) and c) b
1,5 kV
circuit 1 c
1,0 kV
Surge suppressors shall not be removed.
b
Surge suppressors may be removed, provided that such devices pass the impulse test of 5.4.10.2.2 when
tested as components outside the equipment.
During this test, it is allowed for a surge suppressor to operate and for a sparkover to occur in a GDT.
5.4.10.2.2
Impulse test
The electrical separation is subjected to ten impulses of alternating polarity as given in
Table 28. The interval between successive impulses is 60 s. Uc is the value to which the
capacitor needs to be charged.
NOTE In Australia, a value of U 〇= 7,0 kV is used for hand-held telephones and for headsets and 2,5 kV for other
equipment in 5.4.10.1 a). The 7 kV impulse simulates lightning surges on typical rural and semi-rural network lines.
5.4.10.2.3
Steady state test
The electrical separation is subjected to an electric strength test according to 5.4.9.1, with a
voltage as given in Table 28.
NOTE In Australia, the steady state test voltage is 3 kV for 5.4.10.1 a), and 1,5 kV for 5.4.10.1 b) and c). These
values have been determined considering the low frequency induced voltages from the power supply distribution
system.
5.4.10.3
Compliance criteria
During the tests of 5.4.10.2.2 and 5.4.10.2.3:
-
there shall be no insulation breakdown; and
-
except as indicated in Table 28, footnote c, a surge suppressor shall not operate, or a
sparkover shall not occur within a GDT.
For the electric strength test, insulation breakdown is considered to have occurred when the
current that flows as a result of the application of the test voltage rapidly increases in an
uncontrolled manner.
For the impulse tests, insulation breakdown is verified in one of the following two ways:
-
during the application of the impulses, by observation of oscillograms, surge suppressor
operation or breakdown through insulation is judged from the shape of an oscillogram;
-
after application of all the impulses, by an insulation resistance test. Disconnection of
surge suppressors is permitted while insulation resistance is being measured. The test
voltage is 500 V DC or, if surge suppressors are left in place, a DC test voltage that is
10 % less than the surge suppressor operating or striking voltage. The insulation
resistance shall not be less than 2 MO.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 124 5.4.11
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Separation between external circuits and earth
5.4.11.1
These
旧C
General
re q u ire m e n ts
a p p ly o n ly to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
to
be c o n n e c te d
to
external circuits
i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , ID n u m b e r 1.
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
-
permanently connected equipment;
-
pluggable equipment type B;
-
stationary pluggable equipment type A,
or
or
t h a t i s i n t e n d e d t o b e u s e d in a l o c a t i o n h a v i n g
e q u ip o te n tia l b o n d in g (s u c h a s a te le c o m m u n ic a tio n c e n tre , a d e d ic a te d c o m p u te r ro o m o r
restricted access area) a n d
protective earthing c o n n e c t i o n
a
-
h a s in s ta lla tio n
o f th e s o c k e t-o u tle t b y a
stationary pluggable equipment type A,
protective earthing conductor, i n c l u d i n g
t o b u i l d i n g e a r t h b y a skilled person.
5.4.11.2
T h e re
skilled person;
o f th e
or
th a t h a s p ro v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n tly c o n n e c te d
in s tru c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r
Requirements
s h a ll
m e n tio n e d
in s tru c tio n s th a t re q u ire v e rific a tio n
be
s e p a ra tio n
above
and
any
b e tw e e n
c irc u itry
in te n d e d
to
be
c o n n e c te d
p a rts o r c ir c u itr y th a t w ill b e e a r th e d
external circuits
to
in s o m e
a p p lic a tio n s , e ith e r
w ith in th e E U T o r v ia o th e r e q u ip m e n t.
S P D s th a t b rid g e
th e s e p a ra tio n
external circuits
and
b e tw e e n
ES1
or ES2
e a rth s h a ll h a v e a m in im u m
c irc u itry in te n d e d
to
ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e
be c o n n e c te d
U0[)
to
(fo r e x a m p le ,
t h e s p a r k o v e r v o lt a g e o f a g a s d i s c h a r g e t u b e ) o f:
^ o p - "p e a k +
+
w h e re :
Upeak
is o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s :
-
for
e q u ip m e n t
in te n d e d
v o lta g e o f th e A C
A ^ / sp
mains
to
be
in s ta lle d
in
an
a re a
e xce e d s 130 V:
n e g a tiv e
to le ra n c e
th e
n o m in a l ra te d
n o m in a l
180 V.
o f th e
ra te d
o p e ra tin g
v o lta g e
S P D p ro d u c tio n , o b ta in e d b y s u b tra c tin g th e m in im u m
fro m
th e
360 V;
f o r a ll o t h e r e q u i p m e n t :
is t h e
w h e re
o p e ra tin g
v o lta g e .
m a n u f a c t u r e r , A ( 7 sp s h a l l b e t a k e n
as
If t h is
10 %
due
to v a r ia t io n s
in
ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e
is n o t s p e c i f i e d
b y th e S P D
o f th e ra te d o p e ra tin g
v o lta g e o f
th e S P D .
AUsa
is t h e c h a n g e o f t h e r a t e d o p e r a t i n g v o l t a g e d u e t o t h e S P D
e x p e c te d
o p e ra tin g
s p e c ifie d
life
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t， o b ta in e d
v o lta g e a fte r a g e in g fro m
b y th e S P D
th e
by
s u b tra c tin g
a g e in g o v e r th e
th e
ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e .
m in im u m
If t h i s is n o t
m a n u f a c t u r e r , A " sa s h a l l b e t a k e n a s 1 0 % o f t h e r a t e d
o p e ra tin g v o lta g e o f th e S P D .
( A t / sp + A [ / s a ) m a y b e a s i n g l e v a l u e p r o v i d e d b y t h e c o m p o n e n t m a n u f a c t u r e r .
5.4.11.3
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 with a test
voltage according to Table 25 for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n based on
the re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e for the m a in s voltage of the equipment.
Components， other than capacitors, that bridge the separation， may be removed during
electric strength testing. Components that are left in place during the test shall not be
damaged.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 125 -
If components are removed, the following additional test with a test circuit according to
Figure 31 is performed with all components in place.
For equipment powered from AC m ains, the test is performed with a voltage equal to the
ra te d v o lta g e of the equipment or to the upper voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e range. For
equipment powered from DC m ains, the test is performed with a voltage equal to the highest
nominal voltage o f the AC m a in s in the region where the equipment is to be used (for
example, 230 V for Europe or 120 V for North America).
The current flowing in the test circuit of Figure 31 shall not exceed 10 mA.
Components bridging the
insulation，for example,
Figure 31 - Test for separation between an external circuit and earth
5.4.12
Insulating liquid
5.4.12.1
An
General requirements
insulating liquid
s h a ll n o t b r e a k d o w n d u e to o v e r v o lta g e s , in c lu d in g tr a n s ie n ts , th a t e n te r
th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d p e a k v o lta g e s th a t m a y be g e n e ra te d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t.
insulating liquid s h a l l
insulating liquid s h a l l c o m p l y
The
5.4.12.2
The
w ith th e
5.4.12.3
The
w ith
5 .4 .1 2 .2
and
5 .4 .1 2 .3 .
The
c o n ta in e r
fo r
th e
w ith 5 .4 .1 2 .4 .
Electric strength of an insulating liquid
insulating liquid s h a l l
insulating liquid i n t h e e q u i p m e n t .
e le c tric s tre n g th
5.4.9
c o m p ly
o f th e
c o m p ly w ith
th e
e le c tric
s tre n g th
t e s t in
Compatibility of an insulating liquid
insulating liquid
-
solid insulation;
-
t he
s h a ll n o t r e a c t w ith o r o th e r w is e d e te r io r a te
safeguards,
such as:
or
insulating liquid
its e lf.
For in s u la tin g liq u id s with a thermal classification of IEC 60085 Class 105 (A)t compliance is
checked by operating the immersed equipment for 60 days followed by an electric strength
test in accordance with 5.4.9. There shall be no breakdown and there shall be no visible
damage or deformation of the other immersed e q u ip m e n t sa fe g u a rd s.
For higher thermal classes the requirements of 5.4.1.4.3 are applicable.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 126 5.4.12.4
The
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
Container for insulating liquid
insulating liquid
c o n ta in e r fo r th e
s h a ll
b e p ro v id e d
w ith
a
m e a n s o f p re ssu re
r e l i e f if
t h e r e is a c l o s e d v e s s e l .
insulating liquid
The
For an
c o n t a in e r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G . 1 5 .2 .1 fo r a c lo s e d v e s s e l.
insulating liquid
t h a t is a ls o c o n s i d e r e d to b e a
hazardous substance,
th e c o n ta in e r
s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 7 .2 .
Compliance is checked by the relevant tests.
5.5
Components as safeguards
5.5.1
A
General
com ponent
is c o n s i d e r e d
safeguard
a
if th e
c la s s ific a tio n
o f th e
e n e rg y
so u rce
changes
d u e to a fa ilu r e o f th e c o m p o n e n t.
A com ponent
used as a
safeguard
s h a ll:
-
c o m p l y w i t h a ll t h e a p p l i c a b l e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h a t
-
b e u s e d w it h in its r a tin g .
NOTE
safeguard;
and
See Annex G for the qualification of components used as a safeguard.
5.5.2
Capacitors and RC units
5.5.2.1
General requirements
C a p a c ito rs
and
RC
u n its
th a t
se rve
as
safeguards
(e le c tric a l)
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 . R C u n its m a y c o n s is t o f d is c r e te c o m p o n e n ts .
C a p a c ito r s o r R C u n its w ith o n e o r m u ltip le c a p a c ito r s s h a ll:
-
c o m p l y w ith
C la u s e
G .1 1 , h o w e v e r, th e
c a p a c ito r a n d R C u n it u s e d a s a
•
ES3
•
E S 2 a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth ; a n d
•
ES2 and ES1;
is o la te d fro m th e
mains
re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e
basic safeguard
G .1 1
d o n o t a p p ly to th e
b e tw e e n :
a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth ; a n d
and
-
pass
th e
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 , ta k in g
in to
a c c o u n t th e
to ta l
working voltage
a c r o s s th e c a p a c it o r ( s ) a n d R C u n it. C a p a c it o r s c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 d o n o t n e e d
t o b e t e s t e d if:
•
th e re q u ire d p e a k im p u ls e te s t v o lta g e o f T a b le G .1 2 ; a n d
•
th e r e q u ire d R M S te s t v o lta g e o f T a b le G .1 2 m u ltip lie d b y 1 ，
414
a re e q u a l to o r g r e a te r th a n th e re q u ire d te s t v o lta g e o f 5 .4 .9 .1 .
W hen
m u ltip le
c a p a c ito rs
a re
u s e d , th e te s t v o lta g e s
o f T a b le G .1 2
a re
m u ltip lie d
by th e
n u m b e r o f c a p a c ito rs u s e d .
Under
single fault conditions,
if a c a p a c it o r o r R C u n it c o n s is t s o f m o r e th a n o n e c a p a c it o r ，
th e v o lta g e o n e a c h o f th e re m a in in g in d iv id u a l c a p a c ito r s s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e v o lta g e ra tin g
o f th e re le v a n t in d iv id u a l c a p a c ito rs .
NOTE In Norway, due to the IT power system used, capacitors are required to be rated for the applicable line-toline voltage (230 V).
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
- 127 -
2018
basic safeguards
C la s s X c a p a c ito rs m a y b e u s e d a s
in c i r c u i t s i s o l a t e d f r o m
th e
mains
but
s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a:
-
basic safeguard
-
supplementary safeguard.
in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e
C la s s X c a p a c ito r s s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a
5.5.2.2
W h e re
mains;
or
reinforced safeguard.
Capacitor discharge after disconnection of a connector
a
c a p a c ito r
v o lta g e
mains
e x a m p le , th e
accessible u p o n d i s c o n n e c t i o n o f a c o n n e c t o r ( f o r
accessible v o l t a g e m e a s u r e d 2 s a f t e r d i s c o n n e c t i o n o f
becom es
c o n n e c to r) th e
th e c o n n e c to r , s h a ll c o m p ly w ith :
-
t he
ES1
lim its
normal operating conditions
o f T a b le 5 u n d e r
ordinary person;
fo r an
and
-
normal operating conditions
t h e E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 5 u n d e r
fo r an
instructed person;
and
-
t he
an
A
ES2 l i m i t s o f T a b l e 5
instructed person.
re s is to r o r a
s u b je c te d
to
g ro u p
under
single fault conditions
safeguard
single fault conditions i f t h e
o f re s is to rs
s im u la te d
used
as
a
fo r b o th a n
ordinary person
a g a in s t
c a p a c ito r d is c h a rg e
re s is to r
or
th e
g ro u p
of
and
is
not
re s is to rs
c o m p lie s w ith 5 .5 .6 .
If a n IC t h a t i n c l u d e s a c a p a c i t o r d i s c h a r g e f u n c t i o n ( I C X ) is u s e d t o c o m p l y w i t h t h e a b o v e :
-
t he
accessible
g iv e n
above
mains
single fault condition o f a n
v o lta g e (fo r e x a m p le , a t th e
under a
c o n n e c t o r ) s h a ll n o t e x c e e d
IC X
or of any one
th e lim its
c o m p o n e n t in t h e
a s s o c ia te d c a p a c ito r d is c h a r g e c irc u it; o r
-
t he
IC X w ith th e
a s s o c ia te d
c irc u itry a s
p ro v id e d
in t h e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e
re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 6 . A n y im p u ls e a tte n u a tin g c o m p o n e n ts (s u c h a s v a ris to rs a n d
G D T s ) a re d is c o n n e c te d ; o r
-
three
s a m p le s
of
th e
IC X
te s te d
s e p a ra te ly
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
of
C la u s e G .1 6 .
The
m e a su re m e n t
is
m ade
w ith
an
in s tru m e n t
h a v in g
an
in p u t
im p e d a n c e
c o n s is tin g
of a
r e s i s t a n c e o f 1 0 0 M Q ± 5 M Q in p a r a l l e l w i t h a n i n p u t c a p a c i t a n c e o f 2 5 p F o r l e s s .
If a s w i t c h
th e
(fo r e x a m p le , th e
m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le
mains
s w i t c h ) h a s a n i n f l u e n c e o n t h e t e s t r e s u lt , it is p la c e d
p o s itio n . T h e d is c o n n e c tio n
o f th e c o n n e c to r (s ta rt o f d is c h a rg e
in
tim e )
h a s t o b e d o n e a t t h e m o m e n t w h e n t h e i n p u t c a p a c i t o r o f t h e d e v i c e u n d e r t e s t is c h a r g e d t o
its p e a k v a lu e .
O th e r m e th o d s th a t g iv e a s im ila r re s u lt a s th e a b o v e m e th o d m a y b e u s e d .
5.5.3
Transformers
T ra n s fo rm e rs u se d as a
5.5.4
safeguard
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 .
Optocouplers
In s u la tio n o f o p to c o u p le rs u s e d a s a
safeguard
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 5 .4 o r
w ith C la u s e G .1 2 .
5.5.5
Relays
In s u la tio n o f re la y s u s e d a s a
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
safeguard
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f
5.4.
-128
5.5.6
The
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Resistors
fo llo w in g
re s is to r
a p p lic a tio n s
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re le v a n t
te s ts
as
in d ic a te d
in
T a b le 2 9 :
-
a s in g le re s is to r u s e d a s a
-
a re s is to r o r a g ro u p
th e
-
mains
reinforced safeguard
o f re s is to rs s e rv in g
as a
reinforced insulation;
o r fo r b rid g in g
safeguard
b e tw e e n
a c irc u it c o n n e c te d
to
a n d a c ir c u it in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c t e d to c o a x ia l c a b le ;
safeguard.
r e s i s t o r s s e rv in g a s a c a p a c ito r d is c h a rg e
NOTE In Finland, Norway and Sweden, resistors used as a basic safeguard or for bridging basic insulation in
class I pluggable equipment type A shall comply with the relevant requirements of Clause G.10.
In a d d i t i o n , r e s i s t o r s t h a t b r i d g e
insulation
-
a
basic insulation, supplementary insulation
f or
s in g le
a
reinforced
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith e a c h o f th e fo llo w in g :
re s is to r
or
a
g ro u p
of
re s is to rs
s h a ll
distance r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.4.2 a n d 5.4.3,
t o t a l working voltage a c r o s s t h e i n s u l a t i o n
-
or
g ro u p
insulation,
of
th e
s h o rt-c irc u ite d
re s is to rs
used
clearance
and
in
tu rn
c o m p ly
re s p e c tiv e ly ,
(s e e F ig u re
clearance
w ith
b e tw e e n
u n le s s
a
th e
g ro u p
c o m p lie s
creepage
its t e r m i n a t io n s
fo r th e
0.4);
reinforced safeguard o r
creepage distance a r e a s s e s s e d
as
and
w ith
th e
fo r
reinforced
b rid g in g
a s if e a c h
re le v a n t
re s is to r w e re
re q u ire m e n ts
of
C la u s e G .1 0 .
Table 29 - Overview of tests for resistor applications
Conditioning
Resistor test
Voltage surge
test
Impulse test
Overload test
G.10.2
G.10.3
G.10.4
G.10.5
G.10.6
Reinforced safeguard or
bridging reinforced
insulation
X
X
Between a mains connected
circuit and a coaxial cable
X
Xa
Xb
Capacitor discharge
safeguard
X
Resistor application
a
X
For an external circuit indicated in Table 13, ID 6 and 7.
For an external circuit indicated in Table 13, ID 3, 4 and 5.
5.5.7
SPDs
W h e r e a v a r i s t o r is u s e d b e t w e e n a
mains
c irc u it a t E S 3 v o lta g e a n d
-
t h e e a rth c o n n e c tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .6 .7 ; a n d
-
t h e v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .8 .
W h e re
a
v a ris to r
is
used
b e tw e e n
lin e
and
n e u tra l
or
b e tw e e n
protective earthing:
lin e s ,
it s h a l l
c o m p ly
w ith
protective earthing,
it s h a l l
c o n s is t
of a
C la u s e G .8 .
W h e re
an
SPD
is
used
b e tw e e n
th e
mains
and
v a r i s t o r a n d a G D T c o n n e c t e d in s e r i e s , w h e r e t h e f o l l o w i n g a p p l i e s :
-
t h e v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .8 ;
-
t h e G D T s h a ll c o m p ly w ith :
•
th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r
•
th e
e x te rn a l
re s p e c tiv e ly
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
basic insulation;
clearance a n d creepage distance
f o r basic insulation.
and
re q u ire m e n ts
of
5.4.2
and
5.4.3
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 129 -
NOTE 1 Some examples of SPDs are MOVs, varistors and GDTs. A varistor is sometimes referred to as a VDR or
a metal oxide varistor (MOV).
T h e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to S P D s c o n n e c t e d to r e lia b le e a r th in g ( s e e 5 .6 .7 ).
NOTE 2 It is not a requirement of this document that surge suppressors comply with any particular component
standard. However, attention is drawn to the IEC 61643 series of standards, in particular:
-
IEC 61643-21 (surge suppressors in telecommunications application)
-
I EC 61643-311 (gas discharge tubes)
一
IEC 61643-321 (avalanche breakdown diodes)
一
IEC 61643-331 (metal oxide varistors)
-
I EC 61643-341 (thyristor surge suppressors TSS).
NOTE 3 SPDs between an external circuit and earth are not considered to be a safeguard. Requirements for
those SPDs are covered in 5.4.11.2.
5.5.8
The
Insulation between the mains and an external circuit consisting of a coaxial
cable
in s u la tio n
r e s i s t o r in
circuit
b e tw e e n
p a ra lle l w ith
a n d fro m th e
th e
th is
mains
and
in s u la tio n ,
th e
s h a ll
c o n n e c tio n
be
a b le
to
a
c o a x ia l
to w ith s ta n d
c a b le ,
su rg e s
fro m
in c lu d in g
th e
any
external
mains.
T h i s r e q u i r e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p l y in a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g e q u i p m e n t :
-
e q u i p m e n t fo r in d o o r u s e p r o v id e d w ith a b u ilt-in ( in te g r a l) a n te n n a a n d n o t p r o v id e d w ith
a c o n n e c tio n to a c o a x ia l c a b le ; o r
-
e q u i p m e n t c o n n e c t e d t o a r e l i a b l e e a r t h i n g in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 6 . 7 .
The combination of the insulation with the resistor is tested after the conditioning of G.10.2 as
follows:
-
for equipment intended to be connected to a coaxial cable connected to an outdoor
antenna， the voltage surge test of G.10.4; or
-
for equipment intended to be connected to another coaxial cable， the impulse test of
G.10.5; or
-
for equipment intended to be connected to both an outdoor antenna and other coaxial
connections, the voltage surge test o f G.10.4 and the impulse test o f G.10.5.
After the tests:
-
the insulation shall comply with 5.4.5.3 and the resistor may be removed during this test;
and
-
the resistors shall comply with G.10.3, unless available data shows compliance of the
resistor.
5.5.9
Safeguards for socket-outlets in outdoor equipment
A re s id u a l c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e (R C D ) w ith ra te d re s id u a l o p e ra tin g c u r r e n t n o t e x c e e d in g
3 0 m A s h a l l b e u s e d in t h e
The
RCD
mains
s u p p ly to s o c k e t- o u tle t s in te n d e d fo r g e n e r a l u s e .
s h a ll b e a n in te g ra l p a rt o f th e
in s t a lla tio n . If th e
RCD
o r s h a ll b e p a rt o f th e b u ild in g
is n o t a n i n t e g r a l p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l p r o v i d e
th e in s ta lla tio n re q u ire m e n ts fo r th e
RCD.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
outdoor equipment
- 130 5.6
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
Protective conductor
5.6.1
General
Under
-
旧C
normal operating conditions， a protective conductor
as a
basic safeguard
accessible
to p r e v e n t
c o n d u c tiv e
m a y se rve :
p a rts fro m
e x c e e d in g
ES1
lim its ;
and
-
a s a m e a n s t o l i m i t t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e s in a n e a r t h e d c i r c u i t .
single fault conditions,
safeguard t o p r e v e n t accessible
Under
5.6.2
a
protective conductor
m ay
se rve
as
supplementary
a
c o n d u c t iv e p a r ts fr o m e x c e e d in g E S 2 lim its .
Requirements for protective conductors
5.6.2.1
General requirements
Protective conductors
s h a ll
not
c o n ta in
s w itc h e s ,
cu rre n t
lim itin g
d e v ic e s
or
o ve rcu rre n t
p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s .
protective conductors
single fault conditions.
T h e c u rre n t-c a rry in g c a p a c ity o f
th e fa u lt c u rre n t u n d e r
T h e c o n n e c tio n s fo r th e
protective conductors
s h a ll b e a d e q u a te fo r th e d u r a tio n o f
s h a ll m a k e e a r lie r a n d s h a ll b r e a k la te r th a n
t h e s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n s in e a c h o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
-
a c o n n e c to r (o n a c a b le ) o r a c o n n e c to r a tta c h e d to a p a rt o r a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t c a n
re m o v e d b y o th e r th a n a
be
skilled person;
NOTE It is good practice that this construction also be applied when it is expected that the skilled person
will replace powered parts and assemblies while the equipment is operational.
-
a p lu g o n a p o w e r s u p p ly c o r d ;
-
a n a p p lia n c e c o u p le r.
S o ld e r s h a ll n o t s e rv e
a s th e s o le
m e a n s to p ro v id e
m e c h a n ic a l s e c u re m e n t o f a
protective
conductor
A protective conductor
te rm in a tio n
s h a ll
be
m ade
such
t h a t it i s n o t l i k e l y t o
be lo o s e n e d
A s in g le te rm in a l m a y be
protective bonding conductors. A protective earthing conductor
d u r in g s e r v ic in g , o t h e r th a n s e r v ic in g o f th e a c tu a l c o n d u c t o r its e lf.
u s e d to c o n n e c t m u ltip le
te rm in a tio n
s h a ll
not
se rve
as
a
m eans
to
se cu re
any
com ponent
or
p a rt
o th e r
th a n
a
protective bonding conductor.
A s i n g l e w i r i n g t e r m i n a l o f t h e s c r e w o r s t u d t y p e m a y b e u s e d t o s e c u r e b o t h t h e protective
earthing conductor a n d t h e protective bonding conductor in e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a nondetachable power supply cord. I n t h i s c a s e , t h e w i r i n g t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e protective
earthing conductor s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d b y a n u t f r o m t h a t o f t h e protective bonding
conductor. T h e protective earthing conductor s h a l l b e o n t h e b o t t o m o f t h e s t a c k , s o t h a t it
is t h e l a s t c o n n e c t i o n d i s t u r b e d .
5.6.2.2
Colour of insulation
T h e in s u la tio n o f th e
If a
protective earthing conductor
protective bonding conductor
is
in s u la te d ,
s h a ll b e g r e e n - a n d - y e llo w .
th e
in s u la tio n
s h a ll
e x c e p t in t h e f o l l o w i n g t w o c a s e s :
-
f or a n e a r t h in g b r a id , t h e i n s u la t io n , if p r o v id e d , m a y b e t r a n s p a r e n t ;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
be
g re e n -a n d -y e llo w
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 131 -
protective bonding conductor
a
w irin g ,
e tc .,
m ay
be
of any
in a s s e m b l i e s s u c h a s r i b b o n c a b l e s , b u s b a r s , p r i n t e d
c o lo u r
p ro v id e d
th a t
no
m is in te rp re ta tio n
o f th e
use
o f th e
c o n d u c t o r is l i k e l y t o a r i s e .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
5.6.3
Requirements for protective earthing conductors
Protective earthing conductors
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
m in im u m
c o n d u c to r
s iz e s
in
T a b le G .7 .
NOTE 1 For permanently connected equipment provided with terminal(s) for connection to mains supply,
reference is made to the national building wiring requirements for the size of the protective earthing conductor.
NOTE 2
For
IEC 60364-5-54 can also be used to determine the minimum conductor size.
co rd
c o n n e c te d
e q u ip m e n t
s u p p lie d
fro m
a
DC
mains，
th e
protective earthing
c o n n e c tio n m a y b e p ro v id e d b y a s e p a r a te te rm in a l.
protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a reinforced safeguard m a y b e u s e d
pluggable equipment type B o r o n permanently connected equipment o n l y a n d s h a l l :
A
-
be
in c lu d e d
in
and
p ro te c te d
by
a
s h e a th e d
s u p p ly
co rd
th a t
c o m p lie s
w ith
G .7 .1
on
and
w h i c h i s n o t l i g h t e r t h a n h e a v y d u t y a s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x C o f I E C 6 2 4 4 0 : 2 0 0 8 ; o r
-
h a v e a m in im u m
c o n d u c t o r s iz e n o t le s s t h a n 4 m m 2 if n o t p ro te c te d fro m p h y s ic a l d a m a g e ;
or
-
h a v e a m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e n o t l e s s t h a n 2 , 5 m m 2 i f p r o t e c t e d f r o m p h y s i c a l d a m a g e ；o r
-
b e p ro te c te d b y a c o n d u it in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c te d to th e e q u ip m e n t a n d h a v e a m in im u m
s i z e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b l e 3 0 .
NOTE 3
For mains supply cords, see also Clause G.7.
NOTE 4
A heavy duty cord jacket is considered suitable for protection against physical damage.
Table 30 - Protective earthing conductor sizes for reinforced safeguards
for permanently connected equipment
Protection provided by
Minimum protective earthing conductor size
mm2
4
Non-metallic flexible conduit
Metallic flexible conduit
2,5
Non-flexible metal conduit
1,5
The protective earthing conductor is intended for installation by a skilled person.
protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a double safeguard m a y b e u s e d
equipment type B o r o n permanently connected equipment o n l y a n d s h a l l
i n d e p e n d e n t protective earthing conductors.
A
on
pluggable
c o n s is t o f tw o
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r
sizes in accordance with Table 30 or Table G.7 as applicable.
5.6.4
5.6.4.1
Requirements for protective bonding conductors
Requirements
Protective bonding conductors
c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o f p a rts
re q u ire d
to
be
e a rth e d
fo r s a fe ty
p u rp o se s
s h a ll
- 132 -
t he m in im u m
-
if e it h e r t h e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e G . 7 ; o r
rated current
o f th e e q u ip m e n t o r th e
protective current rating
o f th e c irc u it
e x c e e d s 2 5 A , w i t h t h e m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e 3 1 ; o r
-
if b o t h t h e
rated current
o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e
protective current rating
o f th e c irc u it
d o n o t e x c e e d 2 5 A ; e ith e r
-
•
w i t h t h e m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e 3 1 ; o r
•
w ith th e lim ite d s h o r t- c ir c u it te s t o f A n n e x R ; o r
f or
c o m p o n e n ts
o n ly ,
be
not
s m a lle r
th a n
th e
c o n d u c to rs
s u p p ly in g
power
to
th e
c o m p o n e n t.
If t h e
v a lu e
NOTE
rated current o f t h e e q u i p m e n t i s n o t d e c l a r e d
o f t h e rated power d i v i d e d b y rated voltage.
b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , it is t h e c a l c u l a t e d
The value of the protective current rating is used in Table 31 and in the test of 5.6.6.2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
133
-
-
Table 31 - Minimum protective bonding conductor size of copper conductors
Smaller of the rated current of the
equipment or the protective current rating
of the circuit under consideration
Minimum conductor sizes
Cross-sectional area
AWG
mm2
[cross-sectional area in mm2]
A
up to and including
3
0,3
22
[0,324]
6
0,5
20
[0,519 】
10
0,75
18
[〇 ,8]
13
1,0
16
[1.3]
16
1,25
16
[1,3 】
25
1,5
14
P]
32
2,5
12
[3]
40
4,0
10
[5]
63
6,0
8
[8]
80
10
6
[13]
100
16
4
[21 】
125
25
2
03]
160
35
1
[42]
190
50
0
[53]
230
70
000
[85]
260
95
0000
[107 】
kcmil
[cross-sectional area in mm2
300
120
250
[126]
340
150
300
[152 】
400
185
400
[202]
460
240
500
[253]
】
NOTE AWG and kcmil sizes are provided for information only. The associated cross-sectional areas have been
rounded to show significant figures only. AWG refers to the American Wire Gage and the term "cmil” refers to
circular mils where one circular mil is equal to (diameter in mils)2. These terms are commonly used to designate
wire sizes in North America.
5.6.4.2
Determination of the protective current rating
5.6.4.2.1
W h e re
ra tin g
th e
Mains supply as the source
so u rce
is t h e
mains
s u p p ly ,
o f th e o v e r c u r r e n t p ro te c tiv e
th e
d e v ic e
protective current rating
p ro v id e d
in t h e
b u ild in g
o f th e
c irc u it
in s ta lla tio n , o r a s
is t h e
p a rt o f
th e e q u ip m e n t.
W h e r e t h e o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e i s p r o v i d e d in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e n :
-
f or
pluggable equipment type A,
o ve rcu rre n t
p ro te c tiv e
b u i l d i n g w i r i n g , in t h e
d e v ic e
mains
th e
p ro v id e d
protective current rating
e x te rn a l
to
th e
e q u ip m e n t
is
(fo r
th e
ra tin g
e x a m p le ,
of
in
an
th e
p l u g o r in a n e q u i p m e n t r a c k ) , w i t h a m i n i m u m o f 1 6 A ;
NOTE 1 In most countries, 16 A is considered to be suitable as the protective current rating of the circuit
supplied from the mains.
NOTE 2 In Canada and the USA, the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains is
taken as 20 A.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 134 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE 3 In the UK and Ireland, the protective current rating is taken to be 13 A, this being the largest rating
of fuse used in the mains plug.
NOTE 4 In France, in certain cases, the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains is
taken as 20 A instead of 16 A.
-
pluggable equipment type B, a n d permanently connected equipment t h e
protective current rating i s t h e m a x i m u m r a t i n g o f t h e o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e
fo r
s p e c ifie d
in
th e
e q u ip m e n t
in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s
to
be
p ro v id e d
e x te rn a l
to
th e
e q u ip m e n t.
5.6.4.2.2
Other than mains supply as the source
W h e r e t h e s o u r c e is a n e x t e r n a l s u p p l y h a v i n g t h e m a x i m u m
in te rn a l
so u rce
im p e d a n c e
current rating
W h e re
th e
as
an
im p e d a n c e
p ro te c te d
tra n s fo rm e r),
protective
th e
o f t h e c i r c u i t is t h e h i g h e s t c u r r e n t a v a i l a b l e f r o m t h a t s u p p l y i n t o a n y l o a d .
m a x im u m
c o m p o n e n ts
(su ch
c u r r e n t in h e r e n tly lim ite d b y th e
in
th e
cu rre n t
so u rce ,
th e
fro m
th e
e x te rn a l
s u p p ly
so u rce
protective current rating
s h a ll
is
be
lim ite d
ta k e n
as
by
e le c tro n ic
th e
m a x im u m
o u t p u t c u r r e n t w i t h a n y r e s i s t i v e l o a d , i n c l u d i n g a s h o r t - c i r c u i t . I f t h e c u r r e n t is l im i t e d
by an
i m p e d a n c e , a f u s e , a P T C d e v i c e o r a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r , t h e c u r r e n t is m e a s u r e d 6 0 s a f t e r t h e
a p p lic a tio n
o f th e
lo a d .
If t h e c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d
b y o t h e r m e a n s , t h e c u r r e n t is m e a s u r e d
5 s
a fte r th e a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .
5.6.4.2.3
Internal circuit as the source
W h e r e t h e s o u r c e is a c i r c u i t w i t h i n t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e
protective current rating
o f th e c irc u it
is :
-
t he
ra tin g
o f th e
o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e
d e v ic e
if t h e
c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d
by an
o ve rcu rre n t
p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e ; o r
-
t he
m a x im u m
s u p p ly .
The
m e a su re d
o u tp u t
c u rre n t,
o u tp u t c u rre n t
60
s a fte r th e
is
if th e
cu rre n t
m e a su re d
a p p lic a tio n
w ith
o f th e
is
lim ite d
any
lo a d
by
th e
re s is tiv e
so u rce
lo a d
im p e d a n c e
in c lu d in g
if c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d
a
of
th e
s h o rt-c irc u it
b y im p e d a n c e
o r th e
c u r r e n t l i m i t i n g d e v i c e is a f u s e , a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r o r a P T C d e v i c e , o r 5 s in o t h e r c a s e s .
5.6.4.2.4
Current limiting and overcurrent protective devices
A c u r r e n t lim itin g d e v ic e (a P T C d e v ic e ) o r a n o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t iv e d e v ic e (a f u s e o r a c ir c u it
b r e a k e r ) s h a ll n o t b e c o n n e c te d
in p a r a l l e l w i t h a n y o t h e r c o m p o n e n t t h a t c o u l d f a i l t o a l o w -
r e s i s t a 门c e s t a t e .
5.6.4.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g
c o n d u c to r sizes in accordance with Table 31 or Table G.7 and the test of 5.6.6 or Annex R
as applicable.
5.6.5
Terminals for protective conductors
5.6.5.1
T e rm in a ls
Requirements
fo r
protective earthing conductors
c o n n e c tin g
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
m in im u m
t e r m i n a l s i z e s in T a b l e 3 2 .
T e rm in a ls
fo r
c o n n e c tin g
protective bonding conductors
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
one
of
th e
fo llo w in g :
-
t h e m i n i m u m t e r m i n a l s i z e s in T a b l e 3 2 ; o r
-
if e it h e r th e
exceeds
25
T a b le 3 2 ; o r
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
rated current
A,
w ith
o f th e e q u ip m e n t o r th e
te rm in a l
s iz e s
th a t
a re
not
protective current rating
m o re
th a n
one
s iz e
o f th e c irc u it
s m a lle r
th a n
in
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
if b o th th e
rated current
-135-
o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e
protective current rating
o f th e c irc u it
d o n o t e x c e e d 2 5 A ; e ith e r
•
w i t h t e r m i n a l s i z e s t h a t a r e n o t m o r e t h a n o n e s i z e s m a l l e r t h a n in T a b l e 3 2 ; o r
•
w ith th e lim ite d s h o r t- c ir c u it te s t o f A n n e x R;
or
-
f or
c o m p o n e n ts
o n ly ,
be
not
s m a lle r
th a n
th e
te rm in a l
s iz e s
s u p p ly in g
power
to
th e
c o m p o n e n t.
Table 32 - Sizes of terminals for protective conductors
Conductor size
Minimum nominal thread diameter
Area of cross section
mm2
mm
mm2
(from Table G.7)
Pillar type or stud type
Screw type a
Pillar type or stud type
Screw type a
1
3,0
3,5
7
9,6
1,5
3,5
4,0
9,6
12,6
2,5
4,0
5,0
12,6
19,6
4
4,0
5,0
12,6
19,6
6
5,0
5,0
19,6
19,6
10 b
6,0
6,0
28
28
16 b
7,9
7,9
49
49
’’Screw type" refers to a terminal that clamps the conductor under the head of a screw， with or without a
washer.
b
As an alternative to the requirements of this table, the protective earthing conductor may be attached to
special connectors, or suitable clamping means (for example, an upturned spade or closed loop pressure
type; clamping unit type; saddle clamping unit type; mantle clamping unit type; etc.) that is secured by a
screw and nut mechanism to the metal chassis of the equipment. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of the
screw and the nut shall not be less than three times the cross-sectional area of the conductor size in Table 31
or Table G.7 as applicable. The terminals shall comply with IEC 60998-1 and IEC 60999-1 or IEC 60999-2.
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of protective terminal sizes in
accordance with Table 32, the test of 5.6.6 or Annex R as applicable.
5.6.5.2
Corrosion
C o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
in
c o n ta c t
at
th e
m a in
protective earthing
te rm in a l,
p ro te c tiv e
b o n d in g
t e r m i n a l s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s s h a l l b e s e l e c t e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A n n e x N s o t h a t t h e p o t e n t i a l
d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n a n y t w o d i f f e r e n t m e t a l s is 0 , 6 V o r l e s s .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the materials of the conductors and terminals and
associated parts and determination of the potential difference.
5.6.6
Resistance of the protective bonding system
5.6.6.1
Requirements
Protective bonding conductors
a n d th e ir te r m in a tio n s s h a ll n o t h a v e e x c e s s iv e re s is ta n c e .
NOTE A protective bonding system in the equipment consists of a single conductor or a combination of
conductive parts, connecting a main protective earthing terminal to a part of the equipment that is to be earthed
for safety purposes.
Protective bonding conductors
th ro u g h o u t
th e ir
le n g th
and
whose
c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith o u t te s t.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th a t
m eet
te rm in a ls
th e
a ll
m in im u m
m eet
th e
c o n d u c to r
m in im u m
s iz e s
s iz e s
in
in
T a b le G .7
T a b le 3 2
a re
- 136 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
O n e q u i p m e n t w h e r e t h e p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h c o n n e c t i o n t o a s u b a s s e m b l y o r t o a s e p a r a t e u n i t is
m a d e b y m e a n s o f o n e c o r e o f a m u ltic o r e c a b le th a t a ls o s u p p lie s p o w e r to th a t s u b a s s e m b ly
o r u n it a n d w h e r e
a c c o u n t th e
s iz e
th e c a b le
o f th e
is p r o t e c t e d
c o n d u c to r,
th e
b y a s u ita b ly ra te d
re s is ta n c e
o f th e
p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e t h a t ta k e s in to
protective bonding conductor
in
t h a t c a b l e i s n o t i n c l u d e d in t h e m e a s u r e m e n t .
5.6.6.2
Test method
The test current can be either AC or DC and the test voltage shall not exceed 12 V. The
measurement is made between the main p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g terminal and the point in the
equipment that is required to be earthed.
The resistance of the p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r and of any earthed conductor in other
external wiring is not included in the measurement. However， if the p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g
c o n d u c to r is supplied with the equipment， the conductor may be included in the test circuit
but the measurement of the voltage drop is made only from the main p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g
terminal to the part required to be earthed.
Care is taken that the contact resistance between the tip of the measuring probe and the
conductive part under test does not influence the test results. The test current and duration of
the test are as follows:
a) For equipment powered from the m a in s where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g of the circuit
under test is 25 A or less， the test current is 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g
applied for 2 min.
b) For equipment powered from the AC m a in s where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g of the
circuit under test exceeds 25 Af the test current is 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g
or 500 A， whichever is less, and the duration of the test is as shown in Table 33.
Table 33 - Test duration， mains connected equipment
Protective current rating of the circuit
A
up to and including
Duration of the test
30
2
60
4
100
6
200
8
over 200
10
min
c) As an alternative to b)， the tests are based on the time-current characteristic of the
overcurrent protective device that limits the fault current in the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g
c o n d u c to r. This device is either one provided in the BUT or specified in the installation
instructions to be provided external to the equipment. The tests are conducted at 200 % of
the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g , for the duration corresponding to 200 % on the time-current
characteristic. If the duration for 200 % is not given, the nearest point on the time-current
characteristic may be used.
d) For equipment powered from a DC m ains, if the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g o f the circuit
under test exceeds 25 Af the test current and duration are as specified by the
manufacturer.
e) For equipment receiving its power from an e x te rn a l c irc u it, the test current is 1,5 times
the maximum current available from the e x te rn a l c ir c u it or 2 A ， whichever is greater， for a
duration o f 2 min. For parts connected to the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r to limit the
transients or to limit to u c h c u rre n t to an e x te rn a l c ir c u it and that do not exceed an ES2
level during s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s , the test is conducted in accordance with the relevant
test method of either a), b), c) or d) based on the power source assumed.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
- 137 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
5.6.6.3
Compliance criteria
Where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g does not exceed 25 A f the resistance of the protective
bonding system, calculated from the voltage drop, shall not exceed 0,1 Q.
Where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g exceeds 25 A f the voltage drop over the protective
bonding system shall not exceed 2,5 V.
5.6.7
Reliable connection of a protective earthing conductor
permanently connected equipment， e a r t h i n g
For
mains
F o r co rd c o n n e c te d
e q u i p m e n t , e a r t h i n g is a ls o c o n s i d e r e d to b e r e l i a b l e f o r :
-
pluggable equipment type B;
-
stationary pluggable equipment type A ，
•
th a t
is
in te n d e d
to
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e r e lia b le .
be
or
used
in
a
lo c a tio n
c e n tre , a d e d ic a te d
h a v in g
e q u ip o te n tia l
c o m p u te r ro o m , o r a
b o n d in g
(su ch
as
a
restricted access area);
and
•
has
in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s
th a t
re q u ire
skilled person;
c o n n e c tio n o f th e s o c k e t- o u tle t b y a
-
v e rific a tio n
of
th e
protective earthing
or
stationary pluggable equipment type A,
•
th a t h a s p ro v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n tly c o n n e c te d
•
has
in s tru c tio n s
fo r
th e
in s ta lla tio n
o f th a t
protective earthing conductor;
c o n d u c to r
to
b u ild in g
e a rth
by
a
and
skilled
person.
F o r e q u ip m e n t c o n n e c te d to a n
4
and
5,
e a rth in g
is
external circuit
c o n s id e re d
pluggable equipment type B t h a t
to
be
a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 ，I D n u m b e r s 1 , 2 , 3 ,
re lia b le
fo r
pluggable equipment type A
h a v e p ro v is io n fo r:
protective earthing conductor;
-
a p e rm a n e n tly c o n n e c te d
一
h a s in s tr u c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r to b u ild in g e a rth b y a
5.6.8
protective earthing conductor
functional earthing:
-
in t h e
mains
t he r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r c o n d u c to r s iz e a s g iv e n
th e
and
skilled person.
Functional earthing
If a
-
and
mains
s u p p ly
in G . 7 . 2
co rd
is o n l y
used
fo r e s ta b lis h in g
a p p ly to th e e a rth in g
c o n d u c to r o f
s u p p ly c o rd ; a n d
t he m a rk in g fo r
class II equipment
w ith
functional earthing
s h a ll b e u s e d a s s p e c ifie d
in
F .3 .6 .2 : an d
-
t he
a p p lia n c e
in le t,
re q u ire m e n ts fo r
if
used,
s h a ll
double insulation
creepage distance
reinforced insulation.
c o m p ly
or
w ith
th e
and
clearance
NOTE 1 Some appliance inlets for class I equipment do not have sufficient insulation to serve as double
insulation or reinforced insulation between the phases and the protective earthing terminal. Equipment
using such an inlet is not considered to be class II equipment.
NOTE 2 In Norway, equipment connected with an earthed mains plug is classified as class I equipment. See
the marking requirement in the country note to 4.1.15. The symbol IEC 60417-6092, as specified in F.3.6.2, is
accepted.
5.7
Prospective touch voltage, touch current and protective conductor current
5.7.1
General
M e a s u re m e n ts
current
of
prospective touch voltage, touch current,
and
protective conductor
a re m a d e w ith th e E U T s u p p lie d a t th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le s u p p ly v o lta g e (s e e B .2 .3 ).
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 138 5.7.2
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
Measuring devices and networks
5.7.2.1
Measurement of touch current
F o r m e a s u re m e n ts o f
in F i g u r e s 4 a n d
current
5 re s p e c tiv e ly
w a v e fo rm
5.7.2.2
touch current,
in
th e in s tru m e n t u s e d fo r m e a s u rin g
IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6
s h a ll
in d ic a te
U2
and
p e a k v o lta g e .
U3
s p e c ifie d
If t h e
touch
is s i n u s o i d a l , a n R M S i n d i c a t i n g i n s t r u m e n t m a y b e u s e d .
Measurement of voltage
E q u i p m e n t , o r p a r t s o f e q u i p m e n t , t h a t a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e e a r t h e d in t h e i n t e n d e d a p p l i c a t i o n ,
b u t a re
u n e a rth e d
as
p r o v id e d , s h a ll
p o in t b y w h ic h th e h ig h e s t
5.7.3
The
be
c o n n e c te d
to
prospective touch voltage
e a rth
d u rin g
th e
m e a s u r e m e n t a t th e
is o b t a i n e d .
Equipment set-up, supply connections and earth connections
e q u ip m e n t
s e t-u p ,
e q u ip m e n t
s u p p ly
c o n n e c tio n s
and
e q u ip m e n t
e a rth in g
s h a ll
be
in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith C la u s e 4 , 5 .3 a n d 5 .4 o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 .
E q u ip m e n t
conductor
p ro v id e d
w ith
a
c o n n e c tio n
to
e a rth
s e p a ra te
fro m
protective earthing
th e
s h a ll b e te s te d w ith th a t c o n n e c tio n d is c o n n e c te d .
S y s te m s o f in te r c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t w ith s e p a r a te c o n n e c tio n s to th e
mains
s h a ll h a v e e a c h
e q u ip m e n t te s te d s e p a ra te ly .
S y s te m s o f in te rc o n n e c te d
e q u ip m e n t w ith o n e c o n n e c t io n to th e
mains
s h a ll b e te s te d a s a
s in g le e q u ip m e n t.
NOTE 1
Systems of interconnected equipment are specified in more detail in Annex A of IEC 60990:2016.
mains,
E q u i p m e n t t h a t is d e s i g n e d f o r m u lt ip l e c o n n e c t i o n s t o t h e
is
re q u ire d
at
a
tim e ,
s h a ll
have
each
c o n n e c tio n
te s te d
w h ile
w h e re o n ly o n e c o n n e c tio n
th e
o th e r
c o n n e c tio n s
a re
d is c o n n e c te d .
E q u ip m e n t
th a t
c o n n e c tio n
is
c o n n e c te d ,
w ith
is
d e s ig n e d
re q u ire d ,
th e
s h a ll
fo r
m u ltip le
have
each
c o n n e c tio n s
c o n n e c tio n
to
th e
te s te d
w h ile
th e
w h e re
m o re
th a n
o th e r c o n n e c tio n s
one
a re
protective earthing conductors c o n n e c t e d t o g e t h e r . I f t h e touch
l i m i t i n 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 f t h e touch current s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d i n d i v i d u a l l y .
current
e x c e e d s th e
NOTE 2
It is not necessary that the EUT operates normally during this test.
5.7.4
mains,
Unearthed accessible parts
normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions
conditions ( e x c e p t f o r a safeguard f a u l t ) , t o u c h v o l t a g e o r touch current
f r o m a l l u n e a r t h e d accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s . Touch current ( c u r r e n t
Under
and
single fault
s h a ll b e m e a s u r e d
a and
cu rre n t b of
T a b l e 4 ) s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 1 , 5 . 4 a n d 6 . 2 . 1 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 .
single fault conditions o f a r e l e v a n t basic safeguard o r a supplementary
safeguard, i n c l u d i n g 6 . 2 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , t o u c h v o l t a g e o r touch current s h a l l b e
m e a s u r e d f r o m a l l u n e a r t h e d accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s . Touch current ( c u r r e n t b o f
Under
T a b l e 4 ) s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d w i t h t h e n e t w o r k s p e c i f i e d in F i g u r e 5 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 .
For an
accessible
o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
n o n - c o n d u c t i v e p a r t , t h e t e s t is m a d e w i t h a m e t a l f o i l a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 .2 .1
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
5.7.5
-139-
Earthed accessible conductive parts
A t le a s t o n e
accessible
e a rth e d
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt s h a ll b e te s te d
fo r
touch current
fo llo w in g
s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n f a u l t s in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 6 .1 a n d 6 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , e x c e p t 6 . 2 . 2 . 8 .
E x c e p t a s p e r m i t t e d in 5 . 7 . 6 , t h e
S u b c la u s e
6 .2 .2 .3
of
disconnect device
NOTE
touch current
IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6
does
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e E S 2 l i m i t s in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 .
n o t a p p ly
to
e q u ip m e n t
w ith
a
s w itc h
or
o th e r
t h a t d i s c o n n e c t s a ll p o le s o f t h e s u p p ly .
An appliance coupler is an example of a disconnect device.
5.7.6
Requirements when touch current exceeds ES2 limits
W h e re th e
touch current
e x c e e d s t h e E S 2 l i m i t s in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2
u n d e r th e s u p p ly fa u lt c o n d itio n s
s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 2 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , a ll o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s a p p l y :
-
t he
protective conductor current
m e a su re d
a c c o rd in g
s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 5 % o f th e in p u t c u r r e n t m e a s u r e d u n d e r
-
t he
c o n s tru c tio n
o f th e
protective earthing conductor
to
C la u s e
8 o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6
normal operating conditions;
c irc u it a n d
its
c o n n e c tio n s
s h a ll
have:
•
•
-
t he
protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a reinforced safeguard
5 . 6 . 3 o r t w o i n d e p e n d e n t protective earthing conductors s e r v i n g
safeguard, a n d
a
protective earthing
a re lia b le c o n n e c tio n to
m a n u fa c tu re r
s h a ll
in d ic a te
th e
v a lu e
a s s p e c i f i e d in
o f th e
a s s p e c ifie d
as
in
double
a
5.6.7;
protective conductor current
in
th e
i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s if t h e c u r r e n t e x c e e d s 1 0 m A ;
-
an
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e p ro v id e d
e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l . T h e e l e m e n t s o f t h e
in a c c o r d a n c e w it h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t
instructional safeguard
旧 C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 2
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
(2 0 1 0 -1 1 ); and
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 1 7 3 (2 0 1 2 -1 0 ); a n d
(T )
•
, IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 )
e le m e n t 2: “ C a u t io n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d o r te x t, a n d “ H ig h to u c h c u r r e n t ” o r e q u iv a le n t
te x t
•
e le m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
•
e le m e n t 4:
“ C o n n e c t to e a r th b e fo r e c o n n e c t in g to s u p p ly ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
th a t a re re q u ire d to b e p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e e q u ip m e n t a d ja c e n t to th e e q u ip m e n t s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n .
NOTE In Denmark, the installation instruction shall be affixed to the equipment if the protective conductor
current exceeds the limits of 3t5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.
5.7.7
5.7.7.1
Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with external circuits
Touch current from coaxial cables
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is c o n n e c t e d t o
external circuits
w it h a c o a x ia l c a b le a n d if s u c h c o n n e c t i o n
is l i k e l y t o c r e a t e a h a z a r d , t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r s h a l l p r o v i d e
of
th e
c o a x ia l
c a b le
IE C 6 0 7 2 8 -1 1 :2 0 1 6 .
Copyright Inlernatiohal Etectrotechmcal Commission
to
th e
b u ild in g
e a rth
in
in s tr u c tio n s to c o n n e c t th e s h ie ld
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
6 .2 g )
and
6 . 2 I)
of
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE 1 In Norway and Sweden, the screen of the television distribution system is normally not earthed at the
entrance of the building and there is normally no equipotential bonding system within the building. Therefore the
protective earthing of the building installation needs to be isolated from the screen of a cable distribution system.
It is however accepted to provide the insulation external to the equipment by an adapter or an interconnection
cable with galvanic isolator, which may be provided by a retailer, for example.
The user manual shall then have the following or similar information in Norwegian and Swedish language
respectively, depending on in what country the equipment is intended to be used in:
“Apparatus connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the mains connection or
through other apparatus with a connection to protective earthing - and to a television distribution system using
coaxial cable, may in some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a television distribution system
therefore has to be provided through a device providing electrical isolation below a certain frequency range
(galvanic isolator, see IEC 60728-11)” .
NOTE 2 In Norway, due to regulation for CATV-installations, and in Sweden, a galvanic isolator shall provide
electrical insulation below 5 MHz. The insulation shall withstand a dielectric strength of 1,5 kV RMS, 50 Hz or
60 Hzf for 1 minute.
Translation to Norwegian (the Swedish text will also be accepted in Norway):
t4Apparater som er koplet til beskyttelsesjord via nettplugg og/eller via annet jordtilkoplet utstyr - og er tilkoplet et
koaksialbasert kabel-TV nett, kan forarsake brannfare. For a unnga dette skal det ved tilkopling av apparater til
kabel-TV nett installeres en galvanisk isolator mellom apparatet og kabe 卜 TV nettet.”
Translation to Swedish:
”Apparater som ar kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vagguttag och/eller via annan utrustning och samtidigt ar
kopplad till kabel-TV nat kan i vissa fall medfora risk for brand. For att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av
apparaten till kabel-TV nat galvanisk isolator finnas mellan apparaten och kabel-TV natet.>,
5.7.7.2
Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with paired
conductor cables
F o r c irc u its in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c te d to
external circuits
s u c h a s th o s e d e s c rib e d
in I D 1 o f
T a b le 13:
-
t he
prospective touch voltage
-
t he
touch current
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith E S 2 ; o r
s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 0 ,2 5 m A .
T h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly if t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g
a
external circuits
a re c o n n e c t e d to
protective earthing conductor.
Compliance is checked by measurement according 5.7.2 and 5.7.3 by using the measurement
arrangement in Figure 32 for single-phase equipment and Figure 33 for three-phase
equipment.
NOTE
For other power distribution systems, see IEC 60990:2016.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
Point of connection
to AC mains supply
(Polarity)
External circuit
ports
P2
(Polarity)
Optional test
transformer
for isolation
Measuring
network
(Test switch)
ie c
Figure 32 - Test circuit for touch current of single-phase equipment
Point of connection
to AC mains supply
L1
(Polarity)
P1_____
L2
External circuit
ports
L2
(Polarity)
L3
L3
N
N
e
PE
T
p2
PE
EUT
(Earthing
conductor)
Optional test
transformer
for isolation
b
Oa
Measuring
network
(Test switch)
ICC
Figure 33 - Test circuit for touch current of three-phase equipment
5.7.8
The
Summation of touch currents from external circuits
re q u ire m e n ts
conductor
s h o u ld th e
is
re q u ire d
mains
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
b e lo w
fo r
s p e c ify
when
a
p e rm a n e n tly
pluggable equipment type A
c o n n e c tio n b e d is c o n n e c te d .
protective earthing
pluggable equipment type B,
c o n n e c te d
or
旧C
The
re q u ire m e n ts
a p p ly o n ly to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
to
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
be c o n n e c te d
to a n
external circuit
s u c h a s d e s c r i b e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1 , 2 , 3 a n d 4 .
NOTE
These types of external circuits are typically telecommunication networks.
T h e s u m m a tio n
touch currents
of
fro m
e q u ip m e n t th a t p ro v id e s
external circuits,
m u ltip le
s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim its fo r E S 2 (s e e T a b le 4 ).
T h e fo llo w in g a b b re v ia tio n s a re u s e d :
-
I y touch current
re c e iv e d fro m o th e r e q u ip m e n t v ia a n e x te r n a l n e tw o rk ;
-
S(I^):
of
s u m m a tio n
touch current
re c e iv e d
fro m
a ll
o th e r
e q u ip m e n t
v ia
an
e x te rn a l
n e tw o rk ;
touch current
一
/ 2:
It
s h a ll
be
re c e iv e s
assum ed
0 ,2 5
th a t
(1^)
mA
mains
d u e to th e
each
fro m
c irc u it
th e
o th e r
o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t
e q u ip m e n t,
u n le s s
external circuit
c o n n e c te d
to
th e
c u rre n t fro m
a c tu a l
an
th e
o th e r
e q u i p m e n t is k n o w n t o b e l o w e r .
T h e fo llo w in g r e q u ir e m e n ts , a ) o r b) a s a p p lic a b le , s h a ll b e m e t:
a)
E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c t e d to a n e a r th e d
For
e q u ip m e n t
c o n n e c te d
to
in
a
w h ic h
each
te rm in a l
fo r
external circuit
c irc u it
th e
th a t
can
be
c o n n e c te d
to
an
protective earthing conductor
external circuit
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t,
is
th e
fo llo w in g s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d :
1)
If
S(I^)
-
(n o t in c lu d in g
I2)
e x c e e d s E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 4:
t h e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll h a v e p r o v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c tio n
to p r o te c tiv e e a rth
protective earthing conductor i n t h e p o w e r
pluggable equipment type A o r pluggable equipment type B; a n d
in
-
a d d itio n
to
th e
s u p p ly
co rd
of
t h e in s t a lla t io n in s t r u c t io n s s h a ll s p e c if y th e p r o v is io n o f a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c t io n to
p ro te c tiv e
e a rth
w ith
a
c ro s s -s e c tio n a l
a re a
of
not
le s s
th a n
2 ,5 m m 2,
if
m e c h a n ic a lly p ro te c te d , o r o th e rw is e 4 ,0 m m 2; a n d
2)
p r o v i d e a m a r k i n g in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 7 . 6 a n d C l a u s e F . 3 .
S u c h e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .7 .6 . T h e v a lu e o f
I2 s h a ll
b e u s e d to c a lc u la te th e
5 % i n p u t c u r r e n t l i m i t p e r p h a s e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 7 . 6 .
3)
The sum of
S(I^)
a n d / 2 s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e lim its o f T a b le 4.
Compliance with item a) is checked by inspection and if necessary by test.
If the equipment has provision for a permanent protective earth connection in accordance
with item 1) above, it is not necessary to make any measurements, except that I2 shall
comply with the relevant requirements of 5.7.
Touch c u rre n t tests, if necessary, are made using the relevant measuring instrument
described in IEC 60990:2016, Figure 5f or any other instrument giving the same results. A
source (for example, a capacitively coupled AC source of the same line frequency and
phase as the AC m ains) is applied to each e x te rn a l c ir c u it and adjusted so that 0,25 mAf
or the actual current from other equipment, if known to be lower, is available to flow into
that e x te rn a l c irc u it. The current flowing in the earthing conductor is then measured.
b)
E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c t e d to a n u n e a r th e d
If e a c h
c irc u it o f th e
have a com m on
external circuit
e q u ip m e n t th a t c a n
c o n n e c tio n , th e
be
c o n n e c te d
touch current
to
an
external circuit
fo r e a c h c ir c u it s h a ll n o t e x c e e d
does
not
th e E S 2
lim its o f T a b le 4.
external circuit o r a n y g r o u p s
touch current f r o m e a c h c o m m o n
If a ll c i r c u i t s o f t h e e q u i p m e n t t h a t c a n b e c o n n e c t e d to a n
of such
p o rts
have
a
com m on
c o n n e c tio n ,
th e
to ta l
c o n n e c tio n s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 4.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Compliance with item b) is checked by inspection and, if there are common connection
points, by the following test.
A capacitively coupled AC source of the same frequency and phase as the AC m a in s is
applied to each circuit of the equipment that can be connected to an e x te rn a l c ir c u it so
that 0,25 mA, or the actual current from the other equipment if known to be lower, is
available to flow into that circuit. Common connection points are tested in accordance with
5.7.3, whether or not the points are a cce ssib le .
5.8
A
Backfeed safeguard in battery backed up supplies
battery
backed
b a c k fe e d in g
up
s u p p ly
th a t
is
an
s h a ll p r e v e n t g r e a t e r th a n
in te rru p tio n o f th e
mains
in te g ra l
ES1
p a rt
fro m
b e in g
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t
and
mains
p re s e n t on th e
is
c a p a b le
of
te rm in a ls a fte r
p o w e r.
mains t e r m i n a l s w h e n m e a s u r e d 1 s a f t e r d e - e n e r g i z a t i o n o f t h e
mains f o r pluggable type A equipment, 5 s f o r pluggable type B equipment o r 1 5 s f o r
permanently connected equipment u s i n g t h e m e a s u r e m e n t i n s t r u m e n t s d e s c r i b e d i n 5 . 7 . 2 .
W h e r e t h e m e a s u r e d o p e n - c i r c u i t v o l t a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e E S 1 l i m i t s , t h e touch current
N o h a z a rd s h a ll e x is t a t th e
d o e s n o t h a v e to b e m e a s u re d .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f the equipment and the relevant circuit diagram, by
measurement and by s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s in accordance with BA.
NOTE 1 For standards related to battery backed up power supply systems that are not an integral part of the
equipment, see standards related to UPS, such as IEC 62040-1. For transfer switches, see IEC 62310-1:2005.
NOTE 2
W hen
See also the explanatory information in IEC TR 62368-2.
an
a ir
clearances
-
gap
and
s u b j e c t to
is
5.4.3
backfeed safeguard, t h e
creepage distances a p p l y i n a d d i t i o n t o
e m p lo y e d
fo r
c o n firm a tio n
stored energy mode
fro m
as
a
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r,
th e
battery
re q u ire m e n ts
of
5.4.2
fo r
th e fo llo w in g :
backed
up
s u p p ly
o u tp u t,
in
m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a t r a n s i e n t f r e e c i r c u i t o f O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r y I;
clearances a n d creepage distances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
degree 2 o r h i g h e r i f e x p e c t e d i n t h e i n t e n d e d i n s t a l l a t i o n l o c a t i o n ;
-
t he
-
reinforced insulation s h a l l b e a p p l i e d b e t w e e n t h e u n i t o u t p u t
stored energy mode o f o p e r a t i o n n o t a l l i n p u t p o l e s a r e
safeguard d e v i c e . I n a l l o t h e r c a s e s , basic insulation s h a l l b e
fo r
pollution
a n d t h e u n it i n p u t if d u r in g
is o la te d
by
th e
backfeed
a p p lie d .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
6
Electrically-caused fire
6.1
To
General
re d u ce
th e
lik e lih o o d
of
in ju ry
or
p ro p e rty
dam age
due
to
an
e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d
o r ig in a tin g w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t, e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e
safeguards
fire
s p e c ifie d
in C l a u s e 6 .
6.2
6.2.1
Classification of power sources (PS) and potential ignition sources (PIS)
General
E le c tric a l s o u r c e s o f h e a tin g c a n b e c la s s ifie d
(se e
6 .2 .2 .4 ,
6 .2 .2 .5
and
in to a v a ila b le p o w e r le v e ls P S 1 , P S 2 a n d P S 3
6 .2 .2 .6 ) th a t m a y c a u s e
re s is tiv e
h e a tin g
o f b o th
c o m p o n e n ts
and
c o n n e c tio n s . T h e s e p o w e r s o u r c e s a re b a s e d o n a v a ila b le e n e r g y to a c irc u it.
W ith in a p o w e r s o u rc e , a
o f c o n ta c ts
(arcing PIS)
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
PIS
m a y a r is e d u e to a r c in g o f e it h e r b r o k e n c o n n e c t io n s o r o p e n in g
o r fro m c o m p o n e n ts d is s ip a tin g m o re th a n 15 W
(resistive PIS).
旧C
D e p e n d in g
on
th e
p o w e r so u rce
c la s s ific a tio n
of each
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
c irc u it, o n e
o r m o re
safeguards
a re
r e q u ir e d e it h e r to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f s p r e a d o f fire
b e y o n d th e e q u ip m e n t.
6.2.2
Power source circuit classifications
6.2.2.1
General
A n e l e c t r i c c i r c u i t is c l a s s i f i e d P S 1 , P S 2 , o r P S 3 b a s e d o n t h e e l e c t r i c a l p o w e r a v a i l a b l e t o th e
c irc u it fro m th e p o w e r s o u rc e .
The
e le c tric a l
p o w e r so u rce
c la s s ific a tio n
s h a ll
be
d e te rm in e d
by
m e a s u rin g
th e
m a x im u m
p o w e r u n d e r e a c h o f th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :
-
f or lo a d c irc u its : a p o w e r s o u r c e u n d e r
normal operating conditions
a s s p e c ifie d
b y th e
m a n u f a c t u r e r in to a w o r s t - c a s e fa u lt ( s e e 6 .2 .2 .2 ) ;
-
f or p o w e r s o u r c e c irc u its : a w o r s t- c a s e
p o w e r s o u r c e fa u lt in to th e s p e c ifie d
n o r m a l lo a d
c irc u it (s e e 6 .2 .2 .3 ).
T h e p o w e r is m e a s u r e d a t p o i n t s X a n d Y in F i g u r e 3 4 a n d F i g u r e 3 5 .
6.2.2.2
Power measurement for worst-case fault
With reference to Figure 34:
-
the measurement may be performed without the load circuit
maximum power is dependent on the connection o f the load;
-
at points X and Y， insert a wattmeter (or a voltmeter， VA， and a current meter， IA);
-
connect a variable resistor,
-
adjust the variable resistor, L V R , for maximum power. Measure the maximum power and
classify the power source according to 6.2.2.4, 6.2.2.5 or 6.2.2.6.
L VR,
I NL
connected, unless the
as shown;
If an overcurrent protective device operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at 125 % of the current rating of the overcurrent protective device.
If a power limiting device or circuit operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at a point ju s t below the current at which the power limiting device or circuit
operated.
When evaluating accessories connected via cables to the equipment， the impedance of the
cable may be taken into account in the determination of PS1 or PS2 on the accessory side.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Key
V
voltage source
R、
internal resistance of the power source
/A
current from the power source
VA
voltage at the points where determination of PS power is made
△ VR variable resistor load
L
nl
normal load
Figure 34 - Power measurement for worst-case fault
6.2.2.3
Power measurement for worst-case power source fault
With reference to Figure 35:
一
At points X and Y， insert a wattmeter (or a voltmeter, VA， and a current meter， IA).
-
Within the power source circuit, simulate any s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that will result in
maximum power to the circuit being classified. All relevant components in the power
source circuits shall be short-circuited or disconnected one at a time at each
measurement.
-
Equi pment containing audio amplifiers shall also be tested under a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s as specified in Clause E.3.
-
Measure the maximum power as specified and classify circuits supplied by the power
source according to 6.2.2.4, 6.2.2.5 or 6.2.2.6.
If an overcurrent protective device operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at 125 % of the current rating o f the overcurrent protective device.
If a power limiting device or circuit operates during the test， the measurement shall be
repeated at a point ju s t below the current at which the power limiting device or circuit
operated.
When the tests are repeated, a variable resistance may be used to simulate the component
under fault.
To avoid damage to the components of the normal load, a resistor (equal to the normal load)
may be substituted for the normal load.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
NOTE
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Experimentation can be used to identify the single component fault that produces maximum power.
Key
V
voltage source
internal resistance of the power source
/A current from the power source
VA
voltage at the points where determination of PS power is made
Z，NLnormal load
Figure 35 - Power measurement for worst-case power source fault
6.2.2.4
PS1
PS1
is a c i r c u i t w h e r e t h e p o w e r s o u r c e , ( s e e
F ig u re 3 6 ) m e a s u r e d
a c c o rd in g to 6 .2 .2 , d o e s
n o t e x c e e d 1 5 W m e a s u r e d a f t e r 3 s.
The
p o w e r a v a ila b le fro m
external circuits
d e s c rib e d
in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s
1 and
2, a re
c o n s id e r e d to b e lim ite d to P S 1 .
6.2.2.5
PS2
P S 2 is a
c irc u it w h e r e th e p o w e r s o u rc e , (s e e F ig u re 3 6 ) m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 6 .2 .2 :
-
e x c e e d s PS1
-
d o e s n o t e x c e e d 1 0 0 W m e a s u r e d a fte r 5 s.
6.2.2.6
lim its ; a n d
PS3
P S 3 is a c i r c u i t w h o s e
p o w e r so u rce e xce e d s
h a s n o t b e e n c la s s ifie d (s e e F ig u re 3 6 ).
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
P S 2 lim its , o r a n y c ir c u it w h o s e
p o w e r so u rce
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
4 000W
PS3 circuit
l
—
o
o
s
s d
C NJ
T -
d
100 w
PS2 circuit
15 w
PS 1 circuit
Figure 36 - Illustration of power source classification
6.2.3
Classification of potential ignition sources
6.2.3.1
Arcing PIS
An
arcing PIS
-
an
open
is a l o c a t i o n w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s :
c irc u it
v o lta g e
(m e a su re d
a fte r
3
s)
a cro ss
an
open
c o n d u c to r
or
o p e n in g
e le c tric a l c o n ta c t e x c e e d in g 5 0 V (p e a k ) A C o r D C ; a n d
-
t he
p ro d u c t o f th e
p e a k o f th e
( / rm s ) e x c e e d s 1 5 ( t h a t is ,
Fp x
open
c irc u it v o lta g e
( F p) a n d
th e
m e a su re d
a c o n ta c t, s u c h a s a s w itc h o r c o n n e c to r;
•
a te r m in a tio n , s u c h a s o n e m a d e b y a c rim p , s p rin g o r s o ld e r te r m in a tio n ;
•
o p e n in g
o f a c o n d u c to r, su ch
a s a p rin te d w ir in g
b o a rd tra c e , as a c o n s e q u e n c e
An
arcing PIS
of a
T h i s c o n d it io n d o e s n o t a p p ly if e le c t r o n i c p r o t e c t i o n c ir c u it s o r
a d d itio n a l c o n s tr u c tio n a l m e a s u r e s a re u s e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d th a t s u c h
be co m e s an
cu rre n t
/ rm s > 1 5 ) f o r a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
•
single fault condition.
RMS
a fa u lt
arcing PIS.
i s c o n s i d e r e d n o t t o e x i s t in a P S 1
b e c a u s e o f th e lim its o f th e p o w e r s o u rc e .
NOTE 1 An open conductor in an electric circuit includes those interruptions that occur in conductive patterns on
printed boards.
R e lia b le o r r e d u n d a n t c o n n e c tio n s a re n o t c o n s id e re d to be a n
Redundant
c o n n e c tio n s
a re
any
k in d
o f tw o
or
m o re
arcing PIS.
c o n n e c tio n s
in
p a ra lle l,
w h e re
in
th e
e v e n t o f th e fa ilu r e o f o n e c o n n e c t io n , th e r e m a in in g c o n n e c t io n s a re s till c a p a b le o f h a n d lin g
th e fu ll p o w e r .
R e lia b le c o n n e c tio n s a re c o n n e c tio n s th a t a re c o n s id e re d n o t to o p e n .
NOTE 2
Connections that could be considered reliable are:
一
holes of solder pads on a printed board that are through-metallized;
-
tubular rivets/eyelets that are additionally soldered;
-
machine-made or tool-made crimp or wire-wrap connections.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
NOTE 3
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Other means to avoid the occurrence of an arcing PIS can be used.
NOTE 4 Connection failure due to thermal fatigue phenomena could be prevented by selection of components
with a coefficient of thermal expansion similar to that of the printed board material, taking into account the location
of the component with respect to the fibre direction of the board material.
6.2.3.2
A
Resistive PIS
resistive PIS
-
is a n y p a r t in a P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t t h a t :
d i s s i p a t e s m o re th a n 15 W m e a s u re d a fte r 30 s u n d e r
-
NOTE
During the first 30 s there is no limit.
under
single fault conditions:
•
normal operating conditions;
or
d is s ip a te s m o re th a n
100 W
m e a s u r e d fo r 3 0 s, d is r e g a r d in g th e firs t 3 s, im m e d ia te ly
a fte r th e
o f th e
f a u l t if e le c t r o n i c
in tro d u c tio n
c irc u its ,
re g u la to rs
or PTC
d e v ic e s
a re
used; or
•
A
d is s ip a te s m o re th a n 15 W m e a s u r e d 3 0 s a fte r th e in tr o d u c tio n o f th e fa u lt.
resistive PIS
6.3
is c o n s i d e r e d n o t t o e x i s t in a P S 1
b e c a u s e o f th e lim its o f th e p o w e r s o u rc e .
Safeguards against fire under normal operating conditions and abnormal
operating conditions
6.3.1
Requirements
normal operating conditions
basic safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d :
Under
-
i gni t i on s h a ll n o t o c c u r; a n d
-
no
p a rt
of
th e
s p o n ta n e o u s
e q u ip m e n t
ig n itio n
s h a ll
and
a tta in
te m p e ra tu re
lim it,
abnormal operating conditions,
a
in
te m p e ra tu re
C e ls iu s ,
v a lu e
o f th e
g re a te r
p a rt
as
th a n
d e fin e d
th e
fo llo w in g
90 %
by
of
th e
IS O 8 7 1 .
W h e n t h e s p o n t a n e o u s i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e m a t e r i a l is n o t k n o w n , t h e t e m p e r a t u r e
s h a ll b e lim ite d to 3 0 0 ° C ; a n d
NOTE This document currently does not contain requirements for flammable dust or liquids other than for
insulating liquids.
-
combustible materials f o r c o m p o n e n t s a n d o t h e r p a r t s ( i n c l u d i n g electrical enclosures，
mechanical enclosures a n d d e c o r a t i v e p a r t s ) n o t i n s i d e a fire enclosure s h a l l c o m p l y
w ith :
•
HB75 class material
if t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s m a t e r i a l is < 3 m m ; o r
•
HB40 class material
i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s m a t e r i a l is > 3 m m ; o r
•
HBF class foamed material;
•
s h a ll p a s s th e G lo w - W ir e te s t a t 5 5 0 °C a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 .
or
T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
•
p a rts w ith a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ;
•
p a rts w ith a m a s s o f
•
s u p p lie s ,
•
p a rts
consumable materials， m e d i a
th a t
fu n c tio n s ,
combustible material
a re
such
re q u ire d
as
to
s y n th e tic
have
o f le s s th a n
g;
a n d r e c o rd in g m a te ria ls ;
p a rtic u la r
ru b b e r
4
ro lle rs ,
p ro p e rtie s
in k
tu b e s
in
and
o rd e r
to
p e rfo rm
m a te ria l
in te n d e d
re q u irin g
o p tic a l
c h a ra c te ris tic s ; a n d
•
g e a rs , c a m s , b e lts , b e a r in g s a n d o th e r p a rts th a t w o u ld
c o n trib u te
fir e , in c lu d in g , la b e ls , m o u n t in g fe e t, k e y c a p s , k n o b s a n d th e lik e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
n e g lig ib le fu e l to a
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
6.3.2
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection of the data sheets and by test under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s according to Clause B.2 and under a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s according to
Clause B.3. The temperatures of materials are measured continuously until thermal
equilibrium has been attained.
NOTE
See B.1.5 for details on thermal equilibrium.
Temperature limiting b a s ic s a fe g u a rd s that comply with the applicable requirements of this
document or the applicable safety device standard shall remain in the circuit being evaluated.
6.4
Safeguards against fire under single fault conditions
6.4.1
General
T h is
s u b c la u s e
d e fin e s
th e
p o s s ib le
lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire
T h e re
a re
tw o
m e th o d s
safeguard m e t h o d s t h a t c a n
u n d e r single fault conditions.
o f p ro v id in g
p ro te c tio n .
E ith e r m e th o d
be
m ay
used
to
be
a p p lie d
th a t
under
re d u c e
to
th e
d iffe re n t
p a rts o f th e s a m e e q u ip m e n t.
一
Reduce the likelihood of ignition: E q u i p m e n t
conditions n o p a r t s h a l l h a v e s u s t a i n e d f l a m i n g .
in w h i c h
th e
a v a ila b le
s te a d y
s ta te
p o w e r to
is
so
d e s ig n e d
single fault
T h is m e th o d c a n b e u s e d fo r a n y c irc u it
th e
c irc u it d o e s
not exceed
4 000 W .
The
a p p r o p r i a t e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d t e s t s a r e d e t a i l e d in 6 . 4 . 2 a n d 6 . 4 . 3 .
•
Pluggable equipment type A
is c o n s i d e r e d
n o t to e x c e e d
th e
s te a d y
s ta te
v a lu e
of
4 000 W .
•
Pluggable
c o n s id e re d
n o m in a l
equipment type
not
to
mains
exceed
v o lta g e
th e
and
B
permanently
and
s te a d y
th e
s ta te
v a lu e
of
connected
4 000 W
equipment
if t h e
protective current rating
of
p ro d u ct
th e
a re
o f th e
in s ta lla tio n
o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e ( F mains x / max) d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W .
-
Control fire spread:
S e le c tio n
and
a p p lic a tio n
of
supplementary safeguards
fo r
c o m p o n e n ts , w ir in g , m a te r ia ls a n d c o n s tr u c tio n a l m e a s u r e s th a t r e d u c e th e s p r e a d o f fire
and, w h e re
enclosure.
supplementary safeguard
n e c e s s a ry , b y th e u s e o f a s e c o n d
T h is
m e th o d
can
be
used
fo r
any
ty p e
of
e q u ip m e n t.
such as a
The
fire
a p p ro p ria te
r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e d e t a i l e d in 6 . 4 . 4 , 6 . 4 . 5 a n d 6 . 4 . 6 .
6.4.2
No
Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in PS1
circuits
supplementary safeguards
c o n s id e re d
a re
needed
to b e c a p a b le o f p r o v id in g
enough
fo r
p ro te c tio n
e n e rg y to
a g a in s t
PS1.
A
PS1
r e s u l t in m a t e r i a l s r e a c h i n g
is
not
ig n itio n
te m p e ra tu re s .
6.4.3
Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in PS2
circuits and PS3 circuits
6.4.3.1
The
Requirements
lik e lih o o d
of
ig n itio n
under
single fault conditions
in
PS2
c irc u its
and
PS3
c irc u its
w h e r e th e a v a ila b le p o w e r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W (s e e 6 .4 .1 ) s h a ll b e re d u c e d b y u s in g th e
fo llo w in g
NOTE
-
supplementary safeguards
a s a p p lic a b le :
For PS3 circuits where the available power exceeds 4 000 W, see 6.4.6.
arcing PIS o r a resistive PIS s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d
accessible o u t e r s u r f a c e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o n s i d e r e d t o
material;
an
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
as
s p e c ifie d
in
b e c o v e re d w ith
6.4.7 w i t h t h e
a combustible
- 150 -
safeguard
p r o t e c t i v e d e v ic e s a c tin g a s a
旧C
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.3.1
to
G.3.4
o r th e re le v a n t
IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd s ;
-
motors
and
tra n s fo rm e rs
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
G .5 .3 ,
G .5 .4
o r th e
re le v a n t
IE C
com ponent
re le v a n t
IEC
com ponent
s ta n d a rd ;
-
v a r i s t o r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .8 .2 ; a n d
-
components
a s s o c ia te d
w ith
th e
mains
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
s ta n d a r d s a n d th e re q u ire m e n ts o f o th e r p a rts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
In a d d i t i o n , t h e t e s t s o f 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 a p p l y .
EXAMPLES Components associated with the mains include the supply cord, appliance couplers, EMC filtering
components, switches, etc.
6.4.3.2
Test method
The conditions of Clause B.4f that are possible causes for ignition, are applied in turn. A
c〇 A?sec/tyeA7f/a/ fau/f may
厂 /nfeATi/pf or s/?〇 At-c/厂cu/f a c 〇 Ar?p〇 A7eA7f. / a
? case ofcyoubf, f/?e fesf
shall be repeated two more times with replacement components in order to check that
sustained flaming does not occur.
The equipment is operated under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s and the temperatures of materials
are monitored continuously until thermal equilibrium has been attained.
If a conductor opens during a simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， the conductor shall be
bridged and the simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n shall be continued. In all other cases, where
an applied s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n results in interruption of the current before steady state has
been reached, the temperatures are measured immediately after the interruption.
NOTE 1
See B.1.5 for details on thermal equilibrium.
NOTE 2
Temperature rise can be observed after interruption of the current due to thermal inertia.
If the temperature is limited by a fuse, under a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n :
-
a fuse complying with the IEC 60127 series shall open within 1 s; or
-
a fuse not complying with the IEC 60127 series shall open within 1 s for three consecutive
times; or
-
the fuse shall comply with the following test.
The fuse is short-circuited and the current that would have passed through the fuse under the
relevant s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n is measured.
If the fuse current remains less than 2,1 times the current rating o f the fuse， the temperatures
are measured after a steady state has been attained.
If the current either immediately reaches 2,1 times the current rating of the fuse or more， or
reaches this value after a period o f time equal to the maximum pre-arcing time for the relevant
current through the fuse under consideration, both the fuse and the short-circuit link are
removed after an additional time corresponding to the maximum pre-arcing time of the fuse
under consideration and the temperatures are measured immediately thereafter.
If the fuse resistance influences the current of the relevant circuit, the maximum resistance
value o f the fuse shall be taken into account when establishing the value of the current.
Printed board conductors are tested by applying the relevant s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s
of B A A .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
6.4.3.3
- 151 -
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection, tests and measurements. See B.4.8 for compliance
criteria.
6.4.4
Control of fire spread in PS1 circuits
supplementary safeguards
No
c o n s id e re d
to b e c a p a b le
a re
needed
o f p ro v id in g
enough
fo r
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t
PS1.
e n e r g y t o r e s u l t in m a t e r i a l s
A
PS1
re a c h in g
is
not
ig n itio n
te m p e ra tu re s .
6.4.5
Control of fire spread in PS2 circuits
6.4.5.1
For
General
th e
p u rp o se s
of
re d u c in g
combustible materials,
th e
lik e lih o o d
of
fire
sp re a d
in
PS2
c irc u its
to
n e a rb y
c irc u its th a t m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x Q a re c o n s id e re d to be
P S 2 c irc u its .
6.4.5.2
A
Requirements
supplementary safeguard
PIS
is r e q u i r e d t o c o n t r o l t h e s p r e a d o f f i r e f r o m a n y p o s s i b l e
to
o th e r p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t a s g iv e n b e lo w .
C o n d u c to rs a n d d e v ic e s th a t c o n s titu te a
PIS
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e fo llo w in g :
V-1 class material
-
p r i n t e d b o a rd s s h a ll b e m a d e o f
-
wi r e in s u la tio n a n d tu b in g s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 6 .5 .1 .
or
VTM-1 class material;
and
M o to r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .4 .
T r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 .
A ll o t h e r c o m p o n e n t s in a P S 2 c i r c u i t s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
V-1 class material
be m o u n te d on
-
be m ade of
-
c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 ; o r
-
h a v e a s iz e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ; o r
-
have a m ass of
-
b e s e p a ra te d fro m a
-
c o m p l y w ith th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r
-
be
in
a
If
V-2 class material, VTM-2 class material
s e a le d
material
or
VTM-1 class material;
-
combustible material
PIS
or
o f le s s th a n 4 g; o r
enclosure
of
0 ,0 6 m 3
or
le s s ,
c o n s is tin g
to ta lly
of
non-combustible
a n d h a v in g n o v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s ; o r
fo llo w in g
re q u ire m e n ts
conditions
HF-2 class foamed material;
b y th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 6 .4 .7 ; o r
t h e c o m p o n e n t s h a ll n o t ig n ite d u rin g
th e
or
or
of
m a te ria ls
6 .4 .7 ,
th e n
and
th e
p a rts
single fault conditions
a re
not
s e p a ra te d
m a te ria ls
and
p a rts
s h a ll
fro m
not
a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 .
a
PIS
ig n ite
a c c o rd in g
d u rin g
to
th e
single fault
a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 :
consumable materials,
-
supplies,
m e d ia a n d re c o rd in g m a te ria ls ; a n d
-
p a r t s t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d t o h a v e p a r t i c u l a r p r o p e r t i e s in o r d e r t o p e r f o r m i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n s ,
s u c h a s s y n th e tic r u b b e r ro lle rs , in k tu b e s a n d m a te r ia l r e q u ir in g o p tic a l c h a r a c te r is tic s .
6.4.5.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by testing or by inspection of the equipment and material data sheets.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 152 6.4.6
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Control of fire spread in a PS3 circuit
F ire s p r e a d
in P S 3 c i r c u i t s s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d
b y a p p ly i n g a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g
supplementary
safeguards:
-
c o n d u c t o r s a n d d e v ic e s w ith in a P S 3 c ir c u it s h a ll m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 6 .4 .5 ;
-
devices
s u b je c t
to
a rc in g
or
c h a n g in g
c o n ta c t
re s is ta n c e
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
p lu g g a b le
c o n n e c t o r s ) s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
V_1 class material,
•
h a v e m a te ria ls m a d e o f
•
c o m p ly w ith th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n t s o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d , o r
•
c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 , o r
•
be m o u n te d
o n m a te ria l m a d e o f
o f a v o lu m e n o t e x c e e d in g
or
V-1 class material
VTM-1 class material a n d b e
o f combustible material o f l e s s
or
1 750 m m 3 or have a m ass
th a n 4 g; a n d
-
b y p ro v id in g a
W ith in
fire enclosure
a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 8 .
fire enclosure, combustible materials
th e
th a t d o
n o t c o m p ly w ith
th e
fla m m a b ility
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t s s h a l l c o m p l y w it h t h e f l a m m a b i l i t y t e s t o f C l a u s e S .1
be
m ade
V-2 class material, VTM-2 class material
of
or
or
HF-2 class foamed material.
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
-
par t s w ith a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3;
-
par t s w ith a m a s s o f
-
supplies,
-
p a r t s t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d t o h a v e p a r t i c u l a r p r o p e r t i e s in o r d e r t o p e r f o r m i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n s ,
combustible material
consumable materials,
o f le s s th a n 4 g;
m e d ia a n d re c o rd in g m a te ria ls ;
s u c h a s s y n t h e t ic r u b b e r r o lle r s , in k tu b e s a n d m a te r ia l r e q u ir in g o p tic a l c h a r a c t e r is t ic s ;
-
g e a r s , c a m s , b e lts , b e a r in g s a n d o t h e r p a rts th a t w o u ld c o n tr ib u t e n e g lig ib le fu e l to a fire ,
in c lu d in g , la b e ls , m o u n t in g fe e t, k e y c a p s , k n o b s a n d th e lik e ; a n d
-
t u b i n g fo r a ir o r flu id s y s te m s , c o n ta in e r s fo r p o w d e r s o r liq u id s a n d fo a m e d
p la s tic p a rts ,
HB75 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f
o r HB40 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f
o r HBF class foamed material o r p a s s t h e g l o w - w i r e t e s t a t 5 5 0
p ro v id e d th a t th e y a re o f
th e
m a te ria l
th e
is < 3 m m ,
m a t e r i a l is > 3 m m ,
°C
a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 .
A
fire enclosure
is n o t n e c e s s a r y f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g c o m p o n e n t s a n d m a t e r i a l s :
-
wi r e in s u la tio n a n d tu b in g c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .5 .1 ;
-
components,
in c lu d in g c o n n e c to r s , c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 6 .4 .8 .2 .1 , a n d th a t
fire enclosure;
f i l l a n o p e n i n g in a
-
pl ugs
and
c o n n e c to rs
fo rm in g
p a rt
of
a
power
s u p p ly
co rd
or
in te rc o n n e c tin g
c a b le
c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .4 .9 , G .4 .1 a n d C la u s e G .7 ;
-
m o t o r s c o m p ly in g w ith G .5 .4 ; a n d
-
t r a n s f o r m e r s c o m p ly in g w ith G .5 .3 .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the material data sheets or by test, or both.
6.4.7
Separation of combustible materials from a PIS
6.4.7.1
W hen
General
re q u ire d ,
materials,
in
th e
m in im u m
o r d e r to
re d u c e
s e p a ra tio n
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
lik e lih o o d
o f s u s ta in e d
b e tw e e n
fla m in g
a
PIS
and
or sp re a d
combustible
o f fire ,
m ay
a c h ie v e d b y e ith e r s e p a ra tio n b y d is ta n c e (6 .4 .7 .2 ) o r s e p a ra tio n b y a fire b a rrie r (6 .4 .7 .3 ).
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
be
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-153-
fire enclosure o r a f i r e b a r r i e r o f combustible material
arcing PIS o r 5 m m o f a resistive PIS a r e g i v e n i n 6 . 4 . 8 . 4 .
A d d itio n a l re q u ire m e n ts fo r a
w ith in
13 m m o f an
6.4.7.2
Separation by distance
Combustible material， e x c e p t t h e m a t e r i a l o n w h i c h t h e PIS i s m o u n t e d , s h a l l
f r o m a n arcing PIS o r a resistive PIS a c c o r d i n g t o F i g u r e 3 7 a n d F i g u r e 3 8 .
Base
lo c a te d
m a te ria l
of
p rin te d
b o a rd s,
on
w h ic h
V-1 class material, VTM-1 class material
or
arcing PIS i s l o c a t e d , s h a l l
HF-1 class foamed material.
an
be s e p a ra te d
be
m ade
of
Figure 37 - Minimum separation requirements from a PIS
NOTE
-
This figure can be used for:
an arcing PIS that consists of tracks or areas on printed boards;
the resistive PIS areas of components. Measurements are made from the nearest power dissipating element
of the component involved. If in practice it is not readily possible to define the power dissipating part, then the
outer surface of the component is used.
Figure 38 - Extended separation requirements from a PIS
W hen
th e
d is ta n c e
b e tw e e n
a
PIS
and
F ig u re 3 7 a n d F ig u re 3 8 a s a p p lic a b le , th e
-
h a v e a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ;
-
have a m ass of
-
c o m p l y w ith :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
combustible material
combustible materials i s l e s s
combustible materials s h a l l :
o f le s s th a n 4 g; o r
th a n
s p e c ifie d
in
- 154 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
•
th e fla m m a b ility re q u ir e m e n ts o f th e re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r
•
be
m ade
material
6.4.7.3
V-1 class material, VTM-1 class material
of
Separation by a fire barrier
s h a ll
be
b a r r i e r a s d e f i n e d in 6 . 4 . 8 . 2 . 1
sam e
HF-1 class foamed
o r c o m p l y w i t h I E C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 . S e v e r i t i e s a r e i d e n t i f i e d in C l a u s e S . 2 .
Combustible material
P rin te d
or
b o a rd s a re
b o a rd .
a g a in s t a n
s e p a ra te d
b o a rd s
arcing PIS
an
arcing PIS
or a
resistive PIS
b y a fire
(s e e F ig u re 3 9 ).
n o t c o n s id e re d
P rin te d
fro m
to b e a fire
c o m p ly in g
w ith
b a rrie r a g a in s t a n
6 .4 .8
m ay
be
arcing PIS
c o n s id e re d
to
be
lo c a te d
a
fire
o n th e
b a rrie r
lo c a te d o n a d iffe re n t b o a r d
P r in te d b o a r d s c a n b e c o n s id e r e d to b e a fire b a r r ie r a g a in s t a
resistive PIS
p ro v id e d th a t th e
fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s a re m e t:
-
t h e p r in te d b o a rd s h a ll:
•
c o m p l y w i t h t h e f l a m m a b i l i t y t e s t o f C l a u s e S . 1 a s u s e d in t h e a p p l i c a t i o n ; o r
•
be
m ade
of
V-1 class material， VTM-1 class material
or
HF-1 class foamed
material;
-
wi t h i n th e re s tric te d
v o lu m e , c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll m e e t th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e
re le v a n t c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd
and
n o o th e r m a te ria ls
ra te d
s h a ll b e m o u n te d o n th e s a m e s id e o f a p rin te d b o a rd a s th e
-
within
th e
c o n d u c to rs
re s tric te d
v o lu m e ,
(e x c e p t fo r th e
th e
p rin te d
c o n d u c to rs
b o a rd
s h a ll
th a t s u p p ly
th e
V-1 class material
resistive PIS; a n d
le s s th a n
have
no
PS2
c o n d u c to rs
or
PS3
c irc u it u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n ).
T h is
a p p lie s to a n y s id e o f th e p rin te d b o a rd a s w e ll a s th e in n e r la y e r o f th e p rin te d b o a rd .
Diverted
cone
/
Barrier
IEC
Figure 39a - Illustration showing
an angled barrier
Figure 39b - Illustration showing
a horizontal barrier
NOTE 1 The volume of the flame is nearly constant; consequently the shape of the flame is dependent upon
the position and the shape of the barrier. Different shapes of barriers might give different flame shapes and
result in a different restricted area and separation requirements.
NOTE 2 Dimensions are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38 but, except as given in 6.4.8.4, the distance of
the barrier from the PIS is not significant.
Figure 39 - Deflected separation requirements from a PIS when a fire barrier is used
6.4.7.4
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement or both.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
6.4.8
Fire enclosures and fire barriers
6.4.8.1
The
General
safeguard
fire th ro u g h th e
The
The
-155-
fu n c tio n o f th e
enclosure
fire enclosure
fire enclosure
a d d itio n to th a t o f a
6.4.8.2
fire enclosure
o r b a rrie r.
m a y be th e o v e ra ll
need
a n d t h e f ir e b a r r i e r is to i m p e d e t h e s p r e a d o f
enclosure,
o r it m a y b e w i t h i n t h e o v e r a l l
n o t h a v e a n e x c lu s iv e fu n c tio n , b u t m a y p ro v id e
enclosure.
o th e r fu n c tio n s
in
fire enclosure.
Fire enclosure and fire barrier material properties
6.4.8.2.1
Requirements for a fire barrier
A fire b a r r ie r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 .
T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p l y p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e m a t e r i a l is :
-
made of
non-combustible material
-
made of
V-1 class material
6.4.8.2.2
or
(fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r
VTM-1 class material.
Requirements for a fire enclosure
F o r c irc u its w h e re th e a v a ila b le p o w e r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W
(s e e 6 .4 .1 ), a
fire enclosure
s h a ll:
-
c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e S . 1 ; o r
-
be m ade of
non-combustible material
-
be m ade of
V-1 class material.
(fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r
F o r c irc u its w h e re th e a v a ila b le p o w e r e x c e e d s 4 0 0 0 W f a
-
c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e S .5 ; o r
-
be m a d e o f
non-combustible material
-
be m a d e o f
5VA class material
M a te ria l
fo r
c o m p o n e n ts
t h a t fill
or
an
fire enclosure
s h a ll:
(fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r
5VB class material.
o p e n in g
in
a
fire enclosure
or th a t
is
in te n d e d
to
be
m o u n t e d in s u c h o p e n i n g s h a l l :
-
c o m p l y w ith th e fla m m a b ility r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r
-
be m a d e o f
-
c o m p l y w ith C la u s e S .1 .
6.4.8.2.3
V-1 class material;
or
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection of applicable data sheets or test.
The m a te ria l fla m m a b ility c la s s is checked for the thinnest significant thickness used.
6.4.8.3
Constructional requirements for a fire enclosure and a fire barrier
6.4.8.3.1
O p e n in g s
Fire enclosure and fire barrier openings
in
a
fire enclosure
p ro d u c ts o f c o m b u s tio n
o u ts id e o f th e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o r in a f i r e
p a s s in g
enclosure
b a r r ie r s h a ll
th ro u g h th e o p e n in g s
be of such
d im e n s io n s
a re n o t lik e ly to ig n ite
o r o n th e s id e o f a fire b a r r ie r o p p o s ite to th e
PIS.
th a t fire
and
m a te ria l o n th e
- 156 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
PIS
T h e o p e n in g s to w h ic h th e s e p r o p e r tie s a p p ly a re re la tiv e to th e s ite o r lo c a tio n o f th e
of
combustible materials.
and
T h e lo c a tio n s o f o p e n in g s r e la tiv e to th e fla m e p r o p e r t y a re s h o w n
in F i g u r e 4 1 a n d F i g u r e 4 2 .
R e g a rd le s s o f th e
v e rtic a l.
W h e re
PIS i s a l w a y s
normal operating condition o r i e n t a t i o n s ,
e q u ip m e n t o rie n ta tio n , th e fla m e o rie n ta tio n
th e
e q u ip m e n t
has
tw o
or
m o re
p ro p e rty o f th e
o p e n in g p r o p e r tie s a p p ly to e a c h p o s s ib le o r ie n ta tio n .
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r th e
D e te rm in a tio n
a cco rd a n ce
of
w ith
to p
fire enclosure
o p e n in g s ,
F ig u re 4 0 ,
s id e
ta k in g
secondary lithium battery
of a
o p e n in g s
in to
account
and
a ll
b o tto m
p o s s ib le
a r e s p e c i f i e d in
o p e n in g s
s h a ll
o rie n ta tio n s
of
be
use
M.4.3.
done
(se e
in
a ls o
4 .1 .6 ).
Enclosure top
Enclosure top
5C
s u c d o pjg
s u
cd
op
!
o)
o)
(D
a)
(l>
a)
a)
Enclosure
bottom
Enclosure
bottom
^5C
Figure 40 - Determination of top, bottom and side openings
6.4.8.3.2
Fire barrier dimensions
T h e e d g e s o f th e fire b a r rie r s s h a ll e x te n d b e y o n d th e r e s tr ic te d v o lu m e (s e e F ig u re 3 9 ).
6.4.8.3.3
Top openings and top opening properties
T o p o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a
fire enclosure
s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s o n a h o r iz o n ta l s u r fa c e o r
a n y s u rfa c e w ith a n in c lin a tio n o f m o re th a n 5 d e g r e e s fro m
PIS
lo c a te d
in a P S 3 c i r c u i t a s s h o w n
s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s a b o v e a
PIS
in
F ig u re 4 1 . T o p
v e rtic a l (s e e F ig u re 4 0 ) a b o v e a
o p e n in g
p ro p e rtie s o f a fire
b a rrie r
a s s h o w n in F i g u r e 4 1 .
Top openings that fall within the volume defined in Figure 41 shall comply with Clause S.2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
- 157 -
IEC
NOTE
Dimensions of the cone are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38.
Figure 41 - Top openings
No test is required provided that the openings do not exceed:
- 5
mm in any dimension; or
- 1
mm in width regardless of length.
6.4.8.3.4
B o tto m
Bottom openings and bottom opening properties
o p e n in g
p ro p e rtie s o f a
h o riz o n ta l s u rfa c e
o r a n y o th e r s u rfa c e
v e rtic a l (s e e F ig u re 4 0 ) b e lo w a
o n o th e r s u rfa c e s b e lo w th e
B o tto m
o p e n in g s
a re
th o s e
PIS
PIS
w ith
a n d a fire b a r r ie r s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s o n a
an
in c lin a tio n
o f m o re th a n
5 d e g re e s fro m
th e
l o c a t e d i n a P S 3 c i r c u i t a s s h o w n in F i g u r e 4 2 . O p e n i n g s
s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d s id e o p e n in g s a n d 6 .4 .8 .3 .5 a p p lie s .
o p e n in g s
e x te n d in g in d e fin ite ly b e lo w th e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
fire enclosure
PIS.
b e lo w
a
PIS
and
w ith in
30 m m
d ia m e te r
c y lin d e r
- 158 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
With respect to the potential
ignition source, bottom openings
are any horizontal openings within
the volume shown
(2 mm around the cone)
Potential ignition source
IEC
NOTE
Dimensions of the cone are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38.
Figure 42 - Bottom openings
B o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e S .3 .
N o t e s t is n e c e s s a r y p r o v i d e d t h a t o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s is m e t :
a)
b)
th e b o tto m o p e n in g s d o n o t e x c e e d :
- 3
m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ; o r
- 1
m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h .
u n d e r c o m p o n e n ts
and
p a rts
class foamed material
or
m e e tin g
under
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
c o m p o n e n ts
th a t
fo r
V-1 class material,
pass
th e
n e e d le -fla m e
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 u s in g a 3 0 s fla m e a p p lic a tio n , b o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll n o t e x c e e d :
c)
- 6
m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ; o r
- 2
m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h .
c o m p l y w i t h a b a f f l e p l a t e c o n s t r u c t i o n a s i l l u s t r a t e d in F i g u r e 4 3 .
Not less
than 2 ^
Baffle plates (may be above or below
the bottom of a fire enclosure)
X
Bottom of fire enclosure
IEC
Figure 43 - Baffle plate construction
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
or
HF-1
te s t
of
旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 1 :2 0 1 8
-
◎
旧C 2 0 1 8
-159-
Fixed equipment i n t e n d e d t o b e
r e q u i r e a fire enclosure b o t t o m .
flo o r
s ta n d in g
Such
on
e q u ip m e n t
a
n o n -c o m b u s tib le
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
s u rfa c e
in
does
a cco rd a n ce
not
w ith
C l a u s e F .5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t 1a : n o t a v a ila b le
-
e l e m e n t 2: “ R IS K O F F IR E ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3: o p tio n a l
-
e l e m e n t 4: “ In s ta ll o n ly o n c o n c r e te o r o th e r n o n - c o m b u s tib le s u r f a c e ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
6.4.8.3.5
Side openings and side opening properties
S id e o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a
fire enclosure
a n d a fire b a r rie r s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s th a t a re
o n a v e r tic a l (± 5 d e g r e e s ) s id e s u r fa c e .
W h e r e a p o rtio n o f th e s id e o f a
a n g le
in
F ig u re 4 4 ,
enclosures
th e
fire enclosure
lim ita tio n s
in
fa lls w ith in th e a re a in d ic a te d b y th e 5 d e g re e
6 .4 .8 .3 .4
on
s iz e s
of
o p e n in g s
in
b o tto m s
of
fire
a ls o a p p ly to th is p o rtio n o f th e s id e .
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement. Except for that portion of the side of
a fire e n c lo s u re that is subject to the requirements of 6.4.8.3.5 (see above paragraph), there
are no other considerations for side openings.
NOTE
Limitations affecting the size of side openings are contained in other clauses of this document.
15 mm
PIS
15 mm
•
No fire
opening
requirements
apply
5° 5°
^---------------------------
• 6.4.8.3.4 applies
No fire
opening
requirements
apply
No fire opening
| 6.4.8.3.4 applies
requirements apply
ie c
The PIS can be either a point, a component or a trace on a printed board.
Figure 44 - PIS trajectory downwards
6.4.8.3.6
Integrity of a fire enclosure
If p a r t o f a
person,
a)
fire enclosure
c o n s is ts
o f a d o o r o r c o v e r th a t c a n
be opened
by an
ordinary
th e d o o r o r c o v e r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith r e q u ir e m e n t s a ), b), o r c ):
th e d o o r o r c o v e r s h a ll b e in te rlo c k e d a n d c o m p ly w ith th e
safety interlock
re q u ire m e n ts
ordinary person,
s h a ll c o m p ly
in A n n e x K .
b)
a d o o r o r co ve r,
in te n d e d
to
b e ro u tin e ly
w ith b o th o f th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
opened
b y th e
- 160 -
it
-
s h a ll
not
person;
and
it
be
s h a ll
be
re m o v a b le
p ro v id e d
fro m
w ith
a
o th e r
旧C
p a rts
m eans
to
of
fire enclosure
th e
keep
it
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
c lo s e d
by
ordinary
th e
normal operating
d u rin g
conditions.
c)
ordinary person, s u c h a s f o r t h e
instructional safeguard i s p r o v i d e d
a d o o r o r c o v e r in te n d e d o n ly fo r o c c a s io n a l u s e b y th e
in s ta lla tio n
o f a c c e s s o rie s ,
m ay
be re m o v a b le
if a n
fo r c o rre c t re m o v a l a n d re in s ta lla tio n o f th e d o o r o r c o v e r.
6.4.8.3.7
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection of applicable data sheets andf where necessary, by test.
6.4.8.4
Separation of a PIS from a fire enclosure and a fire barrier
A fire enclosure
o r fire b a r rie r m a d e o f
combustible material
-
h a v e a m in im u m d is ta n c e o f 13 m m to a n
-
h a v e a m in im u m d is ta n c e o f 5 m m to a
arcing PIS;
s h a ll:
and
resistive PIS.
S m a lle r d is ta n c e s a re a llo w e d p ro v id e d th a t th e p a rt o f th e
fire enclosure
o r fire b a r r ie r w ith in
th e r e q u ire d s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e c o m p lie s w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
-
fire
t he
enclosure
or
fire
b a rrie r
m e e ts
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 . S e v e r itie s a re id e n tifie d
o r fire
b a r rie r m a te ria l
s h a ll
not have
th e
n e e d le -fla m e
te s t
a c c o rd in g
fire enclosure
in C l a u s e S . 2 . A f t e r t h e t e s t , t h e
fo rm e d
any
h o le s
th a t a re
to
b ig g e r th a n
a llo w e d
in
6 .4 .8 .3 .3 o r 6 .4 .8 .3 .4 a s a p p ro p ria te ; or
fire enclosure
-
t he
-
t h e f i r e b a r r i e r is m a d e o f
6.4.9
is m a d e o f
V-0 class material;
V-0 class material
or
or
VTM-0 class material.
Flammability of an insulating liquid
An
insulating liquid:
-
s h a l l h a v e a n a u t o i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e n o t l e s s t h a n 3 0 0 ° C a s d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith IS O 871 o r s im ila r n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd (fo r e x a m p le A S T M
-
shall
n o t fla s h ;
o r s h a ll
w ith
IS O 2 7 1 9
u s in g
e x a m p le
ASTM
D 9 3 );
have
a fla s h p o in t h ig h e r th a n
P e n s k y -M a rte n s
or
by
th e
c lo s e d
S m a ll
cup
S c a le
m e th o d
c lo s e d
IS O 3 6 7 9 (o r n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd s , fo r e x a m p le A S T M
135
cup
E 6 5 9 -8 4 ); and
°C
d e te rm in e d
(o r
a
n a tio n a l
m e th o d
D3828 and ASTM
If t r a n s f o r m e r o il, s i l i c o n o il, m i n e r a l o il o r o t h e r s i m i l a r o il is u s e d a s
in a c c o r d a n c e
in
s ta n d a rd ,
a cco rd a n ce
fo r
w ith
D 3 2 7 8 ).
insulating liquid， t h e
o il
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e fla s h p o in t, fire p o in t o r fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n t s o f th e a p p lic a b le IE C
s t a n d a r d . S e e T a b le 3 4 fo r a lis t o f th e IE C s ta n d a r d s .
The
te m p e ra tu re
fla s h p o in t o f th e
o f c o m p o n e n ts
in
c o n ta c t w ith
th e
insulating liquid
s h a ll
not exceed
th e
insulating liquid.
Table 34 - List of applicable IEC standards regarding insulating liquids
IE C 6 0 2 9 6
Fluids fo r e le ctrote chn ica l applications - Unused m ine ra l insu la tin g oils fo r transform ers and
sw itchgear
IE C 6 0 8 3 6
S pecifications fo r unused silicone insu la tin g liquids fo r e le ctrote chn ica l purposes
IE C 6 1 0 3 9
C lassification o f insu la tin g liquids
IE C 6 1 0 9 9
Insulating liquids
IE C 6 0 0 7 6 - 1 4
P ow er transform ers - Part 14: Liquid-im m ersed p o w e r transform ers using high-tem perature
insulation m aterials
IE C T S 6 2 3 3 2 -1
E le ctrica l insulation system s (EIS) - Therm al evaluation o f com bined liq u id and so lid
com ponents - P art 1: G eneral requirem ents
Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission
-
S pecifications fo r unused synthetic organic esters fo r e le ctrica l purposes
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 161 -
Compliance is checked by the available data or by inspection and tests as applicable.
6.5
Internal and external wiring
6.5.1
General requirements
In P S 2 c i r c u i t s o r P S 3 c i r c u i t s , t h e i n s u l a t i o n o n i n t e r n a l o r e x t e r n a l w i r i n g s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t
m e th o d s d e s c r ib e d b e lo w , o r th e e q u iv a le n t.
For
c o n d u c to rs
w ith
a
c ro s s -s e c tio n a l
a re a
of
0 ,5
mm2
or
g re a te r,
th e
te s t
m e th o d s
in
0 ,5 m m 2,
th e
te s t
m e th o d s
in
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 a n d IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 3 s h a ll b e u s e d .
For
c o n d u c to rs
w ith
a
c ro s s -s e c tio n a l
a re a
of
le s s
th a n
IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 2 - 2 s h a ll b e u s e d .
F o r b o th in te rn a l a n d e x te r n a l w irin g , th e te s t m e th o d
d e s c rib e d
in I E C T S 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 1
m ay
b e u s e d i n s t e a d o f t h e t e s t m e t h o d s in I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 , I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 3 o r I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 2 - 2 .
NOTE
Wire complying with UL 2556 VW-1 is considered to comply with these requirements.
The insulated conductor or cable shall be acceptable if it complies with the recommended
performance requirements of the applicable IEC 60332 standards or with the requirements of
IEC TS 60695-11-21.
6.5.2
Requirements for interconnection to building wiring.
E q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
th e
o u tp u t
cu rre n t
o v e rh e a tin g ,
e q u ip m e n t
to p ro v id e
to
a
under any
s h a ll
not
v a lu e
p o w e r o v e r th e w irin g
s y s te m
th a t
dam age
e x te rn a l
exceed
a
does
lo a d
not
cause
c o n d itio n .
cu rre n t
lim it
The
th a t
is
to r e m o te e q u ip m e n t s h a ll lim it
to
m a x im u m
s u ita b le
th e
w irin g
c o n tin u o u s
fo r
th e
s y s te m ,
due
c u rre n t fro m
m in im u m
w ire
to
th e
gauge
s p e c i f i e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .
NOTE This wiring is not usually controlled by the equipment installation instructions, since the wiring is often
installed independent of the equipment installation.
P S 2 c irc u its o r P S 3
L P S to
c irc u its th a t p ro v id e
external circuits
pow er and
th a t a re
in te n d e d
to
b e c o m p a tib le
(s e e A n n e x Q ) s h a ll h a v e th e ir o u tp u t p o w e r lim ite d
w ith
to v a lu e s th a t
re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n w ith in b u ild in g w irin g .
E x te rn a l p a ire d c o n d u c to r c a b le
c irc u its , s u c h a s th o s e d e s c rib e d
in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s
1
a n d 2 h a v in g a m in im u m w ir e d ia m e t e r o f 0 ,4 m m , s h a ll h a v e th e c u r r e n t lim ite d to 1 ,3 A .
EXAMPLE Time/current characteristics of type gD and type gN fuses specified in IEC 60269-2 comply with the
above limit. Type gD or type gN fuses rated 1 A f would meet the 1,3 A current limit.
Compliance is checked by test， inspection and where necessary by the requirements of
Annex Q.
6.5.3
Internal wiring for socket-outlets
In te rn a l
w irin g
e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
fo r
s o c k e t-o u tle ts
have
a
n o m in a l
or
c ro s s -s e c tio n a l
in c lu d in g th e c o n d itio n o f fo o tn o te a.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a p p lia n c e
o u tle ts
a re a
p ro v id in g
at
le a s t
as
mains
power
s p e c ifie d
in
to
o th e r
T a b le G .7 ,
- 162 6.6
The
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Safeguards against fire due to the connection of additional equipment
p o w e r d e liv e re d
c o m p ly w ith
C la u s e
to c o n n e c te d
Q .1 ,
u n le s s
e q u ip m e n t o r a c c e s s o r ie s s h a ll b e lim ite d to P S 2 o r s h a ll
it is l i k e l y t h a t t h e
c o n n e c te d
e q u ip m e n t o r a c c e s s o ry
a ls o
c o m p lie s w ith th is d o c u m e n t.
T h is r e q u ir e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p ly to th e a u d io o u tp u t o f a u d io a m p lifie r s .
EXAMPLE Connected equipment or accessories that are likely to comply with this document include a scanner, a
mouse, a keyboard, a DVD drive, a CD ROM drive or a joystick.
Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement.
7
Injury caused by hazardous substances
7.1
General
T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y d u e to e x p o s u r e to
b e p r o v id e d w ith th e
safeguards
hazardous substances,
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 7.
NOTE 1 These safeguards are not intended to be the only means to reduce the likelihood of such injury.
NOTE 2 The classification of other possible hazardous substances not addressed in Clause 7 is not covered by
this
document.
In
many
regions
of
the
world
different
legislation
applies,
such
as
Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) and Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction
of Chemicals (REACH).
7.2
Reduction of exposure to hazardous substances
hazardous substances s h a l l
hazardous substances s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d b y
substances. C o n t a i n e r s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t l y r o b u s t
The
e xp o su re
to
be
re d u ce d .
u s in g
R e d u c tio n
c o n ta in m e n t
of
of
e xp o su re
to
hazardous
th e
a n d s h a ll n o t b e d a m a g e d o r d e g r a d e d b y
th e c o n te n ts o v e r th e life tim e o f th e p ro d u c t.
Compliance is checked by:
-
the examination of the effects the chemical has on the material of the container; and
-
any relevant tests of Annex T according to 4.4.3, following which there shall be no leakage
from the container.
7.3
Ozone exposure
F o r e q u ip m e n t th a t p ro d u c e s
th a t p re c a u tio n
s h a ll b e ta k e n
o z o n e , th e in s ta lla tio n
and
o p e ra tin g
to e n s u re th a t th e c o n c e n tra tio n
in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll in d ic a te
of ozone
is l im i t e d
to a s a fe
v a lu e .
NOTE 1 Currently, the typical long term exposure limit for ozone is considered to be 0,1 x 10~6 (0,2 mg/m3)
calculated as an 8 h time-weighted average concentration. Time-weighted average is the average level of exposure
over a given time period.
NOTE 2
Ozone is heavier than air.
Compliance is checked by inspection of instructions or accompanying documents.
7.4
Use of personal safeguards or personal protective equipment (PPE)
safeguards, s u c h a s
safeguard a n d i t s u s e s h a l l
W h e re
c o n ta in m e n t
of
a
be
in
th e
s p e c ifie d
c h e m ic a l,
a re
in s tru c tio n s
not
th a t
p ra c tic a l,
a re
p ro v id e d
e q u ip m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection of instructions or accompanying documents.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a
personal
w ith
th e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
7.5
- 163 -
Use of instructional safeguards and instructions
hazardous substance
W h e re a
s p e c ifie d
in I S O 7 0 1 0
and
is c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g a n i n j u r y ,
in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll
b e a p p lie d
instructional safeguards
as
t o t h e e q u i p m e n t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
C la u s e F .5 .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f instructions or accompanying documents.
7.6
Batteries and their protection circuits
Batteries
8
a n d th e ir p r o te c tio n c ir c u its s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x M .
Mechanically-caused injury
8.1
General
T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y d u e to e x p o s u r e to m e c h a n ic a l h a z a r d s , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e
p ro v id e d w ith th e
NOTE 1
safeguards
s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e
8.
In some cases, the person is the source of the kinetic energy.
NOTE 2 Where not specifically mentioned in Clause 8， the words “products” and “equipment” also cover carts ，
stands and carriers used with these products or equipment.
8.2
Mechanical energy source classifications
8.2.1 General classification
V a r i o u s c a t e g o r i e s o f m e c h a n i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e s a r e g i v e n in T a b l e 3 5 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 164 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 35 - Classification for various categories of mechanical energy sources
Line
C ategory
MS1
MS2
1
Sharp edges and
corners
Does not cause pain or
injury b
Does not cause injury b but
may be painful
May cause injury
2
Moving parts
Does not cause pain or
injury b
Does not cause injury b but
may be painful
May cause injury
Plastic fan blades a
3a
3b
N
十
See Figure 46
15 000
Other fan blades a
N
丨
See Figure 45
15 000
'
。
K
2 400
尺
叫
2 400
N
44 000
N
22 000
MS3
(
K
^
' 7 200 '
丨
尺
^
> MS2
叫
> MS2
1 3 600 _
4
Loosening,
exploding or
imploding parts
NA
NA
See d
5
Equipment mass f
< 7 kg
< 25 kg
> 25 kg
6
Wall/ceiling or other
structure m ountf
Equipment mass < 1 kg
mounted < 2 m e
Equipment mass > 1 kg
mounted < 2 m e
All equipment mounted
> 2 m
10—
7 (w r 2 A^2), where w is the mass (kg) of the moving
part of the fan assembly (blade, shaft and rotor), r is the radius (mm) of the fan blade from centre line of the
motor (shaft) to the tip of the outer area likely to be contacted, ;V is the rotational speed (rpm) of the fan
blade.
In the end product, the fan maximum operational voltage can be different than the rated voltage of the fan
and this difference should be taken into account.
b
The phrase “Does not cause injury” means that, according to experience and/or basic safety standards, a
doctor or hospital emergency attention is not needed.
The phrase “May cause injury” means that， according to experience and/or basic safety standards, a doctor
or hospital emergency attention may be needed.
The following equipment constructions are examples considered MS3:
一
CRTs having a maximum face dimension exceeding 160 mm; and
一
lamps in which the pressure exceeds 0,2 MPa when cold or 0,4 MPa when operating.
This classification can only be used if the manufacturer’s instructions state that the equipment is only
suitable for mounting at heights < 2 m.
Mass of supplies, consumable materials, media or the like that may be contained in the equipment shall be
included in the calculation of the equipment mass. The additional mass of such items is determined by the
manufacturer.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 165 -
25 000
20 000
15 0 0 0
MS3
|
10 000
MS2
MS1
5 000
o
0
000
2 000
1 500
尺
2 500
3 000
3 500
4 000
-factor
IEC
Figure 45 - Limits for moving fan blades made of non-plastic materials
44 000
40 000•
36 000
32 000.
28 000
M 33
看
24 000.
CL
CH
20 ooo -i
-
16 000 -I
M$2
12 000 -I
8 000
-
4 000-
M$1
0
0
1 000
2 000
3 000
4 000
5 000
欠 -factor
6 000
7 000
8 000
IEC
Figure 46 - Limits for moving fan blades made of plastic materials
8.2.2
MS1
MS1 i s a c l a s s 1 m e c h a n i c a l
normal operating conditions
u n d e r single fault conditions.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
e n e rg y
and
so u rce
w ith
le v e ls
not
e x c e e d in g
abnormal operating conditions
and
MS1
lim its
n o t e x c e e d in g
under
MS2
- 166 8.2.3
MS2
MS3
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
MS2
is
a
c la s s
2
m e c h a n ic a l
e n e rg y
normal operating conditions,
conditions, b u t i s n o t M S 1 .
8.2.4
旧C
so u rce
abnormal
w ith
le v e ls
not
operating
e x c e e d in g
conditions，
MS2
and
lim its
under
single
fault
MS3
is a c l a s s
3 m e c h a n ic a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w ith
le v e ls e x c e e d in g
operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions
or
MS2
lim its
under
single fault conditions,
normal
or any
m e c h a n ic a l e n e rg y s o u rc e d e c la re d to b e tre a te d a s M S 3 b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
8.3
Safeguards against mechanical energy sources
E x c e p t a s g iv e n
b e lo w ,
instructed persons
and
safeguard r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p a r t s accessible
skilled persons a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .
instructional safeguard
person o r f o r M S 3 t h a t i s n o t
An
s h a ll
b e p ro v id e d
o b v io u s to a
fo r M S 2
to
ordinary persons,
t h a t is n o t o b v i o u s
to a n
instructed
skilled person.
O th e r M S 3 p a rts n o t a c tiv e ly b e in g s e r v ic e d s h a ll b e lo c a te d o r g u a r d e d s o th a t u n in te n tio n a l
c o n ta c t w ith
such
p a rts d u rin g
s e rv ic e o p e ra tio n s
is a n
u n l i k e l y r e s u l t in t h e
skilled person
in v o lu n ta r y re c o ilin g fro m c la s s 2 o r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s b e in g s e r v ic e d .
8.4
Safeguards against parts with sharp edges and corners
8.4.1 Requirements
Safeguards t h a t
accessible a r e a s
re d u ce
th e
lik e lih o o d
o f in ju ry
by
p a rts
w ith
sh a rp
edges
and
co rn e rs
in
o f th e e q u ip m e n t a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e s s h a ll b e d o n e a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , lin e 1.
W h e r e a s h a r p e d g e o r c o r n e r c l a s s i f i e d a s M S 2 o r M S 3 is r e q u i r e d t o b e
accessible
fo r th e
fu n c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t:
-
a n y p o t e n t ia l e x p o s u r e s h a ll n o t b e life t h r e a t e n in g ; a n d
-
t h e s h a r p e d g e o r c o r n e r s h a ll b e o b v io u s to a n
ordinary person
or an
instructed person
w hen exposed; and
-
t h e s h a r p e d g e s h a ll b e g u a r d e d a s m u c h a s p ra c tic a b le ; a n d
-
an
instructional safeguard
s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f u n i n t e n t i o n a l c o n t a c t in
a c c o r d a n c e w it h C l a u s e F .5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
^
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ S h a rp e d g e s ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
-
e l e m e n t 4:
“ D o n o t to u c h ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
8.4.2
~
\
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 4 3 ( 2 0 1 1 -0 1 )
Compliance criteria
Where a sharp edge or corner is required to be a c c e s s ib le for the function of the equipment,
compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
- 167 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Where a sharp edge or corner is not required to be a c c e s s ib le for the function of the
equipment compliance is checked by the relevant tests of Annex V. During and after the
application of the force, the sharp edge or corner shall not be a cce ssib le .
8.5
Safeguards against moving parts
8.5.1
Requirements
Safeguards
e x a m p le ,
th a t re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry c a u s e d
p in c h
p o in ts ,
m e s h in g
g e a rs
and
p a rts
b y m o v in g p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t (fo r
th a t
m ay
s ta rt
m o v in g
due
to
u n e x p e c te d
re s e ttin g o f a c o n tro l d e v ic e ) a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
P la s tic fa n b la d e s a re c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 3 a . O t h e r fa n b la d e s a re c la s s ifie d
a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 3 b . O t h e r m o v in g p a r ts a r e c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 2.
NOTE 1 The ability of a part to cause injury is not solely dependent upon the kinetic energy it possesses.
Consequently, the classification used in this document can only be based on typical experience and engineering
judgement.
NOTE 2 Examples of factors influencing the energy transfer to a body part include shape of the surface that
strikes the body part, elasticity, velocity and the mass of equipment and body part.
safety interlock
If a
MS1
safeguard,
accessible.
is u s e d a s
b e f o r e t h e p a r t is
U n le s s o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d , w h e re th e
th e e n e r g y o f th e m o v in g p a r t s h a ll b e r e d u c e d to
lik e lih o o d
e x is ts th a t fin g e rs , je w e lle ry ,
e tc ., c a n c o m e in to c o n ta c t w ith m o v in g M S 2 o r M S 3 p a rts , a n
c lo th in g ,
equipment safeguard
h a ir,
s h a ll b e
p r o v id e d to p r e v e n t e n tr y o f b o d y p a r ts o r e n t a n g le m e n t o f s u c h ite m s .
If a
m o v in g
MS2
p a r t is r e q u i r e d
to
be
accessible
ordinary person, t h e m o v i n g p a r t s h a l l b e
instructional safeguard a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 s h a l l
g u a rd e d
fu n c tio n
as
m uch
m o v in g
fo r th e
fu n c tio n
-
a n y e x p o s u r e s h a ll n o t b e life t h r e a t e n in g ; a n d
-
t h e m o v in g p a rt s h a ll b e o b v io u s w h e n e x p o s e d ; a n d
-
t h e m o v in g p a rt s h a ll b e g u a r d e d a s m u c h a s p r a c tic a b le ; a n d
-
an
-
a
instructional safeguard
m a n u a lly
a c tiv a te d
o f th e
as
e q u ip m e n t to
p ra c tic a b le
and
an
an
be used.
MS3 p a r t i s r e q u i r e d t o b e accessible
ordinary person o r a n instructed person:
If a
fo r th e
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t to
an
a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 s h a l l b e u s e d ; a n d
s to p p in g
d e v ic e
s h a ll
b e c le a rly
v is ib le
and
p la c e d
in a
p ro m in e n t
p o s itio n w ith in 7 5 0 m m o f th e M S 3 p a rt.
C o m p o n e n ts
o f th e
m a n u a lly
a c tiv a te d
s to p p in g
d e v ic e
s h a ll
be o f an
e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l
t y p e . A m a n u a l l y a c t iv a t e d s t o p p in g d e v ic e m a y c o n s is t o f:
•
a s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith
IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1
th a t
a
is
p ro v id e d
w ith
la tc h in g
a n d th a t m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x K a n d
ty p e
m e c h a n is m
m e e tin g
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
of
IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 , o r
•
a n e m e r g e n c y s t o p d e v i c e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 5 - 5 .
R e s ta rtin g
o f th e
m e c h a n ic a l
s y s te m
s h a ll
o n ly
be
p o s s ib le
by
in itia tin g
a
s ta rt c o n tro l
p ro c e d u re a fte r th e m a n u a lly a c tiv a te d s to p p in g d e v ic e h a s b e e n m a n u a lly re s e t.
M o v in g M S 3 p a rts :
-
t hat a re o n ly
-
where
th e
m o v e m e n t),
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
accessible
MS3
m o v in g
to a
p a rt
skilled person;
is
not
o b v io u s
and
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
a
d e v ic e
h a v in g
in te rm itte n t
- 168 instructional safeguard
s h a ll h a v e a n
lo c a te d ,
e n c lo s e d
or g u a rd e d
in s u c h
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 . U n l e s s t h e m o v i n g p a r t is a r r a n g e d ,
a way
th a t th e
p a r t s is u n l i k e l y , a s t o p p i n g d e v i c e s h a l l b e p l a c e d
p o s s ib ility o f c o n ta c t w ith
th e
m o v in g
in a c l e a r l y v i s i b l e a n d p r o m i n e n t p o s i t i o n
w ith in 7 5 0 m m o f th e M S 3 p a rt.
8.5.2
An
Instructional safeguard requirements
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t
w i t h a m o v i n g p a r t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 i s o p t i o n a l .
instructional safeguard
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
-
L--------- M
e l e m e n t 1a:
/ 〇
E C
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 6 ( 2 0 1 1 - 0 5 ) fo r m o v in g fa n b la d e s ; o r
^
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 ( 2 0 1 1 - 0 5 ) fo r o th e r m o v in g p a rts
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ M o v in g p a r ts ” o r “ M o v in g fa n b la d e ” a s a p p lic a b le , o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
-
e l e m e n t 4:
“Keep
fa n
b o d y p a rts a w a y fro m
b la d e s ” o r “ K e e p
body
m o v in g
p a rts
p a rts ” o r “ K e e p
o u t o f th e
m o tio n
b o d y p a r t s a w a y 1Yom
p a th ” a s a p p lic a b le ,
or
e q u iv a le n t te x t
ordinary person
equipment safeguard
instructional safeguard
D u rin g
-
d i s c o n n e c t th e
s e rv ic in g
c o n d itio n s , w h e re
p re v e n tin g
access
to
it i s n e c e s s a r y t o d e f e a t o r b y p a s s t h e
a
m o v in g
p a rt
c la s s ifie d
MS2,
as
an
s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to :
p o w e r so u rce
p rio r to
d e fe a tin g
o r b y p a s s in g
equipment safeguard;
th e
and
-
r e s t o r e th e
8.5.3
equipment safeguard
b e fo re re s to rin g p o w e r.
Compliance criteria
The accessibility o f moving parts shall be checked by inspection and, if necessary， be
evaluated according to the relevant parts o f Annex V.
8.5.4
Special categories of equipment containing moving parts
8.5.4.1
General
in
restricted access areas
(fo r e x a m p le , a d a ta c e n tre ), ty p ic a lly o f s u c h a s iz e th a t a p e rs o n
m a y e n te r c o m p le te ly , o r
C la u s e
8 .5 .4
a p p lie s to la rg e
s e lf-c o n ta in e d
e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d
m a y in s e r t a c o m p le te lim b o r h e a d in to a r e a s c o n ta in in g
h a z a rd o u s m o v in g
p a rts a n d w h e re
a p e r s o n is e x p e c t e d t o e n t e r t h e a r e a t o s e r v i c e o r o p e r a t e t h e e q u i p m e n t .
E q u ip m e n t c o v e re d
s y s te m s
th a t
use
e x a m p le , ta p e
b y th is
in te g ra l
p a ra g ra p h
h a za rd o u s
c a rtrid g e s , ta p e
a re a u to m a te d
m o v in g
p a rts
in fo rm a tio n
fo r th e
m a s s s to ra g e
h a n d lin g
c a s s e tte s , o p tic a l d is c s , e tc .) a n d
and
o f re co rd e d
re trie v a l
m e d ia
s im ila r fu n c tio n s
and
(fo r
la rg e
p rin te rs .
8.5.4.2
Equipment containing work cells with MS3 parts
8.5.4.2.1
Protection of persons in the work cell
normal operating conditions,
enclosure o f a work cell.
D u rin g
The
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
m o v in g
p a rts
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
in t h e
be
p ro v id e d
work cell.
w ith
accessible
n o M S 3 m o v in g p a rts s h a ll b e
safeguards
to
re d u ce
th e
O th e r c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s w ith in
ris k
o f in ju ry
a
work cell
at th e o u te r
due
to
MS3
s h a ll n o t b e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 169 -
accessible u n d e r normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions
single fault conditions.
and
EXAMPLES Safeguards include interlocks, barriers and awareness signals, together with designated procedures
and training.
NOTE 1
Some authorities may require installation of fire detection and extinguishing systems in work cells.
A c c e s s to a
work cell
o r a n y o f its c o m p a r t m e n t s s h a ll b e p r o t e c t e d b y e it h e r o f th e f o llo w in g
m e th o d s :
-
1 - Safety interlock m e t h o d . N o k e y o r tool i s n e e d e d t o
cell. Safety interlocks m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f A n n e x K s h a l l
a c c e s s t o t h e work cell w h i l e p o w e r i s a v a i l a b l e t o t h e M S 3
Method
c o m p a rtm e n t.
c lo s e d
and
P o w e r to th e
la tc h e d .
MS3
O p e n in g
work cell
c o n ta in in g
c o n ta in in g
MS3
MS3
m o v in g
m o v in g
o f th e
m o v in g
p a rts a n d
p a rts
s h a ll
in te rlo c k e d
p a rts ,
or
not be
access
an
access
b e p ro v id e d to p re v e n t
m o v in g
re s to re d
door
in to
door
work
g a in e n tr y to th e
p a rts
u n til th e
any
in
th a t
d o o rs
a re
c o m p a rtm e n t o f a
b e tw e e n
a
c o m p a rtm e n t
o n e th a t h a s b e e n d is a b le d , s h a ll a u to m a tic a lly in itia te
d is c o n n e c tio n o f th e s u p p ly to s u c h p a rts , a n d to r e d u c e to a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e w ith in
instructed person
2 s fo r an
ta k e s
lo n g e r th a n 2 s, th e n
skilled person. I f r e d u c t i o n
instructional safeguard s h a l l
or a
an
o f th e e n e r g y s o u r c e c la s s
b e p ro v id e d
in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith C la u s e F .5 .
-
tool s h a l l b e r e q u i r e d t o g a i n a n d c o n t r o l a c c e s s
t o t h e work cell, a n d a c c e s s t o t h e work cell s h a l l b e p r e v e n t e d w h i l e p o w e r i s a v a i l a b l e
t o t h e M S 3 m o v i n g p a r t s i n t h a t work cell. T h e o p e r a t i n g a n d s e r v i c i n g i n s t r u c t i o n s , a s
a p p r o p r i a t e , s h a l l s p e c i f y t h a t t h e k e y o r tool m u s t b e c a r r i e d b y t h e p e r s o n w h i l e i n t h e
work cell. W h e n t h e work cell c a n b e e n t e r e d c o m p l e t e l y c l o s i n g o f t h e d o o r w i t h o u t t h e
k e y o r tool s h a l l n o t r e s u l t i n t h e e q u i p m e n t b e i n g r e s t a r t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y .
Method 2 -
Key or
tool
m e th o d . A k e y o r
NOTE 2 The key or tool may be used as the means to remove power before access to the work cell or
compartment.
E x c e p t a s p e rm itte d
in 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 2 , i t s h a l l n o t b e p o s s i b l e t o s t a r t o r r e s t a r t t h e s y s t e m
u n t il a ll
r e le v a n t a c c e s s d o o rs a re c lo s e d a n d la tc h e d .
W h e re
it i s p o s s i b l e
in te rlo c k
w o u ld
s h a ll
be
to e n te r a
p ro v id e d
so
work cell
th a t th e
c o m p le te ly , a n a u to m a tic a lly a c tiv a te d
door
a llo w th e e q u ip m e n t to b e re s ta rte d .
cannot
be
c lo s e d
in a d v e rte n tly
It s h a l l b e p o s s i b l e t o o p e n
if th is
c lo s u re
a n y d o o r fro m
work cell w i t h o u t t h e u s e o f a k e y o r tool. T h e m e a n s o f o p e n i n g t h e
work cell s h a l l b e r e a d i l y i d e n t i f i a b l e a n d v i s i b l e , w h e t h e r t h e d o o r
th e
m e c h a n ic a l
d o o r fro m
is
open
in s id e
in s id e th e
or
c lo s e d ,
irre s p e c tiv e o f th e o p e ra tin g s ta tu s o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
D u r in g s e r v ic in g o f th e e q u ip m e n t, th e r e m a y b e a n e e d to e n e r g iz e th e e q u ip m e n t to a llo w fo r
a lig n m e n t,
e tc .
conditions,
do
In
th e
cases,
under
single fault conditions
or
abnormal operating
a d e q u a t e m e a n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to lim it th e m o v e m e n t o f t h e p a r ts s o t h a t t h e y
not becom e
fro m
such
M S3,
m o v in g
such
a s s e m b ly .
as
by e x te n d e d
Such
m eans
le s s th a n M S 3 u n d e r ra te d lo a d , m a x im u m
tra v e l o r b y h a v in g
s h a ll
be
c a p a b le
p a rts
o f lim itin g
d e ta c h
th e s e
and
b e e je c te d
m o v in g
s p e e d c o n d itio n s a n d a t m a x im u m
p a rts
to
e x te n s io n .
Compliance is checked by inspection, and， if necessary， by the tests of B.3 and BA. The
e n c lo s u re or compartment separation barriers shall contain any part that may become
detached during the test.
8.5.4.2.2
Access Protection Override
8.5.4.2.2.1
General
If it is n e c e s s a r y f o r a
interlock
fo r
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
access
skilled person
t o a work cell
to o v e r r id e a p r o te c tiv e
or
c o m p a rtm e n t,
an
m e c h a n is im
o v e rrid e
such
s y s te m
as a
safety
c o m p ly in g
w ith
- 170 C la u s e
s to p
K .4
s h a ll
s y s te m
be
s h a ll
p ro v id e d .
be
In a d d i t i o n , w h e n
p ro v id e d
in
旧C
an
a cco rd a n ce
o v e rrid e
w ith
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
s y s te m
8 .5 .4 .2 .3 ,
is u s e d ,
and
s h a ll
an
e m e rg e n c y
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
o p e ra tio n a l e n d u ra n c e re q u ire m e n ts o f 8 .5 .4 .2 .4 .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
8.5.4.2.2.2
Visual indicator
A s e t o f tw o o r m o re b rig h t fla s h in g
in d ic a to r s c o m p ly in g w ith
IE C 6 0 0 7 3 s h a ll o p e r a te u n d e r
th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :
a)
work cell
fo r a
o r c o m p a r tm e n t th a t c a n b e e n te re d c o m p le te ly to in d ic a te th e e q u ip m e n t
is b e i n g r e s t o r e d t o n o r m a l o p e r a t i o n a n d m o t i o n is p e n d i n g ; o r
b)
fo r a n y e q u ip m e n t w h e n
th e
i n t e r l o c k is o v e r r i d d e n
and
d riv e
p o w e r is a v a i l a b l e
to
MS3
m o v in g p a rts .
The
in d ic a to rs
c o m p a rtm e n t
m in im u m
c o n d itio n
s h a ll
and
be
a t th e
re a d ily
v is ib le
p o in t o f e n try .
at
any
F o r c o n d itio n
o f 10 s p rio r to m o v e m e n t o f a M S 3
a)
can
occur
w h ile
p o in t
c o n d itio n
b)
m o v in g
is
in
w ith in
a),
th e
in d ic a to rs
p a rt a lo n g
e ffe c t,
work cell
th e
th e re
th e
s h a ll
or
re le v a n t
o p e ra te
fo r a
m o s t s ig n ific a n t a x is .
s h a ll
be
a
change
of
If
lig h t
s e q u e n c i n g s u c h t h a t t h e c h a n g e in s t a t u s w i l l b e o b v i o u s t o p e r s o n s i n o r a t t h e p o i n t o f e n t r y
to th e
work cell.
NOTE
The most significant axis is the one with the longest travel distance. This is usually the horizontal (X) axis.
Compliance is checked by inspection and test.
8.5.4.2.3
T h is
Emergency stop system
s u b c la u s e
o n ly
a p p lie s
if
a
safety interlock
o v e rrid e
is
p ro v id e d
as
s p e c ifie d
in
8 .5 .4 .2 .2 .
An
e m e rg e n c y
m o v in g
s to p
s y s te m
s h a ll o v e r r id e
a ll o t h e r c o n t r o ls ,
re m o ve
d riv e
p o w e r fro m
p a r t s a n d e m p l o y a u t o m a t i c b r a k in g , if n e c e s s a r y , to c a u s e a ll t h e s e
m o v in g
MS3
p a r ts to
s to p w ith in a r e a s o n a b le tim e p e rio d s u c h th a t a le v e l 3 h a z a rd c a n n o t b e c o n ta c te d .
C o m p o n e n ts
of
th e
e m e rg e n c y
s to p
s y s te m
s h a ll
be
of
an
e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l
ty p e .
An
e m e r g e n c y s t o p c o n t r o l m a y c o n s is t o f:
-
a s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1
a n d th a t m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x K a n d th a t
is p r o v i d e d w i t h a l a t c h i n g t y p e m e c h a n i s m
m e e tin g th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 , o r
e q u iv a le n t; o r
-
a n e m e r g e n c y s t o p d e v i c e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 5 - 5 .
NOTE In the United Kingdom, an emergency stop system complying with the requirements of IEC 60204-1 and
ISO 13850 is required where there is a risk of personal injury.
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e s a fe ty fu n c tio n
L e v e l (S IL )
o f th e e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m
p e r IE C 6 2 0 6 1 , o r a P e r fo r m a n c e
w ith th e r e s u lts o f a ris k a s s e s s m e n t o f th e
R e s ta rtin g
of
th e
m e c h a n ic a l
s y s te m
Level
(P L )
s h a ll h a v e a S a fe ty
p e r IS O 1 3 8 4 9 -1
In te g rity
t h a t is c o n s i s t e n t
work cell.
s h a ll
o n ly
be
p o s s ib le
by
in itia tin g
a
s ta rt
c o n tro l
p ro c e d u re a fte r th e e m e rg e n c y s to p c o n tro l h a s b e e n m a n u a lly re s e t.
For
e q u ip m e n t
s y s te m
and
w h e re
s h a ll in c lu d e
o n e w ith in
th e
a
p e rso n
a m in im u m
work cell.
m ay
c o m p le te ly
o f tw o
The
e m e rg e n c y
s y s te m
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
work cell,
s to p c o n tro ls , o n e
s ta rt up p ro c e d u re
m e t h o d t o e n s u r e n o p e r s o n is p r e s e n t in t h e
th e s in g le fa u lt te s ts s p e c ifie d
e n te r
work cell.
th e
e m e rg e n c y
o u ts id e
s h a ll in c lu d e
th e
s to p
work cell
a n o n -h a z a rd o u s
If it c a n b e s h o w n , a f t e r a p p l i c a t i o n o f
in 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 4 t o t h e m o v e m e n t c o n t r o l c i r c u i t r y o r o t h e r s e n s i n g
旧C
- 171 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
m e a n s , th a t s u c h te s ts d o n o t b y -p a s s th e n o n -h a z a rd o u s s ta rt up p ro c e d u re , th e e m e rg e n c y
s t o p p i n g d i s t a n c e t e s t o f t h is s u b c l a u s e is n o t r e q u i r e d .
For
e q u ip m e n t
m in im u m
w h e re
of one
a
p e rso n
e m e rg e n c y
e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m
m ay
s to p
o n ly
c o n tro l
p a rtia lly
s h a ll
be
e n te r
p ro v id e d
s h a ll b e o p e r a b le b y th e p e r s o n
work cell
or
o u ts id e
work cell. T h e
a c c e s s t o t h e work
a
c o m p a rtm e n t,
a
o f th e
n e e d in g to h a v e
cell.
work cell
A n e m e r g e n c y s to p c o n tro l p ro v id e d o u ts id e th e
lo c a te d
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t
o c c u p ie d . T h e in s ta lla tio n
so th a t an
An
e m e rg e n c y
s to p
s h a ll
c o n s is t
a rra n g e m e n t,
of
c o n tro l
such
or
re d
as
an
th e
p e rso n
skilled person
p ro v id e d
work cell
a
th a t
o p e ra tin g
it c a n
see
if th e
work cell
is
in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll r e q u ir e th a t s p a c e b e p r o v id e d a r o u n d th e c o n tro l
instructed person
a n y w h e re in s id e th e
It
such
s h a ll b e r e a d ily v is ib le a n d s h a ll be
in s id e
th e
c a n e a s i l y r e a c h a n d a c t i v a t e it.
work cell
s h a ll
be
re a d ily
a c c e s s ib le
fro m
a n d s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith lig h tin g to p e r m it e a s y id e n tific a tio n .
p a lm
e a s ily
or
m u sh ro o m
id e n tifia b le
head
re d
b u tto n
s a fe ty
or
c a b le ,
be
p ro v id e d
th a t a c tiv a te s
w ith
th e
an
in d ire c t
e m e rg e n c y
s to p s y s te m .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, if necessary, by the following tests.
While the mechanical system is operating at its maximum kinetic energy (carrying maximum
load capacity at maximum speed)， the emergency stop system is to be activated and the
distance to stop measured. The results of the distance measurements shall show that after
activation of the emergency stop system, any subsequent motion in any direction would be
unlikely to present a risk of injury.
The maximum stopping distance from the point o f activation， along the most significant axis,
shall be 1 m or less. In addition, if there is an end point along the most significant axis beyond
which the MS3 moving part does not operate, there shall be at least 150 mm of empty space
available between this end point and the nearest fixed mechanical part, intended to provide
sufficient space for a person not to be harmed. The requirements of B.3.8 apply.
8.5.4.2.4
Except
as
Endurance requirements
re fe re n c e d
o v e r r i d e is p r o v i d e d
accessible
in
8.5 . 4.2 . 3 ,
a s s p e c ifie d
in
th is
s u b c la u s e
8.5 . 4.2 . 2 ,
safety interlock
instructed person o r skilled person
o n ly
o r if a n y
a p p lie s
when
a
c a b le c o n ta in s E S 3 v o lta g e s .
M o v a b le c a b le a s s e m b lie s a re te s te d to e n s u r e th a t n o m e c h a n ic a l d a m a g e o c c u r s th a t c o u ld
r e s u l t in a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
safety interlock
-
a m a lfu n c tio n o f th e
s y s te m ;
-
c o m p r o m i s e a n y c o m p a r tm e n t s e p a ra tio n b a rrie rs o r
-
e x p o s e a p e rs o n to o th e r h a z a rd s .
mechanical enclosures;
I f t h e v o l t a g e in t h e s e c a b l e s a n d m o v e m e n t c o n t r o l c i r c u i t r y a r e E S 3 , m e c h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e
te s ts s h a ll b e a p p lie d to e n s u r e th a t n o e le c tr ic s h o c k h a z a rd re s u lts .
F o r c a b l e s t h a t c a r r y o n l y v o l t a g e s m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r E S 1 f if it c a n b e s h o w n t h a t
s in g le o p e n - c ir c u it o r s h o rt-c irc u it fa u lt te s tin g o f th e s e c a b le s a n d m o v e m e n t c o n tro l c irc u itry
w o u l d n o t r e s u l t in a h a z a r d , t h e y a r e e x e m p t f r o m t h e m e c h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e t e s t s .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, when necessary, by the following mechanical
endurance tests.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 172 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The mechanical system, including the means (for example, limit switches) that limit movement
during normal operation, are subjected to 100 000 cycles of operation at rated load and
maximum speed through the maximum length or rotation o f travel permitted by the design.
After the cycling:
-
a mechanical function check (for example, MS3 moving parts to operate electromechanical
switches; end of travel mechanical stop, etc.) and a visual inspection, are conducted.
Mechanical stops and electromechanical switches shall perform as intended. There shall
be no evidence of loss of mechanical integrity. All safety-related functions (including
emergency stop systems, and the like, as applicable) shall operate normally; and
-
the assembly cables that control the MS3 moving parts, other than those containing only
ES1， are examined for damage that exposes conductors carrying greater than ES1. No
conductor shall be broken and no individual strands shall have penetrated the insulation. If
damage cannot be determined by inspection, the cable assembly shall pass an electric
strength test of 1 000 V， in accordance with 5.4, applied between the conductors carrying
greater than ES1 and foil wrapped around the body of the cable.
8.5.4.3
Equipment having an electromechanical device for destruction of media
8.5.4.3.1
General requirements
Equipment safeguards
to
p ro te c t
m e c h a n ic a lly d e s tro y v a rio u s
p e rso n s,
m e d ia
in c lu d in g
c h ild re n ,
b y m e a n s o f m o v in g
fo r
e q u ip m e n t
p a rts th a t d ra w
th e
in te n d e d
m e d ia
to
in to th e
e q u i p m e n t a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w . T h e m e d i a d e s t r u c t i o n d e v i c e w i t h i n t h i s e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s e d
as M S3.
EXAMPLES Equipment that includes household use and home-office use document shredding and similar media
destruction devices, as determined by the nature of their power source.
F o r e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s w h e r e c h i l d r e n a r e n o t l i k e l y t o b e p r e s e n t , s e e C l a u s e F . 4 .
NOTE This equipment design typically applies to commercial or industrial equipment expected to be installed in
locations where only adults are normally present.
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith
th e
a p p ro p ria te
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r
cannot
be
jo in te d
te s t
safeguards
p ro b e
safety interlocks
re d u ce d
to
th e
of
so th a t
Annex V
a re a c c o rd in g
a p p ro p ria te
e n e rg y
MS3
and
m o v in g p a rts a re n o t
th e
wedge
p ro b e
accessible
of
F ig u re V .4 .
to 4 .4 .5 , e x c e p t th a t w h e r e a m o v in g
c la s s
w ith in
2
s,
safety interlock
th e
to
p a rt
s h a ll
c o n tin u e to p re v e n t a c c e s s .
8.5.4.3.2
Instructional safeguards against moving parts
F o r e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d w h e r e c h ild r e n
m a y be p re s e n t, an
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e
p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 (2 0 1 1 -0 5 )
-
element 2:
o p tio n a l
-
e l e m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
-
element 4:
“ T h i s e q u i p m e n t is n o t i n t e n d e d
m e d ia
fe e d o p e n in g
e q u ip m e n t w h e n
te x t
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
w ith
n o t in
use
fo r u s e b yc h ild re n ”
th e h a n d s ,
fo r an
c lo th in g
e x te n d e d
a n d “ A v o id to u c h in g th e
o r h a ir”
p e rio d
and
“ U n p lu g
th is
o f tim e ” o r e q u iv a le n t
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 173 -
8.5.4.3.3
Disconnection from the supply
An
s w itc h
is o la tin g
m o v in g
c o m p ly in g
w ith
A n n e x L s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
to
d is c o n n e c t
p a r ts . A s w it c h w it h a n “ O F F ” p o s it io n , t h a t r e m o v e s a ll p o w e r f r o m
p a r t is a c c e p t a b l e . T h e s w i t c h s h a l l b e l o c a t e d w h e r e it is e a s i l y
accessible
p o w e r to
th e M S 3
MS3
m o v in g
to th e u s e r w h o s e
b o d y p a rt o r c lo th e s m a y b e c a u g h t.
The
”〇 N
丨
丨
and
"O F F "
p o s itio n s
of
a
tw o -p o s itio n
s w itc h
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith F .3 .5 .2 .
F o r a m u lti-p o s itio n
s w itc h , th e
,,O F F M p o s i t i o n
o f th e s w itc h
s h a ll
be m a rke d
in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith F .3 .5 .2 , a n d th e o th e r p o s itio n s s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith a p p r o p r ia te w o r d s o r s y m b o ls .
8.5.4.3.4
Test method
The media destruction device is tested with the wedge probe of Figure V.4 applied in any
direction relative to the opening:
-
wi th a force up to 45 N for a strip-cut type device; and
-
wi th a force up to 90 N for a cross-cut type device.
NOTE Media destruction devices are typically identified as either strip-cut type or cross-cut type. A strip-cut
media destruction device shreds the media into long strips using a motor-based shredding mechanism. A cross-cut
media destruction device shreds the media two or more ways into tiny particles, typically using a more powerful
motor and more complex shredding mechanism.
Any e n c lo s u re or guard that can be removed or opened by an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or an
in s tru c te d p e rs o n shall be removed or opened prior to application of the probes.
8.5.4.3.5
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked in accordance with V.1.2 and V.1.5. The wedge probe shall not
contact any moving part.
Where the equipment is provided with a s a fe ty in te rlo c k ， compliance is checked according to
4.4.5， except where a moving part cannot be reduced to the appropriate energy class within
2 s , the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall continue to prevent access.
8.5.5
High pressure lamps
8.5.5.1
General
The
c o n ta in m e n t m e c h a n is m
L in e
4
re d u ce
fo r h ig h
p re ssu re
la m p s th a t a re c o n s id e re d
explosion o f t h e
instructed person
o f T a b le 3 5 s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te s tr e n g th to c o n ta in a n
th e
lik e lih o o d
o f in ju ry to
an
ordinary person
or
MS3
a c c o rd in g
to
la m p s o a s to
d u rin g
n o rm a l
u s e , o r la m p a s s e m b ly re p la c e m e n t, a s a p p ro p ria te .
8.5.5.2
Test method
For the protection against the effects of a high pressure lamp failure， the following test is
performed as follows:
-
l amp assemblies considered MS3 parts during field replacement are tested separate from
the equipment;
-
l amp assemblies only considered MS3 parts during operation, may be tested separately,
or as normally installed in the equipment, or both.
An e x p lo s io n of the lamp is stimulated by mechanical impact, electronic pulse generator or
similar method. The lamp shall operate for at least 5 min to obtain operational temperature
and pressure. To evaluate the rupture results for potential debris area and particle size, the
equipment or lamp assembly is placed on a horizontal surface， and a dark sticky mat (or
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 174 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
another adequate method) of adequate size to capture the particles is placed near the
exhaust vent of the equipment. The equipment opening shall be oriented to maximize
potential for particles to be expelled from the product horizontally across the dark sticky mat.
After the rupture, the glass particles generated are measured using a magnified glass piece
with a 0,1 mm resolution. The test shall be conducted to simulate the worst case operating
position specified in the instructions.
NOTE
It is easier for the inspection of potential glass debris if the sticky mat has a dark blue colour.
An example of an electronic pulse generator method is given in Figure D.3.
The charge is increased in steps o f 5 J until the lamp ruptures are repeatable.
8.5.5.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by physical inspection or, if necessary, by the tests of 8.5.5.2.
When tested in accordance with 8.5.5.2, inspect the dark sticky mat for glass particles ， and:
-
gl ass particles less than 0,8 mm in the longest axis shall not be found beyond 1 m of the
e n c lo s u re opening; and
-
gl ass particles equal to or greater than 0,8 mm in the longest axis shall not be found.
For p ro fe s s io n a l e q u ip m e n t ， where it is unlikely that the particles will be within reach of an
o rd in a ry p e rso n , the value of 0,8 mm may be replaced with 5 mm.
8.6
Stability of equipment
8.6.1
Requirements
C la s s ific a tio n
o f p ro d u c ts
fo r th e
p u rp o se s
o f a s s e s s in g
e q u ip m e n t
s ta b ility
is
to
be
done
a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5.
I n c a s e u n i t s a r e f i x e d t o g e t h e r , t h e M S c l a s s i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e t o t a l w e i g h t o f t h e u n i t s . If
u n it s a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e s e p a r a t e d f o r r e l o c a t i o n , t h e M S c l a s s is d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e i n d i v i d u a l
w e ig h t.
In d iv id u a l u n its th a t a re d e s ig n e d to b e m e c h a n ic a lly fix e d t o g e t h e r o n s ite a n d a re n o t u s e d
in d iv id u a lly ,
or
stationary equipment,
s h a ll
be
assessed
by
in s p e c tio n
a fte r
in s ta lla tio n
a c c o r d i n g to t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d , if n e c e s s a r y , t e s t e d a c c o r d i n g to 8 . 6 . 2 . 2 .
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s a n d te s ts g iv e n
in 8 . 6 . 2 f 8 . 6 . 3 , 8 . 6 . 4 a n d 8 . 6 . 5
a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 6 . W h e r e a n “ x ” is g i v e n , it m e a n s t h a t t h e t e s t is a p p l i c a b l e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 175 -
Table 36 - Overview of requirements and tests
Type o f te st
Equipm ent type
MS1
Static
s ta b ility
Downward
force
R elocation
Glass slide b
H orizontal
force
8.6.2.2
8.6.2.3
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
All equipment
No stability requirements
Floor standing
X
Non-floor standing
X
Controls or display a
X
MS2
X
Fixed equipm ent
No stability requirements
Floor standing
X
Non-floor standing
X
Controls or display
X
X
X
Moo
X
Fixed equipm ent
X
No stability requirements
Equipment with front mounted accessible user controls and equipment having displays with moving images
likely to be used in the home or similar installation environments where the equipment may be accessible to
children.
b
The glass slide test is not applicable to floor standing equipment, even though the equipment may have
controls or a display.
W h e re
th e rm o p la s tic
m a te ria ls
have
an
r e le v a n t s ta b ility te s ts s h a ll b e c o n d u c te d
in flu e n c e
on
th e
s ta b ility
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
a f t e r t h e s t r e s s r e l i e f t e s t in C l a u s e
th e
T .8 w h e n th e
e q u ip m e n t h a s c o o le d to ro o m te m p e ra tu re .
MS2
and
C la u s e
MS3
F .5 ,
te le v is io n
except
th a t
instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
instructional safeguard m a y b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n
s e ts
th e
s h a ll
have
an
in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ S ta b ility H a z a r d ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd
-
e l e m e n t 3:
“T he
te le v is io n
set
m ay
fa ll,
c a u s in g
e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 4:
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e te x t b e lo w o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
s e rio u s
p e rso n a l
in ju ry
or
d e a th ” or
- 176 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
A television set may fall, causing serious personal injury or death. Many injuries, particularly to children, can be
avoided by taking simple precautions such as:
ALWAYS use cabinets or stands or mounting methods recommended by the manufacturer of the television
set.
一
一
ALWAYS use furniture that can safely support the television set,
-
ALWAYS ensure the television set is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture.
-
ALWAYS educate children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the television set or its
controls.
-
ALWAYS route cords and cables connected to your television so they cannot be tripped over, pulled or
grabbed.
-
NEVER place a television set in an unstable location.
-
NEVER place the television set on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without anchoring
both the furniture and the television set to a suitable support.
-
NEVER place the television set on cloth or other materials that may be located between the television set
and supporting furniture.
NEVER place items that might tempt children to climb, such as toys and remote controls, on the top of the
television or furniture on which the television is placed.
一
If the existing television set is going to be retained and relocated, the same considerations as above should be
applied.
8.6.2
8.6.2.1
Static stability
Test setup
The equipment shall be blocked， if necessary, by means of a stop of the smallest dimensions
possible to keep it from sliding or rolling during the test. During the tests ， containers, if any,
are to contain the amount of substance within their rated capacity that will result in the most
disadvantageous condition.
All doors ， drawers ， casters， adjustable feet and other appurtenances that are a c c e s s ib le to
an o rd in a ry p e rso n , are arranged in any combination that results in the least stability.
Equipment provided with multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable
position based on the equipment construction. However, if the casters are intended only to
transport the unit, and if the installation instructions require adjustable feet to be lowered after
installation, then the adjustable feet (and not the casters) are used in this test.
Where equipment is subject to periodic maintenance or routinely serviced or repaired at its
intended use location， the doors, drawers, etc. or any other adjustment means a c c e s s ib le to
an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or s k ille d p e rs o n shall be arranged in any combination specified by
the servicing instructions that results in the least stability.
The tests of 8.6.2.2 and 8.6.2.3 shall be performed as indicated in Table 36.
8.6.2.2
Static stability test
The equipment shall be subjected to one of the following tests:
-
The equipment is tilted in all directions such that the base of the equipment is at an angle
up to and including 10°; or
-
The equipment is placed on a plane at an angle of 10° from the horizontal and rotated
slowly through an angle o f 360° about its normal vertical axis; or
-
The equipment is placed on a horizontal non-skid surface and subjected to a force equal
to:
•
50 % of the weight of the unit vertical downwards， but not more than 100 N. If， during
the test, the supporting surface prevents the equipment from overturning, the test shall
be repeated such that the supporting surface is not used to pass the test; and
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
•
- 177 -
13 % o f the weight in all horizontal directions but not more than 250 N9
that is applied to the worst case positions on the equipment by means of a suitable test
apparatus having a flat surface of approximately 125 mm by 200 mm, in such a way as to
produce the maximum overturning moment. The test may be applied at any height not
exceeding 1f5 m from the base of the equipment. The test force shall be discontinued if
the equipment remains stable after being tilted 10° from vertical.
8.6.2.3
Downward force test
Equipment shall not tip over when a constant downward force of 800 N is applied at the point
of leverage for a maximum moment to any point of any surface within 10° of horizontal of at
least 125 mm by at least 200 mm， at any height up to 1 m from the base of the equipment.
The 800 N force is applied by means of a suitable test apparatus having a flat surface of
approximately 125 mm by 200 mm. The downward force is applied with the complete flat
surface of the test apparatus in contact with the equipment， however the test apparatus need
not be in full contact with uneven surfaces (for example, corrugated or curved surfaces).
Equipment having a shape or a flexibility of the surface that is not likely to be used as a step
or a ladder are exempt from the test.
EXAMPLE Products in combination with a cart or stand or products with protrusion or recess where the
construction is obviously not to be used as a step or ladder.
8.6.2.4
Compliance criteria
During the tests, the equipment shall not tip over.
8.6.3
8.6.3.1
Relocation stability
Requirements
E q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e s t a b l e w h e n it is b e i n g r e l o c a t e d . E q u i p m e n t s h a l l :
-
b e e q u ip p e d w ith w h e e ls h a v in g a m in im u m d ia m e te r o f 1 0 0 m m ; o r
-
c o m p l y w ith th e te s t o f 8 .6 .3 .2 .
8.6.3.2
Test method and compliance criteria
The equipment is tilted to an angle of 10° from its normal upright position in any direction. If
the equipment is such that when it is tilted through an angle of 10° when standing on a
horizontal plane, a part of the equipment not normally in contact with the supporting surface
would touch the horizontal plane, the equipment is placed on the edge of the horizontal
support during the test so that the contact is not made. Alternatively， the equipment may be
placed on a plane and is rotated through an angle of 360° about its normal vertical axis while
tilted at 10°.
Equipment expected to be moved or relocated by o rd in a ry p e rs o n s shall have:
一
all doors and drawers not having a positive means of retention and that can be opened
inadvertently; and
一
casters， adjustable feet and the like
arranged in any combination that results in the least stability.
Equipment expected to be moved or relocated by an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or a s k ille d pe rso n ,
shall have all doors ， drawers, etc” positioned in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
A unit provided with multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable position
based on the equipment construction.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 178 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
The equipment shall not tip over during the test.
8.6.4
Glass slide test
The equipment is placed on a clean ， dry， glass covered horizontal surface so that only the
supporting feet are in contact with the glass. The glass-covered surface is then tilted in the
most unfavourable direction through an angle of 10°.
During the test, the equipment shall not slide or tip over.
8.6.5
Horizontal force test and compliance criteria
The equipment is to be placed on a horizontal non-skid surface with all doors， drawers ，
casters， adjustable feet and other movable parts arranged in any combination that results in
the least stable condition. The equipment shall be blocked， if necessary， by means of a stop
of the smallest dimensions possible, to keep it from sliding or rolling when subjected to one of
the following tests:
-
an external horizontal force of 20 % of the weight of the equipment or 250 A/, whichever is
less， is applied to that point on the equipment that will result in the least stability. The
force shall not be applied more than 1,5 m above the supporting surface; or
-
the equipment shall be moved through any angle o f tilt up to and including 15° from the
vertical; or
-
the equipment is placed on a plane and is rotated through an angle of 360° about its
normal vertical axis while tilted at an angle o f 15°.
During the test, the equipment shall not tip over.
8.7
Equipment mounted to a wall， ceiling or other structure
8.7.1
Requirements
C la s s ific a tio n o f e q u ip m e n t fo r th e p u rp o s e s o f a s s e s s in g m o u n tin g m e a n s fo r a tta c h m e n t to a
w a ll,
c e ilin g
or
o th e r
fix e d
s tru c tu re
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
a
p o le
or
to w e r)
is
done
a c c o rd in g
to
T a b le 3 5 , lin e 6.
F o r M S 2 o r M S 3 e q u ip m e n t:
-
If th e
m a n u fa c tu re r
m eans
and
th e
d e fin e s
s p e c ific
m o u n tin g
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
to
th e
e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
m eans,
th e
c o m b in a tio n
8 . 7 . 2 , T e s t 1. T h e
e ith e r
be
p ro v id e d
o f th e
m o u n tin g
h a rd w a re
used
w ith
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
to fix th e
m o u n tin g
m eans
or
d e s c rib e d
in d e t a i l in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s ( f o r e x a m p l e , l e n g t h o f s c r e w s , d i a m e t e r o f t h e
s c re w s , e tc .).
-
If
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r
p ro v id e d
such
w ith
m o u n tin g
does
not
d e fin e
s p e c ific
m o u n tin g
a n y p a rt (fo r e x a m p le , a h o o k o r th re a d e d
m eans
to
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
such
p a rts
m eans,
but
h o le ) w h ic h
s h a ll
c o m p ly
th e
is
fa c ilita te s a tta c h in g
w ith
a p p r o p r ia te . T h e u s e r in s tr u c tio n s h a ll a d v is e o n th e s a fe u s e o f s u c h
e q u ip m e n t
8 .7 .2 ,
T est 2 f as
p a rts (fo r e x a m p le ,
s c r e w s iz e in c lu d in g th re a d s iz e a n d le n g th , n u m b e r o f s c re w s , e tc .).
-
If t h e
th e
e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d
th re a d e d
p a rts
w ith o u t
w ith
th e
th re a d e d
m o u n tin g
p a rts fo r a tta c h m e n t o f th e
m eans
s h a ll
a d d itio n a lly
m o u n tin g
c o m p ly
w ith
m eans,
8 .7 .2 ,
T e s t 3.
NOTE The tests are meant to test the fixing of the mounting means to the equipment and not to test the fixing to
the wall, ceiling or other structure.
8.7.2
Test methods
If the construction involves thermoplastic materials that have an influence on the strength of
the mounting system, the tests shall be performed after the stress relief test of Clause T.8.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 179 -
Test 1
The equipment is mounted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the
mounting means positioned, when possible， to represent the most severe stress on the
supports.
A force in addition to the weight o f the equipment is applied downwards through the centre of
gravity of the equipment， for 1 min. The additional force shall be:
-
three times the weight of the equipment; or
-
the weight of the equipment plus 880
A/,
whichever is less.
Afterwards， for equipment mounted to a wall or another structure， a horizontal force of 50 N is
applied laterally for 1 min.
Test 2
The test force shall be equivalent to the least of the following divided by the number of
attachment points in the mounting system:
-
f our times the weight of the equipment; or
-
t wo times the weight of the equipment plus 880 N.
Each individual representative point in the mounting system, one at a time， shall be subjected
to the following six test forces:
-
a shear force perpendicular to its centre axis for 1 min. The force shall be applied in four
directions， one direction at a time， separated by 90°.
-
an inward directed push force parallel to its centre axis for 1 min.
-
an outward directed pull force parallel to its centre axis for 1 min.
Test 3
If the mounting system design relies upon threaded parts, each threaded part， one at a time,
shall be subjected to the following test.
The screw is tightened with a torque according to Table 37 and then loosened， for a total of 5
times. The torque shall be applied gradually.
If a corresponding screw fastener is supplied by the manufacturer, it shall be used for the test.
If no corresponding screw fastener is supplied by the manufacturer, even though a screw type
may be recommended in the user instructions, any screw with the same diameter shall be
used for the test.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 180 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table 37 - Torque to be applied to screws
Nominal diameter of screw
Torque
mm
Nm
up to and including 2,8
0,4
over 2,8
up to and including 3,0
0,5
over 3,0
up to and including 3,2
0,6
over 3,2
up to and including 3,6
0,8
over 3,6
up to and including 4,1
1,2
over 4,1
up to and including 4,7
1,8
over 4,7
up to and including 5,3
2,0
over 5,3
up to and including 6,0
2,5
8.7.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the tests of 8.7.2, as applicable. The equipment
or its associated mounting means shall not become dislodged and shall remain mechanically
intact and secure during the test. Threaded parts shall remain mechanically intact.
8.8
Handle strength
8.8.1
A
General
p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e d f o r liftin g o r c a r r y in g t h e e q u ip m e n t , r e g a r d l e s s o f its s h a p e o r
lo c a tio n
or
w h e th e r
th e
p a rt
is
in te n d e d
fo r
liftin g
or
c a rry in g
by
hand
or
v ia
m e c h a n ic a l
m e a n s , is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a h a n d l e a n d s h a l l h a v e a d e q u a t e s t r e n g t h .
T h e e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , l in e 5.
If e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g
m u ltip le
u n its
h a n d le s
to g e th e r, th e
is d e s i g n e d , o r p r o v i d e d
c la s s
is d e t e r m i n e d
ta k in g
w ith
in to
in s tr u c tio n s , fo r liftin g o r c a r r y in g
a c c o u n t th e w e ig h t th a t m a y
be
c a rrie d .
Compliance is checked by inspection or by available data, or， where necessary， by the test of
8.8.2. As a result o f the test， the handle， its securing means, or that portion of the e n c lo s u re
to which it is secured， shall not break, crack， or detach from the equipment.
8.8.2
Test method
A weight shall be uniformly applied over a 75 mm width at the centre of the handle, without
clamping.
The weight shall be the equipment weight plus an additional weight as specified below:
-
for MS1 equipment with two or more handles, a weight that exerts a force o f three times
the weight of the equipment;
NOTE
一
一
No tests apply to MS1 equipment having only one handle.
for MS2 equipment, a weight that exerts a force of three times the weight of the
equipment;
for MS3 equipment with a mass 50 kg or less， a weight that exerts a force of two times the
weight of the equipment or 75 kgf whichever is greater; and
for MS3 equipment with a mass greater than 50 kg， a weight that exerts a force of the
weight of the equipment or 100 kg, whichever is greater.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
- 181 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
The additional weight shall be started at zero and gradually increased so that the test value is
attained in 5 s to 10 s and maintained for 60 s. When more than one handle is provided， the
force shall be distributed between the handles. The distribution of the forces shall be
determined by measuring the percentage of the equipment's weight sustained by each handle
with the equipment in the intended carrying position. When MS2 equipment is furnished with
more than one handle, and it can be considered capable of being carried by only one handle,
each handle shall be capable o f sustaining the total force.
8.9
Wheels or casters attachment requirements
8.9.1
General
T h e e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , l i n e 5 . W h e n
e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e
u s e d w ith c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a r r ie r s p r o v id e d w ith w h e e ls o r c a s te r s , th e c la s s ific a tio n
is a p p l i e d u s i n g t h e c o m b i n e d m a s s .
T h e lik e lih o o d o f M S 3 e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a rrie rs th a t s u p p o rt th e
e q u ip m e n t, fro m tip p in g o v e r d u rin g m o v e m e n t s h a ll b e r e d u c e d .
8.9.2
Test method
Wheels or casters on MS3 equipment， or their supporting cart， stand or similar carrier，
intended to be moved as part of its n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ， shall be capable of
withstanding a pull of 20 N. The pull force is to be applied by a weight， or a steady pull， to the
wheel or caster for a period o f 1 min in any direction made possible by the construction.
During the test, the wheels or casters shall not be damaged or pull free from its securing
means.
8.10
Carts， stands， and similar carriers
8.10.1
The
General
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
be
s ta b le
T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5 a re a p p lie d
w ith
th e
c a rt,
s ta n d
u s in g th e c o m b in e d
o r s im ila r c a rrie r. T h e
c la s s ific a tio n s
of
m a s s o f b o th th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e c a rts o r
s ta n d s s p e c ifie d w ith th e e q u ip m e n t.
A ll c a r ts a n d s ta n d s s p e c ifie d fo r u s e w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e a p p lic a b le
te s ts d e s c rib e d
in t h e f o l l o w i n g s u b c l a u s e s . A c a r t , s t a n d
o r c a r r ie r s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e
a p p lic a b le te s ts a lo n e a n d a g a in w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s p e c ifie d
b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r p la c e d o n
th e c a rt o r s ta n d .
M S 3 e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g
th e ir s u p p o rtin g
c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a rrie rs th a t s u p p o r t th e
normal operating conditions,
e q u ip m e n t , t h a t a r e n o t m o v e d a s p a r t o f its
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
th e h o riz o n ta l fo rc e te s t o f 8 .6 .5 .
MS2
or
MS3
s p e c ifie d
e q u ip m e n t
c a rt, s ta n d
m o re
th a n
1m
in
h e ig h t,
o r c a rrie r, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e
in c lu d in g
re lo c a tio n
e q u ip m e n t
m o u n te d
on
s t a b i l i t y t e s t in 8 . 6 . 3
th e ir
except
t h a t t h e t ip a n g l e b e c o m e s 1 5 ° . If e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d w i t h w h e e l s o r c a s t e r s t h a t a l l o w t h e
e q u ip m e n t to o n ly m o v e
in l i m i t e d
d i r e c t i o n s , t h e t e s t is o n l y a p p l i e d
in t h o s e
d ire c tio n s
(fo r
e x a m p le , a n e le c tro n ic w h ite b o a rd ).
8.10.2
A
c a rt,
Marking and instructions
s ta n d
e q u ip m e n t,
w ith a n
or
s im ila r
c a rrie r th a t
b u t is p a c k a g e d
and
instructional safeguard
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
is
s p e c ifie d
m a rk e te d
by
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r fo r
s e p a ra te ly fro m
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e
use
w ith
s p e c ific
th e e q u ip m e n t, s h a ll b e p r o v id e d
F.5.
- 182 T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 4:
4T h i s
(c a rt,
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
s ta n d , o r c a rrie r)
is i n t e n d e d
fo r u s e
o n ly w ith
(m a n u fa c tu re rs
n a m e ), (m o d e l n u m b e r o r s e rie s ), ( e q u ip m e n t n a m e ) .” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
“Use
w ith
o th e r
e q u ip m e n t
m ay
re s u lt
in
in s ta b ility
c a u s in g
in ju ry ”
or
e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e in t h e o r d e r 2 , 4 , a n d 3.
instructional safeguard
The
s h a ll b e a ffix e d
to th e c a rt, s ta n d
o r c a rrie r, o r in c lu d e d
in t h e
in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
E q u ip m e n t o n ly
s h a ll
be
in te n d e d
p ro v id e d
w ith
and
an
s h ip p e d
fo r
use
w ith
instructional safeguard
a s p e c ific
in
c a rt,
a cco rd a n ce
s ta n d
w ith
o r s im ila r
C la u s e
F.5
c a rrie r,
and
be
c o m p r is e d o f:
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
-
e l e m e n t 4:
“ T h i s ( e q u i p m e n t n a m e ) is f o r u s e o n l y w it h ( m a n u f a c t u r e r s
n a m e ) ，（m o d e l
n u m b e r o r s e r i e s ) ，（c a r t ，s t a n d ，o r c a r r i e r ) ” o r e q u i v a l e n t t e x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
ttU s e w i t h
o t h e r ( c a r t s , s t a n d s , o r c a r r i e r s ) m a y r e s u l t in i n s t a b i l i t y c a u s i n g
in ju ry ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e in t h e o r d e r 2 f 4 , a n d 3.
The
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e e q u ip m e n t o r in c lu d e d
in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n
in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.
8.10.3
Cart, stand or carrier loading test and compliance criteria
A cart， stand or carrier shall be constructed so that permanent deformation or damage that is
capable of resulting in injury to a person, does not occur when it is subjected to a force of
220 N applied for 1 min to any grippable or leverage point a c c e s s ib le to a child.
To determine compliance, the force is applied through the end of a 30 mm diameter circular
cylinder. The force is to be applied to a shelf drawer， dowel rung support， or equivalent part
that is within 750 mm from the floor and will support some or all of a child's weight. The force
is to be applied for 1 min with the cart or stand at room temperature. The part shall not
collapse or break so as to expose sharp edges or produce pinch points that are capable of
resulting in injury.
In addition， a cart， stand or other carrier shall be constructed so that permanent deformation
or damage that is capable of resulting in injury to persons does not occur when each
supporting surface is individually loaded with:
-
the manufacturer’s intended load plus 440 N for the surface intended to support a display
with moving images; or
-
f our times the manufacturer’s intended load or 100 N， whichever is greater but not to
exceed 440 N, is applied to all applicable surfaces.
A dedicated storage area intended to accommodate specific accessories such as media
tapes, discs ， etc. shall be fully loaded to the rated load.
The weight is to be applied for 1 min on each supporting surface, with the other supporting
surfaces unloaded.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
8.10.4
- 183 -
Cart, stand or carrier impact test
When tested as described below, a cart, stand or carrier shall not produce a risk o f injury to
persons.
A single impact is to be applied to any part of the cart or stand and the test method is to be as
described in Clause T.6. However， a cart， stand or carrier made of glass shall instead be
tested according to 4.4.3.6.
8.10.5
Mechanical stability
A cart， stand or carrier， including floor standing types， shall be subjected to the applicable
tests described in 8.6.3 and 8.6.5 by itself, and where applicable in combination with its
intended MS2 or MS3 equipment.
For the purposes of these tests， the weight shall be considered as the total weight of the
equipment plus the weight of the cart, stand or carrier. The equipment shall be installed
according to the manufacturer's instructions and the horizontal force shall be applied to either
the cart, stand or carrier or intended equipment to produce a maximum overturning moment
on the equipment at a point up to a maximum height of 1,5 m above the floor level.
If during the tests of 8.6.3 and 8.6.5 the equipment starts to slide or tip relative to the cart,
stand or carrier， only the horizontal force test shall be repeated by reducing the force to 13 %
of the weight o f the equipment alone， or 100 N， whichever is less.
The equipment and cart or stand shall not tip over.
8.10.6
An
Thermoplastic temperature stability
e q u ip m e n t,
w ith s ta n d
th e
c a r t ，s t a n d
o r c a rrie r
te s t o f C la u s e
T .8
u s in g
th e rm o p la s tic
m a te ria ls
w ith o u t a n y s h rin k a g e , w a rp a g e ,
in
its
c o n s tru c tio n
o r o th e r d is to rtio n
s h a ll
o f th e
t h e r m o p l a s t i c m a t e r i a l s t h a t r e s u l t s in t h e e q u i p m e n t f a i l i n g t o c o m p l y w i t h 8 . 1 0 . 3 t 8 . 1 0 . 4 a n d
8 .1 0 .5 .
8.11
Mounting means for slide-rail mounted equipment (SRME)
8.11.1
T h is
General
s u b c la u s e
lik e lih o o d
s p e c ifie s
re q u ire m e n ts
o f in ju ry b y re ta in in g th e S R M E
fo r
h o riz o n ta lly
in a s t a b l e
m o u n te d
p o s itio n
s lid e -ra ils
to
re d u ce
th e
a n d n o t a llo w in g th e s lid e -ra ils
to b u c k le , th e m e a n s o f a t t a c h m e n t to b r e a k , o r th e S R M E to s lid e p a s t th e e n d o f th e s lid e ra ils .
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e l o w a p p l y t o t h e m o u n t i n g m e a n s o f M S 2 a n d M S 3 S R M E t h a t is :
-
i n s t a l l e d in a r a c k a n d t h a t i s i n t e n d e d t o b e e x t e n d e d o n s l i d e - r a i l s a w a y f r o m t h e r a c k f o r
in s ta lla tio n , u s e o r s e rv ic e ; a n d
-
S R M E th a t e x te n d s th e fu ll w id th o f th e ra c k ; a n d
-
h a v i n g a t o p i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n m o r e t h a n 1 m in h e i g h t f r o m t h e s u p p o r t i n g s u r f a c e .
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
:一
e q u ip m e n t s u b a s s e m b lie s ; or
:一
o t h e r e q u i p m e n t f i x e d i n p l a c e in t h e r a c k ; o r
::一
e q u i p m e n t t h a t is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e s e r v i c e d w h i l e e x t e n d e d o n s l i d e - r a i l s .
T h e m e c h a n ic a l m o u n tin g
be
th e
a c tu a l
enclosure
m e a n s fo r th e S R M E a re r e fe r r e d to a s s lid e - r a ils . T h e S R M E
p ro d u c t c o n fig u re d
in
its w o r s t c a s e
m e c h a n ic a l
w ith w e ig h ts to s im u la te w o r s t c a s e lo a d in g .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
lo a d in g ,
or a
m ay
re p re s e n ta tiv e
- 184 NOTE 1
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Slide-rails include bearing slides, friction slides or other equivalent mounting means.
NOTE 2 Subassemblies of the end product (for example, removable modules, component drawers, pull out
paper/heater trays in copiers/printers) are not considered to be SRME.
8.11.2
Requirements
C la s s ific a tio n
o f p ro d u c ts
fo r th e
p u rp o se s
o f a s s e s s in g
e q u ip m e n t
s ta b ility
is
to
be
done
SRME
fro m
a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5.
NOTE
For assessing equipment stability, see 8.6.
S lid e -ra ils
s h a ll
re ta in
th e
SRME
and
have
end
s to p s
th a t
p re ve n t
th e
u n in te n tio n a lly s lid in g o ff th e m o u n tin g m e a n s .
The
s lid e - r a ils s h a ll b e in s ta lle d
in a r e p r e s e n t a t i v e
r a c k w i t h t h e S R M E , o r in a n e q u i v a l e n t
s e t u p in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s i n s t r u c t i o n s .
S lid e
ra ils
8 .1 1 .3 .1
S lid e
w ith
a
s in g le
e x te n d e d
p o s itio n
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
d o w n w a rd
fo rc e
te s t
of
in t h e e x t e n d e d p o s it io n .
ra ils
h a v in g
a
s e rv ic e
p o s itio n
d o w n w a rd fo rc e te s t o f 8 .1 1 .3 .1
and
an
in s ta lla tio n
p o s itio n
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
in t h e s e r v i c e p o s i t i o n .
A ll s l i d e r a i l s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e t e s t s o f 8 . 1 1 . 3 . 2 a n d 8 . 1 1 . 3 . 3 in b o t h t h e s e r v i c e p o s i t i o n
a n d th e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n .
F o llo w in g e a c h te s t, th e s lid e -ra ils a n d th e S R M E m a y b e re p la c e d b e fo re c o n d u c tin g th e n e x t
te s t.
A m u lt i p o s i t i o n s lid e ra il s h a ll n o t e x t e n d a u t o m a t i c a l l y t o a n y o f t h e e x t e n d e d
p o s itio n s . T h e
S R M E s h a ll o n ly b e a b le to g o to th e s e r v ic e p o s itio n w h e n p u lle d o u t. A la tc h o r o th e r m e a n s
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
in s ta lla tio n
to
s to p
th e
SRME
in
th e
s e rv ic e
p o s itio n .
Any
instructional safeguard s h a l l
instructional safeguard s h a l l b e a s f o l l o w s :
p o s itio n s h a ll b e e x p la in e d . A n
in s ta lle r. T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
s e rv ic e
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
-
e l e m e n t 2:
S ta b ility h a z a rd
-
e l e m e n t 3:
“ T h e ra c k m a y tip o v e r c a u s in g s e r io u s p e r s o n a l in ju r y ”
-
e l e m e n t 4:
th e te x t b e lo w o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
p o s itio n
and
b e p ro v id e d fo r th e
B e fo re e x te n d in g th e ra c k to th e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n , re a d th e in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s .
D o n o t p u t a n y l o a d o n t h e s l i d e - r a i l m o u n t e d e q u i p m e n t in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n .
D o n o t l e a v e t h e s l i d e - r a i l m o u n t e d e q u i p m e n t in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n .
8.11.3
8.11.3.1
Mechanical strength test
Downward force test
With the SRME in its extended position, a force in addition to the weight of the SRME is to be
applied downwards through the centre o f gravity for 1 min.
The additional force applied to the SRME shall be equal to the greater o f the following two
values, with a maximum of 800 N:
- 5 0 % o f the SRME weight plus a force of 330 N; or
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 185 -
50 % of the SRME weight， plus an additional weight， where the additional weight is equal
to the SRME weight or a force of 530 N， whichever is less.
-
NOTE This additional force is intended to take into account other items or devices that are stacked on top of the
installed SRME while in the extended position during installation of other SRME.
For slide-rail mounted shelves, the shelf shall be tested with a weight of 125 % of the
maximum weight that is intended to be placed on the shelf.
A marking shall be provided on the shelf to indicate the maximum weight that can be added to
the shelf.
8.11.3.2
Lateral push force test
A 250 N static push force is applied laterally， in both directions at or near the end of the
SRME with the slide rails in their fully extended (service) position for a period of 1 min. The
applied weight need not be in full contact with uneven surfaces (for example, corrugated or
curved surfaces) but shall be concentrated within 30 mm of the end of the SRME.
8.11.3.3
Integrity of slide rail end stops
To test the integrity of the end stops, a 250 N static pull force is applied at the front of the
fully extended rail on the SRME for a period of 1 min9 in an attempt to cause the SRME to
come off the slide-rail. The SRME is then returned to the (installed) use position and then
placed back in the fully extended position. The test is performed 10 times.
8.11.4
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer’s data. If data is not
available, then the tests according to 8.11.3 are conducted.
Following each test, the SRME and its associated slide-rails shall remain secure for one
complete cycle of travel on its slide-rails. If the mounting means is not able to perform one
complete cycle without binding， a force o f 100 N shall be applied horizontally to the front of
the SRME at its centre point with the intent to completely retract the SRME into the rack.
The mounting means shall not bend or buckle to any extent that could introduce an injury. End
stops shall retain the SRME in a safe position and shall not allow the SRME to slide past the
end of the slide-rails.
8.12
A
Telescoping or rod antennas
te le s c o p in g
b a ll o n
th e
o r ro d
end. An
a n te n n a
a n te n n a
s h a ll
end
be
p ie c e
p ro v id e d
and
w ith
th e
a m in im u m
s e c tio n s
6 ,0
mm
d ia m e te r b u tto n
o f a te le s c o p in g
a n te n n a
s h a ll
or
be
s e c u r e d in s u c h a m a n n e r a s t o p r e v e n t r e m o v a l .
Compliance is checked by inspection and the test o f Clause T.11.
9
9.1
Thermal burn injury
General
T o re d u c e th e
lik e lih o o d
o f p a in fu l e ffe c ts a n d
in ju r y d u e to th e r m a l b u r n s ,
s h a ll b e c la s s ifie d a n d w h e n n e c e s s a r y p r o v id e d w ith th e
safeguards
accessible
p a rts
s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 9 .
NOTE Electric burns due to radio frequency (RF) energy sources are a special case in this document. They are
controlled by limiting accessibility above a specified frequency. These limits and conditions are defined in the notes
d and e defined in Table 4.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 186 9.2
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
Thermal energy source classifications
9.2.1
TS1
TS1
is a c l a s s l t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e l e v e l s :
-
not e x c e e d in g
TS1
lim its u n d e r
-
not e x c e e d in g
TS2
lim its u n d e r:
normal operating conditions;
•
abnormal operating conditions;
•
single fault conditions.
9.2.2
and
or
TS2
T S 2 is a c l a s s 2 t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e :
-
t he te m p e ra tu re e x c e e d s th e T S 1
lim its ; a n d
-
normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions
conditions t h e t e m p e r a t u r e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e T S 2 l i m i t s .
under
single fault
or
W h e r e t h e m a l f u n c t i o n o f t h e e q u i p m e n t is e v i d e n t , n o l i m i t s a p p l y .
9.2.3
TS3
TS3
is
a
c la s s
3 th e rm a l
e n e rg y
so u rce
w h e re
under
normal operating conditions
single fault conditions.
9.3
Touch temperature limits
T a b le 3 8 u n d e r
9.3.1
accessible
to u c h
and
te m p e ra tu re
or under
exceeds
th e
TS2
lim its
in
abnormal operating conditions,
or
Requirements
E x c e p t a s n o te d b e lo w , to u c h te m p e r a tu r e s o f
An
th e
can
p a rt th a t, w h ile
b e e v a lu a te d
accessible
p a rts s h a ll c o m p ly w ith T a b le
38.
in c o n t a c t w i t h t h e b o d y , i s l i k e l y t o d r o p in t e m p e r a t u r e u p o n
u n d e r th e
lim its o f A n n e x A
r e p r o d u c i b l e t e s t m e t h o d o l o g y is d e t e r m i n e d
in
IE C
G u id e
1 1 7 :2 0 1 0 . A n
b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r w ith d u e
a p p ro p ria te
r e g a r d to th e
t e s t m e t h o d in I E C G u i d e 1 1 7 .
9.3.2
Test method and compliance criteria
The temperature tests are run with the room ambient conditions as defined in B.1.5 and B.2.39
except that the mom ambient temperature shall be 25 0C ± 5 °C.
If the test is performed at a temperature between 20 °C and 25
reflect a value of 25 °C.
°C ,
the results are adjusted to
NOTE 1 For an explanation of why the test is done at 25 °C without adjusting results for higher ambient
temperatures, see IEC TR 62368-2.
The equipment shall be operated in a manner the manufacturer determines likely to result in
elevated thermal conditions of a c c e s s ib le surfaces and parts.
NOTE 2 This may not be the condition of maximum input current or wattage but the condition that delivers the
highest thermal level to the part in question.
Compliance is checked by measuring the steady state temperature of a c c e s s ib le surfaces.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 187 -
Table 38 - Touch temperature limits for accessible parts
Maximum tem perature (7max}
°C
A cce ssible parts b
TS1
Metal d
Glass,
porcelain
and vitre o us
m aterial
P lastic
and
rubber
Wood
Devices worn on the body (in direct contact with the
skin) in normal use (> 8 h) e
43 to 48
43 to 48
43 to 48
43 to 48
Handles, knobs, grips, etc.， and surfaces either held
or touched in normal use (> 1 min and < 8 h) a
48
48
48
48
Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held for
short periods of time or touched occasionally (> 10 s
and < 1 min)
51
56
60
60
Handle, knobs, grips etc., and surfaces touched
occasionally for very short periods (> 1 s and
< 10 s) f
60
71
77
107
Surfaces that need not be touched to operate the
equipment (< 1 s)
70
85
94
140
Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held in
normal use (> 1 min) a
58
58
58
58
Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held for
short periods of time or touched occasionally (> 10 s
and < 1 min)
61
66
70
70
Handle, knobs, grips etc.f and surfaces touched
occasionally for very short periods (> 1 s and
< 10 s ) f
70
81
87
117
80 (100) c
95 (100) c
104
150
TS2
Surfaces that need not be touched to operate the
equipment (< 1 s)
TS3
Higher than the TS2 limits
Examples of these surfaces include a telephone handset, a mobile phone or another handheld device, and
the palm rest surface of a notebook computer. Limits for > 1 s and < 10 s may be used for local hotspots
where touching can be easily avoided by changing the way the device is held.
b
Where necessary, time of contact shall be determined by the manufacturer and shall be consistent with the
intended use in accordance with the equipment instructions.
c
The values in parentheses may be used for the following areas and surfaces:
一
一
an area on the surface of the equipment that has no dimension exceeding 50 mm, and that is not likely to
be touched in normal use; or
heatsinks and metallic parts directly covering heatsinks, except those on surfaces incorporating switches
or controls handled during normal use.
For these areas and parts, an instructional safeguard in accordance with Clause F.5 shall be provided on or
near the hot part.
Under abnormal operating conditions and single fault conditions, for other areas and surfaces of the
equipment, an equipment basic safeguard is required.
For metal parts that are covered with plastic or rubber material of at least 0,3 mm thick, the covering is
considered suitable for use as a safeguard and the temperature limit of plastic and rubber is allowed.
Examples include portable lightweight devices such as watches, headsets, personal music players and sports
monitoring equipment. For larger devices or devices in direct contact with vital areas of the face (e.g. the
airways), lower limits may apply. For contact durations less than 8 hours based on its intended normal use,
apply limits between 48 °C/1 min and 43 °C/8 h. Calculations shall be rounded down to the nearest whole
number. An example is a headset with a limited battery charge of 2 h.
f
9.4
Examples include surfaces that need to be touched for disconnection.
Safeguards against thermal energy sources
E x c e p t a s g iv e n
b e lo w ,
instructed persons
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
and
safeguard r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p a r t s accessible
skilled persons a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .
to
ordinary persons,
- 188 -
w ith 9 .5 .2 m a y b e
ordinary person a g a i n s t T S 2 ,
u s e d a s t h e basic safeguard.
Accessible
(in te rn a l
F o r p ro te c tio n o f a n
p a rts
in te n d e d fu n c tio n
and
e x te rn a l)
c la s s ifie d
旧C
an
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
instructional safeguard
as TS2
or TS 3
in a c c o r d a n c e
th a t re q u ire
h e a t fo r th e
(fo r e x a m p le , a d o c u m e n t la m in a to r , th e r m a l p rin t h e a d , fu s e r h e a te r, e tc .)
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll o f th e f o llo w in g :
-
t h e p a r t d o e s n o t n e e d to b e t o u c h e d
to o p e r a te th e e q u ip m e n t ( fo r e x a m p le , a p a rt a ls o
s e r v in g a h a n d le , k n o b , o r g rip fu n c tio n ) ;
-
it
is
u n lik e ly
th a t
ordinary person
an
w ill
to u c h
th e
p a rt
in te n tio n a lly
under
normal
operating conditions;
-
u n i n t e n t i o n a l c o n t a c t w i t h t h e p a r t is u n l i k e l y b y a n
ordinary person
d u rin g
m a in te n a n c e
n o t in v o lv in g th e p a rt;
-
t he
p a r t is p r o v i d e d
w ith
instructional safeguard
an
on o r n e a r th e
p a r t in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith 9 .5 .2 ; a n d
-
it is u n l i k e l y t h a t t h e p a r t w i l l b e t o u c h e d b y c h i l d r e n .
skilled person,
equipment safeguard o r p r o v i d e d
F o r p ro te c tio n o f a
p a rts a n d s u r fa c e s c la s s e d T S 3 s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a n
w ith
an
instructional safeguard
so
th a t
u n in te n tio n a l
c o n t a c t w i t h s u c h p a r t s a n d s u r f a c e s d u r i n g s e r v i c e o p e r a t i o n s is u n l i k e l y t o c a u s e t h e
person
9.5
skilled
to r e c o il in to o t h e r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s ( s e e F ig u r e 1 9 ).
Requirements for safeguards
9.5.1
Equipment safeguard
equipment safeguard s h a l l l i m i t t h e t r a n s f e r o f t h e r m a l e n e r g y ( s o u r c e t e m p e r a t u r e )
u n d e r normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault
conditions o r l i m i t a c c e s s i b i l i t y t o a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e t o a t o u c h t e m p e r a t u r e a s
An
c l a s s i f i e d in T a b l e 3 8 .
T e m p e r a t u r e lim its a re a p p lie d o n ly fo r th o s e
conditions w h e r e t h e
operating condition
abnormal operating conditions
e q u ip m e n t c o n tin u e s to o p e r a te a s in te n d e d a n d ,
or
single fault condition
is
n o t o b v io u s .
If a
single fault
h e n c e ，t h e abnormal
or
m a lfu n c tio n
is
e v id e n t,
th e n th e lim its a re n o t a p p lic a b le .
9.5.2
Instructional safeguard
instructional safeguard
An
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
F.5,
C la u s e
e x c e p t th a t
e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
e le m e n t 1a
instructional safeguard
, IEC 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 4 1
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
(2 0 0 2 -1 0 )
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ C A U T IO N ” a n d “ H o t s u rfa c e ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
-
e l e m e n t 4:
“ D o n o t to u c h ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
9.6
9.6.1
Requirements for wireless power transmitters
General
Wireless power transmitters
fo r
near
fie ld
w ire le s s
power
tra n s fe r
can
w a rm
up
m e ta llic o b je c ts th a t m a y b e p la c e d c lo s e to o r o n s u c h a tr a n s m it te r . T o a v o id a b u m
h ig h
te m p e ra tu re s
9 .6 .3 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o f th e
fo re ig n
m e ta llic
o b je c ts ,
th e
tra n s m itte r
is
te s te d
as
fo re ig n
d u e to
s p e c ifie d
in
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
9.6.2
—189 —
Specification of the foreign objects
T h e fo llo w in g fo re ig n o b je c ts a re u s e d :
-
a s te e l d is c , s e e F ig u re 4 7 ;
-
a n a lu m in iu m
-
a n a lu m in iu m fo il, s e e F ig u r e 4 9 .
rin g , s e e F ig u re 4 8 ; a n d
D im ensions in m illim etres
SECTION A - A
DETAIL S
A
No
Name
Remarks
1
Disc
Steel 1,1011/ RFe 160
2
Thermocouple
Any suitable type
3
Heatsink compound
Heat transport
4
Silicon tubing
Strain relief
Figure 47 - Steel disc
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
-1 9 0 -
IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
Gh
阶
⑼
No
Name
Remarks
1
Ring
Aluminium (for example AISilM gIM n 100 Hv)
2
Thermocouple
Any suitable type
3
Heatsink compound
Heat transport
4
Silicon tubing
Strain relief
Figure 48 - Aluminium ring
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
r©
IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
191
D im ensions in m illim etres
5 〇
DETAIL
S
A
IEC
No
Name
Remarks
1
Foil
Al 99,5 %
2
Thermocouple
Any suitable type
3
Heatsink compound
Heat transport
4
Silicon tubing
Strain relief (or use of glue layer on the foil)
Figure 49 - Aluminium foil
9.6.3
Test method and compliance criteria
The w ire le s s p o w e r tra n s m itte r is placed in a room under the temperature conditions as
specified in 9.3.2.
The test is performed once with each of the foreign objects specified in 9.6.2 placed in direct
contact with the transmitter. Each test has four cycles:
-
one without a receiver present and with the foreign object in direct contact with the
transmitter; and
-
one with a receiver placed in direct contact with the foreign object; and
-
one with a receiver placed at a distance of 2 mm from the foreign object; and
-
one with a receiver placed at a distance of 5 mm from the foreign object.
The transmitter is operated to transmit its maximum power.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 192 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
NOTE The test is not meant to test the temperature of the receiver, therefore any compatible receiver that can
draw the maximum power from the w ire le ss pow er tra n s m itte r can be used and the temperature of the receiver
does not have to be monitored.
During each cycle, the foreign object can be moved on the transmitter in order to find the
location where the highest temperature occurs.
During the tests, the temperature of the foreign object shall not exceed 70 °C.
10 Radiation
10.1
General
T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f p a in f u l e f f e c t s a n d in ju r y d u e to o p t ic a l e n e r g y ( v is ib le , IR , U V ) , X ra y , a n d a c o u s tic e n e rg y , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p r o v id e d
w ith th e
safeguards
s p e c ifie d
in t h i s
c la u s e .
10.2
Radiation energy source classifications
10.2.1 General classification
R a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s a r e g i v e n in T a b l e 3 9 .
Table 39 - Radiation energy source classifications
Source
Lasers
RS2
optical fibre communication
systems (OFCS)
According to IEC 60825-2
free space optical
communication systems for
transmission of information
According to IEC 60825-12
Other lasers, except those
used in image projectors
According to IEC 60825-1 a
Lamps and lamp systems (including LEDs),
except those used in image projectors
Image
projectors
(beamers)
RS1
According to IEC 62471:2006 b
Image projectors with lasers
According to IEC 60825-1 a or
IEC 62471-5:2015 if applicable
Image projectors with lamps
or LEDs
According to IEC 62471-5:2015
X-Ray
RS3
< 36 pA/kg
at 50 mm c
< 1 8 5 pA/kg
at 100 mm d
> RS2
PMP Acoustic
sound output
< 85 dB(A)
< 100 dB(A)
> RS2
Maximum
sound
analogue output
< 27 mV
< 150 mV
> RS2
pressure e
digital output
< - 2 5 dBFS
< -1 0 dBFS
> RS2
^ 100 dB(A)
> RS2
100 % CSD =
PMP Acoustic
sound output
Maximum dose
exposure e
analogue output
< 15 mV
< 150 mV
> RS2
digital output
< - 3 0 dBFS
< - 1 0 dBFS
> RS2
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
<80dB(A)/40h
旧C
a
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-193-
Additional considerations for laser products designed to function as conventional lamps (such as laser image
projector), see Note 2 of 10.3.
NOTE 1 For example, in IEC 60825-1:2014， Class 1, Class 1C， Class 1M, Class 2 ， Class 2M, Class 3R,
Class 3B and Class 4 are defined. These are not classifications of radiation energy source itself.
To classify the risk group, abnormal operating conditions and single fault conditions shall be taken into
accoimt.
In general, the radiation of the following low power application of a lamp is classified as Exempt Group. Also,
classification according to IEC 62471 (all parts) is not required for:
-
indicating lights;
一
infra-red devices such as used in home entertainment devices;
-
infra-red devices for data transmission such as used between computers and computer peripherals;
一
optocouplers;
一
一
UV radiation from general purpose incandescent and fluorescent lamps, with ordinary glass envelopes;
and
other similar low power devices.
NOTE 2 If optical radiation is broadband visible and IR-A radiation and the luminance of the source does
not exceed 104 cd/m2f it is expected that the radiation does not exceed the exposure limits given in 4.3 of
IEC 62471:2006 (see 4.1 of IEC 62471:2006).
For UV-C limits (wavelengths between 180 nm and 200 nm)t the value of IEC 62471 for 200 nm is used.
36 pA/kg equals 5 (.iSv/h or 0,5 mR/h. This value is consistent with International Commission on Radiation
Protection (ICRP) Publication 60.
d
185 pA/kg equals 25 jiSv/h or 2,5 mR/h.
Measurement is made with any part of the cabinet, case, and chassis removed per maintenance instructions
(CRT exposed) at the maximum test voltage applicable and under the conditions as specified below.
NOTE 3 In the member countries of CENELEC, the amount of ionizing radiation is regulated by European
Council Directive 96/29/Euratom of 13 May 1996. This Directive requires that at any point 100 mm from the
surface of the equipment, the dose-rate shall not exceed 1 pSv/h (0,1 mR/h) taking account of the
background level. For complete requirements refer to the above Directive.
NOTE 4 In the USA, the measuring conditions in the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations Title 21 Part 1020
are as given below (for complete requirements, refer to the above regulations).
Measurements are made with the EUT connected to the following source of supply:
- 1 3 0 V if the rated voltage is between 1 10V and 120 V; or
一
110 % of the rated voltage, if the rated voltage is not between 110 V and 120 V,
During the measurements:
-
一
all user and service accessible controls are adjusted to combinations that produce maximum X-radiation
emissions; and
abnormal operating conditions of any component or circuit malfunction causing an increase of
X-radiation emissions are to be simulated.
NOTE 5 In Canada, the measuring conditions in the Consolidated Regulations of Canada, c.1370 are as
given below (for complete requirements refer to the above regulations).
Measurements are made with the EUT connected to the following source of supply:
一
127 V if the rated voltage is between 11 0 V and 120 V; or
一
110 % of the rated voltage, if the rated voltage is not between 110 V and 120 V.
During the measurements all user and service accessible controls are adjusted to combinations that
produce maximum X-radiation emissions.
e
Fault testing measurements are not required for listening devices and personal music players.
10.2.2
RS1
F o r X -ra d ia tio n
so u rce s, RS1
is a c l a s s
1 ra d ia tio n
e n e rg y s o u rc e th a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d
lim its u n d e r:
-
normal operating conditions;
-
abnormal operating conditions
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
and
th a t d o n o t le a d to a
single fault condition;
and
RS1
- 194 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
single fault conditions.
F o r a c o u s tic ra d ia tio n s o u rc e s , R S 1
is a c l a s s 1 r a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d
R S 1 lim its u n d e r:
-
normal operating conditions;
-
abnormal operating conditions.
10.2.3
and
RS2
R S 2 is a c l a s s 2 r a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d R S 2 lim it s u n d e r :
-
normal operating conditions;
-
abnormal operating conditions;
-
single fault conditions,
and
and
e x c e p t fo r a c o u s tic ra d ia tio n s o u rc e s , a n d
is n o t R S 1 •
10.2.4
RS3
R S 3 is a c l a s s 3 r a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t e x c e e d s R S 2 lim it s u n d e r :
-
normal operating conditions;
-
abnormal operating conditions;
-
single fault conditions.
10.3
or
or
Safeguards against laser radiation
E q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g l a s e r ( s ) s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 3 9 .
W h e n a p p ly in g th e IE C 6 0 8 2 5 s e rie s , th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d ,
in p a r t i c u l a r t h o s e f o r :
safeguard
(se e
4.4.3);
-
t he ro b u s tn e s s o f a
-
o p e r a t i n g c o n d itio n s (s e e A n n e x B ); a n d
-
safety interlocks
(s e e A n n e x K ).
L a s e r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d fo r u s e b y a n
ordinary person
or an
instructed person
s h a ll n o t
be C la s s 3 B o r C la s s 4.
NOTE 1 National and regional legislation regarding occupational safety and health (OSH) and regarding the
general public, for example for consumer products, may contain additional or different requirements.
NOTE 2 For laser products designed to function as conventional lamps (such as laser image projector), see 4.4 of
IEC 60825-1:2014. For additional consideration for such equipment, see 10.4.
Compliance is checked by evaluation of available data sheets， by inspection and， if
necessary, by measurement.
NOTE 3
10.4
10.4.1
For guidance on measuring techniques, see the IEC 60825 series.
Safeguards against optical radiation from lamps and lamp systems (including
LED types)
General requirements
E q u ip m e n t
T a b le 39.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
e m ittin g
o p tic a l
ra d ia tio n
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
as
in d ic a te d
in
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
E le c tro n ic
H o w e ve r,
lig h t
e ffe c t
IE C T R
-195-
e q u ip m e n t
does
6 2 4 7 1 -2 s h o u ld
not
have
b e c o n s id e re d
to
c o m p ly
and
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
p ro p e r in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s
of
1 0 .4 .
s h a ll b e
p ro v id e d .
F o r l a m p s u s e d in o t h e r e q u i p m e n t , t h e f o l l o w i n g a p p l i e s :
NOTE 1 National legislation regarding occupational safety and health (OSH) may contain additional or different
requirements.
R a d ia tio n
exceed
n o t n e e d e d to b e
th e
le v e l s p e c ifie d
accessible
in T a b l e 40.
fo r th e c o r r e c t fu n c tio n in g o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll n o t
W hen
accessible
th e
ra d ia tio n
40,
10.4.3.
f u n c t i o n i n g o f t h e e q u i p m e n t n e e d s t o e x c e e d t h e l e v e l s in T a b l e
instructional safeguard
p ro v id e d w ith a n
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
le v e l fo r th e
co rre ct
th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e
Table 40 - Allowable radiation level according
to IEC 62471 (all parts) for each hazard type
Hazard type
Allowed radiation level
Ultraviolet hazard
Exempt Group
200 nm to 400 nm
Retinal blue light hazard
Exempt Group or Risk Group 1
300 nm to 700 nm
Retinal thermal hazard
Exempt Group or Risk Group 1
380 nm to 1400 nm
Cornea/lens infrared hazard
Exempt Group
780 nm to 3 000 nm
Retinal thermal hazard, weak visual stimulus
Exempt Group
780 nm to 1 400 nm
Lam ps and
la m p s y s te m s
in te n d e d fo r u s e
ordinary person
by an
instructed person
or an
s h a ll n o t e m it R is k G r o u p 3 e n e r g y .
T h e ris k g r o u p , b a s e d o n th e c la s s ific a tio n a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 2 4 7 1
th e
e q u ip m e n t.
s h a ll
be
If th e
in c lu d e d
s iz e
in t h e
o r d e s ig n
p a c k a g in g
o f th e
and
p ro d u ct m a ke s
in c lu d e d
in t h e
s e rie s , s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n
m a rk in g
im p ra c tic a l, th e
u s e r in s tru c tio n s .
m a rk in g
accessible
If th e
r a d i a t i o n l e v e l d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l e v e l s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e 4 0 , m a r k i n g is n o t r e q u i r e d .
If a
safety interlock
is u s e d f o r r e d u c i n g t h e
ra d ia tio n
le v e l,
it s h a l l
re d u c e th e
r a d ia tio n to
t h e a l l o w a b l e r a d i a t i o n l e v e l s s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e 4 0 .
W h e n e q u i p m e n t e m i t s o p t i c a l r a d i a t i o n in m o r e t h a n o n e h a z a r d t y p e , s e e a l s o 1 0 . 4 . 3 .
The
fo llo w in g
in s ta lla tio n .
in fo rm a tio n
T h is
s h o u ld
in fo rm a tio n
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
a ls o
be
in
th e
p ro v id e d
user
m anual
fo r s a fe
fo r
o p e ra tio n
s a fe
by a
o p e ra tio n
and
skilled person
w h o m a y b e e x p o s e d to R is k G r o u p 3 e n e r g y le v e ls .
-
Adequate
in s tru c tio n s
fo r
p ro p e r
in c lu d in g c le a r w a r n in g s c o n c e rn in g
a s s e m b ly ,
in s ta lla tio n ,
p r e c a u tio n s to a v o id
m a in te n a n c e
and
s a fe
use,
p o s s ib le e x p o s u r e to h a z a r d o u s
o p tic a l ra d ia tio n ; a n d
-
Advice
on
misuse,
s a fe
o p e ra tin g
m a lfu n c tio n s
p ro ce d u re s
a re
and
p ro ce d u re s
h a za rd o u s
d e ta ile d , th e y
w a rn in g s
fa ilu re
c o n c e rn in g
m odes.
W h e re
s h o u ld , w h e r e v e r p o s s ib le ,
s a fe p ro c e d u re s to b e fo llo w e d ; a n d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
and
reasonably foreseeable
s e rv ic in g
in c lu d e
and
m a in te n a n c e
e x p lic it in s tru c tio n s
on
- 196 -
The
m a rk in g
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t
s h o u ld
be
旧C
re p ro d u c e d
in
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
th e
user
m a n u a l.
A
y e llo w
b a c k g r o u n d is n o t r e q u i r e d in t h e u s e r m a n u a l .
NOTE 2
See IEC TR 62471-2 for more information including the terms and definitions used in this subclause.
10.4.2
The
Requirements for enclosures
enclosure
p ro te c tin g
c o rre c t fu n c tio n in g
4.4.3
c o m p ly w ith
M a te ria ls
s h a ll
re m a in s
o p tic a l
ra d ia tio n
e q u ip m e n t a n d
be
a
safeguard
s u ffic ie n tly
not
th a t e x c e e d s
and
re s is ta n t
needed
th e
to
be
accessible
le v e l s p e c ifie d
in T a b l e
fo r
40
th e
s h a ll
reinforced safeguard.
a n d is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a
th a t c o m p ris e
e q u ip m e n t
fu n c tio n
o f th e
a g a in s t
a re
to
exposed
UV
to
d e g ra d a tio n
to
ra d ia tio n
th e
e x te n t
e ffe c tiv e fo r th e e q u ip m e n t life tim e . M e ta l, g la s s a n d
fro m
th a t
a
la m p
th e
c e ra m ic
in t h e
safeguard
m a te ria ls a re
c o n s id e re d to b e re s is ta n t to d e g ra d a tio n .
10.4.3
For
Instructional safeguard
im a g e
p ro je c to rs ,
th e
instructional safeguard
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
of
6 .5 .4 a n d 6 .5 .5 o f IE C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 :2 0 1 5 fo r R is k G r o u p 2 a n d R is k G r o u p 3, r e s p e c tiv e ly .
F o r im a g e p ro je c to r s w ith la m p s , th e c a u tio n a r y s ta te m e n t d e fin e d
be used as an
For
a ll
C la u s e
o th e r
F.5
in I E C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 : 2 0 1 5 s h a l l
instructional safeguard.
e q u ip m e n t
w ith
la m p s ,
s h a ll b e u s e d . T h e e le m e n ts o f
e le m e n t 1a
th e
UV
instructional safeguard
t h e instructional safeguard
an
ra d ia tio n
sym bol
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 0 :2 0 1 0 -0 8
fo r
u ltra v io le t h a z a rd ; o r
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 4 1 :2 0 1 0 - 0 8 fo r re tin a l
b lu e lig h t h a z a rd a n d R e tin a l th e r m a l h a z a rd ; o r
th e
IR
ra d ia tio n
c o rn e a /le n s
in fra re d
sym bol
h a za rd
________,
and
re tin a l
s tim u lu s
e le m e n t 2:
A c c o r d in g to T a b le 41 o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
e le m e n t 3 a n d 4:
A c c o rd in g to T a b le 4 2 o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
T h e e le m e n ts 1a a n d 2 s h a ll b e b la c k o n a y e llo w b a c k g r o u n d .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 1 5 1 :2 0 1 2 - 0 2
th e rm a l
h a za rd ,
weak
fo r
v is u a l
旧C
- 197 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table 41 - Hazard-related risk group marking of equipment
Hazard
Exempt Group
Ultraviolet hazard
200 nm to 400 nm
Not required
Retinal blue light
hazard
Not required
Risk Group 1
Risk Group 2
NOTICE
Risk Group 3
CAUTION
WARNING
UV emitted from this UV emitted from this
product
product.
CAUTION
WARNING
Possibly hazardous
optical radiation emitted
from this product
Possibly hazardous
optical radiation emitted
from this product
CAUTION
WARNING
Possibly hazardous
optical radiation emitted
from this product
Possibly hazardous
optical radiation emitted
from this product
NOTICE
CAUTION
WARNING
IR emitted from this
product
IR emitted from this
product
IR emitted from this
product.
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
IR emitted from this
product
IR emitted from this
product.
IR emitted from this
product.
Not required
300 nm to 700 nm
Retinal thermal
hazard
Not required
Not required
380 nm to 1400 nm
Cornea/lens infrared
hazard
Not required
780 nm to 3 000 nm
Retinal thermal
Not required
hazard, weak visual
stimulus
UV emitted from this
product.
780 nm to 1 400 nm
Table 42 - Explanation of marking information and guidance on control measures
Hazard
Exempt Group
Ultraviolet hazard
Risk Group 2
Minimize exposure to Eye or skin irritation
Avoid eye and skin
eyes or skin. Use
may result from
exposure to
appropriate shielding. exposure. Use
unshielded product.
appropriate shielding.
Not required
Not required
Do not stare at
operating lamp. May
be harmful to the
eyes.
Do not look at
operating lamp. Eye
injury may result.
Not required
Not required
Do not stare at
operating lamp. May
be harmful to the
eyes.
Do not look at
operating lamp. Eye
injury may result.
Not required
Use appropriate
shielding or eye
protection.
Avoid eye
exposure.Use
appropriate shielding
or eye protection.
Avoid eye exposure.
Use appropriate
shielding or eye
protection.
Not required
Do not stare at
operating lamp.
Do not stare at
operating lamp.
Do not look at
operating lamp.
300 nm to 700 nm
Retinal thermal
hazard
380 nm to 1400 nm
Cornea/lens infrared
hazard
780 nm to 3 000 nm
Retinal thermal
hazard, weak visual
stimulus
Risk Group 3
Not required
200 nm to 400 nm
Retinal blue light
hazard
Risk Group 1
780 nm to 1 400 nm
W hen
e q u ip m e n t
e q u ip m e n t
s p e c tra l
s h a ll
re g io n
e m its
be
o p tic a l
c la s s ifie d
re q u ire s
a
ra d ia tio n
fo r
m a rk in g
th e
in
m ost
m o re
th a n
re s tric tiv e
p e r T a b le 41
one
case.
o r T a b le 4 2 ,
h a za rd
If t h e
a ll
s p e c tra l
o p tic a l
re g io n ,
ra d ia tio n
re le v a n t w a rn in g s
th e
in
any
s h a ll
be
i n c lu d e d . F o r e x a m p l e , f o r a la m p a s s ig n e d to R is k G r o u p 3 o n t h e b a s is o f a r e t in a l IR h a z a r d
and
e m ittin g
U V to th e
le v e l o f R is k G r o u p
2, th e
le g e n d
o f th e
m a rk in g
s h a ll
in d ic a te
R is k
G r o u p 3, w ith th e a p p r o p r ia te ‘W a r n in g ’ te x t; a n d s h o w th e ‘C a u t io n ’ te x t f o r R is k G r o u p 2 fo r
t h e U V , b u t s h a l l n o t m e n t i o n R i s k G r o u p 2 e x p l i c i t l y , a s i l l u s t r a t e d in F i g u r e 5 0 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
—198 —
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
RISK GROUP 3
^
W A R N I N G IR e m it t e d f r o m th is p r o d u c t . D o n o t lo o k a t t h e o p e r a t in g la m p .
A
C A U T I O N U V e m itte d fr o m th is p ro d u c t. E y e o r s k in irrita tio n m a y
,
r esul t fr o m e x p o s u re . U s e a p p ro p ria te s h ie ld in g .
Figure 50 - Example of a warning label for a lamp
with multiple hazard spectral regions
10.4.4
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by evaluation of available data sheets, by inspection and， if
necessary, by measurement.
NOTE
For guidance on measuring techniques, see the relevant part of the IEC 62471 series.
Compliance against material degradation from UV radiation is checked by the relevant tests in
Annex C.
10.5
Safeguards against X-radiation
10.5.1
Requirements
E q u ip m e n t
X -ra d ia tio n
th a t
e x its
th e
e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions,
An
equipment safeguard
skilled person
s h a ll
and
exceed
RS1
under
normal
single fault conditions.
is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n R S 2 o r R S 3 a n d a ll p e r s o n s .
D o o rs a n d c o v e rs a c tin g a s a
fo r a
not
safeguard
b e p ro v id e d
th a t, w h e n o p e n , w o u ld a llo w a c c e s s to
w ith
an
instructional safeguard
RS2
or
in a c c o r d a n c e
RS3
w ith
C la u s e F .5 .
10.5.2
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and, where necessary, by the test of 10.5.3.
10.5.3
Test method
Equipment that is likely to produce ionizing radiation is checked by measuring the amount of
radiation. Account is taken of the background level.
The amount of radiation is determined by means of a radiation monitor of the ionizing
chamber type with an effective area of 1 〇 d 〇 mm2 or by measuring equipment o f other types
giving equivalent results.
Measurements are made with the BUT operating at the most unfavourable supply voltage
(see B.2.3) and with controls for an o rd in a ry p e rs o n and an in s tru c te d p e rso n , and controls
for a s k ille d p e rs o n that are not locked in a reliable manner, adjusted so as to give maximum
radiation whilst maintaining the equipment operative for normal use.
NOTE 1 Soldered joints and fixing by application of paint, epoxy, or similar materials are considered reliable
locking means.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-199-
Moreover, the measurement shall be made under any a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n and
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s that can cause an increase of the high-voltage, provided an
intelligible picture is maintained for 5 min, at the end o f which the measurement is made and
averaged over 5 min.
During the measurements, an intelligible picture is to be maintained.
A picture is considered to be intelligible if the following conditions are met:
-
a scanning amplitude of at least 70 % of the usable screen for both width and height;
-
a minimum luminance of 50 cd/m2 with locked blank raster provided by a test generator;
-
not more than 12 flashovers in a 1 h period; and
-
a horizontal resolution corresponding to at least 1，5 MHz in the centre with a similar
vertical degradation.
NOTE 2 In the USA and Canada, an intelligible picture is in synchronization while covering 60 % of the viewable
scree 门 area.
10.6
Safeguards against acoustic energy sources
10.6.1
General
Safeguard
p re ssu re
re q u ire m e n ts
le v e ls fro m
R e q u ire m e n ts
fo r
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t
lo n g -te rm
p e rs o n a l m u s ic p la y e rs c lo s e ly c o u p le d
fo r e a rp h o n e s
and
headphones
in te n d e d
e xp o su re
e x c e s s iv e
sound
to th e e a r a re s p e c ifie d
b e lo w .
fo r u s e w ith
to
p e rso n a l
m u s ic
p la y e rs
a re a ls o c o v e r e d
A
p e rso n a l
person,
m u s ic
p la y e r
(P M P )
is
a
p o rta b le
e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
fo r
use
by
an
ordinary
th a t:
-
is d e s i g n e d t o a l l o w t h e u s e r t o l i s t e n t o a u d i o o r a u d i o v i s u a l c o n t e n t / m a t e r i a l ; a n d
-
uses
a lis te n in g
d e v ic e , s u c h
as headphones
o r e a rp h o n e s th a t ca n
be w o rn
in o r o n o r
a ro u n d th e e a rs ; a n d
-
h a s a p la y e r th a t c a n
be b o d y w o rn
(o f a s iz e s u ita b le to b e c a rrie d
in a c l o t h i n g
p o c k e t)
a n d i s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e u s e r t o w a l k a r o u n d w i t h w h i l e in c o n t i n u o u s u s e ( f o r e x a m p l e , o n a
s t r e e t , in a s u b w a y , a t a n a i r p o r t , e t c . ) .
EXAMPLES
equipment.
Portable CD players, MP3 audio players, mobile phones with MP3 type features, PDAs or similar
P e r s o n a l m u s ic p la y e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f e ith e r 1 0 .6 .2 o r 1 0 .6 .3 .
NOTE 1
Protection against acoustic energy sources from telecom applications is referenced to ITU-T P.360.
NOTE 2 It is the intention of the Committee to allow the alternative methods for now, but to only use the dose
measurement method as given in 10.6.3 in future. Therefore, manufacturers are encouraged to implement 10.6.3
as soo 门 as possible.
L is te n in g d e v ic e s s o ld s e p a r a t e ly s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 1 0 .6 .6 .
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a re v a lid fo r m u s ic o r v id e o m o d e o n ly .
F o r e q u ip m e n t th a t
is c l e a r l y
d e s ig n e d
or
in te n d e d
p rim a rily fo r u s e
b y c h ild re n ,
a d d itio n a l
lim its o f th e r e le v a n t to y s ta n d a r d s m a y a p p ly .
NOTE 3 In Europe, the relevant requirements are given in EN 71-1:2011, 4.20 and the related tests methods and
measurement distances apply.
T h e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :
-
professional equipment;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
-
h e a r i n g a id e q u ip m e n t a n d o t h e r d e v ic e s f o r a s s is t iv e lis t e n in g ; a n d
-
t h e fo llo w in g ty p e o f a n a lo g u e p e rs o n a l m u s ic p la y e rs :
•
lo n g
d is ta n c e
ra d io
re c e iv e r (fo r e x a m p le ,
ra d io re c e iv e r, a n A M
•
a
m u ltib a n d
ra d io
re c e iv e r o r w o rld
band
ra d io re c e iv e r), a n d
c a s s e tte p la y e r/re c o rd e r; a n d
NOTE 2 This exemption has been allowed because this technology is falling out of use and it is expected that
within a few years it will no longer exist. This exemption will not be extended to other technologies.
-
a
p la y e r w h ile
c o n n e c te d
to
an
e x te rn a l
a m p lifie r th a t
does
n o t a llo w
th e
u s e r to
w a lk
a r o u n d w h i l e in u s e .
10.6.2
Classification
10.6.2.1
RS1
-
RS1 limits
is a c l a s s 1 a c o u s t i c e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e f o l l o w i n g :
f or
e q u ip m e n t
p ro p rie ta ry
c o m b in a tio n
p ro v id e d
c o n n e c to r
as
a
b e tw e e n
o f p la y e r a n d
o u tp u t
v a lu e
th e
lis te n in g
of
T a b le 3 9
(p la y e r
p la y e r
d e v ic e
T a c o u s tic
a u to m a tic d e te c tio n , th e
sound
package
is
w ith
and
its
its
known
lis te n in g
lis te n in g
d e v ic e ),
d e v ic e ,
by o th e r m e a n s
and
or
such
w ith
w h e re
as
a
th e
s e ttin g
or
o u tp u t s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to th e r e le v a n t R S 1
when
p la y in g
th e
fix e d
“p ro g ra m m e
s im u la tio n
n o is e ”
d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
-
f or e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a s ta n d a r d iz e d c o n n e c to r (fo r e x a m p le , a 3 ,5 m m p h o n e ja c k )
th a t a llo w s c o n n e c tio n
v o lta g e
s h a ll
be
to a lis te n in g
lo w e r o r e q u a l
to
d e v ic e fo r g e n e ra l u s e , th e
th e
re le v a n t
RS1
a n a lo g u e
u n w e ig h te d
RMS
o u tp u t v a lu e
o u tp u t
o f T a b le 39
w h e n p l a y i n g t h e f i x e d “ p r o g r a m m e s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
-
f or e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d
th e
re le v a n t
RS1
w ith
d ig ita l
a d ig ita l o u tp u t, th e o u tp u t s ig n a l s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to
o u tp u t
v a lu e
of
T a b le 3 9
when
p la y in g
th e
fix e d
“p ro g ra m m e
s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
NOTE 1 Unless otherwise specified, wherever the term acoustic output is used in 10.6.2, LAeq r is the A-weighted
equivalent sound pressure level over a 30 s period.
If t h e
p la y e r
is a b l e
L Aeq r ) m e a s u r e d
p ro g ra m m e
to
a n a ly s e
o v e r th e
s im u la tio n
a song,
d u ra tio n
n o is e ,
th e
and
o f th e
o u tp u t
w h e re
song
th e
a ve ra g e
is l o w e r t h a n
is c o n s i d e r e d
RS1
sound
th e
as
p re ssu re
a ve ra g e
lo n g
as
(lo n g
te rm
p ro d u c e d
b y th e
a ve ra g e
sound
th e
p r e s s u r e o f t h e s o n g d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e b a s i c l i m i t o f 8 5 d B ( A ) . In t h i s c a s e ,
T becom es
th e
d u ra tio n o f th e s o n g .
NOTE 2 Classical music typically has an average sound pressure (long term LAeq T) which is much lower than the
average programme simulation noise.
For example, if the player is set with the programme simulation noise to 85 dB(A), but the average sound pressure
of the song is only 65 dB(A), the output is considered to be RS1 as long as the average sound level of the song is
not above the basic limit of 85 dB(A).
10.6.2.2
RS2 limits
R S 2 is a c l a s s 2 a c o u s t i c e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e f o l l o w i n g :
-
f or
e q u ip m e n t
p ro p rie ta ry
c o m b in a tio n
p ro v id e d
c o n n e c to r
as
a
package
b e tw e e n
o f p la y e r a n d
th e
lis te n in g
p la y e r
d e v ic e
a u to m a tic d e te c tio n , th e
LAeq T a c o u s t i c
sound
T a b le 3 9
o u tp u t
v a lu e
of
(p la y e r
when
is
w ith
and
its
known
its
lis te n in g
lis te n in g
d e v ic e ),
d e v ic e ,
by o th e r m e a n s
and
or
such
w ith
w h e re
as
s e ttin g
a
th e
or
o u tp u t s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to th e r e le v a n t R S 2
p la y in g
th e
fix e d
“p ro g ra m m e
s im u la tio n
n o is e ”
d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
一
fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a s ta n d a r d iz e d c o n n e c to r (fo r e x a m p le , a 3 ,5 m m
p h o n e ja c k )
th a t a llo w s c o n n e c tio n
RMS
v o lta g e
s h a ll
be
to a lis te n in g
lo w e r o r e q u a l
to
d e v ic e fo r g e n e ra l u s e , th e
th e
re le v a n t
RS2
a n a lo g u e
u n w e ig h te d
o u tp u t v a lu e
w h e n p l a y i n g t h e f i x e d “ p r o g r a m m e s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o u tp u t
o f T a b le 39
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
f or e q u ip m e n t p r o v id e d
th e
re le v a n t
RS2
w ith
d ig ita l
a d ig ita l o u t p u t , th e o u t p u t s ig n a l s h a ll b e lo w e r o r e q u a l to
o u tp u t
v a lu e
of
T a b le 3 9
when
p la y in g
th e
fix e d
"p ro g ra m m e
s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 .
10.6.2.3
RS3 limits
R S 3 is a c l a s s 3 a c o u s t i c e n e r g y s o u r c e t h a t e x c e e d s R S 2 l i m i t s .
10.6.3
Requirements for dose-based systems
10.6.3.1
General requirements
P e rs o n a l m u s ic p la y e rs s h a ll g iv e th e w a r n in g s
a s p ro v id e d
b e lo w w h e n
te s te d
a c c o rd in g
to
EN 5 0 3 3 2 -3 .
T h e m a n u fa c tu r e r m a y o ffe r o p tio n a l s e ttin g s to a llo w th e u s e rs to m o d ify w h e n a n d h o w th e y
w is h
to
re c e iv e
d e fe a tin g th e
th e
n o tific a tio n s
safeguards.
th e ir p h y s ic a l c a p a b ilitie s
a d m in is tra to r
(fo r
and
w a rn in g s
to
p ro m o te
a
b e tte r u s e r e x p e rie n c e
T h is a llo w s th e u s e rs to b e in fo rm e d
and
e x a m p le ,
d e v ic e
p a re n ta l
usage
needs.
re s tric tio n s ,
If s u c h
w ith o u t
in a m e t h o d t h a t b e s t m e e t s
o p tio n a l s e ttin g s a re o ffe re d , a n
b u s in e s s /e d u c a tio n a l
a d m in is tra to rs ,
e tc .)
s h a ll b e a b le to lo c k a n y o p tio n a l s e ttin g s in to a s p e c if ic c o n fig u r a tio n .
T h e p e r s o n a l m u s ic p la y e r s h a ll b e s u p p lie d w ith e a s y to u n d e r s ta n d e x p la n a tio n o f th e d o s e
m a n a g e m e n t s y s te m
m ay
s ig n ific a n tly
and
how
c o n trib u te
to u s e
to
th e
it. T h e
u s e r s h o u ld
sound exposure
be m ade
(fo r
a w a re th a t o th e r s o u rc e s
e x a m p le
w o rk,
tra n s p o rta tio n ,
c o n c e rts , c lu b s , c in e m a , c a r ra c e s , e tc .).
10.6.3.2
Dose-based warning and automatic decrease
W h e n a d o s e o f 1 0 0 % C S D is r e a c h e d ( R S 2 ) , a n d a t l e a s t a t e v e r y 1 0 0 % f u r t h e r i n c r e a s e o f
C S D , t h e d e v i c e s h a l l w a r n t h e u s e r a n d r e q u i r e a n a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t . In c a s e t h e u s e r d o e s
n o t a c k n o w le d g e , th e o u tp u t le v e l s h a ll a u to m a tic a lly d e c r e a s e to R S 1 .
100 % CSD is based on 80 dB(A) for 40 h.
NOTE
T h e w a r n in g s h a ll a t le a s t c le a r ly in d ic a te th a t lis te n in g a b o v e 1 0 0 % C S D le a d s to th e ris k o f
h e a rin g d a m a g e o r lo s s .
10.6.3.3
The
Exposure-based warning and requirements
p u rp o se
o f th e d o s e -b a s e d
o n l y r e q u i r e m e n t is t o
in fo rm
and
e d u c a te
u se rs
a b o u t s a fe
lis te n in g p ra c tic e .
In a d d i t i o n to d o s e - b a s e d r e q u i r e m e n t s , a s y s t e m s h a ll t h e r e f o r e e it h e r :
-
L i mi t t h e 3 0 s i n t e g r a t e d e x p o s u r e le v e l ( M E L 3 0 ) to t h e r e l e v a n t R S 2 l i m i t o f T a b l e 3 9 . T h e
lim ite r s e ttlin g tim e s h a ll b e 2 0 s o r fa s te r . T h e m e a s u r e m e n t o f s u c h lim itin g fu n c tio n a lity
is ,
a fte r
a llo w in g
th e
20 s
s e ttlin g
tim e
of
th e
PMP
lim ite r,
c o n d u c te d
a c c o rd in g
to
E N 5 0 3 3 2 -1 o r E N 5 0 3 3 2 -2 a s a p p lic a b le .
-
Wa r n
The
th e
u s e r in c a s e
w a rn in g
re m a in
v is ib le
m ay
fo r
momentary exposure level (MEL)
be
g iv e n
v is u a lly
at
le a s t
5
s.
or
If t h e
a u d ib ly .
w a rn in g
If th e
is
e q u a ls o r e x c e e d s
w a rn in g
g iv e n
is
a u d ib ly ,
g iv e n
it
100
v is u a lly ,
s h a ll
d B (A ).
it s h a l l
in te rru p t
p r o g r a m m e c l e a r l y a n d u n m i s t a k i n g l y f o r a t le a s t 1 s.
10.6.4
Measurement methods
A ll v o lu m e c o n t r o ls s h a ll b e t u r n e d to m a x im u m
d u rin g te s ts .
M e a s u r e m e n t s s h a l l b e m a d e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 o r E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 2 a s a p p l i c a b l e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
旧C
10.6.5
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Protection of persons
E x c e p t a s g iv e n
b e l o w ，p r o t e c t i o n
instructed persons
and
re q u ire m e n ts
skilled persons
accessible
fo r p a rts
ordinary persons，
to
a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .
NOTE 1 Volume control is not considered a safeguard.
An
equipment safeguard
s h a ll p r e v e n t e x p o s u r e
ordinary person
of an
RS2
to a n
so u rce
u n le s s a ll o f t h e f o l l o w i n g a r e m e t:
instructional safeguard
-
an
-
t he
is p r o v i d e d a s g i v e n b e l o w ; a n d
instructional safeguard i s a c k n o w l e d g e d b y t h e u s e r . T h e o u t p u t l e v e l s h a l l n o t b e
h i g h e r t h a n RS1 u n t i l t h e a c k n o w l e d g m e n t i s m a d e . T h e a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t d o e s n o t n e e d
to b e re p e a te d m o re th a n o n c e e v e r y 2 0 h o f c u m u la tiv e lis te n in g tim e .
NOTE 2 The 20 h listening time is the accumulative listening time, independent of how often and how long
the personal music player has been switched off.
The
o u tp u t le v e l
s h a ll
a u to m a tic a lly
re tu rn
to
an
o u tp u t
le v e l
n o t e x c e e d in g
RS1
when
th e
p o w e r is s w i t c h e d o ff.
A
skilled person
W hen
re q u ire d ,
e x c e p t th a t th e
s h a ll n o t u n in t e n t io n a lly b e e x p o s e d to R S 3 .
instructional safeguard
instructional safeguard s h a l l
an
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
C la u s e
F.5
s h a ll
be
used,
b e p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t, o n th e p a c k a g in g ,
instructional safeguard m a y b e g i v e n t h r o u g h
e l e m e n t s o f t h e instructional safeguard s h a l l b e a s
o r in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n m a n u a l . A l t e r n a t i v e l y , t h e
th e e q u ip m e n t d is p la y d u rin g
use. T he
fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t 1a:
th e s y m b o l
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ H ig h s o u n d p r e s s u r e ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d in g
-
e l e m e n t 3:
“ H e a rin g d a m a g e ris k ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
-
e l e m e n t 4:
“ D o n o t lis te n a t h ig h v o lu m e le v e ls fo r lo n g p e r io d s .” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d in g
10.6.6
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 4 (2 0 1 1 -0 1 )
Requirements for listening devices (headphones, earphones, etc.)
10.6.6.1
Corded listening devices with analogue input
W i t h 9 4 d B ( A ) L Aeq a c o u s t i c p r e s s u r e o u t p u t o f t h e l i s t e n i n g d e v i c e , a n d w i t h t h e v o l u m e a n d
sound
s e ttin g s
sound
fe a tu re
m e a su re d
in t h e
lik e
lis te n in g
d e v ic e
e q u a liz a tio n ,
a c o u s tic
o u tp u t,
th e
e tc .)
(fo r e x a m p le ,
s e t to th e
in p u t v o lta g e
b u ilt-in
c o m b in a tio n
o f th e
le v e l c o n tr o l,
o f p o s itio n s
lis te n in g
“ p r o g r a m m e s i m u l a t i o n n o i s e ” a s d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1
NOTE
v o lu m e
d e v ic e
a d d itio n a l
th a t m a x im iz e
when
p la y in g
th e
th e
fix e d
s h a ll b e > 7 5 m V .
The values of 94 dB(A) and 75 mV correspond with 85 dB(A) and 27 mV or 100 dB(A) and 150 mV.
10.6.6.2
Corded listening devices with digital input
W ith
p la y in g
any
E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 ，a n d
b u ilt-in
v o lu m e
c o m b in a tio n
of
d e v ic e
w ith
le v e l
th e
p la y in g
v o lu m e
c o n tro l,
p o s itio n s
th a t
th e
fix e d
and
sound
a d d itio n a l
m a x im iz e
“p ro g ra m m e
s e ttin g s
sound
th e
fe a tu re
m e a su re d
in
s im u la tio n
th e
lik e
lis te n in g
n o is e ”
d e s c rib e d
d e v ic e
(fo r e x a m p le ,
e q u a liz a tio n ,
a c o u s tic
o u tp u t,
th e
e tc .)
L Aeq,r
o u tp u t o f th e lis te n in g d e v ic e s h a ll b e < 1 0 0 d B ( A ) w ith a n in p u t s ig n a l o f - 1 0 d B F S .
10.6.6.3
Cordless listening devices
I门 c o r d le s s m o d e ,
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
set
to
in
th e
a c o u s tic
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
wi t h
any
p la y in g
and
tra n s m ittin g
d e v ic e
p la y in g
th e
fix e d
p ro g ra m m e
s im u la tio n
n o is e
d e s c r i b e d in E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 ; a n d
-
r e s p e c t i n g th e c o r d le s s tr a n s m is s io n s ta n d a r d s , w h e r e a n a ir in te r fa c e s ta n d a r d e x is ts th a t
s p e c ifie s th e e q u iv a le n t a c o u s tic le v e l; a n d
-
w i t h v o l u m e a n d s o u n d s e t t i n g s in t h e r e c e i v i n g d e v i c e ( f o r e x a m p l e , b u i l t - i n v o l u m e l e v e l
c o n tr o l, a d d itio n a l s o u n d f e a t u r e lik e e q u a liz a tio n , e tc .) s e t to th e c o m b in a tio n o f p o s itio n s
th a t
m a x im iz e
th e
m e a su re d
a c o u s tic
o u tp u t
fo r
th e
above
m e n tio n e d
p ro g ra m m e
s im u la tio n n o is e ,
-
t h e L Aeq
T a c o u s tic
o u tp u t o f th e lis te n in g d e v ic e s h a ll b e < 1 0 0 d B ( A ) w ith a n in p u t s ig n a l
o f -1 0 dBFS.
10.6.6.4
Measurement method
Measurements shall be made in accordance with EN 50332-2 as applicable.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 204 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex A
(informative)
Examples of equipment within the scope of this document
S o m e e x a m p le s o f e q u ip m e n t w ith in th e s c o p e o f th is d o c u m e n t a re :
Generic product type
Specific example of generic type
Banking equipment
Monetary processing machines including automated teller (cash dispensing)
machines (ATM)
Consumer electronic equipment
(including professional audio,
video and musical instrument
equipment)
Receiving equipment and amplifiers for sound and/or vision, supply
equipment intended to supply other equipment covered by the scope of this
document, electronic musical instruments, and electronic accessories such
as rhythm generators, tone generators, music tuners and the like for use with
electronic or non-electronic musical instruments, audio and/or video
educational equipment, video projectors, video cameras and video monitors,
network surveillance cameras, video games, juke boxes, record and optical
disc players, tape and optical disc recorders, antenna signal converters and
amplifiers, antenna positioners, Citizen's Band equipment, equipment for
imagery, electronic light effect equipment, intercommunication equipment
using low voltage mains as the transmission medium, cable head-end
receivers, multimedia equipment, electronic flash equipment
Data and text processing
machines and associated
equipment
Data preparation equipment, data processing equipment, data storage
equipment, personal computers, tablets, smartphones, wearable devices,
plotters, printers (including 3D printers 〉 ， scanners, text processing
equipment, visual display units
Data network equipment
Bridges, data circuit terminating equipment, data terminal equipment, routers
Electrical and electronic retail
equipment
Cash registers, point of sale terminals including associated electronic scales
Electrical and electronic office
machines
Calculators, copying machines, dictation equipment, document shredding
machines, duplicators, erasers, micrographic office equipment, motoroperated files, paper trimmers (punchers, cutting machines, separators),
paper jogging machines, pencil sharpeners, staplers, typewriters
Other information technology
equipment
Photoprinting equipment, public information terminals, electronic kiosks,
multimedia equipment
Postage equipment
Mail processing machines, postage machines
Telecommunication network
infrastructure equipment
Billing equipment, multiplexers, network powering equipment, network
terminating equipment, radio base stations ， repeaters, transmission
equipment, telecommunication switching equipment
Telecommunication terminal
equipment
Facsimile equipment, key telephone systems, modems, PABXs, pagers,
telephone answering machines, telephone sets (wired and wireless)
T h i s l i s t is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e a l l - i n c l u s i v e , a n d e q u i p m e n t t h a t is n o t l i s t e d is n o t n e c e s s a r i l y
e x c lu d e d fro m th e s c o p e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex B
(normative)
Normal operating condition tests， abnormal operating
condition tests and single fault condition tests
B.1
General
B.1.1
Test applicability
T h is a n n e x s p e c ifie s v a rio u s te s ts a n d te s t c o n d itio n s a p p lic a b le to th e e q u ip m e n t.
If it is
e v id e n t th a t
a
p a rtic u la r te s t
is
n o t a p p lic a b le ,
a v a ila b le d a ta , th e te s t s h a ll n o t b e m a d e . T e s ts
or
not n e ce ssa ry
a fte r
in s p e c tio n
in t h i s d o c u m e n t s h a l l b e c o n d u c t e d
of
o n l y if
s a f e t y is i n v o l v e d .
In o r d e r t o e s t a b l i s h w h e t h e r o r n o t a t e s t is a p p l i c a b l e , t h e c i r c u i t s a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n s h a ll b e
c a re fu lly
in v e s tig a te d
consequence
of
a
to
fa u lt
ta k e
m ay
in to
or
account
m ay
not
th e
consequences
re q u ire
th e
use
of
a
of
p o s s ib le
safeguard
fa u lts .
to
The
re d u c e
th e
lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y o r fire .
B.1.2
Type of test
type tests.
E x c e p t w h e re o th e rw is e s ta te d , te s ts s p e c ifie d a re
B.1.3
Test samples
U n le s s
o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d ,
th e
s a m p le
under
te s t
s h a ll
be
re p re s e n ta tiv e
of
th e
a c tu a l
be
c o n d u c te d
e q u ip m e n t o r s h a ll b e th e a c tu a l e q u ip m e n t.
As
an
a lte rn a tiv e
s e p a ra te ly
on
in s p e c tio n
o f th e
th a t th e
such
to
c irc u its ,
te s ts
c o m p o n e n ts
e q u ip m e n t a n d
a s s e m b le d
te s t
c o n d u c tin g
in d ic a te s
th e
c o m p le te
o r s u b -a s s e m b lie s
c irc u it a rra n g e m e n ts
e q u ip m e n t w o u ld
th e
on
lik e lih o o d
c o n fo rm
to
th e
o f n o n -c o n fo rm a n c e
e q u ip m e n t,
o u ts id e
e n s u re
th e
te s ts
e q u ip m e n t,
th a t s u c h
re q u ire m e n ts
in
th e
m ay
te s tin g
o f th is
c o m p le te
p ro v id e d
w ill
in d ic a te
d o c u m e n t.
e q u ip m e n t,
th a t
If a n y
th e
te s t
s h a l l b e r e p e a t e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t .
If a t e s t c o u ld b e d e s t r u c t iv e , a m o d e l m a y b e u s e d to r e p r e s e n t th e c o n d it io n to b e e v a lu a t e d .
B.1.4
Compliance by inspection of relevant data
W h e r e in t h i s d o c u m e n t c o m p l i a n c e o f m a t e r i a l s , c o m p o n e n t s o r s u b a s s e m b l i e s is c h e c k e d b y
in s p e c tio n o r b y te s tin g o f p ro p e rtie s , c o m p lia n c e m a y b e c o n firm e d b y re v ie w in g a n y re le v a n t
d a ta o r p re v io u s te s t re s u lts th a t a re a v a ila b le in s te a d o f c a rry in g o u t th e s p e c ifie d
B.1.5
The
type tests.
Temperature measurement conditions
te s t
m e a su re m e n t
s e t-u p
c o n d itio n s . W h e re a m a x im u m
based
on
th e
a s s u m p tio n
th a t
s h a ll
re p ro d u ce
te m p e ra tu re
th e
ro o m
(Tmax)
a m b ie n t
th e
m ost
se ve re
e q u ip m e n t
in s ta lla tio n
i s s p e c i f i e d f o r c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t e s t s , it is
a ir
te m p e ra tu re
w ill
be
25 °C
when
e q u i p m e n t is o p e r a t i n g . H o w e v e r , t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r m a y s p e c i f y a d i f f e r e n t m a x i m u m
th e
a m b ie n t
a ir te m p e r a tu r e .
U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d , it i s n o t n e c e s s a r y t o m a i n t a i n t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e ( r a m b ) a t
a s p e c i f i c v a l u e d u r i n g t e s t s , b u t it s h a l l b e m o n i t o r e d a n d r e c o r d e d .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
W ith
re fe re n c e
a tta in e d ,
to
s te a d y
th o s e
s ta te
te s ts
th a t a re
is c o n s i d e r e d
to
to
be
c o n tin u e d
e x is t if th e
u n til
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
s te a d y
te m p e ra tu re
ris e
s ta te
does
te m p e ra tu re s
not exceed
a re
3 K in
3 0 m i n . If t h e m e a s u r e d t e m p e r a t u r e is a t l e a s t 1 0 % l e s s t h a n t h e s p e c i f i e d t e m p e r a t u r e l im i t ,
s t e a d y s t a t e i s c o n s i d e r e d t o e x i s t i f t h e t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e d o e s n o t e x c e e d 1 K in 5 m i n .
U n le s s a p a rtic u la r m e th o d
by th e th e rm o c o u p le
is s p e c i f i e d , t e m p e r a t u r e s o f w i n d i n g s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
m e th o d
o r b y a n y o th e r m e th o d
g iv in g
th e
e ith e r
a v e ra g e te m p e ra tu re
o f th e
w in d in g w ire s s u c h a s th e re s is ta n c e m e th o d .
B.2
Normal operating conditions
B.2.1
General
E x c e p t w h e r e s p e c i f i c t e s t c o n d i t i o n s a r e s t a t e d e l s e w h e r e a n d w h e r e it is c l e a r t h a t t h e r e is a
s ig n ific a n t
im p a c t
u n fa v o u ra b le
on
th e
re s u lts
o f th e
te s t,
normal operating conditions
-
s u p p l y v o lta g e ;
-
s u p p l y fre q u e n c y ;
-
environmental
c o n d itio n s
(fo r
th e
te s ts
s h a ll
be
c o n d u c te d
u n d e r th e
m ost
ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e fo llo w in g p a r a m e t e r s :
e x a m p le ,
th e
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s
ra te d
m a x im u m
a m b ie n t
te m p e ra tu re );
-
physical
lo c a tio n
of
e q u ip m e n t
and
p o s itio n
of
m o v a b le
p a rts ,
as
s p e c ifie d
by
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r;
-
o p e r a t i n g m o d e , in c lu d in g e x te rn a l lo a d in g d u e to in te rc o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
a d j u s t m e n t o f a c o n tro l.
F o r a u d io
a m p lifie rs
and
e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g
an
a u d io
a m p lifie r,
a d d itio n a l te s t c o n d itio n s
a p p ly , s e e A n n e x E.
B.2.2
Supply frequency
In d e t e r m i n i n g t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e s u p p l y f r e q u e n c y f o r a t e s t , d i f f e r e n t f r e q u e n c i e s w i t h i n
th e
rated frequency
c o n s id e ra tio n
o f th e
ra n g e
s h a ll
to le ra n c e
be ta k e n
on
a
in to
a c c o u n t (fo r e x a m p le ,
rated frequency
(fo r
50 H z and 60 Hz) but
e x a m p le ，5 0 H z ± 0 ,5 H z )
is
not
n e ce ssa ry.
B.2.3
Supply voltage
In d e t e r m i n i n g t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e s u p p l y v o l t a g e f o r a t e s t , t h e f o l l o w i n g v a r i a b l e s s h a ll b e
ta k e n in to a c c o u n t:
rated voltages;
-
multiple
-
extremes of
-
tolerance on
U n le s s
th e
rated voltage ranges;
rated voltage
a s d e c la re d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
m a n u fa c tu re r d e c la re s
as + 1 0 % and - 1 0 % fo r A C
and
mains
a w id e r to le ra n c e ,
th e
m in im u m
a n d + 2 0 % a n d - 1 5 % fo r D C
to le ra n c e
mains.
b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r to be re s tric te d to c o n n e c tio n to a c o n d itio n e d
s h a ll
b e ta k e n
E q u ip m e n t in te n d e d
p o w e r s u p p ly s y s te m
(fo r
e x a m p l e , a U P S ) m a y b e p r o v id e d w it h a n a r r o w e r t o l e r a n c e if t h e e q u i p m e n t is a ls o p r o v id e d
w ith in s tr u c tio n s s p e c ify in g s u c h r e s tr ic tio n .
B.2.4
Normal operating voltages
T h e fo llo w in g v o lta g e s s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d :
-
n o r m a l o p e ra tin g
v o lta g e s g e n e ra te d
in t h e e q u i p m e n t ,
in c lu d in g
s u c h a s th o s e a s s o c ia te d w ith s w itc h m o d e p o w e r s u p p lie s ; a n d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
re p e titiv e
p e a k v o lta g e s
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
normal
o p e ra tin g
re c e iv e d fro m
v o lta g e s g e n e ra te d
external circuits
E x te rn a lly g e n e ra te d
e x te rn a l to th e e q u ip m e n t,
in c lu d in g
rin g in g
s ig n a ls
a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1 a n d 2 .
mains transient voltages
and
external circuit
tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e s s h a ll
n o t be c o n s id e re d :
-
when
d e te rm in in g
working voltages，
because
such
a c c o u n t in t h e p r o c e d u r e s f o r d e t e r m i n i n g m i n i m u m
-
tra n s ie n ts
clearances
have
been
ta k e n
in to
(s e e 5 .4 .2 ); a n d
w h e n c l a s s i f y i n g c i r c u i t s in t h e e q u i p m e n t a s E S 1 , E S 2 a n d E S 3 ( s e e 5 . 2 ) .
B.2.5
Input test
In determination o f the input current or input power， the following variables shall be
considered:
-
l oads due to optional features, offered or provided for by the manufacturer for inclusion in
or with the EUT;
-
l oads due to other units of equipment intended by the manufacturer to draw power from
the EUT;
-
l oads that could be connected to any standard supply outlet on the equipment that is
a c c e s s ib le to an o rd in a ry p e rso n , up to the value specified by the manufacturer;
-
for equipment containing an audio amplifier, see Clause E.1;
-
for equipment where the primary function is to display moving images， the following
settings shall apply:
•
the ‘Three vertical bar signal， shall be used as defined in 3.2.1.3 of IEC 60107-1:1997;
and
•
user a c c e s s ib le picture controls shall be adjusted so as to obtain the maximum power
consumption; and
•
sound settings shall be as defined in Clause E. 1 of this document.
Artificial loads may be used to simulate such loads during testing.
In each case， the readings are taken when the input current or input power has stabilized. If
the current or power varies during the normal operating cycle, the steady state current or
power is taken as the mean indication o f the value, measured on a recording RMS ammeter or
power meter， during a representative period.
The measured input current or input power under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ， but at the
ra te d v o lta g e or at each end of each ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e ， shall not exceed the ra te d
c u rre n t or ra te d p o w e r by more than 10 %.
Compliance is checked by measuring the input current or input power of the equipment under
the following conditions:
-
where equipment has more than one ra te d v o lta g e ， the input current or input power is
measured at each ra te d vo lta g e ; and
-
where equipment has one or more ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e s ， the input current or input power
is measured at each end of each ra te d v o lta g e rang e:
•
where a single value of ra te d c u rre n t or ra te d p o w e r is marked， it is compared with
the higher value of input current or input power measured in the associated ra te d
v o lta g e rang e; and
•
where two values of rafed cii/renf o厂 rafed power a 厂e marked, separated by a
hyphen, they are compared with the two values measured in the associated ra te d
v o lta g e range.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
B.2.6
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Operating temperature measurement conditions
B.2.6.1
General
T e m p e ra tu re s m e a s u re d
o n th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o n fo r m
to B .2 .6 .2 o r B .2 .6 .3, a s a p p lic a b le ,
a ll t e m p e r a t u r e s b e i n g in d e g r e e s C e l s i u s ( ° C ) ; w h e r e :
T
is t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e g iv e n p a r t m e a s u r e d u n d e r t h e p r e s c r i b e d t e s t c o n d i t i o n s ;
r max
is t h e m a x i m u m t e m p e r a t u r e s p e c i f i e d f o r c o m p l i a n c e w it h t h e t e s t ;
r amb
is t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e d u r i n g te s t ;
r ma
is
th e
m a x im u m
a m b ie n t
te m p e ra tu re
s p e c ifie d
by
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r,
or
2 5 °C ,
w h i c h e v e r is g r e a t e r .
B.2.6.2
For
Operating temperature dependent heating/cooling
e q u ip m e n t
te m p e ra tu re
th e
am ount
of
h e a tin g
or
c o o lin g
is
d e s ig n e d
to
be
dependent
(fo r e x a m p le , th e e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in s a fa n th a t h a s a h ig h e r s p e e d
te m p e ra tu re ),
te m p e ra tu re
w h e re
th e
w ith in
te m p e ra tu re
th e
m e a su re m e n t
m a n u fa c tu re rs
is
s p e c ifie d
m ade
at
o p e ra tin g
th e
ra n g e .
le a s t
In
a t a h ig h e r
fa v o u ra b le
th is
on
a m b ie n t
T
case,
s h a ll
not
e x c e e d 7 max.
NOTE 1 In order to find the highest value of
different values of T a m b .
NOTE 2
T
for each component, it can be useful to conduct several tests at
The least favourable value of r amb can be different for different components.
A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e te m p e ra tu re
m e a s u r e m e n t m a y b e m a d e u n d e r a m b ie n t c o n d itio n s w ith th e
h e a t in g / c o o lin g d e v ic e a t its le a s t e f f e c t iv e s e t t in g o r w it h t h e d e v ic e d e f e a t e d .
B.2.6.3
Operating temperature independent heating/cooling
F o r e q u ip m e n t w h e re
th e
a m o u n t o f h e a tin g
a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re , th e m e th o d
o r c o o lin g
is n o t d e s i g n e d
to
be d e p e n d e n t on
in B . 2 . 6 . 2 m a y b e u s e d . A l t e r n a t i v e l y , t h e t e s t is p e r f o r m e d
a t a n y v a l u e o f r amb w i t h i n t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ' s s p e c i f i e d o p e r a t i n g
r a n g e . In t h i s c a s e , r s h a l l
n o t e x c e e d ( r m a x + T a m b _ 7"m a ).
D u r i n g t h e t e s t , r amb s h o u l d n o t e x c e e d
B.2.7
Under
r ma u n l e s s a g r e e d b y a l l p a r t i e s i n v o l v e d .
Battery charging and discharging under normal operating conditions
normal operating conditions, battery
c h a rg in g
and
d is c h a rg in g
c o n d itio n s
s h a ll
c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f A n n e x M a s a p p lic a b le .
B.3
Simulated abnormal operating conditions
B.3.1
W hen
General
a p p ly in g
s im u la te d
abnormal operating conditions,
p a rts , s u p p lie s , a n d
m e d ia
s h a ll
b e in p l a c e i f t h e y a r e l i k e l y t o h a v e a n e f f e c t o n t h e o u t c o m e o f t h e t e s t .
abnormal operating condition
Each
s h a l l b e a p p l i e d in t u r n , o n e a t a t i m e .
F a u lts th a t a re th e d ire c t c o n s e q u e n c e o f th e
be a
single fault condition.
The
e q u ip m e n t,
th o s e
in s ta lla tio n ,
in s tru c tio n s ,
abnormal operating conditions
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
and
abnormal operating condition
s p e c ific a tio n s
s h a ll
a r e d e e m e d to
b e e x a m in e d
to
th a t m ig h t r e a s o n a b ly b e e x p e c te d to o c c u r.
d e te rm in e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
As
a
m in im u m ,
th e
fo llo w in g
e x a m p le s
abnormal operating conditions
of
s h a ll
be
c o n s i d e r e d , a s a p p l i c a b l e , in a d d i t i o n t o t h o s e m e n t i o n e d in B . 3 . 2 t o B . 3 . 7 :
-
f or p a p e r h a n d lin g e q u ip m e n t : a p a p e r ja m ;
-
f or e q u ip m e n t w ith c o n t r o ls
accessible
ordinary person:
to a n
a d ju s tm e n t o f th e c o n tro ls ,
b o th in d iv id u a lly a n d c o lle c tiv e ly , fo r w o r s t- c a s e o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ;
-
f or
a u d io
c o n tro ls ,
a m p lifie rs
b o th
w ith
accessible
c o n tro ls
in d iv id u a lly
and
c o lle c tiv e ly ,
to
fo r
ordinary person:
an
w o rs t-c a s e
o p e ra tin g
a d ju s tm e n t o f th e
c o n d itio n s ,
w ith o u t
a p p l y i n g t h e c o n d i t i o n s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x E ;
-
f or e q u ip m e n t w ith m o v in g p a rts
-
f or
e q u ip m e n t
w ith
m e d ia :
accessible
in c o rre c t
ordinary person:
to a n
m e d ia ,
in c o rre c t
s iz e
a m o v in g p a rts ja m ;
m e d ia ,
and
in c o rre c t
m e d ia
q u a n tity ;
-
f or
e q u ip m e n t w ith
re p le n is h a b le
liq u id s
or
liq u id
c a rtrid g e s ,
or
re p le n is h a b le
m a te ria ls :
liq u id s o r m a te r ia ls s p ille d in to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
f or e q u ip m e n t th a t u s e s a n
insulating liquid
5.4.12.1:
d e s c r i b e d in
lo s s o f liq u id .
abnormal operating conditions,
normal operating conditions.
B e fo re in tro d u c in g a n y o f th e a b o v e
o p e ra tin g u n d e r
B.3.2
th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e
Covering of ventilation openings
T h e to p , s id e s a n d th e b a c k o f e q u ip m e n t, if s u c h s u r fa c e s h a v e v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s , s h a ll b e
c o v e r e d o n e a t a tim e w ith a c a rd (th ic k , s tiff p a p e r o r th in c a r d b o a r d ) w ith a m in im u m
d e n s ity
o f 2 0 0 g / m 2 , w it h d i m e n s i o n s n o t le s s t h a n e a c h t e s t e d s u r f a c e , c o v e r in g a ll o p e n i n g s .
O p e n in g s o n d if fe r e n t s u r fa c e s o n to p o f th e e q u ip m e n t (if a n y ) a re c o v e r e d s im u lt a n e o u s ly b y
s e p a ra te p ie c e s o f c a rd .
O p e n in g s
on
to p
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t,
on
a s u rfa c e
in c lin e d
at an
a n g le
g re a te r th a n
30° and
s m a l l e r t h a n 6 0 ° t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l , f r o m w h i c h a n o b s t r u c t i o n is f r e e t o s l i d e , a r e e x c l u d e d .
On
th e
back
and
th e
s id e s
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
ca rd
is a t t a c h e d
to
th e
upper
edge
and
a llo w e d to h a n g fr e e ly .
E x c e p t a s s p e c ifie d
b e lo w , th e re a re n o r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r b lo c k in g
o p e n in g s
in t h e b o t t o m
of
th e e q u ip m e n t.
In
a d d itio n ,
e q u ip m e n t
w ith
v e n tila tio n
o p e n in g s
lik e ly
to
be
used
on
a
s o ft
su p p o rt
(lik e
b e d d in g , b la n k e ts e tc .), s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
-
Openings
in
th e
b o tto m ,
s id e s
and
back
of
th e
e q u ip m e n t
a re
to
be
co ve re d
s i m u l t a n e o u s l y . E x t e r n a l s u r f a c e s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e T S 2 l i m i t s in T a b l e 3 8 .
-
An
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e p r o v id e d
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e
F.5,
e x c e p t th a t
e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
•
e le m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
•
e le m e n t 2:
“ D o n o t c o v e r v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
•
e le m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
•
e le m e n t 4:
“T h is
e q u ip m e n t
is
not
in te n d e d
to
be
used
b e d d in g s , b la n k e ts e tc .).” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
on
s o ft
su p p o rt
(lik e
旧C
-210 -
B.3.3
If t h e
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
DC mains polarity test
c o n n e c tio n
to th e
ordinary person,
th e n
DC
th e
mains
is n o t p o l a r i z e d
p o s s ib le
in flu e n c e
and
th e
o f p o la rity
c o n n e c tio n
s h a ll
be
ta k e n
is
accessible
in to
to a n
account when
te s tin g e q u ip m e n t d e s ig n e d fo r D C .
B.3.4
Setting of voltage selector
mains a n d p r o v i d e d
instructed person, i s
E q u ip m e n t to b e s u p p lie d fr o m th e
by th e
ordinary person
or an
w ith a v o lta g e s e ttin g d e v ic e to b e s e t
te s te d
w ith
th e
mains
v o lta g e
s e ttin g
d e v ic e a t th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le p o s itio n .
B.3.5
Maximum load at output terminals
O u tp u t te rm in a ls o f e q u ip m e n t s u p p ly in g p o w e r to o th e r e q u ip m e n t, e x c e p t s o c k e t-o u tle ts a n d
a p p lia n c e
o u tle ts
d ire c tly
c o n n e c te d
to th e
mains,
a re
c o n n e c te d
to th e
m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le
lo a d im p e d a n c e , in c lu d in g s h o r t- c ir c u it.
B.3.6
Reverse battery polarity
I f it i s p o s s i b l e f o r a n
th e
e q u ip m e n t
ordinary person
is t e s t e d
in
a ll
p o s s ib le
to in s e rt re p la c e a b le
c o n fig u ra tio n s
w ith
batteries
one
w ith r e v e rs e d
o r m o re
batteries
p o la rity ,
re v e rs e d
(s e e a ls o A n n e x M ).
B.3.7
Audio amplifier abnormal operating conditions
Abnormal operating conditions
B.3.8
f o r a u d i o a m p l i f i e r s a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e E . 3 .
Compliance criteria during and after abnormal operating conditions
During an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n that does not lead to a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n , all
s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective. After restoration of n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , all
s a fe g u a rd s shall comply with applicable requirements.
If an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n leads to a consequential fault, the compliance criteria of
B.4.8 apply.
B.4
B.4.1
W hen
Simulated single fault conditions
General
a p p ly in g
s im u la te d
single fault conditions,
p a rts ,
s u p p lie s ,
and
m e d ia
s h a ll
be
in
p la c e if t h e y a r e lik e ly to h a v e a n e f f e c t o n t h e o u t c o m e o f t h e t e s t .
single fault condition s h a l l b e a p p l i e d i n
t h a t a r e t h e d i r e c t c o n s e q u e n c e o f t h e single fault condition, a r e
single fault condition.
T h e in tro d u c tio n o f a n y
tu rn o n e a t a tim e . F a u lts ,
d e e m e d to b e p a rt o f th a t
T h e e q u ip m e n t c o n s tru c tio n , c irc u it d ia g ra m s , c o m p o n e n t s p e c ific a tio n s , in c lu d in g
insulation
a re
e x a m in e d
to d e t e r m in e
th o s e
single fault conditions
be e x p e c te d a n d th a t:
safeguard;
-
mi ght b yp a ss a
-
c a u s e th e o p e ra tio n o f a
-
o t h e r w i s e a ffe c t th e s a fe ty o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h e fo llo w in g
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
or
supplementary safeguard;
single fault conditions
or
s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d :
functional
th a t m ig h t re a s o n a b ly
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 211 -
abnormal operating condition
ordinary person o v e r l o a d i n g
an
an
th a t re s u lts
e x te rn a l
single fault condition ( f o r e x a m p l e ,
t e r m i n a l s , o r a n ordinary person
in a
o u tp u t
in c o rre c tly s e ttin g a s e le c to r s w itc h );
-
a
basic safeguard
-
except
fo r
in te g ra te d
fa ilu re s im u la te d
supplementary safeguard
fa ilu re o r a
c irc u it
cu rre n t
lim ite rs
c o m p ly in g
fa ilu re ;
w ith
C la u s e
G .9 ,
a
com ponent
b y s h o r t- c ir c u itin g a n y tw o le a d s a n d o p e n - c ir c u itin g a n y o n e le a d o f th e
c o m p o n e n t o n e a t a tim e ; a n d
-
w h e n re q u ire d b y B .4 .4 , a fa ilu re o f
B.4.2
functional insulation.
Temperature controlling device
E x c e p t fo r te m p e ra tu re c o n tro llin g
safeguards,
G.3.1
a c c o rd in g
to
G.3.4,
c o m p o n e n t o f a c irc u it c o n tro llin g th e te m p e r a tu r e d u rin g te m p e r a tu r e
a n y s in g le d e v ic e o r
m e a s u r e m e n t s h a ll b e
o p e n - c i r c u i t e d o r s h o r t - c i r c u i t e d , w h i c h e v e r is m o r e u n f a v o u r a b l e .
T e m p e r a t u r e s s h a ll b e m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to B .1 .5 .
B.4.3
Motor tests
B.4.3.1
Blocked motor test
Motors are blocked or the rotor is locked in the end product if it is obvious that such an action
will result in an increase in internal ambient temperature of the equipment (for example,
locking the rotor o f the fan motor to stop air flow).
B.4.3.2
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and examination of the available data or by testing
according to G.5.4.
BAA
Functional insulation
B.4.4.1
Clearances for functional
U n le s s th e
clearance
-
t he
-
f or
clearance
ES1
and
fo r
fo r
e n v iro n m e n ts , th e
functional insulation
basic insulation
PS1
c irc u its
clearance
旧 C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 :2 0 0 7 , T a b le
a
insulation
a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 ; o r
pollution
basic insulation
used
fo r
in
fo r
degree
functional insulation
creepage distance
-
f or
ES1
and
e n v iro n m e n ts ,
fo r
a
creepage distance
fo r
functional insulation
b o a r d s a s s p e c i f i e d in
basic insulation
fo r
a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 3 ; o r
pollution
basic insulation
used
in
c o m p lie s w ith :
degree 1
and
fo r p rin te d w irin g
F .4 ; o r
t he e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
fo r
PS1 c i r c u i t s
t h e clearance
旧 C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 :2 0 0 7 , T a b le
2
s h a ll b e s h o r t- c ir c u ite d .
U n le s s th e
creepage distance
pollution degree
basic insulation,
Creepage distancesfor functional insulation
t he
and
fo r p rin te d w irin g
B.4.4.2
-
1
F .4 ; o r
t he e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r
clearance
c o m p lie s w ith :
5.4.9.1
fo r
basic insulation,
functional insulation
s h a ll b e s h o r t- c ir c u ite d .
pollution degree
2
b o a r d s a s s p e c i f i e d in
旧C
- 212 -
B.4.4.3
Functional insulation on coated printed boards
U n le s s th e
functional insulation
c o m p lie s w ith :
-
t he s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e o f T a b le G .1 3 ; o r
-
t he e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r
a
functional insulation
B.4.5
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
basic insulation,
o n a c o a te d p rin te d b o a rd s h a ll b e s h o r t- c ir c u ite d .
Short-circuit and interruption of electrodes in tubes and semiconductors
E l e c t r o d e s in e l e c t r o n i c t u b e s a n d l e a d s o f s e m i c o n d u c t o r d e v i c e s s h a l l b e s h o r t - c i r c u i t e d , o r
if
a p p lic a b le ,
in te rru p te d .
One
le a d
at
a
tim e
is
in te rru p te d
or
any
tw o
le a d s
c o n n e c te d
t o g e t h e r in t u r n .
B.4.6
Short-circuit or disconnection of passive components
R e s is to r s , c a p a c ito r s , w in d in g s , lo u d s p e a k e r s , V D R s a n d o th e r p a s s iv e c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll b e
s h o r t - c i r c u i t e d o r d i s c o n n e c t e d , w h i c h e v e r is m o r e u n f a v o u r a b l e .
These
single fault conditions
d o n o t a p p ly to :
-
P T C th e r m is to r s c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 , C la u s e s 1 5 f 17, J .1 5 a n d J .1 7 ;
-
a P T C p ro v id in g IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 T y p e 2 .A L a c tio n ;
-
r e s i s t o r s c o m p ly in g w ith th e te s ts o f 5 .5 .6 ;
-
capacitors
c o m p ly in g
w ith
IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4
and
assessed
a c c o rd in g
to
5 .5 .2
of
th is
w ith
th e
d o c u m e n t;
-
isolating
c o m p o n e n ts
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
o p to c o u p le rs
r e l e v a n t c o m p o n e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s in A n n e x G f o r
-
ot her c o m p o n e n ts th a t s e rv e as a
safeguard
and
tra n s fo rm e rs )
c o m p ly in g
reinforced insulation;
and
c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e le v a n t r e q u ir e m e n ts o f
A n n e x G o r w ith th e s a fe ty re q u ire m e n ts o f th e re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd .
B.4.7
Continuous operation of components
Motors， relay coils or the like， intended for s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n ,
are operated continuously if this can occur during operation o f the equipment.
For equipment rated for s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n , the test is repeated
until steady state conditions are reached, irrespective of the operating time. For this test, the
th e rm o s ta ts ， te m p e ra tu re lim ite rs and th e rm a l c u t-o ffs are not short-circuited.
In circuits not directly connected to the m a in s and in circuits supplied by a DC power
distribution system， electromechanical components normally energized intermittently， except
for motors, a fault shall be simulated in the drive circuit to cause continuous energizing of the
component.
The duration o f the test shall be as follows:
一
for equipment or components whose failure to operate is not evident to an o rd in a ry
p e rso n , as long as necessary to establish steady conditions or up to the interruption of
the circuit due to other consequences of the simulated fault condition, whichever is the
shorter; and
-
for other equipment and components: 5 min or up to interruption of the circuit due to a
failure of the component (for example ， burn-out) or to other consequences of the
simulated fault condition, whichever is shorter.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
B.4.8
- 213 -
Compliance criteria during and after single fault conditions
During and after a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n , an a c c e s s ib le part shall not exceed the relevant
energy class as specified in 5.3, 8.3, 9.4 ， 10.3， 10.4.1, 10.5.1 and 10.6.5 for the related
person depending on the hazard involved. During and after s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ， any
flame inside the equipment shall extinguish within 10 s and no surrounding parts shall have
ignited. Any part showing flames shall be regarded as a PIS.
After a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that might impact an insulation used as a sa fe g u a rd , the
insulation shall withstand the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 for the relevant insulation.
During and after a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， the opening of a conductor on a printed board shall
not be used as a s a fe g u a rd ， except for the following situations， in which case the fault
condition shall be repeated 3 times:
-
Conductors o f a printed board of V-1 cla ss m a te ria l or VTM-1 cla ss m a te ria l may open
under overload condition provided that the open circuit is not an a rc in g PIS. Conductors
on a printed board material that has no m a te ria l fla m m a b ility cla ss or is classed lower
than V-1 c la s s m a te ria l shall not open.
-
Under a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n , the peeling of conductors on a printed board shall not
result in the failure of any s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d safeguard.
B.4.9
Battery charging and discharging under single fault conditions
Under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ， b a tte ry charging and discharging conditions shall comply with
the requirements o f Annex M as applicable.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex C
(normative)
UV radiation
C.1
Protection of materials in equipment from UV radiation
C.1.1
T h is
General
annex
safeguard
C.1.2
The
d e fin e s
th e
te s t
re q u ire m e n ts
p r o p e r tie s a n d th a t a re s u b je c t to
and
UV
te s t
p ro ce d u re s
fo r
m a te ria ls
th a t
have
ra d ia tio n e x p o s u re .
Requirements
fo llo w in g
re q u ire m e n ts
a p p ly
la m p s th a t p ro d u c e s ig n ific a n t
UV
to e q u ip m e n t,
o r p a rts
o f e q u ip m e n t,
r a d i a t i o n in t h e s p e c t r u m
180
n m to
th a t a re
400
exposed
to
n m a n d to o u td o o r
e q u ip m e n t e x p o s e d to s u n lig h t.
NOTE 1 General-purpose incandescent and fluorescent lamps, with ordinary glass envelopes, are not considered
to emit significant UV radiation.
NOTE 2
Filters and/or lenses usually act as a safeguard and can serve as part of the enclosure.
Table C.1 - Minimum property retention limits after UV exposure
Parts to be tested
Standard for the test
method
Minimum retention
after test
ISO 527 series
70 %
ISO 178
70 %
ISO 179-1
70 %
Izod impact c or
ISO 180
70 %
Tensile impact c
ISO 8256
70 %
d
Property
Parts providing mechanical
support
Tensile strength a
Parts providing impact
resistance
Charpy impact c or
All parts
or flexural strength a b
Material flammability
class
See Clause S.4 of this
document
Tensile strength and flexural strength tests are to be conducted on specimens no thicker than the actual
thicknesses.
b
The side of the sample exposed to UV radiation is to be in contact with the two loading points when using the
three point loading method.
c
Tests conducted on 3,0 mm thick specimens for Izod impact and tensile impact tests and 4,0 mm thick
specimens for Charpy impact tests are considered representative of other thicknesses, down to 0f75 mm.
d
The material flammability class may change as long as it does not fall below that specified in Clause 6 of
this document.
C.1.3
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of available data regarding the
UV resistance characteristics of the parts exposed to UV radiation in the equipment. If such
data is not available, the tests in Table C.1 are carried out on the parts.
Samples taken from the parts, or consisting of identical material, are prepared according to
the standard for the test to be carried out. They are then conditioned according to Clause C.2.
After conditioning， the samples shall show no signs of significant deterioration， such as
crazing or cracking. They are then kept at room ambient conditions for not less than 16 h and
not more than 96 h， after which they are tested according to the standard for the relevant test.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 215 -
In order to evaluate the percentage retention of properties after test, samples that have not
been conditioned according to Clause C.2 are tested at the same time as the conditioned
samples.
The retention shall be as specified in Table C.1.
C.2
C.2.1
UV light conditioning test
Test apparatus
Samples are exposed to UV light by using one of the following apparatus:
-
a twin enclosed carbon-arc (see C.2.3) with continuous exposure for a minimum of 720 h.
The test apparatus shall operate with a black-panel temperature of 63 °C ± 3 °C in a
relative humidity of (50 ± 5) %; or
-
a xenon-arc (see C.2.4) with continuous exposure for a minimum of 1 000 h. The test
apparatus shall operate with a 6 500 Wf water-cooled xenon-arc lamp， a spectral
irradiance o f 0,35 W/m2 at 340 nm， a black-panel temperature of 63 °C 土 3 °C in a relative
humidity of (50 ± 5) %.
C.2.2
Mounting of test samples
The samples are mounted vertically on the inside of the cylinder of the light exposure
apparatus， with the widest portion of the samples facing the arcs. They are mounted so that
they do not touch each other.
C.2.3
Carbon-arc light-exposure test
The apparatus described in ISO 4892-4, or equivalent, is used in accordance with the
procedures given in ISO 4892-1 and ISO 4892-4 using a type 1 filter， with water spray.
C.2.4
Xenon-arc light-exposure test
The apparatus described in ISO 4892-2:2013， or equivalent， is used in accordance with the
procedures given in ISO 4892-1 and ISO 4892-4 using cycle 1 of method A of Table 3, without
water spray.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 216 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex D
(normative)
Test generators
D.1
Impulse test generators
T h e s e c i r c u i t s p r o d u c e t e s t p u l s e s a s r e f e r e n c e d i n T a b l e D . 1 . In t h i s t a b l e :
-
t h e c i r c u i t 1 i m p u l s e is t y p i c a l o f v o l t a g e s i n d u c e d i n t o t e l e p h o n e w i r e s a n d c o a x i a l c a b l e s
in l o n g o u t d o o r c a b l e r u n s d u e t o l i g h t n i n g s t r i k e s t o t h e i r e a r t h i n g s h i e l d ;
-
t he
c irc u it 2
im p u ls e
is t y p i c a l
o f e a rth
p o te n tia l
ris e s
due
to
e ith e r
lig h tn in g
s trik e s
to
p o w e r lin e s o r p o w e r lin e fa u lts ; a n d
-
t he
c irc u it
3
im p u ls e
is
ty p ic a l
o f v o lta g e s
in d u c e d
in to
a n te n n a
s y s te m
w irin g
due
to
n e a rb y lig h tn in g s trik e s to e a rth .
NOTE
During the tests, use extreme care due to the high electric charge stored in the capacitor Cr
T h e c i r c u i t i n F i g u r e D . 1 ，u s i n g t h e c o m p o n e n t v a l u e s i n c i r c u i t s 1 a n d 2 o f T a b l e D . 1 , i s u s e d
to g e n e r a t e im p u ls e s , th e
C1 c a p a c i t o r
b e in g c h a r g e d in itia lly to a v o lta g e
C i r c u i t 1 o f T a b l e D .1
g e n e ra te s
1 0 /7 0 0
tim e
s im u la te
tra n s ie n ts
to
h a lf v a lu e )
to
jas i m p u l s e s
in
(1 0
Uc.
p s v i r t u a l 什 o n t t i m e , 7 0 0 jas v i r t u a l
external circuits
as
in d ic a te d
in
T a b le 13,
ID
n u m b e r s 1, 2 , 3 , 4 a n d 5.
C i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1
g e n e ra te s
1 ,2 /5 0
jas i m p u l s e s
(1 ,2
p s v irtu a l fro n t tim e , 5 0
p s v irtu a l
t i m e t o h a l f v a l u e ) t o s i m u l a t e t r a n s i e n t s in p o w e r d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s t e m s .
The
im p u ls e w a v e
shapes
a re
u n d e r o p e n -c irc u it c o n d itio n s
and can
b e d if fe r e n t u n d e r lo a d
c o n d itio n s .
During the test， the peak voltage of the applied impulse shall not be less than the peak
impulse test voltage (for example， see Table 14) and the pulse shape (for example ， 1,2 jus
virtual front time, 50 / / s virtual time to half value for the 1,2/50 jljs impulse) shall remain
substantially the same as under open-circuit conditions. Components in parallel with the
cle a ra n ce may be disconnected during this test.
Rs
Ri
及3
Figure D.1 - 1,2/50 |is and 10/700 |is voltage impulse generator
D.2
The
Antenna interface test generator
c irc u it
in
F ig u re D .2
g e n e ra te im p u ls e s , th e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
u s in g
th e
C1 c a p a c i t o r
com ponent
v a lu e s
o f c irc u it 3
in
b e in g c h a r g e d in itia lly to a v o lta g e
T a b l e D . 1 , is
Uc.
used
to
旧C
- 217 -
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure D.2 - Antenna interface test generator circuit
Table D.1 - Component values for Figure D.1 and Figure D.2
Test
impulse
Figure
Circuit 1
10/700 ms
D.1
Circuit 2
1,2/50 Ms
D.1
Circuit 3
■
D.2
c i
■
_
15 MQ
R2
Rz
20 nF
0,2 mF
5〇
a
15 a
25 Q
1 mF
30 nF
76
il
13
25 Q
1 nF
■
1 ka
■
Q
-
Alternative test generators may be used provided they give the same result.
NOTE
D.3
Circuits 1 and 2 are based on ITU-T Recommendation K.44.
Electronic pulse generator
NOTE 1 The operating pressure of the lamp can be converted to energy (Joules). The operating energy level can
typically be used as the starting point for the test charge.
NOTE 2 The relay is a 5 kV double pole defibrillator type, nitrogen filled. A defibrillator qualified relay is sufficient.
See IEC 60601-2-4.
NOTE 3
The HV capacitor is rated 0,42 j.iF 5 kV.
Figure D.3 - Example of an electronic pulse generator
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 218 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex E
(normative)
Test conditions for equipment containing audio amplifiers
E.1
Electrical energy source classification for audio signals
W h e n c la s s ify in g a u d io s ig n a ls a s a n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e (s e e T a b le E .1 ), th e e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
be
o p e ra te d
impedance.
The
to
lo a d
d e liv e r
m a x im u m
is r e m o v e d
and
non-clipped output power
th e e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e
in to
c la s s
rated load
its
is d e t e r m i n e d
fro m
th e re s u ltin g o p e n -c irc u it o u tp u t v o lta g e .
T o n e c o n tr o ls a re to b e s e t a t m id - r a n g e .
Table E.1 - Audio signal electrical energy source classes and safeguards
Class
A udio signal voltage
V RMS
ES1
Exam ples o f safeguards between energy
source and o rd in a ry person
Example o f safeguards
between energy source
and in stru cte d person
No safeguard necessary
No safeguard necessary
0 up to 71
Insulated terminals a
marked with ISO 7000,
symbol ^
Above 71 and
0434a (2004-01) or
ES2
No safeguard necessary
up to 120
symbol ^
0434b (2004-01)
In s tru c tio n a l safeguard for uninsulated parts
of terminals and bare wiring b
Connectors conforming to the requirements of IEC 61984 and marked
ES3
Above 120
with the symbol of IEC 60417-6042 ( 2 0 1 0 - 1 1 ) ^
a
Terminals that have no conductive parts accessible after wiring are installed according to instructions.
b
An in s tru c tio n a l safeguard indicating that touching uninsulated terminals or wiring may result in an
unpleasant sensation.
E.2
Audio am plifier normal operating conditions
E q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g
so u rce
at
a
o p e ra tio n a t
an
fre q u e n c y
1 000
a u d io
of
H z, th e
a m p lifie r s h a ll
1 000 Hz.
In
th e
be
o p e ra te d
case
w h e re
peak response frequency
T h e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e o p e r a te d
u s in g
an
rated load impedance. A l t e r n a t i v e l y , a
o p e r a t i o n a f t e r non-clipped output power
b a n d -lim ite d
is
a m p lifie r
w ave
is
not
a u d io
s ig n a l
in te n d e d
fo r
s h a ll b e u s e d .
in s u c h a w a y a s t o d e l i v e r
to th e
a s in e
1/8 non-clipped output power
p in k n o is e s ig n a l m a y b e u s e d fo r
e s ta b lis h e d
u s in g
a
s in e
wave.
The
n o is e
b a n d w id th o f th e p in k n o is e te s t s ig n a l s h a ll b e lim ite d b y a filte r o f a c h a r a c t e r is t ic a s s h o w n
in F i g u r e E . 1 .
If v is ib le
a s th e
In
c lip p in g
c a n n o t b e e s ta b lis h e d , th e
m a x im u m
a tta in a b le
p o w e r s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d
non-clipped output power.
a d d itio n ,
a ll
of
th e
fo llo w in g
c o n d itio n s
s h a ll
be
c o n s id e re d
under
normal operating
conditions:
-
T h e m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le
rated load impedance
is c o n n e c t e d t o t h e a m p l i f i e r o u t p u t .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o r th e a c tu a l lo u d s p e a k e r, w h e n
p ro v id e d ,
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 219 -
-
Al l a m p l i f i e r c h a n n e l s a r e o p e r a t e d s i m u l t a n e o u s l y .
-
Organs
o r s im ila r in s tr u m e n ts th a t h a v e a t o n e - g e n e r a t o r u n it s h a ll n o t b e o p e r a te d
w ith
th e 1 0 0 0 H z s ig n a l, b u t in s te a d b e o p e ra te d w ith a n y c o m b in a tio n o f tw o b a s s p e d a l k e y s ,
if p r e s e n t, a n d te n m a n u a l k e y s d e p r e s s e d . A ll s to p s a n d ta b s th a t c a n in c r e a s e th e o u tp u t
power
s h a ll
be
a c tiv a te d
and
th e
e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
be
a d ju s te d
to
d e liv e r
1 /8
of
th e
m a x im u m a tta in a b le o u tp u t p o w e r.
-
Wher e
th e
c h a n n e ls ,
in te n d e d
th e re
s h a ll
a m p lifie r
be
a
fu n c tio n
phase
depends
d iffe re n c e
on
of 90°
phase
b e tw e e n
d iffe re n c e
s ig n a ls
b e tw e e n
a p p lie d
to
tw o
th e
tw o
c h a n n e ls .
-
For
e q u ip m e n t
o p e ra te d
c o n ta in in g
in d e p e n d e n tly ,
m u lti-c h a n n e l
th o s e
impedance a t t h e o u t p u t
non-clipped output power
-
Wher e
c o n tin u o u s
a m p lifie rs ,
c h a n n e ls
power
le v e l
s h a ll
th a t
w h e re
be
som e
o p e ra te d
co rre sp o n d s,
c h a n n e ls
u s in g
by
be
rated load
th e
d e s ig n ,
cannot
to
1 /8
of
th e
o p e ra te d
at
th e
o f th e a d ju s ta b le a m p lifie r c h a n n e l(s ).
o p e ra tio n
is
not
p o s s ib le ， th e
a m p lifie r
s h a ll
be
m a x im u m o u tp u t p o w e r le v e l th a t a llo w s c o n tin u o u s o p e r a tio n .
The
te m p e ra tu re
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
m e a s u re m e n ts
th e
in s tru c tio n
s h a ll
m anual
be
c a rrie d
p ro v id e d
out
b y th e
w ith
th e
e q u ip m e n t
p o s itio n e d
m a n u f a c t u r e r , o r , in t h e
absence
in
of
in s tr u c tio n s , th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p o s itio n e d 5 c m b e h in d th e fr o n t e d g e o f a n o p e n - fr o n te d
wooden
te s t b o x w ith
1 cm
fre e
space
a lo n g
th e
s id e s
and
to p
and
5 cm
d e p th
b e h in d
th e
e q u ip m e n t.
Figure E.1 - Band-pass filter for wide-band noise measurement
E.3
Audio am plifier abnormal operating conditions
Abnormal operating conditions
u n fa v o u ra b le
o u tp u t
m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le
p o w e r fro m
s h a ll
ze ro
be
up
rated load impedance
s im u la te d
to
th e
a d ju s tin g
m a x im u m
th e
a tta in a b le
c o n tro ls
o u tp u t
to
power
th e
m ost
in to
th e
c o n n e c te d to th e o u tp u t te rm in a ls . S h o rt-c irc u it o f
t h e o u t p u t t e r m i n a l s is a l s o c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a n
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
by
abnormal operating condition.
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex F
(normative)
Equipment markings ，instructions， and instructional safeguards
F.1
General
T h is
annex
s p e c ifie s
safeguards
n e ce ssa ry
e q u ip m e n t
m a rk in g s ,
fo r e q u ip m e n t
e q u ip m e n t
in s ta lla tio n ,
in s tru c tio n s ,
o p e ra tio n ,
instructional
and
m a in te n a n c e ,
and
s e rv ic in g
in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
U n le s s
s y m b o ls
safeguards
T h is
annex
a re
u s e d ，s a f e t y
re la te d
e q u ip m e n t m a rk in g ,
in s tru c tio n s
and
instructional
s h a l l b e in a l a n g u a g e a c c e p t e d i n t h e r e s p e c t i v e c o u n t r i e s .
does
not
a p p ly
to
m a rk in g s
on
c o m p o n e n ts .
M a rk in g s
on
c o m p o n e n ts
a re
s p e c i f i e d in t h e r e l e v a n t c o m p o n e n t s t a n d a r d .
T h is a n n e x m a y a p p ly to s u b - a s s e m b lie s s u c h a s p o w e r s u p p lie s .
NOTE 1 Where the term marking is used in this document, it also applies to instructions and required elements of
an instructional safeguard.
NOTE 2
See Table F.1 for examples of markings.
C a re s h a ll b e ta k e n s o th a t a d d itio n a l m a r k in g s a n d in s tr u c tio n s n o t re q u ire d b y th is d o c u m e n t
d o n o t c o n tr a d ic t th e m a r k in g s a n d in s tr u c tio n s r e q u ir e d b y th is d o c u m e n t.
F.2
Letter symbols and graphical symbols
F.2.1
Letter symbols
L e t t e r s y m b o l s f o r q u a n t i t i e s a n d u n i t s s h a l l b e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 0 2 7 - 1 .
F.2.2
Graphical symbols
G ra p h ic a l
s y m b o ls
p la c e d
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t fo r
d o c u m e n t o r n o t , s h a l l b e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
if
a v a ila b le .
In
th e
absence
of
s u ita b le
s a fe ty
p u rp o se s,
w h e th e r
re q u ire d
b y th is
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 , IS O 3 8 6 4 -2 , IS O 7 0 0 0 o r IS O 7 0 1 0 ,
s y m b o ls ,
th e
m a n u fa c tu re r
m ay
d e s ig n
s p e c ific
g ra p h ic a l s y m b o ls .
F.2.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3
Equipment markings
F.3.1
Equipment marking locations
I n g e n e r a l , e q u i p m e n t m a r k i n g s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d n e a r o r a d j a c e n t t o t h e p a r t o r r e g i o n t h a t is
th e s u b je c t o f th e m a rk in g .
U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d , e q u i p m e n t m a r k i n g s r e q u i r e d in F . 3 . 2 , F . 3 . 3 , F . 3 . 6 a n d F . 3 . 7 s h a l l
be o n th e e x te rio r o f th e e q u ip m e n t, e x c lu d in g th e b o tto m . H o w e v e r, th e s e
in a n a r e a t h a t i s e a s i l y
-
u n d e r a lid ; o r
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
accessible
b y h a n d , fo r e x a m p le :
m a rk in g s
m a y be
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
o n th e e x te r io r o f th e b o tto m o f:
•
direct plug-in equipment, hand-held equipment, transportable equipment;
•
movable equipment
w ith
a m ass
n o t e x c e e d in g
18 kg,
p ro v id e d
th a t th e
or
lo c a tio n
of
t h e m a r k i n g i s g i v e n in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
tool,
M a r k in g s s h a ll n o t b e p u t o n p a rts th a t c a n b e r e m o v e d w it h o u t th e u s e o f a
u n le s s th e y
a p p ly to th a t p a rt.
For
permanently connected equipment,
m a rk in g s
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
or
in
th e
in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s ,
in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d
or
in
a
s e p a ra te
in s ta lla tio n
e ith e r a s
in s tru c tio n
d o c u m e n t.
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e m o u n te d o n a s u p p o r t in g s tr u c tu r e (fo r e x a m p le , a ra c k , p a n e l,
w a ll, c e ilin g , e tc .) a n d w h e r e th e e x te r n a l s u r fa c e o f th e e q u ip m e n t b e c o m e s p a rtia lly in v is ib le
a fte r in s ta lla tio n , m a r k in g s m a y b e o n a n y s u rfa c e , in c lu d in g th e b o tto m , th a t b e c o m e s v is ib le
a fte r re m o v a l o f th e e q u ip m e n t fro m th e s u p p o rtin g s tru c tu re .
U n le s s
th e
m e a n in g
of
th e
m a rk in g
is
o b v io u s ,
th e
m a rk in g
s h a ll
be
e x p la in e d
in
th e
on
th e
in s tru c tio n s .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3.2
Equipment identification markings
F.3.2.1
The
Manufacturer identification
m a n u fa c tu re r o r
e q u ip m e n t.
re s p o n s ib le
Id e n tific a tio n
m ay
v e n d o r s h a ll
be
th e
be
id e n tifie d
by
m eans
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s n a m e , th e
of a
re s p o n s ib le
m a rk in g
v e n d o r’s n a m e ，
tra d e m a rk , o r o th e r e q u iv a le n t id e n tific a tio n .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3.2.2
The
Model identification
m o d e l n u m b e r , m o d e l n a m e , o r e q u iv a le n t s h a ll b e id e n tifie d
b y m e a n s o f a m a rk in g
on
th e e q u ip m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3.3
Equipment rating markings
F.3.3.1
Equipment with direct connection to mains
If a u n it is p r o v i d e d w i t h a m e a n s f o r d i r e c t c o n n e c t i o n
to th e
mains,
it s h a l l b e m a r k e d w i t h
a n e l e c t r i c a l r a t i n g , a s s p e c i f i e d in F . 3 . 3 . 3 t o F . 3 . 3 . 6 .
F.3.3.2
If a
u n it
Equipment without direct connection to mains
is
not
p ro v id e d
w ith
a
m eans
fo r
d ire c t c o n n e c tio n
m a r k e d w ith a n y e le c tr ic a l ra tin g . H o w e v e r , a n y
rated power
or
mains，
rated current
to
th e
it n e e d
not
be
m a rk in g o n th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith B .2 .5 .
F.3.3.3
The
Nature of the supply voltage
n a tu re
of
th e
s u p p ly
v o lta g e ,
DC,
AC,
or
th re e -p h a s e
AC,
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
on
e q u i p m e n t a n d s h a l l i m m e d i a t e l y f o l l o w t h e e q u i p m e n t v o l t a g e r a t i n g . If a s y m b o l is u s e d ,
-
t he s y m b o l
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 2 ( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d fo r A C ;
th e
旧C
- 222 -
t he sym b o l
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 3 1
-
t he sym b o l 3〜
，I E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 2 - 1
-
t he
sym bol
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d fo r D C ;
( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d f o r th r e e - p h a s e A C ;
3N〜 ， | E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 2 - 2
(2 0 0 2 -1 0 )
s h a ll
be
used
fo r th re e -p h a s e
AC
w ith
a
n e u tra l c o n d u c to r; o r
-
t he sym b o l
T h re e -p h a se
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 3 3 ( 2 0 0 2 - 1 0 ) s h a ll b e u s e d fo r c o m b in e d A C a n d D C .
e q u ip m e n t m a y
be
id e n tifie d
w ith
“ 3 -p h a s e ” o r “ 3 0 ” o r a n y o th e r a rra n g e m e n t
th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e p h a s e o f th e s u p p ly v o lta g e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
F.3.3.4
Rated voltage
rated voltage
The
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
be
m a rke d
on th e
e q u ip m e n t.
The
v o lta g e
ra tin g
m a rk in g s h a ll b e im m e d ia te ly fo llo w e d b y th e n a tu re o f th e s u p p ly m a rk in g .
The
rated voltage
m a y be:
-
a s in g le , n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
-
a s in g le n o m in a l v a lu e a n d a to le ra n c e p e rc e n ta g e o f th e n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
-
t w o o r m o r e n o m in a l v a lu e s s e p a r a t e d b y a s o lid u s (/); o r
-
a ra n g e in d ic a te d b y m in im u m a n d m a x im u m v a lu e s s e p a ra te d b y a h y p h e n ; o r
-
a n y o th e r a rr a n g e m e n t th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e v o lta g e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s m o r e t h a n o n e n o m i n a l v o l t a g e , a ll s u c h v o l t a g e s m a y b e m a r k e d o n t h e
e q u ip m e n t.
H o w e ve r,
(s e e F .3 .4 ).
If th e
th e
v o lta g e
fo r w h ic h
e q u i p m e n t is i n s t a l l e d
th e
by a
e q u ip m e n t
is s e t s h a l l
skilled person,
th is
be
c le a rly
in d ic a tio n
m ay
in d ic a te d
b e in t h e
in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s o r a t a n y lo c a tio n o n th e e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t.
T h r e e - p h a s e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith th e p h a s e - to - p h a s e v o lta g e , a s y m b o l in d ic a tin g
power
s u p p ly
v o lta g e ,
th e
s y s te m
sym bol
a rra n g e m e n t th a t
in
fo r
c le a rly
a cco rd a n ce
v o lta g e
(V)
in d ic a te s
w ith
and
th e
IE C 6 1 2 9 3 ,
th e
num ber
th re e -p h a s e
a
of
s o lid u s
phases,
rated voltage
(/),
in
th e
th a t
o f th e
p h a s e -to -n e u tra l
o rd e r.
Any
e q u ip m e n t
o th e r
is a l s o
a c c e p ta b le .
NOTE
The solidus (/) represents the word “or” and the hyphen (-) represents the word “to” .
F.3.3.5
Rated frequency
The
rated frequency
o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t.
The
rated frequency
m a y be:
-
a s in g le , n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
-
a s in g le n o m in a l v a lu e a n d a to le ra n c e p e r c e n ta g e o f th e n o m in a l v a lu e ; o r
-
t w o o r m o r e n o m in a l v a lu e s s e p a r a t e d b y a s o lid u s (/); o r
-
a ra n g e in d ic a te d b y m in im u m a n d m a x im u m v a lu e s s e p a ra te d b y a h y p h e n ; o r
-
a n y o th e r a rr a n g e m e n t th a t c le a rly in d ic a te s th e
F.3.3.6
o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
Rated current or rated power
The
rated current
For
th re e -p h a s e
power
rated frequency
or
rated power
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t.
rated current
is
th e
cu rre n t
of one
phase
and
is t h e t o t a l p o w e r o f t h e t h r e e p h a s e s .
NOTE 1 B.2.5 establishes criteria for the way in which rated current or rated power are measured.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
rated
旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 1 :2 0 1 8
-
旧C 2 0 1 8
◎
NOTE 2
The rated current or rated power need not be stated to more than one significant digit.
NOTE 3
In some countries， for markings on equipment， a period is used as the decimal designator
mains
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s a s o c k e t - o u t l e t f o r p r o v i d i n g
current
rated power
or
p o w e r to o th e r e q u ip m e n t, th e
o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll in c lu d e th e a s s ig n e d
rated
c u r r e n t o r p o w e r o f th e
s o c k e t-o u tle t.
See
F.3.5.1
fo r m a rk in g re q u ire m e n ts fo r a
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s m o r e t h a n o n e
rated voltage
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
s o c k e t-o u tle t.
rated voltage,
on
rated current
c le a rly in d ic a te th e
mains
th e
e q u ip m e n t.
rated power
or
th e
rated current
The
rated power
or
a rra n g e m e n t
o f th e
fo r e a ch
m a rk in g s
rated voltage
a s s o c ia te d w ith e a c h
s h a ll
o f th e
e q u ip m e n t.
E q u ip m e n t
current
rated voltage range
a
be
m a rke d
w ith
e ith e r
th e
rated
m a x im u m
Equipment with multiple supply connections
e q u ip m e n t h a s
rated current
W h e re
m ay
o r w ith th e c u r r e n t ra n g e .
F.3.3.7
If t h e
w ith
th e
or
m u ltip le
s u p p ly
c o n n e c tio n s , e a c h
c o n n e c tio n
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
w ith
its
rated power.
mains
m u ltip le
s u p p lie s
a re
id e n tic a l, th e y
m ay
have
one
m a rk in g
in d ic a tin g
th e
n u m b e r o f s u p p lie s .
EXAMPLE
“240 V 〜
/ 10 A x ;V” where iV is the number of identical mains supply connections.
If t h e e q u i p m e n t h a s m u lt ip le s u p p ly c o n n e c t i o n s , a n d if e a c h c o n n e c t i o n h a s a d if f e r e n t
voltage t h a n
voltage.
th e
o th e r s u p p ly
c o n n e c tio n s ,
each
c o n n e c tio n
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
w ith
its
rated
rated
T h e o v e ra ll s y s te m e le c tric a l ra tin g n e e d n o t b e m a rk e d .
F.3.3.8
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3.4
Voltage setting device
If t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e s a v o l t a g e s e t t i n g d e v i c e t h a t is o p e r a b l e
instructed person,
by an
ordinary person
or an
th e a c t o f c h a n g in g th e v o lta g e s e ttin g s h a ll a ls o c h a n g e th e in d ic a tio n o f
t h e v o l t a g e f o r w h i c h t h e e q u i p m e n t is s e t. T h e s e t t in g s h a ll b e r e a d a b l e w h e n t h e e q u i p m e n t
is r e a d y f o r u s e .
If t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e s a v o l t a g e - s e t t i n g d e v i c e t h a t is o p e r a b l e o n l y b y a
if t h e a c t o f c h a n g i n g
ra tin g ,
th e v o lta g e
s e ttin g
instructional safeguard
an
s h a ll
does
n o t a ls o
c h a n g e th e
s ta te
th a t, w h e n
c h a n g in g
skilled person,
in d ic a tio n
th e
and
o f th e v o lta g e
v o lta g e
s e ttin g , th e
in d ic a tio n o f th e v o lta g e s e ttin g s h a ll a ls o b e c h a n g e d .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3.5
Markings on terminals and operating devices
F.3.5.1
If a
mains
Mains appliance outlet and socket-outlet markings
a p p lia n c e
o u t l e t is
p ro v id e d
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
c u r r e n t o r p o w e r s h a ll b e m a r k e d a d ja c e n t to th e a p p lia n c e o u tle t.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
rated voltage
and
a s s ig n e d
旧C
If
mains
th e
s o c k e t-o u tle t
is
c o n fig u re d
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
TR 60083
IE C
or
a
re le v a n t
n a t i o n a l s t a n d a r d , t h e a s s i g n e d c u r r e n t o r p o w e r s h a ll b e m a r k e d . If t h e v o l t a g e o f t h e s o c k e t o u t l e t is t h e s a m e a s t h e
F.3.5.2
The
mains
v o lta g e , th e v o lta g e n e e d n o t b e m a rk e d .
Switch position identification marking
p o s itio n
o f a d is c o n n e c t s w itc h
o r c ir c u it- b r e a k e r s h a ll
be
id e n tifie d .
Such
id e n tific a tio n
m a y be c o m p ris e d o f w o rd s , s y m b o ls , o r an in d ic a to r.
If a s y m b o l is u s e d , t h e s y m b o l s h a l l b e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 4 1 7 .
F.3.5.3
If a f u s e
s u ita b le
Replacement fuse identification and rating markings
is r e p l a c e a b l e
re p la c e m e n t
ordinary person
by an
fu s e
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
instructed person,
or an
a d ja c e n t
to
th e
fu s e h o ld e r.
id e n tific a tio n
Id e n tific a tio n
of a
s h a ll
in c lu d e th e fu s e c u r r e n t ra tin g a n d th e fo llo w in g a s a p p ro p ria te :
-
if
th e
fu s e
needs
a
s p e c ia l
b re a k in g
c a p a c ity
w h ic h
is
n e ce ssa ry
fo r
th e
safeguard
fu n c tio n , th e a p p ro p ria te s y m b o l th a t in d ic a te s th e b re a k in g c a p a c ity ;
-
if th e fu s e c a n b e r e p la c e d w ith a fu s e o f a d iffe r e n t v o lt a g e ra tin g , th e fu s e v o lta g e ra tin g ;
-
if
th e
fu s e
is
a
tim e -d e la y
fu s e ,
and
th e
tim e -d e la y
is
n e ce ssa ry
fo r
th e
safeguard
fu n c tio n , th e a p p ro p ria te s y m b o l th a t in d ic a te s th e tim e -d e la y .
If a f u s e
is r e p l a c e a b l e
ordinary person,
by an
th e
c o d in g s
o f th e
re le v a n t fu s e s
s h a ll
be
e x p l a i n e d in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s .
If a f u s e is n o t r e p l a c e a b l e b y a n
-
id e n tific a tio n o f a s u ita b le
ordinary person
or an
instructed person:
r e p la c e m e n t fu s e s h a ll b e m a rk e d
a d ja c e n t to th e fu s e o r s h a ll
b e p r o v i d e d in t h e s e r v i c e i n s t r u c t i o n s ; a n d
-
if th e fu s e
is , o r c o u l d
be,
in t h e
n e u tra l o f th e
fu s e , p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t th a t re m a in
instructional safeguard s h a l l
mains s h a l l b e d i s c o n n e c t e d t o
s ta te
mains
e n e rg iz e d
th a t
th e
fu s e
s u p p ly
and
a fte r o p e ra tio n
o f th e
a re at E S 3
le v e l d u r in g
s e rv ic in g , an
m ay
th e
and
be
in
n e u tra l,
th a t
th e
d e -e n e rg iz e th e p h a s e c o n d u c to rs .
If a f u s e is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e r e p l a c e a b l e , f u s e r a t i n g s n e e d n o t b e m a r k e d .
F.3.5.4
Replacement battery identification marking
battery c a n
safeguard s h a l l
If a
F.3.5.5
be
re p la c e d
by an
in c o rre c t ty p e
o f re p la c e a b le
instructional
Neutral conductor terminal
permanently connected equipment, t h e t e r m i n a l , i f a n y ,
c o n n e c t i o n o M h e mains n e u t r a l c o n d u c t o r s h a l l b e i d e n t i f i e d b y t h e
in te n d e d
e x c lu s iv e ly
fo r
c a p ita l le tte r “ N ” .
Terminal marking location
T h e t e r m i n a l m a r k i n g s s p e c i f i e d in F . 3 . 5 . 5 , F . 3 . 6 . 1
re m o v a b le
w a sh e rs,
or
o th e r
p a rts
c o n n e c te d .
F.3.5.7
an
b e p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e M . 1 0 .
For
F.3.5.6
battery,
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th a t
can
a n d F .3 .6 .3 s h a ll n o t b e p la c e d o n s c re w s ,
be
re m o ve d
when
c o n d u c to rs
a re
b e in g
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
F.3.6
Equipment markings related to equipment classification
F.3.6.1
Class I equipment
F.3.6.1.1
The
Protective earthing conductor terminal
te rm in a l
in te n d e d
earthing conductor
fo r
c o n n e c tio n
class I equipment
of
to
th e
protective
in s ta lla tio n
s h a ll b e id e n tifie d w ith th e s y m b o l ® , IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 ( 2 0 0 6 - 0 8 ) .
A te r m in a l in te n d e d fo r c o n n e c tio n o f a c la s s I s u b - a s s e m b ly (fo r e x a m p le , a p o w e r s u p p ly ), o r
a c o m p o n e n t ( fo r e x a m p le , a te r m in a l b lo c k ) to th e e q u ip m e n t
m ay
be
id e n tifie d
w ith
e ith e r
sym bol
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9
protective earthing conductor
(2 0 0 6 -0 8 ),
or
w ith
s y m b o l^ ,
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 7 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 ).
F.3.6.1.2
Protective bonding conductor terminals
T e rm in a ls fo r
protective bonding conductors
If
such
te rm in a ls
a re
id e n tifie d ,
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 1 7 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 ).
fro m
th e
a p p lia n c e
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
w ith
th e
e a rth
sym bol
H o w e v e r, a c o m p o n e n t te rm in a l o r a te rm in a l fo r b o n d in g
in le t a lr e a d y
m a rke d
w ith
th e
s y m b o l® ,
^
,
w irin g
I E C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 ( 2 0 0 6 - 0 8 ) ， is
protective bonding conductor
a c c e p ta b le a s id e n tific a tio n o f a
F.3.6.2
th e y
n e e d n o t b e id e n tifie d .
te rm in a l.
Equipment class marking
Class II equipment
w ith
functional earthing
a
c o n n e c tio n
s h a ll
bear
th e
sym bol
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 9 2 (2 0 1 3 -0 3 ).
A ll o t h e r
class II equipment
s h a ll b e a r th e s y m b o l
T h e a b o v e s y m b o ls s h a ll n o t b e u s e d fo r
E q u ip m e n t p ro v id in g
-------
, IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 1 7 2 (2 0 0 3 -0 2 ).
class I equipment.
protective earthing
to o th e r e q u ip m e n t s h a ll n o t b e c la s s ifie d a s
class
II equipment.
F.3.6.3
Functional earthing terminal marking
W irin g te rm in a ls to
w ith
th e
sym bol
th e s y m b o l
~
be used
o n ly fo r th e c o n n e c tio n
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 8
of
functional earthing
(2 0 1 1 -0 7 ). T h e se
te rm in a ls
, IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 7 ( 2 0 0 6 - 0 8 ) o r w ith th e s y m b o l
A
s h a ll
s h a ll b e
not be
m a rke d
m a rke d
w ith
' f IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 1 9 (2 0 0 6 -
0 8 ).
H o w e ve r,
th e s e
s y m b o ls
m ay
be
used
fo r
a w irin g
te rm in a l
p ro v id e d
on
a
com ponent
(fo r
e x a m p le , a te rm in a l b lo c k ) o r s u b a s s e m b ly .
F.3.6.4
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection.
\ F.3.7
；I f t h e
Equipment IP rating marking
e q u ip m e n t
is
in te n d e d
fo r o th e r th a n
IP X 0 ,
th e
e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
b e a r th e
IP
num ber
i a c c o r d i n g t o t h e d e g r e e o f p r o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t i n g r e s s o f w a t e r in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 5 2 9 .
Copyright International Eteclrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.3.8
The
External power supply output marking
DC
cu rre n t
o u tp u t
ra tin g
of
an
e x te rn a l
power
and
th e
p o la rity .
P o la rity
p re v e n ts re v e rs e d
th e
v o lta g e
p o la rity . T h e A C
ra tin g ,
th e
cu rre n t
s u p p ly
s h a ll
m a rk in g
is
be
m a rke d
w ith
not
re q u ire d
th e
when
v o lta g e
th e
p in
ra tin g ,
th e
c o n fig u ra tio n
o u tp u t o f a n e x te r n a l p o w e r s u p p ly s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith
ra tin g
and
th e
fre q u e n c y
if
it
is
d iffe re n t
fro m
th e
in p u t
fre q u e n c y .
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement.
F.3.9
Durability, legibility and permanence of markings
In g e n e r a l ,
a ll
m a rk in g s
re q u ire d
to
be
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
be d u ra b le
and
le g ib le ,
and
s h a ll b e e a s ily d is c e r n a b le u n d e r n o r m a l lig h tin g c o n d itio n s .
U n le s s
o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d ,
instructional safeguard
is
instructional safeguards
in
c o lo u r
to
in d ic a te
do
h a za rd
not
have
s e v e rity ,
to
th e
be
in
c o lo u r
a c c o r d a n c e w ith th e IS O 3 8 6 4 s e rie s . M a r k in g s th a t a re e n g r a v e d o r m o u ld e d
c o n tra s tin g
c o lo u rs
p ro v id e d
th a t
th e y
a re
le g ib le
and
re a d ily
c o lo u r.
d is c e rn a b le
s h a ll
If a n
be
in
n e e d n o t b e in
under
n o rm a l
lig h tin g c o n d itio n s .
P rin te d o r s c r e e n e d m a r k in g s s h a ll a ls o b e p e r m a n e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection. Permanency is determined by the tests of F.3.10.
F.3.10
Test for the permanence of markings
F.3.10.1
General
Each required printed or screened marking shall be tested. However， if the data sheet for a
label confirms compliance with the test requirements, the test need not be performed.
F.3.10.2
Testing procedure
The test is conducted by rubbing the marking by hand without appreciable force for 15 s with
a piece o f cloth soaked with water and at a different place or on a different sample for 15 s
with a piece o f cloth soaked with the petroleum spirit specified in F.3.10.3.
F.3.10.3
Petroleum spirit
P e t r o l e u m s p i r i t is a r e a g e n t g r a d e h e x a n e w i t h a m i n i m u m o f 8 5 % n - h e x a n e .
NOTE The designation “n-hexane” is chemical nomenclature for“a "normal" or straight chain hydrocarbon. The
CAS (American Chemical Society) number of n-hexane is CAS#110-54-3.
F.3.10.4
Compliance criteria
After each test， the marking shall remain legible. If the marking is on a separable label, the
label shall show no curling and shall not be removable by hand.
F.4
Instructions
W hen
in fo rm a tio n
in fo rm a tio n
s h a ll
w ith
re g a rd
b e g iv e n
in a n
to
s a fe ty
in s tru c tio n
is
re q u ire d
a c c o rd in g
fo r in s ta lla tio n
to
o r in s tru c tio n
th is
d o c u m e n t,
fo r in itia l u s e . T h is
in fo r m a tio n s h a ll b e a v a ila b le p r io r to in s ta lla tio n a n d in itia l u s e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th is
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
E q u ip m e n t
fo r
e v a lu a te d
use
u s in g
in
lo c a tio n s
th e jo in te d
w h e re
te s t
p ro b e
c h ild re n
of
a re
not
F ig u re V .2
lik e ly
s h a ll
to
have
be
th e
p re se n t
fo llo w in g
and
th a t
is
o r e q u iv a le n t
s t a t e m e n t in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s .
NOTE 1 This equipment design typically applies to commercial or industrial equipment expected to be installed in
locations where only adults are normally present.
T h i s e q u i p m e n t i s n o t s u i t a b l e f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s
w h e re c h ild re n a re lik e ly to b e p re s e n t.
NOTE 2
See also ISO/IEC Guide 37, instructions for use of products of consumer interest.
T h e in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll in c lu d e th e fo llo w in g a s fa r a s a p p lic a b le :
-
I n s t r u c t i o n s to e n s u re c o rre c t a n d s a fe in s ta lla tio n a n d in te rc o n n e c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
-
F o r e q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d o n l y f o r u s e in a
restricted access area,
th e in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll so
s ta te .
-
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e f a s t e n e d
in p l a c e , t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l e x p l a i n
h o w to
s e c u re ly fa s te n th e e q u ip m e n t.
-
F o r a u d io
fo r
o th e r
e q u ip m e n t w ith te r m in a ls c la s s ifie d
e q u ip m e n t w ith
te rm in a ls
m a rke d
s h a ll r e q u ire th a t th e e x te r n a l w ir in g
skilled person,
o r s h a ll
as
in
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
a cco rd a n ce
c o n n e c te d
be c o n n e c te d
ES3
w ith
T a b le E .1 f a n d
F .3 .6 .1 ,
th e
in s tru c tio n s
to th e s e t e r m in a ls s h a ll b e in s ta lle d
by m eans
o f re a d y-m a d e
le a d s
or co rd s
by a
th a t a re
c o n s t r u c t e d in a w a y t h a t w o u l d p r e v e n t c o n t a c t w i t h a n y E S 3 c i r c u i t .
-
protective earthing i s u s e d a s a safeguard, t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l r e q u i r e c o n n e c t i o n o f
t h e e q u i p m e n t protective earthing conductor t o t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n protective earthing
conductor ( f o r e x a m p l e , b y m e a n s o f a p o w e r c o r d c o n n e c t e d t o a s o c k e t - o u t l e t w i t h
If
e a rth in g c o n n e c tio n ).
-
F o r e q u ip m e n t w ith
protective conductor current
protective earthing conductor
b e a r a n instructional safeguard
on th e
e x c e e d in g th e E S 2 lim its o f 5 .2 .2 . 2 f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 7 . 6 .
-
Graphical
s y m b o ls
p la c e d
on
th e
e q u ip m e n t
and
used
as
an
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e e x p la in e d .
-
If a
permanently connected equipment
in s tru c tio n s
fo r
in s ta lla tio n
s h a ll
s ta te
mains
is n o t p r o v i d e d w i t h a n a l l - p o l e
th a t an
a ll-p o le
mains
s w itc h
s w itc h , th e
in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith
A n n e x L s h a l l b e i n c o r p o r a t e d in t h e e l e c t r i c a l i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e b u i l d i n g .
-
If a r e p la c e a b le
s u ita b le
c o m p o n e n t o r m o d u le
re p la c e m e n t
in s tru c tio n s
or
com ponent
or
instructed person
p ro v id e s
m o d u le
a
safeguard
s h a ll
be
in s tru c tio n s ,
or
fu n c tio n ,
p ro v id e d
in
id e n tific a tio n
of a
ordinary person
th e
skilled person
in s tru c tio n s ,
as
a p p lic a b le .
-
For e q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g an
insulating liquid,
s a fe ty in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w h e r e
a p p l i c a b l e , i n c l u d i n g t h e u s e o f P P E i f n e e d e d , t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d a t a
fo r th e
-
The
insulating liquid
in s ta lla tio n
a n d t h e i n f o r m a t i o n in t h e m a t e r i a l s a f e t y d a t a s h e e t .
in s tru c tio n s
outdoor equipment s h a l l i n c l u d e d e t a i l s
f r o m c o n d i t i o n s in t h e outdoor location.
fo r
fe a tu re s n e e d e d fo r p ro te c tio n
of any
s p e c ia l
Compliance is checked by inspection.
F.5
U n le s s
Instructional safeguards
o th e rw is e
s p e c ifie d ,
an
instructional safeguard
is
c o m p ris e d
of
e le m e n t
1a
or
e le m e n t 2 , o r b o th , t o g e t h e r w ith e le m e n t 3 a n d e le m e n t 4 . If a s u it a b le s y m b o l fo r e le m e n t 1a
is n o t a v a i l a b l e , t h e n e l e m e n t 1 b m a y b e u s e d i n s t e a d .
U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d , th e lo c a tio n o f th e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
旧C
-
t he c o m p le te
-
element
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e m a r k e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t; o r
1a o r e le m e n t 2, o r b o th , s h a ll
instructional safeguard
s h a ll
be
in
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
be
th e
m a rke d
te x t
of
on
an
th e
e q u ip m e n t a n d
a c c o m p a n y in g
th e
c o m p le te
d o c u m e n t.
If
o n ly
e l e m e n t 2 is u s e d , t h e t e x t s h a l l b e p r e c e d e d b y t h e w o r d “ W a r n i n g ” o r “ C a u t i o n ” o r s i m i l a r
w o rd in g .
instructional safeguard
Any
e le m e n t p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e v is ib le to th e p e r s o n
p r io r to p o te n tia l e x p o s u r e to th e c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e p a r ts a n d a s
c lo s e a s r e a s o n a b ly p o s s ib le to th e e n e r g y s o u r c e p a r ts .
E l e m e n t s 1 a , 1 b , 2 , 3 , a n d 4 a r e s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e F . 1 .
A
instructional safeguard
s in g le
c lo s e ly
show
lo c a te d
th e
near each
lo c a tio n s
a d ja c e n t to th e
m ay
b e re la te d
o th e r. A n a c c o m p a n y in g
o f th e s e
p a rts ,
if t h e s e
p a rts
to s e v e r a l p a rts , p r o v id e d
d o c u m e n t o r th e
a re
n o t e a s ily
th o s e
in s tru c tio n
id e n tifia b le ,
p a rts a re
m a n u a l s h a ll
or
n o t lo c a te d
instructional safeguard.
Table F.1 - Instructional safeguard element description and examples
Element
Description
Example
1a
A symbol that identifies the nature of the class 2 or
class 3 energy source or the consequences that can
be caused by the class 2 or class 3 energy source.
1b
A symbol such as ISO 7000-0434 (2004-01) or a
combination of this symbol and ISO 7000-1641 (200401) to refer to text in an accompanying document.
These symbols may be combined.
2
Text that identifies the nature of the class 2 or class 3
energy source or the consequences that can be
caused by the energy source, and the location of the
energy source.
3
Text that describes the possible consequences of
energy transfer from the energy source to a body part.
Burned fingers when handling the parts
4
Text that describes the safeguard action necessary to
avoid energy transfer to a body part.
Wait one-half hour after switching off
before handling parts
A
ad®
Hot parts!
The symbols for elements 1a and 1b shall be from IEC 60417, ISO 3864-2, ISO 7000, ISO 7010 or the
equivalent.
F i g u r e F .1
c o m p le te
illu s tra te s o n e
e x a m p le
instructional safeguard.
o f th e
a rra n g e m e n t o f th e fo u r e le m e n ts
th a t c o m p ris e
O t h e r a r r a n g e m e n t s in t h e p o s i t i o n i n g o f t h e e l e m e n t s a r e
a ls o a c c e p ta b le .
A
Hot parts!
Burned fingers when handling the parts
Wait one-half hour after switching off before handling parts
t[c
Figure F.1 - Example of an instructional safeguard
S e e T a b le F .2 fo r e x a m p le s o f m a rk in g s , in s tru c tio n s , a n d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a
instructional safeguards.
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table F.2 - Examples of markings， instructions， and instructional safeguards
Rating
Example
48 V DC
Rated DC voltage
48 V --------230 V
230 V ^ ^ ± 1 0 %
Rated AC voltage
100/120/220/240 V AC
100-250 V A C
400 Y/230 V 3 0
208 Y/120 V 3-phase
Rated 3-phase voltage
208 Y/120 V 3
50-60 Hz
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Rated current
1A
AC rated power
DC rated power
Instruction
Positioning of cell, IEC 60417-5002 (2002-10)
Example
( +
I
AC, IEC 60417-5032 (2002-10)
DC, IEC 60417-5031 (2002-10)
Class II equipm ent, IEC 60417-5172 (2003-02)
Caution, ISO 7000, 0434a or 0434b (2004-01)
一
一
回
A
Dangerous voltage, IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10)
Earth; ground, IEC 60417-5017 (2006-08)
Protective earth; protective ground, IEC 60417-5019 (2006-08)
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
一
丄
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex G
(normative)
Components
G.1
S w itc h e s
G.1.1
General
R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s w i t c h e s t h a t a r e l o c a t e d in P S 3 a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w .
A switch may be tested separately or in the equipment.
G.1.2
Requirements
disconnect devices
S w itc h e s u s e d a s
A s w itc h
s h a l l n o t b e f i t t e d in a
mains
s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in A n n e x
L.
s u p p ly c o rd .
A s w it c h s h a ll c o m p l y w it h a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :
-
c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 , w h e r e b y th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s :
•
10 0 0 0 o p e ra tin g c y c le s (s e e 7 .1 .4 .4 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ) ;
•
t h e s w i t c h s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r u s e in t h e
u s e d , ty p ic a lly a
pollution degree
pollution degree
e n v i r o n m e n t in w h i c h i t is
2 e n v ir o n m e n t (s e e 7 .1 .6 .2 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ) ;
•
th e s w itc h h a v e a g lo w w ire te m p e r a tu r e o f 8 5 0 °C (s e e 7 .1 .9 .3 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 );
•
fo r
mains
s w i t c h e s u s e d in C R T t e l e v i s i o n s , t h e s p e e d o f c o n t a c t m a k i n g a n d b r e a k i n g
s h a ll b e in d e p e n d e n t o f th e s p e e d o f a c tu a tio n ;
NOTE
•
th e
This is because there is a high inrush current due to the degausing coil.
c h a ra c te ris tic s
of
th e
s w itc h
w ith
re g a rd
IEC 61058-1) s h a l l b e a p p r o p r i a t e f o r
operating conditions a s g i v e n b e l o w :
th e
to
th e
ra tin g s
fu n c tio n
of
and
th e
-
t h e r a tin g s o f th e s w itc h ( s e e C la u s e 6 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6);
-
t h e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f t h e s w it c h a c c o r d i n g to :
c la s s ific a tio n
s w itc h
under
(se e
normal
•
n a tu r e o f s u p p ly ( s e e 7 .1 .1 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ) ;
•
ty p e o f lo a d to b e c o n tr o lle d b y th e s w itc h (s e e 7 .1 .2 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 );
•
a m b ie n t a ir te m p e r a tu r e (s e e 7 .1 .3 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 ).
Compliance is checked according to IEC 61058-1:2016.
-
t he
s w itc h
s h a ll
be
so
c o n s tru c te d
t h a t it d o e s
n o t a tta in
e x c e s s iv e
te m p e ra tu re s
under
normal operating conditions;
Compliance is checked in the on-position according to 16.2.2 d), I) and m) of
IEC 61058-1:2008, except the current is the sum of the equipment current and the
maximum current supplied to other equipment, if any.
-
a
mains
th e
s w itc h c o n tr o llin g c o n n e c t o r s s u p p ly in g p o w e r to o th e r e q u ip m e n t s h a ll w ith s ta n d
e le c tric a l
e n d u ra n ce
lo a d a c c o r d in g
lo a d
s h a ll
T a b le G .1 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
to
1 7 .2
o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 : 2 0 1 6 f w ith
an
a d d itio n a l
to F ig u r e 9 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 6 . T h e to ta l c u r r e n t r a tin g o f th e a d d itio n a l
co rre sp o n d
e q u ip m e n t. T h e
te s t a c c o rd in g
to
th e
m a rk in g
of
th e
c o n n e c to rs
s u p p ly in g
power
to
o th e r
p e a k s u r g e c u r r e n t o f th e a d d itio n a l lo a d s h a ll h a v e a v a lu e a s s h o w n
in
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.1 - Peak surge current
G.1.3
Current rating
Peak surge current
A
A
up to and including 0,5
20
up to and including 1,0
50
up to and including 2,5
100
over 2,5
150
Test method and compliance criteria
The tests of IEC 61058-1:2016 shall be applied with the modifications shown in G.1.2.
After the tests, the switch shall show no deterioration of its e n c lo s u re and no loosening of
electrical connections or mechanical fixings.
G.2
Relays
G.2.1
Requirements
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r r e l a y s t h a t a r e l o c a t e d in a P S 3 c i r c u i t a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w .
A r e l a y m a y b e t e s t e d s e p a r a t e l y o r in t h e e q u i p m e n t .
F o r r e s i s t a n c e t o h e a t a n d f i r e , s e e C l a u s e 1 6 in I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 5 .
A
re la y
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
of
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 ,
ta k in g
in to
account
th e
fo llo w in g :
-
m a t e r i a l s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
6 .4 .5 .2
o r p a s s a g lo w w ire te s t a t 7 5 0
°C o r a n e e d le fla m e
te s t;
- 1 0
000
o p e ra tin g
e le c tric
c y c le s
e n d u ra n ce
fo r
e n d u ra n ce
te s t (s e e
C la u s e
(se e
11
5 .5
of
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 )
and
o f I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 5 ) ，n o t e m p o r a r y
d u rin g
th e
m a lfu n c tio n
s h a ll o c c u r;
NOTE A temporary malfunction is an event that has to be eliminated during the test at latest after one
additional energization cycle without any external influence (see Clause 11 of IEC 61810-1:2015).
-
t he
re la y s h a ll b e s u ita b le
fo r u se
in t h e
a p p lic a b le
p o llu tio n
s itu a tio n
(se e
C la u s e 13 o f
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 );
-
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f th e re la y w ith re g a rd to th e ra tin g s a n d c la s s ific a tio n (s e e IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 ) ,
s h a ll
be
a p p ro p ria te
fo r th e fu n c tio n
o f th e
re la y
under
normal operating condition
as
g iv e n b e lo w :
•
r a t e d c o il v o l t a g e a n d r a t e d c o il v o l t a g e r a n g e ( s e e 5 .1 o f I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 5 ) ;
•
r a te d c o n ta c t lo a d a n d th e ty p e o f lo a d ( s e e 5 .7 o f IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5);
•
re le a s e v o lta g e (s e e 5 .3 o f IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ) ;
•
th e
a m b ie n t a ir te m p e r a tu r e
and
upper and
lo w e r lim it o f th e te m p e r a tu r e
(s e e 5 .8 o f
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 );
•
o n ly r e la y t e c h n o lo g y c a t e g o r y R T IV a n d
degree
1 e n v iro n m e n t, fo r e x a m p le , th e
R T V s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d to m e e t
re la y
m e e ts
5 .4 .1 .5 .2
o f th is
pollution
d o c u m e n t (se e
5 .9 o f IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ) ;
-
electric
s tre n g th
(se e
1 0 .3
of
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 -1 :2 0 1 5 ),
r e q u i r e d t e s t v o l t a g e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
except
o f th is d o c u m e n t;
th e
te s t
v o lta g e
s h a ll
be
th e
旧C
-
if
required withstand voltage ( r e f e r r e d t o a s i m p u l s e w i t h s t a n d v o l t a g e
6 1 8 1 0 - 1 ) e x c e e d s 1 2 k V , clearances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h T a b l e 1 4 o f t h i s d o c u m e n t ;
th e
IE C
RMS working voltage ( r e f e r r e d
creepage distances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
-
if th e
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
solid insulation
in
a cco rd a n ce
in
t o a s v o l t a g e R M S in I E C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 ) e x c e e d s 5 0 0 V ,
T a b le 17 o f th is d o c u m e n t;
w ith
1 3 .3
of
IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5
or
w ith
5 .4 .4
of
th is
d o c u m e n t.
Compliance is checked according to IEC 61810-1 and the requirements of this document.
G.2.2
Overload test
A relay shall withstand the following test.
The contact of the relay is subjected to an overload test consisting of 50 cycles o f operation at
the rate of 6 to 10 cycles per minute， making and breaking 150 % of the current imposed in
the application, except that where a contact switches a motor load, the test is conducted with
the rotor of the motor in a locked condition. After the test, the relay shall still be functional.
G.2.3
Relay controlling connectors supplying power to other equipment
A m a in s relay controlling connectors supplying power to other equipment shall withstand the
endurance test of Clause 11 of IEC 61810-1:2015, with an additional load that is equal to the
total marked load o f the connectors supplying power to other equipment.
G.2.4
Test method and compliance criteria
For m a in s relays, the tests of IEC 61810-1 and this document shall be applied with the
modifications shown in Clause G.2 of this document.
After the tests， the relay shall show no deterioration of its e n clo su re , no reduction of
cle a ra n ce s and creepage d is ta n c e s and no loosening of electrical connections or
mechanical fixings.
Protective devices
G .3
G.3.1
Thermal cut-offs
G.3.1.1
A
thermal cut-off
NOTE
a)
Requirements
used as a
safeguard
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith r e q u ir e m e n t s a ) a n d b), o r c ).
In IEC 60730-1, a “thermal cut-off’ is a “thermal cut-out”
thermal cut-off,
The
when
te s te d
as
a
s e p a ra te
c o m p o n e n t,
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ir e m e n ts a n d te s ts o f th e IE C 6 0 7 3 0 s e rie s a s fa r a s a p p lic a b le :
-
t he
thermal cut-off
s h a ll b e o f T y p e 2 a c tio n (s e e 6 .4 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 );
-
t he
thermal cut-off
s h a ll h a v e a t le a s t m ic r o - d is c o n n e c tio n , T y p e 2 B
(se e 6 .4 .3 .2 and
6 .9 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ;
-
t he
thermal cut-off
p re v e n te d
fro m
s h a ll
o p e n in g
have
a g a in s t
a
trip -fre e
a
m e c h a n is m
c o n tin u a tio n
of
a
in
fa u lt,
w h ic h
c o n ta c ts
Type
2E
cannot
be
6 .4 .3 .5
of
(se e
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 :2 0 1 3 );
-
t h e n u m b e r o f c y c le s o f a u to m a tic a c tio n s h a ll b e a t le a s t:
•
3 0 0 0 c y c le s fo r a
thermal cut-off
w i t h a u t o m a t i c r e s e t u s e d in c i r c u i t s t h a t a r e n o t
s w i t c h e d o f f w h e n t h e e q u i p m e n t is s w i t c h e d o f f ( s e e 6 . 1 1 . 8 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ) ,
•
300
c y c le s
s w itc h e d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
fo r
a
thermal cut-off
o ff to g e t h e r w ith
w ith
a p p a ra tu s
a u to m a tic
and
fo r
re se t
used
thermal cut-off
in
c irc u its
w ith
no
th a t
a re
a u to m a tic
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
re s e t th a t can
b e re s e t b y h a n d fro m
th e o u ts id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t (s e e 6 .1 1 .1 0 o f
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 :2 0 1 3 ),
•
thermal cut-off
3 0 c y c le s fo r a
w ith n o a u to m a tic r e s e t a n d th a t c a n n o t b e re s e t b y
h a n d fro m th e o u ts id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t (s e e 6 .1 1 .1 1 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 );
-
t he
thermal cut-off
s h a ll b e te s te d
a s d e s ig n e d
fo r a lo n g
p e rio d
o f e le c tric a l s tre s s
a c ro s s in s u la tin g p a rts (s e e 6 .1 4 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ;
-
t he
thermal cut-off
s h a ll m e e t th e c o n d itio n in g r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r a n in te n d e d u s e o f a t
le a s t 10 0 0 0 h (s e e 6 .1 6 .3 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ;
-
t he c o n ta c t g a p , a n d
th e
d is ta n c e
b e tw e e n
th e te rm in a tio n s
and
c o n n e c tin g
le a d s
of
th e c o n ta c ts , s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 1 3 .1 .4 a n d 1 3 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 .
b)
T h e c h a ra c te ris tic s o f th e
thermal cut-off
thermal cut-off
-
t he ra tin g s o f th e
-
t he c la s s ific a tio n o f th e
w ith r e g a r d to
( s e e C la u s e 5 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3);
thermal cut-off
a c c o r d in g to th e :
•
n a t u r e o f s u p p l y ( s e e 6 .1 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ) ,
•
ty p e o f lo a d to b e c o n tr o lle d (s e e 6 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
•
d e g re e
o f p ro te c tio n
p ro v id e d
by
enclosures
a g a in s t in g r e s s o f s o lid
o b je c ts
and
d u s t ( s e e 6 .5 .1 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
•
d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n p ro v id e d
by
enclosures
a g a in s t h a rm fu l in g re s s o f w a te r (s e e
6 .5 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
•
p o llu tio n
s itu a tio n
fo r
w h ic h
thermal cut-off
th e
is
s u ita b le
(se e
6 .5 .3
of
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
•
m a x im u m a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e lim it (s e e 6 .7 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ) ,
s h a l l b e a p p r o p r i a t e f o r t h e a p p l i c a t i o n in t h e e q u i p m e n t .
c)
thermal cut-off
The
-
have
at
le a s t
w h e n te s te d a s a p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll:
m ic ro -d is c o n n e c tio n
a c c o rd in g
to
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1
w ith s ta n d in g
a
te s t
v o lt a g e a c c o r d in g to 1 3 .2 o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ; a n d
-
have
a
trip -fre e
m e c h a n is m
in
w h ic h
c o n ta c ts
cannot
be
p re v e n te d
fro m
o p e n in g
a g a in s t a c o n tin u a tio n o f a fa u lt; a n d
-
be
c o n d itio n e d
conditions
fo r
at
an
300 h w hen
a m b ie n t
th e
e q u ip m e n t
te m p e ra tu re
of
is
30
o p e ra te d
°C
or
at
under
th e
normal operating
m a x im u m
a m b ie n t
t e m p e r a t u r e s p e c i f i e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h e v e r is h i g h e r ; a n d
-
be
s u b je c te d
to
a
thermal cut-off
n u m b e r o f c y c le s
te s te d
as
a
o f a u to m a tic
s e p a ra te
a c tio n
c o m p o n e n t,
by
as
s p e c ifie d
e s tim a tin g
u n d e r a) fo r a
th e
re le v a n t
fa u lt
c o n d itio n s .
G.3.1.2
Test method and compliance criteria
The th e rm a l c u t- o ff is checked according to the test specifications of IEC 60730 series by
inspection and by measurement. The test is made on three specimens.
During the test， no sustained arcing shall occur. After the test， the th e rm a l c u t_ o ff shall show
no loosening of electrical connections or mechanical fixings.
G.3.2
Thermal links
G.3.2.1
Requirements
A th e rm a l
a)
The
lin k u s e d a s a
th e rm a l
lin k
safeguard
when
s h a ll m e e t e ith e r r e q u ir e m e n t a ) o r b) b e lo w :
te s te d
as
a
s e p a ra te
r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 .
T h e c h a r a c t e r is t ic s o f th e th e r m a l lin k w ith r e g a r d to :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
c o m p o n e n t ， s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
-
t he a m b ie n t c o n d itio n s (s e e C la u s e 5 o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 );
-
t h e e l e c t r i c a l c o n d i t i o n s ( s e e 6 .1 o f I E C 6 0 6 9 1 : 2 0 1 5 ) ;
-
t he th e rm a l c o n d itio n s (s e e 6 .2 o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 );
-
t h e r a tin g o f th e th e r m a l lin k ( s e e C la u s e 8 b ) o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 ) ; a n d
-
t he s u ita b ility fo r s e a lin g
in , o r u s e w it h
im p re g n a tin g flu id s o r c le a n in g
s o lv e n ts
(se e
C la u s e 8 c) o f IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 ),
s h a ll
be
a p p ro p ria te
conditions
The
th e
s tre n g th
o f th e
th e rm a l
except
a cro ss
and
c o n n e c tin g
te rm in a tio n s
a p p lic a tio n
in
th e
e q u ip m e n t
normal operating
under
single fault conditions.
and under
e le c tric
docum ent
fo r
th e
s h a ll
m e e t th e
d is c o n n e c tio n
(c o n ta c t
le a d s
lin k
of
th e
c o n ta c ts ,
fo r
re q u ire m e n ts
p a rts )
w h ic h
o f 5 .4 .9 .1
and
1 0 .3
except
of
o f th is
b e tw e e n
IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5
a p p lie s .
b)
T h e th e r m a l lin k w h e n te s te d a s a p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll be:
-
aged
fo r
th e rm a l
300
h
at
lin k w h e n
a
te m p e ra tu re
th e
c o rre s p o n d in g
e q u i p m e n t is o p e r a t e d
to
under
a n a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re o f 3 0 °C o r a t th e m a x im u m
th e
a m b ie n t
te m p e ra tu re
o f th e
normal operating conditions
at
a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re s p e c ifie d b y
t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h e v e r is h i g h e r ; a n d
-
s u b j e c t e d to s u c h
single fault conditions
o f th e e q u ip m e n t t h a t c a u s e th e t h e r m a l lin k
to o p e r a te . D u r in g th e te s t, n o s u s ta in e d a r c in g s h a ll o c c u r ; a n d
-
capable
o f w ith s ta n d in g
in s u la tio n
re s is ta n c e
tw o
tim e s th e v o lta g e
o f a t le a s t 0 ,2
a c ro s s th e
MQ, when
m e a su re d
d is c o n n e c tio n
w ith
and
a v o lta g e
have
an
e q u a l to tw o
tim e s th e v o lta g e a c ro s s th e d is c o n n e c tio n .
G.3.2.2
Test method and compliance criteria
If a thermal link is tested as a separate component according to G.3.2.1 a) above, compliance
is checked according to the test specifications of IEC 60691 f by inspection and measurement.
If a thermal link is tested as a part of the equipment according to G.3.2.1 b) above ，
compliance is checked by inspection and by the specified tests in the given order. The test is
carried out three times. The thermal link is replaced partially or completely after each test.
When the thermal link cannot be replaced partially or completely, the complete component
part including the thermal link (for example, a transformer) should be replaced.
No failure is allowed.
G.3.3
PTC
PTC thermistors
th e rm is to rs
used
as
s a fe g u a rd s
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
C la u s e s
1 5 ， 1 7 ，丄 15
and
丄 17
of
IE C 6 0 7 3 0 -1 :2 0 1 3 .
F o r P T C th e rm is to rs ,
-
whose
c o n tin u o u s
te m p e ra tu re
of
25
p o w e r d is s ip a tio n
°C
or
o th e rw is e
th a t a p p e a rs
s p e c ifie d
by
a t its m a x im u m
th e
v o lta g e
m a n u fa c tu re r
fo r
at an
a m b ie n t
trip p e d
s ta te ,
d e t e r m i n e d a s g i v e n in 3 . 3 8 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 8 - 1 : 2 0 0 6 , e x c e e d s 1 5 W ; a n d
-
wi t h a s iz e o f 1 7 5 0 m m 3 o r m o re ; a n d
-
l o c a t e d in a P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t ,
th e e n c a p s u la tio n o r tu b in g s h a ll b e m a d e o f
V-1 class material
o r e q u iv a le n t m a te ria l.
NOTE Tripped state means the state in which PTC thermistors are shifted to a high resistance condition at a
given temperature.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.3.4
Overcurrent protective devices
E x c e p t fo r d e v ic e s
co ve re d
by
G .3 .5 ,
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e ir a p p lic a b le
d e v ic e
s h a ll
have
a d e q u a te
o ve rcu rre n t
IE C
s ta n d a rd s
b re a k in g
p ro te c tiv e
d e v ic e s
used
as
safeguard
a
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4 . 1 . 2 . S u c h a p r o t e c t i v e
(ru p tu rin g )
c a p a c ity
to
in te rru p t
th e
m a x im u m
fa u lt
c u r r e n t ( in c lu d in g s h o r t- c ir c u it c u r r e n t) th a t c a n flo w .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
G.3.5
Safeguard components not mentioned in G.3.1 to G.3.4
G.3.5.1
Such
Requirements
p ro te c tiv e
d e v ic e s
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
fu s in g
re s is to rs ,
fu s e -lin k s
not
s ta n d a rd iz e d
IE C 6 0 1 2 7 s e rie s , IE C 6 0 2 6 9 s e r ie s o r m in ia tu r e c ir c u it b r e a k e r s ) s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te
in
ra tin g
in c lu d in g b re a k in g c a p a c ity .
For
n o n -re s e tta b le
p ro te c tiv e
d e v ic e s ,
such
as
fu s e -lin k s ,
a
m a rk in g
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith F .3 .5 .3 .
G.3.5.2
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and by performing s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n testing as
specified in Clause BA.
The test is carried out three times. No failure is allowed.
G.4
Connectors
G.4.1
Clearance and creepage distance requirements
clearance
creepage distance b e t w e e n t h e o u t e r
( i n c l u d i n g a n o p e n i n g in t h e enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r in t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y
insulation.
The
clearance
and
in s u la tin g
p a rts
w ith
s u rfa c e
th a t
a re
th e
o f a c o n n e c to r
c o n n e c te d
re q u ire m e n ts
to
fo r
ES2
basic
creepage distance b e t w e e n t h e o u t e r i n s u l a t i n g s u r f a c e o f a c o n n e c t o r
( i n c l u d i n g a n o p e n i n g in t h e enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s t h a t a r e c o n n e c t e d t o ES3
w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r i n t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r reinforced
insulation. A s a n e x c e p t i o n , t h e clearance a n d creepage distance m a y c o m p l y w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r basic insulation i f t h e c o n n e c t o r i s :
The
and
-
f i xed to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
l o c a t e d in te r n a lly to th e o u t e r
-
only
accessible
electrical enclosure
o f th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d
a fte r re m o v a l o f a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t
•
is r e q u i r e d t o b e in p l a c e d u r i n g
•
is p r o v i d e d w i t h a n
normal operating conditions,
instructional safeguard
and
to re p la c e th e re m o v e d s u b a s s e m b ly .
T h e te s ts o f 5 .3 .2 a p p ly to s u c h c o n n e c t o r s a fte r r e m o v a l o f th e s u b a s s e m b ly .
G.4.2
Mains
c o m p ly
IEC
Mains connectors
c o n n e c to rs
w ith
6 0 9 0 6 -1
one
or
th a t
of
IEC
a re
th e
6 0 9 0 6 -2
lis te d
in
fo llo w in g
-
a re
IEC
TR
60083
s ta n d a rd s
c o n s id e re d
-
and
IEC
c o m p ly
60309
a c c e p ta b le
IEC 6 0 8 8 4 - 1 ,
s e rie s ,
IEC 6 0 3 2 0
w ith
w ith o u t
fu rth e r
u s e d w ith in th e ir ra tin g s fo r th e p u r p o s e o f c o n n e c tin g o r in te r c o n n e c tin g
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
e v a lu a tio n
mains
p o w e r.
or
th a t
s e rie s ,
when
旧C
G.4.3
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Connectors other than mains connectors
C o n n e c to rs
such
a
o th e r th a n
shape
mains p o w e r s h a l l b e s o d e s i g n e d t h a t
mains s o c k e t - o u t l e t o r a p p l i a n c e c o u p l e r
fo r c o n n e c tin g
th a t in s e rtio n
in to
a
th e
is
p lu g
has
u n lik e ly
to
o ccu r.
EXAMPLE Connectors meeting this requirement are those constructed as described in IEC 60130-9, IEC 60169-3
or IEC 60906-3. An example of a connector not meeting the requirements of this subclause is the so-called
"banana” plug. Standard 3,5 mm audio plugs are not considered likely to be put in the mains socket outlet.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
G_5
Wound components
G.5.1
Wire insulation in wound components
G.5.1.1
T h is
General
c la u s e
a p p lie s
to
wound
c o m p o n e n ts
c o m p ris in g
insulation
or
G.5.1.2
Protection against mechanical stress
W h e re
tw o
basic insulation, supplementary
reinforced insulation.
w in d in g
w ire s ,
or one
w in d in g
w ire
and
a n o th e r w ire ,
a re
in
c o n ta c t
in s id e
th e
w o u n d c o m p o n e n t, c r o s s in g e a c h o th e r a t a n a n g le b e tw e e n 4 5 ° a n d 9 0 °, o n e o f th e fo llo w in g
a p p lie s :
-
protection
a g a in s t m e c h a n ic a l s tr e s s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .
b e a c h ie v e d
b y p ro v id in g
p h y s ic a l s e p a ra tio n
m a te ria l, o r b y u s in g d o u b le th e r e q u ire d
F o r e x a m p le , th is
in t h e f o r m
o f in s u la tin g
n u m b e r o f in s u la tio n
p ro te c tio n
s le e v in g
can
or sheet
la y e rs o n th e w in d in g w ire ;
or
-
t he w o u n d c o m p o n e n t p a s s e s th e e n d u ra n c e te s ts o f G .5 .2 .
A d d it io n a l ly , if t h e a b o v e c o n s t r u c t i o n
or
reinforced insulation,
basic insulation, supplementary insulation
c o m p o n e n t s h a l l p a s s a routine test f o r e l e c t r i c
p ro v id e s
th e fin is h e d w o u n d
s t r e n g t h in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 .
G.5.1.3
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by 5.4.4.1 and, where required, by G.5.2. If the tests of Annex J are
required, they are not repeated if the material data sheets confirm compliance.
G.5.2
G.5.2.1
Endurance test
General test requirements
Where required by G.5.1.2, three samples o f the wound component are subjected to 10 test
cycles as follows:
-
The samples are subjected to the heat run test of G.5.2.2. After the test, the samples are
allowed to cool down to ambient temperature.
-
The samples are then subjected to the vibration test of G.15.2.4.
-
The samples are then subjected for two days to the humidity conditioning o f 5.4.8.
The tests described below are made before the start of the 10 cycles and after each cycle.
The electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 is carried out.
After the electric strength test, the test of G.4.3 is made on wound components that are
supplied from the m ains, except for switching mode power supply.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.5.2.2
Heat run test
Depending on the type thermal classification of the insulation, the specimens are kept in a
heating cabinet for a combination of time and temperature as specified in Table G.2. The
10 cycles are carried out with the same combination.
The temperature in the heating cabinet shall be maintained within a tolerance o f ± 5 °C.
Table G.2 - Test temperature and testing time (days) per cycle
Thermal
classification
Class 105
(A)
Class 120
(E)
Test
temperature
Class 130
(B)
Class 155
(F)
Class 180
(H)
Class 200
(N)
Class 220
(R)
Class 250
■
Testing time duration for the test of G.5.2
°C
290
4 days
280
7 days
270
14 days
260
4 days
250
7 days
240
4 days
230
7 days
220
4 days
210
7 days
200
14 days
190
4 days
180
7 days
170
14 days
160
14 days
14 days
4 days
150
4 days
140
7 days
130
4 days
120
7 days
7 days
The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with
IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.
The manufacturer shall specify the test duration or the test temperature.
G.5.2.3
Wound components supplied from the mains
One input circuit is connected to a voltage equal to a test voltage o f at least 1f2 times the
ra te d volta ge, at double the ra te d fre q u e n c y for 5 min. No load is connected to the
transformer. During the test， multiple wire windings, if any, are connected in series.
A higher test frequency may be used; the duration of the period of connection, in minutes,
then being equal to 10 times the ra te d fre q u e n c y divided by the test frequency, but not less
than 2 min.
The test voltage is initially set at ra te d v o lta g e and gradually increased up to 1y2 times the
initial value, and then maintained for the time specified. If during the test there is a non-linear
change of current in an uncontrollable manner， it is regarded as breakdown between winding
turns.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
G.5.2.4
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance criteria
For wound components supplied from the m ains, there shall be no breakdown o f the
insulation between the turns of a winding, between input and output windings, between
adjacent input windings and between adjacent output windings, or between the windings and
any conductive core.
G.5.3
Transformers
G.5.3.1
General
T r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
-
m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n in G . 5 . 3 . 2 a n d G . 5 . 3 . 3;
-
I E C 6 1 2 0 4 - 7 f o r a t r a n s f o r m e r u s e d in a l o w - v o l t a g e p o w e r s u p p l y ;
-
meet
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
of
IE C 6 1 5 5 8 -1
and
th e
re le v a n t
p a rts
of
IE C 6 1 5 5 8 -2
w ith
th e
u s in g
th e
fo llo w in g a d d itio n s a n d lim ita tio n s :
•
th e lim it v a lu e s fo r E S 1 o f th is d o c u m e n t a p p ly (s e e 5 .2 .2 .2 );
•
fo r
working voltages
above
1 000
V
RMS,
see
1 8 .3
o f IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 7
t e s t v o l t a g e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ;
-
•
th e o v e rlo a d te s t a c c o rd in g to G .5 .3 .3; a n d
•
I E C 6 1 5 5 8 - 2 - 1 6 f o r t r a n s f o r m e r s u s e d in a s w i t c h m o d e p o w e r s u p p l y ; o r
FIW.
m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n in G . 5 . 3 . 4 f o r a t r a n s f o r m e r t h a t u s e s
EXAMPLES
The relevant parts of IEC 61558-2 are:
一
IEC 61558-2-1: Separating transformers;
-
I EC 61558-2-4: Isolating transformers; and
一
IEC 61558-2-6: Safety isolating transformers.
G.5.3.2
Insulation
G.5.3.2.1
Requirements
I n s u l a t i o n in t r a n s f o r m e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s .
W in d in g s
and
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
o f tra n s fo rm e rs
w h ic h t h e y a r e c o n n e c t e d , if a n y . T h e in s u la t io n
re q u ire m e n ts
o f C la u s e
5
and
pass
th e
s h a ll
be
tre a te d
b e tw e e n th e m
re le v a n t
e le c tric
as
p a rts
o f th e
c irc u its
to
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t
s tre n g th
te s ts ,
a c c o rd in g
to
th e
a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e i n s u l a t i o n in t h e e q u i p m e n t -
p re c a u tio n s
s h a ll
be ta k e n
to
p re v e n t th e
clearances a n d creepage distance
insulation o r reinforced insulation b y :
re d u c tio n
th a t
b e lo w
p ro v id e
th e
basic
re q u ire d
m in im u m
v a lu e s
of
insulation， supplementary
-
d i s p l a c e m e n t o f w in d in g s , o r th e ir tu rn s ;
-
d i s p l a c e m e n t o f in te rn a l w irin g o r w ire s fo r e x te rn a l c o n n e c tio n s ;
-
u n d u e d i s p l a c e m e n t o f p a r t s o f w i n d i n g s o r i n t e r n a l w i r i n g , in t h e e v e n t o f r u p t u r e o f w i r e s
a d ja c e n t to c o n n e c tio n s o r lo o s e n in g o f th e c o n n e c tio n s ; a n d
-
bridging
of
in s u la tio n
by
w ire s ,
scre w s,
w a sh e rs
and
th e
lik e
s h o u ld
b e c o m e fre e .
It i s n o t e x p e c t e d t h a t t w o i n d e p e n d e n t f i x i n g s w i l l l o o s e n a t t h e s a m e t i m e .
A ll w in d in g s s h a ll h a v e th e e n d tu r n s r e ta in e d b y p o s itiv e m e a n s .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e y
lo o s e n
or
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
E x a m p le s
o f a c c e p ta b le
fo rm s
o f c o n s tru c tio n
a re
th e fo llo w in g
(th e re
a re
o th e r a c c e p ta b le
fo rm s o f c o n s tru c tio n ):
-
windings
is o la te d fro m
e a c h o th e r b y p la c in g th e m
on s e p a ra te
lim b s o f th e c o re , w ith o r
w ith o u t s p o o ls ;
-
w i n d i n g s o n a s in g le s p o o l w ith a p a rtitio n w a ll, w h e r e
e ith e r th e s p o o l a n d
a re
p a rtitio n
p re sse d
o r m o u ld e d
in o n e
p ie c e , o r a p u s h e d - o n
w a ll
p a rtitio n
has an
w a ll
in te rm e d ia te
s h e a th o r c o v e r in g o v e r th e jo in t b e tw e e n th e s p o o l a n d th e p a rtitio n w a ll;
-
concentric
w in d in g s
on
a
spool
of
in s u la tin g
m a te ria l
w ith o u t
fla n g e s ,
or
on
in s u la tio n
a p p l i e d in t h i n s h e e t f o r m t o t h e t r a n s f o r m e r c o r e ;
-
insulation
is p r o v i d e d
b e tw e e n
w in d in g s
c o n s is tin g
o f s h e e t in s u la tio n
e x te n d in g
beyond
th e e n d tu r n s o f e a c h la y e r;
-
c o n c e n t r i c w in d in g s , s e p a r a t e d b y a n e a r t h e d c o n d u c t iv e s c r e e n t h a t c o n s is t s o f m e ta l fo il
e x te n d in g th e fu ll w id th o f th e w in d in g s , w ith s u ita b le in s u la tio n b e tw e e n e a c h w in d in g a n d
th e s c re e n . T h e c o n d u c tiv e s c re e n a n d
its l e a d - o u t w ir e
h a v e a c r o s s - s e c t io n s u ff ic ie n t to
e n s u r e t h a t o n b r e a k d o w n o f th e in s u la t io n a n o v e r lo a d d e v ic e w ill o p e n th e c ir c u it b e fo r e
t h e s c r e e n is d e s t r o y e d . T h e o v e r l o a d d e v i c e m a y b e a p a r t o f t h e t r a n s f o r m e r .
If a t r a n s f o r m e r is f i t t e d w i t h a n e a r t h e d s c r e e n f o r p r o t e c t i v e p u r p o s e s , t h e t r a n s f o r m e r s h a l l
pass
th e
te s t
of
5 .6 .6
b e tw e e n
th e
e a rth e d
scre e n
and
th e
e a rth in g
te rm in a l
of
th e
tra n s fo rm e r.
No
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t a p p lie s
to
in s u la tio n
b e tw e e n
a n y w in d in g
and
th e
co re
o r scre e n ,
p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e c o r e o r s c r e e n is t o t a l l y e n c l o s e d o r e n c a p s u l a t e d a n d t h e r e is n o e le c t r ic a l
c o n n e c t io n to th e c o r e o r s c r e e n . H o w e v e r , th e te s ts b e tw e e n w in d in g s th a t h a v e te r m in a t io n s
c o n tin u e to a p p ly .
G.5.3.2.2
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement and where applicable by test.
G.5.3.3
Transformer overload tests
G.5.3.3.1
Test conditions
If the tests are carried out under simulated conditions on the bench, these conditions shall
include any protective device that would protect the transformer in the complete equipment.
Transformers for switch mode power supply units are tested in the complete power supply unit
or in the complete equipment. Test loads are applied to the output of the power supply unit.
A linear transformer or a ferro-resonant transformer has each winding isolated from the m a in s
loaded in turn, with any other winding isolated from the m a in s loaded between zero and its
specified maximum load to result in the maximum heating effect.
The output of a switch mode power supply is loaded to result in the maximum heating effect in
the transformer.
Where an overload condition cannot occur or is unlikely to cause a s a fe g u a rd to fail, the tests
are not made.
G.5.3.3.2
Compliance criteria
Maximum temperatures of windings shall not exceed the values in Table G.3 when measured
as specified in B.1.5, and determined as specified below:
-
wi th an external overcurrent protective device: at the moment of operation， for
determination of the time until the overcurrent protective device operates, reference may
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
be made to a data sheet of the overcurrent protective device showing the trip time versus
the current characteristics;
-
wi th an automatic reset th e rm a l c u t-o ff: as shown in Table G.3 and after 400 h;
-
wi th a manual reset th e rm a l c u t-o ff: at the moment o f operation; or
-
for current limiting transformers: after the temperature has stabilized.
If the temperature o f the windings of a transformer with a ferrite core, measured as specified
in B.1.5, exceeds 180 ° C , it shall be retested at maximum rated ambient temperature
( Tamb = Tma) ， a n d n o ta sca lcu la te d a cco rd in g to B .2 .6 .3 .
Windings isolated from the m ains, that exceed the temperature limits but that become open
circuit or otherwise require replacement of the transformer, do not constitute a failure of this
test provided that the transformer continues to comply with B.4.8.
During the test the transformer shall not emit flames or molten-metal. After the test， the
transformer shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 as applicable.
Table G.3 - Temperature limits for transformer windings and for motor windings
(except for the motor running overload test)
Maximum temperature °C
Class
105
Class
120
Class
130
Class
155
Class
180
Class
200
Class
220
Class
250
Method of protection
(A)
(E)
(B)
(F)
(H)
(N)
(R)
No protective device used or
protected by internal or external
impedance
150
165
175
200
225
245
265
295
Protected by a protective device
that operates during the first
hour
200
215
225
250
275
295
315
345
maximum after first hour
175
190
200
225
250
270
290
320
arithmetic average
temperature (/A) during the
2nd hour and during the
72nd hour and during the
400th hour a
150
165
175
200
225
245
265
295
■
Protected by any protective
device:
一
-
The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with
IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.
a
The arithmetic average temperature is determined as follows:
The graph of temperature against time (see Figure G.1)f while the power to the transformer is cycling on and
off, is plotted for the period of test under consideration. The arithmetic average temperature (/A) is determined
by the formula:
/a
’ max + ’ min
~
where:
t
__
is the average of the maxima,
is the average of the minima.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
2
~
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Figure G.1 - Determination of arithmetic average temperature
G.5.3.3.3
Alternative test method
The transformer is covered with a single layer of ch e e s e c lo th and is placed on a wooden
board that is covered with a single layer of w ra p p in g tissu e . The transformer is then
gradually loaded until one of the following situations occurs:
-
the overload protective device operates;
-
the winding becomes an open circuit; or
-
the load cannot be increased any further without reaching a short-circuit or foldback
condition.
The transformer is then loaded to a point ju s t before the above applicable situation occurs
and is operated for 7 h.
During the test the transformer shall not emit flames or molten metal. The c h e e s e c lo th or
w ra p p in g tis s u e shall not char or catch fire.
If the transformer voltage exceeds ES1， the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd
provided in the transformer shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 as applicable
after it has cooled to room temperature.
G.5.3.4
Transformers using fully insulated winding wire (FIW)
G.5.3.4.1
The
General
re q u ire m e n ts
of
G .5 .3 .4
m ay
o n ly
be
a p p lie d
to
e q u ip m e n t
in te n d e d
fo r
use
in
O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r i e s I a n d II.
W h e re
FIW
is
used
w ith in
a
tra n s fo rm e r,
FIW
th e
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
IE C 6 0 8 5 1 -5 :2 0 0 8 ,
IE C 6 0 3 1 7 - 0 - 7 a n d IE C 6 0 3 1 7 -5 6 .
FIW w i n d i n g s a t E S 2
instructed person.
If t h e
w ire
has
a
or
ES3
n o m in a l
le v e ls
s h a ll
not be
d ia m e te r o th e r th a n
accessible
d e fin e d
to
an
in T a b l e G . 5
ordinary person
(F IW 3 -9 ),
th e
or an
m in im u m
e le c tric s tre n g th v a lu e c a n b e c a lc u la te d a c c o rd in g to th e fo rm u la b e lo w T a b le G .5 .
A
tra n s fo rm e r th a t u s e s
FIW
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
IE C 6 0 0 8 5
and
m a y o n ly
be
used
u p to a n d
in c lu d in g in s u la tio n C la s s 1 5 5 (F ).
W h e re m e c h a n ic a l s e p a ra tio n
th e
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t
fo r
is r e q u i r e d
b e lo w , th e m e c h a n ic a l s e p a r a tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
basic insulation
T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
5 .4 .9 .1 e x c e p t
th a t
- 242 -
旧C
62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018
Table G.4 - Test voltages for electric strength tests
based on the peak of the working voltages
Voltage up to and including
Test voltage for basic insulation or
supplementary insulation
V peak
Test voltage for reinforced
insulation
kV peak or DC (Vrms)
< 70,5
0,35 (0,25)
J (0,5)
212
2 (1,41)
4 (2,82)
423
3 (2,12)
6 (4,24)
846
3,5 (2,47)
7 (4,95)
1 410
3,9 (2,76)
7,8 (5,52)
〇
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points.
This table is based on Table 14 of IEC 61558-1:2017.
G.5.3.4.2
FIW
Transformers with basic insulation only
s e rv in g
basic insulation
as
T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s
th e
s h a ll b e a c o n s tr u c tio n
h a v in g
te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th
a m in im u m
te s ts
based
te s t v o lta g e
on
5 .4 .9 .1
per
except
th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 .
FIW
M e c h a n i c a l s e p a r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n t h e
Clearances
and
creepage distances
b e tw e e n th e
a n d e n a m e lle d w ire .
FIW
a n d e n a m e lle d w ire a re n o t re q u ire d .
NOTE 1 An example of this construction is a transformer with FIW as one winding and enamelled wire as the
other.
NOTE 2
The specified values in Table G. are RMS
G .5 .3.4.3
Transformers with double insulation or reinforced insulation
double insulation
T r a n s fo r m e r s w ith
-
t wo
or
insulation,
•
FIW
w in d in g s
reinforced insulation
in s u la te d
c o m p r is e d o f:
basic insulation
w ith
and
supplementary
s h a ll c o m p l y w it h a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :
s e rv in g
s h a ll e a c h
fo r
FIW
m o re
or
basic insulation
as
h a v e a m in im u m
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s ts
and
th e
te s t v o lta g e
based
on
FIW
s e rv in g
as
supplementary insulation
p e r T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s
5 .4 .9 .1
except
th a t
T a b le G .4
s h a ll
be
a p p lie d
in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 ;
•
m e c h a n ic a l
s e p a ra tio n
FIW
re q u ire d b e tw e e n b o th
•
-
one
clearances
FIW
fu lfils
th e
p ro v id e d
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t
fo r
basic insulation
is
w in d in g s ; a n d
creepage distances
and
w in d in g
th a t
w ith
b e tw e e n th e
FIW
a re n o t re q u ire d .
reinforced insulation
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
a ll
of
th e
fo llo w in g :
•
FIW
reinforced insulation
s e rv in g a s
s h a ll h a v e a m in im u m te s t v o lta g e p e r T a b le G .5
th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts b a s e d
o n 5 .4 .9 .1
e x c e p t th a t
T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 ;
•
m e c h a n ic a l
s e p a ra tio n
re q u ire d b e tw e e n th e
•
clearances
and
th a t
FIW
fu lfils
th e
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t
fo r
basic insulation
is
a n d e n a m e lle d w ire w in d in g s ; a n d
creepage distances
b e tw e e n
th e
FIW
and
e n a m e lle d
w ire
a re
not
re q u ire d .
-
one
FIW
w in d in g
in s u la tio n s e rv in g a s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
basic insulation i n c o m b i n a t i o n
supplementary insulation, s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
p ro v id e d
w ith
w ith
s o lid
o r th in
a ll o f t h e f o llo w in g :
la y e r
旧C
•
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
FIW
s e rv in g a s
basic insulation
T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s
th e
s h a l l h a v e a m i n i m u m t e s t v o l t a g e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
te s t v o lta g e s
fo r e le c tric s tre n g th
te s ts
based
on
5 .4 .9 .1
e x c e p t th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 ;
•
s o lid
o r th in
la y e r in s u la tio n
C la u s e 5, in c lu d in g
•
clearances
and
s e rv in g
solid insulation;
supplementary insulation
as
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
and
creepage distances
b e tw e e n
th e
FIW
and
e n a m e lle d
w ire
a re
re q u ire d .
G .5 .3.4.4
Transformers with FIW wound on metal or ferrite core
FIW
s h a ll b e d e s ig n a te d
FIW
s e rv in g
as
basic insulation
basic insulation
s h a ll
b a s e d on th e p e a k o f th e
be a c o n s tru c tio n
h a v in g
working voltage.
a
m in im u m
te s t v o lta g e
in
a c c o r d a n c e w ith T a b le G .5 th a t e x c e e d s th e te s t v o lta g e s fo r e le c tric s tre n g th te s ts b a s e d o n
5 .4 .9 .1 e x c e p t th a t T a b le G .4 s h a ll b e a p p lie d in s te a d o f T a b le 2 6 .
M e c h a n i c a l s e p a r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n t h e
G .5 .3.4.5
FIW
a n d th e m e ta l o r fe rrite c o re .
Thermal cycling test and compliance
For tra n s fo rm e rs with FIW the following test is required:
Three samples of the transformer shall be used. The samples shall be subjected 10 times to
the following sequence of temperature cycles:
- 6 8 h at the highest winding temperature ± 2 °C measured in normal use plus 10 K with a
minimum of 85 °C;
- 1
h at 25 CC
- 2
h at 0 °C
- 1
h at 25 CC ± 2 ° C .
土
土
2 °C;
2 0C;
During each thermal cycling test, a voltage o f twice the value of the w o rk in g v o lta g e at 50 Hz
or 60 Hz shall be applied to the samples between the windings.
After conditioning o f the three samples above,
-
t wo of the three samples are then subjected to the humidity treatment o f 5.4.8 (48 h
treatment) and the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, except that T a b l e G . 4 is
applied instead of Table 26; and
-
the remaining sample shall be subjected to the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1
except that T a b l e G . 4 is applied instead of Table 26 immediately at the end of the last
period at highest temperature during the thermal cycling test.
There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test.
G .5 .3.4.6
Partial discharge test
If FIW is used and if the recurring peak voltage U{ across the insulation is greater than 750 Vf
a partial discharge test according to IEC 60664-1 (additional test description details below)
shall be performed. The partial discharge test shall be done after the thermal cycling test of
G.5.3.4.5 at normal room temperature for the two samples that were subjected to the humidity
treatment.
The relevant recurring peak voltage is the maximum measured voltage between the input and
the transformer and associated circuitry if the secondary side is earthed.
The measuring shall be done at the maximum of the ra te d v o lta g e of the equipment.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
A partial discharge test shall be done at the transformer with the measured recurring peak
voltage U{ where:
-
U{ is the maximum peak o f the w o rk in g vo lta g e ;
-
/1
-
t2 is 15 s.
is 5 s;
Partial discharge shall be less than or equal to 10 pC at time / 2 . The test shall be done
according to Figure G.2. For other applications higher values may be required (for example,
IEC 61800-5-1).
G .5.3.4.7
Routine test
The finished component is subjected to ro u tin e te s ts for electric strength (between windings
and between windings and the core, see G.5.3.2.1), in accordance with 5.4.9.2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Nominal
conductor
diameter
Minimum
specific
breakdown
voltage a
[mmj
[V/pm]
Grade
of FIW
3
Grade of
FIW
4
Grade
of FIW
5
Grade
of FIW
6
Grade
of FIW
7
Grade
of FIW
8
0,055
0,062
0,067
0,075
0,084
0,092
0,102
0,114
0,126
0,140
0,155
0,172
0,195
0,218
0,240
0,267
0,298
0,330
0,368
0,412
0,460
0,514
0,567
0,631
0,705
0,790
0,885
0,990
1,095
1,218
1,350
1,503
1,707
0,059
0,067
0,073
0,082
0,090
0,098
0,109
0,121
0,133
0,148
0,164
0,182
0,206
0,230
0,253
0,281
0,313
0,346
0,385
0,429
0,479
0,534
0,588
0,654
0,729
0,815
0,912
1,019
1,125
1,249
1,382
1,536
1,741
0,070
0,079
0,084
0,093
0,103
0,111
0,123
0,135
0,149
0,165
0,182
0,202
0,228
0,254
0,278
0,308
0,343
0,377
0,416
0,460
0,510
0,565
0,629
0,695
0,770
0,856
0,963
1,070
1,176
1,310
1,443
1,597
1,802
0,080
0,090
0,095
0,105
0,116
0,124
0,137
0,149
0,165
0,182
0,200
0,222
0,250
0,278
0,303
0,335
0,373
0,408
0,447
0,491
0,541
0,596
0,670
0,736
0,811
0,897
1,014
1,121
1,227
0,090
0,101
0,106
0,117
0,129
0,137
0,151
0,163
0,181
0,199
0,218
0,242
0,272
0,302
0,328
0,362
0,403
0,439
0,478
0,522
0,572
0,627
0,711
0,777
0,852
0,938
0,100
0,112
0,117
0,129
0,142
0,150
0,165
0,177
0,197
0,216
0,236
0,262
0,294
0,326
0,353
0,389
0,433
0,470
0,509
0,553
0,603
0,658
Value according to Table 7 of IEC 60317-0-7:2017.
Copyright International Electrotechncal Commission
Grade
of FIW
9
0,163
0,179
0,191
0,213
0,233
0,254
0,282
0,316
0,350
0,378
0,416
0,463
0,501
0,540
0,584
Grade
of FIW
3
Grade
of FIW
4
Grade
of FIW
5
Grade
of FIW
6
Grade
of FIW
7
Grade
of FIW
8
714
809
809
904
1 000
1 000
1 047
1 142
1 238
1 261
1 352
1 442
1 577
1 712
1 802
1 937
2 162
2 253
2 388
2 568
2 499
2 666
2 791
2 233
2 359
2 516
2 673
2 831
2 988
2 749
2 805
2 889
3 001
904
1 047
1 095
1 238
1 285
1 285
1 380
1 476
1 571
1 622
1 757
1 892
2 072
2 253
2 388
2 568
2 838
2 973
3 154
3 334
3 290
3 499
3 665
2 956
3 114
3 302
3 522
3 743
3 931
3 618
3 703
3 815
3 955
1 428
1 618
1 618
1 761
1 904
1 904
2 047
2 142
2 332
2 388
2 568
2 793
3 063
3 334
3 514
3 784
4 190
4 370
4 550
4 730
4 582
4 790
5 373
4 246
4 403
4 592
5 126
5 347
5 535
5 330
5 414
5 526
5 666
1 904
2 142
2 142
2 332
2 523
2 523
2 713
2 808
3 094
3 154
3 379
3 694
4 055
4 415
4 640
5 001
5 541
5 766
5 947
6 127
5 873
6 081
7 081
5 535
5 692
5 881
6 730
6 950
7 139
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
6
6
7
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
380
666
666
904
142
142
380
475
856
919
190
595
046
496
766
217
893
163
343
523
164
372
788
825
982
171
856
189
189
475
760
760
046
141
617
685
001
496
037
577
893
433
244
560
740
920
455
Grade
of FIW
9
4 379
4 712
4 808
5 379
5 451
5 811
6 397
7 028
7 659
8 019
8 650
9 596
9 956
10 136
10 316
I
- 245
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
49
49
49
37
37
37
37
37
37
33
33
33
33
[mm]
IEC 2018
0,04
0,045
0,05
0,056
0,063
0,071
0,08
0,09
0,1
0,112
0,125
0,14
0,16
0,18
〇 ,2
0,224
0,25
0,28
0,315
0,355
〇 ,4
0,45
0,5
0,56
0,63
0,71
0,8
0,9
1
1,12
1,25
1,4
1,6
Ub
Minimum dielectric strength test voltage values per wire for
basic or reinforced insulation at overall diameter, U s [V]
(duration of 60 s)
Minimum overall FIW diameter
◎
IEC 62368_1:2018
Table G.5 - Values of FIW wires with maximum overall diameter and minimum test voltages according to the enamel increase
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The values o f allowed voltage strength for FIW dimensions other than specified in Table G.5
are calculated according to the following formula:
v
=
^
- d
C u
x ^ x1Q3
2
where:
da
is the maximum overall diameter in mm;
dCu is the nominal copper diameter in mm;
U
is the voltage value according to Table 7 of IEC 60317-0-7:2017 (see column 2) in V/fjm;
V
is the allowed voltage strength for FIW wire in volts.
Higher voltage values, based on the "enamel increase" o f Table 6 o f IEC 60317-0-7:2017, are
under consideration.
G.5.4
Motors
G.5.4.1
DC
General requirements
m o to rs s u p p lie d fro m
P S 2 o r P S 3 c irc u its is o la te d
th e te s ts o f G .5 .4 .5 , G .5 .4 .6 a n d G .5 .4 .9 . D C
fro m
th e A C
mains
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
m o to rs th a t b y th e ir in trin s ic o p e ra tio n n o r m a lly
o p e ra te u n d e r lo c k e d -ro to r c o n d itio n s , s u c h a s s te p p e r m o to rs , a re n o t te s te d a n d D C m o to rs
t h a t a r e u s e d f o r a i r - h a n d l i n g o n l y a n d w h e r e t h e a i r p r o p e l l i n g c o m p o n e n t is d i r e c t l y c o u p l e d
to th e m o to r s h a ft a re n o t re q u ire d to p a s s th e te s t o f G .5 .4 .5.
A ll o t h e r m o t o r s
s u p p lie d
fro m
PS2
or PS3
c irc u its
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
o v e rlo a d
te s ts
of
com ponent
is
G .5 .4 .3 a n d G .5 .4 .4 a n d , w h e re a p p lic a b le , G .5 .4 .7 , G .5 .4 .8 a n d G .5 .4 .9 .
H o w e v e r, th e fo llo w in g m o to rs a re e x e m p t fro m th e te s t o f G .5 .4 .3 :
-
mot or s
th a t
a re
used
fo r
a ir-h a n d lin g
d ire c tly c o u p le d to th e m o to r s h a ft; a n d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o n ly
and
w h e re
th e
a ir-p ro p e llin g
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
s h a d e d p o le m o to rs w h o s e v a lu e s o f lo c k e d - r o to r c u r r e n t a n d n o -lo a d c u r r e n t d o n o t d iffe r
b y m o re th a n 1 A a n d h a v e a ra tio o f n o t m o re th a n 2 /1 .
G.5.4.2
Motor overload test conditions
Unless otherwise specified， during the test， the equipment is operated at ra te d v o lta g e or at
the highest voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e range.
The tests are carried out either in the equipment or under simulated conditions on the bench.
Separate samples may be used for bench tests. Simulated conditions include:
-
any protective device that would protect the motor in the complete equipment; and
-
use of any mounting means that may serve as a heat sink to the motor frame.
Temperatures of windings are measured as specified in B.1.5. Where thermocouples are used
they are applied to the surface of the motor windings. Temperatures are measured at the end
of the test period where specified, otherwise when the temperature has stabilized, or at the
instant of operation of fuses, th e rm a l c u t-o ffs , motor protective devices and the like.
For totally enclosed, impedance-protected motors, the temperatures are measured by
thermocouples applied to the motor case.
When motors without inherent thermal protection are tested under simulated conditions on the
bench， the measured winding temperature is adjusted to take into account the ambient
temperature in which the motor is normally located within the equipment.
G.5.4.3
Running overload test and compliance criteria
A running overload test is carried out by operating the motor under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s . The load is then increased so that the current is increased in appropriate gradual
steps, the motor supply voltage being maintained at its original value. When steady conditions
are established， the load is again increased. The load is thus progressively increased in
appropriate steps but without reaching locked-rotor condition (see G.5.4.4)f until the overload
protective device operates.
Compliance is checked by measuring the motor winding temperatures during each steady
period. The measured temperatures shall not exceed the values in T a b l e G . 6 .
Table G.6 - Temperature limits for running overload tests
Maximum temperature
oc
Class 105
(A)
Class 120
(E>
Class 130
(B)
Class 155
(F)
Class 180
(H)
Class 200
(N)
Class 220
(R)
Class 250
140
155
165
190
215
235
255
275
■
The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with
IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.
G.5.4.4
G.5.4.4.1
Locked-rotor overload
Test method
A locked-rotor test is carried out starting at room temperature.
The duration of the test is as follows:
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
-
motor protected by inherent or external impedance is operated on locked-rotor for
15 days except that testing is discontinued when the windings of the motor reach a
constant temperature, provided that the constant temperature is not more than that
specified in Table 9 for the insulation system used;
-
a motor with an automatic reset protective device is cycled on locked-rotor for 18 days;
-
a motor with a manual reset protective device is cycled on locked-rotor for 60 cycles, the
protective device being reset after each operation as soon as possible for it to remain
closed， but after not less than 30 s;
-
a motor with a non-resettable protective device is operated until the device operates.
a
G.5.4.4.2
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by measuring temperatures at regular intervals during the first three
days for a motor with inherent or external impedance protection or with an automatic reset
protective device, or during the first 10 cycles for a motor with a manual reset protective
device， or at the time of operation o f a non-resettable protective device. The measured
temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.3.
During the test, protective devices shall operate reliably without permanent damage to the
motor including:
-
severe or prolonged smoking or flaming;
-
electrical or mechanical breakdown of any associated component part such as a capacitor
or starting relay;
-
flaking, embrittlement or charring of insulation; or
-
deterioration o f the insulation.
Discoloration of the insulation may occur， but charring or embrittlement to the extent that
insulation flakes off or material is removed when the winding is rubbed with the thumb is not
acceptable.
After the period specified for temperature measurement, the motor shall withstand the electric
strength test of 5.4.9.1 after the insulation has cooled to room temperature and with test
voltages reduced to 0,6 times o f the specified values.
NOTE Continuation of the test of an automatic reset protective device beyond 72 h, and of a manual reset
protective device beyond 10 cycles, is only for the purpose of demonstrating the capability of the device to make
and break locked-rotor current for an extended period of time.
G.5.4.5
G.5.4.5.1
Running overload for DC motors
Requirements
T h e t e s t o f G . 5 . 4 . 5 . 2 is c a r r i e d o u t o n l y if a p o s s i b i l i t y o f a n o v e r l o a d o c c u r r i n g is d e t e r m i n e d
b y in s p e c tio n o r b y r e v ie w o f th e d e s ig n . F o r e x a m p le , th e te s t n e e d n o t b e c a rrie d o u t w h e r e
e le c tr o n ic d riv e c irc u its m a in ta in a s u b s ta n tia lly c o n s ta n t d riv e c u rre n t.
If d i f f i c u l t y is e x p e r i e n c e d
in o b t a i n i n g a c c u r a t e t e m p e r a t u r e m e a s u r e m e n t s , d u e t o t h e s m a l l
s iz e o r u n c o n v e n tio n a l d e s ig n o f th e m o to r, th e m e th o d o f G .5 .4 .5 .3 c a n be u s e d in s te a d .
G.5.4.5.2
Test method and compliance criteria
The motor is operated under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s . The load is then increased so
that the current is increased in appropriate gradual steps, the motor supply voltage being
maintained at its original value. When steady conditions are established, the load is again
increased. The load is thus progressively increased in appropriate steps until either the
overload protection device operates, the winding becomes an open circuit or the load cannot
be increased any further without reaching a locked rotor condition.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
The motor winding temperatures are measured during each steady period. The measured
temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.6.
Following the test， if the motor voltage exceeds ES1, the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d
s a fe g u a rd provided in the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 after it
has cooled to room temperature， but with test voltages reduced to 0,6 times the specified
values.
G.5.4.5.3
Alternative method
The motor is covered with a single layer o f c h e e s e c lo th and placed on a wooden board that
is covered with a single layer of w ra p p in g tissu e . The motor is then gradually loaded until
one of the following situations occur:
-
the overload protective device operates;
-
the winding becomes an open circuit; or
-
the load cannot be increased any further without reaching a locked rotor condition.
During the test， the motor shall not emit flames or molten metal. The c h e e s e c lo th or
w ra p p in g tis s u e shall not char or catch fire.
Following the test， if the motor voltage exceeds ES1, the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd or re in fo rc e d
s a fe g u a rd provided in the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 after it
has cooled to room temperature, but with test voltages reduced to 0f6 times the specified
values.
G.5.4.6
Locked-rotor overload for DC motors
G.5.4.6.1
Requirements
M o t o r s s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t in G . 5 . 4 . 6 . 2 .
W h e re
d i f f i c u l t y is e x p e r i e n c e d
in o b t a i n i n g
th e s m a ll s iz e o r u n c o n v e n tio n a l d e s ig n
a c c u ra te te m p e ra tu re
o f th e
m o to r, th e
m e th o d
m e a s u re m e n ts
because
o f G .5 .4 .6 .3
be
can
of
used
in s te a d .
G.5.4.6.2
Test method and compliance criteria
The motor is operated at the voltage used in its application and with its rotor locked for 7 h or
until steady state conditions are established， whichever is longer. However， if the motor
winding opens， or the motor otherwise becomes permanently de-energized, the test is
discontinued.
Compliance is checked by measuring the motor winding temperatures during the test. The
measured temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.3.
Following the test， if the motor voltage exceeds ES1 ， and after it has cooled to room
temperature, the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 but with test
voltages reduced to 0,6 times the specified values.
G.5.4.6.3
Alternative method
The motor is covered with a single layer of c h e e s e c lo th and placed on a wooden board that
is covered with a single layer o f w ra p p in g tissue.
The motor is then operated at the voltage used in its application and with its rotor locked for
7 h or until steady state conditions are established， whichever is the longer. However， if the
motor winding opens， or the motor otherwise becomes permanently de-energized， the test is
discontinued.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
During the test， the motor shall not emit flames or molten metal. The c h e e s e c lo th or
w ra p p in g tis s u e shall not char or catch fire.
Following the test, if the motor voltage exceeds ES1， and after it has cooled to room
temperature, the motor shall withstand the electric strength test in 5.4.9.1 but with test
voltages reduced to 0 , 6 times the specified values.
G.5.4.7
Test method and compliance criteria for motors with capacitors
Motors having phase-shifting capacitors are tested under locked-rotor conditions with the
capacitor short-circuited or open-circuited (whichever is the more unfavourable).
The short-circuit test is not made if the capacitor is so designed that， upon failure， it will not
remain short-circuited.
Compliance is checked by measuring the motor winding temperatures during the test. The
measured temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.3.
G.5.4.8
Test method and compliance criteria for three-phase motors
Three-phase motors are tested under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , with one phase
disconnected, unless circuit controls prevent the application of voltage to the motor when one
or more supply phases are missing.
The effect of other loads and circuits within the equipment may necessitate that the motor be
tested within the equipment and with the three supply phases disconnected one at a time.
Compliance is checked by measuring the motor winding temperatures during the test. The
measured temperatures shall not exceed the values in Table G.3.
G.5.4.9
Test method and compliance criteria for series motors
Series motors are operated at a voltage equal to 1,3 times the voltage rating of the motor for
1 min with the lowest possible load.
After the test， windings and connections shall not have worked loose and all applicable
s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective.
G.6
Wire insulation
G.6.1
Except
General
fo r
in c lu d in g
whose
e n a m e lle d
w ire s
in
in s u la tio n
w in d in g
wound
in s u la tio n ,
c o m p o n e n ts
p ro v id e s
(se e
th e
fo llo w in g
a ls o
C la u s e
re q u ire m e n ts
G .5 ),
le a d -o u t
a p p ly
to
w ire s
and
basic insulation, supplementary insulation
or
a ll
w ire s ,
th e
lik e ,
reinforced
insulation.
NOTE 1
If
th e
For insulation provided in addition to insulation on winding wire, see 5.4.4.
peak
of
th e
working voltage
does
not
exceed
ES2,
th e re
is
no
d im e n s io n a l
or
c o n s tru c tio n a l re q u ire m e n t.
If t h e p e a k o f t h e
a)
T h e re
is
no
working voltage
d im e n s io n a l
or
e x c e e d s E S 2 , o n e o f th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s :
c o n s tru c tio n a l
u n d e r m e c h a n ic a l s tre s s (fo r e x a m p le , fro m w in d in g
u n d e r s u c h m e c h a n ic a l s tre s s , b) o r c) a p p lie s .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
basic insulation t h a t
t e n s i o n ) . F o r basic insulation
re q u ire m e n t fo r
is
not
t h a t is
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 2
b)
This exception does not apply to supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation.
basic insulation， supplementary insulation
For
or
reinforced insulation,
th e in s u la tio n
o n th e w ir e s h a ll:
-
h a v e a th ic k n e s s o f a t le a s t 0 ,4 m m p ro v id e d b y a s in g le la y e r; o r
-
c o m p l y w it h 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 if t h e w i r e is n o t a w i n d i n g w ir e ; o r
-
c o m p l y w it h A n n e x J if t h e w i r e is a w i n d i n g w ir e .
c)
T h e w in d in g w ir e s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x J. T h e
m in im u m
n u m b e r o f o v e rla p p in g
la y e rs
o f s p ir a lly w r a p p e d ta p e o r e x tr u d e d la y e rs o f in s u la tio n s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
d)
-
f or
basic insulation:
-
f or
supplementary insulation:
-
f or
reinforced insulation:
FIW
o n e la y e r;
safeguard
used as a
tw o la y e rs ;
th r e e la y e rs .
in t r a n s f o r m e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h G . 5 . 3 . 4 .
F o r i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n t w o a d j a c e n t w i n d i n g w i r e s , o n e l a y e r o n e a c h c o n d u c t o r is c o n s i d e r e d
supplementary insulation.
to p r o v id e
S p ir a lly w r a p p e d ta p e s h a ll b e s e a le d a n d p a s s th e t e s t s o f 5 .4 .4 . 5 a ), b ) o r c).
NOTE 3
The
For wires insulated by an extrusion process, sealing is inherent to the process.
w in d in g
w ire
s h a ll
pass
a
routine test
fo r
e le c tric
s tre n g th
te s t,
u s in g
th e
te s t
as
s p e c i f i e d in 丄 3 . 2 .
G.6.2
Enamelled winding wire insulation
E n a m e l l e d w i n d i n g w i r e is n o t c o n s i d e r e d t o p r o v i d e
insulation,
u n l e s s it c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
O th e r e n a m e lle d
w in d in g
w ire s
used
as
supplementary insulation o r reinforced
f o r FIW a s s p e c i f i e d in G . 5 . 3 . 4 .
basic insulation
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
a ll t h e f o l l o w i n g
c o n d itio n s :
-
t he
in s u la tio n
circuit
-
p ro v id e s
basic insulation
in
a
ES2
a n d a n in te rn a l c irc u it o p e ra tin g a t
wound
and
com ponent
b e tw e e n
external
an
ES1;
t h e in s u la t io n o v e r a ll c o n d u c t o r s c o m p r i s e s e n a m e l c o m p l y i n g w it h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f a
routine test
g r a d e 2 w in d in g w ire o f IE C 6 0 3 1 7 s e rie s o f s ta n d a r d s w ith th e
c o n d u c te d at
th e h ig h e s t v o lta g e o f T a b le 2 5 a n d T a b le 26;
-
t h e f i n i s h e d c o m p o n e n t is s u b j e c t e d to a
type test
fo r e le c tric s tre n g th (b e tw e e n w in d in g s
a n d b e t w e e n w i n d i n g s a n d t h e c o r e , s e e G . 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 ) , in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ; a n d
-
t he
fin is h e d
com ponent
is
s u b je c te d
to
routine tests
fo r
e le c tric
s tre n g th
(b e tw e e n
w i n d i n g s a n d b e t w e e n w i n d i n g s a n d t h e c o r e , s e e G . 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 ) , in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 .
Mains supply cords
G .7
G.7.1
General
A mains
s u p p ly
co rd
s h a ll
be
of
th e
s h e a th e d
ty p e
and
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
fo llo w in g
as
a p p ro p ria te :
-
if r u b b e r
s h e a th e d ,
be
o f s y n th e tic
ru b b e r
and
s h e a th e d fle x ib le c o rd a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 2 4 5 -1
-
not
lig h te r
th a n
o rd in a ry
to u g h
ru b b e r-
( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 4 5 IE C 5 3 );
if P V C s h e a t h e d :
•
fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a
n o t e x c e e d in g
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -1
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
non-detachable power supply cord
3 kg, b e n o t lig h te r th a n
lig h t P V C
( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 2 7 IE C 5 2 ),
s h e a th e d
fle x ib le
a n d h a v in g a m a s s
co rd
a c c o rd in g
to
旧C
•
fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d w ith a
e x c e e d in g
3 kg,
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -1
be
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
non-detachable power supply cord
n o t lig h te r th a n
o rd in a ry
PVC
s h e a th e d
fle x ib le
a n d h a v in g a m a s s
co rd
a c c o rd in g
to
( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 2 7 IE C 5 3 ),
NOTE 1 There is no limit on the mass of the equipment if the equipment is intended for use with a
detachable power supply cord.
•
fo r e q u ip m e n t p ro v id e d
w ith
a d e ta c h a b le
p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd , b e n o t lig h te r th a n
P V C s h e a th e d fle x ib le c o rd a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -1
•
fo r
scre e n e d
co rd s
movable
of
equipment,
lig h t
( d e s ig n a tio n 6 0 2 2 7 IE C 5 2 ),
th e
fle x in g
te s t
of
3 .1
of
IE C 6 0 2 2 7 -2 :1 9 9 7 ;
NOTE 2 Although screened cords are not covered in the scope of IEC 60227-2, the relevant flexing tests
of IEC 60227-2 are used.
-
ot her ty p e s o f c o rd s
m ay be used
if t h e y
h a v e s im ila r e le c tr o - m e c h a n ic a l a n d fire s a fe ty
p ro p e rtie s a s a b o v e .
NOTE 3 Where national or regional standards exist, they can be used to show compliance with the above
paragraph.
pluggable equipment type A o r pluggable equipment type B t h a t h a s protective
earthing, a protective earthing conductor s h a l l b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e mains s u p p l y c o r d . F o r
a l l o t h e r e q u i p m e n t , i f a mains s u p p l y c o r d i s s u p p l i e d w i t h o u t a protective earthing
conductor, a protective earthing conductor c a b l e s h a l l b e s u p p l i e d a s w e l l .
For
E q u ip m e n t
in te n d e d
to
be
used
by
m u s ic ia n s
w h ile
p e rfo rm in g
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
m u s ic a l
in s tr u m e n ts a n d a m p lifie r s ) s h a ll h a v e :
-
an
a p p lia n c e
in le t a c c o r d in g
to
IE C 6 0 3 2 0 -1
fo r c o n n e c tio n
to
th e
mains
n o t in
use
b y d e ta c h a b le
c o rd s e ts ; o r
-
a
m eans
o f s to w a g e
to
p ro te c t th e
mains
s u p p ly
co rd
when
(fo r e x a m p le ,
a
c o m p a rtm e n t, h o o k s o r p e g s).
Compliance is checked by inspection. For screened cords， damage to the screen is
acceptable provided that:
-
during the flexing test the screen does not make contact with any conductor; and
一
after the flexing test, the sample withstands the appropriate electric strength test between
the screen and all other conductors.
G.7.2
Mains
Cross sectional area
s u p p ly
co rd s
s h a ll
have
c o n d u c to rs
s p e c i f i e d in T a b l e G . 7 ( s e e a l s o 5 . 6 . 3 ) .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
w ith
c ro s s -s e c tio n a l
a re a s
not
le s s
th a n
th o s e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
Table G.7 - Sizes of conductors
Rated current of the equipment
up to and including a
Minimum conductor sizes
Cross-sectional area
AWG or kcmil
A
mm2
[cross-sectional area in mm2] e
3
0,5 b
20 [0,5]
6
0,75
18 [0,8]
10
1,00 (0,75) c
16 [1,3]
16
1,50 (1,0) d
14 [2]
25
2,5
12 [3]
32
4
10 [5]
40
6
8 [8]
63
10
6 [13]
80
16
4 [21]
100
25
2 03]
125
35
1 [42]
160
50
0 [53]
190
70
000 [85]
230
95
0000 [107]
kcmil
[cross-sectional area in mm2] e
260
120
250 [126]
300
150
300 [152]
340
185
400 [202]
400
240
500 [253]
460
300
600 [304]
NOTE 1 IEC 60320-1 specifies acceptable combinations of appliance couplers and flexible cords， including
those covered by footnotes b， c and d. However， a number of countries have indicated that they do not accept all
of the values listed in this table, particularly those covered by footnotes b, c and d.
NOTE 2
For higher currents see the IEC 60364 series.
The rated current includes currents that can be drawn from a socket outlet providing mains power for other
equipment. If the rated current of the equipment is not declared by the manufacturer, it is the calculated
value of the rated power divided by rated voltage.
b
For rated current up to 3 A, a nominal cross-sectional area of 0,5 mm2 may be used in some countries
provided that the length of the cord does not exceed 2 m.
The value in parentheses applies to detachable power supply cords fitted with the connectors rated 10 A in
accordance with IEC 60320-1 (types C13, C15, C15A and C17) provided that the length of the cord does not
exceed 2 m.
The value in parentheses applies to detachable power supply cords fitted with the connectors rated 16 A in
accordance with IEC 60320-1 (types C19, C21 and C23) provided that the length of the cord does not exceed
2 m.
AWG and kcmil sizes are provided for information only. The associated cross-sectional areas, in square
brackets, have been rounded to show significant figures only. AWG refers to the American Wire Gage and the
term "cmil" refers to circular mils where one circular mil is equal to the area of a circle having a diameter of
one mil (one thousandth of an inch). These terms are commonly used to designate wire sizes in North
America.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
G.7.3
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Cord anchorages and strain relief for non-detachable power supply cords
G.7.3.1
General
Safeguards
a g a in s t s tra in
b e in g tr a n s m it te d to th e e q u ip m e n t te r m in a t io n s o f th e c o n d u c t o r s
o f c o rd s o r in te r c o n n e c tin g c a b le s c o n n e c te d to E S 2 c irc u its , E S 3 c irc u its o r P S 3 c irc u its a re
s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
G.7.3.2
Cord strain relief
G.7.3.2.1
Requirements
A k n o t s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a s tra in r e lie f m e c h a n is m .
A s c r e w th a t b e a r s d ir e c tly o n th e c o rd o r c a b le s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a s tra in r e lie f m e c h a n is m
u n l e s s t h e c o r d a n c h o r a g e , i n c l u d i n g t h e s c r e w , is m a d e o f i n s u l a t i n g
m a te ria l a n d th e s c r e w
is o f c o m p a r a b l e s i z e t o t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e c o r d b e i n g c l a m p e d .
W hen
a lin e a r fo rc e
c a b le , a
and
a to rq u e
basic safeguard
s h a ll
a re
a p p lie d
m in im iz e
s tra in
to
non-detachable power supply cord
a
fro m
b e in g
tra n s m itte d
to
th e
co rd
or
o r c a b le
te rm in a tio n s .
T h e l i n e a r f o r c e a p p l i e d t o t h e c o r d o r c a b l e is s p e c i f i e d
in T a b l e G . 8 . T h e f o r c e i s a p p l i e d
in
th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le d ire c tio n fo r 1 s a n d re p e a te d 2 5 tim e s .
Table G.8 - Strain relief test force
Mass of the equipment
Force
kg
N
Up to and including 1
30
Over 1 up to and including 4
60
Over 4
100
A t o r q u e o f 0 , 2 5 N m is a p p l i e d f o r 1 m i n t o t h e c o r d o r c a b l e i m m e d i a t e l y a f t e r t h e l i n e a r f o r c e
a p p l i c a t i o n . T h e t o r q u e is a p p l i e d a s c l o s e a s p r a c t i c a b l e t o t h e s t r a i n r e l i e f m e c h a n i s m
a n d is
r e p e a t e d in t h e o p p o s i t e d i r e c t i o n .
Compliance is determined by applying the specified force and torque， by measurement， and
visual inspection. There shall be no damage to the cord or conductors and the displacement
of the conductors shall not exceed 2 mm. Stretching of the cord outer jacket without
displacement o f the conductors is not considered displacement.
G.7.3.2.2
Strain relief mechanism failure
basic safeguard ( s t r a i n r e l i e f m e c h a n i s m ) s h o u l d f a i l a n d s t r a i n i s t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e
non-detachable power supply cord o r c a b l e t e r m i n a t i o n s , a supplementary safeguard
If t h e
s h a l l e n s u r e t h a t t h e e a r t h t e r m i n a t i o n is t h e l a s t t o t a k e t h e s t r a i n .
Compliance is determined by inspection and， if necessary, by defeating the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd
and inspecting the conductor slack while applying the force in Table G.8.
G.7.3.2.3
The
co rd
Cord sheath or jacket position
or
c a b le
s h e a th
or
ja c k e t
s h a ll
e x te n d
fro m
th e
basic safeguard
m e c h a n is m ) in to th e e q u ip m e n t a t le a s t o n e - h a lf th e d ia m e t e r o f th e c o r d o r c a b le .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
(s tra in
re lie f
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.7.3.2.4
T h e co rd
Strain relief and cord anchorage material
a n c h o r a g e s h a ll e ith e r b e m a d e o f in s u la tin g
m a te r ia l c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r
m a te r ia l o r h a v e a lin in g o f in s u la tin g
basic insulation.
W h e re th e c o rd a n c h o ra g e
is
a b u s h in g th a t in c lu d e s th e e le c tr ic a l c o n n e c tio n to th e s c r e e n o f a s c r e e n e d p o w e r c o rd , th is
r e q u ir e m e n t s h a ll n o t a p p ly .
basic safeguard ( s t r a i n r e l i e f m e c h a n i s m ) i s m a d e o f p o l y m e r i c m a t e r i a l , t h e basic
safeguard s h a l l r e t a i n i t s s t r u c t u r a l p r o p e r t i e s f o l l o w i n g t h e m o u l d s t r e s s r e l i e f a c c o r d i n g t o
If t h e
C la u s e T .8 .
Compliance is determined by inspection and by applying the force and torque tests of
G. 7.3.2.1 after the b a s ic s a fe g u a rd has come to room temperature.
G.7.4
Cord entry
Safeguards
a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k a n d e le c tr ic a lly - c a u s e d fire fro m c o rd s o r c a b le s c o n n e c te d
to E S 2 c irc u its , E S 3 c ir c u its o r P S 3 c ir c u its a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
The
e n try o f a co rd
o r c a b le
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
w ith
safeguards
a g a in s t
5. I f t h e c o r d j a c k e t p a s s e s t h e e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t o f
supplementary insulation, t h e c o r d j a c k e t m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a supplementary
e le c tric s h o c k a s s p e c ifie d
5.4.9.1 f o r
safeguard.
in to th e
in C l a u s e
T h e c o rd o r c a b le e n tr y s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a
supplementary safeguard
-
p r e v e n t a b ra s io n o f th e c o rd o r c a b le o u te r s u rfa c e ; a n d
-
p r e v e n t th e c o rd o r c a b le fro m
to :
b e in g p u s h e d in to th e e q u ip m e n t to s u c h a n e x te n t th a t th e
c o r d o r its c o n d u c t o r s , o r b o th , c o u ld b e d a m a g e d o r in t e r n a l p a r t s o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o u ld
b e d is p la c e d .
Compliance is determined by an electric strength test between the cord or cable conductors
and a c c e s s ib le conductive parts following the tests o f G.7.3.2.1. The test voltage shall be for
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n in accordance with 5.4.9.1.
G.7.5
Non-detachable cord bend protection
G.7.5.1
The
Requirements
non-detachable power supply cord
b e m o v e d w h i l e in o p e r a t i o n s h a l l b e
hand-held equipment o r e q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d
p r o v i d e d w i t h a safeguard a g a i n s t j a c k e t , i n s u l a t i o n ,
of
to
or
c o n d u c t o r d a m a g e d u e to b e n d in g a t th e e q u ip m e n t e n tr a n c e .
A lte rn a tiv e ly ,
o p e n in g
th e
h a v in g
in le t o r
b u s h in g
s h a ll
a ra d iu s o f c u rv a tu re
be
p ro v id e d
w ith
a
s m o o th ly
e q u a l to a t le a s t 1 ,5 tim e s
ro u n d e d
b e ll-m o u th e d
th e o v e ra ll d ia m e te r o f th e
c o r d w ith th e la r g e s t c r o s s - s e c t io n a l a r e a to b e c o n n e c t e d .
T h e c o rd b e n d in g
-
be
so
safeguard
d e s ig n e d
as
to
s h a ll:
p ro te c t
th e
co rd
a g a in s t
e x c e s s iv e
b e n d in g
w h e re
it e n t e r s
th e
e q u ip m e n t; a n d
-
b e o f in s u la tin g m a te ria l; a n d
-
b e f i x e d in a r e l i a b l e m a n n e r ; a n d
-
p r o j e c t o u ts id e th e e q u ip m e n t b e y o n d th e in le t o p e n in g fo r a d is ta n c e o f a t le a s t fiv e tim e s
th e o v e ra ll d ia m e te r or, fo r fla t c o rd s , a t le a s t fiv e tim e s th e m a jo r o v e ra ll c r o s s - s e c tio n a l
d im e n s io n o f th e c o rd .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
G.7.5.2
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Test method and compliance criteria
The equipment is so placed that the axis of the cord bending safeguard, where the cord
emerges, projects at an angle of 45° when the cord is free from stress. A mass equal to
10 x D2 g is then attached to the free end of the cord， where D is the overall diameter or， for
flat cords, the minor overall dimension of the cord, in millimetres.
If the cord guard is of temperature-sensitive material， the test is made at 23 °C 土 2 °C.
Flat cords are bent in the plane o f least resistance.
Immediately after the mass has been attached, the radius of curvature of the cord shall
nowhere be less than 1,5 D.
Compliance is checked by inspection, by measurement and， where necessary， by test with the
cord as delivered with the equipment.
G.7.6
Supply wiring space
G.7.6.1
The
General requirements
s u p p ly
c o n n e c tio n
w irin g
space
p ro v id e d
o r fo r c o n n e c tio n
of an
in s id e ,
or
as
p a rt
o f,
th e
e q u ip m e n t
fo r
p e rm a n e n t
non-detachable power supply cord
o rd in a ry
s h a ll
be
d e s ig n e d :
-
to a llo w th e c o n d u c t o r s to b e in tr o d u c e d a n d c o n n e c t e d e a s ily ; a n d
-
s o t h a t t h e u n i n s u l a t e d e n d o f a c o n d u c t o r is u n l i k e l y to b e c o m e f r e e f r o m
its t e r m i n a l , o r ,
s h o u l d it d o s o , c a n n o t c o m e i n t o c o n t a c t w i t h :
-
•
an
accessible
c o n d u c t i v e p a r t t h a t is n o t c o n n e c t e d t o a
•
an
accessible
c o n d u c tiv e p a rt o f
to
p e rm it
c h e c k in g
b e fo re
fittin g
hand-held equipment;
th e
co ve r,
if
any,
th a t
protective conductor;
or
and
th e
c o n d u c to rs
a re
c o rre c tly
c o n n e c te d a n d p o s itio n e d ; a n d
-
so th a t c o v e rs ,
if a n y , c a n
b e fitte d
w it h o u t ris k o f d a m a g e
to th e
s u p p ly
c o n d u c to rs
or
th e ir in s u la tio n ; a n d
-
s o t h a t c o v e r s , if a n y , g iv in g a c c e s s to t h e t e r m i n a l s c a n b e r e m o v e d w it h a
tool.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by an installation test with cords of the largest
cross-sectional area of the appropriate range specified in T a b l e G . 9 .
Table G.9 - Range of conductor sizes to be accepted by terminals
Nominal cross-sectional area
Rated current of equipment
A
mm2
Flexible cords
Other cables
Up to and including
3
0,5
to
0,75
1
to
2,5
Over
3 up to and including
6
0,75
to
1
1
to
2,5
Over
6 up to and including 10
1
to
1,5
1
to
2,5
Over 10 up to and including 13
1,25
to
1,5
1,5
to
4
Over 13 up to and including 16
1,5
to
2,5
1,5
to
4
Over 16 up to and including 25
2,5
to
4
2,5
to
6
Over 25 up to and including 32
4
to
6
4
to
10
Over 32 up to and including 40
6
to
10
6
to
16
Over 40 up to and including 63
10
to
16
10
to
25
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.7.6.2
Stranded wire
G.7.6.2.1
Requirements
T h e e n d o f a s tra n d e d
c o n d u c to r s h a ll n o t b e c o n s o lid a te d
b y s o ft s o ld e rin g a t p la c e s w h e re
t h e c o n d u c t o r is s u b j e c t t o c o n t a c t p r e s s u r e u n l e s s t h e m e t h o d o f c l a m p i n g is d e s i g n e d s o a s
to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f a b a d c o n ta c t d u e to c o ld flo w o f th e s o ld e r .
S p r in g te r m in a ls th a t c o m p e n s a te fo r th e c o ld flo w a re c o n s id e r e d to s a tis fy th is r e q u ir e m e n t.
P re v e n tin g th e c la m p in g s c re w s fro m
T e rm in a ls
s h a ll
be
c o n d u c to r e s c a p e
lo c a te d ,
when
th e
r o t a t i n g is n o t c o n s i d e r e d to b e a d e q u a t e .
g u a rd e d
c o n d u c to r
or
in s u la te d
is f i t t e d ,
so
th e re
th a t,
is
no
s h o u ld
a
lik e lih o o d
s tra n d
of
a
fle x ib le
o f a c c id e n ta l
c o n ta c t
b e tw e e n s u c h a s tra n d a n d :
-
accessible
-
unearthed
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; o r
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
supplementary insulation
G.7.6.2.2
s e p a ra te d
fro m
accessible
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
by
o n ly .
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and, unless a special cord is prepared in such a way as
to prevent the escape of strands, by the following test.
A piece of insulation approximately 8 mm long is removed from the end
having the appropriate nominal cross-sectional area. One wire of the
left free and the other wires are fully inserted into， and clamped in
tearing the insulation back, the free wire is bent in every possible
making sharp bends around the guard.
of a flexible conductor
stranded conductor is
the terminal. Without
direction, but without
If the conductor is an ES3 source, the free wire shall not touch any conductive part which is
a c c e s s ib le or is connected to an a c c e s s ib le conductive part or, in the case of double
insulated equipment, any conductive part which is separated from a c c e s s ib le conductive
parts by s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n only.
If the conductor is connected to an earthing terminal， the free wire shall not touch any ES3
source.
G.8
G.8.1
Varistors
General
A v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 o r IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , w h e t h e r a
p r o v id e d o r n o t, t a k in g in to a c c o u n t a ll o f t h e f o llo w in g :
-
P r e f e r r e d c lim a tic c a te g o r ie s (s e e 2 .1 .1 o f IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 ) :
•
lo w e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : - 1 0 °C
•
u p p e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : + 8 5 °C
•
d u r a tio n o f d a m p h e a t, s te a d y s ta te te s t: 21 d a y s ,
or
P r e f e r r e d c lim a t ic c a t e g o r ie s ( s e e 4 .1 o f IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 : 2 0 1 7 )
•
lo w e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : - 4 0
•
u p p e r c a te g o ry te m p e ra tu re : + 8 5 °C
•
r e la tiv e h u m id ity : 2 5 % to 7 5 % .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
°C
fire enclosure
is
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
M a x i m u m c o n tin u o u s v o lta g e :
1, 2 5
tim e s th e
rated voltage
•
a t le a s t
o f th e e q u ip m e n t; o r
•
a t le a s t 1 ,2 5 tim e s th e u p p e r v o lta g e o f th e
rated voltage range.
NOTE The maximum continuous voltages are not limited to values specified in 2.1.2 of IEC 61051-2:1991 or
the values in Table 1 and Table 2 of IEC 61643-331:2017, other voltages can be used.
-
Combination
p u ls e
(T a b le
I
g ro u p
1
of
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9
or
8 .1 .1
of
IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , F ig u re 4 ).
F o r th e te s t, a c o m b in a tio n
o r fro m
8 .1 .1
p u ls e is s e l e c t e d f r o m
4.
o f IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , F ig u re
2 .3 .6
in I E C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 : 1 9 9 1 / A M D 1 : 2 0 0 9
T h e te s t c o n s is ts o f 10 p o s itiv e
p u ls e s o r
1 0 n e g a t i v e p u l s e s , e a c h h a v i n g a s h a p e o f 1 , 2 / 5 0 j i s f o r v o l t a g e a n d 8 / 2 0 (as f o r c u r r e n t .
AC mains
F o r th e s e le c tio n ,
Mains
v o lta g e a n d o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o ry , s e e T a b le
12.
u n d e r 3 0 0 V is c o n s i d e r e d to b e 3 0 0 V .
F o r O v e r v o lt a g e C a t e g o r y IV o f T a b le 1 2 , a c o m b in a t io n
p u l s e 6 k V / 3 k A is u s e d e x c e p t f o r
6 0 0 V ， fo r
is
w h ic h
c o m b in a tio n
a
p u ls e
c o m b in a tio n
te s t
of
p u ls e
of
8 k V /4
IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9
A n n e x A ) o r th e c o m b in a tio n p u ls e te s t o f 8 .1 .1
c o n s id e ra tio n o f th e n o m in a l
A fte r th e
kA
mains
te s t, th e v a ris to r v o lta g e
used.
As
an
a lte rn a tiv e ,
( 2 .3 .6 ， T a b le
I
g ro u p
1
th e
and
F ig u re 4 o f IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 , in c lu d in g
v o l t a g e a n d o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y , is a c c e p t a b l e .
a t th e
m a n u fa c tu r e r's
s p e c ifie d
c u r r e n t s h a ll
not have
c h a n g e d b y m o re th a n 10 % w h e n c o m p a r e d to th e v a lu e b e fo re th e te s t.
The
body
of
su rg e
s u p p re s s io n
v a ris to r
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
n e e d le
fla m e
a c c o rd in g
to
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 , w ith th e fo llo w in g te s t s e v e ritie s :
-
D u r a t i o n o f a p p lic a tio n o f th e te s t fla m e : 10 s.
-
A f t e r fla m e tim e : 5 s.
V-1 class material,
If t h e b o d y o f s u r g e s u p p r e s s i o n v a r i s t o r c o m p l i e s w i t h
th e n e e d le fla m e
te s t d o e s n o t n e e d to be p e rfo rm e d .
NOTE 1 A varistor is sometimes referred to as an MOV or a VDR.
NOTE 2 Nominal varistor voltage is a voltage, at a specified DC current, used as a reference point in the
component characteristic (see IEC 61051-1).
G.8.2
Safeguards against fire
G.8.2.1
General
T h is s u b c la u s e a p p lie s to v a r is to r s u s e d a s a
safeguard
a g a in s t fire :
-
w h e n th e m e th o d “ r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n it io n ” o f 6 .4 .1
-
when
th e
m e th o d
“ c o n tro l fire
combustible material
The
safeguards
c irc u it
whose
in
th is
n o m in a l
a n d lo c a te d le s s
s u b c la u s e
v a ris to r
6.4.1
t h a n 13
sp re a d ” of
a re
v o lta g e ,
not
as
is c h o s e n
is c h o s e n ; o r
and
enclosure
th e
is m a d e
of
m m fro m th e v a ris to r.
a p p lic a b le
s p e c ifie d
to
in
a
v a ris to r
used
IEC 61051-1,
is
in
a
s u p p re s s io n
above
AC mains
transient voltage.
A v a r is to r s h a ll b e r e g a r d e d a s a
PIS.
T h e v a ris to r o v e rlo a d te s t o f G .8 .2 .2 a n d th e
p e rfo rm e d
d e p e n d in g
T a b le G .1 0 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
on
th e
m a x im u m
temporary overvoltage
c o n tin u o u s
AC
v o lta g e
te s t o f G . 8 . 2 . 3 s h a ll b e
o f th e
v a ris to r
a c c o rd in g
to
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.10 - Varistor overload and temporary overvoltage test
Connection between
Maximum continuous AC
voltage of a varistor
1,25 x
L to N or L to L
L to PE
N to PE
G.8.2.2
G.8.2.2
and G.8.2.3
and G.8.2.3
No test
G.8.2.3
G.8.2.3
No test
No test
No test
Vr
G.8.2.2
to 2 x Fr
Over
2 x Vt
to 1 200 + 1,1 x
Vf
Over 1 200 + 1,1 x
Vx
Vx
is the rated voltage or the upper voltage of the rated voltage range of the equipment.
G.8.2.2
Varistor overload test
The following test is simulated as required by Table G.10 to either a varistor or a surge
suppression circuit containing varistors connected across the m a in s (L to L or L to N)f line to
protective earth (L to PE)， or neutral to protective earth (N to PE).
The following test simulation circuit shall be used:
-
Voltage is the AC source of 2
-
Current is the current resulted from a test resistor
source.
-
Vr is the ra te d v o lta g e or the upper voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e of the equipment.
x
Vr
R x
connected in series with the AC
The test shall be performed with an initial test resistor R 1 = 16
x
Vr
If the circuit does not open immediately during the initial application of test current, the test
shall be continued until temperature stability (see B.1.5).
Subsequently， the test shall be repeated with new values of
circuit opens, where:
-
R2 = 8 x Vr Q
-
R3 = 4 x Vr Q
-
R4 = 2 x Vr Q
-
Rx =
0 , 5 x ( R x .- i) x
R x
(R 2,
R 3,
R 4,
etc.) until the
Vx Q.
Components in parallel with the varistor that may be affected by this test shall be
disconnected.
During and following the test， there shall be no risk of fire and e q u ip m e n t sa fe g u a rd s, other
than the varistor under test, shall remain effective.
During the test, the circuit may:
-
open due to the operation of a protective device such as a fuse, a thermal fuse; or
-
close due to the operation of a GDT.
G.8.2.3
Temporary overvoltage test
The te m p o ra ry o v e rv o lta g e test is simulated by the following test methods where applicable:
A surge suppression circuit containing varistors connected between the m a in s conductors
and the earth is tested according to 8.3.8.1 and 8.3.8.2 of IEC 61643-11:2011.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
The
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
compliance criteria of B.4.8 may be used as an alternative to the compliance criteria of
IEC 61643-11.
If a surge suppression circuit is used, the combination pulse specified in G.8.2 is applied
before this test.
During the test， the circuit may:
-
open due to the operation of a protective device such as a thermal fuse; or
-
close due to the operation of a GDT.
NOTE For different power distribution systems, the temporary overvoltages are defined in Annex B of
IEC 61643-11:2011.
Components in parallel with the varistor that may be affected by this test shall be
disconnected.
Integrated circuit (IC) current limiters
G .9
G.9.1
IC
Requirements
cu rre n t
lim ite rs
used
pow er be co m e s PS1
fo r
cu rre n t
lim itin g
in
power
o r P S 2 a re n o t s h o rte d fro m
so u rce s
so
th a t
th e
a v a ila b le
o u tp u t
i n p u t to o u t p u t if t h e y c o m p l y w it h a ll o f th e
fo llo w in g :
-
t he
IC
th a n 5
-
t he
cu rre n t
A)
lim ite rs
under
lim it th e
c u r r e n t to
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d e f i n e d
normal operating conditions
v a lu e
(n o t to
be
m o re
w ith a n y s p e c ifie d d r ift ta k e n in to a c c o u n t;
IC c u r r e n t lim it e r s a r e e n t i r e l y e le c t r o n i c a n d
have
n o m e a n s o f m a n u a l o p e ra tio n
or
re s e t;
-
t h e IC c u r r e n t l im i t e r s o u t p u t c u r r e n t is lim i t e d to 5 A o r le s s ( s p e c i f i e d m a x i m u m
-
t he
IC
cu rre n t
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s
lim ite rs
lim it
th e
d e fin e d
d rift,
as
cu rre n t
or
a p p lic a b le ,
v o lta g e
ta k e n
to
in to
th e
re q u ire d
account
lo a d );
v a lu e
a fte r
each
w ith
th e
of
th e
c o n d itio n in g te s ts ; a n d
-
t h e t e s t p r o g r a m a s s p e c i f i e d in G . 9 . 2 .
G.9.2
Test program
The test program consists of the performance tests outlined in
T a b l e G . 1 1.
The following specifications are to be supplied by the manufacturer for application of tests:
一
power source limitation/specification (if less than 250 VA);
一
maximum input voltage (volts); and
-
maxi mum output load (amperes).
Six samples are used for testing as follows:
Sample 1: Line 1
Sample 2: Lines 2 and 3
Sample 3: Lines 4 and 5
Sample 4: Line 6
Sample 5: Line
7
Sample 6: Line 8.
The power source for the tests should be capable of delivering 250 VA minimum, unless the
IC current limiter has a lower specification or is tested in the end product.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.11 - Performance test program for integrated circuit (IC) current limiters
Line
Test
category
Test
condition
Cycles
Device
condition
temperature
b
Device
enable
voltage
〇
1
Start up
2
“
3
41
4
41
5
41
q
a
Device
input voltage
Device
output load
(amperes) to RTN d,e
c
Enable pin cycle
10 000
25
Off to On
Maximum
(rated)
Maximum (rated)
Enable pin cycle
50
70
Off to On
Maximum
(rated)
0 a || 470 pF
Enable pin cycle
50
-30
Off to On
Maximum
(rated)
0 a || 470 mF
Input power
pin - cycle
50
70
On
Maximum
(rated)
0 Q || 470 jjF
Input power
pin - cycle
50
■30
On
Maximum
(rated)
0 a II 470 mF
On
Maximum
(rated)
Short
Circuit
Output power
pin - short
circuit
50
7
Overload
Enable pin cycle
50
25
Off to On
Maximum
(rated)
150 % maximum
8
H
Input power
pin - cycle
50
25
On
Maximum
(rated)
150 % maximum
6
RTN
= Return
II
= in parallel
a
r ma not applied
b
±
c
sample conditioned 3 h before test
d
士
2
70
Open to 0 H
(open to short)
x
20 %
Load should be implemented through a suitably rated capacitor and a parallel conductive wire providing
similar characteristics to a shorted, zero ohm (0 LI) resistive load. The capacitor voltage rating should be
not less than the maximum voltage rating of the component under test.
卜
G.9.3
Compliance criteria
After the test program, the device shall lim it the current in accordance with its specification as
applicable or the device shall become open circuit. The open circuited device is replaced with
a new sample and tests continued as applicable.
G.10 Resistors
G.10.1
General
For each o f the tests in this clause, ten samples o f resistors are tested. A sample is a single
resistor if used alone or a group of resistors as used in the application. Prior to each test, the
resistance of the samples is measured, followed by the conditioning of G. 10.2.
G.10.2
Conditioning
The samples shall be subjected to the damp heat test according to IEC 60068-2-78, with the
following details:
-
temperature:
(40 ± 2) °C;
-
humidity:
(93 ± 3 ) % relative humidity;
-
test duration:
21 days.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
G.10.3
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Resistor test
Each sample is then subjected to 10 impulses of alternating polarity， using the impulse test
generator circuit 2 o f Table D.1. The interval between successive impulses is 60 s , and Uc is
equal to the applicable re q u ire d w ith s ta n d voltage.
After the test， the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 10 %. No
failure is allowed.
The lowest resistance value of the ten samples tested is used to measure the current when
determining compliance with T a b l e 4 .
G.10.4
Voltage surge test
Each sample is subjected to 50 discharges from the impulse test generator circuit 3 of
Table D.1, at not more than 12 discharges per minute， with Uc equal to 10 kV.
After the tests, the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 20 %. No
failure is allowed.
G.10.5
Impulse test
Each sample is subjected to 10 pulses from the impulse test generator circuit 1 o f Table D.1f
with Uc equal to 4 kV or 5 kV of alternating polarity with a minimum of 60 s interval between
pulses as applicable (see Table 13).
After the tests, the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 20 %. No
failure is allowed.
G.10.6
Overload test
The samples are each subjected to a voltage of such a value that the current through it is 1,5
times the value measured through a resistor, having a resistance equal to the specified rated
value, which is fitted to the equipment， when operated under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . During
the test the voltage is kept constant. The test is performed until thermal steady state is
reached.
After the tests， the resistance of each sample shall not have changed by more than 20 %. No
failure is allowed.
G.11
Capacitors and RC units
G.11.1
General
T h e r e q u ir e m e n ts b e lo w s p e c ify c o n d itio n in g c rite ria w h e n te s tin g c a p a c ito r s a n d R C
d is c re te
c o m p o n e n ts fo rm in g
an
RC
u n it a n d
s e rv in g
as
safeguards
and
p ro v id e s
u n its o r
s e le c tio n
c rite ria fo r c a p a c ito r s a n d R C u n its th a t c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 .
G.11.2
Conditioning of capacitors and RC units
W h e n r e q u i r e d b y 5 . 5 . 2 . 1 , t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n i n g is a p p l i e d w h e n e v a l u a t i n g a c a p a c i t o r o r
a n R C u n it to th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 .
The
d u ra tio n
o f th e d a m p
h e a t, s te a d y s ta te te s t a s s p e c ifie d
in 4 . 1 2 o f I E C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 : 2 0 0 5 ,
s h a l l b e 2 1 d a y s a t a t e m p e r a t u r e o f ( 4 0 ± 2 ) 0C a n d a r e l a t i v e h u m i d i t y o f ( 9 3 ± 3 ) 〇
/ 〇•
C a p a c ito rs
s u b je c te d
to
c o n s id e re d a c c e p ta b le .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a
d u ra tio n
th a t
is
lo n g e r
th a n
21
days
d u rin g
th e
above
te s t
a re
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.11.3
The
Rules for selecting capacitors
a p p ro p ria te
c a p a c ito r
s u b c la s s
s h a ll
be
s e le c te d
fro m
th o s e
lis te d
in
T a b le G .1 2 ,
a c c o r d i n g t o t h e r u l e s o f a p p l i c a t i o n in t h e t a b l e .
Table G.12 - Capacitor ratings according to IEC 60384-14
Capacitor subclass
according to
IEC 60384-14
Rated voltage of the
capacitor
Type test impulse test
voltage of the capacitor
Type test RMS test
voltage of the capacitor
V RMS
kV peak
kV RMS
Y1
Up to and including 500
8
4
Y2
Over 150 up to and
including 300
5a
1,5
Y4
Up to and including 150
2,5
〇
X1
Up to and including 760
4 a
-
X2
Up to and including 760
2,5 a
■
,9
Rules for the application of this table.
1
The voltage rating of the capacitor shall be at least equal to the RMS working voltage across the insulation
being bridged, determined according to 5.4.1.8.2. As an exception to the requirements in the table, one Y2
capacitor may be used in cases where 2 f5 kV is required.
2
For a single capacitor (X type) serving as functional insulation, failure of the capacitor shall not result in
the failure of a safeguard and the type test impulse test voltage shall be at least equal to the required
withstand voltage.
3
A higher grade capacitor than the one specified may be used, as follows:
4
一
subclass Y1 if subclass Y2 is specified;
-
subclass Y1 or Y2 if subclass Y4 is specified;
一
subclass Y1 or Y2 if subclass X1 is specified;
-
subclass X1, Y1 or Y2 if subclass X2 is specified.
Two or more capacitors may be used in series in place of the single capacitor specified, as follows:
一
subclass Y1 or Y2 if subclass Y1 is specified;
-
subclass Y2 or Y4 if subclass Y2 is specified;
一
subclass X1 or X2 if subclass X1 is specified.
5
If two or more capacitors are used in series they shall comply with 5.5.2.1 as applicable and comply with the
other rules above.
a
For capacitance values of more than 1 j.iF, this test voltage is reduced by a factor equal to
\fc
, where
C
is
the capacitance value in pF.
G.12 Optocouplers
O p t o c o u p l e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f I E C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 : 2 0 0 7 . In t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f
IE C 6 0 7 4 7 -5 -5 :2 0 0 7 ,
-
t he
type testing
v o lta g e
as
K ini>a t h a t
s p e c ifie d
is
at
le a s t
in
7 .4 .3
equal
o f IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 :2 0 0 7
to
th e
a p p ro p ria te
te s t
s h a ll
be
v o lta g e
p e rfo rm e d
in
5 .4 .9 .1
w ith
of
a
th is
d o c u m e n t; and
-
t he
routine testing
v o lta g e
K ini>b t h a t
d o c u m e n t.
Copyright Inlern^lional Etectrotechmcal Commission
a s s p e c i f i e d in 7 . 4 . 1
is
at
le a s t
equal
to
o f IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 : 2 0 0 7 s h a ll b e p e r fo r m e d w ith a
th e
a p p ro p ria te
te s t
v o lta g e
in
5 .4 .9 .2
of
th is
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
G.13 Printed boards
G.13.1
The
and
General
re q u ire m e n ts
basic insulation， supplementary insulation, reinforced insulation
fo r
double insulation
o n p rin te d b o a rd s a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a ls o a p p ly to th e w in d in g s o f a p la n a r tr a n s fo r m e r .
G.13.2
The
Uncoated printed boards
in s u la tio n
c o m p ly
w ith
distance
b e tw e e n
th e
c o n d u c to rs on th e o u te r s u rfa c e s o f an u n c o a te d
clearance
5.4.3.
m in im u m
re q u ire m e n ts o f
re q u ire m e n ts
of
5.4.2
and
th e
p rin te d
b o a rd s h a ll
m in im u m
creepage
Compliance is checked by inspection and by measurement.
G.13.3
Coated printed boards
T h e r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s b e fo re th e b o a rd s a re c o a te d a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
A n a l t e r n a t i v e m e t h o d t o q u a l i f y c o a t e d p r i n t e d b o a r d s is g i v e n in I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 3 .
F o r p r in te d b o a r d s w h o s e o u te r s u r fa c e s a re to b e c o a te d w ith a s u ita b le c o a tin g m a te r ia l, th e
m in im u m
s e p a ra tio n
d is ta n c e s
of
T a b le G .1 3
a p p ly
to
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
b e fo re
th e y
a re
c o a te d .
Double insulation
and
reinforced insulation
s h a ll p a s s
routine tests
fo r e le c tric s tre n g th o f
5 .4 .9 .2 .
E ith e r o n e
o r b o th
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
and
th e
e n tire
d is ta n c e s
o v e r th e
s u rfa c e
b e tw e e n
th e
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll b e c o a te d .
T h e m in im u m
clearances
o f 5 .4 .2 a n d th e m in im u m
-
if t h e a b o v e c o n d it io n s a r e n o t m e t;
-
b e t w e e n a n y tw o u n c o a te d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; a n d
-
o v e r th e o u ts id e o f th e c o a tin g .
creepage distances
o f 5 .4 .3 s h a ll a p p ly :
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement, taking Figure 0.11 and Figure 0.12
into account, and by the tests of G.13.6.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table G.13 - Minimum separation distances for coated printed boards
Peak of the working voltage
up to and including
Basic insulation or
supplementary insulation
Reinforced insulation
V peak
mm
mm
71 a
0,025
0,05
89 a
0,04
0,08
113a
0,063
0,125
141 a
0,1
177a
0,16
0,32
227 a
0,25
0,5
283 a
0,4
0,8
354 a
0,56
1,12
455 a
0,75
1,5
570
1,0
2,0
710
1,3
2,6
895
1,8
3,6
1 135
2,4
3,8
1 450
2,8
4,0
1 770
3,4
4,2
2 260
4,1
4,6
2 830
5,0
5,0
3 540
6,3
6,3
4 520
8,2
8,2
5 660
10
10
7 070
13
13
8 910
16
16
11 310
20
20
14 140
26
26
17 700
33
33
22 600
43
43
28 300
55
55
35 400
70
70
45 200
86
86
〇
,2
Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated spacing being rounded up to the
next higher 0,1 mm increment.
a
The test of G.13.6 is not required.
G.13.4
The
Insulation between conductors on the same inner surface
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r in s u la tio n
on th e
sam e
in n e r la y e r o f a m u ltila y e r b o a rd
a re
s p e c ifie d
b e lo w .
On
an
in n e r s u rfa c e
o f a m u lti- la y e r p rin te d
b o a rd
(se e
F ig u re 0 .1 4 ) , th e
p a th
t w o c o n d u c t o r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r a c e m e n t e d j o i n t in 5 . 4 . 4 . 5 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
b e tw e e n
any
旧C
G.13.5
The
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Insulation between conductors on different surfaces
re q u ire m e n ts
fo r
in s u la tio n
on
th e
d iffe re n t
la y e rs
of a
m u ltila y e r
b o a rd
a re
s p e c ifie d
b e lo w .
basic insulation
For
t h e r e is n o t h i c k n e s s r e q u i r e m e n t .
Supplementary insulation
s u rfa c e s
co re
in
d o u b le -s id e d
p rin te d
or
reinforced insulation
s in g le -la y e r
b o a rd s , s h a ll e ith e r h a v e
p rin te d
b o a rd s,
a m in im u m
b e tw e e n
c o n d u c tiv e
m u lti-la y e r
th ic k n e s s
p rin te d
o f 0 ,4 m m
p a rts
on
b o a rd s
p ro v id e d
d iffe re n t
and
m e ta l
b y a s in g le
l a y e r o r c o n f o r m w i t h o n e o f t h e s p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d p a s s t h e r e l e v a n t t e s t s in T a b l e G . 1 4 .
Table G.14 - Insulation in printed boards
Specification of insulation
Type tests a
Routine tests
for electric strength c
Two layers of sheet insulating material including pre-preg b
No
Yes
Three or more layers of sheet insulating material including
pre-preg b
No
No
An insulation system with ceramic coating over a metallic
substrate, cured at > 500 °C
No
Yes
An insulation system, with two or more coatings other than
ceramic over a metallic substrate, cured at < 500 °C
Yes
Yes
NOTE 1
Pre-preg is the term used for a layer of glass cloth impregnated with a partially cured resin.
NOTE 2
For definition of ceramic, see IEC 60050-212:2010, 212-15-25.
a
Thermal conditioning of G.13.6.2 followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1.
b
Layers are counted before curing.
c
Electric strength testing is carried out on the finished printed board.
G.13.6
G.13.6.1
Tests on coated printed boards
Sample preparation and preliminary inspection
Three sample printed boards (or， for coated components in Clause G.14, two components and
one board) identified as samples 7, 2 and 3 are required. Either actual boards or specially
produced samples with representative coating and minimum separations may be used. Each
sample board shall be representative of the minimum separations used, and coated. Each
sample is subjected to the full sequence of manufacturing processes， including soldering and
cleaning， to which it is normally subjected during equipment assembly.
When visually inspected, the boards shall show no evidence of pinholes or bubbles in the
coating or breakthrough of conductive tracks at corners.
G.13.6.2
Test method and compliance criteria
Sample 1 is subjected to the thermal cycling sequence of 5.4.1.5.3.
Sample 2 is aged in a full draught oven at a temperature and for a time duration chosen from
the graph shown in Figure G.3 using the temperature index line that corresponds to the
maximum operating temperature of the coated board. The temperature of the oven is
maintained at the specified temperature ± 2 °C. The temperature used to determine the
temperature index line is the highest temperature on the board where safety is involved.
When using Figure G.3, interpolation may be used between the nearest two temperature
index lines.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
00 09
0O9Z
00 06
(LI)ESg
Q)
■
6e leou 卜
q
.E
a)
a>
M
■
j
l
l
l
l
ll
f
l
l
r
f
l
l
f
l
300
280
266~ 246~ ~ 226~ ~ 260------------- m ----------^60-------- H 0 ---------------- ^ 2 Q -------------W
Oven temperature (°C)
IEC
Figure G.3 - Thermal ageing time
Samples 1 and 2 are then subjected to the humidity conditioning of 5.4.8 and shall withstand
the electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1 between conductors.
Sample board 3 is subjected to the following abrasion resistance test:
Scratches are made across five pairs of conducting parts and the intervening separations at
points where the separations will be subject to the maximum potential gradient during the
tests.
The scratches are made by means of a hardened steel pin， the end of which has the form of a
cone having a tip angle of 40°， its tip being rounded and polished， with a radius of
0,25 mm 土 0,02 mm.
Scratches are made by drawing the pin along the surface in a plane perpendicular to the
conductor edges at a speed of 20 mm/s ± 5 mm/s as shown in Figure G.4. The pin is so
loaded that the force exerted along its axis is 10 N 土 0,5 N. The scratches shall be at least
5 mm apart and at least 5 mm from the edge of the specimen.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
B
NOTE
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
C
The pin is in the plane ABCD that is perpendicular to the specimen under test.
Figure G.4 - Abrasion resistance test for coating layers
After the test, the coating layer shall neither have loosened nor have been pierced. The
coating shall withstand an electric strength test as specified in 5.4.9.1 between conductors. In
the case of metal core printed boards, the substrate is one of the conductors.
If mechanical stress or bending is applied to the board, additional tests to identify cracking
may be needed (see IEC 60664-3).
G.14 Coatings on component terminals
G.14.1
Requirements
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r c o a t i n g s o n c o m p o n e n t t e r m i n a l s a n d t h e l ik e , w h e r e t h e c o a t i n g is u s e d
to r e d u c e
clearances
C o a tin g s
m ay
clearances
be
and
o f T a b le G .1 3
creepage distances
and
used
over
e x te rn a l
creepage distances
a p p ly
to
th e
te rm in a tio n s
(se e
com ponent
a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
of
c o m p o n e n ts
F ig u re 0 . 1 1 ) . T h e
b e fo re
c o a tin g ,
and
to
m in im u m
th e
in c re a s e
s e p a ra tio n
c o a tin g
s h a ll
e ffe c tiv e
d is ta n c e s
m eet
a ll
th e
r e q u ir e m e n ts o f G .1 3 .3 . T h e m e c h a n ic a l a r r a n g e m e n t a n d rig id ity o f th e te r m in a tio n s s h a ll b e
a d e q u a te
to
e n s u re
th a t, d u rin g
n o rm a l
h a n d lin g ,
a s s e m b ly
in to
e q u ip m e n t a n d
subsequent
u s e , th e te r m in a t io n s w ill n o t b e s u b je c t to d e f o r m a t io n th a t w o u ld c r a c k th e c o a tin g o r r e d u c e
th e
s e p a ra tio n
d is ta n c e s
b e tw e e n
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
b e lo w
th e
v a lu e s
in
T a b le G .1 3
(se e G .1 3 .3 ).
G.14.2
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection taking into account Figure 0.11 and by applying the
sequence of tests covered by G.13.6. These tests are carried out on a completed assembly
including the component(s).
The abrasion resistance test o f G.13.6.2 is carried out on a specially prepared sample printed
board as described for sample 3 in G. 13.6.1, except that the separation between the
conductive parts shall be representative o f the minimum separations and maximum potential
gradients used in the assembly.
Copyright International Electrotechnical Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
G.15 Pressurized liquid filled components
G.15.1
Requirements
A n L F C lo c a t e d in t e r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll o f th e f o llo w in g r e q u ir e m e n t s :
-
flammable
o r c o n d u c tiv e
liq u id
s h a ll b e s to re d
in a c o n t a i n e r , a n d
th e
LFC
s h a ll c o m p ly
w ith th e te s ts o f G . 1 5 .2 .3 , G . 1 5 .2 .4 , G . 1 5 .2 .5 a n d G . 1 5 .2 .6 ;
-
t he
liq u id
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
w ith
p ro te c tio n
in
a cco rd a n ce
w ith
C la u s e
7
(hazardous
substances);
-
non-metallic
p a rts
of
th e
c o n ta in e r
s y s te m
s h a ll
w ith s ta n d
th e
te s ts
o f G . 1 5 . 2 .1
and
G .1 5 .2 .2 ; a n d
-
t he
LFC
s h a ll
be
m o u n te d
w ith in
th e
e q u i p m e n t in s u c h
a w a y th a t th e
tu b in g
s h a ll
not
c o m e in to c o n ta c t w ith s h a r p e d g e s o r a n y o th e r s u r fa c e th a t c o u ld d a m a g e th e tu b in g a n d
if th e
LFC
b u r s t s o r r e l i e v e s its p r e s s u r e , t h e liq u id c a n n o t d e f e a t a
safeguard.
T h e o r d e r o f t e s t s is n o t s p e c i f i e d . T h e t e s t s m a y b e p e r f o r m e d o n s e p a r a t e s a m p l e s , e x c e p t
a f t e r t h e t e s t o f G . 1 5 . 2 . 2 , t h e t e s t o f G . 1 5 . 2 .1 is c o n d u c t e d .
G.15.2
Test methods and compliance criteria
G.15.2.1
Hydrostatic pressure test
Compliance is checked by evaluation o f the available data or by the following test. An LFC
that is open to the atmosphere or is non-pressurised (for example, an ink cartridge) is not
subjected to this test.
One sample of the LFC is subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test for 2 min at room
temperature and at a pressure that is the highest of the following:
-
three times the maximum working pressure specified by the manufacturer at the maximum
temperature measured during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ; and
-
t wo times the maximum measured working pressure at the maximum temperature
measured during application of the a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s of Clause B.3 and
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of Clause BA.
G.15.2.2
Creep resistance test
Two samples of the LFC， of which one or more parts are made of non-metallic materials， shall
be conditioned for 14 days at a temperature of 87 °C and placed in a full draft air-circulating
oven. Following the conditioning, the system shall comply with the test of G.15.2.1 and nonmetallic parts shall show no sign of deterioration such as cracking and embrittlement.
G.15.2.3
Tubing and fittings compatibility test
Ten samples of the test specimens made o f the material used for the tubing and associated
fittings of the LFC， of which one or more parts are made of non-metallic materials， shall be
tested for tensile strength in accordance with the ISO 527 series. Five specimens shall be
tested in the condition as received and the remaining five specimens after a conditioning test
for 40 days in a water bath filled with the intended liquid and maintained at 38 °C. The internal
pressure o f the assemblies is maintained at atmospheric pressure. The tensile strength after
conditioning shall not be less than 60 % of the tensile strength before the tests.
Alternatively, the five samples of the finished LFC assembly may be tested as far as the part
under test is suitable for the tensile strength test. The samples of finished assembly filled with
the intended liquid at the internal pressure maintained at atmospheric pressure is conditioned
for 40 days at 38 °C in a full draft air-circulating oven.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
G.15.2.4
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Vibration test
One sample of the LFC, or the equipment containing the LFCt shall be fastened to the
vibration generator in its normal position o f use, as specified in IEC 60068-2-6， by means of
screws, clamps or straps round the component. The direction of vibration is vertical, and the
severities are:
-
duration:
30 min;
-
amplitude:
0,35 mm;
-
frequency range:
-
sweep rate:
G.15.2.5
10 Hz， 55 Hz， 10 Hz;
approximately one octave per minute.
Thermal cycling test
One sample of the LFC is subjected to three cycles of conditioning for 7 h at a temperature
that is 10 °C above the maximum temperature obtained during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s o f Clause B.3 and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of Clause B.4f
followed by room temperature for 1 h.
NOTE
The LFC is not energized during the above test.
G.15.2.6
Force test
One sample of the LFC is subjected to the tests of Clause T.2 (10 N test applied to fittings
a c c e s s ib le to a s k ille d p e rso n ) and Clause T.3 (30 N test applied to fittings a c c e s s ib le to
an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or to an o rd in a ry p e rso n ).
G.15.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and evaluation o f the available data or by the tests of
G.15.2. During and after these tests, there shall be no rupture， no leaks and no loosening of
any connection or part.
G.16 IC that includes a capacitor discharge function (ICX)
G.16.1
Requirements
A n IC X a n d a n y a s s o c ia te d c o m p o n e n ts c ritic a l to th e d is c h a rg e fu n c tio n o f a c a p a c ito r (s u c h
a s th e
mains
c a p a c ito r) to
an
accessible
p a rt
a re fa u lt te s te d
u n le s s o n e
o f th e fo llo w in g
c o n d i t i o n s is m e t :
-
t he IC X w ith th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a s p ro v id e d
of
G .1 6 .2.
Any
im p u ls e
a tte n u a tin g
in t h e e q u i p m e n t c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e t e s t s
c o m p o n e n ts
(su ch
as
v a ris to rs
and
G DTs)
th a t
a tte n u a te th e im p u ls e to th e IC X a n d th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a re d is c o n n e c te d ; o r
-
t he
IC X
te s te d
s e p a ra te ly
c o m p lie s
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
of
G .1 6 .2.
If
d is c h a rg e
c o m p o n e n ts e x te rn a l to th e IC X a re n e c e s s a ry :
•
t h e y s h a l l b e i n c l u d e d in t h e t e s t o f G . 1 6 . 2 , a n d
•
t h e d i s c h a r g e c o m p o n e n t s u s e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e w i t h i n t h e r a n g e t e s t e d .
G.16.2
Tests
Where the ICX is tested by itself, the test set up shall be as recommended by the ICX
manufacturer.
-
humidi ty treatment o f 5.4.8 for 120 h.
- 1 0 0 positive impulses and 100 negative impulses between line and neutral using a
capacitor with the smallest capacitance and a resistor with the smallest resistance
specified by the manufacturer of the ICX. The time between any two impulses shall not be
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
less than 1 s. The impulse shall be as specified in circuit 2 of Table D. 1 with Uc equal to
the transient voltage as determined in 5.4.2.3.2.2.
The impulses are to be superimposed on the m ains voltage. The m ains voltage is taken
as the maximum of:
-
•
the equipment rated voltage range when tested in the equipment， or
•
the maximum m ains voltage as specified by the ICX manufacturer when tested
separately.
Application o f an AC m ains voltage that is 120 % of the rated voltage for 2,5 min.
- 1 0 000 cycles of the connection and disconnection of the mains. If the ICX is tested by
itself， a capacitor with the largest capacitance and a resistor with the smallest resistance
as specified by the manufacturer shall be used. The connection and disconnection cycle
time shall not be less than 2 s.
If any of the associated circuitry components other than those critical for the discharge
function fails, it may be replaced with a new component.
G.16.3
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by evaluation of the available data or by conducting the above tests.
The capacitor discharge test is conducted after the above tests, ensuring the ICX or the BUT
provided with the ICX continues to provide the safeguard function.
NOTE Evaluation of available data includes information of failure of any associated circuitry components that
keeps the discharge mode in the on/stay mode.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex H
(n o rm a tive )
Criteria for telephone ringing signals
H_1
General
The
tw o
a lte rn a tiv e
d iffe re n t p a rts
and
o f th e
m e th o d s
w o rld .
M e th o d B o f th o s e
in
d e s c rib e d
M e th o d A
N o rth
in
th is
annex
re fle c t
is t y p i c a l o f a n a l o g u e
A m e ric a .
The
tw o
m e th o d s
s a tis fa c to ry
te le p h o n e
e x p e rie n c e
n e tw o rk s
r e s u l t in s t a n d a r d s
in
in
E u ro p e ,
o f e le c tric a l
s a fe ty th a t a re b ro a d ly e q u iv a le n t.
H.2
Method A
This method requires that the currents I TS1 and I TS2 flowing through a 5 000 Q resistor,
between any two conductors or between one conductor and protective earth do not exceed
the limits specified, as follows:
a) For n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , I TS1, the current determined from the calculated or
measured current for any single active ringing period t 1 (as defined in Figure H.1)3 does
not exceed:
-
for cadenced ringing (t1 < °°)9 the current given by the curve of Figure H.2 at tp
-
for continuous ringing (t^
=
°°)y 16 mA.
/ r S 7 , i n m A ，i s a s g i v e n b y
I TS1
/
丨
-
600
600
TS1=去
/pp
1200 - /|
X 2 v¥ +
600
for (t^\
P
< 6 0 0 m s)
for
(600 m s <
tA <
for
(^ > 1 2 0 0 m s)
1200 m s)
X V2
2V2
where:
p
rpp
is the peak current, in mA, of the relevant waveform given in Figure H.3;
is the peak-to-peak current, in mA， of the relevant waveform given in Figure H.3;
is expressed in ms.
b) For n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , / r S 2 , the average current for repeated bursts of a
cadenced ringing signal calculated for one ringing cadence cycle t2 (as defined in
Figure H. 1)9 does not exceed 16 mA RMS
I TS2 in mA is as given by
TS2
h
7^
x
j2
；
TS1
12
X
，
2
42
1/2
3 ,7 5
where:
JTS1
in mA, is as given by H.2 a);
’ dc
is the DC current in mA flowing through the 5 000 Q resistor during the
non-active period of the cadence cycle;
t1 and t2
are expressed in ms.
NOTE
The frequencies of telephone ringing voltages are normally within the range of 14 Hz to 50 Hz.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
c) Under single fa u lt c o n d itio n s ， including where cadenced ringing becomes continuous:
-
JTS1 shall not exceed the current given by the curve of Figure H.2, or 20 mAr
whichever is greater; and
-
I TS2 shall not exceed a limit of 20 mA.
J
A
4------------
A
上
----------------------- ,
IEC
Key
/1 is
the duration of a single ringing period, where the ringing is active for the whole of the single ringing
period;
一
t2
the sum of the active periods of ringing within the single ringing period, where the single ringing period
contains two or more discrete active periods of ringing, as in the example shown， for which ^ = / 1a + f 1b.
is the duration of one complete cadence cycle.
Figure H.1 - Definition of ringing period and cadence cycle
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Figure H.2 - / TS1 limit curve for cadenced ringing signal
Figure H.3 - Peak and peak-to-peak currents
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
H.3
旧C
2018
Method B
H.3.1
Ringing signal
H.3.1.1
The
Frequency
rin g in g
s ig n a l s h a ll
use
o n ly fr e q u e n c ie s
whose
f u n d a m e n t a l c o m p o n e n t is e q u a l t o
or
le s s th a n 7 0 H z.
H.3.1.2
The
Voltage
rin g in g
v o lta g e
s h a ll
be
le s s
th a n
300 V
p e a k -to -p e a k
and
le s s
th a n
200 V
peak
w ith
r e s p e c t to e a r th , m e a s u r e d a c r o s s a r e s is t a n c e o f a t le a s t 1 M Q .
H.3.1.3
The
Cadence
rin g in g
s e p a ra te d
v o lta g e
by
no
s h a ll
m o re
be
th a n
in te rru p te d
5 s.
D u rin g
to
c re a te
th e
q u ie t
q u ie t
in te rv a ls
in te rv a ls ,
th e
of
at
v o lta g e
le a s t
to
1s
d u ra tio n
e a rth
s h a ll
not
exceed 60 V DC.
H.3.1.4
Single fault current
W h e re ca d e n ce d
th ro u g h
a
rin g in g b e c o m e s c o n tin u o u s a s a c o n s e q u e n c e o f a s in g le fa u lt, th e c u r r e n t
Cl
5 000
re s is to r c o n n e c te d
b e tw e e n
any
tw o
o u tp u t c o n d u c to rs
or
b e tw e e n
one
o u t p u t c o n d u c t o r a n d e a r t h s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 5 6 , 5 m A p e a k - t o - p e a k , a s s h o w n in F i g u r e H . 3 .
H.3.2
Tripping device and monitoring voltage
H.3.2.1
A
Conditions for use of a tripping device or a monitoring voltage
rin g in g
s ig n a l
m o n ito rin g
c ir c u it s h a ll
v o lta g e
as
in c lu d e
s p e c ifie d
in
a trip p in g
H .3 .2 .3 ,
d e v ic e
or
b o th ,
as
s p e c ifie d
d e p e n d in g
in
on
H .3 .2 .2 ,
th e
or
cu rre n t
p ro v id e
a
th ro u g h
a
s p e c ifie d re s is ta n c e c o n n e c te d b e tw e e n th e rin g in g s ig n a l g e n e r a to r a n d e a rth , a s fo llo w s :
：
-
if th e c u rre n t th ro u g h
a 5 0 0 Q o r g re a te r re s is to r d o e s n o t e x c e e d
100 m A p e a k -to -p e a k ,
n e i t h e r a t r i p p i n g d e v i c e n o r a m o n i t o r i n g v o l t a g e is r e q u i r e d ;
：
-
if th e
cu rre n t
trip p in g
d e v ic e
a
1 500
Q
or
g re a te r
re s is to r
exceeds
d e v ic e s h a ll b e in c lu d e d . If th e t r ip p in g d e v ic e
F ig u re H .4
*
th ro u g h
o n ly
w ith
R>
m e e ts
500 Q,
th e
trip
no
m o n ito rin g
c rite ria
w ith
v o lta g e
R>
is
1 500 Q,
100
mA
p e a k -to -p e a k ,
m e e ts th e trip c rite ria
re q u ire d .
a
If,
m o n ito rin g
h o w e ve r,
v o lta g e
s p e c ifie d
th e
s h a ll
a
in
trip p in g
a ls o
be
p ro v id e d ;
-
if t h e c u r r e n t t h r o u g h
a 500
c u rre n t th ro u g h a 1 5 0 0
•
o r g re a te r re s is to r e x c e e d s
100
mA
p e a k -to -p e a k ,
b u t th e
o r g r e a te r r e s is to r d o e s n o t e x c e e d th is v a lu e , e ith e r:
a t r i p p i n g d e v i c e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d , m e e t i n g t h e t r i p c r i t e r i a s p e c i f i e d in F i g u r e H . 4 w i t h
R>
•
Cl
Q
500
or
a m o n ito r in g v o lta g e s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .
NOTE 1 Tripping devices are, in general, current-sensitive and do not have a linear response, due to the
resistance/current characteristics and time delay/response factor in their design.
NOTE 2
In order to minimize testing time, a variable resistor box is normally used.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
(<lu)
HJ
J
J
n
o
2
o)
0
d
o
v
>
l
m d
a
3
a)
NOTE 1 / is measured from the time of connection of the resistor
NOTE 2
R
to the circuit.
The sloping part of the curve is defined as / = 100 / V7 •
Figure H.4 - Ringing voltage trip criteria
H.3.2.2
A
s e rie s
Tripping device
c u rre n t-s e n s itiv e trip p in g
d e v ic e
in t h e
rin g le a d
th a t w ill trip
rin g in g
a s s p e c ifie d
in
F ig u re H .4 .
H.3.2.3
Monitoring voltage
A v o lt a g e to e a r th o n th e tip o r rin g c o n d u c t o r w ith a m a g n itu d e o f a t le a s t 19 V p e a k , b u t n o t
e x c e e d i n g 6 0 V D C , w h e n e v e r t h e r i n g i n g v o l t a g e is n o t p r e s e n t ( i d l e s t a t e ) .
Copyright Iniernatipnal Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
Annex I
(in fo rm a tiv e )
Overvoltage categories
(see IEC 60364-4-44)
T h e c o n c e p t o f o v e rv o lta g e
c a te g o rie s
is u s e d f o r e q u i p m e n t e n e r g i z e d
d ire c tly fro m
th e A C
mains.
The
la rg e s t
tra n s ie n t
v o lta g e
lik e ly
to
be
e x p e rie n c e d
mains i s k n o w n
d o c u m e n t , m i n i m u m clearances f o r i n s u l a t i o n in
o n t h e mains transient voltage.
e q u ip m e n t
A c c o rd in g
mains
The
c o n n e c te d
to
th e
IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 , th e v a lu e
o f th e
as
th e
power
in p u t
in te rfa c e
mains transient voltage.
c o n n e c t e d t o t h e mains a r e
th e
c irc u its
mains transient voltage
In
of
th is
based
is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m
th e
v o lta g e a n d th e O v e r v o lta g e C a te g o r y , I to IV (s e e T a b le 12 o f th is d o c u m e n t) .
o v e rv o lta g e
c o n n e c t e d to th e
The
to
at
o v e rv o lta g e
c a te g o ry
mains
th e re fo re
s h a ll
be
id e n tifie d
fo r
each
e q u ip m e n t
in te n d e d
to
be
m e a n in g
of
( s e e T a b l e 1 .1 ).
c a te g o rie s
have
a
p ro b a b ilis tic
im p lic a tio n
p h y s ic a l a tte n u a tio n o f th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e d o w n s tr e a m
ra th e r
th a n
th e
in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n .
NOTE 1 This concept of overvoltage categories is used in IEC 60364-4-44:2007, section 443.
NOTE 2 The term overvoltage category in this document is synonymous with impulse withstand category used in
IEC 60364-4-44:2007, section 443.
T h e t e r m o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y i s n o t u s e d i n c o n n e c t i o n w i t h D C p o w e r d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s t e m s in
th is d o c u m e n t.
Table 1.1 - Overvoltage categories
Overvoltage
category
IV
III
II
I
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Equipment and its point of connection
to the AC mains
Equipment that will be connected to the point where
the mains supply enters the building
Equipment that will be an integral part of the building
wiring
Examples of equipment
•
Electricity meters
•
Communications ITE for remote
electricity metering
•
Socket outlets, fuse panels and
switch panels
•
Power monitoring equipment
•
Household appliances, portable
tools, home electronics
•
Most ITE used in the building
•
ITE supplied via an external filter
or a motor driven generator
Pluggable or permanently connected equipment that
will be supplied from the building wiring
Equipment that will be connected to a special mains in
which measures have been taken to reduce transients
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex J
(n o rm a tive )
Insulated winding wires for use without interleaved insulation
J.1
General
R e q u ire m e n ts fo r w in d in g
supplementary
w ire s w h o s e
insulation,
double
in s u la tio n
m ay be used
insulation
or
to
basic insulation,
insulation i n w o u n d
p ro v id e
reinforced
c o m p o n e n ts w it h o u t in te r le a v e d in s u la tio n a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .
T h is a n n e x a p p lie s to :
-
sol i d ro u n d w in d in g w ire s
h a v in g d ia m e te r s
b e tw e e n
0 ,0 1
mm
and
5 ,0 m m , a n d s tra n d e d
w in d in g w ire s w ith e q u iv a le n t c r o s s - s e c tio n a l a re a s ; a n d
-
sol i d
sq u a re
and
s o lid
re c ta n g u la r
(fla tw is e
b e n d in g )
w in d in g
w ire s
w ith
c ro s s -s e c tio n a l
a re a s o f 0 ,0 3 m m 2 to 1 9 ,6 m m 2.
NOTE
See G.6.1 for the minimum number of overlapping layers.
J.2
Type tests
J.2.1
General
Unless otherwise specified, the winding wire shall pass thefollowing typ e tests, carried out at
a temperature between 15 °C and 35 °C and a relative humidity between 45 % and 75 %.
J.2.2
Electric strength
J.2.2.1Solid round winding wires
J.2.2.1.1
and strandedwinding wires
Wires with a nominal conductor diameter up to and including 0,1 mm
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.3 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then
subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, between the conductor of the wire and the
cylinder, with a minimum test voltage of:
- 3
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
- 1 , 5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.2.2.1.2
Wires with a nominal conductor diameter over 0,1 mm up to and including
2,5 mm
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.4.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then
subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 with a test voltage that is not less than twice
the appropriate voltage of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum of:
- 6
kV RMS or 8,4 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
- 3
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.2.2.1.3
Wires with a nominal conductor diameter over 2,5 mm
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.5.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then
subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 between the conductor o f the wire and the
shot, with a minimum test voltage of:
- 3
-
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
J.2.2.2
Square or rectangular wires
The test specimen is prepared according to 4.7.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008 (single conductor
surrounded by metal shots). The specimen is then subjected to the electric strength test of
5.4.9.1, with a minimum test voltage of:
- 3
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
- 1 , 5 kV RMS or 2t 1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.2.3
Flexibility and adherence
Clause 5.1.1 (in Test 8) of IEC 60851-3:2009 shall be used， using the mandrel diameters of
Table J.1.
The test specimen is then examined in accordance with 5.1.1.4 of IEC 60851-3:2009, followed
by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 in this document, with minimum test voltage of:
- 3
-
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
The test voltage is applied between the wire and the mandrel.
Table J.1 - Mandrel diameter
3
Nominal conductor diameter or thickness
Mandrel diameter
mm
mm
less than 0,35
4,0
土
0,2
less than 0,50
6,0
士
0,2
less than 0,75
8,0
土
0,2
less than 2,50
10,0±0,2
less than 5,00
Four times the conductor diameter or thickness a
In accordance with IEC 60317-43.
The tension to be applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel is calculated from the
wire diameter to be equivalent to 118 MPa ± 10 % (118 N/mm2 ± 10 %).
Edgewise bending on the smaller dimension side (width) is not required for rectangular wire.
For mandrel winding test of the square and rectangular wire， two adjacent turns do not need
to contact each other.
J.2.4
Heat shock
The test specimen shall be prepared in accordance with 5.1.1 (in Test 8) of
IEC 60851-3:2009， followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 in this document， with a
minimum test voltage of:
- 3
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
- 1 ，5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
The test voltage is applied between the wire and the mandrel. The oven temperature is the
relevant temperature of the thermal class of insulation in Table J.2. The mandrel diameter and
tension applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel are as specified in J.2.3. The
electric strength test is conducted at room temperature after removal from the oven.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table J.2 - Oven temperature
Thermal class
Oven
temperature
0C
Class
105
(A)
Class
120
(E)
Class
130
(B)
Class
155
(F)
Class
180
(H)
Class
200
(N)
Class
220
(R)
Class
250
200
215
225
250
275
295
315
345
_
Oven temperatures shall be maintained within ± 5° of the specified temperature.
The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EISs in accordance with
IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.
Edgewise bending on the smaller dimension side (width) is not required for rectangular wire.
J.2.5
Retention of electric strength after bending
Five specimens are prepared as in J.2.3 and tested as follows. Each specimen is removed
from the mandrel， placed in a container and positioned so that it can be surrounded by at
least 5 mm of metal shot. The ends of the conductor in the specimen shall be sufficiently long
to avoid flash over. The shot shall be not more than 2 mm in diameter and shall consist of
balls of stainless steel， nickel or nickel plated iron. The shot is gently poured into the
container until the specimen under test is covered by at least 5 mm of shot. The shot shall be
cleaned periodically with a suitable solvent.
NOTE The above test procedure is reproduced from 4.6.1 c) of IEC 60851-5:1996, now withdrawn. It is not
included in the fourth edition (2008) of that standard.
The specimen shall be subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum test
voltage of:
- 3
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
- 1 ，5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
The mandrel diameter and tension applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel are as in
Table 丄 1.
J.3
Testing during manufacturing
J.3.1
General
The wire manufacturer shall subject the wire to a spark test during manufacture according to
IEC 62230 as specified in J.3.2 and J.3.3.
J.3.2
Spark test
The test voltage for the spark test shall be in accordance with the electric strength test of
5.4.9.1, with a minimum of:
- 3
-
kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or
1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .
J.3.3
Sampling test
The s a m p lin g te s t shall be conducted according to the suitable test specified in J.2.2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex K
(n o rm a tive )
Safety interlocks
K.1
General
K.1.1
General requirements
Safety interlocks
so u rce s
and
s h a ll
c la s s 3
be
so
e n e rg y
d e s ig n e d
so u rce s
p o s itio n th a t th o s e p a rts b e c o m e
Safety interlocks
s h a ll
s o u r c e s w ill b e r e m o v e d
accessible
be
so
b e fo re
th a t,
w ill
be
accessible
d e s ig n e d
th e
fo r
ordinary person,
an
re m o ve d
b e fo re
th e
co ve r,
th e
c la s s 2
d o o r,
e tc .
e n e rg y
is
in
a
a s a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e .
th a t, fo r an
c o v e r, d o o r, e tc .
instructed person,
is in a p o s i t i o n
th e
c la s s 3 e n e rg y
th a t th is
p a rt b e c o m e s
a s a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r le s s .
T h e in te r lo c k s h a ll e ith e r:
-
n e c e s s i t a t e p re v io u s d e -e n e rg iz a tio n o f s u c h p a rts ; o r
-
a u t o m a t i c a l l y in itia te d is c o n n e c t io n o f th e s u p p ly to s u c h p a r ts , a n d to r e d u c e to a:
If
c la s s
•
c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e w ith in 2 s fo r a n
re d u c tio n
safeguard
-
1 e n e rg y
•
of
th e
s o u rc e w ith in 2 s fo r a n
e n e rg y
so u rce
c la s s
ordinary person,
and
instructed person.
ta k e s
lo n g e r
th a n
2
s,
th e n
instructional
an
s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t :
element
1a
s h a ll
be
p la c e d
on
th e
d o o r,
c o v e r o r o th e r
p a rt th a t
in itia te s
th e
in te rlo c k
a c t i o n a n d is o p e n e d o r r e m o v e d t o g a in a c c e s s ; a n d
-
e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
-
instructional safeguard
e l e m e n t 1a:
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 ( 2 0 1 1 -0 5 ) fo r m o v in g p a rts o r
A
IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 4 1
(2 0 0 2 -1 0 ) fo r h o t p a rts
-
e l e m e n t 2:
n o t s p e c ifie d
-
e l e m e n t 3:
n o t s p e c ifie d
-
e l e m e n t 4:
th e tim e w h e n th e e n e r g y s o u r c e w ill b e r e d u c e d to th e r e q u ir e d c la s s
K.1.2
Test method and compliance criteria
The energy level of class 2 or class 3 energy source parts are monitored.
Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement and use o f the straight unjointed version
o f the test probe according to Annex V.
K.2
The
Components of the safety interlock safeguard mechanism
c o m p o n e n ts
safeguards,
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
c o m p ris in g
th e
safety
interlock
m e c h a n is m
a n d s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x G o r K .7 .1 w h e r e a p p lic a b le .
s h a ll
be
c o n s id e re d
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex G or K.7.1 and by inspection.
K.3
Inadvertent change of operating mode
A safety interlock s h a l l
F i g u r e V.2, a s a p p l i c a b l e
p o in t b e in g
c o n tro lle d
not
be
by
m eans
of
p ro b e s
s p e c ifie d
in
F ig u re
V.1
or
s o a s to c h a n g e th e e n e r g y c la s s w ith in th e a r e a , s p a c e o r a c c e s s
to a c la s s
e n e rg y s o u rc e o r a c la s s
o p e ra b le
3
3
e n e rg y
instructed person,
ordinary person.
so u rce
e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r an
fo r an
o r to a c la s s
2
Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex V and by inspection.
K.4
Interlock safeguard override
A safety interlock
m ay
be
o v e rrid d e n
by a
skilled person.
The
safety interlock
o v e rrid e
s y s te m :
-
s hal l r e q u ir e a n in te n tio n a l e ffo r t to o p e r a t e ; a n d
-
shal l
re se t
a u to m a tic a lly
to
n o rm a l o p e ra tio n u n le s s th e
-
if lo c a t e d
in a n
a re a
person, s h a l l n o t b e
a tool f o r o p e r a t i o n .
n o rm a l
o p e ra tio n
skilled person
accessible
to a n
when
s e rv ic in g
is
c o m p le te ,
or
p re ve n t
h a s c a rrie d o u t re s to ra tio n ; a n d
ordinary person
o r,
if a p p li c a b le ,
an
instructed
o p e r a b l e b y m e a n s o f p r o b e s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x V , a n d s h a l l r e q u i r e
Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex V and by inspection.
K.5
K.5.1
In
th e
Fail-safe
Requirement
event
of
c o n tro lle d b y th e
-
r ev e r t to a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n
an
-
single fault condition
safety interlock s h a l l :
any
instructed person;
b e l o c k e d in t h e
in
th e
safety interlock
ordinary person
s y s te m ,
th e
space
o r a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r
or
normal operating condition
a n d c o m p ly w ith a p p lic a b le r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r
a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e .
K.5.2
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by introduction
component faults, one at a time. S in g le
each fault, the space controlled by the
requirements for s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s
of electrical， electro-mechanical， and mechanical
fa u lt c o n d itio n s are described in Clause B.4. For
s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall comply with the applicable
for the respective energy source.
The components and parts of the s a fe ty in te rlo c k used as a s a fe g u a rd mechanism are not
subjected to s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s if they comply with K.2 or K.6 as applicable.
Fixed separation distances in s a fe ty in te rlo c k circuits (for example, those associated with
printed boards) are not subjected to simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s if the separation
distances comply with K.7.1.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
K.6
Mechanically operated safety interlocks
K.6.1
Endurance requirement
M o v i n g m e c h a n i c a l p a r t s in m e c h a n i c a l a n d e l e c t r o m e c h a n i c a l
safety interlock
s y s te m s s h a ll
h a ve a d e q u a te e n d u ra n c e .
K.6.2
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection o f the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, available data and, if
necessary， by cycling the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system through 10 000 operating cycles. In the
event of any fault during or after the 10 000 operating cycles in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system,
the space controlled by the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall:
一
revert to a class 1 energy source for an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or a class 2 energy source for
an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or
-
be locked in the n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n and comply with applicable requirements for
a class 3 energy source.
NOTE The above test is conducted to check the endurance of moving parts other than those in safety interlock
systems, switches and relays. Safety interlock systems, switches and relays, if any, are subject to Annex G or
K.7.1.
K.7
Interlock circuit isolation
K.7.1
Separation distances for contact gaps and interlock circuit elements
S e p a ra tio n
d is ta n c e s
fo r c o n ta c t
gaps
and
in te rlo c k
c irc u it e le m e n ts
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
fo llo w in g re q u ire m e n ts a s a p p lic a b le .
a)
mains,
If t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y d i s c o n n e c t s a c i r c u i t c o n d u c t o r in a c i r c u i t c o n n e c t e d t o t h e
th e s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s fo r c o n ta c t g a p s a n d th e ir re la te d c ir c u its s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n
th a t fo r a
b)
disconnect device
L).
(se e A n n e x
If t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y is in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m
c o n ta c t
gaps
insulation
s h a ll
be
not
le s s
th a n
th e
mains,
th e
re le v a n t
th e s e p a ra tio n
m in im u m
clearance
d is ta n c e s fo r
v a lu e
fo r
basic
fo r is o la tio n o f c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e s . In te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts , th e fa ilu re o f
safety
basic insulation. T h e
w h i c h c a n d e f e a t t h e i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m , s u c h a s t h e f i x e d s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s in a
interlock c i r c u i t , s h a l l c o m p l y
temporary overvoltage i s n o t
w ith
th e
ta k e n
re q u ire m e n ts
o f 5 .4 .2 fo r
in to a c c o u n t to d e t e r m in e th e v o lt a g e to b e u s e d
T a b l e 1 0 a n d T a b l e 11 u n l e s s t h e c i r c u i t is s u b j e c t t o a
c)
I f t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y i s in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m
c o n ta c t g a p s s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th e r e le v a n t
insulation
temporary overvoltage.
mains, t h e s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s f o r
m i n i m u m clearance v a l u e f o r reinforced
th e
fo r is o la tio n o f c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s . In te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts , th e fa ilu re o f
w h i c h c a n d e f e a t t h e i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m , s u c h a s t h e f i x e d s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s in a
safety
interlock
except
c irc u it, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t o f 5 .4 .2 fo r
t h a t if a life t h r e a t e n i n g
d is ta n c e s
h a za rd
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
overvoltage
is n o t t a k e n
is i n v o l v e d
th e
in to
in t h e i n t e r l o c k e d
re q u ire m e n t fo r
an
a lte rn a tiv e
c o n ta c ts
in
th e
to
a ),
b)
o ff p o s itio n
basic insulation
or
and
c),
th e
reinforced insulation,
th e
s p a c e , th e fix e d s e p a ra tio n
th e v o lta g e
to
be
The
used
temporary
in T a b l e 1 0
temporary overvoltage.
s e p a ra tio n
s h a ll w ith s ta n d
basic insulation,
reinforced insulation.
a c c o u n t to d e t e r m in e
a n d T a b l e 11 u n l e s s t h e c i r c u i t i s s u b j e c t t o a
As
in
d is ta n c e s
e le c tric
fo r
s tre n g th
th e
c o n ta c t
te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1
gap
b e tw e e n
re q u ire d
fo r
a s a p p lic a b le . T h e c o n ta c t g a p s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
th e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t s b e fo r e a n d a f t e r th e t e s t o f K . 7 . 2.
T h e a ltitu d e m u ltip lic a tio n f a c t o r o f T a b le 16 d o e s n o t n e e d to b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
The
s e p a ra tio n
d is ta n c e s fo r th e c o n ta c t g a p
of
th e s w itc h
o r r e la y s h a ll c o m p ly w ith
K .7 .3
a n d K . 7 . 4 in a d d i t i o n t o t h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s , u n l e s s t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y c o m p l i e s w i t h G . 1
and
G .2
re s p e c tiv e ly .
Copyright International Eteclrotechmcal Commission
The
e n d u ra n ce
te s t
c o n d itio n
s h a ll
re p re se n t
th e
m a x im u m
normal
旧C
operating condition
w ith in
th e
e q u ip m e n t
w ith
re sp e ct
to
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
v o lta g e
and
cu rre n t
th a t
th e
c o n ta c ts in te rru p t.
Two
in d e p e n d e n t
in te rlo c k
s y s te m s ,
a lt e r n a t iv e to th e p r o v is io n o f
K.7.2
in
s e rie s ,
u s in g
basic insulation
m ay
be
used
as
an
reinforced insulation.
Overload test
The contact of a switch or relay in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system is subjected to an overload
test consisting of 50 cycles of operation at the rate of 6 to 10 cycles per minute, making and
breaking 150 % of the current imposed in the application, except that where a switch or relay
contact switches a motor load, the test is conducted with the rotor o f the motor in a locked
condition.
After the test， the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, including the switch or relay， shall still be
functional.
K.7.3
Endurance test
The contact of a switch or relay in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system is subjected to an endurance
test, making and breaking 100 % of the current imposed in the application at a rate o f 6 to
10 cycles of operation per minute. A higher rate of cycling may be used if requested by the
manufacturer.
For reed switches used in a s a fe ty in te rlo c k system in ES1 or ES2, the test is 100 000
operating cycles. For other switches and relays in a s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, the test is
10 000 operating cycles.
After the test， the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, including the switch or relay， shall still be
functional.
K.7.4
Electric strength test
Except for reed switches in ES1 or ES2， an electric strength test as specified in 5.4.9.1 is
applied between the contacts after the tests o f K.7.3. If the contact is in a circuit connected to
the m ains, the test voltage is as specified for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n . If the contact is in a
circuit isolated from the m ains, the test voltage is as specified for b a s ic in s u la tio n in a
circuit connected to the m ains.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex L
(n o rm a tive )
Disconnect devices
L.1
General requirements
A disconnect device s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
disconnect device i n t e r r u p t s t h e n e u t r a l
to
d is c o n n e c t th e
e q u ip m e n t fro m
th e
s u p p ly .
If a
c o n d u c t o r , it s h a l l s i m u l t a n e o u s l y i n t e r r u p t a ll p h a s e
c o n d u c to rs .
A
disconnect device
m a y be:
-
t h e p lu g o n th e p o w e r s u p p ly c o r d ; o r
-
a n a p p lia n c e c o u p le r; o r
-
a n is o la tin g s w itc h ; o r
-
a c irc u it b re a k e r; o r
-
a n y e q u iv a le n t m e a n s fo r d is c o n n e c tio n .
F o r e q u ip m e n t
O v e rv o lta g e
in te n d e d
C a te g o ry
disconnect device
O v e rv o lta g e
II
to
or
be
p o w e re d
fro m
O v e rv o lta g e
an
AC
C a te g o ry
mains
III，o r
fro m
disconnect device
IV , I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 1
s h a ll a p p ly . W h e n
-
a
s e p a ra tio n
-
a
For
C a te g o ry
th a t
is
ES3,
mains
I,
a
t h a t is
in t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e
s h a ll b e c o n n e c te d a s c lo s e ly a s p r a c tic a b le to th e in c o m in g s u p p ly .
mains
disconnect device s h a l l h a v e a
clearance f o r basic insulation; a n d
L.2
mains
DC
in c o rp o ra te d
F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e p o w e r e d fr o m a D C
o n ly to a n
a
O v e rv o lta g e
s h a ll h a v e a c o n ta c t s e p a r a tio n o f a t le a s t 3 m m . F o r a n A C
C a te g o ry
re m o v a b le
t h a t is
fu s e
m ay
be
used
instructed person
as
o r to a
c o n ta c t
t h a t is n o t a t E S 3 f
at
disconnect device,
skilled person.
a
le a s t
equal
p ro v id e d
to
th e
m in im u m
accessible
t h a t it is
Permanently connected equipment
permanently connected equipment
e q u ip m e n t,
u n le s s
th e
e q u ip m e n t
a p p ro p ria te
disconnect device
th e
disconnect device
is a c c o m p a n i e d
s h a ll b e in c o r p o r a te d
b y in s ta lla tio n
in s tru c tio n s
External disconnect devices will not necessarily be supplied with the equipment.
L.3
Parts that remain energized
on
th e
s u p p ly
s id e
disconnect device
b y skilled persons.
w h e n th e
c o n ta c t
disconnect device
of a
th a t an
s h a ll b e p r o v id e d a s p a rt o f th e b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n .
NOTE
P a rts
s ta tin g
in t h e
in t h e
e q u ip m e n t,
th a t
re m a in
e n e rg iz e d
is s w i t c h e d o ff, s h a ll b e g u a r d e d to r e d u c e t h e r is k o f a c c i d e n t a l
A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e , i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in t h e s e r v i c e m a n u a l .
L.4
For
Single-phase equipment
s in g le -p h a s e
s im u lta n e o u s ly , e x c e p t th a t a
p h a se c o n d u c to r w h e n
o n ly a s in g le p o le
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
disconnect device s h a l l
s i n g l e - p o l e disconnect device c a n
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
d is c o n n e c t
b o th
b e u s e d to d is c o n n e c t th e
it i s p o s s i b l e t o r e l y o n t h e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e n e u t r a l in t h e
disconnect device
p o le s
mains.
If
i s p r o v i d e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t , i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e g i v e n
旧C
fo r th e p ro v is io n o f a n a d d itio n a l tw o -p o le
disconnect device
t h e e q u i p m e n t i s u s e d w h e r e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e n e u t r a l in t h e
EXAMPLE
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n w h e n
mains
is n o t p o s s i b l e .
Cases where a two-pole disconnect device is required are:
on equipment supplied from an IT power system;
一
on pluggable equipment supplied through a reversible appliance coupler or a reversible plug (unless the
appliance coupler or plug itself is used as the disconnect device;
一
on equipment supplied from a socket-outlet with indeterminate polarity.
一
L.5
Three-phase equipment
F o r th re e -p h a s e e q u ip m e n t, th e
c o n d u c to rs
of
th e
s u p p ly .
disconnect device
For
s y s te m , th e
disconnect device
c o n d u c to rs
and
e q u ip m e n t, th e
th e
n e u tra l
in s ta lla tio n
e q u ip m e n t
s h a ll
be
c o n d u c to r.
s h a ll d i s c o n n e c t s i m u l t a n e o u s l y a ll p h a s e
re q u irin g
a
a fo u r-p o le
If
th is
n e u tra l
d e v ic e
fo u r-p o le
in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll s p e c ify th e
c o n n e c tio n
and
s h a ll
d e v ic e
is
to
an
IT
power
d i s c o n n e c t a ll
phase
not
in
p ro v id e d
n e e d f o r its p r o v is io n
as
th e
p a rt o f th e
b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n .
L.6
Switches as disconnect devices
W h e re
disconnect device
th e
is
a
s w itc h
in c o rp o ra te d
in
th e
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
on
and
o ff
p o s i t i o n s s h a l l b e m a r k e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h F . 3 . 5 . 2 .
L.7
Plugs as disconnect devices
W h e re
a p lu g
on th e
in s tru c tio n s
s h a ll
accessible.
For
p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd
s ta te
th a t
p lu g g a b le
fo r
is u s e d
p lu g g a b le
e q u ip m e n t
e q u ip m e n t,
in te n d e d
fo r
in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e m a d e a v a ila b le to th e
L.8
disconnect device,
a s th e
th e
s o c k e t-o u tle t
in s ta lla tio n
by
an
th e
in s ta lla tio n
s h a ll
be
e a s ily
ordinary person,
th e
ordinary person.
Multiple power sources
W h e re
a
u n it
re c e iv e s
v o lta g e s /fre q u e n c ie s
safeguard
in
or
power
as
a cco rd a n ce
fro m
re d u n d a n t
w ith
C la u s e
m o re
th a n
p o w e r),
F.5
near
th e re
each
one
so u rce
s h a ll
be
a
(fo r
e x a m p le ,
p ro m in e n t
disconnect device
d iffe re n t
instructional
g iv in g
a d e q u a te
disconnect device,
a s lo n g a s
i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e r e m o v a l o f a ll p o w e r f r o m t h e u n it .
One
instructional safeguard
m a y be u s e d fo r m o re th a n o n e
it i s c l e a r l y v i s i b l e f r o m t h e d i s c o n n e c t p o i n t s .
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t, a n d “ S h o c k h a z a rd ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
o p tio n a l
-
element 4:
“ D i s c o n n e c t a ll p o w e r s o u r c e s ” o r e q u i v a l e n t t e x t
E q u ip m e n t in c o r p o r a tin g a n in te rn a l U P S s h a ll h a v e p r o v is io n s fo r r e lia b ly d is a b lin g th e U P S
a n d d is c o n n e c t i n g its o u t p u t p r io r to s e r v ic in g t h e e q u ip m e n t . I n s t r u c t io n s f o r d is c o n n e c t i o n o f
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
th e
UPS
p ro v id e d .
s h a ll
be
2018
The
in te rn a l
e n e rg y
so u rce
a p p ro p ria te ly a n d g u a rd e d a g a in s t a c c id e n ta l c o n ta c t b y a
L.9
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
of
th e
UPS
skilled person.
s h a ll
be
m a rke d
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex M
(n o rm a tive )
Equipment containing batteries and their protection circuits
M.1
General requirements
T h is
annex
batteries
p a rts
of
in t h e
th is
in s ta lla tio n
an
p ro v id e s
a d d itio n a l
re q u ire m e n ts
safeguards
e q u ip m e n t m a y re q u ire
d o c u m e n t.
o f e x te rn a l
ordinary person
or
T h is
annex
does
batteries.
fo r e q u ip m e n t th a t c o n ta in s
not
th a t h a v e
cover
not been
re q u ire m e n ts
batteries o r battery m a i n t e n a n c e
a n instructed person.
fo r
a d d re sse d
of
in o t h e r
batteries，
e x te rn a l
battery
o th e r th a n
Use
re p la c e m e n t by
battery s a f e t y s t a n d a r d c o n t a i n s e q u i v a l e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s
a n n e x , a battery in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h a t battery s t a n d a r d
is c o n s i d e r e d t o f u l f i l t h e
c o r r e s p o n d i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s a n n e x , a n d t e s t s t h a t a r e p a r t o f t h e battery s a f e t y
W h e re a
s ta n d a rd n e e d n o t b e re p e a te d u n d e r th is a n n e x .
For
consum er
g ra d e ,
n o n -re c h a rg e a b le
c a rb o n -z in c
or
a lk a lin e
batteries, M.3
and
M.10
a p p ly .
M.2
Safety of batteries and their cells
M.2.1
Requirements
Batteries
a n d th e ir
cells
s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t IE C s ta n d a r d s fo r
batteries
a s lis te d
b e lo w .
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -4 ,
IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -5 ,
IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -2 ,
IE C 6 1 4 2 7
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -1 1 ,
(a ll
p a rts ),
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -2 1 ,
IE C T S
61430,
IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 2 2 ,
IE C 6 1 4 3 4 ,
IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -1
IE C 6 1 9 5 9 ,
IE C 6 2 1 3 3
and
(a ll
p a rts ), IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -1 , IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -2 , IE C 6 2 2 8 1 , IE C 6 2 4 8 5 -2 a n d IE C 6 2 6 1 9 .
NOTE
M.2.2
O th e r
battery
s a f e t y s t a n d a r d s a r e u n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t , a n d a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e i n c l u d e d in f u t u r e .
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection or evaluation based on data provided by the
manufacturer.
M.3
M.3.1
Protection circuits for batteries provided within the equipment
Requirements
P ro te c tio n c irc u its o r c o n s tru c tio n fo r
a n in te g ra l p a rt o f th e
-
battery
batteries
p ro v id e d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th a t a re n o t
s h a ll b e s o d e s ig n e d th a t:
safeguards a r e e f f e c t i v e d u r i n g normal operating conditions, abnormal operating
conditions, single fault conditions, i n s t a l l a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s a n d t r a n s p o r t a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s ;
and
-
t he
o u tp u t
re c h a rg e a b le
-
f or
c h a ra c te ris tic s
battery;
n o n -re c h a rg e a b le
of
a
battery
c h a rg in g
c irc u it
a re
c o m p a tib le
w ith
its
and
batteries,
d is c h a rg in g
at
a
ra te
e x c e e d in g
th e
battery
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s a n d u n i n t e n t i o n a l c h a r g i n g a r e p r e v e n t e d ; a n d
-
f or
re c h a rg e a b le
batteries,
c h a rg in g
and
d is c h a rg in g
at
a
ra te
e x c e e d in g
m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s , a n d r e v e r s e d c h a r g i n g a r e p r e v e n t e d ; a n d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
battery
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
batteries in hand-held equipment， direct plug-in equipment a n d transportable
equipment t h a t a r e r e p l a c e a b l e b y a n ordinary person s h a l l b e i n h e r e n t l y p r o t e c t e d t o
a v o id c re a tin g a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r a c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u rc e ; a n d
-
f or
batteries
th a t
a re
re p la c e a b le
by
an
ordinary person,
re v e rs e
p o la rity
in s ta lla tio n
s h a ll b e p r e v e n t e d if t h is c o u ld c r e a t e a c l a s s 2 o r c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e ( s e e a ls o B . 3 . 6 ) .
NOTE
R e v e rs e d c h a rg in g o f a re c h a rg e a b le
a id in g th e d is c h a rg e o f th e
M.3.2
battery
o c c u r s w h e n t h e p o l a r i t y o f th e c h a r g i n g c i r c u i t is r e v e r s e d ,
battery.
Test method
Protection circuits for b a tte rie s are checked by inspection and by evaluation of the data
provided by the equipment manufacturer and b a tte ry manufacturer for charging and
discharging rates.
When appropriate data is not available， compliance is checked by test. However， b a tte rie s
that are inherently safe for the conditions given are not tested under those conditions.
Consumer grade ， non-rechargeable carbon-zinc or alkaline b a tte rie s are considered safe
under short-circuiting conditions and therefore are not tested for discharge; nor are such
b a tte rie ste sted forle aka ge un de rstorag econ ditio ns.
The b a tte ry used for the following tests is either a new non-rechargeable b a tte ry or a fully
charged rechargeable b a tte ry as provided with the equipment， or recommended by the
manufacturer for use with the equipment. The test for b a tte ry protection circuits in the
equipment may be performed using a b a tte ry simulator replacing the b a tte ry itself. The
temperature test is conducted in a temperature controlled chamber. A control signal
simulating the actual signal from the temperature sensor in the b a tte ry may be used in order
to perform the test.
-
Overcharging of a rechargeable b a tte ry. The b a tte ry is charged while briefly subjected to
the simulation of any s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that is likely to occur in the charging circuit
and that results in overcharging of the b a tte ry. To minimize testing time, the failure is
chosen that causes the worst-case overcharging condition. The b a tte ry is then charged
for a single period of 7h with the simulated failure in place.
-
Excessive discharging. The b a tte ry is subjected to rapid discharge by open-circuiting or
short-circuiting any current limiting or voltage limiting component in the load circuit of the
b a tte ry under test (one component at a time).
-
Unintentional charging of a non-rechargeable b a tte ry. The b a tte ry is charged while briefly
subjected to the simulation of any single component failure that is likely to occur in the
circuit and that would result in unintentional charging of the b a tte ry. To minimize testing
time, the failure is chosen that causes the highest charging current. The b a tte ry is then
charged for a single period of 7 h with the simulated failure in place.
Where more than one c e ll is provided in a b a tte ry, all c e lls shall be tested as a unit.
NOTE
Some
o f th e
te s ts
s p e c ifie d
can
be
h a za rd o u s
to
th e
m e a s u r e s to p r o te c t s u c h p e r s o n s a g a in s t p o s s ib le c h e m ic a l o r
persons
explosion
p e rfo rm in g
th e
te s ts .
Use
a p p ro p ria te
h aza rd s.
For equipment where the b a tte ry can be removed from the equipment by an o rd in a ry
p e rso n , the following additional test applies:
-
Reverse charging of a rechargeable b a tte ry. Check whether the equipment containing a
b a tte ry has such construction design that the b a tte ry may be placed into the equipment in
the manner causing reverse charging. Also it will be checked if the electrical connection is
made. If a reverse charging is judged possible by the inspection， the following test is
applied. However, when relevant IEC b a tte ry standards cover this requirement, the test is
considered to be performed.
The b a tte ry is installed in the reverse orientation and then the charging circuit is subject
to simulation o f any single component failure. To minimize testing time， the failure is
chosen that causes the highest reverse charging current. The b a tte ry is then reverse
charged for a single period of 7 h with the simulated failure in place.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
M.3.3
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance criteria
These tests shall not result in any o f the following:
-
chemical leakage caused by cracking, rupturing or bursting of the b a tte ry jacket, if such
leakage could adversely affect a sa fe g u a rd ; or
-
spillage of liquid from any pressure relief device in the b a tte ry, unless such spillage is
contained by the equipment without risk of damage to a s a fe g u a rd or harm to an o rd in a ry
p e rs o n or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or
-
e x p l o s i o n of the b a tte ry, if such e x p lo s io n could result in injury to an o rd in a ry p e rs o n
or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or
-
emission of flame or expulsion of molten metal to the outside of the equipment e n clo su re .
Throughout the tests:
-
the b a tte ry temperature shall not exceed the allowable temperature of the b a tte ry as
specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer; and
-
the maximum current drawn from the b a tte ry shall be within the range of the specification
of the b a tte ry.
M.4
Additional safeguards for equipment containing a portable secondary
lithium battery
M.4.1
General
E q u ip m e n t
d e s ig n e d
to
be
o p e ra te d
secondary lithium batteries
M.4.2
w h ile
in c o rp o ra tin g
one
or
m o re
p o rta b le
s e a le d
a r e s u b j e c t t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s c l a u s e .
Charging safeguards
M.4.2.1
Requirements
normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions o r single fault
conditions t h e c h a r g i n g v o l t a g e p e r secondary lithium battery a n d t h e c h a r g i n g c u r r e n t p e r
secondary lithium battery s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e maximum specified charging voltage a n d
maximum specified charging current.
Under
Under
-
abnormal operating conditions,
s to p
c h a rg in g
when
th e
charging temperature;
-
lim it
th e
cu rre n t
to
th e
te m p e ra tu re
battery
of
th e
c h a r g in g c ir c u it s h a ll:
battery
exceeds
th e
highest specified
and
v a lu e
t e m p e r a t u r e is l o w e r t h a n t h e
M.4.2.2
th e
battery m a n u f a c t u r e r
lowest specified charging temperature.
s p e c ifie d
by
th e
when
th e
battery
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by measuring the charging voltage, the charging current and the
temperature of each individual c e ll of the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry under n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . The
c e ll temperature shall be measured at the points specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer.
S in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s that may affect the charging voltage or charging current or the
temperature shall be applied in accordance with Clause BA.
NOTE 1
F o r p o tte d a s s e m b lie s , t h e r m o c o u p le s c o u ld b e a tta c h e d to th e c e ll s u r fa c e b e fo r e p o ttin g .
A higher charging voltage than the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g v o lta g e or a higher
charging current than the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g cu rre n t, that occurs ju st after the
introduction of an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n or a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， may be
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
ignored if the operation o f a protective device or circuitry, provided in addition to the normal
regulating circuitry, prevents an unsafe condition of the b a tte ry.
Where appropriate, for the purpose o f the measurement， the b a tte ry may be replaced by a
circuit simulating the b a tte ry load.
The charging voltage shall be measured when the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry becomes fully
charged. The charging current shall be measured during the entire charging cycle up to the
m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g voltage.
During and after the test， the following applies:
-
The charging voltage shall not exceed the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g voltage.
-
The charging current shall not exceed the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g cu rre n t.
-
The charging of the b a tte ry shall stop when the temperature of the b a tte ry exceeds the
h ig h e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g tem perature.
-
The b a tte ry charging circuit shall limit the current to the value specified by the b a tte ry
manufacturer when the b a tte ry temperature is lower than the lo w e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g
tem perature.
In addition， for equipment where the b a tte ry can be removed from the equipment by an
o rd in a ry p e rso n , compliance is checked by measuring the charging voltage and the charging
current， and by evaluating the temperature control function of the equipment under n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s .
All parameters controlled by the protection circuit for the b a tte ry shall be within those
specified in the relevant IEC b a tte ry standard, and shall cover the following:
-
the maximum current drawn from the b a tte ry shall be within the range of the specification
of the b a tte ry ; and
-
throughout the tests, the b a tte ry temperature shall not exceed the allowable temperature
of the b a tte ry as specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer.
NOTE 2
M.4.3
T h e c o n tro llin g e le m e n ts a re v o lta g e , c u rre n t, a n d te m p e ra tu re .
Fire enclosure
Secondary lithium batteries s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a fire enclosure a c c o r d i n g t o 6 . 4 . 8 .
fire enclosure m a y b e t h a t o f t h e secondary lithium battery i t s e l f , o f t h e cell o r
c o m b i n a t i o n o f cells o r t h a t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g t h e secondary lithium battery.
E q u ip m e n t w ith
batteries
a re e x e m p t fro m th e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t if th e e q u ip m e n t u s e s a
The
of
a
cell
th a t c o m p lie s w ith P S 1 .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the relevant material or by evaluation of the
s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry data sheet.
M.4.4
Drop test of equipment containing a secondary lithium battery
M.4.4.1
General
direct plug-in equipment, hand-held equipment a n d transportable
equipment t h a t c o n t a i n a secondary lithium battery a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w . T h e s e t e s t s a r e
s p e c i f i e d t o v e r i f y t h a t m e c h a n i c a l s h o c k w i l l n o t c o m p r o m i s e a safeguard w i t h i n t h e battery
The
te s ts
fo r
o r th e e q u ip m e n t.
M.4.4.2
Preparation and procedure for the drop test
The drop test is conducted in the following order:
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
-
St ep 1: drop of the equipment containing a b a tte ry as specified in M.4.4.3.
-
St ep 2: check the charge and discharge function of the dropped equipment as specified
in M.4.4.4.
-
St ep 3: conduct a charge and discharge cycle test of the dropped b a tte ry as specified
in M.4.4.5.
As a preparation o f the drop test, two b a tte rie s are fully charged at the same time under the
same charging conditions. The open circuit voltages of both b a tte rie s are measured to
confirm the initial voltages are the same. One b a tte ry is used for the drop test and the other
is used as a reference.
M.4.4.3
Drop
The equipment with a fully charged b a tte ry installed shall be subjected to the drop test of
Clause T.7.
After the drop testf the b a tte ry is removed from the equipment. The open circuit voltages of
the dropped b a tte ry and the reference (undropped) b a tte ry are periodically monitored during
the following 24 hour period. The voltage difference shall not exceed 5 %.
M.4.4.4
Check of the charge / discharge function
The charging/discharging circuit functions (charging- control voltage, charging control current,
and temperature control) are checked to determine that they continue to operate and that all
s a fe g u a rd s are effective. A dummy b a tte ry or appropriate measurement tool that represents
the b a tte ry characteristics may be used for this examination in order to differentiate between
b a tte ry damage and equipment malfunctions.
If the charge/discharge function does not operate, the test is terminated, continuation with
step 3 is not necessary and compliance is determined by M.4.4.6.
M.4.4.5
Charge / discharge cycle test
If the dropped equipment is still functioning, the dropped equipment with the dropped b a tte ry
installed is subject to three complete discharge and charge cycles under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s .
M.4.4.6
Compliance criteria
During the tests, fire or e x p lo s io n o f the b a tte ry shall not occur unless an appropriate
s a fe g u a rd is provided that contains the e x p lo s io n or fire. If venting occurs, any electrolyte
leakage shall not defeat a safeg uard.
When a protection circuitry for charging or discharging in the equipment or the b a tte ry
detects an abnormality in the b a tte ry and stops charging or discharging, the result is
considered to be acceptable.
M.5
Risk of burn due to short-circuit during carrying
M.5.1
Battery
person
Requirements
te rm in a ls
or
c o n d u c tiv e
an
s h a ll
be
p ro te c te d
instructed person
te rm in a ls
(su ch
as
in
th e
fro m
d u rin g
th e
p o s s ib le
th e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
c a rry in g
u s e r ’s c a r r y in g
m e ta l o b je c ts , s u c h a s c lip s , k e y s a n d n e c k la c e s .
b u rn
bag)
of
th a t m a y o c c u r to
a
due
battery
to
a
w ith
an
ordinary
exposed
b a re
s h o rt-c irc u it c a u s e d
by
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
M.5.2
Test method and compliance criteria
If the b a tte ry is designed to be carried with bare conductive terminals, the b a tte ry shall
comply with the test of P.2.3.
The compliance criteria of M. 3.3 apply.
M.6
Safeguards against short-circuits
M.6.1
The
Requirements
e le c tric
e n e rg y
u n c o n tro lle d
fa ilu re ,
of
cells
in
or
batteries
m ay
be
as
a
m e ta l
e n e rg y ,
heat
explosion
m e ta l, s p a rk s ,
c o n ta m in a n t
and
b rid g in g
p re ssu re
th e
g e n e ra te d
in s u la tio n .
by
th e
in
an
in a d v e rte n t
As
h ig h
a
re s u lt,
cu rre n t
th e
can
and
safeguard
c o n s id e ra b le
p ro d u ce
m o lte n
a n d v a p o ris a tio n o f e le c tro ly te .
T o a d d r e s s e x te r n a l fa u lts , th e m a in c o n n e c t io n s fr o m th e
-
re le a s e d
m a n n e r d u e to e x te rn a l s h o rt-c irc u itin g o f th e te rm in a ls o r a n in te rn a l
such
am ount
s to re d
battery
te r m in a ls s h a ll e ith e r:
b e p r o v id e d w ith a s u ff ic ie n t o v e r c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e to p r e v e n t a n y a c c id e n ta l s h o r tc irc u it in d u c in g c o n d itio n s a s m e n tio n e d a b o v e ; o r
-
battery
t he
c o n n e c tio n s
u p to th e fir s t o v e r c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e s h a ll b e c o n s tr u c te d
s o t h a t a s h o r t - c i r c u i t is n o t l i k e l y t o o c c u r a n d c o n n e c t i o n s s h a ll b e d e s i g n e d to w i t h s t a n d
th e e le c tr o m a g n e tic fo rc e s e x p e rie n c e d d u rin g a s h o rt-c irc u it.
NOTE 1
tools
W h e re te rm in a ls a n d c o n d u c to rs a re n o t in s u la te d , b y d e s ig n o r fo r m a in te n a n c e p u rp o s e s , o n ly in s u la te d
a r e t o b e u s e d in t h a t a r e a .
U n le s s in te rn a l fa u lt te s tin g h a s b e e n c o n d u c te d o n th e
battery
NOTE
2
Each
cell
a s p a rt o f c o m p lia n c e w ith a n IE C
s t a n d a r d in M . 2 . 1 , t h e i n t e r n a l f a u l t t e s t i n g a s d e s c r i b e d b e l o w i s r e q u i r e d ,
N o t a ll
cell
battery
in
in tro d u c in g
s t a n d a r d s in
M.2.1
battery s h a l l
explosion o r
a
an
be
c o n ta in a s im ila r in te rn a l fa u lt te s t.
fa u lte d
fire .
to
W h e re
e n s u re
cell
a
is
th a t
cell
each
in c o rp o ra te d
v e n ts
in to
a
e q u ip m e n t, s u ffic ie n t s p a c in g s h a ll b e a llo w e d fo r th e p r o p e r v e n t o p e r a tio n o f
M.6.2
s a fe ly
w ith o u t
battery o r
e a c h cell.
th e
Compliance criteria
For external faults， compliance may be checked by inspection.
The sample shall not explode or emit molten material at any time during any of the tests.
M.7
Risk of explosion from lead acid and NiCd batteries
M.7.1
W h e re
Ventilation preventing an explosive gas concentration
batteries
in a c o n f i n e d
a re p ro v id e d w ith in a n e q u ip m e n t s u c h th a t e m itte d g a s e s m a y c o n c e n tra te
e q u ip m e n t s p a c e , th e
battery
c o n s tr u c tio n , a ir flo w
th a t th e a tm o s p h e r e w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t d o e s n o t re a c h a n
In a c o m p a r t m e n t c o n t a i n i n g
lo c a l c o n c e n t r a t io n s
c o n ta c to rs
and
a c h ie v e d ,
fo r
b o th a
o f h yd ro g e n
s w itc h e s
e x a m p le ,
c lo s e
by
th e
to
battery
and
use
c o m p a r tm e n ts o r a d e q u a te v e n tila tio n .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
of
explosive
s h a ll b e s u c h
c o n c e n tra tio n .
a n d e le c tr ic a l c o m p o n e n t s , th e ris k o f ig n itio n o f
oxygen
battery
o r v e n tila tio n
b y a d ja c e n t o p e ra tio n a l
v e n ts
fu lly
o r v a lv e s , s h a ll
e n c lo s e d
p a rts ,
such
as
b e c o n tro lle d . T h is
s h a ll
be
c o m p o n e n ts ,
a rc in g
s e p a ra tio n
of
battery
旧C
T h e v e n tila tio n
battery
th e
s y s te m
cases
If v e n t i l a t i o n
o u ts id e
a ir,
tu b e s
th e y
s h a ll b e s o c o n s tr u c te d th a t a n y p o te n tia l fa u lt, in c lu d in g
d u e to o v e rh e a tin g
explosive
s y s te m fa ilin g to v e n t
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
a re
used
s h a ll
not
ru n a w a y , d o e s
n o t r e s u l t in t h e
v e n tila tio n
explosive
c o n d u c tin g
th e
o n ly
m eans
gas
fro m
o f e lim in a tin g
battery
th e
th e
b u ild -u p
of
cases
gas
batteries
If
or
m e c h a n ic a l
p ro v id e d u n d e r
Enclosures
to
th e
fro m
th e
enclosure
c a b in e t. A n in d e p e n d e n t m e a n s o f n a tu ra l v e n tila tio n th a t a d e q u a te ly v e n tila te s th e
c o n ta in in g th e
of
gasses.
fo r
be
o r th e rm a l
d is to rtio n
s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .
fo rc e d -a ir
v e n tila tio n
is
used,
a d e q u a te
v e n tila tio n
s h a ll
c o n tin u e
to
be
single fault conditions.
w ith
m e c h a n ic a l
or
e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l
d a m p e rs
s h a ll
c o n tin u e
to
p ro v id e
a d e q u a t e v e n t i l a t i o n w h e n t h e d a m p e r is in t h e c l o s e d p o s i t i o n .
C l a u s e M . 7 is a p p l i e d f o r o p e n t y p e
batteries
w ith a m e c h a n is m
If
be
it
can
c a lc u la te d
w ith
shown
M .7 .
c irc u itry
th a t
T a b le M .1 , o r if th e
s h a ll
be c o n d u c te d
s p e c ifie d
one
of
th e
U n le s s
and
th e
it
th e
v e n tila tio n
can
be
ch a rg e
v e n tila tio n
S e a le d ty p e
te s ts
d e m o n s tra te d
c o n ta in s
c o n d itio n
M .7 .3
enclosure
th e
under
cannot
m a n u fa c tu re r.
in
of
is
c o m p lia n t
w ith
th e
a c c o r d i n g t o M . 7 . 2 , t h e e q u i p m e n t is in c o m p l i a n c e
v o lta g e
fo r b o o s t c h a rg e
by th e
c a p a b ility
(O)
battery enclosure
a p p ro v e d
batteries.
a n d v a lv e re g u la te d ty p e
o f r e d u c in g g a s a re c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith th is r e q u ir e m e n t.
re q u ire d v e n tila tio n a ir flo w
C la u s e
c h a rg in g
th a t
batteries
a
exceed
single fault condition
th e
n o in te rn a l c h a rg in g
fo r th e
battery
ty p e s
If t h e v e n t i l a t i o n
s h a ll
v a lu e s
be
c o n d u c te d
fo r
flo a t
c a p a b ility ,
and
in
c h a rg in g
th e
in
c a lc u la tio n s
m a x im u m
c a p a c ity
c a n n o t be a d e q u a te ly s h o w n ,
in
o rd e r
to
e n s u re
a d e q u a te
v e n tila tio n .
The
h yd ro g e n
a n d s u p p o rte d
g e n e ra tio n
battery
(flo w
ra te fo r te s tin g ) fo r th e
ty p e s s h a ll b e c a lc u la te d
m a x im u m
s u p p o rte d
u s in g d a ta fro m th e
battery
battery
c a p a c ity
m a n u fa c tu re r, or
t h e v a l u e s f o r / flo a t a n d / b o o s t w i t h s u p p o r t i n g d a t a a s g i v e n i n T a b l e M . 1 o r b y t h e f o l l o w i n g :
〇 m
^B a tt = ° » 4 5 x 1 °
w it h / g a s , C rt, a n d
M.7.2
n as
x ^g a s x C r txw
d e s c r i b e d in M . 7 . 2 .
Test method and compliance criteria
The purpose of ventilating a b a tte ry location or e n c lo s u re is to maintain the hydrogen
concentration below the e x p lo s iv e 4 %vol hydrogen LEL threshold. The hydrogen gas
concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition
source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source.
NOTE 1
W hen a
cell
Under standard
P = 1 013 hPa:
- 1
r e a c h e s its f u lly c h a r g e d s ta te , w a t e r e le c t r o l y s i s o c c u r s a c c o r d i n g to t h e F a r a d a y 's la w .
conditions
of
normal
temperature
and
pressure
where
T = 273 K，
Ah decomposes H20 into 0,42 I H2 + 0,21 I 0 2,
-
decomposition of 1 cm3 (1 g) H 2 〇 requires 3 Ah,
-
26, 8 Ah decomposes H20 into 1 g H2 + 8 g 0 2
When the charging operation is stopped， the emission of gas from the c e lls can be regarded
as having come to an end 1 h after having switched off the charging current.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
- 295 -
The minimum air flow rate for ventilation of a b a tte ry location or compartment shall be
calculated by the following formula:
0=vxqxsxn
x / g a s x Crt x 1 0
rrvV h
where:
Q
is the ventilation air flow in m3/h;
v
is the necessary dilution of hydrogen.
(100-4)%
^ 4%~
q
0,45
x
10 - 3
m 3/A h l
generated hydrogen at 20 °Cf
s
= 5, general safety factor;
n
is the number of c e lls ;
is the current producing gas in mA / Ah rated capacity for the float charge current
1float 〇 r the boost charge current I boost;
gas
is the capacity
C rt
NOTE
2
C1 〇
is t h e
C 5 is th e
v x ^ x s
with
10
5
C 10
for lead acid c e lls (Ah) or capacity C5 for NiCd c e lls (Ah)
h ra te w ith c u r r e n t
/ 1〇
f o r le a d a c id
h ra te w ith c u r r e n t / 5 fo r N iC d
= 0 , 0 5 「m 3 / A h
L
cells:
cells:
= 1,80 V/cell
( A h ) t o L rfjna|
(A h ) to
Ufinal = 1,00 V/cell
at
20
at
20
°C.
°C.
the ventilation air flow calculation formula is:
Q=
0 ,0 5
x nx
/ g a s x C rt x 1 0
•3
m 3/ h
The current Igas in mA producing gas is determined by one o f the following formulas.
’ gas =
/g a s =
’ float x / g
’ b o o s tx
x
,g x
’s
[m A /A h ]
〇厂
[m A /A h ]
where:
/ gas
is the current producing gas in mA / Ah rated capacity for the float charge current
】float 〇 r the boost charge current I boost;
’ flo a t
is the float charge current under fully charged condition at a defined float charge
voltage at 20 °C;
/boost
is the boost charge current under fully charged condition at a defined boost charge
voltage at 20 °C;
/g
is the gas emission factor， proportion of current at fully charged state producing
hydrogen (see T a b l e
/s
is the safety factor, to accommodate faulty c e lls in a b a tte ry and an aged b a tte ry
(see T a b l e M . 1 j .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T a b l e M . 1 - V a l u e s f o r c u r r e n t / f l o a t a n d / b o o s t ，f a c t o r s / g a n d / s ，
a n d v o lta g e s
Parameter
NiCd batteries
vented cells b
1
0 ,2
1
5
5
5
2 ,2 3
2 ,2 7
1,40
1
1
1
5
1
5
2 ,4 0
2 ,4 0
1 ,5 5
4
8
10
20
8
50
and a geing)
F lo a t c h a rg e v o lta g e
Uboosi
Lead-acid batteries
VRLA cells
G a s e m i s s i o n s a f e t y f a c t o r / s (in cl. 10 %
cells
and
Lead-acid batteries
vented cells
Sb < 3 % a
G a s e m is s io n f a c t o r / g
fa ulty
Uuoat
Uu〇a{ 0
V/cell
T y p i c a l f l o a t c h a r g e c u r r e n t / f 丨〇at
A /A h
C u r r e n t ( f l o a t ) / gas
m A /A h
(u n d e r flo a t c h a rg e c o n d itio n s re le v a n t fo r
a ir flo w c a lc u la tio n )
B o o s t c h a r g e v o l t a g e " b〇〇st c
V/cell
T y p i c a l b o o s t c h a r g e c u r r e n t / b〇〇st
m A /A h
C u r r e n t ( b o o s t ) / gas
m A /A h
(u n d e r b o o s t c h a rg e c o n d itio n s re le v a n t
fo r a ir flo w c a lc u la tio n )
a
F o r an a n tim o n y (S b ) c o n te n t h ig h e r th a n 3 % , th e c u rre n t u s e d fo r c a lc u la tio n s s h a ll be d o u b le d .
b
F o r re c o m b in a tio n ty p e N iC d
c
F l o a t a n d b o o s t c h a r g e v o l t a g e c a n v a r y w i t h t h e s p e c i f i c g r a v i t y o f e l e c t r o l y t e in l e a d - a c i d
cells
c o n s u lt th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
cells.
T h e v a l u e s o f f l o a t a n d b o o s t c h a r g e c u r r e n t i n c r e a s e w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e . T h e c o n s e q u e n c e s o f a n i n c r e a s e in
t e m p e r a t u r e , u p t o a m a x i m u m o f 4 0 ° C , h a v e b e e n a c c o m m o d a t e d in t h e v a l u e s in T a b l e M . 1 .
In c a s e o f u s e o f g a s r e c o m b i n a t i o n v e n t p l u g s , t h e g a s p r o d u c i n g c u r r e n t ^gas t h e v a l u e s f o r v e n t e d c e l l s c a n b e
r e d u c e d to 50 % o f th e v a lu e s fo r v e n te d
cells.
T h e v e n t i l a t i o n a i r v o l u m e r e q u i r e m e n t s , f o r e x a m p l e , f o r t w o 4 8 V s t r i n g s o f V R L A cells in t h e s a m e battery
c a b in e t a n d e a c h w ith 120 A h ra te d C 1〇 c a p a c ity a m o u n t, u n d e r flo a t a n d u n d e r b o o s t c h a rg e s e rv ic e c o n d itio n s
a re :
一
s e rv ic e w ith flo a t c h a r g e c o n d itio n o n ly :
Q
= 0 , 0 5 x 2 4 x 1 x 1 2 0 x 0 , 0 0 1 = 0 , 1 4 4 m 3/ h p e r s t r i n g o r 2 8 8 l / h
to ta l;
一
s e rv ic e w ith b o o s t c h a r g e c o n d itio n :
p = 0 , 0 5 x 2 4 x 8 x 1 2 0 x 〇 ,〇 〇 1 = 1 , 1 5 m 3/ h p e r s t r i n g o r 2 3 0 0 l / h
to ta l.
For recombinant NiCd cells， or for lead-acid b a tte ry types where the gassing rate in volts per
cell per hour (per ampere-hour) is published by the manufacturer, it is permitted to determine
the minimum air flow rate O using the measure gas emissions at boost-charge volts per cell
charging， unless it can be verified that the output voltage of the charging circuit cannot
exceed the float voltage under any conditions required by this document. The equation for O
becomes:
Q
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
= v x s x n x
r
(x
Cn )
x
1〇^3 (m3/h)
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
where:
v
=
24, the necessary dilution of hydrogen:
s
= 5, general safety factor;
n
is the number of c e lls ;
r
is the outgassing rate at a given voltage per cell per hour (may be per ampere-hour
rating);
C rt
is the capacity C10 for lead acid c e lls (Ah) or capacity C5 for NiCd c e lls (Ah).
NOTE
C r( i s n o t r e q u i r e d f o r d e t e r m i n i n g
Q
i f t h e g a s s i n g r a t e /• i s p r o v i d e d i n m l / ( h - c e / / ) o r t h e e q u i v a l e n t .
For the purpose of calculating the area of ventilation openings required for natural ventilation,
the air velocity is assumed to be 0 ,1 m/s.
Alternately, the following equation can be used:
A = 28 x Q
where:
Q is the ventilation rate of fresh air (m3/h);
A
is the free area of openings in air inlet and outlet (cm2).
M.7.3
Ventilation tests
M.7.3.1
General
The test shall be performed with the EUT stabilized at 25 °C. If forced air ventilation is used, it
shall be run under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . Movable mechanical or electro-mechanical
dampers shall be closed or in the unpowered position. The air movement around the cabinet
shall be minimized， or the EUT shall be placed in a cabinet to prevent air movement around
the EUT during testing.
M .7.3.2
Ventilation test - alternative 1
Samples of the atmosphere within the b a tte ry compartment are to be taken after 7 h of
operation. The samples are to be taken at locations where the greatest concentration of
hydrogen gas is likely. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the
mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is
not in proximity to an ignition source. See M.3.2 for evaluating the overcharging of a
rechargeable b a tte ry.
M .7.3.3
Ventilation test - alternative 2
The performance of the EUT b a tte ry ventilation system shall be verified by conducting a test
utilizing hydrogen， or helium to represent hydrogen.
The test will determine if the EUT is capable o f ventilating the calculated hydrogen generation
rate.
Step 1
Helium or hydrogen sensors (depending on the chosen gas) shall be placed in all
cabinet compartments that are subjected to hydrogen evolution from the b a tte ry
compartment.
Step 2
Helium or hydrogen shall be injected into the b a tte ry compartment until a
concentration of 1 % or 2 % as required below is reached. The rate of helium or
hydrogen injection required to maintain the concentration under steady state
conditions shall be reported. Steady state shall be defined as a maximum variation of
± 0,25 % over a period of 1 h.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
Step 3
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compare the rate of helium or hydrogen obtained in Step 2 with the calculated
hydrogen generation rate in M. 7.1.
If the calculated hydrogen generation rate for the maximum b a tte ry capacity as specified by
the manufacturer exceeds the amount of helium or hydrogen that was being injected by more
than 1 〇/〇 by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, or exceeds 2 〇/〇 by
volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source, the EUT compartment
ventilation system is not in compliance with this requirement.
If the calculated hydrogen generation rate, for the maximum b a tte ry capacity as specified by
the manufacturer, is less than or equal to the rate o f helium or hydrogen that was being
injected, the EUT compartment ventilation system is in compliance with this requirement.
M.7.3.4
Ventilation test - alternative 3
The test shall be performed as described in M .7 .3 .1 with a hydrogen or helium source used to
inject a flow rate described in M.7.1. Samples of the atmosphere within the b a tte ry
compartment or other area where hydrogen may accumulate is continuously monitored for 7 h
or until the levels are stable. Steady state shall be defined as a maximum variation of ±0,25 〇/〇
over a period of 1 h. The gas monitored in this manner is to be returned to the EUT under
test. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in
proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity
to an ignition source. The sampling method in the original test may also be used, however, if
hydrogen is used, care should be taken to establish that safe levels exist in the EUT prior to
injecting for 7 h.
NOTE
T h i s m e t h o d is p a r t i c u l a r l y s u it e d to e v a l u a t i n g m ix e d o r c o m p l e x s y s t e m s o r v e n t i l a t i o n p a t t e r n s .
M.7.4
Marking requirement
U n le s s
batteries
th e
a re
e ith e r w ith
th e
s u p p o rte d
a p p ro ve d
by
th e
p ro v id e d
battery
w ith
ty p e s
th e
and
e q u ip m e n t,
th e
m a n u f a c t u r e r ”， p r o v i d e d
th e
m a x im u m
th a t
th is
c o m p a rtm e n t
c a p a c itie s
s h a ll
or “Use
in fo rm a tio n
is
be
o n ly
m a rke d
b a tte rie s
s p e c ifie d
in
th e
in s ta lla tio n /s e rv ic e in s tru c tio n s .
M.8
Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources of
batteries with aqueous electrolyte
M.8.1
The
General
re q u ire m e n ts
s p e c ifie d
b e lo w
a p p ly
to
re c h a rg e a b le
batteries
p ro v id in g
a
v e n tin g
s y s te m .
NOTE
F o r e x a m p le , a
battery
u s e d in a U P S .
T h e le v e l o f a ir v e n tila tio n ra te s h a ll e n s u r e th a t a ris k o f
t h e h y d r o g e n c o n t e n t i n a i r b e l o w 1 % vol a t t h e
The
u s e o f a n e f f e c t i v e f l a m e a r r e s t e r in t h e
explosion
p r o p a g a tin g in to th e
M.8 i s
batteries w i t h
C la u s e
M.8.2
M.8.2.1
PIS.
battery
v e n tin g s y s te m
batteries
a n d v a lv e re g u la te d ty p e
w ill p r e v e n t a n e x te r n a l
batteries.
S e a le d ty p e
o f r e d u c in g g a s a re c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith th is r e q u ir e m e n t.
Test method
General
The test shall be carried out according to IEC 60896-21:2004, 6.4.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
d o e s n o t e x is t b y k e e p in g
battery.
a p p lie d fo r o p e n ty p e
a m e c h a n is m
explosion
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
NOTE 1
w ith in
T h i s t e s t is d e s i g n e d to r e v e a l t h e p r o t e c t i o n a f f o r d e d b y t h e v a l v e u n it a g a i n s t t h e ig n it io n o f th e g a s e s
cell
a
by an
e x te rn a l ig n itio n s o u rc e . D u rin g th is te s t, u s e
explosion
e q u ip m e n t fro m
p ro p e r p re c a u tio n s to
safeguard
persons and
and burns.
A minimum distance d extending through air shall be maintained within which a maximum
surface temperature of 300 °C shall not be exceeded (no flames ， sparks， arcs or glowing
devices).
NOTE 2
d to
W h e n c a lc u la tin g th e m in im u m d is ta n c e
p ro te c t a g a in s t
explosion
in c l o s e p r o x i m i t y t o t h e s o u r c e o f
r e l e a s e o f a cell o r battery, t h e d i l u t i o n o f explosive g a s e s i s n o t a l w a y s e n s u r e d . T h e d i s p e r s i o n o f
g a s d e p e n d s o n th e g a s re le a s e ra te a n d th e v e n tila tio n c h a ra c te ris tic s c lo s e to th e s o u rc e o f re le a s e .
explosive
The minimum distance d can be estimated by calculating the dimensions of a hypothetical
volume Vz o f potentially e x p lo s iv e gas around the source of release, outside of which the
concentration of hydrogen is below the safe concentration of the LEL.
d
= 2 8 ,8
X
^ / gas
[m m ]
x
where:
is the current producing gas [mA / Ah];
’ gas
is the rated capacity [Ah].
NOTE 3
T h e re q u ire d d is ta n c e
d
ca n be a c h ie v e d b y th e u s e o f a p a rtitio n w a ll b e tw e e n th e
battery
a n d s p a rk in g
d e v ic e .
Where b a tte rie s form an integral part of a power supply system (for example， in a UPS
system)， the distance d， where d is the minimum distance (clearance) between the ventile of
the b a tte ry and the electronic equipment that may exhibit flames, sparks, arcs or glowing
devices (maximum surface temperature 300 °C)f may be reduced according to the equipment
manufacturer’s calculations or measurements. The level of air ventilation rate should ensure
that a risk of e x p lo s io n does not exist by keeping the hydrogen content in air below 1 %voj
plus a margin at the PIS.
M .8 .2 .2
The
E s tim a tio n o f h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e
th e o re tic a l
m in im u m
v e n tila tio n
flo w
ra te
Vz
to
d ilu te
th e
fla m m a b le
gas
(h yd ro g e n )
to
a
c o n c e n tra tio n b e lo w th e L E L c a n b e c a lc u la te d b y m e a n s o f th e fo rm u la :
dV_\
dt
=
"
㈤
x
也
k
x
x LEL
J _
293
w h e re :
d V /d i^ n
is
clG/dt m a x
is th e m a x i m u m g a s r e l e a s e r a t e ( k g / s ) ;
LEL
i s 4 % v 0 | f o r h y d r o g e n ( k g / m 3 );
k
is t h e f a c t o r a p p l i e d t o t h e L E L ;
T
is t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e in k e l v i n ( 2 9 3 K = 2 0 ° C ) .
The
v o lu m e
t h e m i n i m u m v o l u m e t r i c f l o w r a t e o f f r e s h a i r r e q u i r e d t o d i l u t e t h e g a s ( m 3/ s ) ;
Vz
re p re s e n ts th e
v o lu m e
k
= 0 , 2 5 is c h o s e n f o r d i l u t i o n o f h y d r o g e n g a s ;
o v e r w h ic h
th e
m ean
c o n c e n tra tio n
o f fla m m a b le
gas
w ill b e 0 ,2 5 tim e s th e L E L . T h is m e a n s th a t a t th e e x t r e m it ie s o f th e h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e , th e
c o n c e n t r a t io n o f g a s w ill b e s ig n if ic a n t ly b e lo w th e L E L ( fo r e x a m p le , th e h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e
w h e r e t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n is a b o v e L E L w o u l d b e l e s s t h a n
NOTE
S e e B . 4 . 2 . 2 in I E C 6 0 0 7 9 - 1 0 : 2 0 0 2 f o r t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f L E L .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
Vz).
旧C
M .8 .2 .3
W ith
a
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
C o rre c tio n fa c to rs
g iv e n
n u m b e r o f a ir c h a n g e s
h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e
Vz
p e r u n it tim e ,
c,
re la te d
to
th e
g e n e ra l
v e n tila tio n
th e
o f p o te n tia lly e x p lo s iv e a tm o s p h e re a ro u n d th e s o u rc e o f re le a s e ca n
b e e s tim a te d a s fo llo w s :
w h e re
The
c is
t h e n u m b e r o f f r e s h a i r c h a n g e s p e r u n i t t i m e ( s - 1 ).
above
re le a s e
fo rm u la
g iv e n
h o ld s
id e a l
flo w
fo r
an
in s ta n ta n e o u s
c o n d itio n s
o f fre s h
and
a ir.
In
hom ogenous
p ra c tic e ,
m ix in g
id e a l
at
th e
c o n d itio n s
so u rce
ra re ly
of
e x is t.
T h e r e fo r e a c o rre c tio n f a c t o r / i s in tro d u c e d to d e n o te th e e ffe c tiv e n e s s o f th e v e n tila tio n .
w h e re /
te rm s
is
th e
o f its
v e n tila tio n
e ffe c tiv e n e s s
ty p ic a lly 5 (im p e d e d
/=
e ffe c tiv e n e s s
in
d ilu tin g
a ir flo w ).
fa c to r,
th e
d e n o tin g
e x p lo s iv e
For b a tte ry
th e
e ffic ie n c y
a tm o s p h e re , /
o f th e
ra n g in g
in s ta lla tio n s th e v e n tila tio n
v e n tila tio n
in
1 (id e a l)
to
fro m
e ffe c tiv e n e s s
f a c t o r is
1 ,2 5 .
M.8.2.4
The
C a lc u la tio n o f d is ta n c e
te rm
in c lu d in g
V
dt
d
a ll f a c t o r s
co rre sp o n d s
w ith
th e
h o u rly v e n tila tio n
a ir flo w
Q
y m jn
(in m 3/ h ) f o r s e c o n d a r y b a t t e r i e s c a l c u l a t e d u n d e r
fdV]
k dt y
Q=
Q = 0 ,0 5
T h is
h o u rly v e n tila tio n
Q
a ir flo w
X
(n )x / gas
can
be
used
X c rt X 1 0 - 3
to d e fin e
h e m is p h e ric a l d is p e rs a l o f g a s , a v o lu m e o f a h e m is p h e r e
d
[ m 3 /h ]
a h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e .
Vz
= 2 /3
n d3 c a n
A s s u m in g
a
b e d e fin e d , w h e re
is t h e d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e s o u r c e o f r e l e a s e .
T h i s r e s u l t s i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n f o r m u l a f o r t h e d i s t a n c e r / ，w i t h e = 1 a i r c h a n g e p e r h o u r w i t h i n
th e h e m is p h e re :
x 0 , 0 5 x 1 0 6 x ( j V ) x / g as x Crt
d = 2 8 , 8 x { W ) x ^ x ^
D e p e n d in g
on
v e n t o p e n in g s
fa c to r
The
th e
so u rce
p e r c e ll in v o lv e d
, re s p e c tiv e ly
d is ta n c e
d
re le a s e , th e
(VN)
s h a ll
n u m b e r o f c e lls
be ta k e n
p e r m o n o b lo c
in to c o n s id e r a tio n
b a tte ry
(fo r e x a m p le ,
(N)
or
b y th e
yj\lN ).
a s a fu n c tio n
s h o w n in F i g u r e M . 1 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
of gas
[m m
o f th e
ra te d
c a p a c ity fo r v a rio u s
ch a rg e
c u rre n ts /
( m A / A h ) is
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
Figure M.1 - Distance d as a function of the rated capacity
for various charge currents I (mA/Ah)
M_9
Preventing electrolyte spillage
M.9.1
Protection from electrolyte spillage
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e c o n s tr u c te d
an
a d ve rse
e ffe c t
on
s k in ,
s o th a t s p illa g e
eye
and
p r e m i s e s , is u n l i k e l y . A ll p o s s i b l e
o th e r
o p e ra tin g
a c c o u n t, in c lu d in g r e p la c e m e n t o f th e
o f e le c tro ly te fro m
hum an
body
m o d e s d u rin g
battery
p a rts ,
batteries, t h a t m a y h a v e
o t h e r safeguards o r t h e
m a in te n a n c e s h o u ld
be ta k e n
in to
c o n ta in e d
(fo r
a n d re fillin g o f c o n s u m e d m a te ria l.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
M.9.2
If
cell
Tray for preventing electrolyte spillage
fa ilu re
c o u ld
r e s u l t in t h e
s p illa g e
o f e le c tro ly te , th e
s p illa g e
s h a ll
be
e x a m p le , b y u s e o f a r e ta in in g tr a y a d e q u a te to c o n ta in th e e le c t r o ly te ) ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e
m a x im u m
p o s s ib le s p illa g e a m o u n t.
T h i s r e q u i r e m e n t is a p p l i c a b l e t o
o f th e
battery
stationary equipment
a n d d o e s n o t a p p ly if t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n
is s u c h t h a t l e a k a g e o f t h e e l e c t r o l y t e f r o m t h e
battery
is u n li k e ly , o r if s p i l l a g e
o f e le c tro ly te d o e s n o t a d v e rs e ly a ffe c t re q u ire d in s u la tio n .
NOTE
s e a le d
A n e x a m p l e o f a battery c o n s t r u c t i o n w h e r e l e a k a g e o f t h e e l e c t r o l y t e i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e u n l i k e l y i s t h e
cell v a l v e - r e g u l a t e d t y p e .
Compliance is checked by inspection.
M.10 Instructions to prevent reasonably foreseeable misuse
A
battery
c o m p o n e n ts
in c o rp o ra te d
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
e q u ip m e n t
and
a
battery
to g e th e r
cells a n d e l e c t r i c p o w e r g e n e r a t o r s ) s h a l l b e s o
safeguard f a i l u r e ( f o r e x a m p l e , f l a m m a b l e c h e m i c a l
(in c lu d in g
e le c tr ic s h o c k o r fire
in
w ith
its
a s s o c ia te d
c o n s tru c te d
th a t an
le a k a g e c a u s in g fire
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
o r i n s u l a t i o n d a m a g e ) i s u n l i k e l y , t a k i n g a l l r e a s o n a b l y f o r e s e e a b l e c o n d i t i o n s i n t o a c c o u n t . If
a p p lic a b le , th is s h a ll in c lu d e e x tr e m e c o n d itio n s a s s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r , s u c h a s :
-
hi gh o r lo w e x tre m e te m p e r a tu r e s th a t a
battery
can
b e s u b je c te d
to d u r in g
use , s to ra g e
o r tra n s p o rta tio n ; a n d
-
l o w a ir p r e s s u r e a t h ig h a ltitu d e .
W h e re
p ro v id in g
s a fe ty
d e v ic e s
or
d e s ig n
in
p ra c tic a l c o n s id e rin g th e fu n c tio n a l n a tu re o f th e
a
battery o r e q u i p m e n t i s n o t
battery o r e q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g
instructional safeguards i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5
battery f r o m e x t r e m e c o n d i t i o n s o r u s e r ' s a b u s e . E x a m p l e s
-
replacement of a
battery
-
disposal
battery
in to
battery
fire
battery,
t h a t c a n r e s u l t in a n
leaving
a
r e s u l t in
-
of a
a
battery i n a n
a n explosion o r
battery
s u b je c te d
be
or
p ro v id e d
to
a
battery,
p ro te c t th e
th a t s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d in c lu d e :
w ith a n in c o r r e c t ty p e th a t c a n d e fe a t a
in t h e c a s e o f s o m e l i t h i u m
-
s h a ll
re a s o n a b ly
safeguard
(fo r e x a m p le ,
ty p e s );
a
hot oven,
or
m e c h a n ic a lly
c ru s h in g
or
c u ttin g
of a
explosion;
e x tre m e ly
h ig h
te m p e ra tu re
s u rro u n d in g
e n v iro n m e n t
th a t
can
th e le a k a g e o f f la m m a b le liq u id o r g a s ; a n d
t o e x t r e m e l y l o w a i r p r e s s u r e t h a t m a y r e s u l t in a n
explosion
o r th e
le a k a g e o f f la m m a b le liq u id o r g a s .
For
e q u ip m e n t
c o n ta in in g
a
battery
instructional safeguard s h a l l b e
c o m p l e t e instructional safeguard
T h e e le m e n ts o f th e
th a t
p ro v id e d
is
re p la c e a b le
in a c c o r d a n c e
by
w ith
an
ordinary person,
C la u s e
F .5 ,
an
e x c e p t th a t th e
m a y b e p r o v i d e d in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :
-
e l e m e n t s 1 a o r 1b:
n o t re q u ire d
-
e l e m e n t 2:
“ C A U T IO N ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
“ R is k o f fire o r e x p lo s io n
if t h e
b a tte ry
is r e p l a c e d
by an
in c o rre c t
ty p e ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
-
e l e m e n t 4:
o p tio n a l
Compliance is checked by inspection or by evaluation of available data provided by the
manufacturer.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
◎
IEC 62368-1:2018
Annex N
(normative)
0
Gold， platinum
Silver
Silver solder ，
austenitic stainless
steel
a>
a>
w
c
o
a>
•o
w
z
if) ^
=
E ^
•2 £
〇
>
"2 〇 .
2 a
〇
S
l
o
c
o
n
<0
〇
0 ,9
1 ,〇
1 ,0 5
1,1
1 ,1 5
1 ,2 5
1 ,3 5
1 ,4
1 ,4 5
1,6
1 ,6 5
U
175
M a g n e s iu m , m a g n e s iu m a llo y s
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
0 ,4
0 ,5
0 t5 5
0 ,6
0 ,6 5
0 ,7 5
0 ,8 5
0 ,9
0 ,9 5
1,1
1 ,1 5
1,2
1 ,2 5
Z in c , z in c a llo y s
0 ,1 5
0 ,2 5
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
0 ,4 5
0 ,5
0 ,5 5
0 ,6
0 ,8
0 ,8 5
0 ,9
1 ,0 5
1,1
1 ,1 5
1,2
0
0 ,1
0 ,1 5
0 ,2
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
0 ,4
0 ,4 5
0 ,5 5
0 ,6 5
0 ,7
0 ,7 5
0 ,9
0 ,9 5
1,0
1 ,0 5
A lu m in iu m
0
0 ,0 5
0 ,1
0 ,2
0 ,2 5
〇
,3
0 ,3 5
0 ,4 5
0 ,5 5
0 ,6
0 ,6 5
0 ,8
0 ,8 5
0 ,9
0 ,9 5
C a d m iu m on ste e l
0
0 ,0 5
0 ,1 5
0 ,2
0 ,2 5
0 ,3
0 ,4
0 ,5
0 ,5 5
0 ,6
0 ,7 5
0 ,8
0 ,8 5
0 ,9
0
0 ,1
0 ,1 5
0 ,2
0 ,2 5
0 ,3 5
0 ,4 5
0 ,5
0 ,5 5
0 ,7
0 ,7 5
0 ,8
0 ,8 5
M ild s te e l
0
0 ,0 5
〇
,1
0 ,1 5
0 ,2 5
0 ,3 5
0 ,4
0 ,4 5
0 ,6
0 ,6 5
0 ,7
0 ,7 5
D u ra lu m in
0 ,0 5
0,1
0 ,2
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
0 ,4
0 ,5 5
0 ,6
0 ,6 6
0 .7
0
0 ,0 5
0 ,1 5
0 ,2 5
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
0 ,5
0 ,5 5
0 ,6
0 ,6 5
0
0 ,1
0 ,2
0 ,2 5
0 .3
0 ,4 5
0 ,5
0 ,5 5
0 ,6
0
0,1
0 ,1 5
0 ,2
0 ,3 5
〇
,4
0 ,4 5
0 ,5
0
0 ,0 5
0,1
0 ,2 5
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
〇
0
0 ,0 5
0 ,2
0 ,2 5
0 ,3
0 ,3 5
0
0 ,1 5
0 ,2
0 ,2 5
0 ,3
0
0 ,0 5
0,1
0 ,1 5
0
0 ,0 5
07
0
0 ,0 5
〇
,2
〇
,7
C r = C h ro m iu m
0
〇
,4
,1
0 ,0 5
0
8 0 tin /2 0 z in c o n s te e l, z in c o n iro n
o r ste e l
I
303
0
〇
A lu m in iu m /m a g n e s iu m a llo y
Lead
C h r o m iu m on s te e l, s o ft
s o ld e r
C r o n Ni o n s te e l, tin o n s te e l,
12 % C r s ta in le s s s te e l
H ig h c h r o m iu m s ta in le s s s te e l
C o p p e r, c o p p e r a llo y s
S ilv e r s o ld e r, a u s te n itic s ta in le s s
s te e l
N ic k e l on s te e l
S ilv e r
R h o d iu m on s ilv e r on c o p p e r,
s ilv e r/g o ld a llo y
C arbon
G o ld , p la tin u m
C o r r o s i o n d u e t o e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l a c t i o n b e t w e e n d i s s i m i l a r m e t a l s t h a t a r e in c o n t a c t i s m i n i m i z e d i f t h e c o m b i n e d e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l p o t e n t i a l i s b e l o w a b o u t 0 , 6 V . In t h e t a b l e t h e
c o m b i n e d e le c t r o c h e m i c a l p o t e n t i a l s a re lis te d f o r a n u m b e r o f p a ir s o f m e t a l s in c o m m o n u s e ; c o m b i n a t i o n s a b o v e t h e d iv id in g lin e s h o u ld b e a v o id e d .
Copyright International Electrotechncal Commission
I
0 ,8 5
0 ,5 5
Ni = N ic k e l
Copper, copper alloys
High chromium
stainless steel
Cr on Ni on steel, tin
on steel, 12 % Cr
stainless steel
•w
s
T3
a>
Chromium on steel,
soft solder
Aluminium
re
〇
c
E
3
«
k.
3
Q
0)
0)
</>
5 〇
— O)
,8
0 ,5
0
c
o
E
3
E
TJ
Aluminium/magnesium
alloy
80 tin/20 zinc on steel,
zinc on iron or steel 1
Zinc， zinc alloys
"5
0)
c
o
IEC 2018
Magnesium,
magnesium alloys
Electrochemical potentials (V)
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex O
(normative)
Measurement of creepage distances and clearances
In t h e f o l l o w i n g
shown
is
le s s
F ig u re s 0 .1
th a n
Xf
th e
to 0 . 1 6 , th e v a lu e o f X i s
d e p th
o f th e
gap
or
g i v e n in T a b l e 0 . 1 . W h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e
g ro o ve
is
d is re g a rd e d
when
m e a s u rin g
creepage distance.
If t h e r e q u i r e d m i n i m u m
clearance
is m o r e t h a n 3 m m , t h e v a l u e o f ^ i s
If t h e r e q u ir e d m in im u m
clearance
is l e s s t h a n 3 m m , t h e v a l u e o f Z is t h e s m a l l e r o f:
-
t h e r e l e v a n t v a l u e in T a b l e 0 . 1 ; o r
-
o n e th ird o f th e re q u ire d m in im u m
clearance.
Table 0.1 - Value of
久
Pollution degree
(see 5.4.1.5)
NOTE
g i v e n in T a b l e 0 . 1 .
丄
1
0 ,2 5
2
1 ,0 0
3
1 ,5 0
T h r o u g h o u t t h i s a n n e x , t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n v e n t i o n is u s e d :
c le a ra n c e
c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e p a th
ie c
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a p a ra lle l
o r c o n v e rg in g - s id e d g ro o v e o f a n y d e p th w ith w id th
le s s th a n
X
R u l e : Creepage distance a n d clearance a r e
m e a s u re d d ire c tly a c ro s s th e g ro o v e ,
mm.
Figure 0.1 - Narrow groove
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a
p a ra lle l-s id e d g ro o v e o f a n y d e p th , a n d e q u a l to or
m o re th a n
X
m m w id e .
Clearance is t h e " l i n e o f s i g h t "
Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e
R u le :
d is ta n c e .
c o n to u r o f th e
g ro ove .
Figure 0.2 - Wide groove
Clearance is t h e 丨M ine o f s i g h t "
Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a
R u le :
V - s h a p e d g ro o v e w ith an in te rn a l a n g le o f le s s th a n
8 0° a n d a w id th g re a te r th a n X m m .
g ro o v e b u t "s h o rt-c irc u its " th e b o tto m o f th e g ro o v e by
X
d is ta n c e .
c o n to u r o f th e
m m lin k.
Figure 0.3 - V-shaped groove
U n c o n n e c te d c o n d u c tiv e part
C o n d itio n : In s u la tio n d is ta n c e w ith in te rv e n in g ,
u n c o n n e c te d c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.
Clearance
distance is a l s o
R u le :
s m a lle r th a n
X
is t h e d i s t a n c e
十
d
+
I ) %creepage
D . W h e r e t h e v a l u e o f J o r D is
m m it s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a s z e r o .
Figure 0.4 - Intervening unconnected conductive part
IEC
C o n d it io n : P a th u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n i n c l u d e s a rib .
Clearance is t h e s h o r t e s t d i r e c t a i r p a t h
o f t h e r i b . Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s
R u le :
to p
c o n t o u r o f th e rib .
Figure 0.5 - Rib
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
o v e r th e
th e
旧C
<^Tmm — ►!—
— k—
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
— ►!—
— N— <^Tmm
ie c
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s an
u n c e m e n te d jo in t w ith g ro o v e s le s s th a n
o n e ith e r s id e .
X
m m w id e
R u le :
Clearance
and
creepage distance
p a t h is t h e
"lin e o f s ig h t" d is ta n c e s h o w n ,
Figure 0.6 - Uncemented joint with narrow groove
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s an
u n c e m e n te d jo in t w ith a g ro o v e e q u a l to o r m o re th a n
Clearance i s t h e .’ l i n e o f s i g h t "
Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e
X
g ro ove .
m m w id e e a c h s id e .
R u le :
d is ta n c e .
c o n to u r o f th e
Figure 0.7 - Uncemented joint with wide groove
C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s an
u n c e m e n te d jo in t w ith g ro o v e s o n o n e s id e le s s th a n
X
R u l e : Clearance a n d
shown.
creepage distance
m m w id e , a n d a g ro o v e on th e o th e r e q u a l to o r m o re
th a n
X
m m w id e .
Figure 0.8 - Uncemented joint with narrow and wide grooves
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
p a th a re as
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
IEC
G a p b e tw e e n h e a d o f s c r e w a n d w a ll o f r e c e s s to o n a r r o w to b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
W h e r e t h e g a p b e t w e e n th e h e a d o f t h e s c r e w a n d th e w a l l o f r e c e s s is s m a l l e r t h a n
X
m m , th e m e a s u r e m e n t of
c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e is m a d e f r o m t h e s c r e w t o t h e w a l l a t t h e p l a c e w h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e i s e q u a l t o
F igure 0 .9 - N arrow recess
—►
k —
—^
_—
^A^mm
> ^fm m
•
IEC
G a p b e tw e e n h e a d o f s c r e w a n d w a ll o f r e c e s s w id e e n o u g h to be ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.
F igure 0 .1 0 - W ide recess
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
X
mm.
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
S e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e
T e r m in a l p in
b e fo re coatin g
C o a tin g a cc o rd in g
Clearance
a c c o rd in g to 6 . 1 3 . 3
to G .1 3 .3
a c c o rd in g to 5.4.2
a n d T a b l e G . 13
Creepage distance
a c c o r d i n g to 5 . 4 . 3
M e ta l ca n
iec
Figure 0.11 - Coating around terminals
C o m p o n e n t p in
C o p p e r tra ck
Clearance a c c o r d i n g t o 5 . 4 . 2
Creepage d i s t a n c e a c c o r d i n g
to 5.4.3
C o a tin g
C o a tin g
>
P rin te d w irin g s u b s tra te
S e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e b e fo re
c o a tin g a c c o r d in g to G .1 3 .3
a n d T a b l e G . 13
IEC
Figure 0.12 - Coating over printed wiring
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
P o i n t X is u s e d f o r m e a s u r e m e n t s o f c l e a r a n c e s a n d c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e s
f r o m t h e o u t e r s u r f a c e o f a n e n c l o s u r e o f i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l t o a n in t e r n a l
c o n d u c tiv e part at E S 3 o r ES 3
Figure 0.13 - Example of measurements in an enclosure of insulating material
See 5 .4 4 .5
//
U
■一 •
一
/
一
m s u ia im g la m ina te
I
-
5〇
〇
〇
1
|
---------------------- 一
!一
■
二 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , --------------- j-- - - - - - - - - - - - \~ ~ « ：- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
x x x x x x x x x > o c ^
x j C o n d u c tiv e
C o n d u c tiv e
In s u la tin g _
_
part 2
•p Part 1
c o m p o u n d >〇 〇 ^ < $ 〇 <
V x x x Xa ^
<x
XXXXXXH
5ooooool
■
4
—
= In su la tin a la m in a te
—
\
\
IEC
Figure 0.14 - Cemented joints in multi-layer printed boards
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018
D is ta n c e th ro u g h
in s u la tio n ,
In s u la tin g c a s in g
se e 5.4.4.2
In s u la tin g c o m p o u n d
C e m e n te d jo in t
s e e 5.4.4.5
C o n n e c tio n 1
C o n n e c tio n 2
ie c
Figure 0.15 - Device filled with insulating compound
S e e 5 .4 .4 .5
S e e 5 .4 .4 .3
A d h e s iv e or
Figure 0.16 - Partitioned bobbin
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
- 311 -
Annex P
(normative)
Safeguards against conductive objects
P.1
General
T h is a n n e x s p e c ifie s
c h e m ic a l re a c tio n
or
due
to
safeguards
to re d u c e th e
lik e lih o o d
o f fire , e le c tr ic s h o c k a n d
d u e to th e e n try o f o b je c ts th ro u g h to p o r s id e o p e n in g s
s p illa g e
of
in te rn a l
liq u id s ,
or
th e
fa ilu re
of
m e ta lliz e d
a d v e rs e
in t h e e q u i p m e n t ,
c o a tin g s
and
a d h e s iv e s
s e c u rin g c o n d u c tiv e p a rts in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t.
The
basic safeguard
in s e rt
a
fo re ig n
a g a in s t e n try o f a fo re ig n
o b je c t
in to
th e
e q u ip m e n t.
o b j e c t is t h a t p e r s o n s
The
safeguards
a re
s p e c ifie d
n o t e x p e c te d
in
th is
annex
to
a re
supplementary safeguards.
T h is a n n e x d o e s n o t a p p ly to o p e n in g s th a t a re p a r ts o f c o n n e c t o r s .
F o r e q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’ s i n s t r u c t i o n s , t o b e u s e d in m o r e t h a n
o n e o rie n ta tio n , th e
For
safeguards
transportable equipment,
s h a ll b e e ffe c tiv e fo r e a c h s u c h o r ie n ta tio n .
safeguards
th e
s h a ll b e e f f e c t iv e f o r a ll o r ie n t a t io n s .
NOTE
T h e e x a m p le s o f F ig u re P . 1 ， F ig u re P .2 a n d F ig u re P .3 a re n o t
d ra w in g s b u t a re o n ly s h o w n to illu s tra te th e in te n t o f th e s e r e q u ire m e n ts .
P.2
in te n d e d
to
be
used
as
e n g in e e rin g
Safeguards against entry or consequences of entry of a foreign object
P.2.1
General
E q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f P .2 .2 o r w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f P .2 .3 .
P.2.2
Safeguards against entry of a foreign object
O p e n i n g s in t h e t o p a n d s i d e s o f a n
accessible enclosure
s h a ll b e s o lo c a te d o r c o n s tr u c te d
to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d th a t a fo r e ig n o b je c t w ill e n te r th e o p e n in g s .
E q u ip m e n t
o p e n in g s
s h a ll
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
re q u ire m e n ts
s p e c ifie d
b e lo w
when
th e
d o o rs,
p a n e l s , a n d c o v e r s , e t c . , a r e c l o s e d o r in p l a c e . T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p l y t o o p e n i n g s
lo c a te d
b e h in d
d o o rs,
p a n e ls ,
co ve rs,
e tc .,
even
if t h e y
can
be
opened
or
re m o ve d
by
an
ordinary person.
A n y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g c o n s tr u c tio n s a re c o n s id e re d to c o m p ly :
-
o p e n i n g s t h a t d o n o t e x c e e d 5 m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ;
-
o p e n i n g s th a t d o n o t e x c e e d
-
o p e n i n g s th a t m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IP 3 X ;
-
t o p o p e n i n g s in w h i c h v e r t i c a l e n t r y is p r e v e n t e d ( s e e F i g u r e P .1 f o r e x a m p l e s ) ;
-
si de
o p e n in g s
p ro v id e d
w ith
1 m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h ;
lo u v re s
th a t
a re
shaped
to
d e fle c t
o u tw a rd s
an
e x te rn a l
v e r tic a lly fa llin g o b je c t (s e e F ig u re P .2 fo r e x a m p le s ) ;
-
si de o p e n in g s
w ith o u t lo u v re s w h e re th e
enclosure
th a n th e v e rtic a l d im e n s io n o f th e o p e n in g .
Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th ic k n e s s
a t th e
o p e n in g
is n o t l e s s
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
S la n te d o p e n in g s
Figure P.1 - Examples of cross-sections of designs
of top openings which prevent vertical entry
O u tw a rd p ro je ctio n s
In w ard p ro je c tio n s
ie c
Figure P.2 - Examples of cross-sections of designs
of side opening louvres which prevent vertical entry
P.2.3
Safeguards against the consequences of entry of a foreign object
P.2.3.1
Safeguard requirements
T h e e n tr y o f a fo r e ig n o b je c t s h a ll n o t d e fe a t a n
equipment reinforced safeguard.
Safeguards
-
a n in te rn a l b a rrie r th a t p re v e n ts a fo re ig n o b je c t fro m
d e fe a tin g a n
equipment safeguard
PIS;
w i t h i n t h e p r o j e c t e d v o l u m e a s d e p i c t e d in F i g u r e P . 3 t h e r e a r e
safeguard,
•
n o b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o f a
•
no
•
n o b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o f E S 3 o r P S 3 c irc u its , o r
•
o n ly c o n d u c tiv e p a rts c o v e r e d w ith c o n fo r m a l o r o th e r s im ila r c o a tin g s ;
NOTE 1
-
or an
a g a in s t th e c o n s e q u e n c e s o f e n try o f fo re ig n o b je c ts in c lu d e th e fo llo w in g :
o r c re a tin g a
-
F u rth e rm o re ,
equipment supplementary safeguard
t h e o b j e c t s h a l l n o t c r e a t e a PIS.
PIS,
or
or
be
bare
c o n d u c t i v e p a r ts . A c o n f o r m a l c o a t i n g is a d i e l e c t r i c m a t e r i a l d e p o s i t e d o n a p r i n t e d c i r c u i t b o a r d
c o m p o n e n t s in o r d e r t o p r o t e c t t h e m a g a i n s t m o i s t u r e , d u s t , c o r r o s i o n a n d o t h e r e n v i r o n m e n t a l s t r e s s e s .
and
within
C o n d u c tiv e
th e
p a rts
p ro je c te d
covered
v o lu m e
w ith
as
c o n fo rm a l
d e p ic te d
o r o th e r s im ila r c o a tin g s
in
F ig u re P .3 ,
P S 3 s u b je c te d to th e te s ts o f P .2 .3 .2 .
O t h e r c o n s t r u c t io n s s h a ll b e s u b je c t to th e te s t o f P .2 .3 .2 .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
b a re
are
n o t c o n s id e re d
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
to
at
ES3
or
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
-313-
O u ts id e
Key
A
enclosure
B
v e rtic a l p ro je c tio n o f th e o u te r e d g e s o f th e o p e n in g
C
in c lin e d lin e s th a t p ro je c t a t a 5° a n g le fro m th e e d g e s o f th e o p e n in g to p o in ts lo c a te d E d is ta n c e fro m B
D
l i n e t h a t is p r o j e c t e d s t r a i g h t d o w n w a r d in t h e s a m e p l a n e a s t h e
E
p r o j e c t i o n o f t h e o u t e r e d g e o f t h e o p e n i n g ( B ) a n d t h e i n c l i n e d l in e ( C ) ( n o t to b e g r e a t e r t h a n L)
L
m a x im u m d im e n s io n o f th e
V
p ro je c te d (k e e p -o u t) v o lu m e fo r
o p e n in g
enclosure
enclosure
s id e w a ll
o p e n in g
supplementary safeguards
or
reinforced safeguards
Figure P.3 - Internal volume locus for foreign object entry
For
transportable equipment,
if th e d e s ig n d o e s n o t p r e v e n t th e e n tr y o f a fo r e ig n o b je c t, th e
o b j e c t is c o n s i d e r e d t o m o v e t o a n y p l a c e w i t h i n
v o l u m e in F i g u r e P . 3 is n o t a p p l i c a b l e t o
For
transportable equipment
p re v e n t th e e n try o f a fo re ig n
c o n d u c tiv e
p a rts
of ES3
th e e q u ip m e n t. T h e
ES3 and
P S 3 k e e p -o u t
transportable equipment.
w it h m e t a l li z e d p la s t ic p a r t s a n d t h e lik e , if t h e d e s ig n d o e s n o t
o b je c t, th e d is ta n c e
or PS3
s h a ll
b e a t le a s t
b e tw e e n
th e
m e ta lliz e d
p a rts a n d
13 m m . A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e
a ll b a r e
m e ta lliz e d
p a rts
a n d th e b a re c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll b e te s te d b y s h o rtin g .
NOTE 2
E x a m p le s o f m e ta lliz e d
b a rrie rs o r m e ta lliz e d
enclosures
in c lu d e th o s e m a d e o f c o n d u c tiv e c o m p o s ite
m a te r ia ls o r m a te r ia ls th a t a re e le c tr o p la te d , v a c u u m - d e p o s ite d , fo il lin e d o r p a in te d w ith m e ta llic p a in t.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement, and where necessary by the test of
P.2.3.2.
P.2.3.2
Consequence of entry test
An attempt shall be made to short all bare conductive parts of ES3 or PS3 within volume Vf
Figure P.3, along a direct straight path to all other bare conductive parts and to all metallized
parts within a 13 mm radius. The attempt of shorting is made by means o f a straight metal
object， 1 mm in diameter and having any length up to 13 mmf applied without appreciable
force.
For tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t, the attempt of shorting shall be at all places where the foreign
object could lodge.
During and after the tests, all s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd s and re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd s shall
be effective, and no part shall become a PIS.
P.3
Safeguards against spillage of internal liquids
P.3.1
The
General
re q u ire m e n ts
m a y d e fe a t a n y
s p e c ifie d
b e lo w
a p p ly to
e q u ip m e n t w ith
in te rn a l
liq u id s
w h e re
t h a t liq u id
equipment safeguard.
T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n ts d o n o t a p p ly to :
-
l i q u i ds th a t a re n o n -c o n d u c tiv e , n o n -fla m m a b le , n o n -to x ic , a n d n o n -c o rro s iv e , a n d a re n o t
in a p r e s s u r i z e d c o n t a i n e r ;
-
e l e c t r o l y t i c c a p a c ito rs ;
-
l i q u i ds w ith v is c o s ity o f 1 P a s o r m o re ; a n d
-
batteries
NOTE
P.3.2
( s e e A n n e x M ).
V i s c o s i t y o f 1 P a s is a p p r o x i m a t e l y e q u i v a l e n t to 6 0 w e i g h t m o t o r o il.
Determination of spillage consequences
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is n o t
transportable equipment,
liq u id s h a ll b e a llo w e d to le a k fro m
If t h e
e q u ip m e n t
is
th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e e n e r g iz e d , a n d th e
p i p i n g c o n n e c t o r s a n d s i m i l a r j o i n t s in t h e l i q u i d s y s t e m .
transportable equipment,
th e n ,
fo llo w in g
in tro d u c tio n
o f th e
le a k ,
th e
e q u i p m e n t s h a ll b e m o v e d to a ll p o s s ib l e p o s it io n s a n d t h e n e n e r g i z e d .
P.3.3
Spillage safeguards
If t h e s p i l l a g e m a y r e s u l t in a
-
t he v e s s e l s e rv in g
conditions,
and
single fault condition
n o t c o v e r e d b y C la u s e B .4 , th e n :
basic safeguard s h a l l a l l o w n o s p i l l a g e
supplementary safeguard ( f o r e x a m p l e ,
as a
th e
under
normal operating
a
b a rrie r
or
d rip
s u p p le m e n t a r y c o n ta in m e n t v e s s e l, e tc .) s h a ll e ffe c tiv e ly lim it th e
sp re a d
o f th e
pan
or
s p illa g e ;
or
-
t h e l i q u i d s h a l l b e c o n t a i n e d in a v e s s e l c o m p r i s i n g a
-
t he
c o n ta in m e n t v e s s e l
safeguard
s h a ll
c o m p ris e
a
reinforced safeguard;
double safeguard
or
or a
reinforced
safeguard.
If t h e liq u id is c o n d u c t i v e , f l a m m a b l e , t o x i c , o r c o r r o s i v e , t h e n :
-
t h e l i q u i d s h a l l b e c o n t a i n e d in a
-
f o l l o w i n g th e s p illa g e :
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
double safeguard
or a
reinforced safeguard;
or
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
•
a to x ic liq u id s h a ll n o t b e
•
a c o n d u c tiv e
or a
•
liq u id
-315accessible
s h a ll n o t b r id g e
reinforced insulation,
a fla m m a b le
liq u id
to
a
ordinary persons
basic insulation,
a
or
instructed persons,
and
supplementary insulation
and
( o r its v a p o u r ) s h a ll n o t c o n t a c t a n y
PIS
o r p a rts a t a te m p e ra tu re
th a t m a y ig n ite th e liq u id , a n d
•
a c o r r o s iv e liq u id s h a ll n o t c o n ta c t a n y c o n n e c tio n o f a
protective conductor.
A v e s s e l t h a t m e e t s t h e r e l e v a n t t e s t r e q u i r e m e n t s o f C l a u s e G . 1 5 is c o n s i d e r e d t o c o m p r i s e a
reinforced safeguard.
NOTE
-
T h e fo llo w in g liq u id s a re g e n e r a lly c o n s id e r e d n o n -fla m m a b le :
O i l o r e q u i v a l e n t l i q u i d s u s e d f o r l u b r i c a t i o n o r in a h y d r a u l i c s y s t e m
h a v in g a fla s h p o in t o f 1 4 9 °C o r h ig h e r;
or
-
R e p le n is h a b le liq u id s s u c h a s p rin tin g in k s h a v in g a fla s h p o in t o f 6 0 °C o r h ig h e r.
P.3.4
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection or available data, and where necessary, by the relevant
tests.
During and after the tests, all s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd s and re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd s shall
be effective， and no part shall become a PIS.
P.4
Metallized coatings and adhesives securing parts
P.4.1
The
General
m e ta lliz e d
c o a tin g
a n d a d h e s iv e s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te
b o n d in g
p ro p e r tie s th r o u g h o u t th e
life o f t h e e q u ip m e n t .
Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of the available data. If such
data is not available, compliance is checked by the tests of P.4.2.
For metallized coatings, cle a ra n ce s and creepage d is ta n c e s for p o llu tio n degree 3 shall be
maintained instead of the tests of P.4.2.
P.4.2
Tests
A sample of the equipment or a subassembly of the equipment containing parts having
metallized coating and the parts joined by adhesive is evaluated with the sample placed with
the part secured by adhesive on the underside.
Condition the sample in an oven at a temperature Tc for the specified duration (eight weeks,
three weeks or one week) as follows:
In case the value for TA ^ 10 - Ts is negative, the value will be replaced by zero,
where:
Tc
is the conditioning temperature;
Tr
is the rated conditioning temperature value o f (82 土 2) °C for eight weeks; (90
for three weeks; or (100 ± 2) °C (for one week) as applicable;
Ta
is the temperature of the coating or the part under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s (see
B.2.6.1);
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
土
2) °C
旧C
Ts
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
= 82.
NOTE 1
F o r e x a m p l e f o r e i g h t w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 0 ° C , t h e n t h e r A + 10 -
1 0 - 8 2 = - 2 , t h e n t h i s - 2 is i g n o r e d . T h e m i n i m u m
°C.
c o n d itio n in g te m p e ra tu re re m a in s 8 2
c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 0 ° C , t h e n th e r A + 1 0 -
= 70 +
A ls o , fo r th re e w e e k
Ts = 7 0 + 1 0 - 8 2 = - 2 , t h e n t h i s - 2 i s i g n o r e d .
T h e m i n i m u m c o n d i t i o n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s 9 0 ° C . A l s o , f o r o n e w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , i f t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is
7 0 °C , th e n th e r A + 10 -
r s = 7 0 + 1 0 - 8 2 = - 2 , t h e n t h i s - 2 is i g n o r e d . T h e m i n i m u m
c o n d itio n in g te m p e ra tu re
r e m a in s 1 0 0 °C.
NOTE 2
F o r e x a m p l e f o r e i g h t w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 5 ° C , t h e n t h e r A + 10 -
r s = 75 +
10 - 8 2 = + 3, t h e m i n i m u m c o n d i t i o n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e b e c o m e s 8 2 + 3 = 8 5 ° C . A l s o , f o r t h r e e w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if
th e
a c tu a l
te m p e ra tu re
is 7 5
° C f th e n
th e
rA +
10 -
r s = 75
+
10 - 8 2
= + 3 ? th e n
th e
m in im u m
c o n d itio n in g
t e m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s 9 0 + 3 = 9 3 ° C . A l s o , f o r o n e w e e k c o n d i t i o n i n g , if t h e a c t u a l t e m p e r a t u r e is 7 5 ° C , t h e n th e
r A + 10 -
Ts = 7 5 + 1 0 - 8 2 = + 3 , t h e n t h e m i n i m u m c o n d i t i o n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s 1 0 0 + 3 = 1 0 3 ° C .
NOTE 3
T h e t a b l e b e l o w g i v e s t h e s u m m a r y o f t h e r e s u l t s in N O T E 1 a n d N O T E 2 :
T ^ I O - T g
7，
c =
7 ' r + 7 'a + 1 〇 -
70
8 2 (8 w e e k s )
82
70 + 10 - 82 = - 2
82 + 0 = 82
70
9 0 (3 w e e k s )
82
7 0 + 10 - 8 2 = - 2
90 + 0 = 90
70
1 0 0 (1 w e e k )
82
70 + 10 - 82 = - 2
100 + 0 = 100
75
8 2 (8 w e e k s )
82
75 + 10 - 82 = +3
82 + 3 = 85
75
9 0 (3 w e e k s )
82
75
90
75
1 0 0 (1 w e e k )
82
75 + 10 - 82 = +3
十
10 _ 82 = +3
十
7 's
3 = 93
100 + 3 = 103
Upon completion of the temperature conditioning， subject the sample to the following:
-
remove the sample from oven and leave it at any convenient temperature between 20 °C
and 30 °C for a minimum of 1 h;
-
pl ace the sample in a freezer at -4 0 °C ± 2 °C for a minimum of 4 h;
-
remove and allow the sample to come to any convenient temperature between 20 °C and
30 °C for a minimum of 8 h;
-
pl ace the sample in a cabinet at 91 % to 95 % relative humidity for 72 h at any convenient
temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C;
-
remove the sample and leave it at any convenient temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C
for a minimum of 1 h;
-
pl ace the sample in an oven at the temperature used for the temperature conditioning (Tc)
for a minimum of 4 h; and
-
remove the sample and allow it to reach any convenient temperature between 20 °C; and
30 °C for a minimum of 8 h.
The sample is then immediately subjected to the tests of Annex T according to 4.4.3.
With the concurrence of the manufacturer, the above time durations may be extended.
After the above tests:
-
a metallized coating or a part secured by adhesive shall not fall off or partly dislodge;
-
a metallized coating shall be subjected to the abrasion resistance test o f G .13.6.2. After
the abrasion resistance test， the coating shall have not loosened and no particles shall
become loose from the coating; and
-
enc l os ur e parts serving as s a fe g u a rd s shall comply with all the applicable requirements
for e n clo su re s.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex Q
(normative)
Circuits intended for interconnection with building wiring
Q_1
Limited power source
Q.1.1
Requirements
A lim ite d p o w e r s o u r c e s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :
a)
t h e o u t p u t i s i n h e r e n t l y l i m i t e d in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h T a b l e Q . 1 ; o r
b)
lin e a r o r n o n -lin e a r im p e d a n c e
lim its th e
o u t p u t in c o m p l i a n c e
w ith
T a b le Q .1 .
If a P T C
d e v i c e is u s e d , it s h a l l :
c)
1)
p a s s t h e t e s t s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e s 1 5 , 1 7 , J . 1 5 a n d J . 1 7 o f I E C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 : 2 0 1 3 ; o r
2)
m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 fo r a d e v ic e p ro v id in g T y p e 2 .A L a c tio n ;
a r e g u l a t i n g n e t w o r k l i m i t s t h e o u t p u t in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h T a b l e Q . 1 , b o t h w i t h a n d w i t h o u t
a s i m u l a t e d s i n g l e f a u l t ( s e e C l a u s e B . 4 ) , in t h e r e g u l a t i n g n e t w o r k ( o p e n c i r c u i t o r s h o r t c irc u it); o r
d)
an
o ve rcu rre n t
p ro te c tiv e
d e v ic e
is
used
and
th e
o u tp u t
is
lim ite d
in
c o m p lia n c e
w ith
is u s e d , it s h a l l b e a f u s e o r a n o n - a d j u s t a b l e ,
non­
T a b le Q .2 ; o r
e)
a n IC c u r r e n t l im it e r c o m p ly i n g w it h C la u s e G .9 .
W h e re
a n o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e
d e v ic e
a u to re s e t, e le c tr o m e c h a n ic a l d e v ic e .
Q.1.2
Test method and compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement and, where appropriate, by
examination of the manufacturer’s data for b a tte rie s. B a tte rie s shall be fully charged when
conducting the measurements for Uoc and I sc according to Table Q.1 and Table Q.2. The
maximum power shall be considered， such as from a b a tte ry and from a m a in s circuit.
The non-capacitive load referenced in footnotes b and c of Table Q.1 and Table Q.2 is
adjusted to develop maximum current and maximum power transfer in turn. S in g le fa u lt
c o n d itio n s are applied in a regulating network according to Clause Q.1.1, item c) while under
these maximum current and power conditions.
Table Q.1 - Limits for inherently limited power sources
Output voltage
a
U〇
c
V AC
^
〇
Apparent power c d
A
VA
< 8 ,0
< 100
V DC
c ^ 30
30
—
U〇 c： O u t p u t
Output current b d
，sc
3〇 <
v o lta g e m e a s u re d
6〇
< 1瞻
〇c
S
< 100
in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h B . 2 . 3 w i t h a l l l o a d c i r c u i t s d i s c o n n e c t e d . V o l t a g e s a r e f o r
s u b s ta n tia lly s in u s o id a l A C a n d rip p le fre e D C F o r n o n - s in u s o id a l A C a n d D C w ith rip p le g r e a te r th a n 10 % o f
th e p e a k , th e p e a k v o lta g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 4 2 ,4 V.
b
/ $ c ：
M a x im u m o u tp u t c u rr e n t w ith a n y n o n -c a p a c itiv e lo a d , in c lu d in g a s h o rt-c irc u it
c
S
d
M e a sure m e nt o f /
(V A ): M a x im u m o u tp u t V A w ith a n y n o n - c a p a c itiv e lo a d .
and
S are
m a d e 5 s a f t e r a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e lo a d if p r o t e c t i o n is b y a n e l e c t r o n i c c i r c u i t a n d
6 0 s in c a s e o f a P T C d e v i c e o r in o t h e r c a s e s .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table Q.2 - Limits for power sources not inherently limited
(overcurrent protective device required)
Output voltage
Output
current b d
a
^oc
2〇 <
V AC
V DC
< 20
< 20
U〇c ^
30 <
一
U〇c：O u t p u t
A
v o lta g e
VA
A
< 5 ,0
20 <
30
S
Current rating of
overcurrent
protective device e
Apparent
power c d
30
U〇c <
< 1
o o o /u nr
oc
^ 250
< 1 _ oc
60
< 1 0 0 / [ / 〇c
m e a s u r e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h B . 2 . 3 w i t h a l l l o a d c i r c u i t s d i s c o n n e c t e d . V o l t a g e s a r e f o r
s u b s ta n tia lly s in u s o id a l A C
and
rip p le fre e
DC
F o r n o n -s in u s o id a l A C
and fo r DC
w ith
rip p le g re a te r th a n
10 % o f th e p e a k , th e p e a k v o lta g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 4 2 ,4 V.
b
M a x im u m o u tp u t c u rre n t w ith
a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .
/ s c ：
S
any
n o n -c a p a c itiv e
lo a d ,
in c lu d in g
a
s h o rt-c irc u it,
m easured
60 s a fte r
(V A ): M a x im u m o u tp u t V A w ith a n y n o n - c a p a c itiv e lo a d m e a s u r e d 6 0 s a fte r a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .
C urrent
lim itin g
im p e d a n c e s
in
th e
e q u ip m e n t
re m a in
in
th e
c irc u it d u rin g
m e a s u re m e n t,
but overcurrent
p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s a re b y p a s s e d .
T h e r e a s o n f o r m a k i n g m e a s u r e m e n t s w it h o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s b y p a s s e d is to d e t e r m i n e th e
a m o u n t o f e n e r g y t h a t is a v a i l a b l e to c a u s e p o s s i b l e o v e r h e a t i n g d u r i n g t h e o p e r a t i n g t i m e o f t h e o v e r c u r r e n t
p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s .
T h e c u rre n t ra tin g s o f o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s a re b a s e d on fu s e s a n d c irc u it b re a k e rs th a t b re a k th e
c i r c u i t w i t h i n 1 2 0 s w i t h a c u r r e n t e q u a l t o 2 1 0 % o f t h e c u r r e n t r a t i n g s p e c i f i e d in t h e t a b l e .
Q.2
Test for external circuits - paired conductor cable
Equipment supplying power to an external c irc u it paired conductor cable intended to be
connected to the building wire shall be checked as follows.
If current limiting is due to the inherent impedance of the power source, the output current into
any resistive load， including a short-circuit， is measured. The current limit shall not be
exceeded after 60 s o f test.
If current limiting is provided by an overcurrent protective device having a specified
time/current characteristic:
-
the time/current characteristic shall show that a current equal to 110 % of the current limit
will be interrupted within 60 min; and
-
the output current into any resistive load, including a short-circuit, with the overcurrent
protective device bypassed， measured after 60 s of test， shall not exceed 1 000/U where U
is the output voltage measured in accordance with B.2.3 with all load circuits
disconnected.
If current limiting is provided by an overcurrent protective device that does not have a
specified time/current characteristic:
-
the output current into any resistive load， including a short-circuit, shall not exceed the
current limit after 60 s o f test; and
-
the output current into any resistive load, including a short-circuit, with the overcurrent
protective device bypassed, measured after 60 s of test, shall not exceed 1 000/U, where
U is the output voltage measured in accordance with B.2.3 with all load circuits
disconnected.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex R
(normative)
Limited short-circuit test
R.1
General
T h is a n n e x d o c u m e n ts th e te s t p r o c e d u r e a n d c o m p lia n c e c rite ria fo r th e lim ite d
te s t. T h is te s t d e m o n s tra te s th a t a
b y a d e v ic e
th e
h a v in g
o ve rcu rre n t
a ra tin g
p ro te c tiv e
protective bonding conductor,
s h o rt-c irc u it
u s e d in c i r c u i t s p r o t e c t e d
n o t e x c e e d i n g 2 5 A , is s u i t a b l e f o r t h e f a u l t c u r r e n t p e r m i t t e d
d e v ic e ,
and
in
d o in g
so,
te s ts
th e
in te g rity
of a
by
supplementary
safeguard.
R.2
Test setup
The source used to conduct the limited short-circuit test shall be short-circuited at its output
terminals and the current measured to ensure that it can supply at least 1 500 A. This can be
an AC wall socket, generator， power supply or battery.
If the overcurrent protective device is pmvided in the equipment， then this is used for the test.
For AC sources where only one overcurrent protective device is provided in the equipment
and the plug is non-polarisedf the protective device in the building installation is used for the
test and the internal overcurrent protective device is by-passed. The manufacturer shall
specify the device used for the test in the equipment safety instructions.
Where there is no protective device present in the equipment， a suitable overcurrent
protective device shall be chosen. This overcurrent protective device shall be such that it
does not interrupt the fault current before half a cycle has passed. The overcurrent protective
device in the building installation for AC sources, or that specified to be provided externally to
the equipment for DC sources, is used for the test. The manufacturer shall then specify the
device used to conduct the test in the equipment safety instructions.
R.3
Test method
The source shall be applied to the EUT via the m a in s cord supplied or specified by the
equipment manufacturer. Where there is no m a in s cord supplied or specified, a i m length of
2,5 mm2 or 12 AWG shall be used. For DC sources， the cable shall be sized for the maximum
ra te d c u rre n t of the equipment.
To conduct this test a short-circuit in the equipment to the earth connection of the equipment
shall be introduced. The point at which this is done is depending on the equipment. After
consideration o f the equipment construction and circuit diagrams, the short-circuit shall be
introduced between the phase conductor， at the point nearest to the input (the point of lowest
impedance), and the protective bonding path under consideration. There may be more than
one point at which this short-circuit may be applied to determine the worst case.
The p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r is connected to a source capable of supplying an AC or
DC current， as appropriate to the EUT， of 1 500 A under short-circuit conditions， and using a
source voltage equal to the ra te d v o lta g e or any voltage within the ra te d v o lta g e range of
the equipment. In cases where the prospective short-circuit current seen by the equipment is
known, then the source used for test shall be able to supply that current under short-circuit
conditions. The manufacturer shall state the prospective short-circuit current that has been
used in the evaluation in the safety instructions. The overcurrent protective device protecting
the circuit under consideration (in accordance with Clause R.2) is kept in series with the
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r. The power supply cord, if provided or specified, shall remain
connected when conducting the test.
The limited short-circuit test for p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to rs in a potted or conformally
coated assembly is conducted on a potted or coated sample.
The test is conducted two more times (for a total of three times, on a different sample unless
the manufacturer agrees to conduct the test on the same sample). The test is continued until
the overcurrent protective device operates.
R.4
Compliance criteria
At the conclusion of the test, compliance is checked by inspection as follows.
There shall be
-
no damage to the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r;
-
no
damage
to
any b a s ic
in s u la tio n ，
s u p p le m e n ta ry
in s u la tio n ， or re in fo rc e d
in s u la tio n ;
-
no reduction of c le a ra n c e s ， creepage d is ta n c e s and distances through insulation; and
一
no delamination of the printed board.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex S
(normative)
Tests for resistance to heat and fire
NOTE
T o x ic fu m e s a re g iv e n o ff d u rin g th e te s ts . T h e te s ts a re u s u a lly c a rrie d o u t e ith e r u n d e r a v e n tila te d h o o d
o r in a w e l l - v e n t i l a t e d r o o m , b u t f r e e f r o m d r a u g h t s t h a t c o u l d i n v a l i d a t e t h e t e s t s .
S.1
Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier materials of equipment
where the steady state power does not exceed 4 000 W
F ire e n c lo s u re and fire barrier materials are tested according to IEC 60695-11-5. The test is
performed on three test specimens.
The following additional requirements apply to the specified clauses of IEC 60695-11-5:2016.
Clause 6 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Test specimen
For fire e n c lo s u re s and fire barriers, each test specimen consists of either a complete fire
e n c lo s u re or fire barrier or a section of the fire e n c lo s u re or fire barrier representing the
thinnest significant wall thickness and including any ventilation opening.
Clause 7 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Flame application times
The values of duration of application of the test flame are as follows:
-
the test flame is applied for 10 s;
-
if flaming does not exceed 30 s9 the test flame is immediately reapplied for 1 min at the
same point;
-
if again flaming does not exceed 30
the same point.
s,
the test flame is immediately reapplied for 2 min at
Clause 8 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Conditioning and test conditions
Prior to being tested， the specimens are conditioned in a circulating air oven for a period of
7 days (168 h)r at a temperature 10 K higher than the maximum temperature of the part
measured during the test of 5.4.1.4 or 70 0C， whichever is the higher， and then cooled to room
temperature.
For printed boards, a preconditioning of 24 h at a temperature of 125 °C ± 2 °C in an air
circulating oven and a subsequent cooling period of 4 h at room temperature in a desiccator
over anhydrous calcium chloride is to be applied.
Subclause 9.3 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Application of needle flame
The test flame is applied to an inside surface of the test specimen at a point judged to be
likely to become ignited because o f its proximity to a source of ignition.
If a vertical part is involved, the flame is applied at an angle of approximately 45° from the
vertical.
If ventilation openings are involved， the flame is applied to an edge of an opening， otherwise
to a solid surface. In all cases， the tip of the flame is to be in contact with the test specimen.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The test is repeated on the remaining two test specimens. If any part being tested is near a
source of ignition at more than one point, each test specimen is tested with the flame applied
to a different point that is near a source of ignition.
Clause 11 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Evaluation of test results
The existing text is replaced by the following.
The test specimens shall comply with all of the following:
-
after every application o f the test flame， the test specimen shall not be consumed
completely; and
-
after any application of the test flame, any self-sustaining flame shall extinguish within
30 s; and
-
no burning of the specified layer or w ra p p in g tis s u e shall occur.
S.2
Flammability test for fire enclosure and fire barrier integrity
Compliance of fire e n c lo s u re and fire barrier integrity
IEC 60695-11-5. The test is performed on three test specimens.
is
checked
according
to
For the purpose of this document, the following additional requirements apply to the stated
clauses o f IEC 60695-11-5:2016-
Clause 6 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Test specimen
For fire e n c lo s u re s and fire barriers, each test specimen consists of either a complete fire
e n c lo s u re and fire barrier or a section of the fire e n c lo s u re and fire barrier representing the
thinnest significant wall thickness and including any ventilation opening.
Clause 7 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Flame application times
The value of duration of application of the test flame is as follows:
-
the test flame is applied for 60 s. Top openings are covered with single layer of cheese
cloth.
Clause 8 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Conditioning and test conditions
Prior to being tested， the specimens are conditioned in a circulating air oven for a period of
7 days (168 h), at a temperature 10 K higher than the maximum temperature of the part
measured during the test of 5.4.1.4 or 70 °C， whichever is the higher， and then cooled to room
temperature.
For printed boards, a preconditioning of 24 h at a temperature o f 125 °C ± 2 °C in an air
circulating oven and a subsequent cooling period of 4 h at room temperature in a desiccator
over anhydrous calcium chloride is to be applied.
Subclause 9.3 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Application of needle flame
The test flame is applied at a distance measured from the closest point of a PIS to the closest
surface point of the test specimen. The application of the flame is measured from the top of
the needle flame burner to the closest surface point, see Figure S.1.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
If a vertical part is involved or if the test specimen drips molten or flaming material during the
application o f the flame, the flame is applied at an angle of approximately 45° from the
vertical.
The test is repeated on the remaining two test specimens. If any part being tested is near a
source of ignition at more than one point, each test specimen is tested with the flame applied
to a different point that is near a source of ignition. In case o f openings having different
dimensions, the test shall be conducted on one opening of each group o f openings with the
same dimensions.
T o p s u rfa c e
Figure S.1 - Top openings / surface of fire enclosure or fire barrier
Clause 11 of IEC 60695-11-5:2016 - Evaluation of test results
The existing text is replaced by the following.
The c h e e s e c lo th
S.3
5.3.1
s h a ll n o t ig n ite .
Flammability tests for the bottom of a fire enclosure
Mounting of samples
A sample of the complete finished bottom of the fire e n c lo s u re is securely supported in a
horizontal position. A c h e e s e c lo th is placed in one layer over a shallow ， flat-bottomed pan
approximately 50 mm below the sample， and is of sufficient size to cover completely the
pattern of openings in the sample, but not large enough to catch any of the oil that runs over
the edge of the sample or otherwise does not pass through the openings.
Use of a metal screen or a wired-glass e n c lo s u re surrounding the test area is recommended.
5.3.2
Test method and compliance criteria
A small metal ladle (preferably no more than 65 mm in diameter), with a pouring lip and a long
handle whose longitudinal axis remains horizontal during pouring, is partially filled with 10 ml
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
of diesel fuel oil. The ladle containing the oil is heated and the oil ignited and allowed to burn
for 1 min, at which time all o f the hot flaming oil is poured at the rate of approximately 1 ml/s
in a steady stream onto the centre o f the pattern of openings, from a position approximately
100 mm above the openings.
NOTE
“ D i e s e l fu e l o i l ” is r e g a r d e d
to b e s im ila r to a m e d iu m
v o lu m e b e tw e e n 0 ,8 4 5 g /m l a n d 0 ,8 6 5 g /m lf a fla s h
v o la tile
p o in t b e tw e e n 4 3 ,5
d i s t i l l a t e f u e l o il h a v i n g
a m ass
p e r u n it
°C a n d 9 3 ,5 °C a n d a n a v e r a g e c a lo rific
v a lu e o f 3 8 M J/I.
The test is repeated twice at 5 min intervals, using clean ch e e se clo th .
During these tests the ch e e s e c lo th shall not ignite.
S.4
Flammability classification of materials
M a te ria ls
a re
c la s s ifie d
a c c o rd in g
to th e
b u rn in g
b e h a v io u r a n d
th e ir a b ility to
e x t i n g u i s h , if
i g n i t e d . T e s t s a r e m a d e w i t h t h e m a t e r i a l in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s u s e d .
The
h ie ra rc h ie s o f th e
T a b le
material flammability classes
a re g iv e n
in T a b l e
S.1,
T a b le
S.2
and
S.3.
Table S.1 - Foamed materials
Material flammability class
ISO standard
H F -1 r e g a r d e d b e tte r th a n HF_2
IS O 9 7 7 2
H F -2 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n H B F
IS O 9 7 7 2
HBF
IS O 9 7 7 2
Table S.2 - Rigid materials
Material flammability class
IEC standard
5 V A re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n 5 V B
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -2 0
5 V B re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n V -0
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0
V - 0 r e g a r d e d b e tt e r th a n V -1
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
V-1 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n V -2
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
V -2 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n H B 4 0
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
H B 4 0 re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n H B 7 5
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
HB75
IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 -1 0
Table S.3 - Very thin materials
Material flammability class
ISO standard
VTM-0
re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n
VTM-1
IS O 9 7 7 3
VTM-1
re g a rd e d b e tte r th a n
VTM-2
IS O 9 7 7 3
VTM-2
W hen
IS O 9 7 7 3
VTM
m a te ria ls a re
b e c o n s id e re d .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
u s e d , re le v a n t e le c tric a l a n d
m e c h a n ic a l
re q u ire m e n ts
s h o u ld
a ls o
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
W ood
V-1
and
w o o d -b a se d
m a te r ia l w ith
re q u ire m e n t. W o o d -b a s e d
a th ic k n e s s
o f a t le a s t 6 m m
m a t e r i a l is m a t e r i a l in w h i c h
th e
is c o n s i d e r e d
m a in
to fu lfil th e
i n g r e d i e n t is m a c h i n e d
n a tu ra l w o o d , c o u p le d w ith a b in d e r.
EXAMPLE
W o o d - b a s e d m a te ria ls a re m a te ria ls in c o rp o ra tin g g ro u n d o r c h ip p e d w o o d , s u c h as h a rd fib re b o a rd
o r c h ip b o a rd .
S.5
Flammability test for fire enclosure materials of equipment with a steady
state power exceeding 4 000 W
F ire e n c lo s u re materials are tested according to IEC 60695-11-20:2015, using the plate
procedure of IEC 60695-11-20:2015, 8.3.
For the purpose of this document, the following additional requirements apply to the specified
clauses o f IEC 60695-11-20:2015.
Clause 7 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Test specimen
For fire e n c lo s u re s , each test specimen consists o f either a complete fire e n c lo s u re or a
section of the fire e n c lo s u re representing the thinnest significant wall thickness and including
any ventilation opening (plate procedure).
Subclause 8.1 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Conditioning
Prior to being tested, the samples are conditioned in a circulating air oven for a period of
7 days (168 h), at a temperature 10 K higher than the maximum temperature of the part
measured during the test of 5.4.1.4 or 70 °C， whichever is the higher， and then cooled to room
temperature.
Subclause 8.3 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Plate shaped test specimens
The test flame is applied to an inside surface of the test specimen at a point judged to be
likely to become ignited because of its proximity to a source of ignition.
If a vertical part is involved, the flame is applied at an angle of approximately 20° from the
vertical.
If ventilation openings are involved, the flame is applied to an edge o f an opening, otherwise
to a solid surface. In all cases, the tip o f the flame is to be in contact with the test specimen.
The values of duration of application o f the test flame are as follows:
-
the test flame is applied for 5 s and removed for 5 s;
-
the test flame application and removal is repeated four more times at the same location
(total of five flame applications).
Subclause 8.4 of IEC 60695-11-20:2015 - Classification
The existing text is replaced by the following.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
The test specimens shall comply with all of the following:
-
after every application o f the test flame， the test specimen shall not be consumed
completely; and
-
after the fifth application o f the test flame, any flame shall extinguish within 1 min.
No burning of the specified cotton indicator shall occur.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex T
(normative)
Mechanical strength tests
T.1
In
General
g e n e ra l,
th is
annex
d e s c rib e s
a
num ber
of
te s ts
th a t
a re
in v o k e d
by
th is
d o c u m e n t.
C o m p l i a n c e c r i t e r i a a r e s p e c i f i e d in t h e c l a u s e t h a t i n v o k e s a p a r t i c u l a r te s t .
No
te s ts
a re
a p p lie d
tra n s lu c e n t c o v e rs
to
h a n d le s ,
o f in d ic a tin g
or
le v e rs ,
knobs,
m e a s u rin g
th e
d e v ic e s ,
fa c e
of
u n le s s
CRTs
p a rts
or
to
at ES3
tra n s p a re n t
a re
or
accessible
w h e n t h e h a n d l e , l e v e r , k n o b o r c o v e r is r e m o v e d .
T.2
Steady force test, 10 N
A steady force of 10 N ± 1 N is applied to the component or part under consideration for a
short time duration of approximately 5 s .
T.3
Steady force test, 30 N
The test is conducted by means of the straight unjointed version of the applicable test probe
of Figure V.1 or Figure V.2， applied with a force of 30 N ± 3 N for a short time duration of
approximately 5 s.
T.4
Steady force test, 100 N
The test is conducted by subjecting the external enclosure to a steady force of 100 N 土 10 N
over a circular plane surface 30 mm in diameter for a short time duration of approximately 5 s9
applied in turn to the top, bottom, and sides.
T.5
Steady force test, 250 N
The test is conducted by subjecting the external enclosures to a steady force of 250 N ± 10 N
over a circular plane surface 30 mm in diameter for a short time period of approximately 5 s ,
applied in turn to the top， bottom and sides.
T_6
Enclosure impact test
A sample consisting of the complete enclosure or a portion thereof, representing the largest
unreinforced area is supported in its normal position. A solid, smooth, steel sphere o f 50 mm
土 1 mm in diameter and with a mass of 500 g 土 25 g， is used to perform the following tests:
-
on horizontal surfaces, the sphere is to fall freely from rest through a vertical distance of
1 300 mm 土 10 mm onto the sample (see Figure T.1); and
-
on vertical surfaces， the sphere is suspended by a cord and swung as a pendulum in order
to apply a horizontal impact， dropping through a vertical distance of 1 300 mm ± 10 mm
onto the sample (see Figure T.1).
For evaluating a part that acts as a fire enclosure only, the test is done as above, but the
vertical distance is 410 mm ± 1 0 mm.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Alternatively horizontal impacts may be simulated on vertical or sloping surfaces by mounting
the sample at 90° to its normal position and applying the vertical impact test instead o f the
pendulum test.
S t e e l b a ll s t a r t
p ositio n
^
S t e e l ball s t a r t
positio n
S
t
a
l
l
e
e
Ibs
i
t
i
imp
lon
〇)
0
(〇
七 3 3 匚
po
0)
0
-€
p s
0133
0.
-6
)
T e s t sa m p le
S t e e l b a ll i m p a c t
p osition
R igid s u p p o rtin g s u rfa c e
R igid s u p p o rtin g s u rfa c e
//////////////
IEC
///////////////////
IEC
Figure T.1 - Impact test using sphere
T.7
Drop test
A sample of the complete equipment is subjected to three impacts that result from being
dropped onto a horizontal surface in positions likely to produce the most adverse results.
The height of the drop shall be:
- 7 5 0 mm
- 1
000
土
10 mm for desk-top equipment and m o va b le e q u ip m e n t;
mm ±
10 mm
for h a n d -h e ld
e q u ip m e n t,
d ire c t
p lu g -in
e q u ip m e n t
and
tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t;
一
350 mm
土
10 mm for a part acting as a fire e n c lo s u re only of desk-top equipment and
m o va b le e q u ip m e n t;
- 5 0 0 mm ± 1 0 mm for a part acting as a fire e n c lo s u re only of h a n d -h e ld e q uip m e nt,
d ire c t p lu g -in e q u ip m e n t and tra n s p o rta b le e q uip m e nt.
The horizontal surface consists of hardwood at least 13 mm thick, mounted on two layers of
plywood each 18 mm ± 2 mm thick, all supported on a concrete or equivalent non-resilient
floor.
T.8
Stress relief test
Stress relief is checked by the mould stress relief test o f IEC 60695-10-3 or by the test
procedure described below or by the inspection of the construction and the available data
where appropriate.
One sample consisting of the complete equipment, or of the complete e n c lo s u re together
with any supporting framework, is placed in a circulating air oven at a temperature 10 K
higher than the maximum temperature observed on the sample during the heating test of
5.4.1.4.2, but not less than 70 °C9 for a period of 7 /?, then cooled to room temperature.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
For large equipment where it is impractical to condition a complete e n clo su re , a portion of
the e n c lo s u re representative of the complete assembly with regard to thickness and shape,
including any mechanical support members, may be used.
NOTE
T.9
R e la tiv e h u m id ity n e e d n o t be m a in ta in e d a t a s p e c ific v a lu e d u rin g th is te s t.
Glass impact test
The test sample is supported over its whole area and shall be subjected to a single impact,
specified in Table T.1. The impact shall be applied in a location representing the centre o f the
glass.
The impact specified shall be caused by allowing a solid, smooth, steel ball of 50 mm ± 1 mm
in diameter and with the mass of 500 g ± 25 g to fall freely from rest through a vertical
distance not less than specified in Table T.1, as shown in Figure T.1, and strike the sample
with the specified impact in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sample.
Table T.1 - Impact force
Part
Safeguards against
Impact
Height
J
mm
3 ,5
714
U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w ，a n y g l a s s u s e d
E x p o s u re to c la s s 3 e n e rg y
a s a safeguard a g a i n s t c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s
except PS3
so urces
G la s s on flo o r s ta n d in g e q u ip m e n t
S k in -la c e ra tio n s
3 ,5
714
G l a s s o n a ll o t h e r e q u i p m e n t
S k in -la c e ra tio n s
2
408
E x p o s u re to c la s s 3 e n e rg y
1
204
0 ,5
102
L a m in a te d g la s s u s e d a s a
safeguard
a g a in s t
c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s e x c e p t PS 3
so urces
G la s s le n s e s th a t a re p ro v id e d fo r th e a tte n u a tio n
E x p o s u re to U V ra d ia tio n
o f U V ra d ia tio n
T o a p p l y t h e r e q u i r e d i m p a c t , t h e h e i g h t is c a l c u l a t e d b y H
=
/ (g x m )
w here:
H
i s t h e v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e in m e t r e s w i t h a t o l e r a n c e o f ± 1 0 m m ;
E
i s t h e i m p a c t e n e r g y in j o u l e s ;
g
is t h e g r a v i t a t i o n a l a c c e l e r a t i o n o f 9 ,8 1 m / s 2;
m
is t h e m a s s o f th e s t e e l b a ll in k i l o g r a m s .
T.10 Glass fragmentation test
The test sample is supported over its whole area and precautions shall be taken to ensure
that particles will not be scattered upon fragmentation. Then the test sample is shattered with
a centre punch placed approximately 15 mm in from the midpoint of one o f the longer edges
of the test sample. After a maximum of 5 min of fracture， and without using any aid to vision,
except spectacles if normally worn, the particles are counted in a square of 50 mm side
located approximately at the centre of the area of coarsest fracture and excluding any area
within 15 mm of any edge or hole.
The test sample shall fragment in such a way that the number of particles counted in a square
with sides o f 50 mm shall not be less than 45.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T.11 Test for telescoping or rod antennas
The end piece of telescoping or rod antennas shall be subjected to a 20 N force along the
major axis of the antenna for a period of 1 min. In addition, if the end piece is attached by
screw threads， a loosening torque is to be applied to the end pieces of five additional
samples. The torque is to be gradually applied with the rod fixed. When the specific torque is
reached, it is to be maintained for no more than 15 s. The holding time for any one sample
shall be not less than 5 s and the average holding time of the five samples shall be not less
than 8 s.
The value of torque is given in Table T.2.
Table T.2 - Torque values for end-piece test
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
End-piece diameter
Torque
mm
Nm
< 8 ,0
0 ,3
> 8 ,0
0 ,6
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex U
(normative)
Mechanical strength of CRTs and protection
against the effects of implosion
U.1
General
T h is
annex
s p e c ifie s
m e c h a n ic a l
s tre n g th
of
CRTs,
how
to
p ro te c t
a g a in s t
th e
e ffe c ts
of
im p lo s io n a n d h o w a p ro te c tiv e s c re e n c a n w ith s ta n d m e c h a n ic a l fo rc e s .
CRTs
w ith
a
m a x im u m
p ro te c te d w ith
th e
fa c e
d im e n s io n
e x c e e d in g
160 m m
s h a ll
be
e ith e r
r e s p e c t to e ffe c ts o f im p lo s io n a n d to m e c h a n ic a l im p a c t, o r th e
e q u ip m e n t s h a ll
p ro v id e
a d e q u a te
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t th e
e ffe c ts
of an
in trin s ic a lly
enclosure
im p lo s io n
of
o f th e
CRT.
T h e fa c e o f a n o n -in trin s ic a lly p ro te c te d
ca n n o t be
re m o ve d
by
hand.
C R T s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a n e ffe c tiv e s c r e e n
If a s e p a r a t e
scre e n
o f g la s s
is u s e d ,
it s h a l l
th a t
n o t c o n ta c t th e
s u rfa c e o f th e C R T .
T h e C R T , o th e r th a n th e fa c e o f a n in tr in s ic a lly p r o te c te d C R T , s h a ll n o t b e
accessible
to an
ordinary person.
A
p ro te c tiv e
film
a tta c h e d
to
th e
fa c e p la te
of
th e
p ic tu re
p r o t e c t io n s y s t e m s h a ll b e c o v e r e d o n a ll e d g e s b y t h e
enclosure
If t h e e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d w i t h a C R T w i t h p r o t e c t i v e f i l m
o f th e s a fe ty im p lo s io n
s y s te m , an
tu b e
as
p a rt
of
th e
im p lo s io n
o f th e e q u ip m e n t.
a tta c h e d to th e fa c e p la te a s p a rt
instructional safeguard
s h a ll b e p r o v id e d
in a c c o r d a n c e
w ith C la u s e F .5 :
-
e le m e n t 1a:
n o t a v a ila b le
-
e le m e n t 2:
“W a r n in g ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t
-
e l e m e n t 3:
“ R is k o f in ju r y ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
一
e le m e n t 4:
“T h e
s h a ll
CRT
in
not
be
th is
e q u ip m e n t
re m o ve d
as
uses
it
a
se rve s
p ro te c tiv e
a
s a fe ty
film
on
th e
fu n c tio n
fa c e .
and
T h is
film
re m o va l
w ill
in c r e a s e th e ris k o f in ju r y ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t
The
instructional safeguard
s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .
Compliance is checked by inspection, by measurement, and by the tests of:
-
I EC 61965 for intrinsically protected CRTs， including those having integral protective
screens;
-
Cl auses U.2 and U.3 for equipment having non-intrinsically protected CRTs; and
-
Annex V for application of probes for the e n clo su re .
N O T E 1 A p i c t u r e t u b e C R T i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e i n t r i n s i c a l l y p r o t e c t e d w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h e e f f e c t s o f i m p l o s i o n if,
w h e n i t i s c o r r e c t l y m o u n t e d , n o a d d i t i o n a l p r o t e c t i o n is n e c e s s a r y .
NOTE 2
T o f a c i l i t a t e t h e t e s t s , t h e C R T m a n u f a c t u r e r is r e q u e s t e d to i n d i c a t e t h e
C R T s to b e te s te d .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
m o s t v u ln e ra b le a re a o n th e
旧C
U.2
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Test method and compliance criteria for non-intrinsically protected CRTs
The equipment， with the CRT and the protective screen in position， is placed on a horizontal
support at a height of (750 ± 50) mm above the floor， or directly on the floor if the equipment
is obviously intended to be positioned on the floor.
The CRT is imploded inside the e n c lo s u re of the equipment by the following method.
Cracks are propagated in the envelope of each CRT. An area on the side or on the face of
each CRT is scratched with a diamond stylus and this area is repeatedly cooled with liquid
nitrogen or the like until a fracture occurs. To prevent the cooling liquid from flowing away
from the test area， a dam o f modelling clay or the like should be used.
NOTE
S u i t a b l e s c r a t c h p a t t e r n s a r e f o u n d in F i g u r e 6 o f I E C 6 1 9 6 5 : 2 0 0 3 .
After this test, within 5 s of the initial fracture, no particle (a single piece of glass having a
mass greater than 0,025 g) shall have passed a 250 mm high barrier， placed on the floor，
500 mm from the projection of the front of the equipment.
U.3
Protective screen
A p r o te c tiv e s c r e e n s h a ll b e a d e q u a t e ly s e c u r e d a n d r e s is t a n t to m e c h a n ic a l fo r c e s .
Compliance is checked by the tests o f Clause T.3, without cracking of the protective screen or
loosening o f its mounting.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex V
(normative)
Determination of accessible parts
V.1
A c c e s s ib le p arts o f e q u ip m en t
V.1.1
General
accessible
An
p a rt o f an
e q u i p m e n t is a
p u rp o s e s o f d e te rm in in g a n
accessible
p a rt th a t can
be to u c h e d
by a body
p a rt-
F o r th e
p a r t , a b o d y p a r t is r e p r e s e n t e d b y o n e o r m o r e o f th e
s p e c ifie d te s t p ro b e s .
Accessible
p a rts o f a n e q u ip m e n t m a y in c lu d e p a rts b e h in d a d o o r, p a n e l, r e m o v a b le c o v e r,
e tc . th a t c a n b e o p e n e d w ith o u t th e u s e o f a
tool.
Accessible
th a t
p a rts
do
not
in c lu d e
th o s e
becom e
accessible
when
flo o r
s ta n d in g
e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a m a s s e x c e e d i n g 4 0 k g is t i l t e d .
F o r e q u ip m e n t in t e n d e d f o r b u ild in g - in o r r a c k - m o u n t in g , o r f o r s u b a s s e m b lie s a n d th e lik e f o r
in c o rp o ra tio n
accessible
in
la rg e r
when
th e
accessible
e q u ip m e n t,
e q u ip m e n t
or
p a rts
s u b a s s e m b ly
is
do
not
in s ta lle d
in c lu d e
th o s e
a c c o rd in g
to
th a t
th e
a re
m e th o d
not
of
m o u n t i n g o r i n s t a l l a t i o n s p e c i f i e d in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .
A
p a r t is c o n s i d e r e d
th a t
a
p e rso n
w h e th e r a
V.1.2
tool
accessible
p h y s ic a lly
if th e in s tr u c tio n s o r m a r k in g s in te n d e d to b e fo llo w e d r e q u ir e
c o n ta c ts
th a t
p a rt.
T h is
a p p lie s
w ith o u t
te s t
and
irre s p e c tiv e
of
is r e q u i r e d t o g a i n a c c e s s .
Test method 1 - Surfaces and openings tested with jointed test probes
For surfaces and openings, the following jointed test probe is applied, without appreciable
force and in any possible position, to the surfaces and openings of the equipment:
-
the test probe o f Figure V. 1 for equipment that is likely to be a c c e s s ib le to children;
NOTE
1
E q u i p m e n t i n t e n d e d f o r u s e in h o m e s , s c h o o l s , p u b l i c a n d s i m i l a r l o c a t i o n s is e q u i p m e n t g e n e r a l l y
c o n s id e re d to be
-
accessible
to c h ild re n , s e e a ls o C la u s e
F.4.
the test probe of Figure V.2 for equipment that is not likely to be a c c e s s ib le to children.
Where entry behind a door, panel， removable cover， etc. is possible without the use o f a tool,
or entry is directed by manufacturer instructions or marking， with or without the use of a tool,
the test probe is applied to surfaces and openings in those areas.
Where the entire probe passes through a large opening (allowing entry of an arm but not of a
shoulder), the probe shall be applied to all parts within a hemisphere with radius of 762 mm.
The probe handle shall point along a path towards the large opening to simulate the hand on
the end of the arm extending through the large opening. The plane of the hemisphere shall be
the outside plane o f the opening. Any part outside the 762 mm radius hemisphere is deemed
not a cce ssib le .
NOTE 2
V.1.3
T h e e q u ip m e n t c a n b e d is m a n tle d to p e r fo rm th is te s t.
Test method 2 - Openings tested with straight unjointed test probes
Openings preventing access to a part by the applicable jointed test probe of Figure V.1 or
Figure V.2 are further tested by means of a straight unjointed version of the respective test
probe applied with a force of 30 N. If the unjointed probe enters the openings, test method 1
is repeated， except that the applicable jointed version of the test probe is pushed through the
opening using any necessary force up to 30 N.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
R25
IEC
T o le ra n c e s on d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
a n g le s :
土 15r
o n ra d ii:
± 0,1 m m
T o le ra n c e s on lin e a r d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
< 15 m m :
0,1 _
> 1 5 mm < 25 m m :
± 0,1 m m
> 25 mm:
土 0 ,3 m m
M a te ria l o f th e te s t p ro b e : h e a t-tre a te d s te e l, fo r e x a m p le .
Figure V.1 - Jointed test probe for equipment likely to be accessible to children
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
050
S e c tio n A -A
S e c tio n B -B
eg參
o
+i
o
CM
H a n d le
C y lin d ric a l
ie c
L i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s in m i l l i m e t r e s
T o le ra n c e s o n d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
1 4 。a n d 3 7 ° a n g l e s : 土 1 5 '
o n r a d ii: ± 0,1 m m
on lin e a r d im e n s io n s :
< 15 m m :
mm
> 15 m m < 2 5 m m :
± 0,1 m m
> 25 mm:
士 0 ,3 m m
NOTE
T h i s j o i n t e d t e s t p r o b e is t a k e n f r o m F i g u r e 2 , t e s t p r o b e B o f IE C 6 1 0 3 2 : 1 9 9 7 .
Figure V.2 - Jointed test probe for equipment not likely to be accessible to children
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
V.1.4
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
T est m ethod 3 - P lugs, ja c k s , c o n n e c to rs
The blunt probe of Figure V.3 is applied without appreciable force and in any possible position
to specified parts.
D im ensions in m illim etres
N o n - c o n d u c tiv e m a te ria l
"6 ，〇 ? ，?5
IEC
F igure V.3 - B lu n t probe
V.1.5
T e st m ethod 4 - S lo t o p e n in g s
The wedge probe of Figure V.4 is applied as specified.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
T o le ra n c e s on lin e a r d im e n s io n s w ith o u t s p e c ific to le ra n c e s :
< 25 mm:
士
0 ,1 3 m m
> 25 mm:
土
0 ,3 m m
NOTE
T h e th ic k n e s s o f th e p ro b e v a rie s lin e a rly , w ith s lo p e c h a n g e s a t th e fo llo w in g p o in ts a lo n g th e p ro b e :
Distance from probe tip
Probe thickness
mm
mm
0
2
12
4
180
24
F igure V.4 - W edge probe
V.1.6
T est m ethod 5 - T e rm in a ls in te n d e d to be used by an o rd in a ry pe rso n
The rigid test wire of the test probe of Figure V.5 is inserted into the applicable opening with a
force up to 1 N 土 0,1 N and with the length limited to 20 mm 土 0,2 mm. While inserted, the
probe is moved in any angle with minimal force.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
S p h e r e 35 ± 0,2
NOTE
T h i s p r o b e is t a k e n f r o m F i g u r e 4 o f I E C 6 1 0 3 2 : 1 9 9 7 .
F igure V.5 - T e rm in a l probe
V .2
A c c e s s ib le part c rite rio n
If a part can be touched by the specified probe, then the part is a cce ssib le .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Annex W
(in fo rm a tiv e )
C o m p a r i s o n o f t e r m s i n t r o d u c e d in t h i s d o c u m e n t
W.1
G eneral
T h is d o c u m e n t in tr o d u c e s n e w s a fe ty te r m s a s s o c ia te d w ith th e n e w s a fe ty c o n c e p ts .
T h i s a n n e x i d e n t i f i e s t h e r e l e v a n t t e r m s i n t h i s d o c u m e n t a n d , w h e r e d i f f e r e n t ，c o m p a r e t h e m
to th e e q u iv a le n t IE C /T C 6 4 3 b a s ic s a fe ty p u b lic a tio n s a n d o th e r r e le v a n t s a fe ty p u b lic a tio n s .
T e rm s
n o t in t h e t a b l e s b e l o w a r e e i t h e r t h e s a m e o r s u b s t a n t i a l l y t h e s a m e
a s in o t h e r I E C
s ta n d a rd s .
W .2
C o m p a ris o n o f te rm s
In
T a b le s
th e
W .1
to
W .6
R e m a r k s a b o u t IE C 6 2 3 6 8 -1
3
b e lo w ,
th e
te x t
q u o te d
fro m
an
IE C
s ta n d a rd
is
in
n o rm a l
fo n t.
a r e in i t a l i c f o n t .
IE C /T C 6 4 : E le c tr ic a l in s ta lla tio n s a n d p r o te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k . C lic k o n th e IE C w e b s ite fo r a lis t o f
p u b lic a tio n s is s u e d by T C 64.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table W.1 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60664-1:2007 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 60664-1:2007
IEC 62368-1
3.2
clearance
s h o rte s t
3.3.12.1
clearance
d is ta n c e
in
a ir
b e tw e e n
tw o
s h o rte s t
d is ta n c e
in
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
3.3
creepage d ista n ce
3.3.12.2
creepage d ista n ce
s h o rte s t
s o lid
d is ta n c e
a lo n g
in s u la tin g
th e
m a te ria l
s u rfa c e
of
b e tw e e n
a
tw o
s h o rte s t
d is ta n c e
in s u la tin g
p a rts
3.4
s o lid in s u la tio n
3.3.5.6
s o lid in s u la tio n
s o lid
in s u la tin g
m a te ria l in te r p o s e d
b e tw e e n
in s u la tio n
m a te ria l
3.5
w o rk in g v o lta g e
3.3.14.8
w o rk in g v o lta g e
h ig h e s t R M S v a lu e o f th e A C
a cro ss
any
p a rtic u la r
or DC
in s u la tio n
v o lta g e
w h ic h
can
h ig h e s t
v o lta g e
in s u la tio n
th a t
th e
s u rfa c e
b e tw e e n
c o n s is tin g
tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
b e tw e e n
a lo n g
m a te ria l
c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
a ir
tw o
can
of
any
occur
of
an
c o n d u c tiv e
e n tire ly
a cro ss
tw o
s o lid
p a rtic u la r
when
th e
ra te d v o lta g e
rated v o lta g e o r
a n y v o lta g e
in t h e
rated v o lta g e range
u n d e r norm al o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s
3.9
rated v o lta g e
3.3.10.4
rated v o lta g e
occur
when
v a lu e
th e
of
e q u ip m e n t
v o lta g e
m a n u fa c tu re r,
e q u ip m e n t
to
and
is
s u p p lie d
a s s ig n e d
a
by
c o m p o n e n t,
to
w h ic h
at
th e
d e v ic e
o p e ra tio n
or
and
e q u ip m e n t
v a lu e
is
of
s u p p lie d
v o lta g e
m a n u fa c tu re r
e q u ip m e n t
to
and
a
to
at
a s s ig n e d
c o m p o n e n t,
w h ic h
by
th e
d e v ic e
o p e ra tio n
p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d
p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d
3.13
p o llu tio n degree
3.3.6.8
p o llu tio n degree
n u m e ra l
c h a ra c te riz in g
th e
e x p e c te d
n u m e ra l
c h a ra c te ris in g
th e
p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v iro n m e n t
3.19.1
ty p e te s t
3.3.6.15
typ e te s t
of
one
or
m o re
d e v ic e s
m ade
to
a
te s t
on
a
re p re s e n ta tiv e
c e rta in d e s ig n to s h o w th a t th e d e s ig n m e e ts
o b je c tiv e o f d e te rm in in g
c e rta in s p e c ific a tio n s
m a n u fa c tu re d ,
it c a n
and
e x p e c te d
p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v iro n m e n t
te s t
or
s a m p le
w ith
th e
if, a s d e s i g n e d
and
m e e t th e
re q u ire m e n ts
o f th is d o c u m e n t
3.9.2
rated im p u ls e vo lta g e
3.3.14.2
m ains tra n s ie n t v o lta g e
im p u ls e w ith s ta n d v o lta g e v a lu e a s s ig n e d by
h ig h e s t p e a k v o lta g e e x p e c te d
th e
in p u t to th e e q u ip m e n t, a r is in g fr o m
p a rt
m a n u fa c tu re r
of
w ith s ta n d
it,
to
th e
c h a ra c te riz in g
c a p a b ility
th e
or
to
a
s p e c ifie d
o f its in s u la t io n
tra n s ie n t o v e rv o lta g e s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
e q u ip m e n t
a g a in s t
tra n s ie n ts
a t th e
m ains
e x te rn a l
旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 ©
IE C 2 0 1 8
-
3^M -
IEC 60664-1:2007
IEC 62368-1
3.17.1
fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n
3.3.5.3
fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n
i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s w h i c h is
i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s w h i c h is
n e c e s s a r y o n ly fo r th e
n e c e s s a r y o n ly fo r th e
p ro p e r fu n c tio n in g
of
th e e q u ip m e n t
th e e q u ip m e n t
3.17.2
b a sic in s u la tio n
3.3.5.1
b a sic in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n
of
h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rts
w h ic h
in s u la tio n
to
p ro v id e
p ro p e r fu n c tio n in g
b a sic
a
p ro v id e s b a s ic p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k
3.17.3
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n
3.3.5.7
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n
in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d
in a d d i t i o n t o
in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d
b a sic in s u la tio n
sa fe g u a rd f o r
b a s ic in s u la tio n fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n
to p ro v id e
fa u lt
of
safeg uard
in a d d i t i o n t o
s u p p le m e n ta ry
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t
e le c tric s h o c k
3.17.4
d o u b le in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n
3.3.5.2
d o u b le in s u la tio n
c o m p ris in g
b o th
b a s ic
in s u la tio n
b a sic in s u la tio n
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n
c o m p ris in g
a n d s u p p le m e n ta r y in s u la tio n
and
3.17.5
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n
3.3.5.5
re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n
of
p ro v id e s
a
e le c tric
shock
h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rts
d e g re e
of
p ro te c tio n
e q u iv a le n t
to
w h ic h
a g a in s t
d o u b le
s in g le
in s u la tio n
d e g re e
of
s y s te m
p ro te c tio n
e q u iv a le n t to
b o th
th a t
a g a in s t
p ro v id e s
e le c tric
a
shock
d o u b le in s u la tio n
in s u la tio n
3.19.2
ro u tin e te s t
te s t
to
w h ic h
3.3.6.10
ro u tin e te s t
each
s u b je c te d
d u rin g
a s c e rta in
w h e th e r
or
it
in d iv id u a l
a fte r
d e v ic e
is
te s t
m a n u fa c tu re
to
s u b je c te d
d u rin g
or
a s c e rta in
w h e th e r
it
c o m p lie s
w ith
c e rta in
to
w h ic h
each
in d iv id u a l
a fte r
d e v ic e
is
m a n u fa c tu re
to
c o m p lie s
w ith
c e rta in
c rite ria
c rite ria
3.19.3
s a m p lin g te s t
3.3.6.11
s a m p lin g te s t
te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m
te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m
fro m a b a tc h
fro m a b a tc h
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Table W.2 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 61140:2016 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 61140:2016 te rm s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
For consistency throughout the document
the term "safeguard” is used to describe the
device or scheme that provides protection
against an energy source.
3.1.1
b a sic p ro te c tio n
p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k u n d e r fa u ltfre e c o n d itio n s
3.3.11.2
b a sic sa fe g u a rd
sa fe g u a rd t h a t p r o v i d e s p r o t e c t i o n u n d e r
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d u n d e r
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s w h e n e v e r
a n e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r
i n j u r y is p r e s e n t in t h e e q u i p m e n t
3.10.2
s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n
In d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n
a p p lie d
in a d d i t i o n t o
b a s ic in s u la tio n , fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n
The term live p a rt is not used.
3.4
live part
c o n d u c to r o r c o n d u c tiv e
e n e rg iz e d
n e u tra l
PEN
3.3.11.17
s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd
sa fe g u a rd a p p l i e d i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e b a sic
sa fe g u a rd t h a t i s o r b e c o m e s o p e r a t i o n a l in
t h e e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e b a sic sa fe g u a rd
in
n o rm a l
c o n d u c to r,
c o n d u c to r
o p e ra tio n ,
but
or
p a rt in te n d e d
by
PEM
to b e
in c lu d in g
c o n v e n tio n
c o n d u c to r
a
In accordance with the IEC 61140 definition,
ES1, ES2 and ES3 are all live parts
not a
or
PEL
c o n d u c to r
N o te 1 to
e n try:
T h is
concept
does
not
n e c e s s a rily
im p ly a ris k o f e le c tr ic s h o c k .
N o te 2 to e n try :
F o r d e fin itio n s o f P E M
and PEL see
IE V 1 9 5 -0 2 -1 3 a n d 1 9 5 -0 2 -1 4 .
The term hazardous-live-part is not used.
3.5
h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rt
liv e
p a rt th a t,
u n d e r c e rta in
c o n d itio n s ,
can
g iv e a h a rm fu l e le c tric s h o c k
In accordance with the IEC 61140 definition,
an ES3 source is a hazardous-live-part.
N o te 1 to e n try :
In c a s e o f h i g h v o l t a g e , a h a z a r d o u s
v o lta g e
m a y be
p re s e n t on th e s u rfa c e
o f s o lid
i n s u l a t i o n . In s u c h a c a s e t h e s u r f a c e is c o n s i d e r e d t o
be a h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rt.
No equivalent term. See ES1.
3.26
e x tra -lo w -v o lta g e (ELV)
any
v o lta g e
not
e x c e e d in g
th e
re le v a n t
v o l t a g e l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 1 2 0 1
3.26.1
SELV system
an
e le c tric a l
ES1
s y s te m
in
w h ic h
th e
v o lta g e
cannot exceed ELV:
-
u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d
-
under
s in g le -fa u lt
c o n d itio n s ,
e a r t h f a u l t s in o t h e r c i r c u i t s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
ES1
is a v o l t a g e
n o t e x c e e d in g th e
v o lta g e
lim it s p e c ifie d
cu rre n t
not
e x c e e d in g
in
IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1
th e
re le v a n t
l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 0 4 7 9 - 1
in c lu d in g
re le v a n t
-
u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d
-
under
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s
or a
cu rre n t
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
IEC 61140:2016 te rm s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
3.28
lim ite d -c u rre n t-s o u rc e
d e v ic e
s u p p ly in g
ES1
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
in
an
e le c tric c irc u it
-
wi t h
p ro te c tiv e -s e p a ra tio n
fro m
h a za r­
ES1
is a v o l t a g e
n o t e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t
v o lta g e
lim it s p e c ifie d
cu rre n t
not
e x c e e d in g
in
IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1
th e
re le v a n t
or a
cu rre n t
l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 0 4 7 9 - 1
d o u s -liv e -p a rts , a n d
-
that e n s u re s
th a t th e s te a d y
cu rre n t
ch a rg e
and
a re
s ta te
lim ite d
to u c h
to
non-
-
u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d
-
under
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s .
h a z a r d o u s le v e ls , u n d e r n o rm a l a n d fa u lt
c o n d itio n s
5.1.6
L im ita tio n o f ste a d y state to u c h c u rre n t
and charge
L im ita tio n
ch a rg e
o f s te a d y s ta te
s h a ll
p re ve n t
to u c h
p e rso n s
fro m
b e in g
s u b je c te d
to
s ta te
to u c h
cu rre n t and
cu rre n t and
or
v a lu e s
ch a rg e
a n im a ls
of
s te a d y
lia b le
to
be
ES1 current limit is 0,5 mA AC and 2 mA DC
ES2 current limit is 5 mA AC， 25 mA DC
(these
values
are
taken
from
IEC TS 60479-1)
h a z a rd o u s o r p e rc e p tib le .
N o te 1
to
e n try:
For
person s,
th e
fo llo w in g
v a lu e s
(A C v a lu e s fo r fr e q u e n c ie s u p to 1 0 0 H z ) a re g iv e n as
g u id a n c e :
-
A s te a d y s ta te c u rre n t flo w in g b e tw e e n
s im u lta n e o u s ly a c c e s s ib le c o n d u c tiv e p a rts
t h r o u g h a p u r e r e s i s t a n c e o f 2 0 0 0 f2 n o t
e x c e e d in g th e th re s h o ld o f p e rc e p tio n , A C 0 ,5 m A
o r D C 2 m A a re re c o m m e n d e d .
—
V a lu e s n o t e x c e e d in g th e th re s h o ld o f p a in A C
3 ,5 m A o r D C 10 m A m a y b e s p e c ifie d .
3.3.11.12
sa fe g u a rd
N o e q u iv a le n t te rm
p h y s ic a l
p a rt
or
s y s te m
or
in s tru c tio n
s p e c if ic a lly p r o v id e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f in ju ry , o r, fo r fire , to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d
o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire
No
e q u iv a le n t
te rm .
Based
on
d o u b le
in s u la tio n
No
e q u iv a le n t
te rm .
Based
on
re in fo rc e d
in s u la tio n
3.3.11.2
d o u b le sa fe g u a rd
sa fe g u a rd
c o m p ris in g
b o th
a
b a sic
sa fe g u a rd a n d a s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd
3.3.11.12
re in fo rc e d sa fe g u a rd
s i n g l e sa fe g u a rd t h a t
is p r o v i d e s
p ro te c tio n
under
N o e q u iv a le n t te r m . R o u g h ly e q u iv a le n t to a
w a rn in g
-
nor mal o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
-
abnor mal o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
-
si ngl e fa u lt c o n d itio n s .
and
3.3.11.5
in s tru c tio n a l safeg uard
a n in s tru c tio n in v o k in g s p e c ifie d b e h a v io u r
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
- 3 之\4
-
IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 1 :2 0 1 8 ® IE C 2 0 1 8
IEC 61140:2016 te rm s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
3.3.11.7
p re c a u tio n a ry sa fe g u a rd
in s tru c te d pe rso n b e h a v i o u r
N o e q u iv a le n t te rm
to
a v o id
c o n ta c t w ith o r e x p o s u r e to a c la s s 2 e n e r g y
so u rce
based
g iv e n b y a
on
w ith
or
e n e rg y
o r in s tru c tio n s
s k ille d person
3.3.11.14
s k ill sa fe g u a rd
s k ille d pe rso n
N o e q u iv a le n t te rm
s u p e rv is io n
b e h a v io u r
e xp o su re
so u rce
to
a
based
to
a v o id
c la s s 2
on
or
c o n ta c t
c la s s 3
e d u c a tio n
and
e x p e rie n c e
The
te rm
n o rm a l
c o n d itio n
is
used
in
IE C 6 1 1 4 0 , b u t n o t d e fin e d
3.3.7.4
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
m o d e o f o p e ra tio n th a t re p re s e n ts a s c lo s e ly
a s p o s s ib le th e ra n g e o f n o rm a l u s e th a t ca n
re a s o n a b ly be e x p e c te d
3.3.7.1
a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n
N o e q u iv a le n t te rm
te m p o ra ry
o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n
th a t
is
not
a
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n a n d i s n o t a
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n o f t h e e q u i p m e n t
its e lf
The
te rm
s in g le
b u t n o t d e fin e d
f a u l t is u s e d
in
IE C 6 1 1 4 0 ,
3.3.7.9
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n
f a u l t u n d e r no rm al o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n o f
a s i n g l e sa fe g u a rd ( b u t n o t a re in fo rc e d
s a fe g u a rd ) o r o f a s i n g l e c o m p o n e n t o r a
d e v ic e
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table W.3 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60950-1:2005 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 60950-1:2005 te rm s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
1.2.8.8
SELV c irc u it
s e co n d a ry
c irc u it
p ro te c te d
th a t
c o n d itio n s
and
th a t
is
under
s in g le
so
d e s ig n e d
n o rm a l
fa u lt
and
o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s ,
its
5.2.1.1
ES1
ES1 i s a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
w i t h to u c h c u rre n t o r p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h
v o lta g e l e v e l s
v o lta g e s d o n o t e x c e e d a s a fe v a lu e
-
not e x c e e d in g ES1
lim its u n d e r
•
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
•
a b n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g
and
c o n d itio n s ,
and
•
s in g le
fa u lt
c o n d itio n s
or
of
a
in s u la tio n
not
c o m p o n e n t,
d e v ic e
s e rv in g a s a
sa fe g u a rd ;
and
ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r s in g le fa u lt
c o n d itio n s o f a b a sic sa fe g u a rd o r o f a
s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd .
n o t e x c e e d in g
1.2.8.11
TNV c irc u it
See detailed TNV classes for comparison.
c i r c u i t t h a t is in t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d t o w h i c h
t h e a c c e s s i b l e a r e a o f c o n t a c t is l i m i t e d a n d
t h a t i s s o d e s i g n e d a n d p r o t e c t e d t h a t ，u n d e r
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
c o n d itio n s
and
s in g le
fa u lt
c o n d itio n s (s e e 1 .4 .1 4 o f IE C 6 0 9 5 0 - 1 :2 0 0 5 ) ,
th e
v o lta g e s
do
not
exceed
s p e c ifie d
lim it
v a lu e s
A
TNV
c irc u it
s e co n d a ry
c irc u it
is
c o n s id e re d
in
th e
to
m e a n in g
be
of
a
th is
d o c u m e n t.
1.2.8.12
TNV-1 c irc u it
T N V c irc u it
-
w h o s e n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s d o n o t
ES
1
on
T a b le 13,
w h ic h
ID
tra n s ie n ts
n u m b e rs
1,
a c c o rd in g
2
and
3
to
a re
p o s s ib le
e x c e e d th e lim its fo r a n S E L V c ir c u it
u n d e r n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d
-
O n w h ic h o v e rv o lta g e s fro m
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s a n d c a b le
d is trib u tio n s y s te m s a re p o s s ib le
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
NOTE
T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l
to T N V c irc u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .
旧C
IEC 60950-1:2005 term s
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
1.2.8.13
TNV-2 c irc u it
ES2
T N V c irc u it
ES2
-
whose
th e
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s e x c e e d
lim its
fo r
an
SELV
c irc u it
a
c la s s
2
e le c tric a l
e n e rg y
so u rce
w h e re
under
-
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d
-
is
th e
w h i c h is n o t s u b j e c t t o o v e r v o l t a g e s f r o m
p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e a n d
to u c h c u rre n t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t s f o r
bot h th e
E S 1 ; and
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s
-
under
•
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,
•
a b norm a l
o p e ra tin g
and
c o n d itio n s ,
and
•
s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ,
p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e o r
to u c h c u rre n t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t
e ith e r th e
th e
fo r
ES2_
NOTE
T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l
to T N V c ir c u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .
1.2.8.14
TNV-3 c irc u it
ES
T N V c irc u it
T a b le 13,
2
on
w h ic h
ID
tra n s ie n ts
n u m b e rs
1,
a c c o rd in g
2
and
3
to
a re
p o s s ib le
-
whose
th e
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s e x c e e d
lim its
fo r
an
SELV
c irc u it
under
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d
-
on
w h ic h
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l
to T N V c irc u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .
o v e rv o lta g e s
fro m
n e tw o rk s
c a b le
and
NOTE
d is tr ib u tio n s y s te m s a re p o s s ib le
1.2.13.6
USER
3.3.S.2
o rd in a ry person
a n y p e rs o n , o th e r th a n a s e rv ic e p e rs o n
p e rso n
an
who
in s tru c te d person
The term user in this document is the same
as the term operator and the two terms can
be interchanged
1.2.13.7
o p e ra to r
s e e u se r
See 3.3.8.2
(1 .2 .1 3 .6 o f IE C 6 0 9 5 0 - 1 :2 0 0 5 )
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
is n e i t h e r a
s k ille d pe rso n
nor
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
IEC 60950-1:2005 term s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
1.2.13.8
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d
in te n d e d
fo r
e q u ip m e n t
3.3.1.1
e xte rn a l c irc u it
tra n s m is s io n
c o m m u n ic a tio n
th a t m a y
be
lo c a te d
m e d iu m
b e tw e e n
in
e le c tric a l
c irc u it
th a t
e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t
is
e x te rn a l
to
th e
m ains
s e p a ra te
b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :
N o te
1 to e n try :
An
external circuit
is c l a s s i f i e d
as
ES1, ES2 or ES3, and PS1, PS2, or PS3.
-
t he
m a in s
s y s te m
fo r
s u p p ly ,
tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l
p o w e r,
if
used
as
a
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ;
-
c a b l e d is trib u tio n s y s te m s ;
-
SELV
c irc u its
c o n n e c tin g
u n its
of
in fo rm a tio n te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t
N o te 1 to e n try :
T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l
c h a ra c te ris tic s ,
a
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk
is
not
its e lf d e fin e d a s b e in g e ith e r a n S E L V c irc u it o r a T N V
c irc u it. O n ly
c la s s ifie d .
N o te 2
to
th e
c irc u its
e n try:
A
in
th e
e q u ip m e n t
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
are
n e tw o rk
so
may
be:
一
p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d :
s u b je c t
to
a tm o s p h e ric
tra n s ie n t
d is c h a rg e s
o v e rv o lta g e s
and
fa u lts
due
to
in
power
d is trib u tio n s y s te m s :
一
s u b je c t to lo n g itu d in a l
in d u c e d
fro m
n e a rb y
(c o m m o n m o d e ) v o lta g e s
power
lin e s
o r e le c tric
tr a c t io n lin e s .
N o te 3
to
e n try:
E x a m p le s
of
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s a re :
一
a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk :
-
a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk :
一
an in te g ra te d S e r v ic e s D ig ita l N e tw o rk (IS D N );
-
a
p riv a te
n e tw o rk
w ith
e le c tric a l
in te rfa c e
c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .
None
3.3.8.1
in s tru c te d person
p e rs o n in s tru c te d o r s u p e rv is e d
p e rso n
as
to
e n e rg y
so u rce s
re s p o n s ib ly u s e e q u ip m e n t
p re c a u tio n a ry sa fe g u a rd s
th o s e e n e rg y s o u rc e s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
by a
and
s k ille d
who
can
sa fe g u a rd s
and
w ith
re sp e ct
to
旧C
IEC 60950-1:2005 term s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
1.2.13.5
s e rv ic e person
p e rso n
and
h a v in g
a p p ro p ria te
e x p e rie n c e
h a z a rd s
to
exposed
w h ic h
in
m e a su re s
te c h n ic a l tra in in g
n e ce ssa ry
th a t
m in im iz e
be
a w a re
of
m ay
be
ta s k
and
of
ris k s
to
p e rso n
p e rfo rm in g
to
to
a
th e
th a t
p e rs o n or o th e r p e rs o n s
1.2.13.14
cab le d is trib u tio n system
tra n s m is s io n
u s in g
c a b le ,
m a in ly
v id e o
a n d /o r
tra n s m is s io n
b e tw e e n
of
s e p a ra te
m e d iu m
in te n d e d
a u d io
b u ild in g s
or
fo r
t he
m a in s
tra n s m is s io n
p o w e r,
if
s y s te m
and
used
b e tw e e n
fo r
d is trib u tio n
as
a
s u p p ly ,
of
e le c tric
c o m m u n ic a tio n
-
t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e tw o rk s ;
-
SELV
c o n n e c tin g
u n its
of
in fo rm a tio n te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t
N o te 1
to
e n try:
E x a m p le s
Of
c a b le
d is trib u tio n
s y s te m s a re :
一
lo c a l a re a c a b le n e tw o rk s , c o m m u n ity a n te n n a
te le v is io n s y s te m s a nd m a s te r a n te n n a te le v is io n
s y s te m s p ro v id in g v id e o a n d a u d io s ig n a l
d is trib u tio n ;
-
o u td o o r a n te n n a s in c lu d in g s a te llite d is h e s ,
re c e iv in g a n te n n a s , a n d o th e r s im ila r d e v ic e s .
N o te 2
to
e n try:
C a b le
d is trib u tio n
s y s te m s
may
be
s u b je c te d to g re a te r tra n s ie n ts th a n te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
w ith
e x p e rie n c e
h a z a rd s
re d u ce
to
and
th e
re le v a n t
e n a b le
to
h im
ta k e
e d u c a tio n
o r h e r to
a p p ro p ria te
lik e lih o o d
of
ris k s
or
id e n tify
a c tio n s
to
in ju ry
to
of
th e m s e lv e s a n d o th e rs
e le c tric a l
c irc u it
th a t
e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t
N o te 1 to
e n try :
The
i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ;
c irc u its
p e rso n
is
e x te rn a l
to
th e
m ains
s ig n a ls
o u td o o r a n te n n a s a n d b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :
-
3.3.8.3
s k ille d person
3.3.1.1
e xte rn a l c irc u it
m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d
c o a x ia l
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
re le v a n t
external circuits
are
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎
旧C
2018
Table W.4 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60728-11:2016 and I EC 62368-1
IEC 60728-11:2016 te rm s
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
3.1.4
3.3.1.1
cab le n e tw o rk s < fo r te le v is io n s ig n a ls ， e xte rn a l c irc u it
so u n d s ig n a ls and in te ra c tiv e s e rv ic e s 〉
e le c tric a l
c irc u it
re g io n a l
and
n e tw o rk s ,
e x te n d e d
te le v is io n
d is trib u tio n
and
lo c a l
in d iv id u a l
b ro a d b a n d
s a te llite
and
n e tw o rk s
s a te llite
c a b le
1 to e n tr y : T h e s e
or
and
s y s te m s
te rre s tria l
n e tw o rk s a n d s y s te m s ca n be
u s e d in d o w n s t r e a m a n d u p s t r e a m d i r e c t i o n s .
3.1.5
CATV n e tw o rk o r
te le v is io n n e tw o rk
c o m m u n ity
antenna
re g io n a l a n d lo c a l b r o a d b a n d c a b le n e tw o r k s
d e s ig n e d
s ig n a ls
to
as
p ro v id e
w e ll
sound
as
s ig n a ls
and
te le v is io n
fo r
in te ra c tiv e
s e r v ic e s to a r e g io n a l o r lo c a l a re a
N o te
1
to
e n try:
O rig in a lly
d e fin e d
as
C o m m u n ity
A n te n n a T e le v is io n n e tw o rk .
3.1.31
MATV
n e tw o rk
or
te le v is io n n e tw o rk
e x te n d e d
te rre s tria l
n e tw o rk s
sound
or
and
te rre s tria l
m a ste r
te le v is io n
s y s te m s
te le v is io n
re c e iv in g
s ig n a ls
a n te n n a
antenna
d is trib u tio n
d e s ig n e d
to
p ro v id e
re c e iv e d
to
by
h o u s e h o ld s
in o n e o r m o r e b u i l d i n g s
N o te 1 to e n try : O rig in a lly d e fin e d a s m a s te r a n te n n a
te le v is io n n e tw o rk .
N o te
2 to
e n try :
T h is
k in d
o f n e tw o rk
or s y s te m
can
p o s s ib ly be c o m b in e d w ith a s a te llite a n te n n a fo r th e
a d d itio n a l r e c e p t io n o f T V a n d / o r r a d io s ig n a ls v ia
s a te llite n e tw o rk s .
N o te
3 to
a ls o
ca rry
e n try :
T h is
o th e r
s y s te m s
(e .g .
d ire c tio n .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
k in d
s ig n a ls
M oCA
or
o f n e tw o rk
fo r
W iF i)
o r s y s te m
s p e c ia l
in
th e
e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t
is
e x te rn a l
to
th e
m ains
te rre s tria l
te le v is io n re c e iv in g s y s te m s
N o te
th a t
can
tra n s m is s io n
re tu rn
p a th
N o te 1 to
e n try:
The
i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
re le v a n t
external circuits
a re
旧C
■EC 60728-11:2016 te rm s
3.1.44
SMATV
n e tw o rk
o r s a te llite
antenna te le v is io n n e tw o rk
e x te n d e d
d is trib u tio n
n e tw o rk s
d e s ig n e d
to
sound
p ro v id e
s ig n a ls
re c e iv e d
a n te n n a
to
by
or
and
s a te llite
h o u s e h o ld s
in
IEC 62368-1 te rm s
m aste r
s y s te m s
te le v is io n
re c e iv in g
one
or
m o re
b u ild in g s
N o te
1 to e n try : O rig in a lly d e fin e d
a s s a te llite
m a s te r
a n te n n a te le v is io n n e tw o rk
N o te 2 to e n try : T h is k in d o f n e tw o r k o r s y s te m ca n
p o s s ib ly be c o m b in e d w ith te rre s tria l a n te n n a s fo r th e
a d d itio n a l re c e p tio n
te rre s tria l n e tw o rk s .
N o te
3 to
e n try :
a ls o
ca rry
s y s te m s or
s y s te m s
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
TV
k in d
a n d /o r
ra d io
o f n e tw o rk
s ig n a ls
or s y s te m
v ia
can
c o n tro l
s ig n a ls
fo r
s a te llite
s w itc h e d
o th e r s ig n a ls fo r s p e c ia l tra n s m is s io n
(e .g .
d ire c tio n .
T h is
of
M oCA
or
W iF i)
in
th e
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
re tu rn
p a th
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table W.5 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 62151:2000 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 62151:2000 terms
IEC 62368-1 terms
3.1.3
telecommunication network
a
m e ta llic a lly
m e d iu m
b e tw e e n
3.3.1.1
external circuit
te rm in a te d
in te n d e d
tra n s m is s io n
fo r
c o m m u n ic a tio n
e q u ip m e n ts th a t m a y b e lo c a te d
e le c tric a l
c irc u it
th a t
e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t
is
e x te rn a l
to
th e
mains
in
s e p a r a te b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :
N o te 1 to
e n try:
The
re le v a n t
external circuits
are
i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
-
t he
m a in s
s y s te m s
fo r
s u p p ly ,
tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l
p o w e r,
if
used
as
a
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ;
一
te le v is io n
d is trib u tio n
s y s te m s
u s in g
c a b le
N o te 1 to e n try :
T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , a t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e t w o r K is n o t
its e lf d e fin e d a s b e in g a T N V c irc u it. O n ly th e c irc u its
in e q u i p m e n t a r e s o c l a s s i f i e d .
N o te 2 to e n try :
一
一
A te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk m a y be
p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d ;
s u b je c t
to
a tm o s p h e ric
tra n s ie n t
d is c h a rg e s
o v e rv o lta g e s
and
fa u lts
due
to
in
power
d is trib u tio n s y s te m s ;
-
s u b je c t to p e r m a n e n t lo n g itu d in a l (c o m m o n m o d e )
v o lta g e s
in d u c e d
fro m
n e a rb y
power
lin e s
or
e le c tr ic tr a c tio n lin e s .
N o te 3
to
e n try :
E x a m p le s
of
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s are
-
a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk ;
一
a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk ;
-
a n IS D N n e tw o rk ;
-
a
p riv a te
n e tw o rk
w ith
e le c tric a l
in te rfa c e
c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .
3.5.4
TNV-0 circuit
a T N V c irc u it:
-
whose
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g
exceed
a
o p e ra tin g
s a fe
v o lta g e s
v a lu e
c o n d itio n s
under
and
under
do
not
n o rm a l
s in g le
fa u lt c o n d itio n s ;
-
w h i c h is n o t s u b j e c t t o o v e r v o l t a g e s f r o m
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s
N o te 1 to e n try :
norm al
o p e ra tin g
s p e c i f i e d in 4 . 1 .
s in g le
fa u lt
-
not e x c e e d in g ES1
lim its u n d e r
•
normal operating conditions,
•
abnormal
operating
and
conditions,
and
T h e lim itin g v a lu e s o f v o lta g e
and
5.2.1.1
ES1
ES1 i s a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e
w i t h touch current o r prospective touch
voltage l e v e l s
c o n d itio n s
under
are
•
single
fault
c o m p o n e n t， d e v ic e
s e rv in g a s a
conditions
or
of
a
in s u la tio n
not
safeguard;
and
ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r single fault
conditions o f a basic safeguard o r o f a
supplementary safeguard.
n o t e x c e e d in g
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
IEC 62151:2000 terms
IEC 62368-1 terms
3.5.3
TNV circuit
a
c irc u it
5.2.1.2
ES2
w h ic h
is
in
th e
th e
lim ite d
(e x c e p t fo r a T N V -0
so
a c c e s s ib le
e q u ip m e n t
w h ic h
is
d e s ig n e d
and
a re a
of
and
to
ES2
c o n ta c t
is
w h e re
c irc u it) a n d
p ro te c te d
th a t,
is
a
c la s s
under
-
ES1; and
v a lu e s
-
s e co n d a ry
c irc u it
is
c o n s id e re d
in
th e
to
m e a n in g
be
of
e n try:
•
normal operating conditions,
th is
•
abnormal
operating
and
conditions,
and
The
v o lta g e
re la tio n s h ip s
T N V C I R C U I T S a r e s h o w n in t a b l e 1.
b e tw e e n
•
single fault conditions.
prospective touch voltage o r
touch current d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t
e ith e r th e
ES2.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
so u rce
under
a
d o c u m e n t.
N o te 1 to
e n e rg y
prospective touch voltage a n d
touch current e x c e e d t h e l i m i t s f o r
th e v o lta g e s d o n o t e x c e e d s p e c ifie d lim itin g
c irc u it
e le c tric a l
both the
th e
TNV
2
th a t
n o rm a l o p e ra tin g a n d s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ,
A
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
th e
fo r
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table W.6 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60065:2014 and IEC 62368-1
IEC 60065:2014 terms
IEC 62368-1 terms
2.2.12
professional apparatus
a p p a ra tu s
fo r
use
3.3.3.8
professional equipment
in t r a d e s ,
in d u s trie s a n d w h ic h
p ro fe s s io n s
or
is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a le
to th e g e n e r a l p u b lic
N o te 1 to e n try :
e q u ip m e n t fo r u s e
in t r a d e s ,
in d u s trie s a n d w h ic h
p ro fe s s io n s
or
is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a le
to th e g e n e r a l p u b lic
T h e d e s ig n a tio n s h o u ld be s p e c ifie d
by th e m a n u fa c tu re r.
2.4.3
directly connected to the mains
No equivalent term.
e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n
In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition,
an ES3 source would be considered directly
connected to the mains.
w ith th e
m a i n s in s u c h
a w a y th a t a c o n n e c t io n to e ith e r p o le o f th e
m a in s
causes
in
th a t
c o n n e c tio n
a
p e r m a n e n t c u r r e n t e q u a l to o r g r e a t e r th a n 9
A , p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s in t h e a p p a r a t u s
b e in g
n o t s h o rt-c irc u ite d
N o te 1 to e n try :
A
cu rren t of 9 A
is
chosen
as
th e
m in im u m b re a k in g c u rre n t o f a 6 A fu s e .
2.4.4
conductively connected to the mains
No equivalent term.
e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n
In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition,
an ES3 or ES2 source could be considered
conductively connected to the mains.
a
way
th a t
re s is ta n c e
of 2
a
w ith th e
m a i n s in s u c h
c o n n e c tio n
000
Q
to
e ith e r
th ro u g h
p o le
a
o f th e
m a i n s c a u s e s in t h a t r e s i s t a n c e a p e r m a n e n t
cu rre n t
g re a te r
th a n
0 ,7
mA
(p e a k),
a p p a r a tu s n o t b e in g c o n n e c te d to e a rth
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
th e
旧C
IEC 60065:2014 terms
IEC 62368-1 terms
2.4.7
telecommunication network
m e ta llic a lly -te rm in a te d
in te n d e d
fo r
a p p a ra tu s
3.3.1.1
external circuit
tra n s m is s io n
m e d iu m
c o m m u n ic a tio n
th a t
m ay
be
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
lo c a te d
b e tw e e n
in
e le c tric a l
c irc u it
th a t
e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t
is
e x te rn a l
to
th e
mains
s e p a ra te
b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :
N o te 1 to
e n try:
The
re le v a n t
external circuits
a re
i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .
-
t he
m a in s
s y s te m s
fo r
s u p p ly ,
tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l
p o w e r,
if
used
as
a
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ;
-
television
-
d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s te m s u s in g c a b le
N o te 1 to e n tr y :
T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk
i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , a t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e t w o r k is n o t
its e lf d e fin e d as b e in g e ith e r a T N V c irc u it. O n ly th e
c i r c u i t s in t h e a p p a r a t u s a r e s o c l a s s i f i e d .
N o te 2
to
e n try:
A
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk
may
be:
一
p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d :
-
s u b je c t
to
tra n s ie n t
o v e rv o lta g e s
a tm o s p h e ric
d is c h a rg e s
d is trib u tio n s y s te m s :
-
s u b je c t
to
lo n g itu d in a l
in d u c e d
fro m
tr a c t io n lin e s .
N o te 3
to
e n try :
n ea rb y
and
fa u lts
(com m o n
power
E x a m p le s
due
of
in
m ode)
lin e s
or
to
power
v o lta g e s
e le c tric
te le c o m m u n ic a tio n
n e tw o rk s a re :
一
a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk ;
一
a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk ;
-
an IS D N n e tw o rk ;
一
a
p riv a te
n e tw o rk
w ith
e le c tric a l
c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .
in te rfa c e
2.6.10
hazardous live
The term hazardous-live is not used.
e le c tric a l c o n d itio n o f an o b je c t fro m w h ic h a
In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition ，
an ES3 source is hazardous live.
h a z a rd o u s
to u c h
cu rre n t
(e le c tric
shock)
c o u ld b e d ra w n (s e e 9 .1 .1 )
2.8.6
instructed person
p e rso n
3.3.8.1
instructed person
a d e q u a te ly a d v is e d
by
p e rso n
in s tru c te d
s k ille d p e r s o n s to e n a b le h im o r h e r to a v o id
p e rso n
as
d a n g e rs
re s p o n s ib ly
and
to
e le c tric ity m a y c re a te
o r s u p e rv is e d
p re ve n t
ris k s
w h ic h
and
to
o r s u p e rv is e d
e n e rg y
so u rce s
b y a s k ille d
and
who
can
equipment safeguards
precautionary safeguards w i t h r e s p e c t
uses
to th o s e e n e rg y s o u rc e s
N o te 1 to e n try :
S u p e r v i s e d , a s u s e d in t h e d e f i n i t i o n ,
m e a n s h a v in g th e d ire c tio n
p e rfo rm a n c e o f o th e rs .
and
o v e rs ig h t
[S O U R C E : IE V 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 2 , m o d ifie d ]
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
of
th e
旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 ©
IE C 2 0 1 8
-
3t) 5
-
IEC 60065:2014 terms
IEC 62368-1 terms
2.8.11
potential ignition source
p o s s ib le
fa u lt
w h ic h
can
s ta rt
a
o p e n -c irc u it
v o lta g e
in te rru p tio n
or
fa u lty
c o n ta c t
V
(p e a k)
AC
v a lu e
of
50
m e a su re d
or
fire
if
th e
a cro ss
an
exceeds
DC
and
m e a su re d
RMS
cu rre n t
under
th e
n o rm a l
o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s e x c e e d s 15 V A .
Such
a
fa u lty
e le c tric a l
c o n ta c t
c o n n e c tio n
or
in te rru p tio n
in c lu d e s
m a y o c c u r in c o n d u c t i v e
th o s e
p a tte rn s on
be
used
to
An
p revent
e le c tro n ic
such
p o te n tia l ig n itio n s o u rc e .
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
a
p ro te c tio n
fa u lt
fro m
a rc
m ay
occur
due
to
th e
o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r o r c o n ta c t
N o te
1
to
e n try:
in
an
w h ic h
p rin te d
c irc u it m a y
b e c o m in g
a
An
e le c tro n ic
p ro te c tio n
a d d itio n a l c o n s tru c tio n a l m e a s u re s
p re v e n t a lo c a tio n fro m b e c o m in g an
N o te 2 to e n try :
b o a rd s.
N o te 1 to e n try :
an
a
p r o d u c t o f th e p e a k v a lu e o f th is v o lta g e a n d
th e
3.3.9.2
arcing PIS
PIS w h e r e
may
be
c irc u it
or
used
to
arcing PIS.
A f a u l t y c o n t a c t o r i n t e r r u p t i o n in a n
e le c tric c o n n e c tio n
t h a t m a y o c c u r in c o n d u c t i v e
p a t t e r n s o n p r i n t e d b o a r d s is c o n s i d e r e d to b e w i t h i n
th e s c o p e o f th is d e fin itio n .
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex X
(normative)
Alternative method for determining clearances for insulation in circuits
connected to an AC mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)
For an A C
-
if t h e
mains
peak
n o t e x c e e d in g 4 2 0 V p e a k (3 0 0 V R M S ):
working voltage
o f th e
s u p p ly v o lta g e , th e a lte rn a te m in im u m
-
if t h e
peak
v o lta g e , th e
does
not exceed
clearance
working voltage e x c e e d s
a l t e r n a t e m i n i m u m clearance i s t h e
o f th e
clearance
•
th e
•
th e a p p ro p ria te a d d itio n a l
th e
peak
v a lu e
AC
mains
mains
s u p p ly
o f th e
is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e X . 1 ;
th e
peak
v a lu e
of
th e
AC
s u m o f th e fo llo w in g tw o v a lu e s :
fro m T a b le X .1 , a n d
clearance
fro m T a b le X .2 .
NOTE
A clearance o b t a i n e d b y t h e u s e o f T a b l e X.1 l i e s b e t w e e n t h e v a l u e s r e q u i r e d f o r h o m o g e n e o u s a n d
i n h o m o g e n e o u s f i e l d s . A s a r e s u l t , it m a y n o t p a s s t h e a p p r o p r i a t e e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t if t h e f ie ld is s u b s t a n t i a l l y
in h o m o g e n e o u s .
Table X.1 - Alternative minimum clearances for insulation in circuits
connected to ac mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)
C learances in mm
Mains transient voltage
1 500 V a
Voltage up to and
including
2 500 V a
Pollution degree
V
1 and 2
3
1 and 2
3
B/S
R
B/S
R
B/S
R
B/S
R
71
1 ,0
2 ,0
1 ,3
2 ,6
2 ,0
4 ,0
2 ,0
4 ,0
210
1 ,0
2 ,0
1 ,3
2 ,6
2 ,0
4 ,0
2 ,0
4 ,0
420
B /S 2 ,0
If t h e p e a k o f t h e working voltage e x c e e d s t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e A C
p e rm itte d b e tw e e n th e n e a re s t tw o p o in ts , th e c a lc u la te d m in im u m
R 4 ,0
mains s u p p l y v o l t a g e , l i n e a r
clearance b e i n g r o u n d e d
i n t e r p o l a t i o n is
u p to th e n e x t
h i g h e r 0,1 m m i n c r e m e n t .
a
T h e re la tio n s h ip b e tw e e n
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
mains transient voltage
and
AC mains
s u p p l y v o l t a g e i s g i v e n in T a b l e
12.
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Table X.2 - Additional clearances for insulation in circuits connected
to ac mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS)
C learances in mm
Mains transient voltage
1 500 V a
2 500 V a
Voltage
Voltage
up to and
including
up to and including
Basic or
supplementary
insulation
V
Basic or
supplementary
insulation
Reinforced
insulation
420
〇 , 〇
0 ,0
,2
493
0 ,1
0 ,2
Reinforced
insulation
V
Pollution
degrees
1 and 2
Pollution
degree 3
Pollution
degrees
1, 2 and 3
210
210
〇 , 〇
298
294
〇
386
379
0 ,2
0 ,4
567
0 ,2
0 ,4
474
463
0 ,3
〇
,6
640
0 ,3
0 ,6
562
547
〇
,4
〇
,8
713
0 ,4
0 ,8
650
632
0 ,5
1,0
787
0 ,5
1,0
738
715
〇
,6
1 ,2
860
〇
,6
1,2
826
800
〇
J
1,4
933
〇
,7
1,4
914
885
0 ,8
1 ,6
1 006
0 ,8
1,6
1 002
970
0 ,9
1,8
1 080
〇
,9
1,8
1 090
1 055
1,0
2 ,0
1 153
1,〇
2 ,0
1 178
1 140
1,1
2 ,2
1 226
1,1
2 ,2
1 266
1 225
1,2
2 ,4
1 300
1 ,2
2 ,4
1 354
1 310
1,3
2 ,6
1 374
1,3
2 ,6
〇 , 〇
,1
〇
F o r v o lta g e s a b o v e th e p e a k v a lu e o f th e
F o r v o lta g e s w ith in
th e
p e a k v a lu e
working voltage
o f th e
g i v e n in t h e t a b l e , l i n e a r e x t r a p o l a t i o n i s p e r m i t t e d .
working voltage
g iv e n
b e tw e e n th e n e a re s t tw o p o in ts , th e c a lc u la te d m in im u m a d d itio n a l
in t h e t a b le ,
clearance
lin e a r in te rp o la tio n
is p e r m i t t e d
b e in g ro u n d e d up to th e n e x t h ig h e r
0 f1 m m in c re m e n t.
a
T h e re la tio n s h ip b e tw e e n
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
mains transient voltage
and AC
mains
s u p p l y v o l t a g e i s g i v e n in T a b l e 1 2 .
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
Annex Y
(normative)
Construction requirements for outdoor enclosures
Y.1
General
P ro te c tio n
a g a in s t
a p p lic a tio n
of a
c o rro s io n
p ro te c tiv e
s h a ll
c o a tin g
be
p ro v id e d
a p p lie d
to
by
th e
th e
use
exposed
of
s u ita b le
s u rfa c e ,
m a te ria ls
ta k in g
in to
or
by
th e
a c c o u n t th e
in te n d e d c o n d itio n s o f u s e .
P a rts , s u c h
s h a ll
a s d ia ls o r c o n n e c to r s , th a t s e r v e a s a fu n c tio n a l p a rt o f a n
c o m p ly
w ith
th e
sam e
e n v iro n m e n ta l
p ro te c tio n
re q u ire m e n ts
outdoor enclosure
a s f o r t h e outdoor
enclosure.
NOTE 1
A s p e c ts
a ffe c tin g
s a fe ty th a t in flu e n c e
th e
in te g rity
o f th e
outdoor enclosure
th ro u g h
th e
life o f th e
p ro d u c t in c lu d e :
一
c o n tin u e d p ro te c tio n a g a in s t a c c e s s to c la s s 2 a n d c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s , in c lu d in g a fte r m e c h a n ic a l s tre n g th
te s ts ;
一
c o n tin u e d p ro te c tio n a g a in s t in g re s s o f d u s t a n d w a te r; a n d
-
c o n tin u e d p ro v is io n o f e a rth c o n tin u ity .
An
outdoor enclosure
c a u s e c o rro s io n
p a rt
of
an
s h a ll n o t b e u s e d to c a r r y c u r r e n t d u r in g n o r m a l o p e r a t io n if t h is c o u ld
th a t w o u ld
im p a ir s a fe ty . T h is d o e s n o t p re c lu d e
outdoor enclosure
to
protective earthing
fo r
th e
c o n n e c tio n
p u rp o se
o f a c o n d u c tiv e
of
c a rry in g
fa u lt
c u rre n ts .
NOTE 2
W h e re
T h e a c tio n o f a c u rre n t flo w in g th ro u g h a jo in t ca n in c re a s e c o rro s io n u n d e r w e t c o n d itio n s .
a c o n d u c tiv e
p a rt o f an
outdoor enclosure
is c o n n e c t e d
to
protective earthing
fo r
th e p u r p o s e o f c a r r y in g fa u lt c u r r e n ts , th e r e s u ltin g c o n n e c tio n s h a ll m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f
5 .6 , a fte r th e a p p r o p r ia te w e a t h e r c o n d itio n in g te s ts , s e e C la u s e Y .3 .
Compliance is checked by inspection and， if necessary， by the tests of 5.6 after the tests of
Clause Y.3.
Y.2
Resistance to UV radiation
N o n -m e ta llic p a rts o f a n
outdoor enclosure
r e q u ir e d fo r c o m p lia n c e w ith th is d o c u m e n t s h a ll
b e s u ffic ie n tly r e s is ta n t to d e g r a d a tio n b y U V ra d ia tio n .
Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of available data regarding the
UV resistance characteristics o f the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re material and any associated
protective coating. If such data is not available， Annex C applies.
Y.3
Resistance to corrosion
Y.3.1
General
M e ta llic p a rts o f
outdoor enclosures,
w ith o r w it h o u t p r o t e c t iv e c o a t in g s , s h a ll b e r e s is t a n t to
th e e ffe c ts o f w a te r-b o rn e c o n ta m in a n ts .
Compliance is checked by either:
-
inspection and by evaluation o f data provided by the manufacturer; or
-
the tests and criteria as specified in Y.3.2 through Y.3.5; or
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
the applicable performance level (A1， A2 or A3) of IEC 61587-1 •
Y.3.2
Test apparatus
T h e a p p a r a tu s fo r th e s a lt s p r a y te s t s h a ll c o n s is t o f a te s t c h a m b e r a n d s p r a y in g d e v ic e s a s
d e s c r i b e d in I E C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 1 1 .
T h e a p p a r a t u s f o r t h e t e s t in a w a t e r - s a t u r a t e d s u l p h u r d i o x i d e a t m o s p h e r e s h a l l c o n s i s t o f a n
in e rt, h e r m e tic a lly s e a le d , c h a m b e r c o n ta in in g a w a te r - s a t u r a t e d
s u lp h u r d io x id e a tm o s p h e re
in w h i c h t h e t e s t s p e c i m e n s a n d t h e i r s u p p o r t s a r e h e l d . T h e c h a m b e r s h a l l b e a s d e s c r i b e d in
IS O 3 2 3 1 .
Y.3.3
Water - saturated sulphur dioxide atmosphere
If the test chamber has an internal volume o f 300 I ± 30 I the water-saturated sulphur dioxide
atmosphere is created by the introduction of 0,2 I of sulphur dioxide with a concentration of
0,067 % by volume into the closed test chamber. The sulphur dioxide can either be introduced
from a gas cylinder or by creating a specific reaction within the chamber. For test chambers
having a different internal volume the quantity of sulphur dioxide is varied accordingly.
Sulphur dioxide can be formed inside the test apparatus by treating sodium pyrosulphite
(Na2S20 5) with a relatively strong acidf sulphamic acid (H S 03NH2).
NOTE 1
T h e m e t h o d c o n s i s t s o f d is s o l v in g e x c e s s s o d iu m p y r o s u l p h i t e in w a t e r , g iv in g th e r e a c t io n :
N a 2S 2 〇 5 + H 20 ^
2 NaHS〇 3
A s t o i c h i o m e t r i c q u a n t i t y o f s u l p h a m i c a c i d is t h e n a d d e d g i v i n g t h e r e a c t i o n :
N a H S 〇 3 + H S 〇 3N H 2 ^
N a S 〇 3N H 2 + H 20 + S 0 2
T h e r e s u l t i n g o v e r a l l r e a c t i o n is :
N a 2S 2 〇 5 + 2 H S 〇 3 N H 2 ^
T o o b ta in
2 N a S 〇 3N H 2 + H 2
〇
+ 2 S〇 2
1 I o f S 〇 2 u n d e r n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s o f 0 0C t e m p e r a t u r e a n d
1 , 0 1 3 3 x 1 0 5 P a ，a i r p r e s s u r e , 4 , 2 4 g
s o d iu m p y r o s u lp h ite a n d 4 ,3 3 g s u lp h a m ic a c id a re n e e d e d .
NOTE 2
S u l p h a m i c a c i d is t h e o n l y s o l i d m i n e r a l a c i d t h a t i s e a s y t o c o n s e r v e .
NOTE 3
T h e a b o v e d e s c r i p t i o n is t a k e n f r o m 8 . 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 1 a n d 8 . 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 2 o f I E C 6 1 4 3 9 - 5 : 2 0 1 4 .
Y.3.4
Test procedure
The test shall consist of two identical and successive 12 day periods.
Each 12 day period consists of test a) followed by test b):
test a)
168 h of exposure to the salt spray atmosphere. The concentration of the saline
solution forming the salt spray atmosphere is 5 % 土 1 % by weight and the
temperature of the test chamber is maintained at 35 0C 土 2 0C.
test b)
5 exposure cycles each consisting of an 8 h exposure to a water-saturated sulphur
dioxide-rich atmosphere (see Y.3.3)f during which the temperature of the test
chamber is maintained at 40 °C ± ^ °C , followed by 16 h at rest with the test
chamber door open.
After each 12 day period, the test specimens are washed with demineralized water.
Alternatively, the test procedures as described in the following standards may be used to
show compliance:
-
I SO 21207 Method B; or
-
I SO 14993; or
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
-
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
any other equivalent standard.
Y.3.5
Compliance criteria
Compliance is checked by visual inspection. The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re shall not show rust or
oxidation of the protective coating, cracking or other deterioration that will jeopardize the
safety aspects as follows:
-
continued protection against access to class 2 and class 3 energy sources, including after
mechanical strength tests; and
-
continued protection against ingress of dust and water; and
-
continued provision of earth continuity.
However, surface corrosion of the protective coating is disregarded.
Y.4
G askets
Y.4.1
W hen
General
g a s k e ts
a re
used
as th e
m e th o d
p ro v id in g
p ro te c tio n
a g a in s t th e
in g re s s
o f p o te n tia l
c o n ta m in a n ts , Y .4 .2 th r o u g h Y . 4 . 6 s h a ll a p p ly a s a p p ro p r ia te .
NOTE
In C a n a d a a n d t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s ,
enclosure
t y p e s a r e s p e c i f i e d in t h e C a n a d i a n E l e c t r i c a l C o d e a n d t h e
U .S . N a tio n a l E le c tric a l C o d e .
J o in ts
f o r a ll d e v ic e s
s u b je c te d
to s p la s h in g
enclosure,
A
gasket
o p e n in g s
in to
th e
e q u ip m e n t c a v ity
of an
o r s e e p a g e o f o il, a s w e ll a s a n y d o o r o r c o v e r
outdoor enclosure
f o r s u c h a n outdoor
s h a l l i n c l u d e a g a s k e t in t h e f u ll l e n g t h o f t h e j o i n t .
of
e la s to m e ric
c lo s in g
e la s to m e ric
or
th e rm o p la s tic
m a t e r i a l t h a t is p r o v i d e d
on
an
m a te ria l,
or
a
c o m p o s itio n
outdoor enclosure
gasket
s u b je c te d
u tiliz in g
an
to w a te r o r d u s t,
s h a ll m e e t r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by applying the relevant tests o f Y.4.2 through
Y.4.6.
Y.4.2
Gasket tests
T h e r e l e v a n t t e s t s s p e c i f i e d in Y . 4 . 3 o r Y . 4 . 4 , d e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e o f g a s k e t m a t e r i a l u s e d ,
a re a p p lic a b le to g a s k e ts e m p lo y e d o n a n
outdoor enclosure
s u b je c t e d to w a t e r o r d u s t. T h e
a d d i t i o n a l t e s t o f Y . 4 . 5 is a p p l i c a b l e t o g a s k e t s e m p l o y e d o n a n
to
o il o r c o o la n t . A s e t o f t h r e e
s p e c im e n s
o f th e
outdoor enclosure
g a s k e t m a te r ia l s h a ll
be
s u b je c te d
s u b je c te d
to th e
re le v a n t te s ts .
Y.4.3
Tensile strength and elongation tests
This test is applicable to gaskets， which can stretch (such as O-rings). Gasket material shall
be o f such quality that samples subjected to a temperature of 69 °C to 70 °C in circulating air
for 168 h have a tensile strength o f not less than 75 % and an elongation of not less than
60 % of values determined for unaged samples. At the conclusion of the temperature
conditioning, there shall be no visible deterioration, deformation, melting, or cracking of the
material and the material shall not harden as determined by normal hand flexing.
As an alternative， the tensile strength and elongation tests as given in ISO 37， ISO 1798,
ASTM D412 or ASTM D3574 may be used.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Y.4.4
Compression test
This test is applicable to gaskets with closed cell construction. The set of specimens o f gasket
material shall be tested to the requirements of a)9 b) and c) (see Figure Y.1). On completion of
each test, the specimens shall not show signs o f deterioration or cracks that can be seen with
normal or corrected vision.
a) A cylindrical weight sufficient to apply 69 kPa shall be placed on the middle portion of
each specimen for a period of 2 h. At the end of that time the weight shall be removed and
the specimen allowed to rest at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C for 30 min. The
thickness of the gasket shall then be determined and compared with a measurement
obtained before the application of the weight. The compression set shall not exceed 50 %
of the initial thickness of the specimen.
b) Following the test specified in a)9 the same specimens shall be suspended in an air oven
at a temperature o f 70° C for a period of 5 days. The specimens shall then be tested for
compliance with a)9 approximately 24 h after removal from the oven.
c) Following the test specified in b), the same specimens shall be cooled for a period of 24 h
to the minimum temperature specified by the manufacturer or - 3 3 ° C if no minimum
ambient temperature is specified and then subjected to an impact from a hammer of
1,35 kg mass falling from a height o f 150 mm upon removal from the cold chamber. The
hammer head shall be steel, 28,6 mm in diameter and have a flat striking surface,
25,4 mm in diameter with slightly rounded edges. The specimens being tested shall be
placed on short lengths of 50 mm by 100 mm minimum wooden pieces (clear spruce)
when being impacted. Following the impact the specimens shall be examined for evidence
of cracking or other adverse effects. The test shall be continued and the specimens
impacted every 24 h for two more days. The specimens shall then be removed from the
cold chamber, allowed to rest at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C for approximately
24 h, and then again tested for compliance with a).
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018
D im ensions in m illim etres
G a lv a n iz e d o r p a in te d s te e l b a c k in g plate
225 b y 5 0 by 3 ,5 m m to 1,5 m m
( g a u g e No. 10 to g a u g e No. 16, M S G )
J
T e s t s p e c i m e n a t t a c h e d to b a c k in g plate
by s u b m it t o r usin g p r o p o s e d a d h e s iv e a n d
p ro p o s e d p ro d u c tio n m e th o d .
T e s t p ie c e 2 5 b y 2 0 0
o i
OO
S
CN
CNJ
CNJ
▼
C y lin d ric a l w e ig h t, a p p r o x im a t e ly
100 m m d ia m e t e r a n d 18 kg in m a s s
▼
25
50
ie c
Figure Y.1 - Gasket test
Y.4.5
Oil resistance
A gasket
p ro v id e d o n an
outdoor enclosure
s u b je c t e d to o il o r c o o l a n t s h a ll b e o il r e s is t a n t .
Compliance is checked by inspection and by the following oil immersion test.
Gasket material shall not swell more than 25 % or shrink more than 1 % as a result of
immersion in oil for 70 h at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C. Specifications are provided in
ISO 1817:2015 or ASTM D471-98.
NOTE
In C a n a d a a n d U n i t e d S t a t e s , I R M I m m e r s i o n O i l N o . 9 0 3 is a c c e p t e d .
Y.4.6
Securing means
A gasket
s h a ll b e s e c u r e d w it h a d h e s i v e o r b y m e c h a n i c a l m e a n s . T h e g a s k e t a n d its s e c u r in g
m e a n s s h a l l n o t b e d a m a g e d w h e n t h e j o i n t is o p e n e d .
Where a gasket is secured by adhesive alone without mechanical securement， and the
specific part(s) associated with the gasket may be subjected to opening or similar movement
on a periodic basis, the gasket and adhesive shall be subjected to the testing in
Clause P.4.Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer's data. If data is
not available， then the tests according to Clause P.4 are conducted， as applicable.
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018
Y.5
Protection of equipment within an outdoor enclosure
Y.5.1
General
E q u ip m e n t w ith in
an
outdoor enclosure
s h a ll h a v e
a d e q u a te
p ro te c tio n
fro m
th e
e ffe c ts o f
m o is tu re a n d e x c e s s iv e d u s t.
S e e T a b le Y .1
fo r e x a m p le s fo r p ro v is io n s o f
pollution degree,
pollution degree
e n v ir o n m e n ts . T o e s ta b lis h
a
b o th c o n s id e r a tio n s s h a ll b e m e t.
Table Y.1 - Examples of the provision of pollution degree environments
Method of achievement
Dust
(Y.5.5)
Pollution degree
Pollution degree
3
Method of achievement
Moisture
(Y.5.1 to Y.5.3)
D e fa u lt
T he use o f an
enclosure
m e e tin g
IP X 4 o r th e re q u ire m e n ts o f Y .5 .3
r e l a t i n g t o t h e i n g r e s s o f w a t e r is
c o n s i d e r e d t o p r o v i d e a pollution
degree 3 e n v i r o n m e n t w i t h i n t h e
outdoor enclosure.
R e d u c tio n o f
degree
3 to
pollution
pollution degree
pollution degree
pollution degree 2 c a n b e
R e d u c tio n o f
2
3 to
pollution degree
pollution degree 2
R e d u c tio n o f th e
e n v ir o n m e n t to
a c c o m p lis h e d b y e ith e r:
c a n b e a c c o m p lis h e d b y e ith e r:
-
-
p ro vi d i n g c o n tin u o u s
3
p r o v i d i n g c o n tin u o u s e n e rg iz a tio n
e n e rg iz a tio n o f th e e n c lo s e d
o f th e e n c lo s e d e q u ip m e n t; or
e q u ip m e n t; o r
-
p r o v i d i n g s e p a ra te c lim a te
p ro v i d i n g s e p a ra te c lim a te
c o n d itio n in g w h ic h p re v e n ts
c o n d itio n in g w h ic h p re v e n ts
c o n d e n s a t i o n w i t h i n t h e outdoor
c o n d e n s a tio n w ith in th e
equipment o r outdoor
equipment
enclosure;
enclosure;
or
outdoor
-
I P5X
一
IP 6 X
-
Y. 5.5.2
-
Y . 5 . 5.3
or
or
th e u s e o f an
IP X 4 .
一
outdoor
enclosure
m e e tin g
e q u iv a le n t (fo r, e x a m p le N E M A ).
R e d u c tio n to
pollution
S e e 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 , T e s t fo r
degree 1
pollution
degree
1 e n v iro n m e n t a nd fo r an
in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d .
C o n tro l o f th e e n v ir o n m e n t a t th e
i n s u l a t i o n s u r f a c e t o pollution
degree 1 c a n b e a c c o m p l i s h e d f o r
e x a m p le by, e n c a p s u la tio n , p o ttin g o r
c o a tin g .
Compliance is checked by inspection o f the construction, available data and, if necessary, by
the tests in Y.5.2 to Y.5.5.
Y.5.2
The
Protection from moisture
outdoor enclosure
s h a ll p r o v id e a d e q u a te p r o te c tio n fr o m
th e e ffe c t o f m o is tu re o n th e
e n c lo s e d e q u ip m e n t.
N O T E 1 T h i s d o e s n o t p r e c l u d e outdoor enclosure o r
v o l u m e s , e a c h p r o v i d i n g a d i f f e r e n t pollution degree.
NOTE 2
p o llu tio n
outdoor equipment
b e in g c o n s tru c te d
w ith s e g m e n te d
F o r c o n s id e r a tio n o f th e e ffe c ts o f th e p re s e n c e o f c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n , a s o p p o s e d to n o n -c o n d u c tiv e
w h i c h c a n b e c o m e c o n d u c t i v e o n l y d u e t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f m o i s t u r e , s e e t h e r e l e v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s in
IE C 6 0 5 2 9 .
W h e re
n e c e s s a ry , th e
outdoor enclosure
a c c u m u la t io n o f m o is t u r e d u e to ;
Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission
s h a ll
be
p ro v id e d
w ith
d ra in
h o le s to
c o n tro l th e
旧C
62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018
-
e n t r a n c e o f w a te r th ro u g h o p e n in g s ; a n d
-
c o n d e n s a t i o n , w h e n t h is is l ik e l y t o o c c u r ( f o r e x a m p l e , k e e p i n g t h e e q u i p m e n t e n e r g i z e d
o r s e p a r a t e l y h e a t i n g t h e e q u i p m e n t is c o n s i d e r e d t o k e e p it f r e e o f c o n d e n s a t i o n ) .
The
p ro v is io n
of
d ra in
h o le s
and
th e ir
lo c a tio n
s h a ll
be
ta k e n
in to
c o n s id e ra tio n
when
d e t e r m i n i n g t h e IP r a tin g .
Compliance is checked by inspection and, if necessary, by the relevant tests o f IEC 60529 or
Y.5.3.
Prior to testing， the equipment shall be mounted， so far as is reasonably practicable,
according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. If fans or other means for ventilation
are provided， which could affect the ingress of water， the test shall be conducted with the
ventilation means both on and off unless it is evident that one o f the modes of operation will
produce the more onerous result.
At the conclusion o f the test the following conditions shall exist:
-
For
outdoor enclos